





1 t\ 



«lj* :, 





(lass 



Pkzm 



Book -JO&T 



PRESENTED BY 



jjiii. 



I 









I 

"4 



IK it.*** 1 ** 1 ' 



I 

THE PRINCIPLES ajy'jf 

" ■--""' -*■" "" " * 

OF H 7i 



GREER GRAMMAR 



TVITH 



COMPLETE INDEXES, 



FOR 



SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 



BY 



PETER BULLIONS, D. D., 

AUJTHOR OF THE " SERIES OF ENGLISH, LATIN. AND GREEK GRAMMARS^ AND SCHOOL 



CLASSICS. 






REVISED BY 

A! C. KENDPJCK, D. D., 

PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN THE UNIVERSITY OF ROCHESTER. 



NEW YORK: 
SHELDON AND COMPANY, 

498 k 500 BROADWAY. 
1868. 



-f^' 



■^ 



% 



\ 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1853, by 

PETER BULLIONS, B. D., 

In the Clerk's OQice of the District Court of the United States for the Northern 

District of New York. 

Entered, according to act of Congress, in the year 1SG6, by 

EXECUTORS OE P. BULLIONS, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Northern 

District of New York. 



T? 



BULLIONS' NEW SERIES OF GRAM3L 



ETC, 



ENGLISH C-EAMMAB, 90 cents. 

COMMON SCHOOL GRAMMAR, 50 cents. 

ANALYTICAL AND PRACTICAL ENGLISH GRAMMAR, $1. 

EXERCISES IN ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 25 cents. 

LATIN LESSONS. $1. BULLIONS 1 LATIN GRAMMAR, $1.50. 

AND MORRIS'S LATIN LESSONS. $1. 

AND MORRIS'S LATIN GRAMMAR, $1.50. 

LATIN READER, $1.50. BULLIONS 1 SAa,LUST, $1.50. 

EXERCISES IN LATIN COMPOSITION, .$1.50. 

KEY TO LATIN EXERCISES. SO cents. 

C^ESAR"S COMMENTARIES, $1.50. 

CICEliO'S ORATIONS, $1.50. 

LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, $4.50.* 

GREEK LESSONS, $1. . - 

GREEK GRAMMAR, $1.75. 

AND KENDRICK'S GREEK GRAMMAR, $2. 

GREEK READER, $2.25. COOPER'S VIRGIL, $3.* 
LONGS CLASSICAL ATLAS, $4.50.* BAIRD'S CLASSICAL MANUAL, SM)c.* 
KALTSOHMXDT'S LAT.-EN'G. AND ENG.-LAT. DICTIONARY, $2.50.* 



BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS 1 
B HELTONS' 
BULLIONS' 
SPENCER'S 
BULLIONS 1 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS 1 
BULLIONS 1 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS' 
BULLIONS 1 



THE NORMAL MATHEMATICAL SERIES, 



STODDARD'S 
STODDARD'S 
STODDARD'S 



STODDARD'S 



JUVENILE MENTAL ARITHMETIC, 25 cents. 

INTELLECTUAL ARITHMETIC, 50 cents. 

RUDIMENTS OB 1 ARITHMETIC. 50 cents. 

NEW PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, $1. 
SCHUYLER'S HIGHER ARITHMETIC, $1.25; 
STODDARD & HENKLE'S ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA, $1.25. 
STODDARD & HENKLE'S UNIVERSITY ALGEBRA, $2. 
METHOD OF TEACHING and KEY TO INTELLECTUAL ARITIL, 50c* 
KEY TO STODDARD'S NEW PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, $1.00.* 
KEY TO S. & H.'S ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA, $1.25.* 
KEY TO S. & H.'S UNIVERSITY ALGEBRA, $2.* 



BOLMAR'3 LEVIZAC'S FRENCH GRAMMAR, $1.50. 
BOLMAR'S FRENCH VERBS, $1.* PERRIN'S FABLES, $1.25.* 
COLLOQUIAL PHRASES, 75 cents. TELEMAQUE, $1.25.* 

KEETEL/S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING FRENCH, $1.75. 
TEISSIER'S ELEMENTS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, $1.75. 
HOOKER'S HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY, $1.75. FIRST BOOK, 80 cts. 

WHATELY'3 ELEM. OF LOGIC, $1.75.* ELEM. OF RHETORIC, $1.75.* 

THOMPSON'S LAWS OF THOUGHT. $1.75.* 
WAYLANDS INTELLECTUAL PHILOSOPHY, $1.75.* 
BROCKLESBY'S ASTRONOMY, $1.75. METEOROLOGY, $1.25.* 

:RSCHEL*S OUTLINES OF ASTRONOMY. $2.50.* 
PALMER'S BOCK-KEEPING, $1. ALDEN'S SCIENCE OF GOV., $1.50. 

COMSTOCK'S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, $L75. CHEMISTRY, $1.75. 
SCIIMITZ'S ANCIENT HISTORY. $1.75* ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY, $1.75.* 
SHAW'S MANUAL ' OF ENGLISH LITERATURE, $2.00.* 

We furnish to Teachers for examination, post-paid by mail, a copy of any of the 
above books not having a * annexed, at half price. Those marked with a * we 
send on receipt of the prices annexed. 



Gift 



Publishers, New York. 



ifadge and Mrs. Isaac R. Hit* 
July 3, 1933 



PREFACE. 



The Greek Grammar of Dr. Bullions has been and still is in 
extensive use in many sections of our country. Its great sim- 
plicity of plan and of statement, its omission of superfluous 
matter, and its expression of the chief facts of the language m 
distinct and definite rules, have made it a favorite with multi- 
tudes of teachers and students of Greek, who have preferred it 
to larger and more comprehensive, but less convenient text- 
books. Its excellencies, however, were not unaccompanied by 
some serious defects, and the editor has deemed that lie might 
serve the interests of Greek learning by complying with the 
request of the proprietor and publishers that he would prepare 
a revised edition of it. In doing this, it has not been his pur- 
pose to rewrite the Grammar of Dr. Bullions, or change radi- 
cally its character, but simply make such changes as should 
render it an entirely safe and sufficient guide to the large class 
of students who derive from it their elementary acquaintance 
with Greek. 

It is proper to state briefly what he has attempted in these 
changes : — 

1. He has supplied, here and there, such new matte?' as was 
most necessary to giving it adequate completeness. 



IV PREFACE. 

2. lie has endeavored to correct its errors, which were by 
no means few and unimportant, and, without detracting* from 
its simplicity and plainness of statement, to put upon it the 

stamp of scientific accuracy. 

a. * 

3. He has revised careful! v the rules for the Third Declen- 

sion and the Verb, has increased the number and improved the 

arrangement of 'paradigms in the former, and conformed the 

treatment of both to those laws of derivation from the stem or 
radix which have commended themselves to the best recent 

Greek grammarians. 

4. The article on the Prepositions he has entirely re- 
written, and has treated them, though briefly, vet he trusts 
with satisfactory clearness. 

5. The Particles, those extremely delicate and difficult parts 
of the language, he has carefully attended to, both in the 
explanations, and in the rendering of the examples under the 
rules, in which Dr. Bullions had frequently neglected, them. 

6. The Syntax has been very considerably altered ; more 
fulness and exactness have been given to its statements, and 
its examples have been somewhat increased in number, and 
often retranslated. The Editor commends this point to spe- 
cial attention. In rendering a fragment of a sentence selected 
in illustration of a rule, not only should the leading words, but 
every particle introduced, be accurately rendered. 

7. Two or three pages of Practical Exercises have been 
added, for the purpose of exemplifying and inculcating careful 
habits of verbal analysis. Their number might, perhaps, have 
been advantageously increased. In these examples, and else- 
where, the meaning of the tenses, the mode of rendering the 
different participles, the exact import of particles and prepo- 



PREFACE. y 

sitions, and the effect of the position of words in a sentence, 
have been repeatedly suggested to the student. They are 
among the vital points of Greek scholarship. 

8. The utility of the work will be found to be much 
enhanced by a complete index of subjects. 

With these brief explanations, the Editor submits his work 
to the public. He is well aware that much which, mi^ht have 
been done has been left undone ; but he also believes that 
this Grammar, as revised, while by no means embracing all 
that is contained in the comprehensive and excellent grammars 
of Kiihner and Hadley, will be found to contain all that is 
essential to the elementarv Greek student, and will leave him 
nothing to unlearn as he advances to the higher stages of 
attainment in this noble language. . It is proper to add, that 
it is in no spirit of disrespect to the memory of an excellent 
Christian scholar and teacher, who, full of years and of labors, 
has been called to his reward, that these alterations have been 
made in his work, but rather in the assurance that he regard- 
ed the interests of the cause more than any selfish reputation, 
and would rejoice in every thing that should improve in its 
character, and increase in its usefulness, the product of his 
conscientious toil. 

We add, without further preface, a brief outline of the 
origin and dialects of the Greek language : — 



The Greek Language axd its Dialects. 

1. Greece was called anciently (as at present), by its in 
habitants, Hellas (^E/Adq), and the people Hellenes ^'Ekkyveq), 
and the language belonged to the great Indo-European, or 



VI PREFACE. 

Aryan family of languages, being closely allied to the Sanscrit, 
and in some respects an older, in others a younger sister of 
the Latin. 

2. Its extant records appear mainly in four different forms 
or dialects, called ^Eolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic ; besides 
which the earlier Greek poetry displays a considerable number 
of forms, which, probably originating under the license of 
poetry, constitute an Epic ov poetic dialect. 

3. The ^Eolic, which contains some of the most primitive 
forms of the language, was spoken in the ^Eolic colonies of 
Asia Minor and the adjacent islands, aspecially Lesbos, and 
was extensively used in certain forms of Lyric poetry. It was 
doubtless spoken, with modifications, in some parts of conti- 
nental Greece. 

4. The Doric dialect, distinguished by its broad a, was 
spoken among the Doric Asiatic settlements, and by the 
Doric tribes that ruled in the Peloponnesus, and so lono- dis- 
puted with Athens the headship of Greece. 

5. The Ionic dialect, soft and flowing; in its confluence of 

* < 

uncontracted vowels, was spoken among the Ionic tribes of 
Asia Minor, and doubtless the Ionic population of the mother 
country. It appears in its earlier form in the poems of 
Homer, and in its later form in the works of Herodotus and 
Hippocrates. The Homeric poems are also largely tinged 
with elements more strictly poetic. In Attica, whose people 
were of Ionic descent, the language gradually ripened and 
strengthened, under the influences of Athenian life and the 
delicacies of Athenian taste, into the less soft and flowing, 
but more compact and dignified, and hardly less graceful and 
harmonious Attic. 



PEEFACE. VU 

6. The Attic dialect, spoken in Attica, as the result of the 
gradual modification of the Ionic, became the chief literary 
language of Greece, and the main vehicle of its history, philos- 
ophy, eloquence, and poetry ; although Heroic poetry retained 
to the last its Ionic and early Epic tinge, and Lyrical poetry 
was so naturalized in the ^Eolic, and later and more esne- 
cially in the Doric dialect, that even the lyrical portions of 
the Attic dramas were pervaded by a very decided Doric 
element. 

7. We may add, that after the conquests of Alexander 
had somewhat broken the unity and weakened the intensity 
of the Hellenic national life, and occasioned a considerable 
fusion of its different races, there sprang up a somewhat 
modified, though not radically different, form of the lan- 
guage, which is known as the common dialect (fj xooij 
dcdlexroz), and which slightly impairs the purity of style of 
the later writers, who, however, still followed the earlier Greek 
models. This is sometimes called Hellenistic (in distinction 
from Hellenic), and is found, with a large intermixture of 
Hebraisms, in the Septuaoint and the New Testament. 






A TABLE, 

Showing the numbers of the paragraphs in this edition of the Grammar 
which correspond to the sections and paragraphs of former editions. 
By the help of this table, the matters referred to in the notes on the 
classical series may be readily found in this book. Where the sub- 
divisions of a paragraph are the same in this as in former editions, 
they have been omitted in this table. The letter n. stands for note; 
obs. r for observation; exc, for exception. B. stands for Bullions's Greek 
Grammar; B. & K., for Bullions and Kendrick's Greek Grammar. 



B. 




B. &K. 


B. 






B. &K. 


B. 






B.&K 


1 


— 


1 


14 




— 


26,27 


45, 


10 


— 


65 


2 


— 


2 


15 




— 


23 . 




11 


— 


66 








16, 


17 


— 


29 


46,1 


— 


67 


§ 1. 






18 




— 


30 




13 


— 


68 






19 




— 


31 




14 


— 


69 


3, 1 


— 


3 


20 




— 


34 




15 


— 


70 


2 


— 


4 


21 




— 


35 




16 


— 


71 


3 


— 


5 


22 




— 


36 


47,1 


— 


72 








23 




— 


37 




18 . 


— 


73 


§ 2. 






24 




— 


38 




19 


— 


74 






25 




— 


39 


48 




— 


75 


4, 1 


— 


6 


26 




— 


40 










2 


— 


7 


27, 


28,29 


— 


32 


§ 7. 








3 


— 


8 


30 




— 


41 








4 


— 


9 


31 




— 


42 


49 




— 


76 








32 




— 


43 


50 




— 


77 


§3. 






33 




— 


44 










5 


— 


10 


84 

35 




— 


45 
46 


§ 8. 








6 


— 


11 

-1 Ck 


36 




. — 


47 


51 




_ 


78 


7 


"" — 


12 


37 




— 


43 




1 


— 


79 


o * 






38 




— 


50 




2 


— 


80 


§ 4. 






39 




— 


51 




3 


— 


81 


8, * 




13 


40 




— 


52 










2 


__ 


14 


41 




— 


53 


§ 9. 








3 


— 


15 










52 






82 


4 


■ — 


10 


§ 6. 










1 




83 


5 


- 


IT 

18 


42 




— 


54 




2 


— 


54 


i 


— 


20 


43, 


1 
2 


■"■"■ 


55 
56 


§ 10 


• 














3 


— 


57 


53 




, , 


85 


§ 5. 








4 


* 


58 




1 


_ 


86 




_ 


21 




exc. 
5 


_ 


59 
60 


54 


2 


— 


87 
88 


10 


— 


22 


44, 


6 


— 


61 










11 


— ~~ 


23 
24 




7 
8 


— 


62 
63 


§ 11 


• 






I'd 


— ' 


25 


45, 


9 


— 


64 


55 




— 


89 



X 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING LUMBERS. 



B. 

56 
5T 
58 
59 
60 
61 

§ 12. 

62 
63 
64 
65 
66 
67 
68 

§13. 

69, 1 
2 
3 
4 

§ 14. 

70 

71 

72, 1 
2 
3 

73 

74 



§ 15. 

75, 1 
2 
76 

§ 16, 

77, 1 
2 
3 

78 



§ 17. 

79 

§ 18. 

so 
1 

2 
3 

§13. 

81 



S2 

§ 20. 

83 



B. &K. 

90 
91 
92 
93 
94 
95 



96 

97 

98 

99 

100 

101 

102 



103 
104 
105 
106 



107 
10S 
109 
110 
111 
112 
113 



114 
115 
116 



117 
118 
119 
120 



121 



122 
123 
124 
125 



126 
127 
128 
129 



— 130 



B. 

84 
1 
2 

85, 1 
2 

§ 21. 

86 

87 
88 

§ 22. 

89 



90 
91 



23. 

92 

93 
94 



rule I. 
rule II. 



95 



§ 24. 
$6, 2 

§ 25. 



B. &K. 

131 
132 
133 
134 
135 



136' 

137 

138 



139 
140 
141 
142 
143 



144 

145 
146 
147 
148 
149 
150 
151 
152 



— 160, 161 



99, 4 


4 


— 162 

— 163 


§ 26. 






100 




— 164 



§ 27. 



101 


— 165 


102, E. 1 


— 166 


K. 2 


— 167 


E.8 


— 168 



]2S. 

103 

104,11.1 .exc. 
R. 3 
It. 4 



169 
170 
174 
175 



B. 

106, E. 1 
E. 2 
107 

§ 30. 

10S 

§ 31. 

109 
111 

§ 32. 

112 
113, 1 

2 

3 

§ 33. 

114 

§ 34. 

115 

§ 35. 



B. &K. 

• 178 
179 

• 180-4 



1S5-6 



116 



I. 

11. 
III. 
IV. 
V. 
VI., 1 



187 
188 



189 
190 
191 
192 



193 



— 194 



— 195 

— 196 

— 197 

— 198 

— 199 

— 200 

— 201 



2— 202 
TIL, 1— 203 

2— 204 
VIII. — 205 



§ 29. 

105 



§ 36. 

117 
118 

§ 37. 

119 
120 



206 
207 



— 177 



— 208 

— 209 

1 — 210 

2 — 211 

121 — 212 

122 — 213 

123 — 214 

124 — 215 

125 — 216 

126 — 217 

127 — 218 
exc — 219 

12S — 220 

129 — 221 

130 — 222 

131 — 223 

132 — 224 

133 — 225 

134 — 226 







TABLE OF CORRESPONDING 


NUMBERS. 


B. 




B. & K. . 


B. 


B. &K. 


B. 


B. & 


§ 38. 






146 
147 


— 271 

— 272 


§ 55. 


- 


135 




— 227 


§ 46. 




169 

170, 2 
3 


— 313 

— 314 

— 815 


§ 39. 






143 


— 273 


4 


— 316 


136, 1 




— 223 


149 


— 274 








(1) 


— 220 


150 


— 275 


§ 56. 






(-) 


— 280 


151 


— 276 








v / 

(3) 


— 231 


152 


— 277 


171 


— 317 




(4) 


— 232 






1 


— 318 


2 


(5) 


— 233 

— 234 


§47. 




2 
3 


— 319 

— 320 




(1) 


— 235 


153 


— 273 








(2) 


— 236 


154, 1 


— 279 


§ 57. 






(3) 


— 237 


2 


— 2S0 








\ / 

(4) 


— 233 


155 


— 234 


172 


— 321 


3 




— 239 


156 


— 2>5 






4 




— 240 






§ 58. 




5 


(1) 


— 241 

— 242 


§48. 




173 


— 322 




\ / 




157 


— 2S6 


1 


— 323 


A A i% 






15S, 1 


— 2^7 


2 


— 324 


§ 40. 




. 


2 


— 233 


3 


- 325 


137, 1 




— 243 


3 


— 239 


4 


— 326 


2 




— 244 


159, 1 


— 290 


5 


— 327 


o 
O 




— 245 


2 


— 291 


174 


— 323 


4 




— 246 


3 


— 292 


175 


— 329 


5 




— 247 


4 


— 293 






6 




— 243 


§ 49. 




§ 59. 

176, 1 


— 330 


§ 41. 






160 


— 294 


2 


QOI 


133 




— 249 










1 
2 




— 250 

— 251 


§ 50. 




§ 60. 




3 




— 252 


160 


— 295 


177 


— 332 


4 




— 253 






173 


— 333 


5 
6 




— 254 

— 255 


§ 51. 




179 

130, 1 


— 834 

— 335 








161 


— 296 


2 


— 336 


§ 42. 






1 

o 

u 


— 297 

— 293 


3 


— 38T 


139 




— 256 


162, 1 


— 299 


§ 61. 




140, 1 




— 257 


2 


— 300 




2 




— 253 


3 


— 301 


181 


— 333 


3 




— 259 


4 


— 302 


1 


— 339 


4 




— 260 


5 


— 303 


2 


— 340 


141 




— 261 










§ 43. 






§ 52. 




§ 62. 




142 




— 262 


163 


— 304 


132 

1 


— 341 

— 342 


§ 44. 






§ 53. 




2 
3 


— 343 

— 344 


143 




— 263 


164 


— 305 


4 


— 345 


1 




— 264 


1 


— 30& 






2 

Q 
O 

4 




— 265 

— 266 

— 267 


2 
3 
165 


— 807 

— 303 

— 309 


§ 63. 

133 


— 846 


5 




— 26S 


1$6 


— 310 


1 

2 


— 847 

— 343 


§45. 






§ 54. 




3 
4 


— 349 

— 350 


144 




— 269 


16T 


— 311 


5 


— 351 


145 




— 270 


16S 


— 312 


6 


— 352 



XI 



Xll 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING NUMBERS. 



B. 


B. &K. 


B. 


B. &K. 


B. 


B. &K. 


§64. 




§ 73. 




§81. 




184 


— 353 


194 
1 


— 394 

— 395 


>205 
206 


— 445 

— 446 


§ 65. 




2 


— 396 


208 


— 451 


185 


— 354 


3 

4 


— 397 

— 398 


1 

2 


— 451 (1) 

— 451 (2) 


1 


— 355 


5 


— 399 




2 


— 356 


6 


— 400 






3 


— 357 


§ 74. 




§ 82. 




§ 66. 








209, 1 


— 454 






195 


— 401 


2 


— 455 


186 


— 35S 


1 


— 402 


3 


— 456 


1 


— 359 


2 


— 403 


exc. 


— 457 


2 


— 360 


3 


— 404 


210, obs. 1 


— 45S 


3 


— 361 






211 


— 459, 460 






§ 75. 




211,3 


— 467 


§67. 




196 


— 405 


213 


— 468 


187 


— 362 


197 


— 406 






1 

2 


— 363 

— 364 


1 

2 


— 407 

— 403 


§86. , 




3 


— 365 


3 


— 409 


217 


— 503 


4 


— 366 


4 


— 410 


218 
I 


— 503 

— 503 


§ 68. 




§ 76. 




2 


— 507 rem. 7 


188 


— 367 


198 


— 411-2 






1 
2 


— 368 

— 369 


rein. 
I. 


— 413 

— 414 


§87. 








II. 


— 415 


220, 1 


— 473-4 


§ 69. 




ILL 


— 416 




— 477 






IV. 


— 417 


3 


— 477 


189, 1 


— 370 


V. 


— 418 


4 


— 477 


2 


— 371 


VI. 


— 419 


5 


— 476 






VII. 


— 420 


- 




§ 70. 




M 


J— 421 










3 


— 422 


§ 88. 




190 


— 372 










§ 71. 




§ 77. 




221, 1 

2 


— 473 

— 4S0 






199, 1 


— 423-5 


3 


— 479 


191 


— 373 


3 


— 426 


4 


— 480, 432, 483 


1 


— 374 










2 
3 


— 375 

— 376 


§ 78. 




§ 89. 




192, 1 


— 377 


200 


— 42S 






2 


— 378 


2 


— 429 


222, 1 


— 4S5 


3 


— 379 


4 


— 430 


2 


— 490 


4 


— 330 


5 


— 431 


3 


— 490 


5 


— 3S1 


6 


— 432 


4 


— 491 


6 


— 3S2 


7 


— 433 






7 


— 383 










§ 72. 




§ 79. 




§90. 

224, 1 


— 4 C 9 


193 


— 384 


201 


— 434 


3 


— 495 rem. 


1 


— 385 






5 


— 481 


2 
3 


— 3S6 

— 3S7 


§ 80. 




6 


— 49S 

— 499 


4 


— 338 


202 • 


— 435 






5 


— 389 


203 


— 436 






6 


— 390 


204, 4 


— 438 


§91. 




7 
8 


— 391 

— 392 


5 
6 


— 439, 440 

— 442 


225, 1 


— 502 


9 


— 393 


7 


— 444 


3 


— 50S-9 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING NUMBERS. 



Xlll 



B. 


B. & K. 


B. 




B. & K. 


B. 


B. & 


225. 4 


— 510 


§98. 








§ 103. 




2lQ 


— 51 i 


251 




— 555-0 


275 


— 605 


5 


— 512 




1 


— 557 




1 


— 600 


227 


— 518 




2 


— 55 S 




2 


— 607 


228 


— 514,519 




3 


— 559 




3 


— 008 


7 


— 515. 520 


252 




— 500 




4 


— 009 


S 


— 516-7 


253 

254, 


1 


— 561 

— 502 




5 


— 610 


§92. 






2 
3 
4 


— 503 

— 564 

— 565 




§ 104. 

276. 1 


— 611 


229 


— 52 \ 










2 


— 612 


280 


— 524 


§ 99. 








3 


— 613 


281 


— 525 


255 
256 




- 566 

— 567 




§ 105. 








257 




— 503 




277, 1 


— 014 


§ 93. 












2 

273 


— 015 

— 616 


232, 1 


— 520 


§ 100. 






279 


— 617 


obs. 1 


— 542-3 


253 




— 569 




§ 108. 








§ 101 








230 


— 618 


§ 84. 












281 


— 619 






259 




— 570 




232 


— 620 


285, B. 1 


— 521,539 


200 




— 571- 


2 


2-3 


— 621 






201 




— 573 




284 


— 622 






202 




— 574 




285 


— 623 


§ 95. 




203 




— 575 




286 


— 624 




204, 


0) 


— 570 








23G, 1 
2 
3 


— 580 

~ 544 (1) 

— 544 (2) 




(2) 

(3) 

(4) 


— 573 

— 579 

— 5S0 




§ 107. 

287 


— 625 


4 


- 544 (3) 




(5) 


— 531 




2SS 


— 626 






(6) 


— 682 




239 


— 627 








CO 


— 5S3 




290 


— 628 






205, 


(V 


— 534 




291 


— 629 


§ 98. 

233 


— 530 


200 


b 

c 


— 535 

— 586 

— 587 




§ 108. 




239, 1 


— 530 rem. 1. 


267 




— 5S3 




292 


— 630 


7 


— 531 (1) 




a 


— 589 




293 


— 631 


O 


— 531 (2) 




l> 


— 590 










— 581 1 3. 4) 

— 581 (7) 


263 
209 




— 591 

— 592 




§ 109. 




240 


— 582 


270 




— 593 




294, 1 


— 632 


241 


— 532 exc. 




(1) 


— 594 


- 


2 


— 633 








(2) 


— 595 




3 


— 634 








m 


— 596 




4 


— 635 








(4) 


— 597 




5 


— 636 


§97. 






(?) 


— 593 




6 


— 637 






271 




— 599 




(1) 


— 633 


244 


— 545 


272 




— 600 




V / 

m 

7 


— 639 


1 


— 547 


272, 


obs. 5 


— 600, 


obs. 3 


— 640 


2 


— 543 




obs. 6 


— 


obs. 4 


295, S 


— 041 


Q 
O 


— 551 




obs. 7 


— 


obs. 5 


9 


— 042 


exc. 


— 552 




obs. 8 


— 


obs. 6 








— 549 (3) 

— 550 




obs. 9 


— • 


obs. 7 


§ 110. 




4 

245 


— 553 

— 553 rem. 


§ 102. 






296 

297, 1 


— 643 

— 044 


246-7 
24S 


554 

— 554.2) 


273, 


1 

2 


— 601 

— 602 




2 . 
3 


— 645 

— 646 


249 


— 554 | 1 ) 


274, 


I. 


— 603 




4 


— 647 


250 


— 554 (4) 


II. 


— 604 




1 5 


— 648 



XIV 



TABLE 



OF 



COKXlESrONDING NUMBERS. 



B. 
§ 111. 



B. &K. 



293 


— 649 


299 


— 650 


§ 112. 




300 


— 651 


soi 


— 652 


802 


— 658 


803 


— 654 


804 


— 655 


805 


— 656 


30G 


— 057 


807 


— 658 


808 


— 659 


809 


— 660 


810 


— 661 


S 113. 




811, 1 


— 662 


2 


— 663 


3 


— 664 


4 


— 665 


312 


— 666 


§ 114. 




313 


— 667 


1 


— 668 


2 


— 669 


8 


— 670 


4 


— 671 


5 


— 672 


§ 115. 




314, 1 


— 673 


2 


— 674 


3 


— 675 


§ 116. 




815 


— 676 


316, I. 


— 677 


II. 


— 67S 


III. 


— 679 


IV. 


— 680 


V. 


— 681 


VI. 


— 682 


VII. 


— 683 


VIII. 


— 684 


IX. 


— 685 


§ 117. 




317 


— 686 


§ 118. 




318 


— 6S7 


319 


— 688 


§ 119. 




320 


— 0S9 



B. 

320, 



821 



1 — 

2 — 

3 — 

4 — 
o — 

6 — 

7 — 



B. & K. 

690 
61? 1 
602 



§ 120. 



322 
323 



824 



325 



1 _ 

2 — 

3 — 

1 — 

2 — 
8 — 

4 — 

5 — 

6 — 



§ 121. 



826, 



§ 122. 

327 
1 
2 
3 
4 

§ 123. 

328 
1 
2 
8 
4 

§ 124. 

329, 1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 



634 
01)5 
098 
01/ 7 



698 
639 
700 
701 
702 
703 
704 
705 
706 
707 
70S 
709 
710 



711 
712 

713 



714 
715 

716 
717 
718 



719 

720 
721 
722 
723 



75a 756 

735 

727 

728 

739-741 

733 

729 

732 

757-760 

742-744 

745-748 

761-764 

765-768 

730 

769-772 

733 

749-751 

773-776 



B. 

330, 1 
2 
3 



§ 125. 

331 

832 
1 
2 
8 
4 
5 
6 
7 

1 

o 

3 
4 



383 



335 



536 



337 
338 
839 
340 
841 
342 
343 



344 
345 



Q< 



46 



847 

348 



§ 126. 

349 

350 
351 
352 
353 
854 
355 
356 
357 
853 
859 



B. &K. 

777 
778 
779 



— 730 

— 781 

— 782 

— 783 

— 784 

— 785 

— 786 

— 787 

— 788 

— 789 

— 790 

— 791 

— 792 

— 793 

— 794 

— 795 

— 796-7 

— t:;6 

— .93-801 

— bi'i 

— 803 

— 804 

— 8< o 

— 8! SO 

— 607 

— bU8 

— 809 

— 810 

— 811 

— 812 

— S13 

— 814 

— 815 

— 816 

— 817 

— 81 S 

— S19 

— 820 

— 821 

— 822 

— 823 

— S24 

— 825 

— 826 

— 827 



823 
.829 
880 
S31 
832 
833 
834 
835 
886 
837 
838 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING NUMBEBS. 



XV 



B. 
§ 127. 

360, 1 
o 

8 

4 
5 
6 



B. & K. 



§ 1^8. 

361 
362 
363 

364, 



— 839 

— S40 

— S41 

— S42 

— 843 

— 844 

1) — 645 

2) — 846 

3) — 547 

4) — 843 

5) — 849 



S50 
851 
852 
853 
854 
855 
856 



§ 129. 

365 
367 
36S 
369 
3T0 



§ 130. 

371 



Id 



§ 131. 

375 

876 



378 
379 
350 
8S1 
332 
333 
334 
385 
336 
357 
338 
3-D 
390 
391 
392 



S Lu.4. 

893. 1 

2 

o 
O 

4 
5 



— 857 

— obs. 1 

— obs. 2 

— obs. 3 

— obs. 4 



— S53 



859 
S60 
361 
S62 
S63 
864 
S65 
866 
867 
S63 
869 
870 
871 
872 
873 
874 
875 
876 



S77 
878 
879 
880 
881 
882 



B. 
§ 133. 



394 
395. 
396, 



n. 

obs. 1 
obs. 2 



1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

i 

s 

9 

397, 10 

11 

12 

13 

398.14 

15 

16 

399, 17 

18 

19 

20 



21 — 



§ 134. 

400 
401 
402 

403, 1 

2 

3 

4 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

IS 

19 

20 



§ 135. 

404 
405 
406 
407 
403 
409 
410 
411 
412 
413 
414 
415 
416 



B. & K. 



333 
S84 
885 
886 
887 
883 
889 
890 
891 
S92 
893 
894 
895 
896 
897 
593 
899 
900 
901 
902 
903 
904 



905 
906 
907 
903 
909 
910 
911 
913 
914 
915 
916 
917 
913 
919 
920 
921 
922 
923 
924 
925 
926 
927 



— 928 

— 929 

— 930 

— 931 

— 932 

— 933 

— 934 

— 935 

— 936 

— 937 

— 933 

— 939 

— 940 



B. 

§ 136. 

417, 1 

2 

3 

• 4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

418 



§137. 

419 

420 
421 
422 
423 
424 

§139. 

425 
426 
427 
423 
429 
430 
431 
432 
433 
434 
435 
436 
437 
438 
439 
440 

§140. 

441 
442 



3 
4 

§ 141. 



443 
444 



1 

2 
3 
4 

5 
6 



B. & iv. 



941 
942 
943 
944 
945 
946 
947 
94S 
949 
950 
951 
952 
953 



— 954 



— 955 



— 956 



— 951 



— 95< 



rem. 
obs. 1 
obs. 2 
obs. 3 



obs. 1 
obs. 2 

obs. 3 
obs. 4 



959 
960 

961 
962 
963 



obs. 5 



rem. 
obs. 6 

obs. 7 
obs. 8 



964 
9Q5 
966 
967 
963 
969 



970 
971 
972 
973 
974 
975 
976 
977 



XVI 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING NUMBERS. 



B. 

445 

446 
447 

448 

§142, 

449 
450 
451 
452 
453 
454 
455 
456 
457 
458 
459 
460 
461 
462 
463 
464 
465 

§143. 

466 

467 

468 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 

469 

470 

471 

472 

473 

474 

475 

476 

477 

478 

479 

480 

481 

482 

483 

484 

485 

486 

487 

488 

489 

49U 



§144. 

491 

492 

494 
495 
490 
497 



B. & K. 


B. 


— 978 


498 


— 979 


499 


— 980 


500 


— 981 


SO! 




502 




503 




504 


— 9S2 


505 


— 983 


506 


— obs. 1 


507 


— obs. 2 


508 


— 9S4 


509 


— 985 


510 


— obs; 3 


511 


— obs. 4 


512 


— obs. 5 


513 


— obs. 6 


514 


— obs. 7 


515 


— obs. 8 


516 


— 9S6 




— obs. 9 

— 987 


§ 145. 


— obs. 10 


517 


— obs. 11 






§ 146. 




518 


— 9SS 


519 


— rent. 


520 


— 989 


521 


— 990 




— 991 

— 992 


§ 147. 


— 993 


523 


— 994 


524 


— 995 


525 


— 996 


526 


— n. 


527 


— 997 


52S 


— rem. 


529 


— obs. 1 


530 


— . obs. 2 


531 


— obs. 3 




— obs. 4 

— obs. 5 


§ 148. 


— obs. 6 


532 


— obs. 7 


533 


— obs. 8 


534 


— 998 


535 


— rem. 


536 


— obs. 9 


537 


— obs. 10 


538 


— obs. 11 


539 


— obs. 12 


540 


— obs. 13 


541 


— obs. 14 


542 


— obs. 15 


543 




544 




545 




546 


- 999 


547 


— rem. 


548 


obs. 1 


549 


—1000 


550 


— exc. 1 


551 


— exc. 2 


552 


— obs. 2 


553 



B. & K. 

-1000, rem. 
-1001 

rem. 

obs. 3 
-1002 
-1003 

rem. 
-1004 

exc. 
-1005 
-1006 

obs. 5 

obs. 6 
-1007 
-IOCS 

obs. 7 

obs. 8. 
-1009 

rem. 



—1010 



-1011 



obs. 1 

obs. 2 
obs. 3 



-1012 
-1013 



—1014 



obs. 1 

obs. 2 

rem. 
obs. 3 



—1015 

—1016 

—1017 

—1018 
—1019 

—1020 



-1021 
-1022 



B. 

554 

§ 149. 

555 
556 
557 
558 
559 
560 
561 
562 

? 150. 

563 
564 
565 
566 
567 
563 
569 
570 
571 
572 
573 
574 
575 
576 

§ 151. 



B. & K. 

4022, n. 



-1023 



obs. 1 
rem. 1 
rein. 2 
exc. I. 
obs. 2 
exc. II. 
obs. 3 



obs. 
obs. 


4 
1 


rem 


.1 


rem 


. 2 


obs. 


2 


rem 


. 3 


obs. 


o 
o 


obs. 


4 


obs. 


5 


rem 


4 


obs. 


6 


obs. 


7 


0X0. 




Obs. 




obs. 


9 


obs. 


10 



§ 152. 



5 153. 

590 
591 
592 
593 

594 
595 
596 
597 
598 
599 
600 
601 
602 



-1024 
-1025 



obs. 1 
ml 
obs. 2 
ii. 2 



n. 

obs. 
obs. 



— obs. 6 



obs. 
obs. 



obs. 9 



577 


—1026 


578 


—1027 


579 


—1028 


580 


— obs. 1 


531 


— obs. 2 


582 


— obs. 3 


5S3 


—1029 



584 


—1030 


5S5 . 


—1031 


586 


— obs. 1 


587 


— obs. 2 


5SS 


— obs. 3 


5S9 


— obs. 4 



—1032 
—1033 
— obs. 1 



-1034 
-1035 



obs. 2 
obs. 3 

obs. 4 
obs. 5 
obs. 6 
obs. 7 
obs. 8 
n. 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING NUMBERS. 



XV 11 



b. 
§ 154. 

608 
6U4 
605 
606 

607 
606 
609 
610 

611 
612 



§ 155. 

613 

§ 156. 

614 
615 
616 
617 
618 

§ 157. 

619 
620 
621 
622 
623 
624 



625 

626 



§ 158, 

62T 
628 

629 
630 
631 
632 
683 
634 



§ 159. 

635 
636 
63 7 
633 
639 



.80. 



640 
641 

€42 



-1040 



-1041 



obs. 
obs. 
obs. 
II. 



-1042 
-1043 
-1044 



II. — 



II. 
n.-l 
n.2 
III. 



—1045 

— rem. 



-1046 



obs. 1 
obs. 2 
obs. 3 
obs. 4 
obs. 5 
n. 
obs. 6 



-1047 
-104S 



obs. 1 
obs. 2 
obs. 3 



—1049 



B. & K. 




B. 

§ 161. 


1036 




643 


■1037 




644 


n. 




646 


•1038 




647 


obs. 


1 




obs. 


2 




-1039 




§ 162. 


Tl. 

obs. 


3 


643 


obs. 


4 


649 



obs. 1 

ob^. 2 



§ 163. 

650 
651 



§ 164. 

652 
653 
'654 



§ 165. 

655 

656 
657 
653 
659 
660 
661 
662 
663 
664 
665 
666 
667 



\ 166. 

66S 
669 
670 
671 
672 



§ 167. 

673 
674 
675 

676 
677 
673 
679 
630 



5 168 

631 



B. & K. 



-1050 
-1051 

-1052 



obS. 



—1053 

— obs. 



1054 



obs. 



-1055 
-1056 
-1057 



—1053 
—1059 

—1060 



-1061 
-1062 
-1063 



obs. 1 

exc. 1 
exc 2 
n. 

obs. 2 



obs. 3 
obs. 4 



—1064 
—1065 
—1066 
—1067 
— rem. 



—1068 
—1069 

— obs. 1 
—1070 

— obs. 2 

— obs. 3 

— n. 

— obs. 4 



L0T1 



B. 

683 
683 
6S4 
685 

6-6 
687 
6S8 

669 
600 
691 
692 



§ 169. 

693 

694 
695 



§ 170. 

696 
697 

693 



§ 171. 

699 

§ 172. 

700 
701 

703 
704 

706 

707 
708 
709 
710 
711 
712 
713 



§ 173. 

714 
715 
716 
717 

718 



§ 174. 



- 



i!9 
720 
721 
722 
723 
724 
725 



B. &K. 

-1072 
-1073 
-1074 
-1075 



obs. 2 



—1076 



3 

4 



obs. 
obs. 

obs. 5 
obs. 6 
obs. 7 



-1077 



obs. 1 
obs. 2 



—1078 
—1079 
— obs. 



—1080 



—1030 
—1081 

— obs. 1 



-1033 



-1034 
-1085 



obs. 2 

90S. 
5. 4 

obs. 5 

oba. 6- 



obs. 7 
obs. 8 



-10SG 



— 10S7 



obs. 1 
obs. 2 
obs. 3 
obs. 4 



-10S3 
-1039 
-1090 



obs. 1 

obs. 2 
obs. 3 
obs. 4 



XY111 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING 



NUMBERS. 



B. 


B. &■ K. i 


B. 


B. & K. | 


B. 


B. &K 


726 


—1090, obs. 5 


779 

780 


—1116 
—1117 


824 


-1166 


175. 




7S1 

782 


—1118 

— obs. 2 


§ 190. 




727 


—1091 


7S3 


—1119 


S31 


—1167 


728 


—1092 


784 


—1120 


832 


—1168 


729 


—1093 


7S5 


—1121 


833 


-1109 


730 


— exc. 


786 


—1122 






731 


—1094 


7S7 


—1123 


§ 191. 




732 


— obs. 1 


788 


—1124 




733 


— obs. 2 


789 


—1125 


S34 


—1170 


734 


-1095 


790 


—1120 


835 


— ■ n. 




~ obs. 3 


791 


—1127 | 






737 
7"S 


— obs. 4 

— obs. 5 


792 
793 


—1128 i 
—1129 S 


§ 192. 




73D 


-— obs. 6 


794 


—1130 


886 


—1171 






795 


—1131 


887 


— n. 


\ 176. 




796 


—1132 


888 


—1172 


' 


797 


-1133 


839 


—1 1 73 


740 


—1096 


793 


- -1 134 


840 


i 1 7.1 


741 


— obs. 1 


799 


—1135 


841 


n« 


742 


— obs. 2 


800 


—1130 


SAQ 

i^-4 -J 


—1175 


743 


obs. 3 


S01 


—1148 

i 


§ 193. 




j : 177. 




§ 180. 


l 

i 


843 


—1176 


744 


—1097 


S02 


— 1 1 19 






745 

746 


—1098 
—1099 


1 
2 


—1 i 50 
—1151 


§ 194. 




t4i 


—1100 


3 


—1152 


844 


—1177 


743 


— obs. 1 










741) 


—1101 










750 


— obs. 2 


§ 181. 




§ 195. 




751 
752 


— n - 

—1102 


803 


—1153 


S45 


—1178 


4 t'-J 


—1103 

— obs. 8 

—1104 






846 


—1179 


(0-3 

754 

75 n ' 


§182. 




847 
849 


—1180 
—1181 


756 


— obs. 4 


804- 


—1154 






757 • 
753 


— obs. 5 
—1105 


805 


—1 155 


§ 196. 




750 


~ 1 100 






S50 


—1182 


7G0 


—1107 


§ 183. 




851 


' —1183 


761 

762 


— n. 

— obs. 


806 


-1156 


852 
853 


—1184 
— 11S5 


703 


— 110S 






854 


—1186 


764 

7 05 


— obs. 7 
—1109 


§ 181. 








7 GO 


—1110 


807 


—1157 


§ 187. 








SOS 


—1158 


855 


—1187 


§ 178. 
7C7 


—1112 


§ 185. 




1 856 

1 857 


—1188 
—1189 


763 
709 


— rem. 

— obs. 1 


809 


—1159 


1 § 202. 




770 


— obs. 2 


i 




868 


—1190 


771 


— obs. 3 


§ 186. 




S69 


—1191 


7T2 
773 
7U 


— obs. 4 

— obs. 5 

— obs. 6 


818 

819 

I 820 


—1160 
—1161 
—11 02 


1 
§ 204. 


« 






821 


—11 03 


872 


—1192 


I 179. 








873 


—1193 


775 
770 
777 
778 


—1113 
—1114 
—1115 
— obs. 1 


§ 187. 

822 

1 823 


—1104 
—1165 


j 874 
875 
S76 

! 877 


—1194 
—1 1 95 
—1190 
—1197 



TABLE OF CORRESPONDING NUMBERS. 



XIX 



J? 


E. & K. 


B. 


B. &K. 


B. 


B. & K 


§ 206. 




894, 2 
8 


—1201 
— 1202 


899, 8 


—1209 


8S6 
SS7 


—1198 

— 23 


895. 4 

896, 5 


—1203 
—1204 


§ 210. 




SS3 


— 26 






901 


—1210 


869 
SOU 
891 


— 26 

— 28 

— 32 


§ 2C8. 

S97 


—1205 


§ 211. 


y 


892 


— 26 


898 


—1206 


902 41 


-1211 


§ 207 




§ 209. 




§ 212. 




894 


—1199 


899, 1 


—1207 


903 


— 84-40 


1 


—1200 i 


2 


—1208 


V04 


— 84-40 



GREEK GRAMMAR. 



PART FIRST. 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 

1. — Oethogeaphy treats of letters, and the 
mode of combining them into syllables and 
words. 

2. — A Lettee is a mark or character used 
to represent an elementary sound of the human 
voice The Greek alphahet is said to have been 
brought into Greece by Cadmus, from Phoenicia. 
It is certainly of Semitic, and probably of 
Phoenician origin. Two or three of the original 
letters were dropped out of the ordinary alpha- 
bet, being retained only among the numerals. 
Others were changed, and <?>, #, 3* were certainly 
a later addition. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



The Alphabet, as ultimately constituted, consisted of 
twenty-four letters, as follows : — 



FORM, 



NAME. 



POWER.- 



m 

. V 



A a 


_<4^# 


a 


in 


father 


B @6 


Beta 


b 


in 


bee 


v r r* 


Gamma 


9 


in 


g °. 


A 8 


Delta 


d 


in 


did 


E s 


JEpsilon 


e 


in 


met 


z £ 


Zeta (z or dz) 


l 




H>7 


Ma 


ey 


in 


they 


e$d 


Theta 


th 


in 


thick 


i i 


Iota 


» 


in 


pin 


Kx 


Kappa 


\ 


or c hard, kin, care 


AX 


Lambda 


I 


in 


lay 


Mp 


Mu 


m 


in 


madam 


Nv 


Nu 


n 


in 


nun 


b'i 


Xi 


X 


in 


fox 


O o 


Omikron 





in 


tyro, not 


Jin 


Pi 


p 


in 


pea 


p P 


Jiho 


r 


in 


row 


2 0, final 


g Sigma 


s 


in 


sun, us 


T tl 


Tau 


t 


in 


tea, not 


r v 


Upsilon 


u 


in 


brute 


<3> 4> 


Phi 


ph 


in 


philo 


x* 


Chi 


ch 


in 


buch (German) 


*p ^ 


Psi 


ps 


in 


lips 


£1 o 


Omega 





in 


no, tone 



V 



* The letter y before /c, y, x% or ?» * a sounded like n in finger; tnus, 
tyycfayg, ayn6v, pronounced ang-gelos, ang-kon. 



VOWELS AND DIPHTIIONGS. 3 

The letters in the Greek alphabet are either Vowels or 
Consonants. 

VOWELS. 

3. — A Vowel is a letter which represents a simple 
inarticulate sound, and, in a word or syllable, may be 
sounded alone. The vowels are seven, viz. : 

Two short, c, o. 

Two long, 7], w. 

Three doubtful, a, t, o. 

4. — A, *, y, are called doubtful, because they are some* 
times short, and sometimes long. Thus, 

a in xazrjp) is always short. 

a in Xadq^ is always long. 

a in "Apys, may be either long or short. 

&• — There are but five distinct vowel sounds in the 
Greek language, viz., a, r, *, o, o. The rj and w simply 
express the lengthened sound of e and o. The vowel- 
sounds then may be thus expressed : 

Short, a, e, T, o, v. 
Long, a, ij, F, ", 5. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

6. — The union of two vowels in one sound is called a 
Diphthong. Diphthongs are of two kinds, Proper and 
Improper. 

Note 1. The first vowel of a diphthong, in Greek, is called the pre* 
positive, vowel; and the second, the subjunctive vowel 

7. — Diphthongs in Greek are formed by subjoining 
to the more open vowels, a, d, e, ??, o, w, the closer vowels, 



4 PRONUNCIATION. 

t 9 6>, or by combining the two latter with each other. 
Thus, 

af, etj ot. 
do, eo, oo. 
d«, 7] t, wt, commonly written, a, #, w. 

7]0, 0)0. 

oc. 

8. — Of these, «, #, w, are called improper diphthongs, 

the t being written under, or subscribed, and not at all 

sounded; yo, wo, oc, are also sometimes called improper 

diphthongs. The others are called proper diphthongs. 

Note 2. The iota (i) in a, y, w, from its position under the prepositive 
vowel, is called iota subscript. But when this vowel is a capital, the c is 
written after it ; as, 'Aidy = gdij ; T&I 20*121 = t& cotyti. 

0* — A vowel, preceded by another vowel, with which 
it does not form a diphthong, is said to be pure. Thus, a 
is pure in yia and cpdia; oq is pure in xokeoq, fi&dtog, &c. 
The separate pronunciation of two vowels which might 
form a diphthong is indicated by a diaeresis (••) thus, 
rei^e'i — rs(-%e-c, but recast 2= Tet-%ei. 

THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS 
I AND DIPHTHONGS. 

1 0# — The ancient pronunciation of the Greek vowels and diphthongs 
cannot now be determined with certainty in all cases. The knowledge 
we have of it is derived chiefly from Greek words that appear in Latin, 
and Latin words that appear in Greek; from imitation of natural 
sounds, as the bleating of the sheep, or the barking of the dog ; from a 
play upon w r ords, and other similar hints. Valuable aid may be de- 
rived from the pronunciation of the modern Greek, and a study of the 
euphonic laws which have produced it. 

11* — If uniformity in the pronunciation of the Greek is to be aimed 
at — and it is certainly desirable that it should — the Erasmian method, 
among all others now in use, seems entitled to preference, on account of 
its simplicity and perspicuity, and as having largely in its favor the 
authority of the ancients. It is the pronunciation mainly prevalent 
in Europe, and to a considerable extent in America. The system is 
exhibited in the following 



CONSONANTS. 



12. — Table of Vowel and Diphthongal Sounds. 



Short a, 
Long a, 
Short e, 
Long 77, 
Short r, 
Long ?, 
Short 0, 
Long w, 
Short w, 
Long w, 

eu y 
ou, 

WO) 



like a 
like a 
like e 
like ey 
like £ 
like i 
like o 
like o 
like u 
like w 
like ay 
like ou 
like £ 
like eu 
like o£ 
like ow 
like ew 
like 010 
like ui 



in Jehovah 
in far 
in met 
in they 
in tin 
in machine 
in tyro, not 
in go, tone 
in brute 
in tune 
in aye 
in our, thou 
in ice 
in feud 
in oil 
in ragout 
in few 
in how 



as jxoTxra 
as (papos 

as fiiv 
as Sypos 
as fitu 
as <tTto$ 
as rovos 
as ly<i>, fpwvj) 

aS TU7ZT0J 

as nop 
as roipai 
as avros 
as efej £>#£* 
as (peuycu 
as ol&z 
as ovdetq 

as 7)u% 6 fir) v 
as words 



in quick, or like the English r/?£. 



CONSONANTS. 

23. — A Consonant is a letter which represents an 
articulate sound, and, in a word or syllable, is never 
sounded alone, but always in connection with a vowel or 
diphthong. 

Consonants are divided into mutes, semi-vowels, and 
idouble consonants. 

14. — The Mlltes are nine, and are divided into three 
classes, according to their strength, or stress of articula* 



tion, viz. : • 



Smooth, 7r, 
Middle, ft 
Aspirate, <p y 






d. 



6 CONSONANTS. 

IS. — The smooth mutes are so called as being uttered 
without aspiration ; the aspirates, as uttered with a full 
sound of the h / and the middle, as being intermediate in 
position, and also in degree of aspiration. These latter, 
having a more full and ringing sound, are called sonants. 
16. — Each smooth mute has its own middle and its own 
aspirate; and the three are called mutes of the same 
order ', because they are pronounced by the same organ ; 
thus, 

/7-mutes, or labials, 7r, /?, <p. 
Z-mutes, or palatals, x, r, /. 
T-mutes, or Unguals, r, d, #. 

Obs. — Mutes of the same order are frequently inter- 
changed. 

17. — The Semi-vowels are five, ^, /*, v, p, a. Of these, 
K /*» y j Pi are called liquids, because they readily flow into, 
and coalesce with other consonants. 

18. — The Double Consonants are three, <f>, f, f. 
They are formed from the three orders of mutes with a ; 
thus, 



9, } 
y. > 



*> Y<i Xi \ with a makes •<<?,/* equivalent to < x. 

19. — In declensions and inflections, when a labial or a 
palatal mute is followed by <j, the double consonant 4> or f 
is substituted for the two; thus, for v Apafiai or tMxgw, 
write "Apaip^TzUZw, &c. But a r-mute, coming before <r, 
is rejected; thus, for avbraiD, write avboa), &c. (63.) 

£0. — In like manner a double consonant may be resolved 
into the mute from which it is formed, and c ; thus, 

<p may be resolved into -c, /9c, or ^>c. 
£ " into xc, re, or ^c. 

C " (perhaps) into <5c. 



SYLLABLES. — ACCENTS. 7 

This is done when, in the declension of nouns and verbs, 
it becomes necessary to separate the c from the mute with 
which it is combined; thus, XdiXaf, by dropping the <; 
becomes XaTXaxi xopa£ becomes %6pax\ and so of other 
combinations. 

SYLLABLES. 

21. — A Syllable is a distinct sound forming the whole 
of a word, or so much of it as can be sotmded at once. 

Every word has as many syllables as it has distinct 
vowel-sounds. 

A word of one syllable is called a Monosyllable. 

A word of two syllables is called a Dissyllable. 

A word of three syllables is called a Trisyllable. 

A word of many syllables is called a Polysyllable. 

22. — In a word of many syllables, the last is called the 
final syllable ; the one next the last is called the penult / 
and the syllable preceding that, is called the antepenult. 

To syllables belong certain marks and characters ; these 
are — 

Accents. 

9ft 

23. — The Accents in Greek are three, viz. : 
the acute (6£rg, sharp), the grave (/3aprg, heavy), 
and the circumflex (nepta7t6^8vog y winding). 
They are thus indicated : 

The acute ('), as, b£vs* 

The grave ( x ), as, rcveg. 

The circumflex O, as, $ev8og. 

24:. — Accents in Greek indicated the tone or pitch of voice in pro- 
nouncing a syllable. The acute accent indicated a sharp, raised tone ; 
the circumflex, a tone first raised, and then depressed to the ordinary 
level ; the grave is simply the negation of accent : it belongs, therefore, 
in theory, to every unaccented syllable, and is written only when it stands 



8 ACCENTS. 

in place of an acute which, in continuous discourse, loses its proper 
accent. 

GENERAL RULES. 

23. — In Diphthongs the accent stands on the subjunc- 
tive vowel ; as, -xet&a), rodro (not izitd-to, tooto) ; but, in the 
improper diphthongs, a, #, w, on the prepositive, as, 

"Acd7)<;=: qdrjq. 

26. — The acute accent may stand on either one of the 
three last syllables of a word; the circumflex, on either 
one of the two last ; the grave, from the nature of the case, 
is written only on the last. Words are named according 
to their accent, as follows : 

A word with acute accent on the last syllable, is called 
Oxytone. 

A word with acute accent on the penult syllable, is 
called Paroxytone. 

A word with acute accent on the antepenult syllable, is 
called Proparoxytone. 

A word circumflexed on the ultimate, is called Peris- 
pomenon. 

A word circumflexed on the penult, is called Properis- 
pomenon. 

A word with the grave accent on the ultimate, is called 
Barytone. 

27* — The acute accent can fall on the antepenult only 
when the ultimate is short. The circumflex requires a 
syllable long by nature, and can stand on the penult only 
when the ultimate is short. 
i 28. — The grave (which is simply the absence of ac- 
cent) is of course imderstood on all syllables not marked 
with the acute or circumflex, and, as above remarked, is 
written only when it stands for a depressed acute. This 
takes place regularly in oxy tones, in continued discourse. 
Thus, abzoq, oxytone ; but auras e<p7), the acute accent of 
6$ being depressed before e<piq m So &e6g ; but #sd<; fia<?de6ec. 



ACCENTS. 



20. — From the above result the following rules : 
A proparoxytone requires a short ultimate ; and there- 
fore a word with long ultimate cannot have an accent on 
the antepenult. 

A properispomenon requires a short ultimate and a long 
' penult ; and conversely, a long penult, if accented, must 
be circumflexed if the ultimate is short. 

30,— Note. — The diphthongs at and oc final, syllables long only by 
position, and the Attic oc instead of oc, are considered short in accen- 
tuation ; but the optative terminations oc and at , and 01 in the adverb 
oIkoIj are long. ■ - 

31, — In words declined by cases, except participles, the accentua- 
tion of the nominative can be ascertained only by consulting a good 
lexicon. That being ascertained, the accentuation of the oblique cases 
may be found by the rules of accent under each declension. These 
rules apply generally to adjectives and participles of the same declen- 



sion. 



Accents in Contraction. 



32. — When two syllables are drawn together by con- 
traction, if either of the contracted syllables had an accent 
before the contraction, the contracted syllable retains one. 
If the accent stood on the first syllable, whether circum- 
flex or acute, the resulting accent will be a circumflex ; if 
on the second syllable, the accent, whether acute or cir- 
cumflex, will be unchanged ; as, 



(piXiere, cont. (ptXelre. 
<piX£ei, w <piXeT. 

On the other hand, 
<piXee, cont. <p(Xet. 



tpiXsoiprp, cont. ytXotfiyv. 
io-rawg y u iazibq. 

Tiptop* cont. rtjia. 



33. — In eras is (the union of two vowels of different 
words), the accent of the first word is dropped, that of the 
second remains ; as, rd ayaftd, contracted zdyaftd ; but is 
changed from acute to circumflex if the general laws re- 
quire it (see 29) ; as, rd aXXa, contracted raXXa. 
1* 



10 ACCENTS. 



ENCLITICS. 

34:. — Certain words of one or two syllables, when used 
in discourse, throw back their accent on the preceding 
word, if in connection with it, and stand themselves with- 
out an accent. Such words are called enclitics. 

35. — The JEnclitics commonly in use are the follow- 
ing, viz. : 1. The present indicative of the verbs elpti and 
<prjfj.ii in all the numbers and persons except the second per- 
son singular. 2. The indefinite fV, r\ in all its cases 
and numbers. 3. The pronouns jjlou, jio(, fx£ — gov, go I, g£ — 
ov,o\, £ — [ilv, vb, and most of those beginning with G(p. 4. 
The adverbs ncoq, rcyj, not, ttou, 7to&t\ no-d-h, r.ozi, not inter- 
rogative ; and, 5. The particles neb, ri, rot, yi, xiv or xi, vuv 
or v6, nip, pd, and Se inseparable (not conj. di, and, but), 
as in ode. 

36»—A proparoxytone (a word acuted on the ante- 
penult), or a properispomenon (a word circumflexed on the 
penult), followed by an enclitic, takes the accent of that 
enclitic in the form of an acute on the ultimate ; as, ekeyi 

fiot, dwpov egtiv, todtS ye, G&jid fxoo. 

37* — If a paroxy tone is followed by an enclitic of one 
syllable, the accent of the enclitic is simply absorbed in 
that of the paroxytone ; as, koyoq /iou for X6yo<; p.od ; Xoyoc; nq 
for loyoq r\q ; if it is followed by an enclitic of two sylla- 
bles, the enclitic retains its accent; as, \6yoi nv£q, xoGpios 

38. — When an oxytone or perispomenon is followed by 
an enclitic, the enclitic, whether of one or two syllables, 

loses its accent ; as, dvrjp rcq, (piXcb Ge,yakeizov Igtw, yuvaixibv 

TLVIDV. 

39* — When several enclitics occur in succession, the 
first having lost, or thrown back its accent on the pre- 
ceding word, the second throws its accent always as an 
acute on the first, and the third on the second, &c, till 



SPIRITUS, OR BREATHINGS. 11 

the last only is without an accent; as, et rfc rtvd (prjei jioi 

40. — The enclitic retains its accent, when it stands 
alone, or begins a clause ; when a final vowel of the pre- 
ceding word has been cut off ; or when it is emphatic. 

Proclitics, or Atonies. 

41. — The following monosyllables seem to throw their 
accent forward upon the following word, and are hence 
called proclitics, or atonies ; viz., the articles, tf, $, ol, 
at ; the prepositions, £v, els, & (££ ) ; the conjunctions, et, 
ax;; and the adverb ob (o&x, ob%) ; but not ob^t. But they 
take an accent from a following enclitic; as, efye; when 
they follow the main word; as, Ssdq &s; or when ending a 
sentence ; as, xws yap ob, 

Spiritus, or Breathings. 

42. — The breathings are two : the rough breathing 
(spiritus asper), marked ( c ) ; and the smooth breathing 
(spiritus lenis), marked ('). The rough breathing is our 
h ; as, 6, ho. 

Note. — Anciently, H marked the Greek aspirate ; as, eiiardv, written 
HEKATOX. 

43. — The smooth breathing simply indicates the absence 
of the rough. These marks are thus employed : — 

(1.) An initial vowel or diphthong has always a breath- 
ing. Diphthongs take it on the second vowel ; as, eup£ y 
ol-oq\ but a, #, a) on the first ; as, "Aidr^. 

(2.) Inititial o and p are always aspirated ; as, 6x6, piaj : 
medial p, if single, has no breathing ; as, Tz6poq\ if doubled, 
the first has the smooth, the second the rough breathing; 

aS, TTOppw, 



12 THE ^OLIC DIGAMMA. 

The JEolic Digamma. 

44. — The Greek language, in its earliest form, Lad an- 
other consonant, as a sixth letter of the alphabet. It was 
retained longest in the iEolic dialect, and hence was called 
the JEolic digamma. 

45. — This was originally a full and strong consonant, 
having the sound of the Latin F or V. It was called 
digamma^ because its form (J r ) was that of a double r. It 
was apparently used before words beginning with a vowel, 
and between two vowels, which, by its disuse at a later 
period, came together without forming a diphthong ; thus, 
olvos, ea/?, ?c, ol'q, aldiv, aopvoq, u>6\>, and the like, were writ- 
ten, or pronounced as if written, folvoq, fiap, fiq. oftq, 
alfwv, afopvos, wfov, &c., as is shown by the Latin vinum, 
ver, vis, ovis, cevum, avernus, ovum, &c. Between two 
vowels, it was at length softened down, and even with 
the JEolians passed into t>. Thus, aurjp, abcog^ for the 
common ayp, yjwq. This accounts for the form of some 
words in the Attic and common dialects, in which the 
digamma, softened into i>, still remains, especially where 
followed by a consonant. Thus the ancient gifo* passed 
into z^oa*, and lastly into /tw, future yebaa), softened from 
%£f<ja>. So xXaiu), Attic zXdw, has in the future xlabam % 
In like manner vdsq, the plural of vaDs, retains in the dative 
vaocrt, softened from vafat. 

46. — The Apostrophe ( ' ) is written over the place 
of a short vowel which has been cut off from the end of a 
word ; as, olaX 9 £ya> for alia £yw. This is done w^hen the 
following word begins with a vowel, and in compounds, 
when the first part ends, and the last begins, with a 
vowel. Sometimes the diphthongs are elided by the poets ; 
as, jlouAorj? £y<6 for fiobloixai iyd>; and sometimes, after a 
long syllable, the initial vowel is cut off from the follow- 
ing word ; as, w 'yaM for & aya$£. 



THE iEOLIC DIGAMMA. 13 

47. — Crasis. — Instead of cutting off the final vowel, 
the concurring vowels of two words are often contracted ; 
as, TZpoupyoo, for npb k'prou ; xax, for xal £x. This form of 
contraction is called crasis (mingling). 

48. — This contraction is indicated by the Coronis or 
hook (') placed over the vowel at the place of junc- 
tion (and with i subscribed), as above. 

49. — Instead of the coronis, we have the rough breath- 
ing of the article or relative pronoun, if these stand first ; 
as, av, for a av ; obx, for 6 ix. In the article, the final vowel 
or diphthong is swallowed up in the following vowel ; as, 

6 dvyjp dvrjp, rip dvdpi zdvdpc, zoo auzod zauzou. 

50. — The Diastole is a comma inserted between the 
parts of a compound word, to distinguish it from another 
word consisting of the same letters; as, r6,ze, and the, to 
distinguish it from raze, then / 8,zi, what, to distinguish 
it from ore, because. Sometimes they are written apart, 
without the comma ; thus, z6 ze, 8 rt. 

51. — The Diaeresis (") is placed over a vowel, to 
show that it does not form a diphthong with the vowel 
which precedes it ; as, p?s, a sheep, ~paoq, mild, pronounced 
oi-s, pra-us. 

52. — The figures affecting syllables are as follows : 
1st. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to 
the beginning of a word; as, <r/±cxp6<;, for pixp6q\ 
ieixo&c, for efxoGi. 
2d. JParagoge is the adding of one or more letters to the 

end of a word ; as, j?<r#a, for ijjq ; zolai, for rots. 
3d. EpentKesis is the insertion of one or more letters in 
the body of a word ; as, elka^e, for eXafis ; 6--6z~po<z, 
for dTzozepos. 
4th. Syncope is the taking away of one or more letters 
from the body of a word ; as, tj)3o^, for ijXu&ev ; 
£upd t a7]v, for eoprjffdfxrjv. 

5th. Aphooresis is the cutting off of one or more letters 



14 EUPHONY. 

from the beginning of a word; as, c'Tspoic-q^ for 

aarspoTZT] \ fipvtf> for ioprrj. 
6th. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters 

from the end of a word ; as, deb, for dcbp.a ; JJocrecdco 

for IIo<T£Ldajva. 
7th. Tmesis is a separating of the parts, in a compound 

word, by an intervening term ; as, bx£p rcva e/e^, 

for vnepi%£Lv rtvd. 
8th. Metathesis is the transposition of letters and sylla- 
bles ; as, enpa&ov, for enapd-ov ' edpaxov, for edapxov ; 

xdprog, for xpdrog. 
53. — Obs. — The lonians, by a species of Metathesis, 
change the breathings in a word ; as, zt&d>y 9 for %itw ; 
ivd-aora, for ivradd-a, 

EUPHONY. 

54. — In combining letters, the Greeks paid the strictest 
attention to Euphony, or agreeableness of sound. This 
principle, indeed, pervades the whole structure of the lan- 
guage. From a regard to this, they usually avoided the 
concurrence of consonants not easily pronounced together. 
The means by which this is effected may be summed up 
in the following — 

Rules of Euphony. 

(The student should be thoroughly familiar with the following rules, 
and with their application, before he enters on the 3d declension, where, 
as also in the verb, the knowledge of them is required at almost every 
step. To aid him in this, a table of exercises is subjoined, in which he 
should practise, till he can correct the orthography, and give the rule 
with ease and readiness.) 

55. — Words ending in at, and verbs of the 
tliird person in s and i, add v to the termination 
before a vowel, or before a pause ; as, 



RULES OF EUPHONY. 15 

Ilaaiv elrsv hetvotq, for ?ra<n eTre £xewotq' y also the word 
efxoGi (ttcenty), and the adverbs rApoat^ r.avrdizaai^ \>6<7<pt y 
Tzpoaftt, oKicd-e, xz and \>o. This was called by grammarians 
v £<peXxuG7Lx6^ because, by preventing the hiatus between 
two vowels, it, as it were, drew the second vowel to the 
first. Among the poets, it is sometimes added to these 
terminations before a consonant, when it is necessary to 
render a final syllable long ; and sometimes, by the Attic 
prose writers, to give energy to the tone. 

Sometimes q is added, on the same principle ; thus, ootid 
becomes oorwq. Also the particle ov is changed into oux 
before a vowel, and into ob% before an aspirated vowel. 

56. — When two mutes of a different organ 
come together, they must be of the same degree 
of strength ; i. e., they must be both smooth, or 
both middle, or both aspirate / as, inrd, IfihofAog, 
dx^og. 

If, by derivation or declension, two mutes of different 
degrees of strength would come together, the former takes 
the class of the latter ; thus, the terminations roq, <^v ? decs, 
with ypdcpco, omitting w, form ypaizroq^ ypd t 3dr t v, ypayfteiq^ 
and of two mutes already combined, one cannot be 
changed without a corresponding change in the other. 
Thus, in f-ra and oxreu, if the r be changed into #, the t: 
must be changed into /3, and the x into y ; as, i Tzrd, zftdotwq ; 
dxrctf, dydooq. 

57. — A smooth mute in the end of a word is 
changed into its own aspirate before an aspirated 
vowel. This is done ; — 

1st. In the composition of words ; thus, from £n J (for &{) 
and rjfiipa, comes £<p7j/iepoq. So from £7rrd, by apos- 




16 BULBS OF EUPHONY. 

trophe, £m\ and yfiipa, comes £<p#rjtiepo<;\ from xard 
and eoda*^ xa&sudo), &c. 
2d. When words stand together in a sentence; thus, 

■l<p* rjinV) XOL& 1 ^P-^t &<P* °5, &C, for hci ^/x2V, xard 
yjliaq^ and oo. 
; 3d. When words are united by contraction; thus, rd 
lp.drt.ov united become $oip.drtov ; to £repov, ddrepov, 
&c. 

Obs. 1. The middle mute d is never changed before an 
aspirated vowel ; as, ohad' lx(<j$at\ and /? and ^, only be- 
fore d and efr, in forming (according to one theory of the 
formation of these tenses) the perfect and the pluperfect 
active. The x in lx is never aspirated. 

58. When two successive syllables would 
begin with an aspirate, the first is changed into 
its corresponding smooth ; and the rough breath- 
ing into the smooth / thus, 

Il£<piXr)Y.a, not <pe<piXfjxa* y dpis. Gen. rpi%6q, not $pt%6s ; so 
from the root &pe% 9 the verb is rpi^^j n °t ftptyw ; from 
#/?££>, Tpiexo, not $pi<pu) ; from %, £/&>, not %w. (See be- 
low, Obs. 3.) In like manner, from #«?>, the root of Micro*, 
is derived ra^o^, &c. 

59. — Exceptions. — To this rule there are five 
exceptions ; viz. : 

* fflcc. 1. Compound words generally; as, dpvtM&Tjpag, 

fflcc. 2. $ or % before # ; as, <pd$t y xu&qvat. 

JExc. 3. When one of the aspirates is joined with another 
consonant; as, &a<p$e{<;, a7ciy>&tMv 9 ico&ieMi. But the rule 
holds when p follows the first aspirate, as above, in rpiya*^ 

not dpi/a*. 



THE MUTES BEFORE 2. 17 

Exc. 4. If the second aspirate has been occasioned by a 
rough breathing following it; as, e&y^ 6 astipw-o^ for 
£^Tjx\ by apocope for edhyxe ; zo.^if a, for rabza a. 

Exc. 5. When the second aspirate belongs to the ad- 
verbial terminations ftz» or &t ; as, -av-ay6f>v;, Koptv&o&t. 

Obs. 2. Of three aspirates beginning successive syllables, 
it is usual to change only the first ; as, re^dfarat^ for 
tieMvarai. In some cases the second also is changed; as, 
Tirana, rizpoca, for &ifta<pa, d-iftpocpa. 

Obs. 3. When the first of two aspirates is the rough 
breathing, it is changed only before % ; thus, o#en, £#e, ^ca, 
&c, preserve the rough breathing before the aspirates # 
and <? ; but %x m * s changed into £/w. 

Obs, 4. When the second aspirate is lost by inflection 
or otherwise, the first is resumed ; thus, l/w, fut. i^w ; 
rp(yu), #pi5w ; zpicfco, d-pi(pai ; and the derivatives ftpeicToq^ 

-&pe::zixo^, &C. 

Obs. 5. The second of two aspirates is seldom changed. 
It is always done, however, in imperatives in &t ; as, redera, 
ruyihjTi' for rc'#e#e, T&yrihf&i. 

055. 6. A mute mav be doubled, but if it be an aspirate, 
the first is changed into its corresponding smooth; as, 
'Jrdfej not M^dfej Bdxyoq, not B<*ZX 0( *i MaT&atoq^ not 
Maftd-aloq^ Za-<f<6 y iiOt-ac(fd> m 

60. Initial p is doubled when a short vowel 
is prefixed ; as, 

^Pc-tw, epptiTTOv ; appear} $ 9 from a and piizw ; irepippoog, 
from -c/?:' and /)^. 

The Mutes before Z 

61. A 7t-mute before a, unites with it and 
forms i// ; as, /Ut7t6), X^ttctg), written JUnJ/G). 



18 THE MUTES BEFORE M. 

62. A fc-mute before cr, unites with, it and 
forms £ ; as, fixo, tfjcGo, written y^o. 

Mcc. — But £x never changes x before a ; as, kxar(kku). 

63. A r-mute before #, is rejected; thus, 

written acjfiaat^ q.ao> 9 opvict. 

The Mutes before M. 

64. A 7t-mute before [i, is changed into [i ; 
thus, 

rirviziiat^ rirpcfi/iac^ y£ypa<ppLCU y 
written rirujipLat^ rirpc/ipLac^ yiypafifiac. 

JEJxc. — But after a liquid, a r-mute before /* is rejected ; 
as, 7r^7T£/jt/jta:, for izlizsinziiai ; ri&aA[iat 9 for ri^aknfiat, 

65. A ^-mute before ^, is changed into y ; 
thus, 

TziizXexiiat) (3£{3pe%fjLac 9 
written TzinXeyfiat^ ftiftpsy/iat. 
Hence y before ^, remains unchanged ; as, XiXeyfiai. 

66. A <r-mute before ^, is changed into a ; 
thus, 

yvuTfiat) tfpetd/icu 9 Tziizeid^iiat^ 
written yvvcrjiai, yjpetcrjJLatj 7zi7:et(jfxac, 

Obs. t 7. These rules generally hold in inflectional changes, 

and when /i in the ending follows a final mute in the root 

or stem. Otherwise, it is liable to many exceptions ; as, 

'ir/xij^rjv^ not £<rjiijfl'7)v* xixjuyxa, not xiyfiyxa} also, n6rftoq 9 

()U#/jl6$, axfiirj^ &C, not nodftog^ puG/iog^ dypj. 



OF THE LETTER 2. 19 

Changes of the Letter N. 

67. — N, before a 7t-mute, or *//, is changed 
into ^ ; thus, 

Written Xijmdva}, Xafij3dvw y liupus^ efi(po^oq. 

68. — N, before a *-mute, or £, is changed 
into y (nasal) ; thus, 

evx£t/iat 9 ipovydva)) rov^dva)^ TzXdv^io^ 
written eyxetjMxt, (poyydvio^ Tuy%dvQj y izXdy^u). 

69. — N, before a r-mute, remains unaltered ; 

as, 

£vro£, Govdiw. 

70. — N, before another liquid, is assimilated; 
thus, 

lvf±£v(D y (TuvXapLftdva)) Govpa-Krio^ 
written ififiivto^ GoXXa[iftdvu)^ Gofipdnrio, 

71. — N, before a or £, is usually rejected; 
thus, 

written dac/ioGi, ^bZeu&q. 

Obs. 8. N is retained before g only in a few words ; as, 
Ttpvvq, lXpL&s 3 nbpavGai. Before g followed by a vowel, v 
in gov is assimilated ; thus, goggbixd^ guggltIo.) for GuvGeua), 
cvvGizia, 'Ev retains v before /?, g, f. * 

Of the Letter 21 
72. — In the inflection of the passive voice, a 



20 OF THE LETTER 2. 

standing between two consonants is rejected; 
thus, 

AsAeiTT-G&ajVy Terpift-G#ai) XeXiy-G^oxjav^ 
without 0*, XsXstTrScDVy TeTpi{3-&at y XeXiy-ftaxjav^ 
by rule (56), AeAs(<p&wv 9 zerp{<p&ai, XeXfydaxjav. 

\ And so from yyy6X(7&cu, ijyyiXftcu ; from ^((pavad-ov^ izlyasj- 
#ov, or iz£<pa<r#ov, 

Obs. 9. But when the first consonant is a r-mute, it is 
rejected, and a remains (63) ; thus, 

become £<rx$ua<T&e 9 n£7ret<r&£. 

73. — When v and a <r-mute together are reject- 
ed before <7, e preceding is changed into ei, o into 
ot>, and dcij become a I v ; but y\ and co remain 
unchanged; thus, 

TUtpftivTGi becomes ru<pd>eX<7i\ 
Aiovrat AiovGi \ 



ru(pavT(Tt becomes zbtydat j 
yiyavrat y(yd<n ; 

deizvovTGt deixvuat. 



Obs. 10. In some instances, especially in the nom, sing, 
and in the third person plur. act. of verbs, this alteration 
takes place when v only has been rejected ; thus, from §vq, 
raAavS) /isXavs, come efc, rdXds, fiiXd<;\ and from rbizTovat, 
T£TU(pav<Tt, come totitougi, rerixpdcn. Otherwise the vowel 
remains short ; as, daifiov&ty daijiofft. 

74. — When two consonants meet, which are 
jnot easily pronounced together, the pronuncia- 
tion is sometimes relieved by transposing them, 
or by inserting a third consonant between them ; 
thus, 

eizapftovy by metathesis (52-8th) expaftov. 
aviposy by syncope dvpos, by inserting d (52-3d) dvdp6$ % 



PUNCTUATION. 



21 



75. — Table of words to be corrected accord- 
ing to the foregoing rules : 

(Let the pupil always give the rule for the correction.) 



e'Xixe 8v 


Ut}x" 6 


a>#fiat 


XeiizGco 


XrjpGU) 


<paai ex — 


<p£<paxa 


govt:X£x(o 


Guvyovos 


i7zpdy^v 


eXeye ou$ 


#£d>etxa 


ivfiaivu* 


£v%£u> 


IvfiaXXa) 


elrre 


ay Get 


GDVipipO) 


GovZiio 


TonrovTGt 


izaiai 


izXixao) 


ev(pu%os 


^vXetTzw 


TUTZ&ivTGt 


sloi 


acpGcu 


hxXivoj 


GOVflivO) 


izivd-Goiiai 


VOG(ft 


Tteid-GQ} 


xtypw™ 


Govpia) 


X£ovtgi 


TUTZ&W 


&VUTGOV 


i X £tS 


GuvXrj(pt<; 


iGTaVTGl 


#d<pra) 


XiXexfjicu 


y AWs 


TerunG&at 


xpufizuj 



PUNCTUATION. 

76. — The marks of punctuation in Greek are: 
the comma ( , ) ; the colon and semi-colon ( ; ) ; 
the period ( . ) ; and mark of interrogation ( ; ). 



22 WORDS. 



PART SECOND. 
ETYMOLOGY 



77. — Etymology treats of the different sorts 
of words, their various modifications, and their 
derivations. 

WORDS. 

78. — Words are certain articulate sounds 
used by common consent as signs of our ideas. 

79. — In respect of Formation, words are either 
Primitive or Derivative / Simple or Compound. 

A Primitive word is one that comes from no other; as, 

A Derivative word is one that is derived from another 
word ; as, 7:acdeia 9 dya^ozTjq^ from 7ra7c, dyaftoq. 

A Simple word is one that is not combined with any 
other word ; as, pdXXw. 

A Compound word is one that is made up of two or 
more simple words ; as, ixftdXXw, from ix and pdXXw. 

80. — In respect of Form, words are either 
Declinable or Indeclinable. 

A Declinable word is one which undergoes certain 
changes of form or termination^ to express the different 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 23 

relations of gender, number, case, person, &c., — in gram- 
mar, usually termed Accidents. 

Obs. 1. In every declinable word, there are at least two 
parts, the root or stem, and the termination. The root 
remains unchanged, except by euphony, in all the different 
forms which the word assumes. The termination is added 
to the root, and is varied, to produce these different forms. 

Obs. 2. The variation of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, 
and participles, is called Declension; that of verbs, Con- 
jugation or Inflection. 

An Indeclinable word is one that undergoes no 
change of termination. 

81. — In respect of Signification and Use, 
words are divided into different classes, called 
Parts of Speech. 

PARTS OF SPEECH. 

82. — The Parts of Speech in the Greek lan- 
guage are eight ; viz. : 

83. — Noun or Substantive, Article, Adjective, 
Pronoun, Verb, declined. 

84. — Adverbj Preposition, Conjunction, unde- 
rlined. 

Note. — Any part of speech used simply as a word, and spoken of, is 
regarded as a noun ; thus, 'Eyw is a dissyllable ; vug is an adverb ; i. e., 
the word £ya>, the word 7r<yf, written in Greek rb eyw, rb irug. — Thus 
used it is indeclinable. 

Obs, 1. The participle, regarded by some as a distinct 
part of speech, properly belongs to, and forms a part of, 
the verb. 

Obs. 2. In Greek, the interjections are considered, by 
most Grammarians, as adverbs. 



24 THE NOUN. 

THE NOUN. 

85. — A Noun is tlie name of any person, 
place, or thing. 

Nouns are of two kinds, Proper and Common. 

86. — A Peoper Noun is the name applied to 
an individual only; as, ^Opypog, 9 A§fjv<u; Ho- 
mer, Athens. 

Among these may be included, 

1st. Patronymics, or those which express one's parent- 
age, or family ; as, IIpta/Md-ris, the son of Priam. 

2d. Gentile, or Patrial, which denote one's country; 
as, 'A&yvaTos, an Athenian. 

87. — A Common Noun is a name applied to 
all things of the same sort ; as, dvyjp y a man ; 
olxog, a house / /3//?Xog, a hook. 

88. — Under this class may be ranged, 

1st. Collective nouns, or nouns of multitude, which 
signify many in the singular number ; as, Xaoq, people. 

2d. Abstract nouns, or the names of qualities ; as, tya- 
$6t7}<;, goodness. 

3d, Diminutives, or nouns which express a diminution in 
the signification of the nouns from which they are formed ; 
as, -xatdiov, a little boy * from naTs. 

4th. Amplificative nouns, or those which denote an in- 
crease in the signification of the nouns from which they 
are formed ; as, xeydXwv, a person who has a large head ; 
from x£<pdXrj. 

Note. — A proper noun is the name of an individual, and distinguishes 
that individual from others of the same class. A common noun is the 
name of a class of objects, and is applicable to all the individuals con- 
tained in that class. 



ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 25 



ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 

89. — To Greek nouns belong Person, Gen- 
der \ Number, and Case. 

Person. 

90. — Person, in grammar, is the distinction 
of nouns as used in discourse, to denote the 
speaker, the person or thing addressed, or the 
person or thing spoken of. Hence, 

91. — There are three persons, called the First, 
Second, and Tliird. 

A noun is in the first person, when it denotes the speaker 
or writer ; as, 'Eya> Ilaokos eypaipa, "I Paul wrote it." 

A noun is in the second person, when it denotes the 
person or thing addressed ; as, Mabr n IJaoXe, " Paul, thou 
art beside thyself." 

A noun is in the third person, when it denotes the per- 
son or thing spoken of; as, c llabkoq e<pr h " Paul said." 

Note. — Person has nothing to do either with the form of a noun, or 
with its meaning ; but simply with the manner in which it is used. 
Hence, the same noun may at one time be in the first person ; at another, 
in the second ; and at another, in the third, as in the preceding exam- 
ples. 

Gender. 

92. — Gekder means the distinction of nouns 
with regard to sex. There are three genders, 
Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. 

Of some nouns, the gender is determined by their sig- 
nification / — of others, by their termination. 
2 



I 



26 ACCIDEOTS OF THE NOUN. 

The JUasculirie gender belongs to all nouns which 
denote the male sex. 

The Feminine gender belongs to all nouns which 
denote the female sex. 

The Neuter gender would in strictness include all 
nouns which are not properly male or female. As matter 
of fact, however, in Greek as in Latin, nouns properly 
neuter are distributed among all the genders, and are de- 
termined in this respect by their termination / as, 6 Xoyoc, 
the word y y 6 doc, the road / to xprj/uLa, the thing, 

Nouns which denote both males and females are of the 
Common gender ; in Greek, more strictly, nouns which 
take either the masculine or feminine article. 

Obs. 1. In Greek lexicons and grammars, the gender is 
indicated by the article; viz., 6 indicates the masculine, i), 
the feminine, and to, the neuter; as, 6 avrjp, the man; 
ij yovij, the woman y to £a>ov, the animal. 



Number. 

93.— Number is that property of a noun by 
winch it expresses one or more than one. 

Greek nouns have three numbers, the Singular, 
Dual, and Plural. The Singular denotes one / 
the Plural, more than one. 

The Dual denotes two, and is most commonly used in 
speaking of those things which are produced, or are usu- 
ally spoken of, in pairs. 

Obs. 2. The Dual is not found in the iEolic dialect, in 
the New Testament, in the Septuagint, nor in the Fathers. 
It is most common in the Attic dialect, in which, however, 
the plural is often used instead of it. 



DECLENSION 27 

Case. 

94. — Case is the state or condition of a noun 
with respect to the other words in a sentence. 

95. — Greek nouns have five cases ; viz. : the 
Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and 
Vocative. 

1st. The Nominative case, for the most part, denotes 
an object simply, or as that of which something is af- 
firmed. 

2d. The Genitive connects with it the idea of sepa- 
ration, origin, possession. 

3d. The Dative represents it as that icith which or 
as that to or for which something is said or done. 

4th. The Accusative represents it as affected or acted 
upon by something else, and also as that to which some- 
thing tends or relates. 

5th. The Vocative is used when persons or things are 
addressed. 

Obs. 3. There is no Ablative case in Greek, as in Latin. 
Its place is supplied by the genitive and dative. 

Obs. 4. All the cases except the nominative are called 
oblique cases. 

DECLENSION. 

96. — Decleksiok is the mode of changing the 
terminations of nouns, adjectives, <fcc. 

97. — Words declined by cases consist of two parts, — 
the Root and the Termination. 

98. — The Root is that part which remains unchanged 



28 DECLENSION". 

by inflection, except as required by the rules of euphony. 
It consists, ordinarily, in roots ending in a consonant, 
of all that precedes the termination in the genitive sin- 
gular ; as, Xaprtdd-oq. In roots ending with a vowel, the 
vowel of the root is often blended with that of the ending ; 
as, fiouaa-i, fxoixrrj, Xoyo-oq, Xoyo-o, Xoyoo. 

99. — The Termination is that part which, by its 
changes, indicates the different cases and numbers. 

100. — Nouns, — and also adjectives, pronouns, and par- 
ticiples, — are declined by annexing the terminations, or 
case-endings, to the root, with more or less euphonic 
changes. All the declensions have sprung from one origi- 
nal form, which divides itself in general into two, the con- 
sonant, and the vowel declensions. The consonant declen- 
sion embraces the roots ending in a consonant and the 
close vowels e, t, o (3d declension) ; the vowel declension 
embraces roots ending in a, o (1st and 2d declensions). 

101. — In Greek, there are three declensions, 
corresponding to the first, second, and third in 
Latin. They are distinguished as follows : 

The first declension has the genitive in as, or -qq, from fem- 
inine nominatives ; or in ou from masculine nominatives 
in aq or fjq. 

The second has the genitive in oo, from oc or <>v. 

The third has the genitive in oq, whatever be the nomina- 
tive. 

The difference between these declensions will be seen at 
one view in the following : 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



29 



102. — Table of Terminations, 



First Declension. 
N"om.«, a, rj) aq, 77c, 

Gen. d^s, ^<r, ou y ou, 

Da t- ?> #' 05 fl 9> 

Acc. av, av, ^v, av, 17V, 
Voc. a, a, 17, a, ^. 

N. A. V. a, 
G. D. atv. 

Nom. ar, 
Gen. wv, 

Dat. ats, (atfft) 
Acc. as, 
Voc. a:. 



Second. 
oe, neut. ov, 

OIL 



e, neut. ov. 



Dual. 



01, 

ocv. 



Plural. 
or, neut. a, 
an*, 

ore, (oiai) 
ous, neut. a, 



Third. 
a, r, u, a>, v, />, c (?, ^); 







** 



e, [104. 

a,Exc. as 167-169 & 
like the root. 



oc, 



a. 



o:v. 



eg 9 neut. a, 

OJV, 

as, neut. a, 
e?, neut. a. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
General Rules. 

103. — The vocative for the most part in the 
singular, and always in the plural, is like the 
nominative. 

104. — Nouns of the neuter gender (as if 
deemed worthy of but an imperfect declension) 
have the nominative, accusative, and vocative 
alike ; and these cases in the plural end always 
in a. 

105. — The dative singular ends always in l, 
either annexed or written under. 



Note. — The dative plural (as indicated in the table) also ended origi- 
nally in 1. 



30 FIEST DECLENSION. 

106. — The nominative, accusative, and voca- 
tive dual are alike: so also tlie genitive and 
dative. 

FIRST DECLENSION. 

107. — The Fiest Declension includes all 
nouns whose root ends in a. It has four termi- 
nations of the nominative singular; two femi- 
nine, Yi, a ; and two masculine, >?g, ag. Of these, 
the principal termination is yj. 

Accents. 

108. — Words in the first declension are 
accented according to the following 

Special Rules. 

109. — The genitive plural is for the most 
part perispomenon, i. e., circumflexed on the final 
syllable. 

Exc. — The exceptions are the feminine of adjectives and 
participles in oq y not accented on the last syllable ; and the 
words %pyj<rr>}S) ^ TT j^^ a h an< i apbi), which have xP 7 ! (TTWV i 

110. — In the other cases, so far as the general 
rules permit, the accent always remains on the 
same syllable as in the nominative. 

111. — When the nominative singular is oxy- 
tone, the genitive and dative in all the numbers be- 
come perispomena ; as, rtpj, vifiyjs ; r t^uou^, r^oug. 



SPECIAL RULES FOR FEMININE NOUNS. 



31 



Quantity. 

112. — (a.) The ending a with the genitive in 7}s is 
short * as, S6~a. 

(b.) a with the genitive in as is long. Except fern, ap- 
pellatives in rpta and eta, many compounds in eta and ota, 
and most words in pa after uora diphthong; as, fiafft'Xetd, 
aXyj deed, euvoia, ayxopa. The decent will always determine, 
as the a is long whenever the accent does not indicate it to 
be short, L e., when the word is not a proparoxytone, or a 
proper ispomeno n. 

(c.) a in the dual of this declension is always long ; a in 
the ace. and voc. sing, of fern, nouns follows the nomina- 
tive ; a in the voc. of nouns in aq is long, of nouns in r^, 
short. 

(cl) The ending a^ wherever it occurs in this declen- 
sion, is long; as, veavtdq, %<i>pd.c, rektovaq. 



113* — J^aradigm of Nouns in -q : riiir h honor. 



SIXG. 
"N. TC/JL-7J, 

G. tift-jjs, 

D. Tip.-f h 
A. Tlflrtjv^ 
Y. Tt[±-T]. 



DUAL. 



N". A. V. Tt/i~d, 

G. D. Tt[L-aiv. 



PLURAL. 

N". Tcp.-ai 9 

G. T £//.-<£ V, 

D. Ttfi-aiq^ 
A. TL/JL-dq, 
V. Ttf±-a£. 



SPECIAL RULES FOR FEMININE 

NOUNS. 

114. — Nouns in a have the accusative singular 



m av. 



115. — Nouns in a pure (9), and pa, retain 
a in all the cases of the singular. 

Obs. — To these may be added' a few words ending in 



32 SPECIAL RULES FOR MASCULINE NOUNS. 

da, #a, and a, circumflex, contracted for aa; and a very 
few in Xa and p.a. Such words have a always long ; as, 
§dop.y)Xa, gen. <Pdop.7JXaq, &c. 



1 16 b — Examples. 

I. 2. 3. 

N*. <pd(-a, friendship. 

G. <pdi-aq r 
D. <pdi-a, 
A. (pdi-av, 
V. ipiU-a. 



N". Mdba-a, a muse. 

G. MoOG-1)^ 

D. MooG-rj) 
A. Mouff-avj 
V. Mooa-a. 



N". riiiip-a, a day. 

G. i)fx£p-aq, 

D. ijfiip-a, 
A. ij[±£p-av y 
V. yfiip-a. 



Note. — In the dual and plural, ail nouna of this declension are de- 
clined like rfjtfl^. 

SPECIAL RULES FOR MASCULINE 

NOUNS. 

Jj£7. — Nouns in ^g and ag have the genitive 
in ou, and lose g in the vocative. 

Obs. 1. Some nouns in aq have the genitive in oo or a; 
as, TtarpaXoiaq, gen. izaTpaXowu, or TzarpaXoia, a parricide. 
Some have a only ; as, Oco/xdq, gen. 0w/ia, 27iomas. 

118. — Nouns in rrjg have a in the vocative ; 
as, UoLYjryjgj voc. noirfia. 

Obs. 2. Nouns denoting a people or nation ; as, TUptrrj c, 
a Persian ; compounds in nys ; derivatives from fxerpw, 

7ZU)Xw, and rpiftu) ; also, XdyviQq, Mevai^fxrjq, and Tlopaiyji-qq^ 

have the vocative in a. 

i!9. — In the other cases, masculine nouns are 
declined like the feminine, to which their termi- 
nations correspond. 



DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 



33 





120. — Examples. 






Singular. 




1. 


2. 3. 


4. 


Atrides. 


Citizen. Youth. 


Pythagoras. 


N. 'Arpeid-rjs, 


Tzokir-rjS^ 


veavi-aS) 


Tlu^ayop-a^, 


G. 'Arpetd-ou, 


TZoXir-ou^ 


veavi-oU) 


Ilu^ayop-ou, 


D. y Arp£{d-7], 


izoXir-iQ^ 


veavi-a* 


Jlo#ay6p-a y 


A. 'Arpeid-yv, 


TCOMT-TjV, 


veavi-aV) 


TIu^ay6p-av y 


V. 'Arpetd-7). 


tzoXTt-o.. 


veavi-a. 


Ilud-ayop-a,, 



The dual and plural of masculine nouns are the same as 
of feminine. 

Obs. — Since the termination r t <; belongs also to the third 
declension, it may be observed, that to the first pertain the 
nouns in idr t q or a^c; as, Ouuxudidrjs, y AXxtfitaih}<; — national 
appellatives; as, Itxeltwrr^ ^ — nouns in ttjc, derived from 
verbs ; as, 7ro^r^'c, from izotim ; — compounds from dvovfiat, 
I buy * perpw, I measure ; rpi^io^ I rub, wear; -wXw, I 
sell; and from words already of this declension; e. g., 
, 0?,ufjL7ctovtx7jq <) from vtxrj ; apyedixrjt;, from dixy. Observe, also, 
that all nouns in nyc of the third declension are feminine, 
and inake the genitive in z^ror ; of the first, are masculine, 
and make the genitive in ou. 



DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

121. — Besides the regular terminations exhibited in the 
paradigms, many words are found in different cases de- 
clined according to some of the peculiar dialects. In the 
tables of terminations, A. denotes Attic, I. Ionic, D. Doric, 
JE. JEolic : but the distinctions are not strictly observed 
in every instance, — the same peculiarities sometimes occur- 
ring in two, and sometimes in three dialects. The follow- 
ing words are exhibited as examples, but it is not to be 
inferred that each part of them will actually be found in 
the Greek authors. 



34 



CONTRACTIONS. 



TLfl-f] 



NOM. 
D. a, 



juovG-a ) T 
(piMa ) 
Uvdayop-ag, I. rjg. 



innor-Tj^ 



( D. af. 
(M. a. 



NOM. 



TLfi-ai 



Singular. 





GEN. 




DAT. 


%, 


D. 


af. 


-f/, D. a. 


■vc, 


D. 


af. 


-7?, D. a. 


■a?, 


I. 


?r- 


-ft I« #• 




( L 


£6). 


-ft I. 77. 


ov, 




a. 
ao. 


-ft I). ?• 



Plural. 



GEN. 
( I. £W1\ 

■wv-f D. av, and awv. 



ACC. 
-#v, D. av. 

j--av, I. tjv. 

I. ?tv. 
( I. sa. 



-av. 



.^, 





VOC. 




-?, 


D. 


a. 


- a > 


I. 


?. 




(A. 


af. 


-a, 


u 


7. 


-a, 


A. 


?C. 



DAT. 

■ale, I. fc, and^ff^. 
D. & A. aiffj. 



ACC. 



/ ( I. eag. 



TOO. 



-at. 



Thus, fi7)TtiT7]s, 2£i. iiTjTiira, a wise person / IlrjXetdou, I. 
n-qXeidea), of JPeleides; Aheiou, JE. Ahetao, of JEneas ; 8rj- 
fiais, I. ^/5^<r, or Orj^7j(T^ in TJiebes ; dAoa, I. okorj, perni- 
cious; xpuaia^ I. xpu<rir), golden. For the genitive and 
dative in <pt or <pw, see 187, 188. 

CONTRACTIONS. 

122. — In a concourse of vowels, two syllables 
converted into one form a Contraction. Of con- 
tractions there are two kinds : 

123. — A contraction without a change of 
vowels is more commonly called Synceresis ; as, 
rsixtij by synaeresis, <tzi%u. 

124.— A contraction with a change of vowels 
is a species of Crasis ; as, yea, yyj; <pi%£6, fylfot; 

VOOV, VOVV) OGtEOV, OGtOVV. 

Obs. — If the first of the concurrent vowels is accented, 
the contracted syllable will be circumflexed ; as, <pd(oifii, 



CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 35 

ydoTjit : if the second, the accent will be unchanged by the 
contraction ; as, <ptXeoii±rjv, tpikoipyv : if neither, there will be 
none on the contracted syllable; as, (piles, <piXei. 

125. — In the rules for contractions generally, let it 
be remembered that 

the two short vowels, e, o, 

have their own long vowels, rj, o> y 
and their own diphthongs, ei, oo. 

Note. — Contractions are not necessarily made in all cases where they 
are possible. 

CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST 
DECLENSION. 

126. — In the first declension, no contraction takes place 
unless the first of the concurrent vowels is e, o, or a short, 
and the nominative contracted is then declined regularly. 

RULES. 

127. — Ea not following p is changed into y\\ 
as, 

y(a, earth, y9j, G. yrjq, D. yy, &c, like rtjuj. 
Zpo<r£a, golden, Xpoarj, G. xpverjs, T>. %poaf h &c. 
c Ep/j.£as, Mercury, 'Ep/i^q, G. 'Eppvd, D. "Epprj, &c. 

128. — In p^a and other concurrent vowels, 
the first vowel is absorbed; as, 

TZOp<pup£a, purple, xopcpupa, G. nopyvpaq, D. izop<pupa, &c. 
a-Kko-q, Simple, a-xly, G. ardrjs, &c. 

*A#7)vda, Minerva, 'Afyvd, G. 'Afyvdq, D. 'Ad-qva, &c. 
(115, Obs.) 

'AneMiijs, Apelles, "AneXXyq, G. *AmUmi, D. "AtzsXXt), &C. 



36 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



129.- 

ffeXyvT]) the moon. 
cocptcFrijq^ a sophist, 
TciXeta, a dove. 
Aheiaq, JEneas. 

yicpupa, a bridge. 
Xbaaa^ frenzy, 
xid^aptariqq^ a har- 
per. 
y Ava^ay6pa^^ Anax- 

agoras. 



-Examples for Practice. 



yXtbaaa^ the tongue 
dyopd, the forum. 
Te/vrnys, an artist. 
$ SovTj, pleasure, 
ytovta, an angle, 
ft fa, force. 
avpa y a breeze, 
avia^ sadness. 
dywvtGTTjC) a torest- 
ler. 



eip7jv7] 9 peace, 
(jocpia^ wisdom. 
/jl£Xouvo> 9 black. 
rdXaiva^ miserable. 
Stxrj^ justice. 
j3ouX7j y counsel. 

[idyaipa, a SWOrd. 

(ppovriixariaq^ high- 
minded. 



Note. — Tne learner should decline some of the words in this table 
according to the different dialects : and, in like manner, in the second 
and third declensions, according to their dialects. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 

130. — The Second Declension consists of 
nouns with root in o. It lias two terminations 
of the nominative singular ; o$ and ov ; ov is 
always neuter ; og generally masculine, but some- 
times feminine, and sometimes common. 

Accents. 

131. — Words in the second declension are 
accented according to the following 

SPECIAL RULES. 

132. — As far as the general rules permit 
(25, &c), the accent remains on the same 
syllable in the oblique cases as in the nominative. 
To this rule the genitive plural is no exception. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



37 



JExc. 1. The Attic forms in wq and wv are accented as 
those in oq and ov : i. e., the final long syllable is practi- 
cally shortened so as to permit the accent to remain on 
the antepenult. See 138, dvwyswv. 

133.— In this, as in the first declension, 
oxytones become in the genitive and dative of 
all the numbers perispomena ; as, Seoj, Seov; 

UJxc. 2. Except the genitive singular of nouns in d>s ; 
as, vecoq, gen. veta. 

Examples. 

134:. — Paradigm of the Masculine and Feminine Nouns 

in oq ; 6 loyoq^ the speech. 



SINGULAR. 
N. My-oq, 
G. Xoy-oU) 
D. My-a), 
A. X6y-ov y 
V. My-s. 



DUAL, 



N. A. V. Uy-to, 
G. D. Xoy-oiv. 



PLURAL. 
1ST. Xoy-Ol, 
G. X6y-wv, 
D. Xoy-oiq, 
A. loy-ooq^ 



In like manner are declined nouns in ov, observing the 
general rule (see 104) ; thus : 



135. — Paradigm of Neuter Nouns in ov ; fiirpov, 

a measure. 

DUAL. 



SINGULAR. 

N. fiirp-ov, 
G. fiirp-oU) 
D. fiirp-a)) 
A. figrp-ov, 
V. fiirp-ov. 



N. A. V. fiirp-w, 
G. D. fiiTp-otv. 



PLURAL. 

N". fiirp-a, 
G. fiirp-wv, 
D. fiirp-otq^ 
A. fxirp-a^ 
V. fiirp-a. 



38 



DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



130.-DIALECTS OF THE SECOND 

DECLENSION. 



NOM. 
Xay-oq, A. <&q. 



NOM 



Xay-oi y A. a>. 



Singular. 

GEN. ACO. 

-ot>, A. cu, I -ov, A. <£v, & d>. 
I. & D. 0T0. 

Plural, 

DAT- ACC. 

-oT<r, A. a>£, -owe, A. <tf£. 



I. & D. oT<n. 



D. ok, & 6q. 

JE.otq. 



VOC. 

-£, A. 6q & mq. 



VOC. 



-ot\ A. ci 



.257. — Neuter nouns in the Attic dialect have the 
same terminations with nouns in oq ; except that v is sub- 
stituted for 6. 

Thus it will appear that the Attic form, in which oq is 
changed into (oq f ov into o>v, and 01 into o>, is the principal 
variation in this declension. Observe, however, that d 
long, and r), before o<r, are changed into e before ojq ; as, 
Xaoq, Attic te<l>q. a short remains unchanged; as, ra-6q, 
Ta-6q, or it is contracted with the o into a>q\ as, dyrfpaoq, 
tiyyjpioq. For the genitive and dative in <pi or <pv^ see 187. 

138. — Examples of the Attic Form of the Second 

Declension. 



Xaydtq, for Aaydq, 

a hare. 

N. Xay-d>q y 

G. ?*ay-d> J 

D. Aay-(p, 

A. Xay-6 y or ow, 

V. Xay-wq, or 0£. 



Singular. 
vecy^, for vaoc. dvatyecuv^ for dvcoyeov. 

a temple. a building. 



ve-wq, 

ve-a> y 

ve-cD, 

ve-d)^ or v£tt>v, 

ve-cac, or vaoq. 



dvd>ye-io)> y 

dvcoye-a), 

av<vye~a) y 

dvd>y£-wv y 

dvwye-wv. 



CONTRACTIONS IN THE SECOND DECLENSION. 39 







Dual. 




K A. V. Xay- 


<!>, 


ve-cy, 


dv^e-o;, 


G. D. Xay- 


<pv. 


Plural. 


dvwye-wv. 


N. V. Ia r -<1>, 




ve-cJ, 


dv(6y£-a) 9 


G. Xay-wv, 




ve-aiy, 


avwye-wV) 


D. lay-US) 




ve-tDc, 


avd>ye-a)S y 


A. kay-ws. 




V£-tt>£. 


dvwys-o). 



Obs. — The Attics declined in this manner only a few 
nouns. The same forms occur also in the Ionic and Doric 
writers. After this form, the Attics often declined nouns 
which otherwise belong to the third declension ; as, Mb<D, 
Ace. for Mbcoa, from Mivwq, G. Mlv<do<;* } y£Xwv y Ace. for 
yikiDTd) from yiXmq^ yiXwTos. 



CONTRACTIONS IN THE SECOND 

DECLENSION. 

139. — In the second declension, contractions 
occur rarely, and never unless the first of the 
concurrent vowels is short. 

RULES. 

IdO. — The short vowels so, 00^ oe concurring, 
are changed into ov ; ea into a. 

se in the vocative singular is never contracted. 

141. — A short vowel before a diphthong, or 
long vowel, is absorbed. 



40 CONTRACTIONS IN THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



14:2. — Examples. 
6 v6u$, contracted vovq, the mind. 



SINGULAR. 






DUAL. 




PLURAL. 




N. Rule 1 vo-oc 


vous 




N. A. V. 


K 


2 vo-oc 


vol 


G. 2 vo-ou 


voo 


2 


vo-a> va> 


G. 


2 vo-wv 


vaiv 


D. 2 vo-o) 


V<p 




G. D. 


D. 


2 v6-ot$ 


V0?£ 


A. 1 vo-ov 


voov 


2 


V^-0£V voiV 


A. 


2 vo-ou$ 


vo£>£ 


Y. 1 vo~e 


voo 






V. 


2 vo-oc 


vol 



r6 deriov, contracted ddroDv, #A6 hone. 



SINGULAR. 

IT. Sari-ov dazoov 
G. dori-ov 6gtoo 

A. dari-ov daroov 
V. dazi-ov dazovv 



DUAL. 

K A. V. 
G. D. 

dari-otv daroTv. 



PLURAL. 

N". dari-a 6<xrd 

G. dati-iM Sazwv 

J). 6azi-otq 6gto1<z 

A. darl-a. Sara 

V. oari-a Sard. 



Decline and contract in this manner, irXooq^ navigation / 
/Wos*, a stream; xvooq^ down j ddeX<p idiot, a nephew* 



14:3. — Words for Practice. 



ayyeXo^ a messenger, 
tierd^ an eagle. 
<i&Xo<z, a combat. 
aftXov, a prize. 
a/j.7r£Xoq, a vine. 
Spy o pot, silver. 



frpyuptov, silver, 
epyov^ work. 
ixrjXov, an apple, 
voroq^ the south wind. 
olxoq, a house. 
naidiov, a child. 



pddov, a rose. 
aidrjpoS) iron. 
GTpar6<; y an army. 
(popriov, a burden. 
^aXxdq^ copper. 
Xpu<r6q y gold. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 4:1 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

144. — The Third Declension lias seven ter- 
minations of the nominative singular, a, i, i>, o y 
— v, p, g (£, ^) : it has all genders, and increases 
the noun by one syllable in the oblique cases. 

The roots (or stems) of this declension end either in a 
consonant or vowel. The consonant roots end in the 
mutes— 

*i x, r, 

ft r> d i 

or in the liquids — 

A, v, p (none in /i, and but one in /) ; 
or in s. 

The vowel roots end in :, u, a few in o, or in a diph- 
thong. 

145. — The root, seldom unchanged in the 
nominative, is usually, though not always, 
found from the genitive singular by omitting og 
(98). 

The oblique cases are usually formed by 
adding the terminations (102) to the root. 

Accents. 

146. — Words in the third declension are 
accented according to the following 

SPECIAL EULES. 

147. — The accent, in the oblique cases, remains 



42 THIED DECLENSION. 

on the accented syllable of the nominative, as 
far as the general rules permit (see 25-29). 

Exc. 1. But dvTjp, SaTjp, 7zaT7jp, and gidttjp^ in the voca- 
tive, throw the accent back on the penult ; as, avsp y Sd£p 7 
&c. See 171, Exc. 

JSxc. 2. When the genitive singular ends in wq instead 
of oq (154), there is no change of accent, and (the long 
vowel o) being treated practically as short, as in Att. sec. 

dec.) the genitive plural is accented as the genitive singu- 
lar 5 as, TtoXiq^ Tzoleioq^ izoXecov. 

148. — In monosyllabic nouns, the accent in 
the genitive and dative of all the numbers is on 
the ultimate, and this, if long, is circumflexed ; 
as, novg, Ttohog, 7toholv, rtoh&v. So also yvvYj, 
ocvcdVj and syncopated substantives in yjp. 
(164.) 

JExc, 3. Except £«<r, a torch; fytewe, a slave / #<ac, a 
jackal / xpdq, xparog, the head/ o5^, the ear ; itdis^ a child/ 
<n?<r, a moth/ Tpwq^ a Trojan / <pws, a blister / <?&<;, light/ 
which, in the genitive plural, and in the genitive and 
dative dual, retain the acute accent on the first syllable. 

Except also participles of one syllable ; as, Sous, &foro?, 
&c. ; and the dual and plural of 7rdc, viz. : navTotv, 7zdvra)v J 

izdai. 

149. — The vocative of nouns in arg, evg, 
ovg, 6), and cog, has the circumflex on the final 
syllable ; as, ypav, (3aOL%6v y &c. 

150. — Nouns in the third declension are 
declined, in general, as follows : 



FORMATION OF THE NOMINATIVE. 



43 



151. — Paradigm of Masculine and Feminine Nouns ; 
6 #7jp, the wild beast (root, ti^p) . 



SINGULAR. 

G. $7]p-6<;, 

J), ftyp-c, 

A. drip-a, 

V. fojp. 



DUAL. 



N". A. V. &?#-€, 

G. D. #7}p-0?V. 



PLURAL. 
N. $rjp-e<;, 

G. #7)p-WV, 
D. #7)p-<Tl\ 

A. #7jp-as, 
V. #7}p-es. 



Neuter nouns are declined in the same man- 
ner, observing tlie general rule (see 104). 



132. — Paradigm of Neuter Nouns ; ffifia, a tribunal 
(root, fty/iar, and r rejected in the nominative). 



SINGULAR. 

G. ^Tjfxa-roq^ 
D. firjfia-rt, 
A. fiijfia, 



DUAL. 



N. A. V. j37Jjia-T£ y 

G. D. fte fid-row. 



PLURAL. 

N". pTJfia-ra, 

G. pTJfld-TWV, 

D. ftrjfia-ffi, 63. 
A. Prjfia-ra^ 
V. ^fia-ra. 



FOBMATION OF THE NOMINATIVE. 

153. — 1. Masculine and feminine nouns, (a.) The 
nominative singular of masculine and feminine nouns 
regularly ends in c, which is appended to the stem, with 
euphonic modifications ; as, 



44 FORMATION OF THE NOMINATIVE. 



STEM. 




- 


XafATcad 


XapLTtads 


Xafnzaq (63) 


dvaxv 


dvaxrq 


avaf (63, 62) 


odovT 


ddovrq 


ddobq (73) 


TVlpOLVT 


rucpavrq 


Ti)4>as (73) 


Xeupdevr 


Xeupdevrq 


XeHpdeis (73) 


Bern. — Also nod. 


, Ko6g ) becomes nobs, foot 





154:. — (b.) Liquid stems, however, generally reject c, 
and lengthen, in compensation, the radical vowel; as, 

7ZOtp.ijv i for TZoi[isv-q 5 pyjrwp^ for fiyrops. 

JExc. MiXdq, rdXdq, from jieXav, raXav ; el<r, xrefc, from 
iv 9 xt£v\ aXq, from dX'j deXfiq or deX<piv, and <popxbq or 
(popxbv^ from deX<ptv, (popxov. 

15 5 . — (c.) Most nouns in ovr and participles in ovr, in 
which the o is not a radical, but a connecting vowel (as, 
Xey-o-vr)^ instead of adding <r, reject final r, and make 



wv ; as, 



)<eovr Xicov. tdtztovt tutztwv. 

But participles in opt, with o radical (as, &>-vt), make ous; 

as, dtdovr, dtdobq ; ^ovr, dobq. 

156.— (d.) Stems in e<r, o<r, or, oj£, simply retain the 
radical <r, or (as in or) change r into <?, and all lengthen 
the radical vowel, if short ; as, 

STEM. 

rp types rpa/jp-qq, aldoq aldwq y ?jpo>q ^^C, 

rert>^or T£TU<pd>q y <po)T <pu>q. 

157. — (e.) Feminine stems in o reject q\ as, -Ktido, 
nei6d>. 



FORMATION OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 45 

158. — (/.) Some vowel-stems in a, e, o make the nom- 
inative in a diphthong by inserting u softened from the 
original fab (digamma) ; as, Pacdef, fia<rdeu<; 9 /3a<rtXeu; 
ypaf, ypao, ypaoq ; $of, /Sou, pouc. Those in eu<; form a 
large class, and have the Attic genitive wc. 

159. — 2. Neuter nouns. Neuter nouns, not being 
subject to full declension, do not take c in the nominative. 
When it appears, therefore, in these nouns, it is radical ; 
a6, reX X oq 9 for root retxsq ; ffiXa^ for ffiXac; ; rfyc^, for repar 
(the r not closing a word). Generally, r falls away; as, 
(Ta>fia, for (Tco/iar; -xpayfia, for n pay par. Ez goes into o? in 

neuter nouns; as, re^ec, re?/oc: in neuter adjectives it 
remains / as, dXyftgs. 



FORMATION OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 
1. The Genitive Singular. 

160* — The oblique cases usually add their 
endings to the unmodified stem. The genitive 
singular makes the ending og ; as, 

NOM. STEM. GEN. 

6 izaiav naiav Tzaidv-oz 

to fiiXi fxeXcr ixiXir-oq 

ij Xafinds Xa/nrad Xafnzdo-oq 

6 ™ a * dvaxr avaxr-oz 

Note. — Kvov (st. kvov) makes by syncopation kwo^ &c. 



161. — Stems in a$ (when it does not stand 
for ar; as, repag, for repar), eg, og, og, drop g in 
the genitive and the other oblique cases ; as, 



46 FORMATION OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 





STEM. 








(j£Xaq 


ceXaq 


G&kaoq 


for 


<reAaaos 


rpcTJpys 


Tp types 


rpc7Jpeo<; 


u 


rptJ)pe(Tog 


dkySis 


dArjdez 


dXrjdioq 


a 


dkrjdtGoq 


T£l%OS 


reives 


refyeoq 


a 


Tet%£<ros 


ftpwq 


ripax; 


tfpajoq 


a 


ijpOHTOS 


aidmq 


aldos 


aldooq 


a 


aido<To<z 



162. — Some stems in l, v (nom. tg, i, vg y v) 
change these vowels into e, and those in eg and 
vg make the genitive in 05 instead of og ; as, 





STEM. 


GEN. 


i) 7z6Xi<; 


izokt 


7r6X-ew<; 


6 izrjxix; 


izriyro 


7t7J%-ea)<; 


to aaro 


d(TTU 


a<jT-eos 


to aivaizt 


Givant 


Givdn-eoq 



Exc. Adjectives in i>c, t>, as (bxoq^ eia, t>, make the geni- 
tive in og * as, wxios, &c. 

163. — Certain nouns in tyjp tepog syncopate 
the genitive and dative singular (accenting in 
these cases the final syllable), and the dative 
plural; as, 

V 

it oLTTJp, father {naz(pog)^ izazpos. 
{izazipt) izazpi 

flTJTTJp, fJ.7jTp6<; 9 fXTjTpC. 

d\>7Jp y dvdpoq (dvipoq}, dvdpt. 

So in part, Y a<rr7 1P> belly; dTjfiTjTyp, Ceres; duydzrip, 
daughter. 



FORMATION OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 



47 



164. — Adjectives and participles. As above intimated, 
adjectives and participles are subject to the same general 
rules, in forming both the nominative and the oblique 
cases, as substantives; as, 



NOM. 


STEM. 


GEN. 


eonarpcg 


ei)7rarptd 


ei)7rdTptdoq 


dfaous 


dtizod 


diTzodos 


ripTjv 


repev 


ripevo": 


%ap(ecs 


%aptevr 


%apfcvTos 


eras 


GTdVT 


(TTavrog 


AeX&ek 


k£%0evT 


Xe%-&£vTo<z 



2. The Accusative Singular. 

165. — Tlie accusative singular of masculine 
and feminine nouns commonly ends in a. But 



Special Rules. 



166. — Pure nouns (as those in cg y vg, ecus, oig y 
ovg) make the accusative in v ; as, 



NOM. 



STEM. 



GEN. 



ACC. 



o<pt<;, serpent 




6<pt cxpt-os 


o<ptv 


ftorpus, a bunch 


of grapes 


ftorpu fioTpuoq 


ftorp 


vclds, a ship 




va (yaf) va-oq (Doric) 


vaov 


o7<r, a sheep 




ol ol-oq 


olv 


pouq, an ox 




$o (pof) i?o-oc 


ftouv 


Xaaq^ a stone 




Xaa Xda-oq 


Xaav 



JSxc. Stems in eu (nom. eoq) and in o (nom. w), make 
a; as, 

STEM. AOC. 

ftacdeus fiaGtAsu ^aatkia 

7t€L$a> 7t£t$o net&oa (nei&to) 



48 FORMATION OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 

Rem. — Stems in ef, of, o>f, are but an apparent exception, being 
declined as pure nouns, but from an impure root; as, 

STEM. ACC. 

rptTJpTjc Tptqpeg rptTjpea {rpiijprj) 

evyevfc evyevec evyevea (evyevij) 

aldug aldog a\66a (aldti) 

rjpug VPW qpua 

167. — Compounds of novg, a foot, have a or 
ovv; as, hinovg (&7to5s), SinoSa, or hinovv. 

168. — Barytone stems in vt 9 c8, 60, v$, vd, com- 
monly reject the radical consonant, and make 
the accusative in v ; as, 



NOM. 


STEM. 


ACC. 


epts, strife 


ipid 


epiv 


X d P l * ,, 


yapcr 


yap tv (rarely yap it a) 


x6po<; 


xopod- 


xopuv 



Note. — The Epic accusative of these words is often a. 

3. The "Vocative Singular. 

169. — The vocative singular of masculines and 
feminines is regularly like the stem; thus, 



NOM. 


STEM. 


roc. 


ftTJTTJp 


fX7)T£p 


fJLTjTep 


firJTwp 


/57jTOp 


pTJrop 


o<pi<; 


6<pi 


6<pt 


P6rpu<^ 


fiorpu 


fidrpU 


PaaiXeus 


ftacrdeu 


ftaaiXeo 



170. — Oxytone liquids (i. e., liquid stems 
acuted on the ultimate) retain in the vocative 
the long vowel of the nominative (154) ; as, 



FORMATION OF THE OBLIQUE CASES. 49 



NOM. 


STEM. 


VOC. 


XcjJLjjy 


XlfJLSV 


XtfJLTJV 


7tOlfJLTJV 


TZQllLZV 


7ZOIJJ.7JV 



Except 7rarrjp, &v7jp y Sarjp, which, however, as they draw 
back the accent, and make -rzarep^ avep y daep, are thus but 
seeming exceptions. 

Also *Aiz6XXw\>, Iloaetdwv^ <ja)T7Jp, though long not only in 
the nominative but in the stem (Gen., 'AnoXXajvo^ &c), still 
shorten the vocative, and make 'AnoXXov, II6<jeidov y <7a>rep. 

171. — Monosyllables, not having a diphthong, 
make the vocative like the nominative ; as, 

*fc, VOC. xtq (but vau<T, vau ; 7ra?c, 7ra?). 

172. — Stems in a mute make the vocative like 
the nominative ; as, 

STEM. 

<pbXa% <puXax <puXa% 

XafiTcdz Xafinad Xainz&s 

JE/XC. * 'ApTeytz ^ApTefitd) "ApTEfit 

yvvrj (yovatx) yvvai (irreg.) 

173-4. — Feminine stems in og and o (nom. 
tog and g>), make the vocative quite irregularly in 



oi) as, 






NOM. 


STEM. 


VOC. 


aid cbs 


aid os 


aldoT 


izetOcb 


net do 


netdol 


3 







50 THE DATIVE PLTTKAL. 

175. — Koots in vt (as, ag avrog, etg cvtog, qv 
ovrog) have the vocative in av, ev, and ov ; as, 



NOM. 


ROOT. 


TOG. 


Alas, 


A lavr, 


Atav. 


Xapt£is y 


XapisvTy 


Xapiev. 


Xiwv^ 


XeovT. 


Xiov. 



Except oxytones, which make the vocative as nomina- 
tive; as, 

ddous, R. odovr, V. ddooq. 

Note. — In proper names the poets often reject v ; as, Ala, for Aiav. 

176. — Participles in this declension make the 
vocative like the nominative. 

THE DATIVE PLURAL. 

177. — The dative plural is formed by adding 
at to the root. Besides the changes required by 
the rules of euphony (63), other changes are to 
be noticed under the following — 



Special Rules. 

178. — Nouns in evg, avg, and ovg, add at to 
the actually existing root (as, /Jacrt/Ufi), not to 
its original form (as, fiacihef) ; as, 

NOM. 

6 ftaadeuq, the king, 
y vau$ 9 the ship, 
i} ftous, the cow, 

Exc. But nous, afoot, R. nod, has kogL (from nodet). 



ROOT. 


D. PLURAL. 


fiaGCASU, 


PaGtAsu-Gt. 


vau, Doric. 


vao-<j(. 


$00, 


$00-61. 



THE DATIVE PLURAL. 



51 



179. — Nouns in r>/p, -repog, after a syncope, 
have act (164) ; as, 

Tzarrip^ G. nazip-oq^ (izazzpat) by syncope, ~azpdai. 
So &V7JP) dvip-oq^ (dveptrt) " dvopdat. 

Exc. — But yaGTTJp, G. yaazip-oq^ has sometimes yaaz^pai. 



Examples of the Preceding Rules. 

In the following examples, note the difference between them and the 
example ##p, -&rjpog (151), and give the rule for the difference. 

180. — Stems in a mute consonant [labial or palatal). 

6 xopa$ ij <p\iip ij 6pi% Xdpuyz XalXa^ 

(xopax) fyXeP) (zpcy) (Xapuyy) 

raven vein hair throat 



(XaiXan) 9 

whirlwind 



N. xdpaq 
G. xopaxoq 
D. xopaxi 
A. xopaxa 
V. xopaq 



<pX((p 
(pXefiog 

<pXefii 
fpXifia 



Singular. 
$pK 

zptyoq 

zpiyi 

Tpi%a 

*P>; 



XdpuyZ; 
dpoyyoq 

dpuyyc 

dpuyya 

dpuyq 



A 



Dual. 
N\ A. V. xopaxe tpAifte z pfy*i 

G.'D. xopdxow <pXsfio~iv rpc^olv 

Plural. 
wXifieq zptysq 

vXzjSwv zpiyjbv 

<pXe(l>i {f-pici 

<pX£fiaq zpiyaq 
yXifteq Tpijzq 



N". xopaxsq 
G. xopdxiov 
D. xopaqt 
A. xopaxaq 
V. xopaxeq 



Xdpoyye 

Xapuyyotu 

Xdpuyyeq 
Xapbyyutv 
Xdpuyzt 
Xapuyy a$ 
Xdpuyyzq 



XdtXatp 

XaiXa~oq 

XalXajzi 

A.aiXaiza 

XaTXaip 

XaiXaizs 
XatXdnotv 

XatAa~eq 

XaiXd-aiv 

XaiXaipt 

XaiXarzaq 

XatXarzeq 



181. — Masculine and feminine stems in a lingual mute. 

rj XajiTzdq 7} xopuq 6 avaq Xiwv 

[XafiTzad) (xopuff) (avaxz) (Aeovr) 

torch helmet king lion 



5 <S ' 

Coouq 

(odour) 

tooth 



52 



THE DATIVE PLUBAL. 



til 





Singular. 






N. lajiizas 


xopus 




XiiOV 


ddooq 


G. Xap.7za.d-oq 


x6po#-o$ 


avaxr-oc 


Xiovr-os 


oddvZ'Oq 


D. Xap.7td.d- 1 


xopo$-i 


avaxT-i 


X(0VT-l 


odovr-t 


A. XapTzdd-a 


xopo$-a 


avaxr-a 


XiovT-a 


odovz-a 


V. XapTtas 


xopo 


V 

ava 


Xiov 


6doo<z 



Dual. 



N. A. V. Xapndd-e xopo&s avaxr-s Xiovr-e ddovr-e 
G. D. Xapnad-otv xopbd-ow avdxr-otv Xeovr-oiv ddovz-ow 



N. Xapndd-ss 
G. Xapnad-wv 
J). Xap.7id-Gi 
A. Xapizad-aq 
V. Xap.7tdd-eq 



Plural. 

xopuft-ss avaxT-eg Xiovr-ss Sdovr-ss 

xopbd-wv avdxr-wv Xeovr-wv odovT-wv 

xopo-ai avaifi Xioo-at ddoo-a: 

xopod-aq avaxr-as Xiovr-a<; Sdovr-aq 

x6po$-e$ avaxz-es Xiovr-eg 6d6vT-s<; 



182. — -Neuter stems in r, partly loiih irregular 

nominative* 



to crwpa 


ripaq 


r\7zap 


dopo 


odwp 


(awpar) 


{repar\ 


(rjTcar) 


(do par) 


(6dar) 


body 


portent 


liver 


spear 


water 




Singular. 






N. cwpa 


ripas 


rjnap 


dopo 


odwp 


G. cm par-os 


ripar-os 


7]7ZaT-0Z 


dopar-oq 


odar-os 


D. awpaz-i 


ripar-t 


i]7zar-i 


do par -i 


odar-t 


A. Gajpa 


ripas 


r\7zap 


dopo 


odwp 


V. cwjia 


ripas 


rjnap 


dopo 


odwp 



THE DATIVE PLURAL. 



53 



Dual. 



N, A. V. (TWfiar-s ripar-e fJTzar-e dopar-e odar-e 
G. D, Gwp.dr-otv repdr-otv yTzdr-otv dopdr-ow oddr-ow 



Plural. 



N". Gcu/iar-a 


ripar-a 


r\izar-a 


dopar-a 


odar-a 


G. GU)p.dr-iov 


repdr-mv 


ijTzdr-iov 


dopdr-wv 


oddr-oju 


D. G(I>p.a-Gi 


ripa-Gi 


r^iza-Gt 


dopa-Gt 


oda-Gi 


A. (TCojjLar-a 


ripar-a 


fjizar-a 


dopar-a 


odar-a 


V. G(6 t aar-a 


ripar-a 


rpzar-a 


dopar-a 


odar-a 



183* — Stems in a liquid consonant. 

6 datpLwy 6 7zocp.rjv 6 yscpttuv 6 Tzaryjp 
(datjiov) (jzot/ne^ (jrec/ia)^ (jzarep} 

divinity shepherd storm father 



6 dvrjp 
(avep) 
man 



Singular. 



N. dac/iww 
G. daif±ov-o$ 
D. dacpLov-t 
A. datjjLOv-a 
V. dalfjiov 



7Z0CJJLTjV 

—otfiiv-os 

TZOLfliv-l 

7zoi[±iv-a 
7roifj.rjy 



%eifj.Q)v rzarrjp 

yz'.fiwv-oq 7:arp-6q 

ystfiwv-z izarp-i 

ystfjumv-a izarip-a 



X el i 



flOJV 



7zarep 



avrjp 

dvdp-oq 

dvdp-i 

avdp-a 

a>sp 



Dual. 



N". A. V. dat/ioV'S 7zoif±iv-£ yetfia>v-t narip-t avdp-e 
G. D. datfioy-otv 7zoi t uiv-otv ystfidtv-ow Tzarip-otw dvdp-olv 



IS. dafaov-es 
G. dai[x6v-u)\> 
J). da(jj.o-Gt 
A. daiiiov-aq 
V. daifio>-sq 



Plural. 

7C0tjiiv-£<; %~t/iaJv-£S Tzarip-eq avdp-eq 

izoifxiv-ajv ysc/KDv-ujv izarip-cov dvdp-wv 

xotfii-Gt yetficb-Gi Tzarpd-Gt dvdpd-GC 

Tzottiiv-aq yscpLWv-aq ~arip-aq avdp-aq 

7totfj.iv-£S yetfiajv-eg 7zarip-sq audp-eq 



54 



DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



18 '4. — Stems in a vowel or diphthong (see below, under 

contract nouns). 



6 


VOpL£U<Z 


ij go<; 


5 (bxbq 


$ Pods 


7) TCoXlS 




(yofieu) 


(«>) 


(dtxu) 


m 


{jzoXt) 


pasturer 


SOW 


swift 


COW 


city 






Singular. 






K 


vo/jl£u<z 


GDS 


(bx6<z 


Poos 


TZoXlS 


G. 


voi±£-(jjq 


ao-6q 


<bx£-o$ 


po-oq 


-jroXe-ax; 


D. 


VOfli-4 


a. 

GU-L 


mxi-'i 


fimt 


TzoXe-i 


• A. 


vo/ii-a 


gov 


(bxi-a, cbxbu 


ftouv 


noXiv 


V. 


vofieu 


GO 


(bxb 


Poo 


izoXt 


- 






Dual. 






N. A. V. 


voui-s 


GO'S 


wxi-s 


P6-e 


noXe-e 


G.D. 


VOfli-OLV 


GO-OW 


(bxi-otv 
Plural. 


Po-olv 


noXi-otv 


N. 


vofxi-eq 


GO-£S 


(bxi-eq 


Po-es 


7z6Xe-e<; 


G. 


vo/ii-wv 


GO-WV 


wxi-cov 


Po-ojv 


izoXe-wv 


D. 


VO{l£U-Gl 


GO-6L 


(bxi-Gt 


P()0-Gt 


TzoXe-Gt 


A. 


uofii-aq 


6U-OIS 


(hxi-aq 


po-aq 


7z6Xe-aq 


V. 


vo/jj-sq 


GV-eq 


wxi-eq 


po-eq 


7TtfA£-££ 



DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLEN- 
SION. 

185. — From the variety of terminations in nouns of 
this declension, it is impossible to exhibit them in one 
concise table. But the general principles are : — The nom- 
inative and vocative Attic are alike ; the Attic genitive is in 
ew?, instead of eoq and to*; ; the Ionic has y in the penult, 
through the oblique cases, instead of e and a ; and with 
the poets makes sgi or zggi instead of <n, in the dative 
pluraL 



THE PARAGOGIC (ft OR piv, #<, &ev } AND de. 55 




GEN. 
I. f/og. \ 
bfj -J D. & > A. ewf , 
JR. evg. ) 
-cog, A. eog. 
■a6g } I. 7?df & s6g m 

6og, JE. cog. 



Singular. 

DAT. ACC. 

-ea. 



nom. and yoc. 
( A. f,g. 
pacd-teg. < or yg. 
\ I. ^£f. 



(5Z. 
Plural. 



-eZ, I. f/l. 

•u. 

-at, I. $f. 



I. fja. 



-vv, ea. 

-cv. 

■avv, I. yw, fja. 

•6a, \ L ™ V - 



retx-ecL. 



I. 7/ef. 



GEN. 

-£WP, I. 7/CJV. 

-acov, I. 7?gw. 



DAT. 



-ecov. 



( I. ^<7f. 

( P. tjeggl. 
/ ( I. 77V0I 

( P. 7£(T(7i. 
( L EGGL. 

-coy, -j 

( P. eeggl. 



VOC. 
-ei>, A. e{»f. 

-w, A. t'f. 
-f, A. ff. 
-at>, A. avg. 

-oZ, A.^c. 

ACO. ' 
-sag, I. ^af . 
-fl%, I. yag. 
-ea. 



186. — Thus, Gen. yettsos, of a lip, Dor. ydleoq ; Voc. 
Masc. duo-ruyjc, Attic duo~TO'/Tj<; ; as, diHTzuyijS yipov^ O unfor- 
tunate old man* Dat. pi. yjpc', Ion. yjipecrm^ to hands; 
Accus. il^™, Latona, Ion. yl^rouv; Gen. ao-reog, of a city, 
Attic a<jTsu)q\ Voc. a/£oT, modesty, Attic aloco?. 

THE PARAGOGIC <|>6 or $«>, 3*, &ev, and <5s. 

187. — The ending <pi, especially in Epic poetry, some- 
times appears as an ending for- the genitive and dative, 
of both numbers. In the first declension (always singu- 
lar), Ph)<pi) with violence; in the second, fteocpt, with the 
gods j in the third (generally plural), ax oyza<pi,from the 
car ; Ttapd vaTxpt, by the ships. 

188. — The endings #*, #sv, and de are also occasionally 
annexed to the word, forming a species of case-ending ; 
6t, with the signification of in a place, &ev,from a place, 
fe, to a place / as, obpavbd', in heaven ; oupavoftzv, from 
heaven / obpavovds, to heaven. 



56 



GENDERS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



They are employed with all the declensions, and are 
added to the root; as, akkodt, elsewhere; o?xo-#£v, from 
home. Sometimes a is changed into o ; as, piZoftev (from 
piZa), and o after consonants appears regularly as a union 
vowel. 

GENDERS OF THE THIRD DECLEN- 
SION. 

189 • — The Genders of substantives of the third declen- 
sion, so far as determined by the termination, are as 
follows : — 

RULES. 

190. — Nouns in evg, ag -avtog, ov and ov$ 
-ovrog, eig evtog, av, vv, yjg -yjrog (exc. t>7$), cog 
-orog, or. Yip, op, are nearly always masculine / as, 



eu$ 


dyebq 


6 a clasp 


Gen. 


oyioq 


aq -avToq 


dvdptdq 


6 a statue 




dvdptdvzoq 


wv 


kilDV 


6 a lion 




Xiovros 


ouq 


6 dobs 


6 a tooth 




odovros 


av 


xatdv 


6 a pcean 




izaidvoq 


uv 


<popxov 


6 a harbor 




<popxuvos 


wv 


datfiiov 


6 a divinity 




daijjLOvo<; . 



191m — Nouns in ag -aSog, ryjg -ryjrog, at>g, cog 
and d) -oog, and verbals in ig, are always femi- 



nine y as, 

as, -ados 

TT)S, -T7)TOS 

aus 
to 

ts, verbal 



Xafrnds, $ a torch Gen. XapiTzddos 

xaxdrrjS, i} wickedness xaxoTTjTOS 

vads, ij a ship vaos 

yetdw, rj parsimony <petd6os 

<pbas, % nature <pb<j£ios 



PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 57 

192. — Nouns in a, l, v, ag -arog, og, and op, 
are always neuter j as, 

a Praia, to a tribunal Gen. firj/j.aTos 

t fiiAi, to honey p.i/uTos 

U 7T&ILJJ TO a jlOCk 7Z(b'£0<Z 

as -aros xpias, to flesh xpiaTos 

os Tel%os 9 to a wall Tetyeos 

op aop 9 t6 a sword aopos 

Obs. 1. Nouns of other terminations (especially those 
in 7T, /?, <p, x 5 y^ y) are so varied in gender, that no general 
rule can be given respecting them. 

Obs. 2. Dialect frequently varies the gender in all the 
declensions. Thus, fiaroq is masculine in Attic, otherwise 
feminine / and so of others. 

WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRE- 
CEDING RULES. 

193. — Decline the words in the following list ; accent them; give 
the rule for the genitive and the accent, and for the other cases when 
they vary from the general rule. 

6 Ytyw (ovt) the old man. to opos the mountain. 

ij arjdtov (6) the nightingale. 6 opeos the mule. 

6 olyxwv the elbow. ij <pX6~ (y) the flame. 

6 arjp (e) the air (171). 6 %fy the goose. 

ij kkxis (d) the hope. ij izpasts the action. 

y epts (d) the strife. i) fir}£ (y) the cough, 

ij xopus (#) the helmet. •% caps (*) the flesh. 

to xup.a (r) the wave. $ %i<&> (o) the snow. 

6 fjnjv the month. 6 ljj.ds (vr) the thong. 

to av&os the flower. $ nfrvs the pine. 

rb y&os the race. 6 fidvns the seer. 

ij axTts (v) the ray. ij al£ (y) the goat. 

6 TzivTjs (r) the poor man. 6 ?u/itjv (e) the haven. 
3* 



58 CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD 
DECLENSION. 

194. — In the oblique cases in the third de- 
clension there is no contraction, unless the first 
of the concurrent vowels is short, i. e. ? e, o, a, t 7 v. 

In verbs and in some other contractions, the first of the 
concurrent vowels is sometimes long. 



GENERAL RULES. 

193. — The following rules are general, being applica- 
ble not only to contractions of the third declension, but 
to all cases of contraction, except in the first and second 
declensions (see 126-128 and 139-141). Concurrent 
vowels are contracted as follows : — 

196. — The two short vowels es and oo are 
contracted into their respective diphthongs ; as, 
ee into si, oo into ov. 

JSxe. 1. In the third declension, ee of the dual is con- 
tracted into 7}. 

197. — Eo and oe are contracted into ov. 

198. — A short vowel with a is contracted 
into its corresponding long vowel; as, ea into 
yj ; oa into o. 

Exc. 2o But ea pure into a. 



COSTTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 59 

199. — A short vowel witli r, is contracted by 
Synceresis / as, si into ec, o'C into ol. 

200. — E before a long vowel or a diphthong 
is absorbed. 

JEJxc. 3. But in verbs, eat is contracted into #. 

201. — with a long vowel (yj or o) is con- 
tracted into o ; as, oyj into co, o« into co. 

202. — with a diphthong is absorbed by the 
diphthong ; as, ooc ol, oov ov. 

JExc. 4. But oei$ and oew, t being rejected, are contract- 
ed into ouq and ouv. 

203. — A with o or o, is contracted into o ; 
as, ao or ao, into o. 

204. — A with a vowel other than o or o, is 
contracted into d; as, ae into a, &c. 

Obs. 1. J before a diphthong is contracted with the 
prepositive vowel only, the subjunctive being rejected. 

Obs. 2. In contraction, c is not rejected, but regularly 
written under: except in oetv and oetq (202, Exc. 4). 

Obs. 3. Neuters in aq pure and pas, reject r of the root 
in the oblique cases, and then contract the concurrent 
vowels. 

205. — If the former of two vowels is i or v, or 
a long vowel, the latter is absorbed; as, ie con- 
tracted l , VS } V ; >7£, Y[. 

Note. — Idoc and cr<5of, safe, when a contraction occurs, are contracted 
by the foregoing rules ; thus, cdog i o&g, 203 ; caov, oav, 203 ; cda } ca, 
204; odovq, c&g, 203; coa^ cue, 198, 



60 



EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 



EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES 
FOR CONTRACTIONS. 

206. — The following list comprises all the concurrent 
vowels that usually admit of contraction. Contract them 
and give the rules. 



1 aa 

2 ss 

3 u 

4 oo 

5 as 

6 ovf] 

7 at 

8 ao 

9 am 

10 ast 

11 arj 



12 aot 

13 aou 

14 ea 

15 ea, pure 

16 si 

17 so 

18 su> 

19 sip 

20 eat 

21 set 

22 *s 



23 eot 

24 sow 

25 t?s 

26 ^ 

27 ^ 

28 fjat 

29 is 

30 oa 

31 os 

32 o^ 

33 oi 



34 ooj 

35 oec 

36 or) 

37 oor 

38 ooo 

39 ya 

40 oe 

41 u-q, rare 

42 wa 

43 wt 



Words for Practice. 

207. — In the following words, contract the concurrent vowels, give 
the rule for each contraction, change the accent where required after 
contraction, and give the reason for the change. 



TptTjpSS^ 

A7)fio<T#iveo$ 

Xpiea (198, exc. 2) 

<ptX£u) 

rptrjpiotv 

rtp.dop.sv 

rtpdooat 

xipai 

fiorpues 

xspdotv 

pspiotv 

itdXses 



ArjjioG$iv£e Ay-doc psXtrosv 

sap Arn±oG&£vsa Arjroa 



ArjfioG&ivsi Atjtoi 

<ptXistc dr)X6a> 

SrjXoot SrjXooo 

Ttp.au) Xdac 

rtpdst rtpajj 

xipac -aros o<ptsc 

rtftqat TtflTJSV 

pipsoc fiipei 

fiipea pspiiDv 

<pstdoo<z <pstdoi 



HpaxXirj? 

drj?*6r]Te 

SrjXo7j 

ripas 

rtpdstc 

6<pu 

xipaa 

pipes 

toXs'i 

<psidoa 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 61 

xiparoq (204. Obs. 3.) aiXaoq ipiHri <piUot 

xiparc xipara t^## rtfidot 

xipaTe xepdrcov StjXotj drjXSot 

poes y die adoq coaq 

CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLEN- 
SION. 

208. — N". B. In the inflection of declinable words, the 
vowels that concur are the final vowel of the root, and the 
first vowel or diphthong of the termination. In the ex- 
amples of contracts that follow, as well as in the table of 
contract verbs (569), the hyphen (-) does not separate the 
termination from the root, but that part of the root not 
affected by contraction, from the rest of the word. By 
this means the concurrent vowels are brought together, 
and the change made by contraction is rendered more 
obvious. 

209. — Concurrent vowels are not always con- 
tracted in the third declension, but only as 
directed by the following — 

SPECIAL RULES. 

210. — The accusative plural assumes the 
contraction of the nominative ; thus, 

TS.rptinp-teq. ) , X.otf-f££, ) v IX.fioTp-uaq. ) Q , 

A ; '[rpcrjp-scq. - '\o<p-ts. ' r '[jSorp-us. 

A*Tpi7jp-ea<; } J A.o^-*ac, ) A.porp-uaq, ) 

Exc. But sag pure is contracted into ds (198, Exc. 2); 

as, %o£a<;, %oaq. 

211. — Nouns in yjg^ eg y or og ^Gen. tog), those 
in og and o (Gen. oog) y and neuters in a$ pure and 
pag, contract the concurrent vowels in all cases. 



62 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION*. 



212. — Example of 7)$ (Gen. in £oq). 
7) Tpi7jp7jc, the trireme. 

SINGULAR. DUAL. 

N. Tpiyjp-yq IS. A. V. 

G. Tpiyjp-eos -ouq rpt7jp-ee -7] 

-« G. D. 

'*} rptyp-iow -oTv 



D. TpiTJp-St 

A. rpirjp-ta 
V. Tplrjp'ZS 



PLURAL. 

N". rpiTJp-ees -et$ 

G. TpL7)p-£wV -WV 
D. Tpt7Jp-£(Tt 

A. Tptrjp-sac; -ees 

V. rptTJp-esq -£C$ 



213» — Example of o<t (Gen. in eo<r), for £<;. 
Thus, reT/os, for relies ; Gen. ret^^oq^ ret/eos, refyout;. 

to Tsi%oq^ the wall. 



SINGULAR, 
N. TsTy-oq 
G. rsfy-eos -ou<z 
D. Tsfy-e'L -et 

A. T£~r/-oq 
V. Tti%-o<z 



DUAL. 

K A. V. 

recess -7j 

G. D. 

Tst%-iotv -olv 



PLURAL. 

N". T£l%-£a -7} 

G. recy-iajv -wv 

D. reiy-£Gi 

A. Tsc'x-ea -7) 

V. T£l%-£a -7] 



SINGULAR. 

G. ^/-oo^ 

D. ^-oi* 

A. ^f-oa 



£.24. — Example of ^ (Gen. in oo<?). 

DUAL. 

K A. Y. 
G. D. 



ODS 

-ol 
-6 



PLURAL. 

G. yJX'(ov 

D. yx~ ^ 
A. ^-o6<? 

V. 7JX-OC 



215* — Obs. 1. Nouns in w and w^ from rooto have the 
singular only, of the third declension. The dual and 
plural are of the second (238). Hence the contrac- 
tion takes place only in the singular, as in the above 
example. The accusative in 6a contracted <5, from the 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



63 



nominative in <6<;, has the circumflex according to rule 
(124, Obs.); as, aldoa contr. aldw. The same contraction 
from the nominative in ^, has the acute ; as in the exam- 
ple 214. 

Obs. 2. Nouns in a*s -coos (root a>) are regularly declined 
and are uncontracted ; as, 

i]pa)<; y Tjpwoq ; 1ST. PL tfptoes. So, #<»<;, jackal. 

216. — Examples of Neuters in as pure and pas. 

(204, Obs. 3.) 

(r of the root changed into <;.) 



to xpiaq^ the flesh 
(for xpeazj. 

Singular. 
N. A. V. xpi-as 

G. xpi-aros -aoc -coq 
D. xpi-art -ai 



-a 



Dual. 
N. A. V. xpi-ars -ae -a 
G. D. xps-aTocv -dotv -wv 



to xipas, the horn 
(for xepar). 

Singular. 
N. A, V. zip-aq 

G. xip-aros -ao$ -wz 
D. xip-arc -ai -a 

Dual. 
N. A. V. xip-are -ae -a 
G. D. xsp-drocv -dotv -wv 





Plural. 






Plural. 






. A. V. 


xpi-ara 


-aa 


-a 


N". A. V. xip-ara 


-aa 


-a 


G. 


xpe-drwv 


-dcov 


-a>v 


G. xep-drcw 


-dwv 


-wv 


D. 


xpi-aat 






D. xip-aat 







217. — Nouns in evg (Gen. eog), and feminine 
nouns in ig, witli Attic Gen. fog, and in ig, 
Gen. tog, contract only the dative singular and 
the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural. 
Those in evg, however, contract also the nomi- 
native dual, and not (exc, evg,pure) the accusa- 
tive plural. 



64 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



218. — Examples of eo<; (Gen. in iws). 
6 fia<rdeus 7 the king. 

DUAL. 

KT. A. V. 

j3a<rtX-ds -7j 



SINGULAR. 

NT. PaaiX-sus 

G. Pacd-lax;, (159) 

D. fia<nX-£'i -eT 

A. paffd-id 

V. paatX-to 



G. D. 

PoLGlX-iotV 



PLURAL. 

NT. paetX-ies -eTc 

G. fiaatX-icoy 

D. fiaGtX-eocn 

A. flaGcX-ids 

V. (3a<TcA-£e<z -£?£ 



JSkc. — But norms in eus after a vowel, may contract also 
the genitive and accusative singular, and the genitive 
plural; thus, 

6 xoeus, the measure. 



SINGULAR. 

G. %0-iax; 
D. %o-£'i 
A. /o-id 



-el 
-a 



DUAL. 

N. A. V. 

%o-£e -?} 

a D. 

%0-iotv 



PLURAL. 

N. %0-teq -sis 

G. %°~£u)v -wv 

D. %0-eTxfi 

A. zo-(a<; -as (198, exc. 2) 

V. z°~£ e< z - £ ls 



In this way Ilscpateuq has genitive Ilsipatws, accusative 
Ileipaid ; and dyoteuq^ in the accusative plural, has dyutdq 
contracted from IIetpai£(oq 9 IIecpat£a y dyuciaqi and so of 
others. 

219. — Example of tq (Gen in £w<;). 
ij TioXiq^ the city. 

DUAL. 

N. A. V. -N* noA-eeq "€tq 

xoX-ee 



SINGULAR. 

N. 7t6X-ts 

G. noX-eax; 

D. noX-el -et 

A. iz6X-tv 



G. D. 

TZoX-ioLV 



PLURAL. 

N*. TzoX-teq 
G. iroX-etov 

D. 7TO^-£(T!(v) 

A. 7ToA-eas 

V. 7roA-££^ 



-etc 



The Ionics always decline words in ec, genitive «os ; as, 
7r<5^j<r, co<j, like noprc; 7 but they make the dative in ei. 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



65 





220.- 


-Example of t? 


(Gen. in cos). 








6 9 i] TzopTts^ the 


calf 


■ 






SINGULAR. 


DUAL. 




PLURAL. 




N. 


ITOpT-K; 




N. A. V. 




N". 7:6pT-t£<; 


-IS 


G. 


nopr-tos 




TZOpT-CS 




G. 7ZOpT-LOJV 




D. 


izopr-u -t 








D. TZOpT-LGl 


#■ 


A. 


7ZOpT-W 




G. D. 




A. 7z6pT-ia<; 


-^ 


V. 


Tzopr-i 




Tzopr-tocv 




V. Tzopr-ies 


-*? 



-ftftfe. — The words declined in this way, besides irSpng, are, 6 /aV, $e 
wood-worm; 6, $ rlyptg, the tiger ; 6 ttocyc, tffte husband; tj fiyvig, wrath; 
rj rpdmg, the keel; and the uncontracted &«£, a sfoep ; — some proper 
names ; as, T I(pig ; and adjectives in ig, «, which have *of in the genitive. 
Other nouns in ig % not inserting a consonant, are declined like tto/uc. 

221. — Exc. — Adjectives in u?, neuter u, have the com- 
mon genitive (eo?), and do not contract ea in the plural. 
(211). 

222. — Nouns in vc, vog, and ovg oog, contract 
only the nominative, accusative, and vocative 
plural; as 



SINGULAR. 
G. i%#-boq 
A. ty&-uv 



d ix&uSj the JlsJu 

DUAL. 

N. A. V. 

ty&-ue 

G. D. 

iyft-uow 



PLURAL. 

N". l%&-beq -u? 

G. r/jd-6(JM 

D. 1%-d-VGi 

A. l%i%oaq -og 

V. i/d-ves -vq 



So d /Sou?, £A6 occ, G. /5oo?, N". V. PL /3oe?, contr. /2ouc, 

D. /?of, A. PL /?oa?, « /Sou?. 



A. /Souv. 



66 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



223. — Comparatives in av reject v in the 
accusative singular, and in the nominative, 
accusative, and vocative plural, and then con- 
tract the concurrent vowels ; as, 



fieXrtcw, better. 



SINGULAR. 
M. &F. 

25T. ^ekri-cov 

G. ftzkri-ovoq 

D. fiekrt-ovt 

A. Pskrt-ova, -oa, -co 



DUAL. 

M. &F. 

N. A. V. 

fiekri-ovs 

G. D. 

ftskrc-ovow 



PLURAL. 
M. &F. 

N". ftekri-oveq, -oeq y -ooq 

G. ftsATl-OVCOV 

D. ^ekri-oat 

A. ftskri-ovaq, -oaq, -ouq 

V. ftekri-ovsq, -oeq f -out; 



"V. ftskrt-ov 

N". A. V. Plural, Neuter, ftzkri-ova, -oa, -co 



224. — The nominative is sometimes con- 
tracted, and the noun is then declined regularly; 
as. 



eap, spring, by contraction, rip, G. rjpoq, D. -rjpi, &c. 

kaaq, a Stone, " kdq, G. kaoq, D. kai, &C. 



225. — Obs. 2. When vowels concur in the oblique cases 
after the contraction of the nominative, they are also con- 
tracted in the usual way; thus, 'Hpaxkiyq, Hercules, is con- 
tracted into 'Hpaxkyq, and then declined and contracted as 
follows : — 



N". t Epaxk-y j q, 
G. ^Hpaxk-ioq, 
D. ^Hpaxk-i't, 
A. 'Hpaxk-ia, 
V. 'HpaxUq. 



contr. 'Hpaxk-ouq y 
c Hpaxk-e7 y 
e IIpaxk-rj. 



WORDS TO BE DECLINED. 



67 



226' — In adjectives, the oblique cases assume 
the contraction of the root ; thus, 

tieltroetq, made of honey. 
(R. fxeXtroevr^ contr. p.eAtrouvr.) 
Nom. fieXtr-oetq peltr-oeoaa fiektr-oev 

COntr. ixekr-ooq ixeltT-ooaaa fxefor-ouv 

Gen. fieXtr-ouuroq pektr-oixr^c; fiehr-oovroc;^ &C. 

TtfiTJeiq^ honored (rtji^evr). 
Nom. rt/i-vjetq rtfi-rjefftra Ttp.-9jev 

COntr. Tlfl'ffi Tlfl-YjGGOL TCJJL-7JV 

Gen. Ttfl-jjVTOS Tlfl-lJGOTiq TlfX-TJVTOS, &C. 

227.-WOHD3 OF THE THIRD DECLEN- 
SION TO BE DECLINED AND CON- 
TRACTED. 

(K B.— The following method of practising on these exercises will 
direct the student in his preparation. E. g., evae^—Form the genitive; 
—give the rule; — decline; — what cases contract the concurrent void els?— 
give the rule ;— decline and contract giving the rule for each contraction. 
This exercise should be continued till the student is perfectly ready and 
at ease in the whole process. 

eutrspTJs, pious. 
dpLetumvy better, 
trrdyoq^ a spike of corn, 
ape {aw 9 more excellent. 
vofisoq^ a shepherd. 
<petdd>^ parsimony. 
yr t paq^ old age. 
'Az'tMeus, Achilles, 
vxepcpbriq^ excellent. 
aXrfils, true. 
p£s, a mouse. 
M-tyos, a part. 
xAe'tou J more. 



Ypa<peuq, a painter. \ aftcfc, modesty. 



IJep txk erj ^ Pericles. 
tyftus, a fish. 
-Xetuvj^ more, 
atrro^ a city. 
7/U>z, the morning. 
fltiAvSj deep. 
fiekrtmVy better, 
-ettiw, persuasion, 
ij do, sweet. 
noGtq, a husband. 
?#os, custom, 
xipas, a horn. 



r:ipaq^ a limit. 
rer/oc;^ a wall. 
Spuz, an oak. 
wovebq. a murderer, 
dvatdrjg, impudent, 
opoc, a mountain. 
<ppa<jtq, diction. 
~pi<7i3uq^ old. 
ivderjc, indigent. 
AtoxJJrjC, Diodes. 
£~oc 5 a word. 
dpoaeoT^ a runner. 



68 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

228. — Some nouns have one gender in the singular, 
and another in the plural ; as, 

229* — z S{<ppoq, the chariot-seat/ 6 p.o%X6q, the lever/ 
6 xa\ ij TdpTapoq, Tartarus / 6 Tpayj]X6q, t\ie neck / 6 #£<rp.6q, 
the decree/ 6 v&Toq, the back / 6 ipoT/ioq, the oar / 6 Zoyoq, 
the yoke, are neuter in the plural ; as, r& diypa, &c. The 
three last have also neuter forms in the singular ; as, to 
v&tov, &c, but with a variation of meaning. 

230. — c S£<r t u6q,the bond/ 6 X6%voq, the lamp/ 6 xbxXoq, 
the circle/ 6 p-ypoq, the thigh; 6 elToq, corn/ 6 <TTad-/i6q, 
the station ; have both a masculine and neuter form in the 
plural ; as, of d£(jfio(, and to. d£(r/j.d, &c. 

231. — *H xiXsvftoq, the way, has at xikeuftoi and tol xileufta. 

232. — To (rrddtov, the stadium, has ol GTddtot, and rd 
arddta. 

233. — To^, a woman/ 636 q, a way / -6X>q, a city/ 
X^Pt a hand, feminine?, have rtb yuvatxe, tcj 63 w, toj n6Xc£ 7 
and to) xetpe, in the nominative and accusative dual. 

234:. — Some have more than one declension ; thus, 

235. — Some are of the 1st and 2d, as, rj areipdvr h and 
6 arixpavoq, a crown/ — some, of the 1st and 3d, as, M&erfa 
-oo ; and Mu><j£oq, -iajq, Moses. 2d and 3d, as, to 3dxpoov 9 
-oo, and rd ddxpo, -ooq, a tear / [idpTopoq, -oo, and fidpTop, 
-upoq, a witness. 

236. — Some have more than one declension, in the 
oblique cases, from one form of the nominative ; thus, 
OdX-qq, gen. -oo 1st, and -rjToq 3d, Thales / "Ap-qq, -oo 1st, and 
-eoq and -rjoq 3d, liars/ 6 and to o-xoToq, darkness/ oyoq, 
a chariot/ e'Xsoq, mercy / Tdpiyoq, pickle / ocaoq, an eye / 
have -oo the 2d, and -eoq the 3d ; oaaoq is used mostly in the 
dual, 6<t<t£, &c, 3d, and G. and D. plural oggwv, oaaoiq, 2d. 

237. — Some have the forms of different declensions, in 
certain cases, though not regularly declined through all 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 69 

the cases; thus, 1st and 3d in the ace. sing. A-qixoa&ivriq, 
ace. -rjv and -ea, Demosthenes/ ZwxpdTyq, Socrates, ace. 
Zwxpdrrjv and -ea ; akxrj, fortitude, gen. -7jq (1st), dat. -c (3d) ; 
6(jfxbrj, a battle, dat. vctiivrj and u<r t uTvt (1st and 3d); dvdpd- 
nodov, a slave, 2d, dat. pi. dvdpaxodecFGt, 3d, Horn. ; yekax; 6, 
laughter, G. yiXwToq, ace. yikmra and yikwv, after the Attic 
form of the 2d declension (138) ; to divdpov, tree, dat. pi. 

S£\>dp£(TC as from sing, to divdpoq. 

238. — Feminine nouns in oj, and w<r, of the third 
declension, have generally the form of the second, as if 
from oc, in the dual and plural, when their meaning is such 
as to admit of their being used in these numbers. 

239. — Some, from one form of the nominative, have 
different forms in the oblique cases, in the same declen- 
sion ; thus, Ttypcq, a tiger, has -cos and -cdoq ; Oiatq, Justice, 
has -cdoq, -Iraq, and mtto<z^ Adpwv, Charon, has -wvoq and 
ovroq ; yovo, a knee, and S6pu, a spear, have -ooq and -aroq ; 
%P<i>s, xpioroi:, and xpooc, /poo*-, the skin, have two forms 
of the nominative, as well as of the oblique cases, both 
of the 3d. 

24:0. — In some the nominative has undergone a change 
partly accidental, partly euphonic, as changing final c or t 
into p, or omitting the final consonant, and changing the 
vowel ; as, rjizap, a liver ; rjtxap, a clay ; eldap, food ; 
<pp£ap, a well ; (rriap, fat ; xdprjap, a head; alzupap, oint- 
ment; SiXsap, a bait/ ovetap, a benefit; ooftap, fatness ; 
vdcop, water; <rxwp, dirt; yovo, the Jcnee ; dopo, a spear, 
have the genitive in -octo^, from neuter root in ar, and reg- 
ular nominative in ac (t changed into c) ; thus, rp:a~o~, 
udaro^, yowaro^ ; o5r, an ear, wto^ ; ydla, milk, ydkaxrvr ; 
yov-rj, a woman, yo^atxo^, voc. ybvai ; Y^a-oDc, gen. oo, dat. 



oo ; ace. oov ; voc. oo. 



241. — Some are indeclinable, i. e., have no change of 
termination in the different cases ; such as, 

24z2. — Names of letters ; as, to aX<pa, too a),<pa, &c. 



70 NOUNS OF PECULIAB SIGNIFICATION. 

The cardinal numbers from iri&re to ixarov. Poetic nouns 
which have lost the last syllable by apocope ; as, to dw, 
for diofia. Foreign names which are not susceptible of 
Greek inflections ; as, 6 *Appadp. y too 'Afipad/j., &c. 



DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

24:3. — Some nouns have no plural; as, avjp, air ; rcfy>, 
fire (t& no pd, watch-fires) ; ekatov 9 oil; yrj^ earth; aidctx;, 
shame/ <£k, salt 

24:4:. — Some have no singular; as, akcpiTa, victuals; 
*A&7Jvat 9 Athens ; 6veipaTa 9 dreams (but singular ovecpo<; 9 
ovetpov, and 6vap) ; and the names of festivals ; as, JJava- 
ftyvata, Panathencea. 

245. — Some occur in one case only, and are called 
monoptotes ; as, a> Td> 9 friend; & ttottoc, gods; to 
o<peXos 9 the advantage ; Snap, waking. 

246. — Some have only two cases (diptotes) ; as, nom. 
Xlq 9 acc. XTv, a lion ; nom. Zebq, voc. Zeu 9 Jupiter ; to ovap 9 
the vision ; nom. and acc. 

247. — Some have only three (triptotes) ; . as, nom. 
fidpTuq^ a witness, acc. jidpTuv, dat. plur. f±dp-o<n. 

248. — The poets sometimes by apocope (52, 6th) cut 
off the final letter or syllable from a word ; as, xdp-rj, for 
xdprjvov, a head. Such words are then indeclinable (241, 
242). 

NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION. 

249. — Some nouns have peculiar significations, accord- 
ing to their terminations ; as, 

250. — Masculine Patronymics (86, 1st), 

commonly in dys or wv; as, Tl7)Xeu<; 9 Peleus, Hsketdrjq 9 
Peleides, or the son of Peleus ; Kp6voq 9 Saturn, Kpovtcov 
or Kpovtdysj the son of Saturn. 



NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION. 



71 



251. — Feminine Patronymics, commonly in 
tas and «r, tvy and cojvtj* as, Ar^cjidq and A^riots, from 
Atjtw, Latona ; ^Adprjcrbrj, from v Adpr t <rzoq; N-qpbfj^ from 
N^peoq; 'AxpcetwvTj, from ^Axpicnoq, &c. 

252. — Gentile Nouns (86, 2d) commonly in tj<t, «c, 
or eus, masculine; and a, ac, or t~, feminine ; as, I-apry, 
Sparta, ZnapTidTr)~, a Spartan ; la/idpeta, Samaria, 
ZapApetriq, a woman of Samaria. But many of these are 
declined as regular adjectives. 

253. — Diminutives (88, 3d) commonly in ta, im^ 
taxoq, or Xoq; as, xaTrjp, a father, Tzarpidtov, a little father 
(a term of endearment) ; Tzdlq, a boy or girl, natdtov, a little 
boy or girl, r.atdiax-q, a young daughter; epcoq, love y 
IpwTuXoq, a little lover. 

254. — Amplifieatives (88, 4th) commonly in pa, 
or wv ; as, olxoq, a house, olxr^xa, a large building ; 
ftpaGvs, bold, #pd<7a)v, a bully. 

255. — Verbal Nouns. — From the root of the verb 
(453) are formed three large classes of nouns, of different 
endings and gender, indicating respectively the doer, the 
doing, and the thing done, as follows : — 



VERB. 


ROOT. 


TER. 


TZOliu) 


note 


-^ 00 




note 


-(Ttq (?) 




7:oce 


-pLO. (to) 


izpdaao} 


repay 


-T7JS 




npay 


-mq 




Tcpay 


-fia 



DERIVATIVE. 

7zmrjT7js, a maker, poet. 
tzo crj aiq, a making, poesy. 
Tzoirjtjia, a thing made, a poem. 

7ZpaXT7]C, T.pO.XTTJp^ doeV. 

xpaztq, a doing, acting \ 
k pay pa, a deed* 



72 



THE AKTICLE. 



} ^ 



THE ARTICLE. 

256. — -The article is an adjective word of 
three genders, and somewhat irregularly declined; 
the nominative masculine and feminine singular 
and plural beginning with a rough vowel, and 
being proclitic. Otherwise the masculine and 
neuter are of the second declension, the feminine 
of the first. It wants the vocative, and is thus 
declined : — 



SINGULAR. 


DUAL. 


K* 


ij TO 


N. A. 


G. TOO 


T7JS TOO 


TO) TO. TO) 


D. raj 


TYJ TU> 


G. D. 


A. TOV 


TT]V TO 


TOlv TOLIV ToTv 



PLURAL. 

N". ol al to. 

G. TWV T&V TWV 

D. Tolq Tai<; ToTq 

A. Tooq tol<; to: 



OBSERVATIONS. 

257. — The Greeks spoke definitely, by placing the 
article before the substantive ; indefinitely, by omitting it 
or prefixing the pronoun Tiq ; as, 6 av#pw-oc, the man, or 
man (collectively) ; av&poj-oq, a man ; or, av#pw-6q rig, a 
certain man. 

258* — In grammar and lexicography, the article is used 
technically to distinguish the gender of nouns (92, Obs. 1). 

259. — The Article, with the enclitic de, forms a 
pronoun in familiar use, ode, this person, this. The article 
was originally a demonstrative pronoun, and is so com- 
monly employed by Homer, and often in later poetry. It 
is also sometimes employed in poetry as a relative. (See 
360.) 

260. — The article o, y, to, is sometimes used as a 
relative. (See 360.) 



THE ADJECTIVE. 73 

201. — Note. — The article 6, $, r<5, being commonly placed before a 
noun,is by some grammarians called the prepositive article, to distinguish 
it from the relative pronoun bg 1 7, 5, which, from being regularly placed 
after the noun to which it refers, they call the postpositive article. 



202.-DIALECTS OF THE ARTICLE. 

Singular. 

M. and N. Fern. 

N. 6 t6 $ T>.d 

G. rod A. I. P. Tolo D. rw y reo P. riot rrjq D. ras 

D. raj I. rim r# D. rd 

A t6v t6 ttjv D. rdv 

Plueajj. 
M. and N. Pern. 

N. ol D. rot, neut. rd at D. rat 

G. raw L riwv rwv D. raw ^E. rdwv 

D. roTg D. & I. zolai I. riotat reus D. & I. xaiai, tjjgc, 

P. Toidiat and zoid£<j<n ttjs 

(for roT<7<5s) 
A to6s D. r<$s ra>c rd<? 



THE ADJECTIVE. 

263. — An adjective is a word used to qualify 
a substantive; as, aya&og avrjp, a good man; 
lit a rt^epoc, one day. 

A noun is " qualified" by an adjective when the object 
named is thereby described, limited, or distinguished from 
other things of the same name. 

264:. — The Accidents of the adjective are gender^ 
number, and case ; and in most adjectives, also, compar- 
ison. 

4 



74 



FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 



'HI 



263* — Adjectives in Greek, as well as Latin, indicate 
the gender, number, and case by the termination; 
as, xaX-dq^ masc., xaX-yj, fern., xaX-ov^ neuter, &c. 

266 '• — jParticipleshave the form and declension of 
adjectives, while in time and signification they belong to 
the verb. 

267 •— Some adjectives denote each gender by a differ- 
ent termination in the nominative, and consequently 
have three terminations. Some have one form common 
to the masculine and feminine, and are adjectives of two 
terminations / and some are adjectives of one termination^ 
which is common to the masculine and feminine; such 
want the neuter. 

268* — In adjectives of three terminations, the feminine 
is always of the first declension. In all adjectives, the 
masculine is always of the second or third ; and the declen- 
sion of the neuter is always the same with that of the 
masculine. 



REGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST 
AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 

269. — Adjectives of the first and. second 
declensions liave the masculine in o$ ? the femi- 
nine in yj or a, and the neuter in ov ; thus, 



SINGULAR. 

1ST. xaX-6<; -7J -6v 

G. zaX-ou -7J$ -oo 

D. xaX-co -fj -co 

A. xaX-6u -vjv -6v 

V. xaX-i -7j -6» 



xaXSq^ beautiful. 

DUAL. 

K A. V. 

xaX-co -d -co 

G. D. 

xaX-olv -a7v -<nv 



PLURAL. 

N". xaX-oi -at -d 

G. xaX-w» -coy -cov 

D. xaX-otg -dlq -o1<; 

A. xaX-ous -('}.<; -d 

V. xaX-oi -at -d 



FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 75 

Thus decline dyaMs, good ; xaxo^bad; yiloq, friendly ; 
fiaXaxoq, soft ; Xeuxo^ white ; drjXo^ manifest ; d-KaUq, ten- 
er ; rep-avo^ pleasant. 



270. — But og pure, and pog, have a in the 
feminine; as, 



Singular. 




Singular. 


N. /5adt-o<; -a 


-ow 


N. (pawep-6% -d 


G. padc-oo -aq 


-00 


G. <pawep-oo -aq 


D. 6adi-o) -a 


-O) 


D. <pawep-a> -a 


A. padi-ov -aw 


-ow 


A. <pawep-6w -dw 


V. /5adi-s -a 


-ow 


V. <pawep-l -d 



-ow 



-00 

-to 

4 

-ow 
-ow 



The dual and plural terminations are the same as in 
xaMq. But the rules for the accents in the masculine 
and neuter (131-133), and in the feminine (109-111), must 
be carefully observed. 

271. — Mcc. — The terminations oo^ and sometimes eoc, 
especially in adjectives denoting matter and color, retain 
^;as, oydooq^the eighth, Sydojj ; 6Xo6g 9 pernicious, SXotj; 
Xpfoeos, golden, xpuffiy • ^oivtxeo^purple 9 ^otvi7ci7j. Except 
where p stands before the vowel; as, dfyrfo?, frequent, 

adpoa; dpyopeo^ silver, dpyopia. 

272. — The Attics often decline adjectives in 
o$, especially derivatives and compounds, by the 
common gender, without the feminine termina- 
tion; thus, 



76 FIRST AND THIKD DECLENSIONS. 



d&dvaroq, d^dvaroq^ dftdvaTOv^ immortal. 

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. 



. d#dvar-oq -oq -ov 

Gr. dd-avdr-ou -oo -ou 

D. dd-avdr-co -a) -w 

A. dftdvar-ov -ov -oy 

V. d&dvar-s -e -ov 



N. A. V. 

dd-avdr-to -to -co 

G. D. 

dftavdr-otv -otv -otv 



N". dd-dwar-ot -at -a 
G. d&avdr-iov -cov -tov 
D. d&avdr-oiq ~otq -otq 
A. dftavdr-ous -ouq -a 
V. d&dvar-oi -01 -a 



Adjectives of the common gender are often expressed 

thus : — 

J, ^ dftdvaToq, rb d&dvarov. 

TOO) riyc, roZ> dftavdzoUy &C. 

In the same manner decline — 

M. & F. N. 

7id t a<piXoq 7rdpL<ptXov from ?ray and <piXo$ 

cldcxoq adtxov " dixy 

obpdvwq oupdvtov 6i obpavoq 

ofiopos o/iopov " 6[i6q and opoq 

Note. — Though this form of declension is most used by the Attic 
writers, it is not confined to them. Instances of it occur in Homer. 



ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND THIRD 

DECLENSIONS. 

273. — The masculine and neuter of all adjec- 
tives not ending in og, are of the third declen- 
sion. 

The regular terminations of these are — 



M. 


F. 


N. 


1. ag 


cuva 


av 


2. etg 


eaca 


ev 


3. vg 


eux, 


V 



FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS, 



77 



Adjectives, so far as they are of the third declension, 
are accented the same as nouns, according to the 
rules, 146-149. 



274, — Example of an Adjective in as, awa, av. 

p£Xaq y black. 



N. [i(X-a<; 
G. p£X-avoq 
D. p£X-avt 
A. fiiX-ava 
V. p£X-av 



N. A. V. p£X-avs 
G. D. peX-dvocv 



N.V. p£X-aves 
G. peX-dva)v 
. D. fiik-aat 
A. fiil-avas 



Singular. 

p£X-aiva 

fjLeX-a(v7]s 

fieX-afa-fl 

piX-atvav 

[liX-cuva 

Dual. 
fieX-aiva 
fieX-aivcuv 

Plural. 
fiiX-atvai 
peX-aivaJv 
fisX-atvcug 
[xcX-aivaq 



fi£X-av 

fi£X-avos 

piX-avt 

piX-av 

piX-av 



piX-ave 
peX-dvotv 



piX-ava 
peX-dvcov 
piX-aGt (71.) 
piX-ava 



275* — Example of an Adjective in eis 9 eGGa, ev. 

yapiscg, comely. 
Singular. 



N". yapi-eiq 
G. yapi-evrog 
D. yapi-evrt 
A. yapi-evra 
V. yapi-sv -etq 



yapi-eGGa 

yapt-iaa-qq 

yapi-£<j<JiQ 

yapi-eGGav 

yapi-eGGa 



yapi-ev 

yapi-evroq (165.) 
yapi-evTi 
yapi-ev 
yapi-ev 



78 



FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 



N. A. V. xapi-evre 
G. D. %api-£\>Totv 



TS.Y. %api-evT£S 
G. %api-£\>Twv 
D. %api-£Gi 
A. xapt-evras 



Dual. 
•^apt-iaaa 
%apL-i<j<Taw 

Plural. 
%api-a<?(Tat 

%api-£<JGtoV 

%api-i<T<7ats 
%api-£<?<ja<; 



%api-evTe 
%apt-ivTotv 



gape-sura 
%api-ivzw\> 
%api-eai 
%api-evT(L 



276. — Obs. — Dative plural %apU<n y not xapteiai, accord- 
ing to the general rule. 



277. — Example of an Adjective in u<t, «a, o. 

i] dug, sweet. 



Singular. 
N. -fjd-ug yd-eTa 

G. i}d-£o<; yd-etas 

D. fjd-ii'j contr. -e? ijd-eia 

A. ^v, or -4a (168.) fjd-eTav 
V. yd-o yd-ela 



yjd-io<; 

7}d-£i\ contr. et 

ijd-u 



K A. V. $d-£e 

G. D. jd-dow 



Dual. 

yd-eiatv yd-iotv 



Plural. 

N. V. yd-£es, contr. eT<r ijd-elai 

G. 7jd-£a)V i]d-Ei<bv 

D. Jjd-ifft ijd-eiatq 

A. ijd-ias, contr. e?£ i]d-elas 



i}d-£a, not contr. 221. 

7)d~£<Tl 

i]d-£a, not contr. 



DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 



79 



In the same manner decline — 



rdX-as 

ficAtrS-ets 
tc firsts 



1. 

-atva 

2. 

-saaa 
-e<7<ra 



-ev 
-ev 





3. 




ykox-bs 


-ela 




yj/jlig-us 


-eta 


-u 


ftap-os 


-£?a 


-0 


ft ad-us 


-e?a 




3 6. r 


-e7a 





DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 

£7<§. — ^Participles are declined like adjectives of 
three terminations : those of the middle and passive in os, 
are inflected throughout like xakos (269). Of others, the 
feminine always follows the terminations of the first 
declension, and the masculine and neuter those of the 
third, the genitive being always formed as directed in the 
rules for nouns. Their terminations are as follows : — 



M. 

1. -wv 

2. -<6v 

3. -as 

4. -ecs 

5. -obs 

6. -6s 
1. -<l>s 



F: 

-ooaa 

-ooaa 

-aaa 

-tlaa 

-oo a a 

-oca 

-ola 



N. 
-ov 
-6v 
-av 
-iv 
-6v 
-ov 
-OS 



M. 

Gen. -ovros 

-OVTOS 

-avros 
-ivros 

-OVTOS 

-ovros 

-OTOS 



F. 

-o6(T7)S 
-OOGTjS 

-dat]s 

-ZL(T7]S 

-OlHTTjS 

-b(77]S 

-ocas 



N. 

-OVTOSj &C. 

-ovros, &C. 
-avros, &C. 
-ivros, &C. 
-ovros, &C. 
-ovros, &C. 
-oros, &C. 



Of these, the 2d, 3d, and 4th are declined as examples; 
thus, 



9. — ro~ojv, striJc 


ing (absolute). 
Singular. 


(2d 


Aor. Act.) 


N. rou-mv 


roTZ-oo<ja 




roiz-ov 


G. ro7:-6vros 


r07Z-00(TTjS 




roiz-ovros 


D. roK-ovri 


ron-oba-fl 




roTi-ovri 


A. roiz-ovra 


roiz-ooaav 




roiz-ov 


V. roTZ-d)v 


roiz-ooaa 




TU7T-0V 



80 



DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES, 



Dual. 



N. A. 


V. TU7r-6vre 


Tun-ouaa 


TU7T-OVT8 


G. 


D. TVTZ-OVTOW 


TUTt-obaaiv 
Plural. 


TUTT-OVTOtV 




N. Tun-ovTes 


TUTZ-obaat 


ru7T-6wra 




G. TU7Z-6vTU)V 


TOTZ-OU<jO>V 


TUTZ-OVTCJV 




D. TUTZ-OOGL 


TV7Z-OU<JaiZ 


ZUTZ-OUCTL, 73. 




A. TU7t-6vras 


TVTz-obaas 


ro7t-6vra 




V. TO~~6vT£S 


TWiz-ovaai 


Toiz-ovza 



Thus are declined all participles in wv, ovroq^ whether 
oxytone or barytone ; also the adjectives kxwv and dixwv. 
The accent remains on the same syllable as in the 
nominative, so long as allowed by the general rules 
(27-31). 



280. — To<pa^ striking (absolute). 

Singular. 



(1st Aor. Act.) 



N". ruip-aq 


rixp-acra 


TU(p-av 


G. Ti)(p-a»Toq 


rocp-darjq 


TU(p-(ZVTOS 


D. zbip-avri 


TV<p-d<J7) 


rbip-avrt 


A. TU(p-avra 


TU(p-a<jav 


Tixp-av 


V. ru(p-aq 


TU(p-a<ra 
Dual. 


TU(p-av 


N. A. V, ruip-avre 


rocp-dad 


TO(p-aVTS 


G. D. TL>(p-dvTOW 


TV(p-daatv 
Plural. 


TU<p-dvTOtV 


N". rixp-avres 


rucp-aaat 


TlHp-aVTOL 


G. TOip-aVTCJV 


TUip-CLGWV 


TU<p-aVT(JJV 


IX Ti)(p-a<rt 


TiHp-aGaiq 


TiHp-afft 


A. Tixp-avtas 


TU(p-d<rds 


rixp-avza 


V. TUip-avzeq 


Tixp-aaat 


Tl)(p-aVTGL 



In like manner decline the adjective rca^, izdaa^ 7rav, all. 



DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 



81 



281* — Xu&efc, loosed. 





SINGULAR. 




N. to»*k 


^y^-eTca 


Xv$-iv 


G. Xu&-£vtos 


Au#-e:'<nyc 


Xuft-ivrog 


D. h>&-im 


Aufl-ewj 


Xud-ivzi 


A. Xud-£vza 


^u#-e?(7av 


lod-£v 


V. luti-eis 


Autf-sTtfa 


Xu&-£v 




Dual. 




N. A. V. Xu&-£m 


^i>#-ei'<7a 


Xod-ivre 


G. D. Xu$-£vTOlV 


Xod-eicratv 
Plural. 


Xod>-£vToi)> 


N". Xu$-£vres 


Au#-e7<7ac 


Xuft-ivra 


G. Xu&-£vtwv 


^U#-£J<70/V 


Xod-ivTtov 


D. Xo&~eT(n 


Xoft-eiaatq 


Xu&-e~i<Tt 


A. Xu#-£vzaq 


Xuft-eiGaq 


Xuft-ivTa 



282* — dtdous, giving. 





Singular. 




N. dtd-ovq 


fo^-oD^a 


di$-6v 


G. dtd-dvroq 


dtd-ov<rqs 


dtd-6vTo<; 


D. dtd-dvrt 


dld-OUCTQ 


did-ovzi 


A. <5:d-dvra 


did-ouaav 


did-ov 


V. dtd-ooz 


dtd-ovaa 
Dual, 


dtd-dv 


K. A. V. Std-6VT9 


dtd-ouaa 


did-6vze 


G. D. did-ovrotv 


did-obaaiv 
Plural. 


dtd-6vTOtV 


N. ^-ovrec 


&$-oD<7ac 


did-dvra 


G. dtd-6vTO)V 


&£-ou0"<5v 


did-ovrwv 


D. dtd-ouet 


did-ouGatq 


did-ovdt 


A. &<?-<$ vrac 


dtd-obaaq 


dtd-ovra 


4* 




x. 



82 



DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 



283* — detxvix;, showing. 



N. detxv-vq 
G. deixv-vvTOS 
D. deixv-ovTt 
A. detxv-uvra 
Y". dsixv-vq 

TS. A. V. detxv-uvre 
G. D. detxv-vvTOiv 

1ST. decxv-uvreg 
G. detxv-uvrwv 
D. deixv-uai 
A. ^e:xv-6vrac 



Singular. 

d£tXV-U<T7]S 
dstXV-UGT] 

dstxv-ueav 
detxv-u<ja 

Dual. 

deixv-Gffa 
detxv-baaiv 

Plural. 
detxv-vaat 
detxv-uawv 
dstxv-LHjais 
detxv-vaaq 



deixv-lnt 

detxv-uvTo$ 

dscxv-uvrc 

detxv-bv 

detxv-vv 



detxv-uvre 

dstXV-UVTOW 



detxv-uvTa 
deixv-bvTiov 
deixv-vGi 
detxv-uvra 



284z. — rero<p-6q y having struck. (Perf. Act.) 

Singular. 

G. T£ri><p-OTOS 
D. T£TU<p-OTt 
A. TSTLHp-OTa 

N, A. V. T£TU<p-OTe 
G. D. TSTUip-OTOtV 

N". V. rero<p-6ze<; 

G. TSTLXp-OTWV 

. D. rervcp-oat 
A. Ter6><p-ora<r 



-i>7a 


-ag 


-ufos 


-oroq 


-yja 


-OTl 


-ma\> 


-6q 


Dual. 





-tn'a 


-6re 


-uiaiv 


-drotv 


'lural. 
-u7a* 


-6tol 


-i>:aJv 


-6tu)v 


-i>6«S 


-6ct (63.) 


-t>ja<T 


St a 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 83 

283. — The participle in w?, after a syncope (588), has 
the nominative and vocative ^<r, <l>aa, <bq ; gen. wrog, <o<nj^ 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 

286. — Many adjectives of the third declension have 
but one form for the masculine and feminine, and are 
therefore said to be declined according to the common, 
gender. They are declined throughout like nouns of the 
third declension, of the same termination. The regular 
terminations of these are iov y ijv, tj^, «t, o^ and ouq (viz., 
compounds of Tzoug) ; and they are formed according to 
the following 

RULES. 

287. — Adjectives of the common gender in 
(dVy yjv y yjg have the neuter identical with the 
root : the masculine and feminine lengthen the 
radical vowel ; thus, 





M. &P. 


N. 








N. 


<J(l>(ppWV 


<?aJ<ppov 


prudent^ 


G. 


G(i)(ppOV-0<Z 


N. 


afiprjv 


v 5 r 

appev 


male. 


G. 


afipev -oc 


N. 


&Xt)#7J<; 


dX-qMs 


true, 


G. 


dXy&i -oq 



So also some in wp ; as, 

N". fi£yaX7JTajp fieydkrjTop ; G. fieyaXrjrop-og 

Note. — But ripqv, lender, usually has the feminine repeiva, neuter repsv. 

288. — Adjectives of the common gender in tg 
and vg, add g for the masculine and feminine, 
and those with radical r reject it; as, 



84 



§ ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 



M. & F. N. 

N. &daxpu$ Zdaxpo 



G. eb%dpiT-oq 
G. dddxpu-0% 



289. — Compounds of Ttovg, a foot, have the 
neuter in ow, as from root in ov, instead of 08 ; 
others in 01;$ have the neuter regularly in ov, 
from root ovr, by dropping final <r ; as. 



M. &W. 


N. 




N. dinous. 


dl7ZOUV) 


G. diizod-o^ 165 


N. fiovSdouS) 


fiovddoVy 


G. fiovddovT-os. 



Examples of Adjectives of the Common Gender. 



290.- 


-0*, ^ (T<D<ppwv y prudent* 

SlNGULAB. 




N. cdxpp-wv 


-aw 


-ov 


G. Gaxpp-ovoq 


-ovo£ 


-ovoc 


D. GW<pp-OVl 


-ow 


-ovc 


A. adxpp-ova 


-ova 


-ov 


V. atbcpp-ov 


-0J> 

Dual. 


-ov 


N. A. V. G(b<pp-OVQ 


-ove 


-ove 


G. D. au)(pp-6vow 


-oVoil> 

Plural. 


-Svotv 


N. Gwcpp-oves 


-oves 


-ova 


G. GUMpp-OVWV 


-<5vwv 


-ovwv 


D. adxpp-oGt 


-0(7* 


-oat 


A. <jd)<pp-ovas 


-ova^ 


-ova 


V. G<b<pp-o\>$s 


-oves 


-ova 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 



85 



291.— 6, $ dX^rj^ true. 





Singular. 




N. &X7J&-7JS 


-?'< 


-ie 


G. dX^-ioq 


-&>c 


-ioz 


D. aX^-i'i 


-<?f 


-it 


A. aX-yd-ia 


-<?<z 


-fc 


v V. dA 7 «c 


Dual* 


-4c 


MT. A. V. dXrj^is 


-4s 


-is 


G. D. aX^iotv 


Plural. 


-iotv 


N. &Xr)&-ies 


-&C 


-ia 


G. &X7)&-£a)v 


-£a;v> 


-iwv 


D. &Xy&-£(n 


-4(TC 


-£<Tt 


A. dXyft-ias 


-£ac 


-ia 


V. aXyfi-is* 


-&C 


-ia 


292.- 


-suxaptc:, acceptable. 
Singular. 


♦« 


N. eo^ap-^ 


-*c 


-t 


G. eu%dp-tTos 


-«TOC 


-tTO£ 


D. eb^dp-irt 


-:rc 


-ITt 


{ ev%ap-w 


-era 


-*, or 


-IV 


-e 


V. ev%ap~t 


-t 


-i 


- 


Dual. 




N*. A, V, £U%dp-tT8 


-jts 


-CTS 


G. D. eb%ap-(Tot\> 


-irotv 


-froev 



86 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO TEEMIKATIONS. 



Hi 







Plural. 




N. 


eu%dp-iTes 


-:rec 


-tra 


G. 


eb%ap-LT(ov 


-IT(1)V 


-ITU)V 


D. 


eb^dp-tat 


-IGl 


-161 


A. 


eu%dp-iTas 


-eras 


-tra 


V. 


eb%dp-tTS<z 


-:rec 


-ITOL 




293.- 


—adaxpo>z y tearless. 
Singular. 




N. 


adaxp-oq 


-uc 


-o 


G. 


dddxp-ooq 


-00 £ 


-uoc; 


D. 


dddxp-oi 


-o'i 


-o'i 


A. 


adaxp-ou 


-ov 


-0 


V. 


adaxp-o 


-0 


-0 



N. A. V. dddxp-os 
G. D. adaxp-votv 



Dual. 



-OS 



-ootv 



-us 
-ootv 



N # dddxp-ueq 
G. ddaxp-oojy 
D. dddxp-06t 
A. dddxp-uas 
V. dddxp-oeq 



Plural. 



-yec 



-oa 



-0(t)V 


-bmv 


-061 


-06L 


-oaq 


-oa 


-uez 


-oa 



Note. — In these examples, alrftriq and adatepve are declined without 
contracting. The pupil may contract the concurrent vowels (211 and 
222), and make the necessary changes in the accents. 



IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 87 

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

294. — Every adjective not ending in some of 
the regular terminations already mentioned, is 
irregular — wants tlie neuter gender — and is 
declined like a noun of the third declension; 
thus, 

G. zoo, t?]z 9 ap~ayo~, &C. 

Obs. 1. The poets sometimes use the genitive and dative 
of such adjectives in the neater. Sometimes the neuter 
is supplied by a derivative form in ov ; thus, dpnoutixSv is 
used as the neuter of ap-az ; piazTtxov, as the neuter of 
fiXdZ , &c. 

JSxc. 1. ixcuv and dixwv (contracted axw>), are declined 
with three genders, like participles (279) ; thus, 

N". £x-d>v kx-ooGa, £x-ov, 

G. £x-ovtoc, ix-oucrrj^, £x-6>-oc, &c, 

JSxc. 2. Miyaz, great, and noXoz, many, are irregular in 
the nominative and accusative singular. The other cases 
are regularly formed from the ancient nominatives fisydXo^ 
and ~o)16z, of the second declension ; thus, 





Singular. 




M. 


F. 


V. 


N. p-iya-; 


fieydXrj 


fiiya 


G. fjLsydXoo 


ftsydkyg 


[xsydXoo 


D. peydXtp 


fis^dhj 


fisydXtp 


A. piyav 


fieyaAry; 
Dual. 


fiiya 


N. A. V. ptydlco 


peydla 


peydlco 



through the dual and plural, as in zaASz (269). 



88 



ADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED. 





Singular* 


1 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. noXvs 


iroXXrj 


7:0X0 


G. noXXou 


tzoXXtjs 


tzoXXoo 


D. 7TOvMc5 


tcoXXtj 


tcoXXqj 


A, itoXvv 


-xoXXrfv 
Dual, 


tzoXo 


V. TtoXXw 


TtoXXd 


TZoXXm 



through the dual and plural, as in xaXSq (269). 

2^ote. — Homer and other poets inflect tzoKvq regularly, gen. ttoHoc, 
dat. koMI, &c. It was afterwards changed, in those cases which would 
not be distinguished from the like forms of ndfag, a city. 

Obs. 2. Some substantives in aq and 77c, inflected in the 
first declension, are called by grammarians, adjectives; 
as, 6j3pi<TT7j<;, an insolent man ; rpaofiaria^ a wounded 
ma?i; but they are really independent of any other 
substantives in construction. The same observation may 
be applied to several other words, called adjectives of one 
termination. 



>5.-ADJECTIVES 


TO 


BE DECLINED. 


xax-oq^ 


-J* 


-<Sv, 


bad. 


rdX-aSy 


-aivoL^ 


-av, 


miserable. 


Pap-bq, 


-eta, 


'»> 


heavy. 


rip-Tjv^ 


-stva y 


-ev 


tender. 


e5<T£/3-^'<r, 


■fa 


-** 


pious. 


fieXri-iDV) 


-wv, 


-ov, 


better. 


TtfiTJ-etSy 


-etftfa, 


-sv, 


honored. 


adix-oq^ 


-°S, 


-ov, 


unjust. 


&£t-o<;, 


-«> 


-ov, 


worthy. 


<piX6naTp-is^ 


'<S, 


-<> 


patriotic. 


TZoXun-ous, 


-ous, 


-ouv, 


many-footed. 


6 7 ij fidxapy 






happy. 





NUMERALS. 




Pad-vs, 


-e7a, 


- & 9 


<&€£?, 


fieiZ-tJM) 


-U)V y 


-ov, 


greater. 


irfcKf 


-ecca, 


-ev, 


so?iorous. 


<po[3ep-6<;, 


-s 


-<5v, 


formidable. 


ayad-oq^ 


-1, 


-*, 


good. 


6, $ fxaxpo^ecp, 






long-handed. 


tax-us, 


-ela, 


"A 


swift. 


xaXXi-iov, 


-U)V, 


-ov, 


more beautiful. 


<piX-io<;, 


"«> 


-ov, 


friendly. 


flV7JfJ.-(DV y 


-GJV, 


-ov, 


mindful. 


ddfj.-7js 9 


*fa 




unconquered. 


o r , ^ <pbyaq, 






an exile. 


yXux~bq 9 


-e?a, 




sweet. 


padt-og, 


"«i 


-ov,. 


easy. 


<7<D<pp-U)V y 


-ftJV, 


-ov, 


sober. 



89 



NUMERALS. 

296. — Numeral adjectives are those which, 
signify number. In Greek they are divided into 
two classes, Ca/rdincH and Ordinal. 

297. — The Cardinal express numbers simply, 
or how many / as, one, two, three, &c 

298. — The Ordinal denote which one of a 
number; as, first, second, third, &c. 

Distributives have no separate form in Greek. The 
meaning of these is expressed by the cardinal numbers, 
sometimes compounded with gov ; as, abvdoo, <rbvrpeiq, &e. ; 
biniy terni; — and sometimes preceded by xard, dvd, &c. 



The Cardinal Numbers. 

299. — Elg, one, has the singular number only, 
and is thus declined : 



90 NUMERALS. 

N. els fiia £v 

6. ivoz fitas h6$ 

D. hi fica hi 

A. iva fjiiav iu 

In like manner decline the two compounds, 

ovd-e{$ 9 ovds-jjLta, obd-h, plur. obS-he^ -Sfiiac, -£*a, 

fiTjd-ets, firjde-fjLta, firjd-iv, " firjd-hez, -ejiicu, -ha y 

oud£t<:, none; obSk elc, not even one^ not a single person 
(emphatic). 
Distinguish oudefc, none / obde els, &c. 

Obs. 1. To elc, one, corresponds the adjective irepo^ 
other ; and this with ouSeis, firjdeiz, forms obdirspos, fxydi- 
repoc y neither. 

300. — Avcdy two, is properly dual ; it is alike 
in all genders, and is defective in the plural; 
thus, 

DUAL. PLURAL. 
1ST. A. dlHO N. A. 

Gt..duow 9 Attic duelv G. Suwv 

D. duoTv D. doai (v) 

Obs. 2. Abo^ two, is indeclinable ; i. e., it is the same in 
all genders and numbers ; aj±y>a>, both, is declined like dba) 9 
in the dual. 

301. — Tpelg, three, and TeGGapeg, four, are 
plural only, and are thus declined : 





rpelz, three. 




N". rpel^ 


rpelz 


rpia 


G. rptwv 


rpiwv 


rpiwv 


D. rptai 


TplGl 


rptai 


A. rpels 


rpeXs 


rpia 



NUMERALS. 



91 



riGGapes (rirraps^), four. 

1ST. ri<T(Taps<: ri&eapes riacapa 

G. TZGcrdpajv TSGcrdpcuv TSGcrdpwv 

D. lioGapat tiacapai tiaaapai 

A. xiaaapa^; riaaapa^ tiaaapa 

302. — The cardinal numbers from nevre, five, 
to ixarov, a hundred, are indeclinable. 

303. — After ixarov, the larger numbers are 
regular plural adjectives of tlie first and second 
declensions; as, 



M. 


F. 


N. 




dtaxoaioi 


dtaxoaiai 


dtaxoGta 


two hundred. 


rpiaxooiot 


TpiaxoGtat, 


rptaxocta 


three hundred. 


yikwt 


yiktat 


yJXca 


a thousand. 


3t<T%LXt0t 


dtayiXtai 


dwyiXia 


two thousand. 


(LVplOt 


fib p tat 


jivpta 


ten thousand. 


difffibpiot 


dcGfiuptat 


dia^ibpia 


twenty thousand. 



Obs. 3. In the composition of nuvribers, either 
the smaller precedes, and the two are joined by xai^ or 
the greater precedes, in which case the xai is generally 
omitted ; thus, nhze xai etxe&c^ or el'xoec xivzs^ twenty five / 
TzilxTzxoq xdi elxoGros^ or elxoarbq ~ifi-To<$ 9 twenty-fifth. When 
three numbers are reckoned together, the greatest comes 
first, and so on in succession, with the conjunction xa'\ as, 
vrjeq ixardv xa\ elxoaz xai hard^ a hundred and twenty-seven 
ships. 

Obs. 4. Instead of the numbers compounded with eighty 

•or nine, more frequent use is made of the circumlocution^ 

hoq (or jJ-cdq) diwv &c. ; thus, vijeg fiias dioixrat ecxoffc, 

twenty ships wanting one, i. e., nineteen ships ; ersa duwv 

diovra ehoet, tioenty years wanting two, i. e., eighteen 

years. 

4* 



92 NUMERALS. 



Ordinal Numbers. 

304. — The ordinal numbers are formed from the 
cardinal. All under twenty, except second, seventh, and 
eighth, end in tos : from twenty upwards, all end in oaroq^ 
and, in their inflection, are regular adjectives of the first 
and second declensions ; thus, 

npaJzoq 7tpd>T7j npcozoy first 

{izpdzspos 7rporipa 7rp6repoy Jirst of the two) 

deurepog deoripa deorepov second 

rpiToq rpiTTj rpirov, &c. third 

Obs. 1. In order to express half, or fractional 

numbers in money, measures, and weights, the Greeks 
used words compounded of ^ fit, half, and the name of the 
weight, &c. (j*va, SfioMg, zdXavzov), having the adjective 
termination ov, w\>, aiov, appended to it, and placed before 
the ordinal number, of which the half is taken; as, rpcrov 
TjHi-aXavTov, 2-J talents / i. e., the first a talent, the second a 
talent, the third a half talent, and so of others. In like 
manner the Latin sestertius, 2% asses by syncope from 
semistertius / the first an as, the second an as, the third 
a half as (tertius semis). 

From this must be distinguished the use of the same 
compounds in the plural, preceded by the cardinal num- 
ber which, in that case, mean simply so many half talents ; 
thus, rpla ^fitrdXavra, not 2^ talents, but three half talents, 

\ or one and a half. 

I 

I Obs. 2. From the ordinal numbers are formed numerals 

in aloq^ expressing " on what day /" as, SeurepaToq, on the 

second day / rptralos, on the third day, &c. 

Obs. 3. There is an idiomatic use of the ordinals in 

Greek like this, £yo) 5ydoo<;, I, the eighth, = I and eight 

others. 



GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 93 



THE GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 

305. — The Greeks used the letters of the alphabet 

in three different ways, to denote numbers. 

306. — To express a small series of numbers, each letter 
was reckoned according to its order in the alphabet ; as, 
a, 1 ; ft, 2 ; e, 5 ; w, 24. In this manner the books of Homer's 
Iliad and Odyssey are distinguished. The technical syl- 
lable HXT (lpr), will assist the memory in using this kind 
of notation ; for if the alphabet be divided into four equal 
parts, Tj will be the first letter of the second part, that is 7 ; 
v, of the third, or 13; and r 5 of the fourth, or 19. 

307. — The capital letters were used, in denoting 
larger series of numbers ; thus, /, 1 ; 77 for -i>7~, 5 ; J for 
dixa, 10; H for Hezarov, 100; X for -/(ho i, 1000; and M for 
puptot, 10,000. A large 77 around any of these characters, 
except /, denoted five times as much as that character 
represented; as, J , 50; jJ/j, 50,000. 

308. — To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 
hundreds, the Greeks divided the alphabet into three parts, 
retaining in their numeral notation three letters which had 
originally belonged to the alphabet, but had been dropped 
in ordinary use ; thus, the stigma {$* taking the place of 
the old digamma or fau) was used for 6, Jcoppa (C') for 
90, and sampi ((?/) for 900. In using this kind of nota- 
tion, the memory will be assisted by the technical syllable 
AIP\ that is, A* denotes 1; /', 10; and P', 100. The 
numbers under 1000, are denoted by letters with a small 
mark, like an accent, over them; and a similar mark 
placed under any letter, denotes that it represents so many 
thousands. 



91 



GREEK NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 



309.— Table of Numerals. 





CABDINAL. 


ORDINAL. 


1 


a 


slg 


irpa>Tog 


2 


P 


Svo 


dsvTEpog 


3 


Y 


rpslg 


rpirog 


4 


6' 


reooapeq 


TEraprog 


5 


z' 


ttevte 


TTEfZTTTOg 


6 


?' 




EKTOg 


1 


c 


etttcl 


kpdojuog 


8 


¥ 


OfiTO 


bydoog 


9 


&' 


kwia 


Ewarog 


10 


if 


dim 


dsKarog 


11 


ia' 


evdem 


EvdEnarog 


12 


& 


dctdeica 


dcddknaTog 


13 


if 


Tpiotcaideica 


TpiGnaidiKarog 


14 


id' 


TEGGapeGKaideKa 


TEGGapanaidEKaToz 


15 


it' 


TCEVTEKaidena 


IT EVT EK,cud Enarog 


16 


* 


EKKaidena 


EKKaidsKarog 


17 


*£' 


EnTamidEm 


ETTTaKatdEKaroc 

9 


18 


It,' 


oKTcoKaidsKa 


OKTCMCudEKCLTOg 


19 


& 


EVvsaKaidsKa 


EWEanaidEKarog 


20 


k! 


eIkogc 


ElKOGTSg 


21 


KOf 






30 


V 


rpidnovra 


rptanoGrog 


40 


?■ 


TEGGapCLKOVTa 


TEGGapatiOGTog 


50, 


v' 


TTEVTijUOVTa 


TTEvrrjuoGTog 


60 


i'. 


k^Tjaovra 


E^TjIiOGTOg 


■70 


o' 


EJ36o/btr)KovTa 


£/36ojU7]KOGr6g 


80 


n' 


bydof/fcovra 


bydoTjKOGTog 


90 


w 


kvvEvf/Kovra 


EVVEVr/KOGTdg 


100 


p' 


EKarov 


EKCLTOGTOg 


200 


& 


dtanoGiot 


diattoGioGrSg 


300 




TpLCLKOGlOL 


TptaKOGLOGTOg 


40a 


v' 


TEGGapatcdGtoi 


TEGGapatcoGLOGrdg 


500 


¥ 


TTEVTdKOGlOl 


TTEVTaKOGlOGTOg 


600 


X' 


E^dKOGlOL 


EgdKOGlOGTOg 


700 


y 


EKTdliOGLOL 


EirraKOGiOGrdg 


800 


G)' 


OKTd^GtOi 


OKTClKOGLOGTOg 


900 


Q) 


EVVEdKQGlOL 


EVVEdKOGlOGTOg 


1,000 


a 


Xifaoi 


X^LOGrdg 


2,000 


A 


dtc%iXtQi 


SiGx^oGrSg 


3,000 


y, 


TplGx'lfcoi 


TpLGX^UOGTOg 


4,000 


6 


TETpaiuoxihioi 


TETpdKLGXi^iOGTOg 


5,000 


£ , 


TTEVTatUGx'lhtOl 


irevrdKLGx^oGTog 


6,000 


c, 


E^aKlGX'^OC 


E^dKCGX^COGTug 


T,000 


fc 


ETZTaHLGX^Ol 


ETTTdKlGX^OGTdg 


8,000 


?, 


bydoKLOx&toi 


bydoinGx^toGTog 


9,000 




EVVECLliLGxttxlOl 


EWEdfUGX^iOGTog 


10,000 


i 


fivptoi 


fjtvpLOGrdg 


20,000 


«, 


SiGfJLVpCOL 


6iGfivpiOGr6g 


50,000 


v < 


TVEVTaKlGiLVptOC 


irevraiuGfivpioGTog 


100,000 


n, 


fieicatuGfivpcot. 


dEKaKlGflVplOGTOg 


Thus the 


number ] 


853 is a y w' v' y'. 





NUMERALS. 95 

Other Classes of Numerals. 

310* — From the cardinal numbers are formed — 

The Numeral adverbs ; as, <5fc, twice, from duo ; 
rplq, thrice , from rpelq; and from the others, by adding 
the termination xiq, dxtq^ or raxes; as, rscrcrapdxtq, is axis, 
kxazovTdxtz, four times, six times, a hundred times. 

JKultiple numbers in tMos, contracted nlovq ; as, 
dcxXoog, two-fold ; rpiTzkdoq, three-fold / TZTpanloos, four- 
fold. 

Proportionals in rJA<noq\ as, rpi-Xd<noq, three times 
as much j TerpaizAdatoq^ four times as much. 

Substantives in rf<r, ddos 9 which express the name 
of the several numbers ; as, ftom<; 3 gen. -ddoq, the number 
one, unity ; dodg, the number two / dsxdq, the number ten ; 
eixdz, the number twenty; rptaxdc^ the number thirty, &c. , 

Note. — The substantive numerals are commonly employed to express 
the higher numbers; thus, deaa <ivpLd()eq ) 100,000; eKarbv /Ltvpidde^ a 
million. Sometimes the smaller numbers, added to the larger, are like- 
wise expressed by substantives; thus, 1010, 1039, note, irevr^Kovra 
fivpcddeg ml fiia, x^adeg re ekto, ml irpo^ emrovradeg If ml demg. 

The Distributives, answering to the question, in 
how many parts? are formed in %a\ as, S(ya } rpiya, 
rirpaya^ Tzivra^a ; in two parts, in three parts, &c, and 
connected with these are such adverbs as, rptyf h trebly r , 
rpiyod, in three places, &c. 

Obs. — When other parts of speech are compounded 
with numerals, the first four assume the following forms,- 
viz.: [±ovo-, one; &-, 'two; rpc-, three; rerpa-^four; as, 

fiovoxspojq, dixepcoq^ rpiTZooq, rerpdizooq, OUC-homedy two- 

horned, three footed, four-footed. 



96 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

311. — Adjectives have three degrees of 
comparison: the Positive, Comparative, and 
Superlative. I 

312. — The Positive expresses a quality simply ; the 
Comparative asserts it in a higher or lower degree in 
one object than in another, or, than in several taken 
together ; and the Superlative in the highest or lowest 
degree compared with several taken separately; thus, 
" gold is heavier than silver ; it is the most precious of 
metals." Hence, those adjectives only can be compared 
whose signification admits the distinction of more or less. 

The superlative in Greek, as in Latin and English, often 
expresses only a very high degree of the quality, without 
implying comparison, and may be called the superlative 
of eminence. 

GENERAL RULE. 

313. — The comparative degree is formed by 
adding vspog to the positive ; and the superlative, 
by adding tatog ; thus, 



POSITIVE. 


COMPARATIVE. 


SUPERLATIVE. 


judxap 


fiaxdp-repog 


p.axdp-Taro<; 


euvoug 


sbvOlXT-TBpOS 


euvoiHT-raros 


xaxovooq 


xaxovoo<T-T£pos 


XaXOVOVG-TdTOS 


dnXoos-anAoos 


dnAoucT-repos 


&7zAou<j-TaTO<; 



Special Rules. 

314. — Adjectives in og reject g; and after 
a short syllable, change o into g> ; thus, 



COMPAEISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



97 



ipftoq 


op&o-repos 


dpfto-raros 


dUatoq 


Stxato-repos 


Sixaco-rarog 


Tzovrjpoq 


7COvrjp6-repoq 


7tov7jp6-Taroq 


&aujia<TT6s 


dav/ia<TT6-Tepo<; 


{taufiacrTo-Tazos 


dr^koq 


drjlo-repos 


drjXo-raroq 


evTcpLOS 


hrt[i6-Tepoq 


ivTlflO-TCLTOS 


iGyopog 


layupo-repoq 


l(T%Up6-TaTOZ 


ffcer a sliort 


syllable : — 




<jo<p6s 


Go<p(b-T£pos 


co<p<b-Taxo<z 


xevo<; 


xevto-repoz 


X£vd>-TOLTOZ 


ipoftepoq 


<po@ep(I)-T£po<; 


VoftspiD-TOLTOZ 


ipavepos 


<pavepa>-T£poz 


<pav£p(i>-Ta.TO'Z 


yaXenog 


yaXeizw-TSpos 


yaXtr^di-razo^ 


aypios 


dypicj-repoq 


aypKb-Taroz 


ixavos 


ixavCD-repoz 


lxa>(I)-TaTwz 



Obs. — The change of o into a> is made to prevent the 
concurrence of too many short syllables. 

315. — Adjectives in ag, yjg, and vg, add tlie 
endings of comparison to the root / as, 

fiiXacva fiiXav ; j±£kdv-T£poq y &c. 

et)(7ej34(; ; ebae^ia-repoq^ &c. 

eupu ; edp6-zepo<; y &c. 

316. — Adjectives in ov and yjv add tlie irreg- 
ular forms earspog and ecrarog ; as, 



eupus ebpeTa 



awpwv 
Tip-qv 



acppov 
ripev 



a<ppov-((j7tpo<;^ &c. 
repev-iazepoq^ &c. 



Exc. — But niizcDv makes 7Z£7za(r£po^^ &c, and ttiwv^ — 
iztor-poq^ 7zt6raroq\ yapUtq (from x a P ce VT ) makes yaptiGrepoq 
(for yapievr-repoq)^ and tz£vii<z (iz£vt}t) makes nevic-epoq (for 
7cev7]T-T£pos}. 
5 



98 COMPARISON BY Ctav A2TB cgto<;. 

COMPARISON BY iav AND i&tog. 

w Si7. — Some adjectives are compared by lav 
and torog ; viz., 

31S. — Some in pog, derived from substantives. 
These form the comparative and superlative, not 
from the adjective, but from the substantive; 
thus, 

£y#p6s, inimical, kyftoq, enmity, kyjttwv, ey&iGTos. 

olxrpSq, compassionate, olxroq, compassion, oixricov^lxriGroq, 
at<T%p6q,base, alGyoq, baseness, alGyi(Dv,alGyiGTo<; 

fiaxpoq, long, p-rjxoq, length, jifjxicov, fifjxKTToq. 

Also xaloq, beautiful, has xaXXiiov, xolXXcgtos, as from 
xdXXog, beauty. 

319. — Some in vg are compared both ways ; 
as, 

fia&b<;, deep, fiaftuzepoq, ftaftbraroq. 

and ftafticov, ftdftiGToq. 

In like manner compare ppaduq, slow / raybq, swift, 
nayus, thick / yXoxbq, sweet / (bxbq, quick / &c. 

320. — paScog, easy, has paiov, ^aiatog; or, 
with i subscribed, pqav, pdarog. 

Note. — Some of these, and of others compared in this way, are occa- 
sionally found compared by repog and rarog. Taxi>c {k?Jixvg and rjKvq^ 
obsolete) make raxiov, eAa^/aw, tjk'kjv, then, by euphonic change (xh KL 
becoming go), tclggov d-aocuv, eXclggwv, tjggcdv (Att. darruv, eTi&TTtJv, 
7JTT(jjrv). These principles have a wide application, also, with Unguals, 
&c. ; as, Kpancjv, kpegguv, /cpeiGGov ; and in verbs, rayto t&ggo, (3jjx i <J 
flyGGG), bpvyca) dpvGGo, Kopv&cu KopvGGO) (so, in nouns, daXar-ia $akaGGa t 
BprjK-ta QpTJGoa). 



DEFECTIVE COMPARISON". 



99 



IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 

32 1. — The following adjectives are irregular 
in their comparison ; viz., 

dpetwv apiGToq from "Apys, Mars. 

fieXrtajv fiiArcGTos {rom. ftouXopLai^T wish. 

xp£t(T<Ta)vj[ xpdrtffToq from xparus, brave. 

Xojtajv Awgtos from Xw^ for ftiXu)^ I 

f<pipraro<; \ [wish. 

(pipKjroq I from (fipW) I bear. 

(pipriGToq ) 
[ xaxcwv xdxiGToq 



dya&oq, good * 



xaxoq. 



bad 



I %£lpU)V 

pAyaq, great fiti^wv^ 

TcoXoq^ many izXziwv 

kXaybq^ small iXd<j<jwv\ 

fitxpoq, little ri<JGojV) or [j.eia)V) or fitxporepos • fitxpotaro^. 



%etpL(TTOS 

liiytGToq 
izXelGToq 
kkdyiqTOS 



DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

322. — Some adjectives in the comparative and super- 
lative degrees have no positive, but are formed from 





323. 


— Nouns; as 


5 




(HacnXsbq 


a king 


^aatXebrep 


OS 


fiaGtXsuTaroq 


xipdoq 


gain 


xtpdicjv 




xipdtGTos 


8eo$ 


God 


{tewrepoq 






xXi7TT7)S 


a thief 


- 




xXe7zr((jraroq 


xudos 


glory 


xudiajv 




xbdiGzoq 


* 


Euphonic for a/iev-i 


(jiV. 


t 


For Kparicjv. 


t 


For fieyiuv. 




§ 


For k?\axiwv. 



100 



DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 



XUQ)V 


a dog 


7rXTfxT7]S 


a striker 


TZOTTjq 


a drinker 


fir°s 


cold, rigor 


if (lip 


a thief 




324 


abroq 


self 



xvvrepos 



fityiwv 



324. — Pronouns ; as, 



TtXrjXTiGTaToc; 

7ZOTi(JTaTOS 

piytGTOs 
<p(I)praTos 



abrozaroq 



325. — Participles; as, 

£fipa)[x£vos Strong kfipu)[xevi<JT£poq i^Sajfieviararoq 



V 

ava> 
a<pap 



lyybs 

xdra} 

6(7(0 

Trip cry 

TZOppiti 
Tip U)t 
Vipi 



326. — Adverbs; as, 



up 
immediately 

near 

out 

down 

in 

back 

beyond 

far 

early 

highly 



avcv-Tspos 
&<pdp-Tepo<z 

{ iyyu-repoq 

( £yy-ia)v 
i^w-rspoq 
xarcb-repo^ 
i(j(!)-Tepoq 
6~t(Ttu-Tepoq 



7Z£pat-T£pO^ 

izopp(I)-T£poq 
Ttpaj'iai-TZpoc; 



I 



-TOLTOq 

-raros 
-zaroq 
--a~ 0$ 
-raros 
-raroq 
-zazoq 
-raroq 
u(/n<7ro<; 



TZpO 

bizlp 



327. — Prepositions; as, 

before Ttpo-repoq izpo-raroq whence izpwTOS 

over VTzip-rspoq vizip-Taroq whence uttoltoc; 



328. — Some comparatives and superlatives are again 
compared; as, 



Xo)tiD^ better 
fietajv, less 



Xiotrepoq 
fietdrepoz 



DIALECTS OF COMPARISON". 



101 



/5a^v, easier 

xaVucuv, more beautiful 

A \ ' y worse 

ZeipMJToq^ w%rst 

xuSktto^ most glorious 
ikd^t(TTo^ y least 

Ttp aj to q, first 



to fiaoTspov 
to xaXhd>T£pov 
( TO %£psi6Tspo» 
( and xeipoTepov 

7} %£ipi<JTOT£pr} 

xodiGTOLToq 
IXayiGTOTZpos 

IZpCOTLGTOq 



329* — Some words ending in t^, of the first declension, 
are compared; thus (see 294, Obs. 2), 

dftpcffTySj an insolent man 6fipiGTo~Tepoq uftptGTo-TaToq 
xXsovixTTjs, a grasping man nXeovexTiG-TaToq 



DIALECTS OF COMPARISON. 

330. — The Attics compare many adjectives in oc, yjq 9 
and ?, by -iGTepoq -iGTaToq, -atTspoq -aiTaToq^ and -iaTepoq 
-iGTaToq ; as, 



XdXoq, loquacious 
<p(Xoq^ friendly 
by syncope 
GizoodaToq^ diligent 
a<p&ovoq^ not envying 

TzaXawq^ old 

yepacoq^ an old man 
apxas, rapacious 

7rAsov^xr^c, avaricious 
(peudrje;, false 



XaXiG-Tepoq 
<pi).ai-Tepoq 
<piX-T£poq 
GTToudcuicT-Tspoc; 

d<pd-0v£<T-T£p0S 

izaX.ai-Ttpoq 
yepat-Tepoq 
dp - ay {(7-T£p o q 
TzX.eovexTiG-Tepoq -toltos 

(/'SudlG-TSpOq -TGLTOq 



TOLTOq 
-TOLTOq 

-TCLToq and (fiXtGToq 

-TOLTOq 
-TOLTOq 
-TOLTOq 

-TdToq 

-TOLTOZ 



331. — Dialects of particular comparatives and super- 
latives, are, for xpstGGwv, I. and D. xpiaawv, better / yeipcw^ 
P. yepetcovy I. dat. yjpfj'i, ace. x^P 7 !^ notn « plur. x^P 7 !^ > — 
pe(Cmv 9 L pJZwv, D. fidGGwVy greater * with others which 
may be learned by practice in reading. 



102 PEKSONAL PRONOUm 






THE PRONOUN. 



• V 



332. — A pronoun is a word used instead of a 
noun. 

333. — Pronouns may be divided into Per- 
sonal, Possessive, Definite, Reflexive, Reciprocal, 
Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and In- 
definite. Of these the personal only are sub- 
stantives ; the rest are adjectives. 

Personal Pronouns. 

334. — The Substantive or Personal Pronouns 
are sy6 ,1, of the first person ; av, thou, of the 
second ; and ov, of him, her, it, or, of himself, 
herself, itself, of the third (90) ; they have the 
same accidents as nouns (89) ; are of all genders ; 
and, in construction, take the gender and number 
of the noun for which they stand. They are thus 
declined : — 

tydi, I. First Person, M. or F. 

SINGULAR. 

N. lyd> 

G. ifidb [ioo 

D. iflOl JULOt 

A. £/jl£ fit 



DUAL. 


PLURAXw 


&4 


N. yjfielq 


v&'i v(6 


G. 7]i±a»> 


G. D. 


D. Tjfllv 


4 


A. r}[J.aq 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



103 



c6 y thou. Second Person, M. or F. 



SINGULAR. 

K V. co 

G. coo 
D. cot 



DUAL. 

K A. V. 

C(f<b'i ccpdi 

G. D. 

apmiv c<p<pv 



PLURAL. 

1ST.V. ujj.ets 
G* 6p.wv 
D. 6/jav 
A. vixaq 



oo, of him., of her ^ of it Third Person, M., F., or N. 



SINGULAR, 


DUAL. 


PLURAL. 


ST.— 


N. A 


N". o-^eTc, £Aey, N. c<pia 


G. 00 


ccpwi 


G. <r$r>c5y 


D. o\ 


G. D. 


D. tf^iVt 


A. 1 


ccpajiv 


A. c<pas^ ISTeut. c<pia 



Observations. 

335. — The monosyllabic forms i±oo, fioi, fi£, are always 
enclitic (35-37), and throwback their accent on the pre- 
ceding word. They rarely take a preposition. (Exc, 

336. — In the dual, the forms vm and c<pd> are sometimes 
written \>a> and c<pw. 

337.— The pronoun oo (third person) is also in the 
singular commonly used reflexively, or with reflexive 
forms ; as, iaorod, &c. It is rare in the Attic writers, but 
more frequent, under dialectical forms, in Homer and 
Herodotus. For the accusative, both singular and plural, 
1*0; and v&, him, her, it, them, are frequently used. The 
original root was perhaps 7 (nonx. fc), connected with 
Latin is. 



104 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Possessive Pronouns. 

338. — The Possessive Pronouns denote pos- 
session, and are derived from the substantive 
pronouns. 

339. — In signification, they correspond to the 
genitive of their primitives, for which they may be con- 
sidered as a substitute ; thus, 6 d.deX<pbs ^oD, the brother 
of me, has given place entirely to its equivalent, 6 £ t <io<; 
d.deX<p6q^ my brother. 

340* — In form, they are regular adjectives of the 
first and second declensions, and are declined like xaloq 
(269). They are derived as follows : 



From ip.i 


comes 


ifxSq 


ii 


-6v my 


<j4 




<ro<; 


<T7J 


gov thy 


i 




& 


rr 


-ov his 


VCUl 




VIOlTSp-OZ 


-a 


-ov our, i. e., of us two 


c<pwi 




G<pu)iT£p~oq 


-a 


-ov your, i. e., of you two 


ij!ielq 




ijfiirep-oq 


-a 


-ov our 


OfieXq 




vfiizep-oq 


-a 


-ov your 


a<p&S 




<jfirep-oq 


-a 


-ov their 




Doric 


a<p-6q 


-v 


-ov 



Obs. — To this class also belong tf/iedanos, one of our 
country, (>p.edar,6q y one of your country. But nodano^^ of 
what country ? more properly belongs to the interrogative 
— and oMlobaizo^^ one of another country r , to the indefinite 
pronouns. 

The Intensive Pronoun. 

341. — The Intensive Pkonoott avrog has 
three principal significations: — 
342. — In the nominative it always has the force of 



THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 



105 



the English self ; as, iycb abros, I myself ; go abrds, thou 
thyself / ab-dq^ he himself: so also, in the oblique cases, 
when it begins a clause ; as, abruv £d>paxa y J have seen the 
person himself: or accompanies a noun ; as, rob Xoyoo abrob, 
of the icord itself 

343. — In the oblique cases % after another word in 
the same clause, it is used for the third personal pronoun, 
and signifies him, her, it, them y as, ob% iwpaxas ab-6^ thou 
hast not seen him. 

344. — Preceded by the article, it always signifies the 
same j as, 6 auras av&pwTcoq, the same man. 

Obs. — -In the last sense, when the article ends with a 
vowel, it often combines with the pronoun, forming one 
Word ; thus, rabrob, for rob abrob ; rabrfj, for rfj abrfj ; 
rabrd, for ra abrd y &c. When thus combined, the neuter 
ends in ov as well as o. The combined rabrfj and rabrd, in 
the same way, and the same things, must be carefully 
distinguished from rabr^ and rabra^ in this way, and these 
things, parts of ohroq 47-8). The former has the coronis 
( ' ) over the o, the latter has not. 

345. — The pronoun abror is thus declined : — 



SINGULAR. 

N". abr-oq -tj -o 
G. abr-ob -?}<; -ob 
D. abr-<p -5 



-0) 



A. abr-ov -yv -6 



DUAL. 

N. A. 



abr-d) 






-a 

G. D. 

auT-oHv -a7v -oTv 



PLURAL. 

]S". abr-oi -a{ -a 

G. abr-wv -(bv -aw 

D. abr-olq ~dlq -ol£ 



A. 



aur-ouq -aq a 



In the same manner are declined 



aXXoq 


aXX-q 


aXXo 


another 


rr 


n 


8 


who, which 


&xe?vo<; 


ixetvy 


ixelvo 


that man, he. 


b* 









106 



BEFLEXTVE PRONOUNS. 



Reflexive Pronouns. 

346. — Reflexive Pkonouns are such as relate 
to the subject of the proposition in which they 
stand. 

347. — The reflexive pronouns are formed from 
the accusative singular of the personal pronouns, with the 
oblique cases of abrdq. They are, ifiaorou^ of myself ; 
(jsaurou, of thyself/ iaoTody of himself/ and are thus 
declined : — 



SINGULAR. 

G. £ai)T-OU -TjS -00 

D. iaor-aj -r) -& 

A. iaur-ov -t}v -6 



PLURAL. 

G, iaur-wv -wv -wv 

D. §auT-o?<; -ai<; -o?£ 

A. iauT-ouz -dq -a 



348* — In the same manner are declined ifiaorob and 
aeaoroo^ without the neuter gender, but in the singular 
number only. In the dual and plural, the parts of the 
compound are used separately ; as, i}(iwv abrwv^ of our- 
selves. 

349. — Homer never uses the compound form even in 
the singular ; but, £fd abrov ; ah abrov^ &c. 

350. — The contracted forms Gaurob and aozoo y &c, are 
often used for aeaurob and kaoroo. 

351. — Sometimes in the singular, and often in the 
plural, kaorob is used by the Attics in the first and second, 
as well as in the third person. They are all sometimes 
used as reciprocals (353) ; and, in some grammars, they 
are so denominated. 

352. — In these compounds, instead of au, the Ionics 
have wu, and retain e before it ; thus, fyewuTou, <reajur6u 9 
&C, for ifiauTOU) <fcc. 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 107 

Reciprocal Pronoun. 

353. — The Reciprocal Pronoun indicates a 
mutual relation between different persons, ex- 
pressed in English by tlie phrase one another. 

This pronoun is formed from aXXos, wants the singular, 
and is thus declined : — 

DUAL. * PLURAL. 



G. aXX-qX-otv -aw -otv 
D. aXXijX-ow -aw -ow 
A. aXXyX-w -a -u) 

The dual is seldom used* 



Gr. aXX-qX-a)V ~wv -<ov 
D. aXX-rjX-oic; ' <u$ -01$ 
A. aXXjjX-ous -#S -OL 



Demonstrative Pronouns. 

354. — The Demonstrative Pronouns are such 
as point out with precision a person or thing 
already known. They are, 



ODTOZ 


0> 

aurrj 


TODTO 


this person, this 


ode 


Tj3e 


rode 


this {this here) 


lxewo$ 


Ixewrj 


kxewo 


he, that person, that 



355. — From ouzos we have the adverb o5rw<r, thus 
(often, in the preceding way) ; from ode, the adverb wde, 
thus (often, in the following way). 'Exewog is declined 
like abroq (345). 

Ouro^ like the article, takes the initial t in the nomina- 
tive neuter and in the oblique cases, and is thus declined : 



108 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, 



N*. V. ou-to<; 

G. TOU-TOU 

D. tou-toj 

A. TOO-TOV 



Singular. 




au-TTj 


TOU-TO 


rab-rrjq 


TOU-TOU 


zab-Trj 


TOU-TO) 


tolu-ttjv 


TOU-TO 



N. A. V. rou-rto 



G. D. 



TOU-TO W 



Dual. 



TOLU-Ta 



Tau-Taut 



TOU-TOJ 
TOU-TOIV 



Plural. 



N. V. OU-TOt 

G. TOU-TWV 
D. TOU-TOIS 
A. TOU-TOU? 



au-Tai 


TCLU-TOL 


TOU-TOJU 


TOU-TOJV 


Tau-Tatq 


TOU-TO tq 


Tau-Taq 


Tau-Ta 



Obs. — The correlatives togoutos, towutoc, and ttjIuoutos^ 
have either ov or o in the nominative and accusative 
singular neuter ; thus, 



N. Toaou-Toq, TO<rau-T7) 

G. TOGOU-TOU, &G. 



TOCFOU-TOV, Or TOGOU-TO 



356. — Among the Attics, the demonstratives were 
rendered emphatic by adding : to the termination ; as, 
outogi, toutouc, toutwl, &c. The final vowel a, o, or e is 
elided, and t put in its place ; thus, ode, touto, touto., with 
the emphatic i are written 6d(, toutL, toluti. When ye or 
de follows the demonstrative, the t is placed after it, e. g., 
toutS ye with t becomes TouToyi. This suffix always draws 
the accent to itself. A similar emphasis is expressed in 
Latin by annexing the syllables met, te, pie, ce ; as, 
egomet, tute, meapte, hicce (B. & M. Lat. Gr., 233. 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 109 

237)* The Ionic i in the dative plural, however, is the 
original ending of the case. 

337 ' . — The emphatic t is annexed also to the compounds 
of ooroq^ and a few of the correlatives; such as roaooroq^ 

TOIOUTOS) TTjXcxOUTO^, t6(TO<;, &C., making TO<TOUTO(Tt\ &c. 



Relative Pronoun. 

338.- — The Relative Pronoun is one that re- 
lates to, and connects its clause with, a preceding 
noun or pronoun, called the antecedent. 

359. — The relative oc, >J, 6', who, which, what, is 
declined like abroq (345). It is rendered emphatic by 
adding the enclitic syllable rcep^ as, 8<nzsp, f^ep, 3nep y 
precisely who (927). 

360. — The Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic 
tragedians, sometimes, instead of og, use the article 6, ij, 
to, as a relative. 

361. — Instead of #c, the compound pronoun o<r~iq is 
used as a relative after naq, or any word in the singular 
expressing an indefinite number ; and ogql, after the same 
words in the plural ; as, ttocs ogtk;, every one who / r.dvre<; 
8<roc, all who. 

Interrogative Pronoun. 

362. — The Ikteeeogative Pftoisrouisr is used 
in asking a question; as, rig enoiyjas; Who 
did it? 

363. — The interrogative rfc, rt; who? what? 
has the acute accent on the first syllable, and is thus 
declined: — 



110 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 





Singular. 




N. T.fc 


riq 


Tl 


G. TWOS 


TWOS 


TWOS 


D. TtVl 


tiyt 


TlVl 


A. Twa 


Twa 
Dual. 


r 

Tl 


N. A. TWS 


TWS 


TWS 


G. D. twow 


TWO W 

Plural. 


TWO IV 


N*. rives 


Tiveq 


Ttva 


G. TWOJV 


TWWV 


TWWV 


D. riVf 


Tlffl 


TlGl 


A. Ti'vas 


Tivag 


Twa 



In the same manner decline ouTts, and fj.7jrts. 

Obs. — Instead of the genitive and dative twos, twi, we 
often find a secondary form, roD, rw, 

364* — The interrogative t(s has its responsive, 
offrtSt which is thus used : t(s Inoirjae ; who did it ? obx 
olda offrts IxotTjae, I know not who did it. The responsive 
ogtis is declined as follows, the os being separately 
declined, and retaining its own proper accent. 





Singular. 




N. OG-TIS 


T]-TIS 


o,rc 


G. OU-TWOS 


$}G-TWOS 


oo-twos 


D. W-TWt 


Ifi-TWl 


to-TWt 


A. ov-rwa 


r\v-Twa 
Dual. 


S,Tl 


N. A. w-rive 


Cf 

a-Twe 


W-TIVS 


G. D. oh-rivoiv 


alv-Tivoiv 


oh-rcvoci 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 



Ill 



Plural. 



G. WV-TLVOJV 

D. o\a-riat 
A. ova-Tiva.'Z 



eft-rives 


a-riva 


toV-Tt\>0)V 


WV-TIVWV 


aia-rtal 


OlG-TlGl 


acr-Tiva'Z 


a-rtva 



onq, declined like 



365. — Instead of oartq^ Homer uses 
rig as above, and instead of the genitive and dative 
ourtvo<; y mrtvi) we find the secondary forms orou and or<p 
(363, Obs.). 

366. — There appears to have been, among the ancient 
Greeks, another interrogative pronoun, noq, 7c?/, r.6v, and 
its responsive Biros, ony, 6-ov, which have become obsolete, 
except in two cases, now used adverbially; viz., 7roD, 
where ? rcf, in what way ? and hence the responsives oxou 
and o7n?. From these are formed the interrogative xoTepos, 
-a, -ov, which of the two f and its responsive o-orepoq, -a, 
-ov, which of the two / with several other adverbs and 
adjectives still in use ; each interrogative having always 
its own responsive, — the one being the correlative of the 
other; as, 



RESPONSIVES. 

oTzoloq^ of ichat kind. 



INTERROGATIYES. 

Adj. 7roTo^, of what hind? 

Tzoffoq, how much ? how 
many ? 

iziqXixo'z, of what age? 

-xorspoq^ which of the two ? o-orepoq, which of the two. 
Adv. ™<Z) how ? o-ax;, hoio, &c. ; thus, 



oTzoaoq, as much (pia?iy) 

as. 
6t:7}1{xo<;, of what age. 



TlrjXtxoq i(Trci of what age is he? oux olda or^Xixoq^ I 
know not of what age. In the same manner the respon- 
sives are used without an interrogation preceding; as, 
i^sXd^ero 6x070$ ^v, " he forgot of what kind he was." 
To these also may be added nodaxoq^ of what country? 



112 



INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



Indefinite Pronouns. 



367. — The Indefinite Peonouns are such as 
denote persons or things indefinitely. They are, 



r>? 


t\s 


t\ 


some one. 


delva 


delva 


deTva 


some one, such. a one. 


aXXoq 


aXXrj 


aXXo 


another. 


izepoq 


iripa 


irepov 


other, a different one, another. 



To which may be added the following negatives / 
viz., 



oortq 
obdeiq 



oudstjLta 
p.7]Ti<; 



ovrt 
oudiv 

/JL7JTI 



> no one. 



368. — The indefinite ris has the grave accent on the 
last syllable ; it is thus distinguished from rfc interroga- 
tive, which naturally has always the acute accent on the 
first; the former is enclitic (35), the latter is not. 

369. — The indefinite fewa, some one, of all genders, 
and always with the article prefixed, is declined like a 
noun of the third declension ; thus, 



SINGULAR. 

N. deTv-a 
G. deTv-oq 
D. deTv-t 
A. delv-a 



PLURAL. 

G. Setv-wu 

D. 

A. delv-a<; 



Azlva is sometimes indeclinable; as, G. rod <?e?va, D. 
rip deTva. v AXXoz is declined like abzd(; (345) ; irepos, like 
<pa\>£p6s (270). 



CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 113 

Obs. 1. All words used interrogatively are also used 
indefinitely, but generally with the accent changed ; thus, 



INTERROGATIVES. 

x6go% ; how great ? how 

many ? 
xoloe: ; of what hind ? 

7zr)XUo<;\ how old? how 



large i 



9 



INDEFINITES. 

TroertJc, of a certain size or 

number, 
izoios, of a certain kind, 

such. 
TCTjAucoft of a certain age 

or size. 



CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJEC- 
TIVES. 

370. — Besides the interrogatives and responsives (363), 
the Greek language has likewise special correlative 
PVOHOUT18, each pair of which has a mutual relation. 
The latter of the two is expressed m English by as. 

t6<?oz o<ro~ (Lat. tanttis, quantus), so great, as. 

to1o<z 6[o~ (Lat. talis, qucdis), such, as. 

T7]XUoz 7jArxoc of the same age, asj of the same size, as. 



371. — In these words the demonstrative is often 
replaced by a fuller and more emphatic form ; as, 



TOffocrds ) r , rowad 

yonodoz 



togoutoz ) 






TOtOOTO 



114 



DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 



372.-DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 



IONIC. 


DORIC. 


2EOLIC. 


POETIC. 


S. N. 


eywv, kyhvT]. 


eyo, iycov. 


kyo). 




h/foya, lydvya. 


B. ia>, Itdya, 




Gr. ifieto^ kjuio. 


EfJLEV. 


B. £//oi)f. 


EJJLE-&EV. 


k/iedev. 








D. 


kjiiv. 


I^Oi, B. EflV. 




D. KA. 


dfiE, afz/ue. 






P. N. rjfJiteg, - 


a//ef, d^jUEg. 




afifiEg. 


G-. rjiieuv. 


dficjv, dfieotv 


dflflOV) dfl/LLEOV. 


fjfiEiuw. 


D. 


a(i,iv y d/ilv. 


d/LLjUl y djbLflCVj 


qfriv. 


- 


• 


ajujusaiv. 




A. y/te'ag. 


d/Ltdg, d/i€ } dfifie. 


aju/uag, djUftiag. 


rj[i£lag 1 a/u/is, 



2V>, Thou. 



S. N. T. 

Gr. geIo, aio t ge&ev. 

D. 

A. 
D. N.A.V. 
P. N. Y. v/uEEg. 

Gr. V/J,£G)V. 

D. 

A. ty/£*ar. 



ru, rfv^, rvya. 


TOVV7}. 


■ 


teVj TEvg, reovg. 


GEV 1 GE-&ZV. 


Gsio&ev. 


TOl } TLV, rk'lv. 


TiVTJ. 




TE, TV. 


riv 1 TELV. 




VjLLE, VflflE. 






vfj-eg, vjUjLLEg. 




VjUJUE, VfljUEg, 


VjLLCJV. 


VfJ./IG)Vj VflflEOV. 


VflELOV. 


VflCVj VfUV. 


V/LLjUL, VjLL/LUV, 




v/Liag, v/iE) vfijiE. 


VjLL/LLEGLV. 

vjuftag, v/LLfLEag. 


vjueiag. 



Ou 9 of Him, <&c. 



S. Gr. £10, OLOj EElOj £0, 

E-&EV. 
D. EOL. 

A. juiv. 

D. N. A. G(f)£E. 

P. N. G(j)££g. 

Gr. G(f)€G)V. 

D. G$IV, G<pl. 

A. G<p£ag. 



£V. 



VLV, 



G(f)G)£, G<pG). 
G(j)Eg. 



G<p£, <pi. 



e&ev, yed-Ev. 



/LLLV, VLV. 



aG(f>t. 

Gtykg, aG(j>£, /Liiv, 
viv. 



Elo&ev. 



£01. 



££, G(j>£. 

G(p£L£g. 
G(f>£LG)V. 

<j>iv. 
G(f)£iag. 



THE VERB. 115 

Obs. 1. fitv and vtv are used for the accusative in all 
genders and numbers; so also is <r<pi, among the poets, 

i. e., for a&r-ov, -rjv, -6, and avr-ouq, -dq^ -a. 

Obs. 2. The adjective pronouns are inflected in 
the different dialects according to the models of the first 
and second declensions. Other peculiarities may be learned 
by practice ; as, for vjixizepoq, -a, -ov ? our * D. d/a*c, -a ? <5v 

for Ofiirepoq, D. 6p.6q; for Cfirepoq, D. <?<p6q\ for o&nvoq 
A. orou, D. oreu^ I. oreOj P. ottsoj • for wrivt^ A. ora>, I. or^a> 
for artva, A. arra, D. aWa 5 for rivoq and revoc, A. too, I. r£o 
D. red ; for rrvc and rrA, A. rw, I. t^oj ; for rt'ywv, I. r^wv 
for t{<jc, X. rioter: ; for r:va, A. arra, D. aaaa ; for tfoc, 0"^', 
<rov, £Ay, D. reo^ ? rsa, rsov ; for oc, 7Jf, ov, I. £o<T, £77, £ov 9 his, 

&c. : this form occurs only in the singular number. 



THE VERB. 

373. — A Vekb is a word used to express the 
act j being, or state of its subject. 

374. — Verbs are of two kinds, Transitive and 
Intransitive* 

* These two classes comprehend all the verbs in any language. 
According to this division, Transitive verbs include those only which 
denote transitive action ; i. e., action done by one person or thing to 
another, or passing over from the actor to an object acted upon ; as, 
" Caesar conquered Gaul," or " G-aul was conquered by Cassar." Intransi- 
tive verbs include those which have nothing transitive in their meaning 
— nothing passing over from one person or thing to another, and conse- 
quently no relation to any thing beyond their subject, which they represent 
in a certain state or condition, and nothing more. Instead of the terms 
active and neuter, formerly used to denote these two classes of verbs, the 
terms Transitive and Intransitive are here preferred, as being more expres- 
sive and appropriate, and in order to relieve the term " active" from the 
ambiguity created by using it both as the designation of a class of 
verbs, and also as the name of a particular form of the verb called the 
active voice. To the latter of these only it is applied in this work. 



116 ' THE VERB. 

375. — A Transitive verb expresses an act 
done by one person or thing to another. In 
Greek, it lias three forms, Active, Middle, and 
Passive (401). 

376. — An Intransitive verb expresses being, 
or a state of being, or action confined to the 
actor. It is, of course, commonly without the 
passive form (401, Obs. 2), i. e., in a passive sense. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

377. — The use of the verb, in simple propositions, 
is to affirm. That of which it affirms is called its subject, 
which, if a noun or pronoun, is in the nominative; but 
with the infinitive form of the verb, its subject is in the 
accusative. 

378. — The verbs that properly express, in Greek, sim- 
ple being or becoming ', are three, ei/u and vndpyaj, am,, and 
ffyvopat, become. .The state of being expressed by intran- 
sitive verbs, may be a state of rest; as, euda>, I sleep: or 
of motion; as, ^ vdbq iztest, the ship sails: or of action; 
as, rpiym, I run. 

379. — Transitive and Intransitive verbs may 
be distinguished thus : a transitive verb requires an object 
to complete the sense ; as <pil(b <7£, I love thee / the intransi- 
tive verb does not, but the sense is complete without such 
an object; as xdOyriat, I sit ; rplya), I run. 

380. — Many verbs considered intransitive in Greek, 
are translated by verbs considered transitive in English ; 
as, avddva), I please ; vitaxoba), I obey / axei&ai, J disobey / 
kfiTTodiZa), I hinder ; hoykoj, I trouble; &c. In strict lan- 
guage, however, these and similar verbs denote rather a 
state than an act, and may be rendered by the verb to be 
and an adjective word ; as, I am pleasing, obedient, dis- 
obedient^ &a 



DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 117 

381. — Many verbs are used, sometimes in a transitive, 
and sometimes in an intransitive sense ; as, dvariXXw, tr., 
J cause to spring up; intr., I spring up; 6p t uda), tr., I 
incite/ intr., I start forth, rush. This change from a 
transitive to an intransitive sense, however, is generally 
indicated by a change from the active to the middle form 
of the verb; as, p:W, active tr., I show ; <paboiJ.ai, mid., 
I show myself, i. e., intr., I appear. (See 401, Note.) 

382. — Verbs usually intransitive become transitive, 
-when a word of similar signification with the verb itself 
is introduced as its object ; as, rpiyiop.^ rd> dp6 t uov, let us 
run the race. 

383. — "When a writer wishes to direct the attention, not so much 
to a particular act, as to the employment or state of a person or thing, the 
object of the act, not being important, is omitted ; and the verb, though 
transitive, assumes the character of an intransitive. Thus, when we 
say, "The boy reads," nothing more is indicated than the present state 
or employment of the subject "boy," and the verb has obviously an 
intransitive sense: still an object is implied. But when we say, "The 
boy reads Homer," the attention is directed to the object "Homer," as 
well as to the act, and the verb has its proper transitive sense. 



DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 

384. — Though the division of verbs into Transitive 
and Intransitive, comprehends all the verbs in any lan- 
guage, yet, from something peculiar in their form or sig- 
nification, they are characterized by different names 
expressive of this peculiarity. The most common of these 
are the following, viz. : Regular, Irregular, Deponent, 
Defective, Redundant, Impersonal, Desiderative, Fre- 
quentative, and Inceptive. 

385. — Regular Verbs are those in which 
all the parts are formed from the Root or 



it 



118 INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 

stem, according to certain rules. (509-543, 
and 618-629.) 

386.— Irregular, or Anomalous Verbs, differ 
in some of their parts from the regular forms. 
(651-661, 675-686.) 

387. — Deponent Verbs under a middle and 
passive form, have either an active or middle 
signification. (662-665.) 

388. — Defective Verbs are those in which 
some of the parts are Wanting. 

389.— Redundant Verbs have more than 
one form of the same part. 

390. — Impersonal Verbs are used only in 
the third person singular. (666-671.) 

39 1. — Desideratives denote desire, or inten- 
tion of doing. (672-674.) 

392. — Frequentatives express repeated ac- 
tion. (672-674.) 

393. — Inceptives mark the beginning or con- 
tinued increase of an action. (672-674.) 



INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 

394. — To the inflection of verbs belong Voices, 
Moods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons. 

395. — The Voices in Greek are three : Active, 
Middle, and Passive. 

396. — The Moods are five: the Indicative, 
Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive. 



VOICE. 119 

397. — The Tenses, or distinctions of time in 
Greek, are seven: the Present, the Imperfect, 
the Future, the Aorist, the Perfect, the Pluper- 
fect, and, in the passive voice, the Future- 
perfect. 

398. — The Numbeks are three: Singular, 
Dual, and Plural. 

399. — The Persons are three : First, Second, 
and Third. 

400. — The Conjugations, or forms of inflec- 
tion, may be distinguished in general as two ; 
viz., that of verbs in a>, and that of verbs in fit. 

Obs. — Some verbs appear in single tenses in both forms, 
as deizvuat and dewu/jLi. Many verbs of the ordinary con- 
jugation in to have single tenses after the conjugation in 
fit I as, /?a:W, I go; 2d Aor., e'/^v, went, as from pipy/n; 
yiyvdxTxa), know/ 2d Aor., epwv, knew, as from ytyvw/jLt. 
Such verbs, though regular in each form, are generally 
reckoned among the irregular verbs. 

voice: 

401. — Voice is a particular form of the verb, 
r hich shows the relation in which the subject 
stands to the action expressed by the verb. 
The transitive verb, in Greek, has three voices : 
.ctive, Middle, and Passive. 

Obs. 1. In all voices the act expressed by the transitive 
r erb is the same, and in all, except sometimes the middle, 

equally transitive; but in each, the act is differently 
[elated to the subject of the verb, as follows: 



^20 VOICE. 

402.— The Active Voice represents the sub- 
ject of the verb as acting on some object ; as, 

tvnto as, I strike you. 

403.— The Middle Voice represents the action 
of the verb primarily as terminating in the 
subject ; as, Ttaiofiat, I cause myself to cease, I 
cease; secondarily, as performed for the subject, 
and terminating in it indirectly; as, s^a^a^v 
tbv 7t6Za, I hurt the foot for myself = Ihurtmy 
foot ; tiwo&iinv iTiTtov, I bought me a horse. 

404.— -The Passive Voice represents the sub- 
iect of the verb as acted upon ; as, vvrttofiai, I 
'am struck ; 6 7U>k e^U^n, the foot was 
hurt. 

Obs. 2. Intransitive verbs, from their nature, do 
not admit a distinction of voice. They are generally in 
the form of the active voice, but frequently in that ol the 
middle or passive; but, whatever be their form their 
signification is always the same; as, *<», J- clie , 

davooaai, I shall die. 

Obs. 3. The Middle Voice, in Greek, is so called, 
because it has a middle signification between the active 
and the passive, implying neither action nor passion 
simply, but a union, in some degree, of both. Middle 
verbs may, with sufficient accuracy, be divided into Fui 

' Classes, as follows : . 

1st. In middle verbs of the first class, the action ot 
the verb is reflected immediately back upon the agent; and 
hence verbs of this class are often *^T fW'^V" 
the active voice joined with the accusative of the reflexiv 
pronoun; as, fefi», I wash, scil. some one ; Xooo^J wast, 
myself; the same as low I^mtov. 



VOICE. 121 

2d. la middle verbs of the second class 9 the agent 
is also the remote object of the verb, or he with respect 
to whom the act takes place; so that middle verbs of 
this class are equivalent to the active voice with the 
dative of the reflexive pronoun (jtfiaozw^ aeaorw, kauzw) ; as, 
&e~ivai vo/iov, to enact a law for another (spoken of the laio- 
giver); tiicrftac vojiov, to enact a law for one's self (spoken 
of the people}. These verbs imply that the thing is done 
for onds self 

3d. Middle verbs of the ihivd class express an action 
performed at the commaud of, or with regard to, the sub- 
ject, and are expressed in English by to cause. In other 
words, this class may be said to signify, to cause any 
thing to he done / as, ypdcpoj, I write ; ypdvofiai^ I cause to 
be written / I cause the name, as of an accused person, 
to be taken doicn in icriti?ig by the magistrate, thus, 
/ indict 

4th. Middle verbs of the fourth class imply reciprocal 
action, and their meaning is but an accidental modification 
of those of the first ; that which we do among each other •, 
being regarded as done to ourselves / thus, dcoMyeffftat, to 
converse together * 3iaXu£<r&ai, to dissolve with one another , 
to come to terms ; GopfidXXeG#at^ to strike together, to engage 
with, to come either into friendly or hostile contact. 

5th. The fifth class comprehends middle verbs of the 
first class, when followed by an accusative, or some other 
case; in other words, it embraces those middle verbs 
which denote an action reflected back on the agent, and 
are followed by an accusative, or other case, which that 
action farther regards ; as, avap.va<r&ai tc, to recall any 
thing to on£& own recollection. 

Note. — From the reflected nature of this voice, many verbs, which. 

are tracsitive in the active voice, may be rendered by an intransitive 

verb in the middle voice; as, ote/j.g), I send (viz., a/icther}] crD./xtfia^ 

I send myself ; i. e., I go; bpyi^u, I provoke another; bpyt^ouai, I provoke 

6 



122 MOODS. 

myself, i. e., I am angry ; irei&cj, I persuade another ; nei&oiLiai, I persuade 
myself, i. e., I yield, or obey. In many instances, however, the relation to 
self is not so clearly distinguishable, and in the later and less classical 
writers it was often lost sight of. In the earlier writers the distinction 
between the two voices is much more strictly observed. 

i Ohs. 4. Not unfrequently a middle tense, especially 
the future, takes the place of an active ; as, axouw, I 
hear, Aor. rjxaucra, I heard i hut, fat., axou&o/iai, I shall 
hear. 

Obs. 5. The present, the imperfect, the perfect, the plu- 
perfect, and the future-perfect middle, are the same in 
form as in the passive. When the middle aorists are 
unusual or wanting, their place is supplied by the passive 
aorists in a middle sense. Sometimes, when the middle 
aorist is used in the ordinary sense, the passive also is 
used as a middle, but in a peculiar sense; as, middle, 
GzeikaG&at, to array one*s self ; passive, GTaJS.vai, to travel. 

Obs. 6. The 2d perfect and 2d pluperfect active (called 
by the ancient grammarians the perfect and pluperfect mid- 
dle) are comparatively rare, and are active in signification. 
In some instances, it is true, they incline to an intransi- 
tive and reflexive sense ; as, xinotfta, I have persuaded 
myself i. e.,J am confident. But on the whole they have 
no claim to the name of middle tenses, the office of these 
being performed regularly by the so-called perfect and 
pluperfect passive. 



MOODS. 

403. — Mood is the mode or manner of express- 
ing the signification of the verb. 

400. — The moods, in Greek, are five, namely: 
the Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, 
and Infinitive. 



MOODS. 123 

407. — The Indicative Mood asserts tlie action 
or state expressed by tlie verb simply as a fact ; 
as, <2uX<3, Hove; ypd<p£i, he writes. 

Obs. 1. The indicative, in Greek, being used in 
dependent, as well as in independent clauses, resembles the 
English indicative, and is often used where the subjunc- 
tive would be used in Latin ; as, yiyvaHrxets riq *<jti ; do 
you Jcnow who he is ? Latin, An scis qui sit ? 

408. — The Subjunctive and Optative Moods 
represent the action or state expressed by the 
verb, not as a fact, but only as a conception of 
the mind still contingent and dependent : that 
is, they do not represent a thing as what does, 
or did, or certainly will exist ; but as what may, 
or can, or might exist. 

The Subjunctive regularly represents this 
contingency and dependence as present; the 
Optative, as past 

409. — The Imperative Mood commands, ex- 
horts, entreats, or permits; as, ypo^s, write 
thou ; Ivq, let him go. 

Obs. 2. The present imperative marks continued 
and relative action; as, izoki, be doing, go to doing : the 
aorist, absolute action; as, tzoliqgov, do : the perfect implies 
completed and abiding action; as, Znfisfilyjeda), let him 
have been cast in, i. e., let him be cast in, and continue so; 
i) $bpa xexleieftw^ let the door have been shut = be shut 
and remain so. > 

Rem. — The future indicative, the subjunctive, and the 



124 TEASES. 

infinitive, are sometimes used imperatively. See Syntax 
cf these moods. 

410.— The Infinitive Mood expresses the 
meaning of the verb in a general manner, with- 
out any distinction of person or number; as, 
ypd^stv, to write, or be writing / yeyoacbevai, to 
Jtcwe written / y^a^Orivai, to be written. 

Obs. 3. Besides the common use of the infinitive, 
as in Latin, it is completely a verbal notm, of the 
neuter gender (1087). 

Obs. 4. Hence the Greek infinitive supplies the place 
of those verbal nouns called gerunds and supines in Latin 
(1087, Obs. 3 and 4). 

Obs. 5. The imperfect and pluperfect exist only in the 
indicative. 



TENSES. 

411. — Tenses are certain forms of the verb 
which point out the distinctions of time. 

412. — The Tenses in Greek are, in the active 
voice, six; in the passive, seven : the Present, the 

Imperfect, the Future, the Aorist, the Perfect, 
the Pluperfect, and, in the Passive, the Future- 
perfect. 

413o — The perfect and pluperfect active, the aorists in 
all the voices, and the future passive, have each two dif- 
ferent forms (strictly a more archaic and a later one), 
called respectively the First and Second Perfects, Pluper- 
fects, Futures, and Aorists. The double forms are not 
commonly used in the same verb ; as generally the later 



TENSES. 125 

forms, called the first perfect, first aorist, &c, have sup- 
planted the earlier form, which is found in but a small 
number of verbs. In some instances both forms remain, 
with a difference in their meaning as ivords, but not with 
any difference in their meaning as tenses. The student 
f should reme?nber that the first and second perfects, aorists, 
&c, are, with reference to time, but one tense. The aorist 
tense is found in two forms, the first and second aorist, &c. 

414. — The Pkeseot tense expresses what is 
going on at the present time ; as, ypd<pQ y I am 
writing, I write. 

Obs. 1. The present tense is thus used to express 
general truths, what we conceive as going on all the time ; 
as, ra £wa zpiyei, animals run. In historical narration it 
often gives vividness to the picture, by transferring a past 
action to the present. 

415. — The Imperfect tense represents an 
action or event as passing, and still unfinished, 
in. past time / as, eypa^ov, I toas writing. 

Hem. — This tense corresponds in meaning and use to 
the "past progressive" in English, and the imperfect in 
Latin. 

Obs. 2. From its expressing the continuance of an 

f action, this tense is frequently used to express what was 

eustOTstciry, or continued from time to time ; as, 6 frxo- 

xo/iog rov \~-ov erptfie 9 xcu i,xriut^e r^daaq yriipaz, the 

groom kept buebing and ctjkrytng the harm every day. 

Obs. 3. Thus, too, the imperfect* as denoting that 
which one teas doing, but did not finish, is used co?iatively 9 
of action begun or attempted, but not accomplished ; as, 



126 TENSES. 

!'7T£!#ov, I teas persuading = tried to persuade ; kshpsnov 
ix rfj^ tidou, I was turning, ivied to turn him out of the 
road (but did not succeed) ; KX(ap%oq dk robe; arparimraq 
Z-pidZezo Uvat, and Clearchus weot to forcing the 
soldiers to go. 

416.— The Future tense expresses what will 
take place in future time ; as, ypa^ty I shall or 
will write. 

Mem. — The future tense corresponds to the simple 
future in Latin and English ; and, in the passive voice, 
has two forms, called thejirst and secojid ; as, ypayftyjcjofiaL 
and Ypa<p7j<rojj.ac. 

Obs. 4. Other varieties of future time are expressed by 
means of auxiliary verbs. (See 423.) 

417. — The Aorist represents a past action or 
event absolutely, i. e., with no reference to con- 
tinuance of time, but simply as occurring ; as, 
eypa^a, I wrote. 

He?n. — This tense, in all the voices, has two forms, 
called the first and second; the first the later, and far 
more common (see above). It corresponds in meaning to 
the perfect indefinite in Latin. When the time to which 
the pluperfect refers is manifest from the context, and no 
special importance rests on the idea of completed action, 
the aorist, as shorter and simpler in form, is sometimes 
used instead of it, as also sometimes where our idiom more 
naturally employs the perfect. 

Obs. 5. The aorist denotes, properly, a shif/le act in 
the past, without the idea of continuance. But the Greeks 
sometimes regarded this single act as the representative 
of a class, and hence made it stand for a class. The 



TENSES. 127 

aorist thus sometimes becomes equivalent to a universal 
present, denoting customary action ; as, Taq r&v <pauXwv 

auvrfteiaq oliyoq ypovoq aei di£Xu<j£^ A. short time alio ays dis- 
solves the intimacies of the wicked. But it is never used 
for an habitual past in place of the imperfect ; thus, never 
Swxpdrrjq £dcda£e for ididadzev, Socrates used to teach. *, 

Obs. 6. From the nature of the two tenses, imperfecta 
and aorist, it will be seen that when continued and mo- 
mentary (or absolute) actions are mingled in narration, 
the contimied action is regularly expressed by the 
imperfect , and the momentary by the aorist; as, 

££ id p afie xai xa&uXdxret, He EAX FOETH (the aorist), 
and went to barking at theyn (the imperfect). Tobq r±h 
oo> TzzXraGraq idi^avzo ol jSdp t 3apoc^ xai efidyovTO* 
kizet dk kyyhq rjdav ol oizXlrai, ir p dr. o v r o , xai ol TzekraGTcCi 
eu&bs el'-ovro, The peltastce^ therefore, the barbarians 
seceived (aorist), and fought (imperfect) with them. 
JButiohen the heavy-armed soldiers were near, they turned 
(aorist), and the peltastce immediately puesued them 
(imperfect), 

3S". B. — Though, in the paradigm both forms of the aorist are usually 
given, they ire rarely both in use. When both are used, it is'either in 
different dialects, or sometimes as the one transitive, the other intransi- 
tive; as, Efaca, I caused to go; £/%v, I v;eni: egttjcg,, I caused to stand; 
eoTTjv, I stood. 

418. — The Peseect tense represents an action 
or event as completed at the present time, i. e. ? in 
a period of time which is conceived as extending 
to the present; as, yeypaipa, I have written. 

Hem. — In some verbs, this tense, in the active voice, 
has two forms, called the first and second perfects, 
but without difference of meaning as to time (see 413). 
It corresponds in meaning and use to the present-perfect 
in English, and the perfect definite in Latin. 



9 



128 TENSES. 

Obs. 7. The perfect tense is properly a perfect present ; 
i. e., it always looks at the completed action from the 
point of view of the present. Looking at antiquity, we 
say a Socrates taught " (kdida- e) ; looking at all time down 
to the present, we may say " Socrates has taught " (dedt- 
da%ev). Thus it does not imply necessarily that the action 
has been now completed, but that, regarded from the 
point of the present^ it has been completed. And as it 
thus brings the past act up to the line of the present, it 
naturally, though not necessarily, regards that past act as 
still remaining ; as, yeydjj^xa, J have been married and 
am still married; aiupifilfrqxaq, thou hast protected and 
still protectest. This continued force of the perfect ac- 
companies it through all the moods ; as, elnov ryv ftbpav 
zexAeTetiai, they directed the door to be shut, and to 
be kept SO ; 6 p.h ?^(Tttj<; oorog iq rov IJopiwXeyi^ovTa 
£ jj.fi £ fiArj (?$ oj, Let this robber be cast into the Pyriph- 
legethon, and continue there (lit., have been cast). 

Obs. 8. Hence, as the action of the perfect is so natu- 
rally regarded as remaining, the perfect present not 
unfrequently passes over into an imperfect present, with 
an appropriate signification ; as, xi xXtj /xat, J have been 
called, hence am called ; xtoj fiat, I acquire, x(xttj- 
fiat, I have acquired, hence I possess * efdw (obs;), see, 
ol d a, I have seen, hence Ihnow ; fi£ [ivy [ia i, I have 
called to mind, hence I remember. 

419.- — The Plupebfeot represents an action 
as completed at a certain past time ; as, sysyp&tpecv, 
I had written. 

Hem. — This tense follows the perfect in its twofold 
form in the active voice, called the first and second 
pluperfect. In both, its meaning is the same, and 
corresponds to that of the pluperfect in Latin and English. 



TENSES. 129 

Obs. 9. The pluperfect bears the same relation to 
the perfect that the imperfect does to the present; and 
hence whenever the perfect passes over into a present 
( Obs. 8), the pluperfect of course passes over into an imper- 
fect ; as, Sgdorxa, I fear, £dedoizetv 3 1 feared. That is, 
as the perfect is strictly a perfect present, the pluperfect 
is strictly a perfect past ; and when the perfect present 
becomes an imperfect present, the perfect past, which 
always follows it, will become an imperfect past. 

420. — The Ftitube-Peefect (or Paulopost- 
Futttke, as formerly called by grammarians), is, 
both in form and signification, compounded of 
the perfect and future, and denotes, first and 
properly, an action completed in future time ; as, 
TtsTtpd^sraty it will have been clone, or mid., he 
will have done it for himself. 

421. — The future-perfect? like the perfect, passes 
over into the idea of continuance y as, y eypdtp e'rac, he 
will have been enrolled, hence lie will remain enrolled ; 
and thus becomes the natural future of the perfect, when 
this has passed over into the imperfect present; as, 
xixrr)fxai, I have acquired, hence possess ; x e x r rj - 
Co fiat, 1 shall have acquired, hence shall ^>ossess/ 
XeXe iiperat, he will have been left, hence will remain. 

422. — It is sometimes, by a natural ellipsis, used to 

intimate that a thing will be done speedily • as, cpd^s xdt 

-e-pdgerat, speak and it shall have been done = shall 

be done immediately. 
6* 



130 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE TENSES. 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE 

TENSES. 

4:23* — Time is naturally divided into the Present, 
Past, and Future / and in each of these divisions an 
action may be represented either relatively, as incomplete 
or completed, or absolutely, as merely done. Thus we 
have : — 

Present — I am writing, I have written, I write. 
Past — I was writing, I had written, I wrote. 
Future — I shall be writing, I shall have written, I 
shall write. 



Of these, in the present and the future, the imperfect 
and absolute, am writing and icrite, and shall be writing 
and shall write, so nearly run together that they need not 
be, and are not in Greek, distinguished by separate forms. 
We thus have : — 



Present. 



Past. 




Future. 



I am writing, 
I have loritten, 
I ivrite, 
I was writing, 
I had written, 
I wrote, 



ypa<pa). 

flypacpa. 

ypd<pio. 

eypa<pov. 

iyeypd<petv % 

eypaipa. 



(I shall be writing), ypd(pa). 

I shall have written, e'ffofiai yeypacpwq. 

I shall write, ypd<pa>. 



424. — The perfect future active is expressed in the 
indicative by a compound {ysypa<pa>q eaofiat) ; in the sub- 
junctive by the aorist, with lav (as lav ypd<lno,if I shall 
have written) ; in the middle, and passive and middle, it 
has a distinct form, yeypd<l>op.ai. 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE TENSES. 131 

Besides the above futures, a modified form of the 
future is made in each division of time with the verb 
filXku), thus : — 

fiiXXaj ypd<pew, or ypdipew, Jam about to write. 
BfieXlov ypd<pew, I was about to write. 
fi£?j7j ( 7oj ypdvsw, I shall be about to write. 

4z25. — The chief tenses in actual use are thus seen to 
be in the active voice six, in the passive, seven. 

Pkesent. i Im P erfect > rP d( P^ am writing- 

\ Perfect, yiypacpa, have written. 
( Imperfect, eypacpov, icas writing. 
Past. •< Perfect, lyiypdcpzw, had written. 

( Aorist, eypaipa, wrote. 

j Imperf. and Aor., ypddw, shall write. 
\ Perf., Mid., and Pass., yeypd^ofiai, shall have 

been written* 

4:26. — The tenses, divided as above into three classes, 
in respect of time, are farther, in termination and use, 
divided into two classes, which may be called the CJiief 
or Pviinavy, and Secondary tenses ; thus, 

CHIEF OR PRIMARY. SECONDARY. 

Present. Imperfect. 

Perfect. Pluperfect. 

Future. Aorist. 

The primary tenses are employed mainly in connection 
with the present and future. The secondary are used in 
the recital of actions as past; and hence are sometimes 
denominated the Historical Tenses. 

The tenses are also grouped together in pairs, allied in 
the tense root or stem, and each primary tense having 
linked with it a corresponding secondary / thus, 



132 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE TENSES. 



1. 



2. 



3. 



4. 



5. 



eradcrov. 






Perfect rdaaa). 

and 
Imperfect, 

! Future 
and 
Aorist, 

1 Perfect 
and 

1 Pluperfect, izerd^etv. 

2 Perfect riraya, 
and 

Pluperfect, itszdysiv. 

Primitive root often obsolete, rdyw. 

2 Aorist, erayov. 



427* — With the present and imperfect, future and 
aorist active, stand connected the corresponding middle 
forms by regular change of termination, thus : — 



Active, zd<jcu}, 



it 


izOLGGOV 


« 


rd^a), 


a 




a 


ekafiov. 



Middle and Passive, Tdccsatiat, 

Middle, rdzo/icu, 

u ira^dfxjjVj 



Note. — Thus, having the present, future, and first and second perfect 
active, the student can always form the imperfect, first aorist, and plu- 
perfect; having the root, he can find (when used) the second aorist (or 
better, from the second aorist can deduce the root) ; and from the present, 
future, and aorist active can deduce the corresponding middle tenses. 



PARTICIPLES. 1S3 



' AUXILIARY VERBS. 

4:28* — Although the Greek language is richer than any other in 
independent forms, it yet often employs the auxiliary verbs elvat, nvpeiv, 
vrrapx^v, £X ecV i & c -» ^ connection with a participle or infinitive, partly 
to supply deficient, or avoid inharmonious forms ; partly to strengthen 
the signification; and partly to express, with more minuteness and 
precision, the time and manner of action or state expressed by the verb ; 
thus, 

4:29* — To express a purpose of doing, or the proximity of an event, 
fisXXcj, i9-£/lw, and k'&e'ko, with the infinitive, are used ; as, b,rc fiklletg 
"keyetv, whatever you are about to say. 

430. — A more full and emphatic form of expression is often made 
by writing elfii with the participle, than by the simple verb alone ; thus, 
rjv dcdacncuv, he was teaching = ediSaGicev, but more full and emphatic. So 
ijv red-vnittjg = hreOvfjuet, he had died, or, was dead; TceTzoiwuhov iorac = 
ireTrotJJGerai,, it shall have been done. 

431. — Anticipated performance is expressed by (p&avo or 7rpo<j)davG), 
with a participle; as, ^wrid-evrai <p#aoat rl Spdaavrec rj Tzad-elv, they con- 
spire to do something in advance to avoid suffering, literally, "they agree 
to get the start in doing something (rather) than to suffer." 

432. — Secrecy, so as to escape not only the knowledge of others, but 
even one's own consciousness, is expressed by Xav&dvo, with a parti- 
ciple; as, lla-d-ov rivee ^eviaavrec ayye?„ovc, certain ones escaped notice 
entertaining = entertained unawares, angels. 

433. — The participle of el/ii with certain adjectives is used for the 
main verb with the adverb ; as, 6-fjloq rjv irottiv, he was manifest doing, for 
" he was manifestly doing." *0$eaov or el& ddefov is used to express a 
strong but ineffectual wish that something had been; as, eW bfyelov 
fielvai, would that I had stayed! 



PARTICIPLES. 



434. — Paeticiples are parts of the verb, 
which, without direct affirmation, express its 
meaning considered as a quality or condition of 
an object ; as r 



134: VEEBAL OE PAETICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. 

7/X&S ft X i 7t a) v , he came seeing, 

<jt aq xdrwd-ev Infyst, abrov, standing below, he went to 
praising him. 

Participles are varied like adjectives, by gender, 
number, and case, to agree with substantives in these 
accidents. Separated froni the idea of time, they become 
adjectives. 

All the main tenses in Greek have their infinitive and 
participle. The verb can thus express especially parti- 
cipial relations with great precision and delicacy ; as, 

7ro:5v, doing == "being in the act of doing. 
tls-oitjxqx;, having done. 
7:at7j(Ta^ doing (as a mere act), upon doing. 
TzoL-q<j(Dv, being about to do. 

VERBAL OR PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES 

IN Tog AND <reog. 

4:85* — The Greeks have verbal adjectives, which, 
both in signification and use, resemble participles. They 
are formed by adding the syllables remand riog to the root 
of the verb ; thus, 

ROOT. VERBAL. ADJ. 

Xiya), I say Xey zoq Xsx-6q, said, salable* 
ypdfo), I icrite yp a <p t ^t ypaizroq, written, 
ipiXia), I love <piXs rioq (piXrjrioq, to be loved. 

The root assumes generally the same form as in the 
perfect, or 1st aorist passive ; as, 



dxouco, 


TJXOUGflCU, 


axoo<Jz6q, 


riog. 


reXico, 


reriXsG/iac, 


zsXeazoc, 


zioq. 


zeivoj, 


zirafxat, 


raroc, 


zioq. 


fidXXw, 


pipXrifiat, 


PXrjzoq, 


zioq. 


raGGO), 


ziza.yiJ.ai, 


zaxzoc, 


zioq. 


rpicpo), 


i&pipOrjv, 


SpSKzdc, 


zioq. 



ACCENTS OF THE VERB. 185 

Note. — In those derived from pure verbs, the vowel preceding the 
termination is sometimes lengthened, sometimes not; thus, from fatecj, 
the adjective is (pc/j/riog ; but from aipzo, alpetog. 

Obs. 1. The verbal adjectives in roq have commonly 
a passive signification, and either correspond to the Latin 
perfect participle passive — as, 7:0 tr t r6q^f actus, made ; %ot6z, 
aggestus; (Tzps-rog^ Jlexus — or they convey the idea of 
ability and capacity ', expressed by the Latin adjectives in 
His ; thus, 6par6<;, visibilis, visible / azoucroq^ audible, &c. 
Very rarely they have an active signification ; as, peimzoq, 
blaming. 

Obs. 2. Those in r(o^ correspond to the Latin future 
participle in dus, and convey the idea of duty, necessity, 
or obligation ; as, ydyriog, amandus, to be loved as mat- 
ter of obligation; -orioc, bibendus, which ought to be 
drunk. 

Obs. 3. The verbal riov, in the neuter (among the Attics 
more commonly ria in the plural), corresponds to the Latin 
gerund; thus, -oriov (Attic r.ozia) iaxi, bibendurn est; 
izoleiiriria £<rr^ bellandum est. 

Note. — For the construction of these adjectives, see Syntax, 1014, 
1015. 

ACCENTS OF THE VERB. 

438. — The accent in verbs is recessive / i. e., 
it stands as far from the end of the word as the 
quantity of the final syllable will permit (26, 
27). 

Obs. 1. Final at and oi, as, waivopai, <patv6pevoi,axe treat- 
ed as short (except in the optative, as, <pyj^ac, not cpr^at). 

Obs. 2. Contracted forms follow the general rule of 
contracts ; as, rcpdw, rtpcb ; <pa\>£ofiat <pavoD/j.at, <pavft£a) 
<pavd-a>, &c. 



136 ACCENTS OF THE VERB. 



Exceptions. 



\ 



437* — The second aorist imperative middle, second 
singular, accents the ultimate ; as, Xtnou {Xm£[<i\6) ; in the 
infinitive, the penult ; as, Ai7t£(T&ai. 

4:38. — The imperatives, £X&i, efai, eop£ 9 idi, XapL accent 
the final syllable, but not their compounds ; as, axenze. 

439* — The second aorist active infinitive, has the 
circumflex on the ultimate ; the second aorist active par- 
ticiple, has the acute / as, XineTv^ Xc~d>v. 

4^0* — The first aorist active infinitive, is always ac- 
cented on the penult ; as, axodaai, not axoouai. 

441. — The perfect infinitive active (as, XsXuxgvat), the 
first and second aorist infinitive passive (as, Xeap^vat and 
Xnzrjvat)) the perfect infinitive passive (as, XeXeT<p$ai) 9 the 
perfect participle passive (as, X^eXecfi/iivoq), are accented on 
the penult. 

442. — The perfect participle active (as, XsXet<pd>q), the 
first and second aorist participle passive (as, Xei<p#si>~ and 
hizeiq), are accented on the ultimate. 

443 e — All infinitives in >ac (as, keXomivai 9 rtdivac, lazd- 
vai) 9 and air participles in eiq 9 ous 9 ag 9 ug 9 of verbs without 
mood-vowels (verbs in fit ; as, ri$e{g 9 dc8ouq) 9 take the ac- 
cent of the infinitive on the penult, and of the participle 
on the ultimate. 

444 o — EijU and yrjfxi are acuted on the ultimate (ex- 
cept second singular) ; as, fori, <py)<j(. 

Obs.- — The student will observe in the inflection of the 
verb three forms, alike in all but the accents / and in 
these, the accents differing sometimes entirely, sometimes 
partially, and sometimes not at all, according to the word : 
they are the first aorist optative active, third singular ; the 
first aorist infinitive active ; and the first aorist imperatuj 
middle, second singular. , 



CONJUGATION. 137 

In a trisyllable with long penult, the accents all dif! 



/i . Clt. 



fei 

axoua) y opt. dxoixrac, inf. d'/.ouaai, mid. axotxrai. 

In a dissyllable with long penult, they partly differ ; 

izXtjggo), opt. rJ.T^ai, inf. TzlT^at, mid. nXjfcat. 



as, 



So in a trisyllable with s/^orZ penult ; as, 

(didd<rza)) y opt. dcdd^ac, in£ dcdd^ac, mid. dioa^a 1 . 



as, 



In a dissyllable with short root, they are all alike; 

(Aiyai), opt. /tfat, inf. tegai^ mid. Af|a:. 



CONJUGATION. 

44& — The Conjugation of a verb is the 
regular combination and arrangement of its 
several voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and 
persons, according to a certain order. 

446.- — Regular verbs in Greek consist of two 
general classes (wMcIl may be called conjuga- 
tions) : those with the ordinary ending in o, 
and those with the more primitive termination 
in [iu 

447. — Verbs of the latter class confine their 
peculiarities mainly to three tenses : the present, 
imperfect, and second aorist ; and are distin- 
guished chiefly by the absence of the connecting 
vowel or mood-vowel. 



138 CONJUGATION. 



Conjugation in o. 

448. — Verbs of the conjugation in o) consist of two 
classes, according to their differing characteristic; viz., 
pure verbs, and impure — the former having their root or 
stem ending in a vowel, as zip.d-u>, the latter in a conso- 
nant, as Tpix-aj. 

449. — The pure verbs again may be subdivided into 
two classes ; viz., contracted verbs, whose stem ends in a, 
e, or o (as, rtpd-a), rifico ; <ptX£-u), <pdw), and uncontraeted, 
whose stem ends in any other vowel (as, %pi-w, Xu-w). 

450. — The impure verbs are also subdivided into two 
classes ; viz., mute verbs, whose stem ends in any mute 
consonant (as, rpin-a)^ rcXix-o), izeid-a)), and liquid verbs, 
whose stem ends in a liquid — X, p, v, p- — (as, ph-io, oxiX-XiS) . 

Bern. — For practical'purposes, informing the tenses, we may disregard 
the subdivision of the pure verbs, and make three general classes, pure, 
mute, and liquid verbs, each with some special peculiarities of formation. 

Analysis of Verbs in co. 

4:51. — Verbs of the conjugation in w consist of two 
elements, viz. : — 

(1.) The root or stem, which is the ground-form of the 
verb, and remaskis essentially unchanged. 

(2.) Formative syllables, which consist of prefixes and 
affixes to the stem ; the former, the augment and redupli- 
cation, the latter, the inflexional endings, 

4:52. — The inflexional endings may be subdivided into 
the tense-sign, the connecting or mood-vowel, and the per- 
sonal terminations. 

453. — We treat them successively — 

(1.) The root or stem. 

(2.) The augment. 

(3.) The reduplication. 



THE STEM. 139 

(4.) The tense-sign. 

(5.) The mood-vowel. 

(6.) The personal terminations. 

We then give the inflexion of the verb, and then, under 
the several heads of pure, mute, and liquid verbs, their 
special peculiarities in formation and inflexion. 



THE STEM. 

454* — The stem, or root, is the ground form of the verb, 
to which the syllables of formation are prefixed or affixed. 
Its final letter (consonant, vowel, or diphthong) marks the 
character of the verb, and is therefore called the charac- 
teristic. Thus, in rpin-a), rc/id-a), xXsc-co, tz, a, ec, are each 
the characteristic of its respective verb. 

455 m — This letter is either a mute consonant, a liquid 
consonant, or a voicel, and verbs are designated, accord- 
ingly, as mute, liquid, or pure verbs. 

4:56. — In verbs completely regular (i. e., with unmodi- 
fied stem), the characteristic is the letter next to the 
inflexional ending in the present indicative ; as, y in X£y-a* y 
tz in rpirt-co, e in <pd£-aj. In such verbs, then, we may find 
the stem by striking off from the indicative present these 
inflexional terminations; as, Xiy-w, fiiu-co, lb-a), fiooXev-a), 
Stem, Xey, fiev, Xo, ftoolev. 

437 • — But, in large classes of verbs, the stem does not 
appear in the indicative present pure and unmodified. It 
is often variously modified and disguised, both by the 
addition of one or more letters, and by various accompany- 5 
ine changes. Many of these changes are confined to the 
pmsent and imperfect tenses, and by recurring, therefore, 
to j either of the other tenses we can approximate the 
pu^e roots. In its purest form, it appears in what are 
called the second tenses. 



140 





THE STEM. 




PEES. 


FUT. 


STEM, 


TOTZTU) 


TU7Z-<r((p)a) 


TU1Z 


Td(T(T(0 


rdy-<j(!~)a) 


ray 


TSCVCD 


rev-ico 


rev 



* The following are the chief modes of modifying the 
stem. 

Modifications of the Stem. 

4:58* — Stems with a labial mute characteristic often 
add r, in which case the labial, if rough, or medial^ becomes 
smooth; as, 



Xa/JL7T 


xap^r-co 


xa/iTtra} 


pXafi 


ftXaftz-a} 


pXdizTa) 


J3a<p 


Pa<pT-u> 


P&TZTO) 



4:39*— Stems with a palatal mute add to this :, in con- 
junction with which the palatal is euphonically changed 
into <t<t (rr) (320, note) ; as, 

ray zayt-w rdaaio (rarro;) 

opuy opoyt-aj opvaaot 

460. — Stems in d in like manner add r, which, united 
with the <5, passes into f ; as, 

<ppad <ppadi-u> tppd^io 

dpjiod dpp.odt-ia dpfio^aj 

Some palatal stems, also, with t added, pass into ?, instead 
of aa\ as, 

dpTzay dpTzayi-u) dpTzdZw (fut. dpizd^io) 

dp'izad dp7:adc-(o dp-nd^u* (fut. dpnaaa)) 

xXayy xXayyt-io xXd^o (fut, xXdy^to) 

caXiziyy caXiziyyi-o} caXniZo) 



THE STEM. 14:1 

4:61. — Sterns in a liquid sometimes also add e, which, 
with A, causrs a doubling of the liquid ; as, 

fiaX Pak-o) fidXXto (like jiaXtov [xdXXov) 

with v and p causes a transposition ; as, 

^?av <pavL-Q) cpaivto 

rev rvn-u) rstuco 

cpdep cpdep t- to <p 6 tip to 

4:62* — Many stems annex v in the present ; as, 

cpOa cpddv-io cpOdvco 

xap. xdfxu-co xdfivto 

Others add av ; as, a/iapr, ap.apT-dvw. 

Others add av with nasal inserted before the radical ; as, 



la$ 


Xa$-av 


Xavd-av 


Xay'&dva) J 


lie hid 


fiad- 


liad-av 


liavd-av 


fjLav&dva)} 


learn 


Xaj3 


Xafttvs 


Xap.pav 


X,a/j.j3dvaJ 9 


take 


Xay 


Xaywj 


Xayyav 


Xayydvco^ 


obtain by lot 


nod- 


7W#av 


izovftav 


izuvd-dvofiat^ 


learn 



So are added ve and vo ; as, [x-v4-op.at and detx-vu-jii. 

463. — Other stems add ay (answering to the Latin 
incentives in sco), with certain changes, sometimes redupli- 
cating with £, and lengthening the radical vowel ; as, 



dps 


dps-ax 


dpiaxio. 


please 


eops 


SUpi-GX 


euptaxtO) 


find 


yvo 


yv co-ax 


yiyvwaxco^ 


know 


l±va 


p.vj]-ax 


jAijivrjaxa)) 


remind 


dpa 


clpd-ax 


dwpdaxco^ 


run away 


izaO 


TzaO-ay 


Tzdayco, 


suffer 



464* — Many verbs in fit, from stems in a, e, and o, 

regularly reduplicate with t ; as, 

0e-cu ri-6e-p.i Tt67]/ic 

do-to di-do-pi dtdcojit 



142 THE STEM. 




Others reduplicate less regularly ; as, 




ysv yc-yev yi-yev-oixat yiyvofiat, 


become 


rex rc-rsx Tt-T£x-o) rixroj (for titzxu)), give birth to 


[iev fit-fiev fiifizva) £Lip.vu), 


remain 


rep 9 rpa rt-rpa zirpdo) 


bore 



4z65. — Some stems are strengthened by the addition of 
a vowel, especially e ; as, 

Sox (fut. d6%o)) dox-(-o), seem, think 

(5t<p 9 piizz §iizT-i-a> (for $Ltztu)), throw 

466. — In all the above classes, the strengthening addi- 
tion to the stem appears only in the present and imperfect 
(active and passive), and is found in none of the other 
tenses. Thus, rdaao), xXd^oj, fiavdavw, yiyvwaxay exhibit 
these enlarged and strengthened forms only in the present 
and imperfect, while all the other tenses revert back to 

the radical forms ray, xXayy, fiad, yvo, &0. ; as, rd^a) (ray-<Tcu) y 
xXdy^co (xXayy-Gw}, e-[±ad-o\>, e-yvco-xa, 

467. — These other tenses, however, are not always 
derived from the stem in its simplest form. In many 
verbs, a sort of secondary root is formed for the future, 
first aorist, &c, sometimes by affixing e to the stem ; as, 

sup eups, whence eup7J(T(o eupyxa (pres. BVpiaxo)) 

fiaO /xaOe, " f±ad7J6op.ai [xefxddiqxa (pres. fiavOdvw) 

yap X at P e > M %aip7]<ju) xe%dpr)xa (pres. ^aipai) 

Sometimes by lengthening the radical vowel ; as, 

Xaft Xtj/S Xirj(pop.at elXrj<pa £X7J<p07)v (pres. Xajij3dva)) 

XaO krjO XiXrjOa XJXycrpLat (pres. XavOdvio) 

zu% rev% reb^o) zireo^a, but pass. Tiruy t aat 

izud TzeoO izeixrofiai, but pass. ~£~o<Jiiai (pres. 7:ov0dvofxat) 

BaX (pres. fidXXcu, from fiaXiw) makes perf. piftXyxa, pijSXyjfiac, 
as if from ftXa, by transposition, or from ftaXe, by syncopa- 



THE STEM. 143 

tion for (SejSdXrjxa^ ftepdXripai. So from dav, by transposition, 

Threefold Form of the Stem. 

468. — We thus find in many verbs a threefold form 
of the stem or root, as follows : — 

469. — (a.) In what are called the second tenses (second 
aorist, second perfect, second future passive, &c), the 
stem appears in its shortest and most ultimate form ; from 
these, therefore, where they exist, we may deduce the 
stem or root proper ; as, 







2 AOR. 


ROOT. 


fxavO&vo) 


padrj<7op.at 


k'padov 


pad 


XapPdvco 


X,rj(pop.ac 


eXafiov 


Xaj3 


eupiaxa) 


euprj(Tio 


evpov 


eop 


aziXXco 


(jzeXaj 


earaXov 


araX or <rreX 



470. — (b.) In the future, first aorist, first perfect, &c, 
appears often a somewhat lengthened or secondary stem ; 
as. 



pad 


pads 


padiJGopai 




pspddrjxa 


Xafi 


MP 


X.TJcpopac 




kXlj<p0TjV 


eop 


ebpe 


evprfau) 




eupTjxa 


XaO 


Xyd 


Xtjgo) 




XiXTjcrpac 


8ox 


doxe 


doxyGO) (do^i 


") 


dedox7]pat (didoypat) 



471. — (c) In the present and imperfect is found often 
a quite different and still greater modification of the root, 
which is confined to these tioo tenses ; as, 

STEM. 

dpnad or &p~ay 
pad 

fta<p 
opoy 



dpxd^aj 


tfp-aZov 


p.avddvco 


ipdvdavov 


ftdlZTU) 


eftaxTOv 


Op VGCFU) 


(bpUGGOV 



I'M THE AUGMENT. 

Rem. — 1. Observe that the strengthening additions to the root found 
in the present and imperfect are found in iliem alone, and to form, the 
other tenses we must add the endings either to the ultimate root, as in 
the second aorist, or to a secondary root, as often in the future, per- 
fect, &c. 

2. Observe also that many verbs have no such special strengthening 
addition in the present, and with some the root appears in its simplest 
form in all the tenses — as, Aeyw, lego, eXega, Ti&eyfcai, ypd(pG), ypaipQ, 
yeypacpa — or with some slight vowel changes (as from s to o, or a), which 
will hereafter be exhibited— as, rpeTzo, erparcov, rerpo(pa, rerpajUjuai. 
These latter changes will be exhibited in treating the peculiarities of 
the different classes of verbs, as pure, mute, and liquid. 

4:7 2o — The elements of the verb (as stated, 451) consist 
of the stem, or ground form of the verb, and the formative 
syllables. These latter are (1) the prefixes, (2) the affixes. 
The former are the augment and reduplication ; the latter 
are the inflexional endings (tense-sign, mood-vowels, and 
personal endings). 

We proceed first to the augment and reduplication. 

THE AUGMENT. 

473. — The augment and reduplication are sometimes 
treated together, and in form they have some points in 
common. But they belong to different classes of tenses, 
and subserve entirely different purposes. 

474:. — The augment belongs to the past or historical 
tenses, and indicates simply past time ; the reduplication 
belongs to the perfect tenses (whether past, present, or 
future), and indicates perfect action. The augment has 
nothing to do, properly, with the state of the action, but 
only with its time ; as, e-ypapoy, I icas writing / k'-ypafia, 
I wrote ; l-yeypd<petv, J had written. The reduplication has 
properly nothing to do with the. time of the action, but 
only with its state ; as, y£-ypa<pa, I have written ; i-ye- 
yp&cpew, I had written; ys-ypd^ezai^ it will have been 
icritten. 



THE AUGMENT. 145 

475. — The augment is properly e prefixed to the past 
tenses, to mark past time ; the reduplication is e with the 
initial consonant repeated, prefixed to the perfect tenses to 
mark perfect action. Thus, then, the imperfect past, per- 
fect past, and absolute past (imperfect, pluperfect, and 
aorist) take the augment ; and the perfect present, perfect 
past, and perfect future take the 'reduplication. The per- 
fect past, or pluperfect, it is seen, is common to both 
classes, and takes, as a perfect tense, the reduplication, and 
as a past tense the augment ; thus, tu-kto), I am striking ; 
e-Tunrov, I was striking ; ri-zu<pa^ I have struck / l-re-rixpsiv, 
I had struck. 

4=76. — The augment is confined to the indicative mood, 
because the distinction of past time in the tenses is con- 
fined to this mood. The reduplication is carried through 
all the modes, because perfect or completed action is 
expressed in them all alike (501). 

Special Rules for the Augment. 

477 • — The augment is prefixed to the past tenses of 
verbs, i. e., to the imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist. It 
appears in two forms, the syllabic and temporal. The 
syllabic augment is e prefixed to verbs commencing with 
a consonant. The temporal augment lengthens the initial 
vowel of verbs commencing with a vowel ; as, syllabic, 

rpina), e-Tp£7zov ; temporal, dxoua), ijxouov. 

Bern. — The syllabic augment is so named because it forms a syllable ; 
the temporal, because it increases the time (i. e.. the quantity) of the 
initial syllable. 

478. — Tlxe syllabic augment. Verbs commencing with 
a consonant prefix e to the past tenses of the indicative ; 
as, Uy-a), e-keyov^ £/£~a, l-keteyfirp. Initial p is doubled after 
e ; as, pinro}^ efifinzrov (60). 
7 



146 THE AUGMENT. 

Rem. — Three verbs, Pobhojicu, 6vva\iai % and fieXXu, make not only 
k-dw&fiTjv, k-ftovTidfiTrV) and e-fie?i?uov f but also yjSovXo/ujVj ijdwdfiTfv^ and 

479b — In the pluperfect, the augment precedes the 
reduplication; as, i-xs-no/Mpetv ; but if the perfect does not 
reduplicate, i. e., does not prefix the initial consonant, 
then the pluperfect receives no additional augment, and 
the same prefix (s) stands for both ; as, earoXa, IgtoXziv ; 
effrpajuLpLat, laTpdixixt]v t 

4:80* — The temporal augment. The temporal augment 
belongs to verbs beginning with a vowel. It consists in 
lengthening that vowel, so that e, o, i, 5, become respect- 
ively 7) y <o, J, u ; a usually becomes tj, but sometimes a ; as, 



dvoaj 


ijvuov 


6/jLiXiaj 


w/itXeov 


atco, hear 


alow 


ixsreucu 


ixireuov 


iXni^oj 


tjXtziZov 


(xpaivco 


o<pacvov 



481. — Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the 
syllabic augment instead of the temporal. These are — 

ayvup.i, break, 'iaca, edya. 

aXiffxofiai, am taken, idXaixa (and i]Xwxa). 

dvddww, please, idvdavov, edda, eddov, 

ovpiio, mingere, lobpouv, loupyxa. 

(bdiw, push, ecodouu (sometimes unaugmented). 

(bviofiaij bug, iajvobfiyv, £(6v7]p.at. 

482. — The following, beginning with e, take the syllabic 
augment and contract the ee into ei; viz., Ida), iOfcaj, 
lXi<jG(o, iXxw, eTcopLcu, lpyd^op.a.1, iprroj o£ ip-rcb^aj, iazida), £%a) ; 
as, etaov, el'OtZov, el/tfv, &C. 

So also elXov, seized ; elaa, seated / erxa, se?it. 

c 0paj and dvoiyu) take both augments; as, i-a>pwv, <iv- 
iioya. 

c Eoprd^aj augments the second syllable, iwpra%ov. So 
pluperf. k'-ocxa, iwxetv ; eopya, id>pynv ; soXtto, icoXrreo. 

483. — The diphthongs ao, at, <h change in the augment 



THE AUGMENT. 147 

the first vowel, and subscribe e, making rjo, #, a> ; as, ab~d- 
va>, 7]5£avov ; alriaj, rjteov ; olxia) 9 wxeov. 

Mcc. — Verbs in au and at followed by a vowel; as, 
abaiva), oiaxi^u) ; and some Others (as, olxoupiw, obA^w, oia- 
Tpdio) omit the augment. 

4:84* — The other diphthongs are unchanged : 00 always ; 
as, obrd^w, oora^ov ; e: always, except sometimes %xaZov y 
fjxaaa, foair/icu, from ehd^u) : eu generally ; as, eup{<rxuj 9 

eup:<rxo\>; but soyofiat, ebydfiTjv, and rjbyo/ir^. 

i, v, 7), w of course remain unchanged ; a sometimes 
remains, sometimes becomes t] ; as, from avaltexm, avdkwaa 
and avrjXwGa. 

Augment of Compound Verbs. 

4:85* — When the verb is compounded with a preposi- 
tion, the augment follows the preposition ; as, -poz-vipoj, 

~po<z-£-<pepov ; 7zpoq-dya>, T.poG-rrfov. 

Obs. 1. The prepositions drop their final vowel before e ; 
as, d-o-<paivQ)^ d~i<pav;ov ; xara-fidlkuj, xaripaXX.09 ; except 
7:epl, which remains unchanged, and r.po, w^hich usually 
combines with it by contraction ; as, xpolfiyjv, -pobfav (197). 

Obs. 2. '£v, ovv, £r 9 which had been modified before a 
consonant, resume their proper form before the augment ; 

4:86. — In some verbs the compound has become so 
common that the preposition has nearly lost its separate 
force, and the verb is augmented as if simple ; as, xaftzudw, 
sleep, zxd&eudov (yet also xa&i^udov^ za#tCo) 9 ixafttZov, xd&7]jia.t 9 

ixaftTjrjLTjV, &c. 

487 '• — Several verbs take the augment in both places ; 

as, 

&>i%o/j.ai, endure, r]vety6/i7}v 

dvop#6u>, right up, f^cbpftoov 

dvoykou), disturb, fytoyXoov 

dp.7:£%o/j.at y clothe oneself, rjfiTzetyojjLTjv 



14:8 THE REDUPLICATION. 

4:88* — Bern. — AiaiTao, dianoveo, as if compounded, but in reality 
derived from the nouns Siaira and didnovog, are also thus doubly aug- 
mented, kdiiJTCdv, kdtrjKdvow. 

4:89. — Verbs which are not compounds of a preposition 
and a simple verb, but derived from nouns already com- 
pounded, are not properly subject to the above rule ; as, 

IvavTioofiat (from ivdvrtoq}, 7}vavTioup.v]v • avziftoXiu) (from 
avTifioX-rj), rjvTipdXoov. In fact, however, many such verbs 
are treated as if themselves originally compounded, and 
thus are augmented after the preposition ; as, 

ixxXrjatd^a) (kxxXrjGia), ^£xXr]Gta^ov (not fjXxXyaiaZov). 
&Y%etpiu) (£y%£tpoq), £ve%etpouv (not ^y^£tpoov). 
xarrjyopia) {xarijyopoq), xarrjyopoov (not Zxaryyopouv). 
7Tapavop.£a) (izapdvof±o>z), napevo fioov , and also 7rap7jvop.ooVj 
as if from itapd and a verb dvopiio). 

Ttapowiu) (ndpocvoq), with double augment, £-apawouv. 

4:90. — Verbs compounded with duq, ill, take the aug- 
ment after doq when the simple verb begins with a short 
vowel (as d, e, o), otherwise before it; as, doadp^ria), 
duG7)p£<jT£ov, do<jTu%(a), idu<TTu%£ov. Compounds with £0, 
well, generally omit the augment, but may take it before 
the adverb; as, £vdoxi[±£a>, rjudoxt/ieov ; or after/ as, euepys- 
riw, £U7}pyiT7}<Ta (but commonly £0£pyir7]Gaj, £uopxiw, ei>a>p- 

X£OV. 

491. — Other compounds take the augment at the 

beginning y as, dro^ia), t}tu%£OV, Xoyoizoiia)^ iXoyovroieov. 

THE REDUPLICATION. 

492. — The augment denotes past time ; the reduplica- 
tion denotes completed or perfect action. The augment, 
then, is used with the three past tenses, the imperfect, 
pluperfect, and aorist (strictly an imperfect, perfect, 
and absolute past) ; the reduplication is used with the 



THE REDUPLICATION. 149 

three perfect tenses, the perfect, pluperfect, and perfect 
future (strictly, the perfects — present, past, and future). 
The pluperfect (or perfect past) thus belongs to both 
classes of tenses, and takes both the reduplication and 
augment. The reduplication is always carried through 
all the modes ; the augment is confined to the indicative. 

493. — The reduplication prefixes e with the initial 
consonant to verbs beginning with a consonant ; as, rw-, 
r(-ro<pa, £--£-7:otrjx£w, Tre-TzpaZ-o/iat. A rough initial conso- 
nant reduplicates with the corresponding smooth; as, 
<ptXio)^ Tze-wiXrjxa ; Ovrjaxto^ ri'dvTjxa ; yuypim^ xe-%dip7]za. 

4:9 4:* — Double consonants (£, £, <p), and tico concurring 
consonants (except a mute and liquid), and initial p, gen- 
erally reject the reduplication, taking only e ; as, (f'eudopac, 
eipsuGfxat ; gt£XX<d, e<rraXxa • pcTzra), epplcpa. The prefix of the 
perfect tenses then becomes identical with the augment 
(see 479, Mem.). But x-doftat, pydopat, make xixrrjfiacy 
fiip.vrjfj.at. 

495. — A mute and a liquid concurring reduplicate 
with the first consonant; as, rpicpw, ri-rpowa^ j3X£~aj, 
ftiftXtya ; except yX, yv, and sometimes pX ; as, yXv<pu) y 
eyXo<pa\ yvo (jcyxocrxwj^ eyvwxa; fiXaGrdva), i^Xdaxr^xa^ and 
$sfi\dGT"t)xa. 

Rem. — The following verbs take et instead of the reduplication, hap- 
P&vcj elATfcpa (not /li/taj^a), Tmyxava el/jjxa, ovXAeyu awei?ioxa cwei/xy- 
fiaij p£co elp?fKa 1 peipopat elpaprac (with aspirate). 

496. — Yerbs commencing with a voioel do not of course 
admit this reduplication. They simply, therefore, lengthen 
the initial vowel, in precisely the same manner as the 
temporal augment, with which, therefore, in these verbs, 
the reduplication becomes identical ; as, 

dyyiXXat ijyyeXXov ijyysX.xa 

oppdio cbppaov wpprjxa 

alpiui fjpeov W r l y ' a 



150 THE REDUPLICATION. 

497. — So also the verbs which augment with e before 
the regular augment, and with et (see 497, 482) ; as, 



op da) 


iajpwv 


iwpdxa 


ayvujii 


ea$a 


edya 


£pyd£ojj.cu 


eipyaZo/xyv 


sfpyaff/xac 


dvotyco 


dvia)^a 


dv£u)%a 



498. — Attic reduplication. Verbs beginning with a 
vowel do not, as seen above, admit the usual form of redu- 
plication. Some, however, commencing with «, e, or <?, 
followed by a consonant, repeat the two first letters before 
the ordinary augment. This is called the Attic reduplica- 
tion / as, 



dyeipat^ 


assemble 


(yyepxa) 


dy-7Jyepxa 


£/i£w 9 


vomit 


(rjjiexaj 


ipL-rjfiexa 


o£oj, 


smell 


(aid a) 


od-wda 


dpuffffto, 


dig 


( & P°Z a ) 


6p-(bpu%a 



499. — The pluperfect sometimes still further augments 
this reduplicated syllable ; as, &x-fxoa, Tjx-yjxoew. This form 
of the verb generally shortens the antepenult syllable; as, 
dX£t<pa) 9 dXy}Xl<pa \ dxobco^ dxyjxoa ; opbaaat^ opcbpuya \ iXauva* 
(^«), £Xyldxa\ &ye(pa> 9 eypyyopa (irreg. for iy-rjyopaj. 

300. — Reduplication in compounds. The place of the 
reduplication in compound verbs is the same as that of the 
augment ; as, Tzepiitiizrw^ 7t£pi-£-~i7ZTov, -Kepi-iri-nrwxa ; but 
with return of the original assimilation ; as, £/jljjl£vo), £v-6- 
p£vov 9 £fxpi£ fiivTjxa, 

SOI. — Reduplication in all the moods. The augment 
is confined to the indicative mood, because no past tense 
properly expresses past time in any other mood. The 
reduplication , or whatever stands for reduplication (as, 
ylypcupa, &pfxr)xa 9 typyjyopa), remains through all the moods, 
because in all the moods, as well as in the indicative, it 
denotes perfect action (476). 



XJS T FLEXIO]tf EKDINGS. 151 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 

502. — Having considered the stem, and its prefixes 
(the augment and reduplication) , we pass now to its affixes, 
or inflexion endings, which are made up of the tense-sign, 
the mood-vowel, and the personal endings. First the 
tense-sign. 

1. Tense-Sign. 

503. — Between the root or stem and the inflexion 
endings proper some tenses insert a letter characteristic 
of the tense or system of tenses to which it belongs. 
This, along with the stem (omitting the augment), is 
called the tense-stem. Thus, we have in the 

Future (active, passive, and middle), g\ as, Xu-e-to, Xu0jj~ 

<r-o t uat, Xb-G-ofiat. 

First aorist (active and middle), <r; as, eXo-G-a, ZXu-g- 

First perfect and pluperfect active, x ; as, XiXo-z-a, iXeXO- 

x-etv. 

Perfect future, g; as, XeXu-G-oficu. 

504=. — The two aorists passive insert an e, the first 
aorist with a preceding 0, which may be regarded rather 
as a passive, than as a tense, sign. This e is contracted 
with the following mood-vowels ; as, Xu-de^wjiev, Xuftwjisv ; 
XuOe-iTjv, Xu&eirjv ; otherwise lengthened into y ; as, iXu-ftrj-v, 
Xo-6r r rt ; iGrdX-y-v, GTdX-7)-#i ; but part. Xu#d$, for Xu-&£-v~s ; 
craXets for GraX-s-vr^ 

505. — To these lengthened forms, l-Xb-^-q-v^ ^GTdX-y-v, 
the passive futures attach their regular tense-sign, <r ; as, 
/.u-dyj-G-oiiat) GTaX-rj-G-ojj.au. 

506. — The following, then, may be regarded as a list 
of the tenses which have tense-signs proper, or those pas- 
sive signs which are their equivalents : — 



152 INFLEXION ENDINGS. 

Future (active, passive, middle), <ptkj-<r-a>, <pdrj~drj-<j-oi±ai y 
<ptXrj-<j-o[JLai. 

Second future passive, <jTaXTj-<T-of±au. 

First aorist (active, passive, middle), l-wiX-q-a-a, i^d^'-^-v, 

Second aorist passive, idrdX-^-v. 

First perfect and pluperfect active, iteptAy-x-a, knetptXjj- 
x-sw. 

Perfect future, iz£<piXrj-<j-oij.ai. 

507. — The remaining tenses have no special tense-signs, 
but attach their inflexion endings to the stem, either pure, 
or modified as above (455 fE). 

Rem,. 1. Liquid verbs, as a is rarely tolerated after a liquid, omit c 
and partly insert e euphonically, partly lengthen the preceding vowel ; 
as, (iev-E-u /Ltev6) 7 for /levcro' f/zewa, for efievaa. (See 13, Obs. 10.) 

Rem. 2. K belonged originally perhaps to pure verbs as a merely 
euphonic insertion, but was subsequently extended to those of other 
classes. 

2. Mood-Vowels. 

508. — The mood-vowels are partly mere vowels of con- 
nection, as in the indicative, imperative, infinitive, and 
participle. In the subjunctive and optative they are more 
decisively moo^-vowels, or signs of the mood. In the four 
former, they are mainly e, o (a, et) ; in the subjunctive they 
are rj, <o ; in the optative, t, which unites with the indica- 
tive mood-vowel o, making ot. 

509. — They stand in general thus : — 

Indicative singular, o, e, e; dual, e, e; plural, o, e, o. 

Subjunctive singular, w, rj, y ; dual, ^, ^ ; plural, a>, tj, u>. 

Optative, ot. 

Imperative, e. 

Infinitive, e. 

Participle, o. 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 153 

Exc. 1. The perfect connecting vowel in the indicative 
is a ; third singular, e. 

Exc. 2. The first aorist has a in all the moods except the 
subjunctive. 

Exc. 3. The pluperfect indicative has et m 

Exc. 4. The optative has in the first aorist «£, aorist 
passive, etrj ; as, ru<pd-eir r v^ <jral-ai-f]v ; and often oi in the 
present active of contract verbs ; as, <pds-o{rj-v ipiXoirp, for 
<pik£oiixi <pikoX[j.t. 

3. Personal Endings. 

510. — The personal endings are of two classes — 
Primary and Secondary / the former are used in the 
indicative mood in the primary tenses, and the latter, in 
the secondary (426). The subjunctive mood takes the 
personal endings of the primary tenses of the indicative ; 
the optative takes those of the secondary tenses. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

511. — The following table gives the original unmodi- 
fied personal endings of the active voice : — 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Primary. Secondary. 



1. 


2. 


3. 


1. 2 


3. 


S. fit 


St 


re (gi) 


v (")— > * 


— 


D. — 


rov 


rov 


TOJ 


> rrjv 


P. fiev 


re 


vrc (yet) 


p.ev re 


v (vr) or 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Gav (cavr) 


The 


same endm 


tgs as in the indicative 
OPTATIVE MOOD. 


primary tenses. 




The same as in the indicative se 


condary. 




7* 









154 INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



IMPERATIVE 


MOOD. 






2. 




3. 


Sing. 


6t 




TO) 


Dual. 


rou 




TCUV 


Plural. 


TS 




TWGCLV 


INFINITIVE. 






PARTICIPLE. 


vat 








VT 


PERFEC1 


! PARTICIPLE 


. 




t 


r 







512. — These terminations are with the connecting 
vowel thus modified : — 

(1.) The endings ;ju, <n, ti are retained only in the con- 
jugation in [it. In ordinary verbs they are dropped 
(except <r in the second person), and the connecting vowel 
lengthened by way of compensation ; thus, for o-/u, e-<rc, 
e-rt, we have a> r etg, et. 

(2.) In the third person plural, ovtc or ovat becomes ooat. 

(3.) The first aorist drops the ending v in the first per- 
son singular. 

(4.) The pluperfect makes third person plural etaav or 
eaav. 

(5.) The optative retains in the first person singular the 
original ending /ju, and in the third person plural inserts e 
before v. 

(6.) The imperative second person singular drops 0t, 
except in verbs in [it. 

(7.) The infinitive e-vat is modified into etv except in the 
perfect. The first aorist infinitive exhibits a broken 
form, a-t. 

(8.) The participle modifies o-vr in the nominative into 
wv ; the first aorist aw into aq (avrs) ; the perfect o-t 
into we. 

513. — The following table exhibits the mood-vowel 
and personal endings united in the active voice : — 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



155 



MOOD-VOWELS AND ENDINGS SEPARATE. 



S. O-fJLt £-<Tt 

D. £-70V 

P. O-JJLSV e-TS 

S. a- a-q 

D. — a-Tov 

P. a-{i£v a-TQ 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Primary Tenses. 

Present and Future. 

THE SAME COMBINED. 

at et$ £t 

— btov erov 

ojisv ere ou<rt{y) 

First and Second Perfect. 



e-rt 
e-rov 

O-VTl 



a-rov 

CL-VTL 



a 



ajJLsy 



ag 


6 


arov 


arov 


are 


aat 



S. (O-fll 

D. — 

P. w-jiev 



Secondary Tenses. 
Imperfect and Second Aorist. 



s. 


o-v 


e-S 


e- 


ov 


££ 


«(v) 


D. 


— 


6-TOV 


i-TTjV 


— - 


£T0'S 


irrjv 


P. 


o-fiev 


e-re 


O-V 

First j 


op.ev 
iorist 


£T£ 


ov 


S. 


a-{ V ) 


a-c 


e- 


a 


as 


e 


D. 





a-rov 


d-TTJV 


— 


arov 


drqv 


P. 


a-/*ev 


a-Te 


a-v 


afiev 


are 


av 








First and Sea 


>nd Pluperfect. 




S. 


ei-v 


et-S 


ei- 


£iv 


eig 


et 


D. 


— 


et-Tov 


ei-z-qv 


— 


£IT0V 


eirrjv 


P. 


ec-jiev 


ei-Te 


ei-aav 


£CJJL£V 


£tre 


sway, or 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

AU the Tenses. 



7]-T0V 

Tj-T£ 



7J-TC 

7)-rov 

W-WTt 



U) 



ecrav 



U)[J.£V 



w 


V 


7JTOV 


TjTOV 


rjTe 


mat 



156 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 
All the Tenses except the First Aorist 



s. 


01- fit 


ot-q 


Ol- 


OtfJLt 


otq 


ot 


D. 





Ot-TOV 


oi-rr^v 


— 


OtTOW 


OtTTjV 


P. 


ot-fiev 


ot-re 


ot-ev 


otfiev 


OtTS 


otev 






' 


First Aorist. 






S. 


at-fxt 


at-s 


at- 


at/it 


atq 


at 


D. 


— 


at-rov 


at-T7jV 


— 


atrov 


atT7)V 


P. 


at-fiev 


at-re 


at-ev 


at/JL£v 


atre 


atev 



S. e-fo 
D. e-rov 
P. e-re 



S. . a-$t 
D. a-rov 
P. a-re 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present, Perfect, and Second Aorist 



4-TO) 

e~rov 

£-TWGOV 



a-ru) 

d-rwv 

a-Twaav 



s 

£TOV 

ere 



First Aorist 

a 

arov 

are 



iro) 
iziov 
irwffav (or 



aru) 



arwv 
arcjffav 



Pres., Fut., and 2 Aor. 

Perf. 

1 Aor. 



INFINITIVE MOOD 
(£-vai) 



{an) 



(or 

dvT(ov) 



etv 

hat 

at 



Pres., Fut., and 2 Aor. 

1 Aor. 

Perf. 



PARTICIPLES. 

(o-vr) 
(ol-vt) 
(o-t) 



wv 

as 
6s 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



157 



MIDDLE AKO PASSIVE VOICES. 

514:. — In the middle and passive, the mood-vowels are 
in general the same as in the active. The personal end- 
ings are formed from the active by greater or less modifi- 
cations. The following are the regular personal termina- 
tions of the middle and passive voices (omitting the aorists 
passive). 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Primary. Secondary. 





1. 


2. 


3. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


s. 


fiat 


cat 


rat 


[17}V 


GO 


TO 


D. 


fxeS'OV 


G#OV 


g&ov 


fied'OV 


G&OV 


Gdyv 


P. 


fxeda 


<r&£ 


vrat 


fi£$a 


G&S 


VTO 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Endings the same as in the indicative primary. 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Endings the same as in the indicative secondary. 





IMPERATIVE 


MOOD. 


Sing. 


GO 


G0(O 


Dual. 


g6ov 


gOujv 


Plural. 


G0e 


G0wGav 


INFINITIVE 


MOOD. 




PARTICIPLE 


G0ac 






fievog 



515. — When united with the mood-vowel, <r, in the 
second person singular, in all the moods where it occurs, is 
dropped, and (except in the optative) the concurring 
vowels are then contracted ; as, eGac eat #, sgo eo ou y aGo 

ao a;, oigo oco, aiGo ato. 

516* — The perfect passive has no mood-vowel, but 
attaches the personal endings /iat y Gat y rat, &c., directly to 



158 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



the stem, making certain peculiarities of inflexion (for 
which see 593, fi\), among which are generally a peri- 
phrastic formation of the third person plural indicative, 
and the subjunctive and optative in all the persons and 
numbers, and the retention of <r in the second person sin- 
gular indicative, imperfect, &c, as in verbs in fit. 

517. — The two aorists passive have active personal 
terminations, which, uniting with the vowel e (lengthened 
yj) interposed between the endings and the stem, make the 
forms given in the tables (525) ; as, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Sing. 


V 


ys 


V 


Dual. 


7JTOV 7JT7JV 




Plural. 


7]fJL£V TjTe 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


7)<rav 


Sing. 


a> tjs 


y 


Dual. 


7]TOV TjTOV 




Plural. 


tofiev 9jre 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 


WGW 


Sing. 


ec'rjv efys 


ecy 


Dual. 


etTJTOV £17JT7]V 




Plural- 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


ecrjeav 


Sing. 


0C TO) 




Dual. 


TOV TWV 




Plural. 


re rwaav 




INFINITIVE MOOD. 


PARTICIPLE. 




ijvcu 




efc 



Being without regular mood- vowels, they follow the 
inflexion of verbs in /xc, retaining the full terminations (#<, 
vac) of that class of verbs. 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



159 



318* — The following table presents the regular middle 
and passive tenses, with mood-vowels and terminations 
combined (omitting the perfect and two aorists passive) : — 



519.— MEDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Primary. 

Present and Futures. 

THE SAME COMBINED. 

0/j.cu £CU y% (50S)erat 



MOOD-VOWELS AND ENDINGS SEPAEATE. 

S. o-fiat e-(Tcu e-rat 

D. 6-fie-&ov e-G&ov e-crd-ov 
P. 6-p.eSa £-<r&s o-vrat 



OJA£#OV ecr&ov 

6fl£#a £G$£ 



£<T&OV 
OVTCLl 



Secondary. 
Imperfect and Second Aorist Middle. 

S. 6-firjv £-(70 
D. o-/xe#ov £-CT&OV 

P. 6-fJ.£$a £-&&£ 



S. d-firjv a-ffo 
D. a-/ze$ov a-aftov 
P. d-/j.£&a a-<r&£ 



£-TO 


OfJLTjV 


eo, oo (503)£to 


£-<J#Tf> 


6fl£d-OV 


£crd-ov £<t$7)v 


O-VTO 


6ti£$a 


£<7#£ OVTO 


First A.cr' 


ist Middle. 




a-ro 


dflTjV 


ao^ a) (503)aro 


d-G&rjv 


dtA£-d-ov 


atr&ov dffd'Tjv 


a-vzo 


d[±£$a 


aa$£ avro 



S. aj-fiai r r <rai 

D. CL>-fJ.e#0V Tj-ffd-OV 
P. W-fJL£#a 7}-G&£ 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
AU the Tenses. 
7)-tcu cofiac r j ai ,?j (503)yjrac 

7J-G&OV Wri£d-OV 7)G$0V 7)G'&0V 

w-vrat Wfie&a Tjtr&e wvTat 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present, Futures, and Second Aorist Middle. 



S. ot-jiTjv ot-ao ot-ro 

D. o(-fi£&ov oi-tr&ov oi-Gftrjv 

P. Ot-fl£&a 01~<T&£ Ol-VTO 



o([irjv oto (503) oito 

Olfie&OV OMF&OV OIG&7JV 

Ol/JL£&a OlG&£ OIVTO 



160 



INFLEXION ENDINGS. 



Mrst Aorist Middle. 



s. 


ai-jnjy at-Go 


ai~To 


ai[xfjv aw 


atro 


D. 


ai-fis&ov at-G&ov 


ai-a&7)v 


aijied'Ov atadov 


at<T6r}\> 


P. 


a(-jj.£$£a at-G&e 


at-vro 


curj.e&a atG&e 


atvro 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present, and Second Aorist Middle. 



s. 


s-go 


i-ffd-aj 


ou 


£g$o> 


D. 


e-G&ov 


£-G$U)V 


SG&OV 


£g$<dv 


P. 


e-G#s 


i-G&wGav 


eG&e 


£g&q)G<zv 






Mrst Aorist Middle. 




S. 


a~ao 


d-G&O) 


it) 


dG&U) 


D. 


a-a&ov 


d-ad-ajv 


aG#Oi/ 


dG$(DV 


P. 


a-G&e 


d-G&ioGav 


OLG&S 


dG&WGOLV 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present and Futures, Passive and Middle, and Second Aorist Middle. 
e-G&ac £G$at 



Mrst Aorist Middle. 



a-G&at 



aG&at 



PARTICIPLES. 
Present and Futwes, Passive and Middle, and Second Aorist Middle, 
o-fxevos 6/ievoq 

Mrst Aorist Middle. 
d-[i£vos dfi£vo<; 



520. — Observe that in the middle and passive voices, s 
after a mood-vowel, in the second person singular, is gene- 
rally dropped, and the remaining vowels are contracted ; 
as, e-<ra£, eac, r t ; s-ffo, eo, ou ; a-Go^ ao, w. After a radical 
vowel (as verbs in [it which are without mood-vowels, 617), 
c is regularly (although by no means always) retained ; 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



161 



as, second person perfect passive (which lacks the mood- 
vowel, 516), kilo-Gat^ not XeXu-at. 

521. — Observe also in the following tables that the 
two aorists imperfect and infinitive passive retain the 
original terminations 6t and va:. So regularly verbs with- 
out mood-vowels. (See 616.) 

522. — We give now a complete table of the inflexion 
endings with mood-vowel and termination combined, in the 
active, middle, and passive voices : — 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 
523.— Active Voice. 

INDICATIVE. 
Primary Tenses. 
1st and 2d Perf. 
-a -aq -e 

-OLTOV -OLTOV 

-a[i£v -are -act 



Pres. and Put 

S. -u> -eu; -ei 
D. -£tov -erov 

P. -OflSV -£T£ -OUGL 



Imperf. and 2d Aor. 

S. -ov -sq -e 

D. -erov -irrjv 

P. -ofiev -ere -ov 



Secondary Tenses. 
1st and 2d Pluperf. 

-ecu -sis -et 

-etrov -SLTTjv 
-eifisv-etze -£t<rav 



1st Aor. 
-a -aq -e 

-arov -dry]* 
-a/lev -are -av 



S. -to -r)S -rj 
D. -yrov -rjTov 

P. -wfiev -Tjre -to at 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



So all the tenses. 



The same as first 
column. 



OPTATIVE. 



Pres., Perf., and Put 
S. -otfxt -oiq -ot 
D. -otrov -0LT7JV 

P. -otfiev -otre -otev 



1 Aor. 
-aifit -atq -at 

-aiTov -atTTjv 
-atfxey -airs -atev 



162 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 









IMPERATIVE. 


1 Aor: 


s. 




-e -ira) 




-ov -dro) 


D. 




-erov -irwv 




-arov -drajy 


P. 




-ere -iraxray 

Or -0VTOJV 




-are -drajGav^ 
or -dvTcvv 






INFINITIVE. 








-ew | -ivat 


-at 






PARTICIPLES. 




N. 


-0)V 


-ou<ra -ov 


-d>q -ula -6q 


-aq -aaa -av 


G. 


-OVTOS 


-ouerjq, &c. 


-6to<; -oiaq -oroq 


-avros -aGrjs -avroq 



5£4.-Middle Voice. 

INDICATIVE. 
Primary Tenses. 



MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

Pres. and Fut. 

C. -ofiat -j] -srat 

D. -o/xe&ov -£<7#ov -e<r&ov 
P. -6{i£&a -ecr&£ -ovrac 



Secondary Tenses. 
Imperf. and 2d Aor. 
S. -6/jLTjv -oo -ero 

D. -6jie#ov -ead-ov -iaftyv 

P. -6fJL£$a -£6T#£ -OVTO 



1st Aor. 
-d/j.rjv -a) -aro 

-dfieftov -aa$ov -dG&Tjv 

-dfj.e&a -a<j$e -avro 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



S. -w/iac -7} 

D. -d>jJLe#OV -7]&&OV 

P. -to/ie&a -7}<r&e 



-Tjrat 
-wvrat 



The same as first column. 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



163 









OPTATIVE. 






s. 


-OtfXTjV 


-OtO 


-OtTO 


-a{/j.7)v 


-ato 


-ano 


D. 


-ot/ie&ov 


-otG&ov 


-ottrfhjv 


-alfieftov 


-atG&ov 


-OLlG&TjV 


P. 


-oc/jLeti-a 


-OtG$£ 


-OIVTO 


-at/JLeSa 


-atG&£ 


-atvro 








IMPERATIVE. 




■ 


S. 




-00 


-£g&CO 




-at 


-d<T&a> 


D. 




-e(T#ov 


-£g#WV 




-aG#ov 


-d(T^WW 


P. 




-eff&e 


-£(j#a)Gav 




-aad-e 


-dG&uMiav 








INFINITIVE. 










-£G&at 


1 
- PARTICIPLES. 


-aff&at 




N. 


-ofievoz 


-oiiivq 


-6/l£VOV 


-dfievoq 


-ajiivTj 


-dfievov 


G. 


-O/JL&OU 


-ofiivys 


-Ofiivou 


-a/xivou 


-aixivrj^ 


-a.rj.lv ou 



Obs. — In this table of the middle voice, the terminations 
of the perfect and pluperfect are omitted, being the same 
throughout as those of the perfect and pluperfect passive 
immediately following. 



. 525.— Passive Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Primary Tenses, 
passive and middle. 
Perfect. 
S. -fiat -cat -rat 

D. -fJ.£$OV -g&ov -G#OV 

P. -[j.£&a -&&£ -vrat 



Secondary Tenses. 



Pluperfect. 
S. -fiyv -GO 

D. -fl£$OV -G$OV 

P. -fl£&a -G&£ 



-TO 

-G#7]V 

-VTO 



1st and 2d Aorists. 
-rjv -t)<; -7] 

-tjtov -TJrrjV 

-7jfl£V -1QT£ -TjGaV 



164 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



s. 


-jiivos tl> 


h 




-co 


17* 


-j) 


D. 


-fi(vo) 


rjrov 


^TOV 




-rjrov 


-7JTOV 


P. 


-flivOt WpL£V 


7jT£ 


i 


-Wfxev 


-yre 


-COCTL 








OPTATIYE. 






S. 


-liivoq etrjv 


V 


ef^ 


-efyv 


-efys 


-£17} 


D. 


-fiiva) 


£?7]T0V 


eCTJTTjV 




-etrjrov 


-etrjrrjv 


P. 


-[xivoi eiyfiei 


» ef^re 


etrjffav 


-etrj/xev 


-ecrjre 


-eirjtrav 








IMPERATIVE. 






S. 




-<ro 


-G&U) 




-Tj$l 


-rJTto 


D. 




-<T$OV 


-G$toV 




-TjTOV 


-TjTLOV 


P. 




-G$e 


-G#wGav 
INFINITE 


r E. 


-Tjze 


-TJTWtrait 



-a&at 



-yvcu 







PARTICIPLES. 






M. 


F. 


N. M. 


F. 


N. 


N. -vivos 


'jmivrj 


-[±(\>ov 


-w 


slcra 


-£» 


G. -[ilvou 


-1±£vt)S 


-[xivou 


-ivros 


-ei<rqs 


-ivros 



For the terminations of the present, imperfect, first, 
second, and third futures of the passive voice, see the ter- 
minations in the first column of the table on the preceding 
page. 



PECULIARITIES OF THE TENSES. 165 



PECULIARITIES OF THE TENSES IN THE 
DIFFERENT CLASSES OF VERBS. 

526. — As nouns of the third declension, so verbs natu- 
rally range themselves under three classes, according as 
their radical or stem letter is a vowel, a mute consonant, 
or a liquid ; i. e., according as they are pure, mute, or 
liquid verbs. Each of these classes has some special 
features, which make it proper to consider them sepa- 
rately. 

527. — Systems of Tenses. "We again remind the pupil 
that the tenses naturally resolve themselves into pairs or 
systems, partly as primary and secondary, partly as active 
and passive. 

528. — (1.) By tenses, as primary and secondary; as, 

Active. 

Pres. rdffffo} Fut. zd^co Perf. zizaya {zizaya) 

Imperf. Mtolggov 1 Aor. ezaqa Plup. Herdgetv (£zezdyecv) 

Muddle. 

Pres. rdffffofiai Fut. zdgo/iai Perf. zizayjiai 

Imperf. kzaGGOfxrjv 1 Aor. ha^dpLTjv Plup.'' hsrdyfjLTjv 

Passive. 

1 Fut. Ta%d7J(TOfjLai 2 Fut. zayrj<ro/iat 

1 Aor. Izdydrp 2 Aor. izdyrjy 

The present and perfect systems passive as in the 
middle. 

(2.) By voices, as active, middle, and passive ; thus, 



166 PECULIARITIES OF THE TEKSES. 





ACT. 


MID. 


PASS. 


Pres. 


rdacio 


rd(T<TOfxai 


zdGGOfiai 


Imperf. 


£T(Z(TGOV 


iTa<r<r6jj.7)v 


kTaGGOflTjV 


Fut. 


rd£;<o 


rd^o/iai 




1 Aor. 


eraqa 


ira^d[i^ 




2 Aor. 


erpanov 


irpaTzo/j.^ 


irpd7Z7jv 



529. — By inspecting the above, the pupil will perceive 
that, (1.), from the present active he may deduce the 
imperfect active, and the present and imperfect middle 
and passive ; as, rdaao^ 'iratjGov^ rd<T(To t uai, kraaffofi-qv. 

(2.) That the future active gives the first aorist active 
and the future and first aorist middle ; as, rd^ou, era^a, 

rdgofxat) ira^d[j.fjv. 

(3.) That the second aorist active gives the second 
aorist middle and the second future and aorist passive ; as, 
erpaTtov^ irpaTzo/irjv^ Tpa-xyJGOfiat^ Irpdinjv. 

(4.) That the perfect active and passive always give 
each its respective pluperfect ; as, Tirana, frsrdyev; ; -k(- 
7toida y kizenoideiv ; Tgray/iat, krerdyij.rjv^ and perfect future, 
rsrd^opLac. 

(5.) That the first and second future passive give each 
its respective aorist ; as, raydrjaofia^ krdydiqv ; Tapj<ro/iaij 
irdyTjv. 

Bern. — Observe that in all the classes of ve?-bs, whatever laws of 
euphonic vowel or consonant change apply to any one tense in these 
several systems, applies, as a general rule, to all of them, and when 
the pupil can form one, he can form all. 

We proceed to the different classes of verbal stems, and 
begin as the simplest with the 

Pure Verbs. 

530. — Pure verbs generally lengthen the short stem- 
vowel, when it comes before a consonant ; as, 



PECULIARITIES OF THE TENSES. 187 



t 



Tif±a-a) Ti[j.r)-(Ta} rercpL7]-xa rsrc/JLTj-fiai 

ipofti-a) <pofiirj-<T(D 7te<p6^rj-xa TT£<p6pr}-p.ai 

fJL7)Vl-(D [irjvl-Gio fie/JL7JVl-Xa 

dr}X6-a) SrjX(t>-(T(o dedrjXw-xa dsdrjXw-fiai 

xwXo-to xwXb-au) xexwXu-xa xexwXu-/iat 

Rem. 1. A, preceded by e, i, p, is lengthened into a (instead of rj) • as, 

,1 , i it it 

eao) eo,gg) ) iariacj earidao), (jxopao) (popaao. 

So also, though not immediately thus preceded, anpoaofiac aKpoaaoficu, 
and a/ioao), sometimes aAoaooy. 

Rem. 2. Xpdw, ^pdo/zaj, and riTpdo {although preceded by o\ make 
XPV™, XPV^oiia^ TprjOG), &C 

Exceptions. 

531. — The short stem vowel remains short, as fol- 
lows : — 

(1.) The following verbs in aw (including specially 

Verbs in Xdw) retain a; yeXaa), IXdw {kXabvw), #/laa>, xXaco, 
%aXau), datxda), Trepdw, (TTzdw, <T%dco. 

(2.) The following in iw retain e : dxiotiat, aX(u), dpxiw, 
i/iico, ££a), reXiw, zpiio. So dpidxoj, fut. dp(<7a> (apiaij y 
oXXufitj okiaa) (3X£w). 

(3.) In ooj dpoco Tzivw (jzooi), fut. TrajpLOU) perf. iziizoxa. 

(4.) In vco : avvco, dpuw, fiuiD (but perf. fiijauxaj, xtum. 

(5.) A few in do have partly rj ; as, ahiu), alpico, yap.iu) y 
d£o), eopico (eupiuxw}, xaXiw, Trodico, Tzoiaj, <pop(u). 

(6.) The following verbs in lo> have the future in ev<o ; 
viz., r.v(w y TzXiay^yio}^ Oio), via>, swim (vcw, spin, vrjcra)) ; P^"*, 
flow, makes purj<roria:, Ipfiuqza. 

(7.) The anomalous zaito and xXatcu (Attic, xdaj and 
xXda)) make ao 5 as, xauaa), k'xaucra • xXatxrofia:, exXaucra. 

532. — Pure verbs which retain the characteristic vowel 
short (as in most of the above verbs), commonly insert in 
the perfect and pluperfect, aorist, and future passive, a 
strengthening <j before the tense-endings fiat, tf^v, &c. ; as, 



168 



PECULIAKITIES OF THE TENSES. 



yekdaj 
Telia* 



dvvaj 



yeka.ffop.ai 
Tekiaa) 



dvtHTO) 



yeyika-G-pat 
reriXe-ff-fiat 
rjvo-G-fxat 



£yekd-G-07)v 
iTeXi-G-Oyv 

TJVU-CF-07]V 



JEJxc- — Aba), 0ba), kba), kkda) {ikabva)), alvia), alpia), dia>, 
dpow, evpioj (ebptcxa)}, X^i Gzbu) ; as, didbpat, kikopat, kkykd- 
pat, %vd&r)V) eupiftrjv, &c. 

533. — (a.) Some pure verbs which have the charac- 
teristic or stem vowel long, also insert this strengthening 
€\ as, 



"» _ / 



axouoj 7jxou(Tp.ai 

yvoaj (yiyvtoff'xa)) eyvaj<Tp.ai 

xekeuoj xexikeuapai 

xvaioj, scratch xixvaiapat and 

aeiu), shake aiaeiapai 

(pabaj, touch eipaoapat 



rjxooffdrju 

iyvd>(T07jv 

ixekeO(T07]v 

xixvTj (Tp.au, &C. 

i<Tei<T07)\> 

i(pa6(707jv 



So, xukioj, roll; kebw, stone; %bw, scrape / naiio, strike ; 
TtolaLu), wrestle / Tzkiw, sail; Ttpiw, saw; r^aia), strike 
against, stumble ; and some others with long stem-vowels, 
still take <?. 

(b.) Some with long stem-vowels vary between the two 
constructions; as, 

yeuojj cause to taste, yiyeopat, £yeb-<j-0r}v, 

Spauaj, crush, Ti0po.UGp.ai, and TiOpaupai, £0paba0rjv m 

xkeiw, shut, xixketpat, and xizketcpai, ixketaOyv. 

So xokouw, maim; xpouoj, knock/ via), heap up/ via), 
spin ; (pdo), rub. 

53d. — The following take <r in the aorist passive, and 
omit it in the perfect : — 



pcpvTJGxa), remind pipv-qpat 

Tzaba), cause to cease -Kiizaopai 



Tzvia), breathe 
Xpdopat, use 



iziizvvpai 
xi%p7jpat 



ipV7J-ff-#7}V 

£-ai)G&7)v 
(and ixab&rjv) 
lnveb(T&7)v 

£XP7J<T#7)V 



PECULIARITIES OF THE TENSES. 



169 



533. — Some pure verbs in £a> drop <? in the future, and 
then contract ; as, reXJ-e-a), reXico, reXco (like the present) ; 
SO also iXdat (£Xo.bvu))) eXdcrco, £Xaa), lX<b. 

Bern. — Xeco makes the future ;teo/z<w, without tense-sign; irveu and 
7r?i£u make the future TrvevGovjuac and 7rlevGovjuai (rarely irvewo/LLcu and 
TrlewojLtai), as if from izvEvaeoizat and Tr/ievaeouai. Pure verbs generally 
make the perfect active in /c. They lack the second tenses, as the second 
perfect and pluperfect, and second aorist (except when it is formed from 
an independent consonant stem; as, alpeo ei?,ov). They thus have 
mainly the present and imperfect, first perfect and pluperfect, and the 
future and first aorist. 





Examples of Pure Verbs. 




536.- 


-(1.) riw 9 requite. 


honor. 


- 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres. 


TC-O) 


Ti-Ofiat 


ri-ofiat 


Imperf. 


e-r i*ov 


£-Tt'6fJL7]V 


i-rt'6/njv 


Fut. 


rh<T-(JO 


T~l-G'0[iai 


Tt-#7]<T-OfJLaC 


1 Aor. 


t-zi-G-a 


£-Tt-(7-dfJL7jV 


£-TL-d>-7]V 


Perf. . 


ri-Tl-x-a 


r£-Tt-[iai 


ri-Tt-fiat 


Pluperf. 


£-T£-Tt-X-etV 


i-Te-Tl-pLTQV 


£-Te-Tt-fX7]V 


Perf. Fut 




re-Ti-G-ofiat 





(2.) n>aw, honor. 



ACTIVE. 
i 

rip.d-io 
£-Tijy.a-ov 

Te-Ttfiirj-z-a 



Pres. 

Imperf. 
Fut. 
Aor. 
Perf. 

Pluperf. i-Te-Ti/nj-x-sw k-re-Ttfnj-ifqv 
Perf. Fut. ■ re-Ttinj'ff'Ofiac 

8 



MIDDLE. 

rtfxd-ojiat 
£'TCfta-6/j.7]v 

TL/lTJ-G-OfAai 

k-Tiixrj-a-dfiTiv 
Te-TLfiTj-jiat 



PASSIVE. 
Tc/id-ofiat 
£-Ti t ua-6jA7)V 
Tt i ur J -$7J<j-ojiai 

£-TtpL7J-&-7]\> 
T£-Tt/17]-/iat 

£-re-Ti[n]-tiiqv 

Te-Tlfl7J-<j-OfJLCU 



170 STEMS IN A CONSONANT* 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 

1. Mute Verbs. 

537* — In M/iite verbs, the future and first aorist end 
in (pa), %w, and <rw, and (pa, ca, and era, according as the 
root ends in a labial, palatal, or lingual ; thus, 

xXex TcXi^a) e-rrXe^a 

Tpsir rpicpu) ezpe(pa 

Tceid- iz£i($)<7U) ex et (6} era 

538* — The first perfect and pluperfect active make 
their endings in #>a, %a, and xa, and <pew, %£t\>, and xecv ; as, 

rpen r(rpo<pa Irerpoweiv 

tzXsx 7c£7zXe%a £7te7rX£%eiv 

Ttetd' 7t£7Z£txa iizenzvceiy 

339* — Thus a labial or palatal characteristic forms 
the perfect and pluperfect active by adding a and ecv, 
and aspirating the radical consonant. Lingual char- 
acteristics add xa and xetu, dropping the lingual before 
them (472, Obs. 2, 3) ; thus, 

Xs{7c-(o XiXeupa SAeXetyecv 

*kX£x-u) iz£izXt%a lizexXi^eiv 

-izeida) icinetxa insTrecxetu 

The second perfect XiXonza, xinotda, with unchanged char- 
acteristic. 

Rem. — (1.) Some explain the <j>a and x a by assuming that the er^'ng 
of the perfect is d, which, united with the preceding mutes, 7r, /?, and /c, 
7, changes them into the aspirate (pa and x a i while, after other letters 
(as lingual mutes, liquids, or a vowel), it is hardened into k. 

(2.) Others regard the proper termination of the first perfect as /ca, 
which combines with labial and palatal mutes to form <pa and %a, but 
appears elsewhere unchanged. 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 171 

(3.) Others still regard the proper ending of the first perfect in labials 
and palatals as 6a and x a i an( * m a ^ other verbs as ica. 

(4.) Others make (j>a and x a simply alternative endings of the second 
perfect (for na, /3a, /ca, ya), and confine the first perfect ending to m. 
According to this view, labial and palatal mute verbs have not the first 
perfect at all ; pure verbs (with rare exceptions, as Sedca) have only the 
first perfect (that in tea) ; while in lingual mutes and liquids the first 
perfect is the prevailing, though not the exclusive form ; thus, 



It it 



Labial Mutes, tvtt-tq 2d perf. rervna or rerv(j>a 

(pepP'Oi " ntyopfia 

Tpitp-a M T£TpO(j)a 

Palatal Mutes, ?<,eyo> " (<7w)eOo;ta 

" " Tcpaoco " izeirpaya and nkirpaxa 

" " PfooG) (fax) " ^te« 

Lingual Mutes, mided 1st perf. ninecm 2d perf. 7re7roi8a 

Liquids, kteIvq " karam " ear ova 

Pure Verbs, (pofleo) " ne^ofaKa 

54z0. — Perfect and first future and aorist passive end- 
ings, /Jia£, ftrjcofiai) drjv, apply the euphonic laws (64 ff.) to 
the consonants thus brought into juxtaposition ; as, 

TzXix-m itiizXey-ixai (65) ^Xi^-67jv (68) 

XaiiPdv-u) (kyP) eUrjfxfMat (64) ihq<p6^ (56) 

TZtL$-U> TziTZZlGlLdl lTT£t(7&7}V 

(for iTzeid-drjv)* 

Note 1. In the first future and first aorist, a lingual before is changed 
into f ; as, kTreiGdijv, for hireiQQrjv ; ijvvcdrjv, for rjvvrdrjv. 

Note 2. In the above euphonic changes, sometimes //// or 77 will come 
before /*; as, Tcefnru, TreTre/Liw-fiac, Would become Trerrefifi-fcac (64) and 
eAey^w, klrfkzy x-\iai becomes kXyXeyy-uai (65). In such cases, one of 
the preceding consonants is dropped ; as, TzeTzefi-fiai, kTJjT&y-iiai, 

Rem. — Let the pupil distinguish carefully between the g in the perfect 
and aorist passive of Ungual mute verbs, which is the result of regular, 
euphonic change (as, ireireiGfiac, kneiodnv, for 7re7rei6juai, hizeiOdnv), and g in 
the like tenses of pure verbs,, which is the result of euphonic insertion; 
as, TETeXeG/zac kTzkkGQnv, for rarefe/nac zrzkkdnv ; KenifavG/iat k.KzkevGdnv % 
for KEKehevfAat kneXevdnv, 



172 STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 

541. — Attic future. As the future in pure verbs often, 
when short, drops <r, and contracts — as, reXiaa) reXico rsXw, 
TeXi<To t t±ai) reXio t aai reXou/iai (535) — SO some mute verbs in 
ad and td (pres. a£>, £«*) reject the <r of the future, and 
contract ; those in id as if from 6a>, iofiai, into «5, od/iai ; as, 

ftcftd£a) (piftad} j3tfid<Ta), fiifiau) ftifiaj. 

XOfJLl'Za) (xOflld} XOpLt(T(O y XOjJLli-O) XO/JLCCD^ £?£, ££, elTOV, &C. 

542. — The second perfect active inclines to the vowel 
o in its root ; as, 

Xsittoj XiXoixa (but XiXei<pa), 
7te(da) iti-Koifta (but niTisixa). 
tixtw (rex) rizoxa, (pipfiui 7zi<popfia. 

Sometimes also the fr$t perfect ; as, 

rp(<pa) zizpocpa 

Gzpi<pa> sGTpo<pa (but see 539, Rem. 4). 

The second perfect also inclines to a long vowel, where 
the second aorist has a short one; as, nicpsoya, cia^Tza^ 
XiXonrai second aorist, eyvyov^ ea(n:ov r eXinov. 

543. — In the second aorist active, and the perfect pas- 
sive, £ of the stem is frequently changed into a; as, 

Tpina) erpaizov rirpafifiai 

czpitpio hazp&<prp> e<jrpafip.at 

But in this the first aorist and future passive do not follow 
it ; as, lTp(<pdrjV) £<TTpiy>07}v. 

Remark, that as the present and imperfect often disguise the root by 
strengthening additions — as, rvrno tvttto, Trpaya Trpdaaa) or irpdrTcj) 
ap-trado dpird^a — and as in the future, aorist, first perfect, &c, the 
euphonic changes leave it uncertain in precisely which mute the root ends 
(as, le^cd might be from "key, or tax, or lex ', Mjipopcu, from fajP, %-w, or 
7i?l(j) ; 7re£cr6), from ireiO, irEid, or rceir), it is only in the second aorist, 
second future passive, or second perfect — in which the pure character- 
istic appears entirely unmodified — that we can find the exact pure stem- 
consonant; as, iriiroid-a, ehnr-ov. 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 



173 



Examples of Mute Vebbs. 


544.— (l.) 


The characteristic a 
kefaa)) I leave. 
Active Yoice, 


labial mute. 




PABTS DIVIDED* 


PAET8 COMBINED 


Pres, 


Izhz-u) 


XetTzai 


Imperfi 


e-Xetn-ov 


eXetnov 


Fut. 


Xsi7T-<J-Qt 


Xeiipco 


1 Aor. 


e-ketn-G-a 


eXst(pa 


2 Aor. 


e-Xtn-ov 


eXcxov 


Perf. 


Xi-XtLn-a 


XiXeupa 


Pluperf. 


l-Xe-Xefa-etv 


iXeXetyew 


2 Perf. 


Xi-Xonz-a 


XiXonza 


2 Pluperf. 


i-Xe-Xofa-ew 

Middle Voice. 


IXeXoinew 


Pres. 


Xetiz-ojiac 


Xeinoiiat 


Imperfi 


l-Xsnz-ofiev 


£Xei7:6fjL7}v 


Fut. 


Xeiiz-G-o[j.at 


XeLcpoficu 


1 Aor. 


i-Xecn-tT-dfnqv 


i:Xst(pd/JLrjv 


2 Aor. 


i-XtTT-OfJLTjy 


£Xi7z6fi7jy 


Perf. 


X£-Xtnz-p.at 


XiXscfijiac 


Pluperf. 


l-Xe-XtiTz-fATjv 


IXeXetfifiTjV 


Per£ Fut. 


Xz-XziTz-a-ofiat 
Passive Voice. 


XeXei<po[iai 


Pres. 


Xefc-o/jLat 


XetTzofiac 


Imper£ 


£-Xet7r-6fj.7]\t 


iXet7c6/i7jv 


Fut. 


Xei7t-$7J<T-o[Lat 


Xet(p&7J<TOfiat 


2 Fut 


XiTr-TJG-ofiat 


?^7Z7J(TOp.CU 


1 Aor. 


i-Xefa-ft-Tjy 


iXei<pd'-qv 


2 Aor. 


IrXilZ-Tp 


kXiizrjv 


Perf. 


Xi-XetTz-fiai 


XiXecfifiat 


Pluperf 


£-Xe-Xei7c~/j.7]» 


iXeXec/ifiTjit 


Perf. Fut. 


Xe-XeiTt-G-oficu 


XsXefyofiaz 



174 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 



(2.) The characteristic a palatal mute. 

7:A£x(o J I fold. 
Active Voice. 





PABTS DIVIDED. 


PAET8 COMBINED. 


Pres. 


7tA£x-0> 


izA£xu) 


Imperf. 


e-izAex-ov 


eizAexov 


Fut. 


tzA£x-g-<i> 


7tA£t;u} 


1 Aor. 


e-izAex-G-a 


B7:Ae^a 


2 Aor. 


e-nAax-ov 


exAaxov 


Perf. 


ni-n Ae%-a 


iz£7zAe%a 


Pluperf. 


l-7Z£-1zA£%-£lV 


£tZ£TzA£%£W 


2 Perf. 


Tz£-7zAox-a 


7z£nAoxa 


2 Pluperf. 


l-TZ£-TzA6x-£W 


ineizAoxecu 




Middle Yoice. 


- 


Pres. 


izAix-ofiai 


7zA£xo[iai 


Imperf. 


£-7cAex-6jA7}v 


inAexdfnriv 


Fut. 


7zA£x-<T-ofiat 


TzA£%oy.ai 


1 Aor. 


£-7zAex-(T-dji7}v 


£7rAe£dpi7}v 


2 Aor. 


£-7cAax-6ji7}\> 


iTzAaxofiTju 


Perf. 


ni-izAex-ixai 


7z£r:A£Y[±ai 


Pluperf. 


£-7T£'7tA£x-fl7]V 


£7Ce7:A£yfjL7jv 


Perf. Fut. 


ne-TzAix-G-opLcu 
Passive Yoice. 


7Z£7zA£%ofj.at 


Pres. 


7tA£x-ofiai 


7zA£xo[iai 


Imperf. 


£-7zAex-6/A7]\> 


£7zAexoji7]v 


Fut. 


7zAex-$irj<j-o[iat 


7zAex&7JG0/jiat 


2 Fut. 


7zAax-iJG-ofxai 


7rAax7JGOfxat 


1 Aor. 


£-TzA£x-d>-7)V 


£7rA£%&7]\> 


2 Aor. 


l--KAdx-f)v 


£r:Adx7jv 


Perf. 


7c£-7rAex-jj.at 


7c£7zA£y[xai 


Pluperf. 


£-1Z£-lzA£x-tJLT}V 


£7re7rA£yfi7]v 


Perf. Fut. 


7te-7tA£x-G-ofiat 


7tei:A£%oficu 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 175 

(3.) The characteristic a lingual mute. 

ntiftw, I persuade. 





ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres. 


7rei&-u) 


Tzeid-ofxat 


Tzeid^Ofiat 


Imperf. 


e-7Z£l&-OV 


£-7T£t&-6fl7]V 


£-7T£L&-6fl7}V 


Fut. 


7tei-G-u) 


7Z£L-(T'OJAa! 


7:si<j-#7J<7'0[iat 


2 Fut. 






7Zt#-7J<T'Ofiat 


1 Aor. 


e~7tet-<r-a 


k~iZ£i-G-airf]v 


t-7recV-t9-^v 


2 Aor. 


e-7r:#-ov 


l~7zi&-6[j.rjv 


£-7ZLi%7)V 


Perf. 


7ti~7zei-x-a 


nd-netcr-fiou 


7ri-7Z£i<T-fiat 


Pluperf. 


i-ire-iret-x-ew 


£~7:e-7ze{<T'fX7]v 


l-nz-TizLG-lxrp 


2 Perf. 


7ti~7:oi&-a 






2 Pluperf. 


£-TZ£-1Zoid~£W 






Perf. Fut. 




izz-Tzzi-G-oiiai 


7:e-7r£i-<T-oj±ai 



2. Liquid Verbs. 

545. — The liquid letters A, fi, v, p have also some quali- 
ties which exert their own peculiar influence on the tenses 
of verbs ; as, first : — 

54:6. — Where the stem is lengthened in the present and 
imperfect, all the remaining tenses are made from the 
shorter, primitive form ; as, 





FUT. 


1st aor. 


PERF. 


rev (re ww) 


rev-o> 


e-zetv-a 


zi-za-xa 


<pav (jpabcu) 


<pav-a> 


£-<p7)V-a 


7zi-<pay-7,a 


zeX (ri)J,aj) 


zek-a) 


e-zetk-a 


r^i-zak-xa 



547. — The future, active and middle, rejects a after the 
liquid, but, by way of compensation, assumes instead e, 
which, with a> and of±ai, is contracted into a> and oo/xat ; as, 



VERB. 


ROOT. 




FUT. 


ACT. 


fiivo) 


fl£V 


fl£V-((TJaJ 


fJL£V-£u) 


jjl£\>-o> 


Z£t>OJ 


rev 


rev-(c)w 


Z£V-i(U 


T£V-W 


<paivu> 


tpax 


<pcv,)-((j)u} 


<pav-(<D 


. <pav-w 



176 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 



Rem. — It may be that e was originally inserted in liquid verbs for the 
sake of euphony (as, crek-e-au), and that subsequently, the g falling away, 
the remaining vowels were contracted; as, /llsv-g-s-g), fiev-i-G), fievti. 

54:8* — The first aorist, active and middle, like the 
future ;, rejects <? after the liquid, but compensates by length- 
ening the short radical vowel, viz., e into ^ y a- into t] (or 
a), and ?, 6, into I, o 5 as, 



verb; 


ROOT. 


1st aor. act. 


1st aor. Mm 


lilvu* 


fiev 


£~{iet\>~a 


£~/j.etv-dij.7]v 


reivai 


rev 


%-Tetv-a 


l-Tetv-dfiyv 


<paiv(o 


<pav 


%-<pt)v-a 


£-<p7}V-d/J.7]V 


ariXXo} 


azsX 


carecXa 


i-<JT£cAdjJL7})> 



549. — The first perfect active, as in pure verbs and 
lingual mutes, makes its ending in xa \ as, eazaXxa. 

(1.) v before x is either dropped {reivio, rev, ri-ra-xa) or 
Changed into y (jioXbva> p.ep.6Xuyxa, izitpayxa, fxtaivu} fisfitapcaj. 

(2.) Some perfects are made by metathesis, as from a 
pure root / as, fidXXw, flXa pipXrjxa (not fiipaXxa), xd/jLvw, xap^ 
xp.a, xix/jLTjxa. 

(3.) Stems in pa> sometimes form the perfect as from a 
pure root by interposing >; as, vifiu), ve-vi^-rj-xa (as from 
vs/iiaj). So, also, fiiva), {iefi£v7)xa (for fiifieyxa). 

550. — The pure forms thus introduced into the perfect 
active are retained in the perfect, future, &c, passive ; as, 

fidXXo) (/?Aa), fii$X-qxa, ftiftXyfiau, fiXr)dij<?o[iat, &C. J vi t ua> (vejie), 
vsvi/nqxa, vev£fi7]fiat, £vep.vj6y)v % 

551. — The first perfect and pluperfect active, and the 
passive tenses, except the present and imperfect, incline to 
the vowel a in the root ; as, 

verb. perf. act. 1st fut. pass. 1st aor. p. perf. p. 

aizeipui cnep e-a-xap-xa <T7zap-#7J<joficu i-aTzap-^r^ e-<rnap-fjLGU 
criXXio <ttsX $'G7aX~xa <TTaX-fi>7J<rop.ai S-GTaX-ftyv ^-eraX-fiat 



STEMS IN A CONSONANT. 



177 



xrev 
exrova 



552. — The second perfect, as in mute verbs, inclines in 
the root to o; as, 

(TreX <p&sp Gnep 

eGroXa e<p#opa sGrcopa 

f 553. — Dissyllables in etW, &a>, vvio, reject v before a 
consonant, not only (as above, 549) before, xa in the per- 
fect, but also in several passive tenses ; as, 

rstvaj (t£v)j ri-Taxa, r^-ra/ia:, £-rd#^y # 
xptvco (x/w), xixpcxa, xixpt/xac^ Ixpid-qv (and ixpivdyv). 
xXivu) (xXtv) 9 xixhxdj xixXtfiai^ IxXLdrp. 

xtscvoj {xTev) r exTaxa {exrayxa late), ixrddrjv (but later part, 
xravOeiq). 

tzXuvu) (^Aw),7r^Ayxa 3 7r^A^ac, but inXuvd-qv (not ItzXuOtiv), 

Rem. — "Verbs which do not drop v in the perfect passive before p, 
change it into ct; as, <}>aiv<D, ttXvvc), perf. pass, netyaoficu, 7ri7rfaM7ficu. They 
are inflected thus : — 



Singular, ntyac-nai 
Dual, TreQ&G-fie&ov 

Plural, TzefyaG-jJt&a 



ir£<j>av-ocu 7r£(f>av-Tcu 

iridxiV'&ov (69) 7re(j>av-'&ov 
7re<f>av- i d-e KE<j>aa-[JL£voL elai (v) 



Pres. 

Imperf. 

Fut. 

2Fuk 

1 Aor. 

2 Aor. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 
2 Perf. 

2 Pluperf. 



Examples of Liquid Verbs. 
554:. — 2t£XXid^ I send. 

ACTIVE. - MEDDLE. 

<TTiXX-a> GTiXX-o/iai 

e-GTeXX-ov £-<ttsXX-6jat)v £ 

GTeX-i-iD) <o ffrsX-i-ojiat 9 ovy.at 



i-crstX-a 

%-GTOiX-OV 

e~<TraX-x-a 

I'GrdX-x-ew 

e-GToX-a 

1-GToX-GiV 

8* 



£-<TT£lX-d/17}V 

i-GraX-dfiiqv 

e-ffraX-ficu 

£-<j7dX-/n}v 



PASSIVE. 

ar(XX"op.ai 

GTsXX-OfJLTjV 

(TTaX'&TJG-ojiat 
<jTaX-7JG-o[±ai 
>GTdX-#-iqv 
>Grd?.-7]v 
e-GTaX-p.at 

i-GTdX~fJL7]V 






178 



STEMS m A CONSONANT. 



(2.) #a«W, J show. 



Pres. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 
2 Fut. 

1 Aor. 

2 Aor. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 
2 Perf. 



ACTIVE. 

£-q>cuy-oy 



e-iprjv-a 

e-<pay-ov 
Tzi-yay-x-a 
l-Tce-ydy-x-eiv £--K£-<pd<j-ti7)y 

7z£-<prjv-a — 

2 Pluperf. i-ne-tpyjv-etv < 



MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 

(paw-opLOLt <pmv-o[xat 
l-cpaiv-oivqv £-<pacv-6jA7jv 
<pav-i-o[iat 9 ov/jlcu <pay-#TJG-otiat 
<pav-rj<j'0[icu 

l-<pdv-r}v 
7z£-<paG-fiat 
£-7te-<pd(T~ii7)v 



£-<p7]V-d{l7]V 

Ttl-cpaa-iiai 



(3.) Teha>, I stretch. 



Pres. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 
2 Fut. 

1 Aor. 

2 Aor. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 
2 Perf. 



ACTIVE. 
TStV'O) 

e-retv-ov 



rev-i-u)) w 



e-retv-a 
e-Tay-oy 



ri-za-x-a 

£-T£-Td-X~£ty 

ri-Toy-a 
2 Pluperf. £-T£-z6y-eiy 



MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 

Teiv-ofiac re(y-o/iat 

i-recy-6/jL7]y i-rety-ojjLiqv 

zey-i-ofiaiy ovfiat Ta-#7J<j~o/iai 

Tay~7]G'0(xat 
i-rd-d-Tjy 
i-rdy-Tjy 
ri-ra-fxat 
S-Te-rd-fiyv 



£~Tety-dfX7]y 
£-Tay-6/j.7]y 
ri-Ta-fiat 
l-re-rd-fiyy 



(4.) Ni/ia), I distribute. 



Pres. 

Imperf. 

Fut. 

1 Aor. 

Perf. 

Pluperf. 



ACTIVE. 

e-vsfi-ov 

ye/j.-£-(D, a) 
e-yetjjL-a 
ys-yijx-Tj-x-a 



MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 

vifi-oficu yi/i-ofiat 

i-yefJL-ofirjy i-ye/i-ofirjy 

y£fi-i-ojiat, ovfxai y£fi-7)-&rj<r-0fiat 
£-y£ipL-d/i7)v £-v£/yL-7J-$-7}y 

y£-yi/jL-7)-fiat v£-y6pL-7)-jiai 



$~y£'y£fjL'7J-X'£ty i-ve-vefi-yj-fiyv e , -y£-v£fi-7J-fiT)y 



CONTRACT VERBS. 179 



CONTRACT VERBS. 

555. — The pure verbs consist of those which have a 
vowel or diphthong as the characteristic stem vowel. Of 
these, three classes, viz., those in -da>, -iw, -6a>, are called 
contract verbs, because they contract the concurring 
vowels in accordance with the general rules of contraction 
(195-205). See paradigm, 569. The contraction, from 
the nature of the case, is confined to the present and 
imperfect tenses, and takes place equally in all the 
voices. 

Rem. 1. The rules of contraction for different classes 
of words are not invariable. Thus, in the dual of the third 
declension, et is uniformly contracted into -q, while else- 
where it is regularly contracted into st (196, Exc. 1). 

Rem. 2. It will also be observed, that combinations to 
which we give the same sound are differently contracted,, 
according as they contain or not a latent or subscribed 
iota; thus, 09 is contracted into a>, but 6% into o7, the 1 
reappearing, and controlling the contraction ; but drj and 
ajy, and i'/] and ir h are not influenced in the same way by 
the f, being contracted into a, 5, and rj, %. 

556. — The following are all the concurrences of vowels 
which these verbs admit, together with the modes of con- 
traction. Where they lack the accent it is of course 
thrown back, by the recessive law of verbal accent (the 
ultimate being short), to a previous syllable :— 

557. — Verbs in -dw. 





-aw, 


-ae, -do, -drj, -det, -dy, 


-dot, 


-dou, 


contr. 


-to, 


-a, -a>, -a, -a, -a, 
558. — Verbs in 4w. 




mi 

-co. 




-£<o, 


-ee, -io, -fy, -dec, -ir n 


-iotj 


-60U, 


contr. 


0%0 


-St, -00, -rj, -£?, -% 


~°h 


-00. 



180 CONTRACT VERBS. 

&S9*— Verbs in 6o>. 





-6o), 


-oe, 


-C$0, 


-07?, 


-OSJ, 


*%> 


-oor, 


-6ou, 


contr. 


■=Zr 

-CO, 


-OU, 


-oD, 


1^ 

-CO, 


-or, 


-or, 


-0?, 


-oy. 



05s. 1. Dissyllables in ^ contract only ee and ee:; 
thus, 7rAee, 7rA^££v, 7rXiere, &c, are usually contracted into 
7rAe7, 7rAe«V, 7rAeTre, &c, but nXia), nAdo/iev, izXiovat, &c, ap- 
pear in their full form instead of being contracted into 

7rAcO, TrXoDpLBV) TzXoUGl^ &C» 

Exc. diio, to bind, makes doov and dou/iat, while the 
impersonal participle diov (peing required), from dico y 
want, need, appears uncontracted. 

Obs. 2. Several verbs in da) contract as into r;, and dec 
into #. These are the four frequently recurring verbs, 
fctco, live; Tzeivdio, hunger; dupda), thirst, and %pdo t aat 9 use/ 
and the three rarer verbs, xwzco, cr/iaw, (/>dw. Thus we 
have 

Indie C«u/, W^C, C«£{, Zderov, eZaeq. Inf. Caeei/. 

contr. Ceo, Cgs (not C«c), Cg, Zrjro^ eZys. * Zyv. 

So xpaufiat, xpdrj, ypdezac. Inf. %pde<Tdai y &c. 

COntr. zp&fiat) xpij, XP^ rai * " yprjaOac. 

To the above we may add the subj. of verbs in fit ; as, 
lardy , lardeaBov^ 

And analogous, perhaps, is the liquid aorist syyva, eeyTjXa, 

from <pcw, £<pav, icpaeva, e<p7]va y G<paX, l<j<paX, £<j<pdeXa, e<r<piqXa. 
Rem. The Ionic dialect is much less inclined to contrac- 
tions than the stronger and sterner Attic. In the latter 
these verbs generally undergo the regular contractions ; in 
the former they are commonly omitted. 

560.— Doric and Ionic Forms. 

Obs. 3. The Doric dialect commonly inclines to the 
broad a, which it substitutes for tj. In verbs, however, 
it employs yj, without .' subscript, in contracting aec 



EXPLANATION OF TABLE. 181 

and eet ; as, 6pr t v^ for 6pav ; zo^/r^ v, for xoepeiv. Also, as they 
usually contracted into f] ; as, roApL7jre y for ro^adsre. 

The Ionic dialect often converts a, in verbs in aw, into 
e 5 as, 6piu)^ 6pi.op.ev, for 6pda>, 6pdo/j.ew ; %pierai for xpdsrat. 



561.-- Homeric Form. 

055, 4. The Epic writers, on account of the metre, 
often insert the kindred long or short vowel before the 
contracted vowel; as, 6pdacu y contr. 6pav, Poet. 6pdav y 
opdaj, contr. <jpa> 9 Poet. 6p6u). Participle fern. y{3dou<Ta y 
contr. rjpaxra, Poet, y ft ataxia, &c. This, from its frequent 
occurrence in Homer, is sometimes called the Homeric 
form. 



EXPLANATION OF THE FOLLOWING 

TABLE. 

562. — The tense-root in the subjunctive (being t! 
indicative, but without the augment), is to be prefixed 
tions" in the optative, imperative, infinitive, and parti' 

563. — Whenever the accent (') falls on the termin^v^n,, a, m uiaokuu 
in the following table in its proper place. Otherwise its place will be 
on the antepenultimate syllable, if the ultimate is short, or, if long, on the 
penult; as, rervtya, tetixjxd, &c. 

564:* — In the perfect and pluperfect passive, the characteristic n in 
all the moods is placed before the termination, to show the euphonic 
changes occasioned by their concurrence. The rules for these changes 
must be carefully observed. 

565. — The numbers to be found in the following table refer to the 
numbered paragraphs of this work. 

N. B. By inspection of the table, it will be seen that the terminations 
of the subjunctive mood are the same in all the tenses, and those of the 
optative and imperative are nearly the same in all, except in the first 
aorist. Attention to this will greatly facilitate the learning of the verb. 



\ 



182 



TABLE OF THE VERB 



5<?<?.-TABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. 







INDICATIVE 


l 




SUBJUNCTIVE. 




Tense-root. 


Terminations. 


T-root. 


Terminations. 








1, 


2. 


3. 




1. 


2. 


3. 


Pres. 


S. 


TV7TT 


-S 


-£if, 


- £ <, 


TVTTT 


-6>, 


-?f, 


-% 




D. 




' 


-ETOV 1 


-erov, 






-7]TOV, 


•7}T0V, 




P. 




-OjUEVj 


-ere, 


-OVCi. 




-w^ev, 


-VTE, 


-QGL. 


Imp. 


S. 
D. 
P. 


E-TVKT 


-OUEV, 


-ETOV, 

-ere, 


-ETT/V, 
-OV. 










Eut. 


S. 


TVlp 


-6>, 


-£#, 


-ei, 


TVTp- 










D. 






-STOV, 


-eroo>, 




Wanting. 






P. 




-OflSV, 


-ere, 


•OVOL. 










1 Aor. 


S. 


e-Tvip 


' a l 


-af, 


- e i 


TVlb 


-w, 


-yc, 


-Vi 




D. 






-aroo>, 


-CLT7]V, 






-7JTOV, 


-7]T0V 1 




P. 




-o^uev, 


-are, 


-av. 




-OflSV, 


-7jTE 1 


-G)CU. 


2 Aor. 


S. 


E-TV7T 


-ov, 


-er 




ri'TT 


-«, 


-ys, 


'V, 




r> 






-ETOVj 


•renjVj 






-TJTOV, 


-TJTOVj 








-0/J,£V, 


-ere, 


'OV. 




-G>UEV. 

i 7 


-r/re, 


-QGl. 


■ 


T£-TV(j> 


-a, 


-ar, 




T£-TV(j> 


-6), 


-9C, 


■vr 




D. 






-ClTOVj 


-arw, 






-7JT0V) 


-TjTOV, 




P. 




-cliiev, 


-O.TE, 


-act. 




-w//ev, 


-qre, 


-GXJl. 


Plup. 


S. 
D. 
P. 


E-T8~TV(p 


-ELV, 
-ElflEV, 


-ELC, 

-ELTOVj 

-ELTS, 


-elttjv^ 

-ELOCLV. 










2 Perf. 


S. 


TE-TVJT 


-«i 


-af, 


- s i 


TE-TV7T 


-w. 


'VC, 


-v, 




D. 






-arov, 


-aroVj 






-TjTOV, 


-TJTOVy 




P. 




-CljLLEV, 


-are, 


-aoi. 




•>UflEV f 


-?;re, 


-G)Gl. 


2 Plup. 


D. 


b'TE'Tvn 


-ELV, 


-e^c, , 

-ELTOV, 


-ELT7]V y 












P. 




-ElflET; 


-CITE, 


-Eioav. 








» 



IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 



183 



TABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE-CWWd 



OPTATIVE. 


IMPERATIVE. 


INF. 




PAPwTICIPLES. 


Terminations. 


Terminations. 


Term. 




Terminate 


ilS. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


2. 3. 






M. 


E. 


K 


-Otfll, 


-O/X, 571 


-01, 


-£, -ETC), 




N. 


-G)V, 


-ovaa, 


-OV, 




-OLTOV, 


-OLT7JV, 


-£TOV,-£TO)V, 


-ElV. 5 ™ 


G. 


-ovrog, 


-ovGTig, 


-OVTOC, 


-OlflEV, 


-OLTE, 


-olev. 


' 573 
-ETE, -ETDOO.V, 




D. 


-OVTL, 


-oven, 


•OVTl, &C. 


-OLUL, 


-oig, 


-OL, 







N. 


-uv, 


-ovaa, 


-OV, 




-OITOV, 


-OLT7/V, 


Wanting. 


-ELV, 


G. 


-ovrog, 


-ovoTjg, 


-ovrog, 


-oljiev, 


-olte, 


-olev. 






D. 


-OVTC, 


-obey, 


-OV7L, &c. 


•aijui, 


-aig, 


-ai, 


-0Vj -aro), 




X. 


-ag, 


-aaa, 


-av, 




-airov, 


-atTTJV, 


-arov, -arcoVj 


-at. 


a. 


-CLVTOQ, 


-aat?c, 


-avrog, 


-CLLLLEl' 

i J 


-acre, 


-CLLEV. 


-ars, -arucav. 




D. 


-av~t, 


-any, 


-OVTL, &c. 


-CCfLL, 


-oig, 


"% 


-£, -£T«, 




K 


-G)V, 


-oma, 


-01', 




-0L70V, 


-OLT7JV, 


-ETOV, -£7G)V, 


-ELV. 


G. 


-OVTOC, 


-ovong, 


-ovrog, 


-OIULEV, 


-OL7E, 


-OLEV. 


-ete, -eroaav. 




D. 


-OVTL, 


-ovcy, 


-OVTl, &C. 


-OLfli ) 


-oig, 


-OL™ 7 


r 
-£, -ETCO, 




X. 


-WC, 


-via, 


-*. 




-OLTOV, 


-OLT7/V, 


-ETGV, -ETCJV, 


-EVCIL. 


Or. 


-orog, 


-vcag, 


-orog, 


-oi/llev, 


-OLTE, 


-OIEV, 


-ETE, -ETcoaav. 


— — - — 


D. 


-6ti, 


-via. 

« 7 


-OTl, &C. 


•OlfJLl, 


-oig, 


-01, 


-£, -ETC), 





X. 


-6g, 


-via, 


^f, 




•OLTOV 1 


-OITIJV, 


-ETOV, -ETCJV, 


-fjvai. 


G. 


-orog, 


-vlag, 


-orog, 


•oi/lcev, 


-OL7E, 


-OIEV, 


-ere, -etogov. 




D. 


-on. 


-via, 


-on. 











184 



TABLE OF THE VERB 



•»..,-* 



567.— TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE. 




SUBJTJNCTIVK 


f Tense-root Terminations. 


T-rooi. Terminations. 


? 1. 2. 


E. 


1. 2. 3. 


Pres. S. tvttt -ojiau, -??, B91 


-era/, 


TVTTT-u/Ltai,, -y* 91 '^TCll, 


D. -6fie&0V) -ec&oi 


', -EO&OV) 


-CJflEd'OV, -TJG&OV, -TJO&OV) 


P. -Sfie&cij -£cn9-£, 


-OVTCLl. 


-£/z£#a, -?}0"&£ 1 -uvtcu. 


Imp. S. k-TVKT -6jl7JV, -ov, 591 


-£70, 




D. -d/LLE'&OV, -EG&Ol 


', -EC'&TJV, 




P. -dfied-a, -eo"#e, 


-OVTO. 




Fut. S. Tvip -Gfiat, -7?, B91 


-£~ai, y 


TVIp- 


D. -6[ie'&ov 1 -ecr&oi 


', -£(7l9w, 


Wanting. 


P. -dfie&ci) ' -£C#c, 


-ovraz. 




1 Aor. S. c-ru$ -a/z?^, -w, 581 


-cro, 


Tvip -g)/j,ci, -y™ 1 -TjTai, 


D. -ajLLe&ov, -aodoi 


>, -aod-?]V) 


-G)fi£&ov, -7/adoVj -7?cn9w, 


P. -afie&a, -ao*^ 


-avro. 


-cd/iE-da, -tfb'&Ej -DVTCIL. 


2 Aor. S. £-rv7r "-o/z^, -ov, b91 


-£T0, 


T.V7T -DflCU, -??, 591 -rjTCLL, 


D. -6fj,Ed-ov, -eo&ov 


f -EG&TpS, 


-dtyzetfov, -7/C&OV, -?/ff#ov, 


P. -(5//e#a, -£0"i9-£, 


'OVTO. 


-faite&a) -7/(7$-£, -ovTat. 


Perf. S. Tc-tv -fi/iai, --(pat, 


-7Ti CZt. 


TE-TV-UflhoQ «j 5C, {/,°" 


"D. -fifie&ov, -<£#op, 


-(pd-ov, 


-fitiivu , ^rov, z/rov, 


P. -/z//£#a, -0#£, 


-fl/LLEVOl eIgl. 

598 


-[J.tlEVOl, (JUEVj TJTE, G)Gl. 


Plup. S. h-TE'Tv '/LijUTfVj -t/;o, 


-7TT0, 




D. -fifiEd-ov, -ft&ov, 


'(P'&TJV^ 




P. 'JUjLLE&a, -dd-E, 


•iijUEvm 7]<jav 

598 




P. P. F. S. T£-TV1p -OjMlt, -fy 


: £TG£ 7 


T£-TV1p» 


D. -OflS-d-OVj -EO&OVj 


-£(7#01>, 


"Wanting. 


P. -d/iE&a, -£a#£, 


-cwraz. 





IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 



185 



TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE— Continued. 



OPTATIVE. 

Terminations, 
1. 2, 3. 

-0///7/V, -010 , 591 -0£70, 

-oi/zei^ov, -OLG&OV) -oioftrrv. 

-olflS-fta, 'OLO$E % -OiVTO. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Terminations. 
2. 3. 

-OV, 691 -£CT1^6J, 

-EG&OV) -EG&CJV, 

-EG-fre, -EG-d-CDGCLV. 
592 


IXF. 

Term 

-EG-&CU. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Terminations. 
M. F. K 

N,-6fl£VOCj -7), -OVj 
Gr. -OfXEVOVj -?/f , -OV, 
B.-OfCEVG), -7?, -6J. 


■ 


/ 






-Ol/LLTjVj -OiO™ 1 -OiTO, 
-ofyi£l9w, -OICT&OV, -OIG^TTV. 
-0lfjL£$a y -OLG&E) -OiVTO, 


"Wanting. 


r • 

-£G"Q-ai. 


]tf . -OUEVOS, -I}, -ov, 
G. -OflEVOV, -7?g } -OV, 
D. -OUEVG), -7J) -6J. 


-ai/uyv, -aw?, 591 -airo f 
'aifie-ftoVj -atod-ov^ -aiod-r/i', 
-ai/LiEfta,) 'aio&E, -aivro. 


-CG-d-ov, -ao-d-ufv, 
-aod-E, -aG&oxjav. 


-aG#ai. 


JS.-ajuEvor,-?^ -ov, 

G. -dtlEVOV) -T]£ , -ov, 

D. -a/iEVG), -77, -6J. 


-oifiyv, -owf 91 -OiTO^ 
~oifiE'&ov 1 -oicd-ov, ~oio~&nv, 

-oi l U£'&a i -OCG&Ej 'OiVTO, 


-eg&ov, -toftoyv^ 
-EOtrEj -EoduGav. 


-EG"&ai. 


N. -OfiEVOC, -7j 1 -OV, 
G. -QjIEVOV, -7?C, -Of, 

D. -ofiEVG), -y } -w. 


-fifihoq eItjv, 'EitfC, -a?/, 509 

-HflEVG) , • EiVTOV, -EiTJTTJV, 

•fifiEvoi eiqfisv, -eItjte, -elrjoav. 


-ipo, -0#« ? 
-Q-&OV, -(bdov. 
-dd-£ y -(p-Q-QGav. 


-(pdai. 


X. -tiiihoc, -7, -0?-', 
G. -fifiEVOV, -r/r^ -ay, 

D. -JLijUEVU, -?;, -GJ. 






# 


-OljiyV, -Oiof 91 -OiTO, 

-oifiE-d-ov, -Oic&ov, -oiofryv, 

-olflS-fta, OiG'&E^ -OiVTO, 


"Wanting. 


-EG-d-ai. 


N. -OflEVOC) -7], ~0V, 

G. -ouevov, -yr, -ov 1 
D. -ofievu, -% -ok 



186 



TABLE OF THE VERB 



56S.-TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



INDICATIVE. 




SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Tense-root, Terminations, 


T-root. Terminations. 


I. 


2. 


3. 


1. 2. 3. 


Pres. S. tvttt -opai, 


V" 


-ETCU, 


TV7TT -CdflCLL, "#, 591 'TjTCLL, 


D. -OfLE'&OVj 


-£<7#W, 


-EG&OV, 


'G)flE-&OV, -7?(7#OV, -rjG&OV^ 


P. -o/ze#a, 


-eci^, 


•ovrat. 


-a)/ze#a, -7JG&E, -tdVTai. 


Imp. S. E-TV7TT -6fl7]V, 


-OV, 591 


•STO, 




D. -ojlle&ov, 


-ec^op, 


'iG&TjV, 




P. -6/zEda, 


-£<7#£, 


-OVTO. 




1 Fut. S. Tv<j)$f]o -ojllcll, 


■v, m 


-ETCLL, 


TV^TJG- 


D. -djued-ov, 


-EG&OV, 


-EG&OV, 


"Wanting. 


P. -ofiefta, 


-eg&e, 


-OVTCLL. 




2 Fut. S. TVTTTjG -o^cll, 


591 


-ETCLL, 


TVTTTJG- 


D. -ofie&ov, 


-EG&OV, 


•Ecd-oV) 


"Wanting. 


P. -6fjLE r &a 1 


-EG&E, 


-OVTCLL. 




1 Aor. S. e-Tv(pd- -tjv, 


-VQ, 


'% 


TV(p&-0), -7#, -#, 


D. 


-TjTOV, 


-7}T7]V, 


-7JT0V, -tfTOVj 


P. -77/zev, 


-T/TE, 


-rjaav. 


-fcflEV, -7/7T, • -6)07. 


2 Aor. S. k-rvTT ^v, 


-ve, 


'V, 


TV7T -6>, -TIC, -77, 


D. 


-rjTov, 


-7JT7JV, 


-TJTOV, -7/TOV, 


P. -7/^ev, 


-qte, 


-rjcaVj 


-GJjLLEV, -7}T£ 7 -6)GL, 


Perf. S. re-rv -/lljllcll, 


-TpCU, -' 


TTCLL™ 3 


TE-TV-fJLfl£VOg M, 7/f, tJ, 599 


D. ~jUjUE&OV, 


-(pftov, - 


•pd-oVj 


-U/UEVG) , TjTOV, 7/TOV, 


P. -/z^etfa, 


-<j>&£, 1 


IL/LLEVOL Slot. 
598 


-[IflEVOL UflEV, 7/TSj GJGL, 



Plup. S. E-TE-TV 'flflTJV, -IpO, 

D. -[/.jUE&OV, -0#W, 

P. -jUfL£&a t -<p*d-£ y 



-7TT0, 

-(p&TJV, 

-fljLLEVOL rjGav 
598 



P. P. F. S. TE-TVTp -O/LLCLL, 

D. -OflEd-OV, 

P. -SjUE'&a, 



591 



•r)™ L -ETCIL, 
-£G&OV } -EG&OV, 
-EG-&E, -OVTCLL. 



TF-TVl))' 



Wanting. 



IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



187 



TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE- Continued. 



OPTATIVE. 

Terminations. 
1. 2. 3. 

-oijirp, -OlO, b91 -OLTO, 
-OLflE'&OVj -OLG&OV, -OLG'O'JJV, 

-oifiE&a, -oiGde, -oivro. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Terminations. 
2. 3. 

-ov, -ecri^w, 

'EO&OV, -EGd-OVj 

-EO&E) -£G-&0)GaV. 
592 


INF. 

Term. 
-EG&at. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Terminations. 

; M. F. N. 

N. -6/uLEVOS, -7], -ov, 
Gr. -O/LIEVOV, -rjg, -ov, 

D.-o/iEVG), -y, -(f). 










-OL/XTJVj -OLO^ 91 -OtTO, 
-OLfX£'&OV 1 -ocod-ov, -OlGd-TJV, 
~OLjLL£$a, -OIG&E, 'OiVTO. 


"Wanting. 


-Eod-at. 


N. -OjLLEVOC, -V, -OV, 

G. -ofihov, -yg f -ov, 

D. -OUEVO), -??, ' -6). 


-OLfJLTJV, -OW, 591 -0£70, 
-oi/LLEdoV, ■ -OCG&OV, -OLO'&TjV, 

'oi/LLE&a, -olcSe, -OIVTO. 


Wanting. 


•EG&ai. 


N. -OflEVOC, -TJ, -ov, 
G. -OUEVOV, -?/£, -OV, 
D. -O/LLEVV, -??, -CJ. 


-e'iTJV, 'ELT/^ -EifJ 1 

-E17JTOV, -ElTJTTfV, 
-ElVjLLEV, -E17JTE, -ElVCCLV. 


-r/7l, ~VTG), 
-TjTOV, -7]TG)V, 

-r/TEj -rjTuoav. 


-fjvai. 


X. -eic, -eZcra, -ev, 
G. -tvTog : -ELCiig, -kvTog, 

D.-EVTl,, -EiGI), -EVTl. 


-ELTJV, -ELT]^ -ELT] r 

•EL7JTOV, -£U]T7}V. 
-E17J/LIEV, -ELTjTE, -El?]CaV. 


-TjTOV, -TJTOV, 

-.yre, -TjTcoGav. 


-Tjvai. 


X. -£Af, -ElGd, -EV y 
Gr. -EVTOg, -ELGTjgj -EVTOg^ 
D. -EVTl, -ELOri, -EVTL. 


•fijihog eIijv^ -Eiqg, -eZ/7, 599 

-jLLLLEVCJ , -EL7]TOV ) -eI^TI/V, 

-flflEVOt EirjjlEV, -EL7/TE, -ElTJGaV. 


-o&ov. -diraw, 

i 7 ; 7 

-0#£", -ti&cdGav. 


-od-ai. 


X. -IJfMVOg, -T], -OVj 

G. -juuEvov, -?/C, -or, 

D. -UUEVG). -Tj, -Cl). 










-oifjLTJV, -OtO, -OLTO, 
•oiflpfroV, -OLG&OV, -OLC&7JV, 
•OlflEfta, 'OCG^Ej -OIVTO. 


Wanting. 


-EG&ai. 


X. -OflEVQC, -7/, -ov, 

G. -ofiEvov, -7]g, -ov^ 

D. -O^EVC), -?/, -oJ. 



188 



CONTRACT VERBS. 



569.-C0NTRACT VERBS.-i*«. 



Present 


TCJJL 




<p li- 


dyX- 




S. 


do 


-O 


eu 


•O 


6o 


-O 






aeig 


-ft 


eeig 


-elg 


deig 


-olg 






aei 


'9 


est 


-ei 


del 


-Ol 




D. 














Ini 


derov 


-drov 


eerov 


-elrov 


derov 


-ovrov 






aerov 


-arov 


eerov 


-elrov 


oerov 


-ovrov 




P. 


aojuev 
dere . 


-OjieV 

-are 


io/Liev 
iere 


•ovjuev 

-elre 


oofiev 
dere 


•ovfiev 
•ovre 




~sT 


dovoi 


-OGL 


iovGi 


-OVGL 


dovGi 


'OVGL 




da) 


-6) 


€0) 


-O 


do 


•o 




D. 


6ys 

dy 


"9$ 


£ys 




dyg 
d-g 


•olg 
-ol 


Subj. 


dTJTOV 


"drov 


irjrov 


-ijrov 


oiyrov 


-orov 




P. 


arjrov 
dofiev 
d?jre 
doGi 


-arov 
-ofiev 
-are 

-OGL 


eqrov 
eofiev 
erjre 

koGL 


-rjrov 

-OjLteV 

-yre 

-OGL 


dqrov 
oouev 
orjre 

OOGL 


-orov 
-ofiev 
•ore 

-OGL 




S. 


doLfJLL 


-o/il 


k.Ol\JLl 


-OlflL 


OOLflL 


-OlflL 






aoig 


-vs 


k0LQ 


-oig 


ooig 


-ocg 






aoi 


-G) 


eoi 


'01 


GOt 


-01 




D. 








- 






Opt. 


doirov 


-drov 

i 


eoirov 


-olrov 


ooirov 


•olrov 






aOLTTJV 


-orrjv 


eoirrjv 


-otrrjv 


ooirjjv 


~oir7]v 




P. 


aotfiev 
doire 


-tpfiev 

-ore 

i 


eotfiev 
eoirz 


-oijuev 
•olre 


ootfiev 
doire 


•oifiev 
-olre 






aocsv 


-oev 


eotsv 


-olev 


dotev 


-olev 




S. 


as 


-a • 


ee 


-EL 


oe 


-ov 






aero 


•arc) 


eero 


-eiro 


oero 


-ovro 


Imp. 


D. 


aerov 
aerov 


•arov 
-drov 


kerov 
eerov 


-elrov 
-eirov 


oerov 
oerov 


-ovrov 
-ovrov 




P. 


aere 


-are 


eere 


-elre 


oere 


-ovre 






aeroGav 


-aroaav 


eeroGav 


-etroGav 


oeroGav 


-ovroGav 


Inf. 




dew 


-qv 


eetv 


-elv 


dew 


-ovv 




M. 


dov 


-OV 


eov 


-OV 


6ov 


-ov 


Part. 


F. 


aovaa 


-oGa 


eovGa 


-ovGa 


6ovGa 


-ovca 




K 


dov 


-ov 


tov 


-ovv 


6ov 


-ovv 



I Imperf. 


irtfx- 




£<p 


d- 


idrjX- 




S. 


aoi> 


-ov 


eov 


•ovv 


GOV -OW 




D. 


aeg 
ae 


-ag 
-a 


eeg 
ee 


-etg 
•ec 


oeg -ovg 
oe -ov 


£nd. 


derov 


-drov 


, eerov 


-elrov 


oerov -ovrov 




P. 


aerrjv 
dofxev 
dere v ; 


-ar?/v 
-ofiev 
-are 


eerrp 

£o/Ll£V 

iera 


-eirijv 

-OVjU£V 

-elrs 


oerijv -ovrrjv 
( 6o/iev -ovfiev 
dere -ovre 






aov 


-ov 


eov 


-ow 


oov -OVV 



CONTRACT VESBS. 



189 



CONTRACT VERBS.-^^ and Passive. 





rt/j.- 


<p 


£/- 


drjA- 


doixai 


-cjfiai 


EG/MLC 


-OVfiai 


oojuat 


'OVIACLL 


ay 


-a 


ey 


'V 


dy 


-oi 


asrai 


-arac 


EETCLL 


-Eirai 


dsrac 


-OVTCLL 


ao/ied-ov 


-6/bLed-ov 


EOflE$OV 


-OVflE'&OV 


oofiE-ftov 


-OVjUE^OV 


dcc&ov 


-CLG&OV 


EEG&OV 


-eIgS-ov 


OEG&OV 


-OVG'&OV 


dsG&ov 


-CLG'd'OV 


EEG&OV 


-EIG&OV 


OEG-&OV 


-OVG'&OV 


aojLie&at 


-cjfie&a 


£OJLl£&a 


-obfi£'&a 


oojUEd-a 


-ovfiE-fta 


deads 


-CLG^E 


EEG&E 


-ELG'&e 


OEG&E 


-OVG&E 


aovrat 


-oyvrai 


EOVTCU 


-ovvrai 


oovrai 


-ovvrai 


doiiac 


-G)/LLCU 


ECJfiai 


-(jfiai 


doLiac 


-cjjuac 


ay 


-a 

« 


ey 


'V 


6y 


•01 


CLTjTai 


-arac 


£7]~ai 


-r/rai 


dqrai 


-oral, 


acjiizdov 


-(JjLLE'&OV 


£G)jbL£'&OV 


-&/LLE-&OV 


OG)jLl£&Ol> 


-(D/LLE&OV 


djja'&ov 


-aG-&ov 


E7JG&OV 


-T/G^OV 


6rjG$ov 


-G)G$OV 


drjoftov 


•aad-ov 


ETJG'&OP 


-yG^ov 


drjaftov 


-CJG&OV 


acdfiefta 


.G)us$a 


EOUE&a 


-(bjUE&a 


ocdtiEfta 


-fafiE'&a 


drjG$£ 


-aGd-e 


E7/G&E 


•TJG&S 


drjad-e 


-CJG'&E 


acjvrai 


-CJVTCll 


ECdvrai 


-OVTCU 


dovrai 


•cjvrac 


aoijUTjv 


-G)jU7]V 


EOCLIT/V 


-oiinjv 


ooifirjv 


-oifir/v 


aoco 


-G)0 


£010 


-QLO 


6010 


-oco 


CLOLTO 


-tiro 


£0170 


-olro 


dotro 


-olro 


aoi/ug$ov 


-(jue&ov 


EOifjiE'&OV 


-OiflE'&OV 


OOljUE'&OV 


-OLLIE'&OV 


doiG&ov 


-&G&OV 


EOLG&OV 


-OIG&OV 


OOLG&OV 


-o~ig&ov 


aotGd-rjv 


-cSad-Tjv 


EOtG^rjV 


-oig&t/v 


OOLG$T}V 


-OLGd-rjv 


aoi[iE$a 


-(jfiefia 


EOLflE^a 


-oijUE&a 


ooifiE^a 


-OtflE'&a 


doLG'&E 


-Cjg$e 


eoigSe 


-0~lG$£ 


ooiGds 


-oIg^e 


aoivro 


-tivro 


EOIVTO 


-diVTO 


OOLVTO 


-olvro 


dov 


-G> 


EOV 


-OV 


6ov 


-OV 


aeGd-o 


-dG&tj 


EcG&G) 


-ELG&G) 


_ OEG&O 


-OVG-&0) 


deG&ov 


-CLG^OV 


eegS-ov 


-eIg^ov 


6eg&ov 


-OVG-ftoV 


aeG&ov 


-aGd-Qv 


EEG&QV 


-ELG&CJV 


0£G$G)V 


•OVG&QV 


dsG&e 


-aGds 


£SG&£ 


-eIg&e 


6EG&E 


-OVG&S 


asGd-QGav 


-aG'&coGav 


EEG-d-COGOV 


-dG-d-QGav 


OEGd-QGav 


-ovG-d-oGav 


deG^-at 


-dc^at 


EEG-frat 


-EiG^ac 


dsGd-at 


-ovGifrai 


aofzevog 


-ofisvog 


eSuevoq 


-oi'/iEvog 


oojUEvog 


-ov/uevog 


aofievij 


-QjLLEVTj 


EOflEVTJ 


•OVflEVTj 


OOUEVTJ 


-OVfl£V7J 


aofievov 


-(OjLLEVOV 


eSjuevov 


-OVflEVOV 


OOflEVOV 


-OVflEVOV 





irtfi.- 


i 


d- 


£tyX- 


adjUTjv 
dov 


-cdfirjv 

-6) 


EOfjLTjV 
EOV 


-OVflTJV 
-OV 


odjiijv 
dov 


-OVflTJV 
-OV 


asro 


-aro 


££70 


-eIto 


dsro 


-OVTO 


a6/LL£$OV 
d£G&OV 


•(D/LLE-&OV 
-CLG&OV 


EOUE'&OV 
EEG&OV 


-OV(l£'&OV 
-E~lG$OV 


od/iE'&ov 

OEG&OV 


•OVIJ.E'&OV 
-OVG&OV 


a£G$Tfl> 

a6fi£$a 

d£G&E 


-aG$7p> 
•6/LtEd-a 
-aG-d-e 


£EGd-7]V 
EGjJLEfta 

£eg$e 


-£LGd"/JV 

-OV/LLE&a 

-EIG-&E 


OEG-&TJV 

o6u£&a 

6EG&E 


-ovG$rjv 
-ob[i£&a 

-OVG&E 


dovro 


-0)VTO 


eovro 


•OVVTO 


QOVTO 


-OVVTO 



190 ON THE THREE VOICES. 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE 

VOICES. 

570. — The following observations will point out more 
particularly, certain special forms which frequently 
occur, and require explanation. Further information re- 
specting these and other changes will be found in the 
table of dialects which follows. See 603. 



Active Voice. 

OPTATIVE. 

571. — In the optative inoo&, instead of the usual 
terminations, -o^c, -oe<r, -o<, &c, the Attic dialect has 
the following : — 

SINGULAR. - DUAL. PLURAL. 

-oirjV) -OLTjZj -oc7) • -orjyrov, -onJT"qv * -ooy/jisv, -oirjre^ -ofyvav. 
This form is also used by Ionic and Doric writers. 

572* — In the optative of the first aorist active, instead 
of the common termination -at[ii y -arc, -ar, &c, the AEolic 

has as follows : — 

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. 

-era, -ecac y -ece • -scaroy, -etdriqy ' -s(afiev 9 -ecare, -eiav* 

The Attics, as well as the Ionians and Dorians, use this 
form in the second and third persons singular, and in the 
third person plural. 

IMPERATIVE. 

373. — In the third person plural of the imperative 
in Attic writers, the termination ovrwv is more common 



OK THE THREE VOICES. 191 

than (raxrav ; thus, in the present, Tu-itrov-wv for to7zt(tw- 
eav. For other varieties, see Table of Dialects, 603, 604. 
This form is also met with in Doric writers. 

INFINITIVE. 

574. — The infinitive, in the ancient dialects, ended 
in i/ievat and ivat. It was changed, in the Ionic, into 
ettev ; and afterwards, the fi being rejected, was contracted 
by the Attics into etv. 

IMPERFECT AND AORISTS. 

575. — The JEolians and Dorians use a peculiar form 
of the imperfect and first and second aorists, 
which is made by adding the syllable xdv, to the usual form 
of the second person singular, and then inflecting them 
like the imperfect; thus, instead of eWr-ov, -^, -s, &c, it 
makes irunTefrx-ov, -s^ --, &c. ; in the 1 aor. lrb(paax-ov % e^-* 
&c, and in the second aorist irGne<Tx-o^ -ec, -e, &c. The 
same tenses in the middle voice, and the imperfect, in the 
passive, make iTUTrTe&x-ofiyv, (tu4'o.<jx-6ixtjv^ &c. 

Obs. 1. In pure verbs, the final vowel of the root takes 
he place of the connecting vowel in these forms; as, 

Obs. 2. This form is used only in the indicative 
mood; it usually rejects the augment, and is scarcely to 
)e found, except in the singular number and third person 
Jural. It is used only to express repeated action. 

FUTURE, ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 

The future in the dialects has the following vari- 
eties : — 

5 76. — From futures in aVo>, Lew, from «!>, iZ<* (root ad, 
#), the Attics often drop <r, and then contract; as, frpdZw, 



192 ON THE THREE VOICES. 

Pifia(a)w, $i$u} ; or inflect the form as if contracted, xoptZa> 9 

xo iM(Tw^ xo/Ata)) e?<r, el, &C. 

57 7*— -Futures in (<j(o from do regularly drop the <j ; 
as, reldo^ reXi(<7)(0) reAcb. So, £ Ad (jrja), lXda>, £X<o {kAauvco^ 
root iAdio), and ofioffofiai^ o/j.oo/iac {o[jyo[it), 

578. — Attic Futures in ceo are inflected like con- 
tract verbs in £<o (541 or 569); thus, -£<£>, -teiq 9 -eel ; tslrov, 
&c. 

579* — 2 is sometimes omitted from the future active 
and middle of pure verbs, especially among the poets, 
even when cuo is preceded by a long vowel or diphthong ; 
as, present yi<o^ future yzbaio, or yeow. 

580. — -For <?(0) the Doric termination is $<o ; as, yeAd$(o y 
for ysAd(T(o. 

581. — Verbs in fxw^ vco y have the future Ionic in i<o 
uncontracted (see 601) ; as, ve/iia* for vefiw ; [isvita for 

582. — Verbs in />w, in Homer, commonly insert <r ; as, 
opaco for 6pw, I will excite; sometimes also verbs in Aa>i 
as, e'A(7(o from eAw j xiAau) from xiAAto. 

583. — In some wiwte,2xA more especially, liquid 
TOOiS 9 a future is formed sometimes as from a pure 
root ; as, doxtjaa) (late) for do£a) (root <5ox), and ftaAAijGio and 
yaipyjco) from fidAAa) and yaipio (as if from ftaAAe and yatpe). 

So, roTZTfjao) for TU(p<O t 



PERFECT INDICATIVE. 

5 84. — Some verbs suffer a syncope in the perfect f 

thus, 

xaAiio I call xaAi<j(o xexdAyxa xixAyxa 

In like manner deddjiyxa didfiyxa 

xexdjuqxa xixjj.7jxa y &c. 



ON THE THREE VOICES. 193 

585. — Pure roots, besides the perfect in *?xa, make 
some perfect forms without the connecting vowel ; as, $aa> 
(/3a:W), perfect /Si/ftyxa, but also /?e/2a-a, /?£/3a-a/*£v, fig/la/iev, 
participle fiefiawq, fieftwq ; zXdo)^ perfect zizXyxa, but also 
zizXaa^ zezXd-a/xev^ zizXafiev, zezXdvac. 

586. — Of the vowels thus brought together, the latter 
is sometimes rejected; as, 

PeprjxatLev fisftda/JLev by syncope ftiftafiw 

zezXrjxhat zezXaivat by syncope zezXavat 



PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, &c. 

587* — The subjunctive and optative of the 

pevfect are sometimes made by a periphrasis of the 
perfect participle and the verb el/M, I am; thus, subr 
junctive z£zo<pa)q <5, #c, # ; zezucpozs yrov, &c. ; optative 
T£Tu<pcbs etyv, e*y}s, eft?. And sometimes the indicative 
for a perfect' future ; as, zezuywq e<jop.ai y I shall have 
struck. 

PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 

588* — The participle makes sometimes a shortened 
or syncopated form of the perfect ; as, /5a, fiePyxwq, but 

fiefta-c&q and fisftwq, w<ja^ wq^ wzoq, &Q>. ; #va, T£#vtjx<£c, 
but zeftvewq, a)(Ta y wq ; <rza y iezyxcbq, but iazamq^ itrzdtq, 
(baa, wq. 

389* — The Zoflics insert e before wq ; thus, i<rz-swq, 
-ea><ra, -ewq, G. -ewzoq. The poets sometimes retain in these 
syncopated forms the ordinary feminine terminations ; as, 
kaze-wq^ -ola (not (baa). 

590» — The perfects in which these changes most 
frequently occur are zizJ^xa, ziftvyxa, pifiyxa, lazr^xa ; 
9 



194 ON THE THREE VOICES. 

and in these the regular form is more common in the 
singular, and the syncopated form in the dual and 
plural. 



Middle and Passive. 

SECOND PERSON SINGULAR 

591. — The second person singular of the present 
indicative originally ended in eaai. In the Ionic 
dialect, the g being rejected, it became eat, and was 
afterwards contracted into # (198) ; sometimes by the 
Attics into et ; and in the same manner, in other moods <* 
and tenses. In the subjunctive, rjaai became 7}ac y and then 
rj. In the imperative, the indicative imperfect, and second 
aorist, e<ro became so, contracted oo ; and in the first aorist 
middle a<ro became ao, contracted a). In like manner, in 
the second person singular of the optative, otao became 
oco, and, being incapable of contraction, remains in this 
form. 

IMPERATIVE, THIRD PERSON PLURAL. 

592. — In the third person plural of the imperative, 
the Ionic, Doric, and especially the Attic writers, use the 
termination wv instead of axrav ; thus, Tt>7rr&r#a>v, for tuk- 
T£<?&u)cav. See Table of Dialects, 603. 

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 

593. — The terminations of the perfect and plu- 
perfect passive cannot be completely represented in 
any paradigm of a mute verb, because the termination, 
combining with the final mute of the root, undergoes 
various euphonic changes, causing in these tenses an 
apparent, but not a real irregularity. For the termina- 
tions alone, see 508. 



ON THE THREE VOICES. 195 

S94* — The terminations preceded by a labial / }nute 9 
as in the paradigm, according to the laws which regulate 
the combination of consonants, combine with it as there 
exhibited; viz., 

S. rirop,fxai (64.) rirucpat (61.) Tiro-Krai 

D. TerbfJLfie'&ov (64.) r£ru<p#ov r£ro<p$ov (56, 72.) 

P. reruiJLfJLe&a (64.) r£ru<pd-£ rerofifiivot eiac f 

595* — Preceded by a palatal mute, they combine as 
follows : — 

S. XiXeyfiat XiXsgat (62.) XJXexrac (56.) 

D. XeXiy^ov XiX^ov X£Xey#ov (56, 72.) 

P. XeXiyfied^a XiXeyfts XeXay/itvot elai 

396. — A lingual mute before p. or a lingual 
becomes t, and before a is dropped; as, 7ri7zec^-/xat y -inzia- 
/iat 9 Tziizeid-aat Tzixetaai^ izi-eid-rai Tziizziarai ; thus, 

S. Tzi^et^fiai (66.) Tziizetaat (63.) TtTzstarac 

D. TZZTZsiGfied-OV 7z£-z£ia&ov 7z£iz£iad-ov (63.) 

P. 7re7re((r/ie&a iziizetad-s nexetafiivot eici 

597* — Liquid verbs in X or p (as, trceX, <p$£tp) add 
the perfect passive endings without change ; as, £<p#ap-fxai, 
k'araXaai : except that ad- drops a euphonically ; as, earaX- 
aftov earaX&oV) £<pdapa&£ e<pd-apd-e. Those in ,u insert r t before 
the terminations (549, Exc). Dissyllables in e<W, *W, 
yvw, reject v (550), and annex the terminations without 
change. 

N, when retained before ^, is assimilated / as, <pav^ 
7z£<pafi-p.ai : or changed into a ; as, nicpaauai : and before ad- 
is rejected ; as, n£<pav-ad£ 9 n£<paad£ : thus inflected : — 

S. 7r£<papLfiai y or 7z£<paafxat izicpavaai iziwavrai 

D. 7:e<pd/ifjLe#ov i:£<paai±£dov Tzi<pavdov 7t(<pavdov 

P. Tcewdrj.fie&a Tzz<paap.s$a 7:£<pav&e iz£<paaii£vot eiai 



196 ON THE THREE VOICES. 

Note. — Before the terminations beginning with <ri9-, v sometimes 
remains, and a is rejected; as, irktyavd-ov iretyav&E) &c, for Trtyaa-frov, 
iretyaad-e, &c. 

598. — In the perfect and pluperfect, third 
plural, of mute and liquid verbs (except some 
dissyllables in e«W, eW, uvco — 553) the terminations vrai 
$nd vto cannot coalesce with the root; hence the perfect 
participle with elffi and j^av, is substituted ; thus, tztujul- 
fiivot (a:) eJW, for riruTzvrai ; rJYyeXixivoi (at) eiai^ov rjYyeXvTai, 
In pure verbs, this periphrastic form is unnecessary, as 
the terminations vrai and vro readily unite with the char- 
acteristic VOWel of the root; as, rtfxa^ reriixfj-vrai ; <pde, 
&7:e<piXri-\>To. So with those liquid verbs which drop v 
before the terminations of the perfect; as, rev, rav, Tira(v)- 
vra:; xpiv^ x£xpi(y)-rai (549). 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE OF PERFECT PASSIVE. 

599. — The subjunctive and optative are distin- 
guished from the indicative only by the niood-voivels. 
Hence, there being no mood-vowels in the perfect passive, 
it is necessary, as in the third plural indicative, to resort 
to the verb eipX with the perfect participle t£tu/jl/jl£vo<; a>, 
efryv, in the paradigm of the verb (568). 

Some pure verbs attach the subjunctive and optative 
terminations directly to the radical vowel ; as, iz£<pikrj-p.ai 9 

7te<pik-u)[xai) -Ke<pilfji±T)v ; (xrcc) xexraJ/jLou, xsxt^utjv, and X£xtwjjlt]v ; 

(/£Va) fJiijlVCDfJLOU) JA£fJLV7JJUL7)V. OY fJL£jJ.\><l)fJL7]V. 

So Homeric forms, /xeyxvcy/xetfa, opt. 3 pi. XeXuvro tyeXucvro), 
xixptTO, &c. 



OX THE THREE VOICES. 197 



Ionic and Doric Forms. 

600. — In the Ionic and Doric dialects, v before -rat 
and -ro, in terminations of these tenses in the third person 
plural, is changed into a, so that vzai becomes arm ; and 
vro y aro i thus, XiXuvrat becomes XeXvazai ; kiXovro^ XeXvazo^ 

&c. 

Obs. 3. A labial or a palatal mute before arm and aro, 
for vrcu and vro, is changed into its own aspirate ; as, 
rezixp-arai^ XeXiy-arat^ for rerun-vra^ XeXiy-vTai^ &c. 

Obs. 4. As the periphrastic rsrofi/iivot etei is used to 
avoid the cacophony of the regular termination, riru-vrat 
(598), the change of u into a renders this periphrasis in the 
indicative unnecessary. Thus, for zeruftfiivoi el(n\ we have 
Tezv<parai • for XeXey/iivot zigi^ XeXiyarat^ &c. 

Obs. 5. In lingual roots, as d or #, the radical con- 
sonant is sometimes then restored ; as, axeod^co {axeoad)^ 
Ionic l<J'/.£oddo.Tai • 7rA^#, Ionic r^TzXrfiazai^ for 7reizXrj(Tfii>oc 
elciv. 

Obs. 6. In pure verbs, r\ or et before /j.ac is usually 
changed into e before the Ionic azat and aro ; thus, TiewiX- 
rjvrat and -tjvto are usually changed into r^ipiX-iarai and 
-iaro. In like manner, a before azat and aro is changed 
into e, to avoid the duplication of the a • thus, d^aTtiravra^ 

from avaTzerda), becomes dva-e-iaTa:. 

Obs. 7. In like manner, v before the termination ro 9 
seldom before r&t, in the indicative and optative of the 
other tenses, but never in the subjunctive, is changed into 

a; thus, for totlToivto^ we have ronrotaro' for yivotvru^ 

yevotaroj &c. So also in verbs in pa ; as, n^iarai for 
ri^svrat ; laziazai for laravTai. In these forms, a and o 
before v are usually changed into s; as, ZfiouXiaTo^ for 

kftouXovTO^ &c. 



198 DIALECTS OF VEERS IjS" a> AND /At. 



DIALECTS OF VERBS IN 6) AND (iu 

601. — A principal difficulty in learning Greek, arises 
from the variety of terminations in verbs, accord- 
ing to the different dialects. These can hardly be 
reduced to any general principles ; but a pretty clear idea 
of them may be formed from the following table. It must 
be observed, however, that many of the same terminations 
occur in all the dialects, although that one only is mentioned 
in which they are most usual. Besides the personal end- 
ings, of which this table chiefly consists, the lonians used 
to insert a vowel before the last syllable, which the poets 
often changed into a diphthong ; as, subj. 2d aor. active or 
passive tuxw, I. runico, P. ruTzeiu). So ipvy-tlv^ I. <poy-htv ; 
po-coGi^ I. fio-6w<TL ; o/?-ac, I. 6p-daq. But as this does not 
affect the inflection of the final syllable, it is not noticed 
in the table. (561, Obs. 4.) 

602* — Those moods and tenses of the middle and the 
passive voice, which agree in termination with the active, 
and are not here specified, are subject to similar changes, 
in the different dialects, with those having the same ter- 
minations in the active voice. The same is true respecting 
the terminations of verbs in pt ; so that this table is gen- 
eral^ applying to the terminations here specified, whether 
they belong to verbs in a> or /xc. The dual is omitted in 
the table, as it but seldom occurs. For other changes by 
dialect, see 570-600. 



DIALECTS OF VERBS IN o) AND tu. 199 

A Table exhibiting the most usual Dialects of the Termi- 
nations of Greek ~Verbs. 

603.— Active "Voice. 

FINITE MOODS, 
Singular. 

1 Pers. -77/xr, iE. -epfii ; D. -eipx and (if from dw) 

-OLJJ.L • aS, Tl&-e/JLflt 9 for -7]{ll • 7(TT- 

a/jLt y for r i<JT-rjfii„ 

~eiV) L" -£«, D. A. -^ ; as, hezyv-y, for 

-oT/jtf, A. -onjrv, D. -w^v; as, <pik-oir}v, for 

-t>7,tt£. 

-£/*', A. -c^v ; as, Tifi-w-qv, for -w/z: # 

-uojv, A« -w^v; as, did-wrfa for 5r5-o6yv; 

and so on through all the per- 
sons. 

2 Pers. -etc, D. -es, ^E. ->j<?; as, d/jJZy-ec, for -£*£• 

-a?-, -^<r, A. -a<7#a, -7j<7#a; as, tcp-r^a, for 

-^«r; o*d-a(T&a 9 contr. ol<j&a, for 
o7oa<r. 
JE. A. -e:ac ; as, Tb(p-£iaq 9 for -«!£. 

A. D. -#<r ; as, c>o:r^£, for -5^ 
^>res. D. -e, iE. -rj ; as, Tu-T-r Jy for -«. 
plup. A. -^, L -e£ ; as, hzTb<p-r h for -er. 

^E. A. -£^ ; as, TV(p-£ie 9 for -ar. 

L -r^t\ as, TUTzr-ycri, for -#. 

^* "^j "5 5 as > °P~fh f° r "?• 
D. -r: ; as, r#^-r:, for -<r:. 





-ats, 


• 


"^ 


3 Pers. 


' ei > 




-a:, 




-# 5 




-s -?> 




-<7f, 


1 Pers. 


-/ISV, 



Plural.- 
D. -joe? ; as, Ti)7zro-(ieq 9 for -#ev 5 

TO<p-oo t aeq or -edfisq, for -o/jlsv • 
^peA-eD/zes, for -ou/jlsv ; SiqA-oupLes, 

for -OUfJLSV. 



200 



DIALECTS OF VERBS IN <o AND fit. 



1 Pers. -i^ev, 

2 Pers. -^re, 

3 Pers. ~<n r 



3 Pers. -<rr, 



A. -juev ; as, Tu<p&et'fi£v, for ru<p&et« 

A. -re ; as, ru<p&et-T£ 9 for ruy&et- 

7}T£. 

D. -vn ; as, (fjdrjx-avTt, for -a<7£ ; e^- 
o>vn, for -«><n ; Xiy-ovTi, for ^f- 
ou<n ; rek-euvrt, for -ot)<n • ^cA- 
oovTi) for -o£5<n ; T^-evrc or -7jvTt 9 
for -e?(7£ ; dtd-wvrt, for -outre. 

B. into v ; as, Tiru<p-av, for -oc<n. 
-a<n, -D<rc, -e?<n, I. -iaat^ -uatrt^ -^a<n • as, detxv-vaaty 

for -D<7* ; Titi-iaai, for -e?<n. 
I. -£6xr:, -oaat^ D. -oTtf! ; as, &$-0a<7£j 

for -oval ; <ptXi-ot<rt, for -oixrt. 
B. -o<rav ; as, i<T%aZ-0Gav, for -ov. 
-e(rav, -7]<ra\> % -ocrav^ -uxrav^ P. -ey, -av, -ov, -wv 5 as, r/#- 

ev, for -e<rav 5 ed-ov^ for -otfav 5 

£^V-WV, for -tOGCLV. 

A. L -etfav ; as, ellyjy-eGav^ for 

-e£<rocy. 
^E. A. -&(rr y as, T£$v-a<rt 9 for -TJxacrc. 
JEt. A. -e:ay ; as, rvcp-etav, for -arev. 



-overt. 



-ov 



-et(Tav 9 
-TJxatTt^ -axaat^ 



1. 



-ara/<rav. 



^. 3. 3. 3. 

-£Ta)<rav y -£trwaav y -dzwaav^ -outwgolv- 
A. into 



1. 2. . 3. 

-dvTwv^ -dvrwv, -owvrwvj as, tu^- 

dvrwv^ for -drioffav ; As^-ovrwv, for 

* -iruMrav 5 Xo7T-ouvrwv y for -etrwffav. 



-dov 9 contr. -wv, 



', contr. -wv, ) 

, ~ }- D. I. -et>v ; as, waTT-ew, tor -a>v. 
, contr. -ouv, J 9 9 a 9 



DIALECTS OF VERBS IN co AND fit. 24)1 



INFINITIVE. 

-££v 3 -ivaf, I. -£/x£v, A. D. -i/ievat, -euv, iE. -ev, 

-£v ; as, iXd-ipLsvatj for -e«v ; 
aLjiiky-ev^ for -££v ; rtd-efiev and 
-ifievat, for -s'var. 

-ac, A. D. -ifievat ; as, TWp-ifievai, for 

-av, A. D. -dtxevai) -jjv, JEi.- -tjv, -07c, -a«^; 

as, Cjjjv, for fav. (559, (95s. 2.) 

-oDv, A. D. -o/xevocf, E. -euv, -<5v, i£. -0?C, 

-oTv ; as, pcy-wV) for -oDv. 

PARTICIPLES. 
-ouffOj D. -oiaa^ -eucra 5 as, Car-eD^a, f r 

-as, -a<ra, -av, D. -a:?-, -ar^a, -a» ; as, fiiip-ai^ for 

-a?, &C. 
-7]x-d>s y ) -t>?a, -o^, A. -cy^, -<5<7a, -<yc ; as, £<tt-g>c, for 
-ax-ws^ ) -Tjxwq (588-590), I. -emq. 

-<ac, -<3S. *»v ; as, ts-uv-wv, Q. -ovroq^ for 



604.— Middle and Passive. 

FINITE MOODS. 
Singular. 

1 Pers. -of±at y f.D. -ootiat ; as, rucp-oujiat, for -ofiat. 

'Oujjlcu, D. -edfiat ; as, fia&-eu/iat 9 for -ovfiai. 

-jJLTjv D. -/zav ; as, tToizTo-jiav^ for -/^v. 

2 Pers. -#, A. -er, I. indie. -eac y subj. -77^ ; as, 

fiouX-sc, for -#, &c. 

-ow, I. -eo, D. -£6> ; as, fidx-eu, for -ou. 

-o>, I. -ao; as, tluG-ao^ for -w. 

9* 



202 



CONJUGATION IN fit. 



Plural. 
1 Pers. -e#a, D. -e<r#a ; as, U6/j.-£(T#a, for -e#a. 

3 Pers. -vraCj -£Vo: eftn, I. -arat or -iarat ; as, xiarat, for 

xeivrat ; elpu-arat^ for -vra« ; XeXiy- 
-arac, for -yfihot eld (600). 
-vto, -^vor iytfav, I. -aro or -eWo ; as, Tzeuftoi-aro, for 

-o^ro 5 kyev-iaro^ for -ovro • lardX- 
arO) for -jiivot rjaav (600). 
-7]<rav y JE. -ev ; as, <5uv^#£?-£v, for -^<ra;> ; 

eTU<pd-ev y for -r}Gav. 
-waav, A. I. D. -wv; as, Xe£-d<r&-wv, for 



-^vac, 



INFINITIVE. 



D. -7J/JL£Vat y JEi. 

7jfisv 9 for -Jjvar. 



-jjaev 5 as, Xeupd- 



-oo[ievos y 



PARTICIPLES. 

D. ^E. -ebfievos ; as, (ptX-eufievos, for 
-ot>/z£vug. 



CONJUGATION IN fu. 

£0#. — Verbs in ju are formed from pure roots, 
as follows : — 

606. — The original terminations fit, en, n 
(modified into ^, cr, <n), are attached to the 
root, without a mood-vowel, and the radical 
vowel is in the singular lengthened ; as, 



<pa 



el-fii 



<pr r <; 



<pa-Tov 
£-<j~t6v 



CONJUGATION IN fit. 203 

607. — Regular verbs from roots in a, s, o, 
reduplicate the initial consonant with i in the 
present and imperfect ; thus, 

From Mm is formed ri-ftyfit I place 

S6a> didcofit I give 

But TzXioj makes Tziinzhqiit I Jill (74.) 

608. — Verbs beginning with a vowel, prefix 
t, which is called the improper reduplication; 
thus, 

From ioj is formed ?-^/« J send. 

Obs. 1. Also verbs beginning with gt or tzt prefix rough 
c; thus, 

From GTda> is formed 'l-ffryjit 

609.— -The reduplication is not used in verbs 
in vfic, nor in those whose radical primitive has 
more tlian two syllables ; thus, 

From Tdvu) comes xXd/it I hear 
Iffdaj ta-qixi I know. 

Likewise some other verbs ; as, 

tpau> <pftfd I say ', &c, 

Obs. 2. Some verbs which begin with a vowel repeat 
the first syllable, after the manner of the Attic redu~ 
plication (493) ; thus, aXfjiii and dXdX-qfit ; d^/u and 

dxd^7j/J.t \ OVTJ/Jtf, SvtVTjfJLC. 



204 CONJUGATION IN fit. 

Obs. 3. Some verbs add vo to the root before /ic, which, 
after a vowel (in a pure root), doubles the v ; as. 



deixcj 

apo> 

<7xedda) 



ROOT. 




Secx 


deix-vu-jii 


dp 


ap-vo-fiai 


(Txeda 


cxeddwufii 



610. — Verbs in fit liave but three tenses of 
this form ; viz., tlie Present, the Imperfect, and 
the Second Awist. The other tenses attach 
mood-vowels and follow the ordinary form in o. 
Verbs in v[m want the second aorist, and also the 
subjunctive and optative. When those moods 
are needed, they are borrowed from forms in vco. 

Obs. 4. Several verbs form only the second aorist 
according to this conjugation (468, Obs.) ; in such cases, 
verbs in uco have the second aorist in uv ; as, 







' 


ROOT. 


2d aor, 


paiva) 


from 


ftdu) 


pa 


Ifav 


ytyvmaxw 




yvoco 


yvo 


eyvwv 


3utu 






du 


k'duv 



Obs. 5. Many verbs of this conjugation are deponent, 
having only the passive form, while their signification is 
active; such are Suvajiat y I can; xeifiac, J lie; dc'C^ar, 
I seek; otopat 9 1 think 



THE TERMINATION. 205 



THE ROOT AND AUGMENT. 

611. — As before mentioned, the root of verbs in fit is 
lengthened in the singular, and remains short in the dual 
and plural. This is so in all the tenses ; as, 

do diduMTt idtd-o-Tov 

idtStDv idcd-o-aav 

Individual tenses present special exceptions ; as, 

eyvwv eyv&offav 

612. — The reduplication is found in the present 
and imperfect only. 

613. — The augment of the imperfect and second 
aorist is the same as in verbs in id. 



THE TERMINATION, OR PERSONAL 

ENDINGS. 

614:. — In the conjugation in a>, the terminations consist 
of two parts, the mood-vowels, and personal end- 
ings (495). In verbs in /it, the mood-vowels are wanting, 
and their place is supplied by the last letter of the root, 
which in a measure takes the place of the mood-vowel, 
and distinguishes the moods by the changes which it 
undergoes in combining with the personal endings. 

615. ~ The personal endings of these verbs have 
already been given in connection with the regular verb in 
w, as these are the primitive terminations, from which the 
others are derived. They are modified here, too, in the 
subjunctive and optative, as in the verb in w. We give 
again the terminations in a tabular form : — 



206 



THE TERMINATION. 



Primary Tenses. 

Sing, -/it -<; -at 

Dual. -tov -TOV 

Plur. -/lev -re 



616.— -Active Voice. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Secondary Tenses. 



-VTt 9 VGL 



-V 



-JJLSV 



-zov 

-re 



-T7]V 

-aav 



Sing. 
Dual. 
Plur. 



IMPERATIVE. 
-fa 

-TOV 



-TO} 
-TWV 

-raxjav 



INFINITIVE. 
-vat 



PARTICIPLES. 



611/.-- Middle and Passive Voices. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Primary Tenses. 

Sing. -p.ai -(rat -rat 

Dual, -jie&ov -ad-ov -g$ov 

Plur. -fiefta -<r$e -vtcu 



Secondary Tenses. 

-fJLTJV -go -ro 

-fie&ov -a&ov -a&Tjv 

-fie&a -cr&e -vro 



Sing. 
Dual. 
Plur. 



IMPERATIVE. 



-GO 

-ad-oy 



-G&wv 
-0&a)ffav 



INFINITIVE. 
-aft at 



PARTICIPLES. 
N. -jievos -fiivj] -fievov 



FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 207 



FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES 
IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 

618. — In the present and imperfect, through 
all the moods, prefix the reduplication in verbs 
that reduplicate ; and then— 

For the Indicative. 

619. — Rule. Change the short vowel of the 
root into its own long (527) in the singular of 
the present and imperfect, and (in verbs in a) in 
all the numbers of the second aorist, and then 
add the personal endings (615) ; thus, 

PRESENT. IMPERFECT. 2D AORIST. 

S. "(TTTj-flt -S -<TC 

D. "<rra — -row -rov 
P. ?<TTa-jiev -re -<jt 



ItTTfj-V -<r — 
l.GTa— -TOV -TTjV 

?<TTa-fAEv -re -aav 



£(TT7)-V -£ 

£(TT7} -TOV -T7]V 

eGTTj-fjiev -re -Gav 



Exc. 1. The second aorist in e, o (as, t<'#^, didwfii, 
and «V^)j k as tne s h° r t vowel in the singular. 



For the Subjunctive. 

620. — Rule. Change the final vowel of the 
root into the subjunctive terminations, q, tJj, y, 
&c. (506); thus, 

lffrr}fii y R. <rra- Subj. Pres. hrr-cu, -%$, -jj ; -<yrov, -£rov, &c. 

2 Aor. (JT-w, -jyc, -ft ; -iJTov, -rJTov } &c. 



208 FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 

Obs. — These terminations, in the subjunctive, combine with the regu- 
lar subjunctive terminations (506) the final vowel of the root, forming a 
sort of mixed vowel or diphthong, and consequently they always have 
the circumflex accent, as here. 

Mcc. 2. But verbs in wjii retain w through all the per- 
sons and numbers ; as, 

dtdwfi: from Sou), R. do, Subj. Pres. dcd~w, -a>c, -<p ; -a>rov, &C. 

2 Aor. d-aj, -a>£, -w ; -airov, &c. 



For the Optative. 

621. — Rule. Unite with the final vowel of 
the root the optative characteristic i, and add the 
secondary personal endings with yi prefixed; 
thus, 

Pres. IffTat-yv -7}<; -7), &c. rtftei-yv -TjS ->?, &c. dtdoi-rjV) &c. 
2 Aor. <TTai-rjv -7}q -7] 9 &c. #et-7]v -rjq -17, &C. <W-i?v, &C. 

For the Imperative. 

622. — Rule. In the present tense add the 
personal endings to the root ; but the second 
aorist generally lengthens the short vowel; 
thus, 

Present, ?0ra-#£, -rw, -rov, -row, -re, -Twtrav. 

2 Aorist, (TT7J-&1, -TW, -TOV y &o. 

Exc. 3. In the second aorist, -n'tf^, dlda)^ and <Vf, 
retain the short vowel, and add q instead of #i in the 
second person singular ; as, di-s, -rw ; -tov, -tojv, &c. ; &>-<r, 

-TW J -TOV, -T(OV y &c. 



FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



209 



For the Infinitive. 

623. — Rule. In the present tense, add the 
termination to the root ; and in the second aorist, 
commonly lengthen the short vowel ; thus, 



Present, lazd-vat. 



Second aorist, ari^-vai. 



Mcc. 4. In the second aorist, e of the root is changed 
into £*, and o into ou ; as, 



&el-vat 



el-vat 



dou-vat 



For the Participles. 

624. — Rule. Add the endings to the root, 
and then combine by the rales of euphony (73) ; 
thus, 



lard-vzq^ 


-vraa, 


- v , 


oombined 


[<7T-dS) 


-acra, 


-av. 


Tt&i-VTSy 


-VTGOl) 


"^ 




T!#-£fc, 


-sTcroL) 




Stdo-vTS) 


-vrffa.) 


-*> 




did-ouq. 


-OOGCt.) 


-ov. 


*detxvv-vTS) 


-vraa^ 


*i 




detxv-uS) 


-Dtfa, 


-uv. 



FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES 
IN THE MIDDLE AND THE PASSIVE 
VOICE. 

6%5. — Prefix the reduplication in the present 
and imperfect in verbs that reduplicate (607), 
as in the active voice; and then, in all the 
tenses— 



210 FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 



For the Indicative, Imperative, Infinitive, and 

Participles. 

626. — Rule. Annex the terminations (617) 
to the root ; as, 

Indicative, ?<rra-/*a£, -aai^ -raj, &c. Imp. ftfra-^v, -<ro, 
-to, &c. 

Imperative, fora-tro, -<r#w, -<7#ov, -<r#ajy, &c. 

Infinitive, lara-trd-at. 

Participles, lara-iievos, -p-ivr}, -fievov. 



For the Subjunctive. 

627. — Rule. Change the last letter of the 
root into the subjunctive terminations, co^ou, y, 
rjTou, &c. (507, and 620, Obs.); as, 



FtfT^/z:, R. (Tra- Subj. PreS. laz-miiat^ -#, -rjzat^ &c. 

2 Aor. <TT-a>jJLat y -f h -rjzai^ &c. 

JBxc. — Verbs in o>jy.t retain (o through all the numbers 
and persons, as in the active voice (620, Exc. 2) ; as, 

didoj/it, R. do- Subj. PreS. dtd-mfiat^ -w, -wzat, &c. 

2 Aor. d-a)fiat y -oi, -a>raj, &c. 



For the Optative. 

628. — Rule. Unite with the radical vowel 
the optative characteristic t, and add the second- 
ary personal endings ; as, 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN fit. . 



211 



lory/it, R. <rza- Opt. Pres. laTai-fxyv, -ao, -to, &c. 

2 Aor. (TrOLL-flT/V, -(TO, -TO, &C. 

Obs. — S is usually rejected in the second person singu- 
lar ; making — 

[(FTai-/17}y, -O, -TO, &C. (TTa{-jJ.7]V, -o, -to, &c. (631). 



629. — N". B. As the root of verbs in fit ends in a, 
e, o, or v, these vowels, combining with the final letters, 
cause the appearance of four different forms of termination, 
and for this reason four paradigms have usually been given, 
though there is in fact only one. The following tables will 
show that, in whatever vowel the root ends, still there is 
but one fundamental form of inflection. 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN J//.* 



630.— -Active Voice. 

PRESENT TEfrSE. 
Indicative Mood (619). 



?GT7) 

Tiftr) 
didio 
dsixvu j 



SINGULAR. 



> 



-fit -C -at 



IGTO. 

rid-e 
dtdo 
deixvu j 



DUAL. 



PLURAL. 



>. -TOV -TOV 



IGTOLGl 



-fiev -re 



< 



t id-eta i 

Sidouat 

^ deixvuat 



lor) 

Tt#) 



did 



-0) 



-0) 






SUBJUNCTIYE (620). 



-TjTOV -7/TOV 



-COTOV -OJTOV 



-wtiev -yT£ -wat 



-to/j.ev -core -wat 



* For the accents, see 563. 



212 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN fxu 



larai 
dtdoi 



Optative (621). 



-7]TOV -TjTrjV 



,633 



-7juev wv -7]Te -7)<rav 



Imperative (622). 



7<rra -M 


534 *< 








TL&e -re 635 * 
dtdo -#< 635 


y-TU) 




decxvu-^t 


J 








Infinitive (623). 




lard "^ 




TI&4 

dcdo 


\.-\>ac 




del 


xvu A 







-TOV 'TlOV 



-re -TwGa\> 



636 



Participles (624). 
l<TT-d<z -aaa -dv 

rt#-ei$ -eT(Ta -6v 
did-ou~ -ovgol -6v 
decxv-uz -oca -vv 



IMPERFECT TENSE (639). 
Indicative (619). 



C(7T7j 

Irifty} 

id{d(0 



> 



ideixvb _, 



-v ~q 



\ara 



ir&s 

idcdo 
Idecxvo 



y-TOV -T7JV 



-fiev 



■re -aav 



640 



The other moods in the imperfect are wanting. 



* 59, Obs. 5. 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN fit. 



213 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN MI. 
Active Voice. 



SECOND AORIST. 







Indicative Mood (619). 








SINGULAR. 


DUAL. 




PLURAL. 


eery 


) 


£<TT7] *j 






Uri 


[-, -, - 


e&e > -tov -ryv 


-fiev 


-T£ -oay 


eda) 


) 


v» 1 
£00 J 







640 



Subjunctive (620). 



(TV ) ~ 


W 


-V 


-7JTOV -7JTOV 


S -d> 


-w<; 


-<b 


-wtov -wtov 
Optative (621). 


crai ) 








$£l > -7]V 


-7]S 


-n 


-TjTOV -*.rJT7)V 


doc ) 









-W(l£V -TjT£ -W(Tl 
-W[l£V -(DT£ -0)61 



-7]fl£V -t]T£ -7JGOLV 




Imperative (622). 



-ZOV -TWV 



-T£ -Twaav 



Infinitive (623). 




Participles (624). 

(TTaq GTaaa ardv 

#£iq -&£taa #iv 

Sous dooaa Sov 



Note. — For the accents in these tables, as in the tables of the first 
conjugation, see 563. 



214 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN fit. 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN MI. 
<?<21.— Middle Voice. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Indicative Mood (626). 
singular. dual. plural. 

?<TTCL ^ 



rifts 
dido 

deixvo > 



> -fiat -a at -rat 



1<tt) 

rift ) 



WJJLat -7j -7jTOU 



-fxeftov -aftov -cftov 



Subjunctive (627). 

-(6/J.sftoV -Tjaftov^ &c. 



-jiefta -fffts -vrcu 



dtd -wfiai -<b -(brat -Wfxeftov -{baftov^ &c. 

Optative (628). 

-TO 



-w/iefta-'^dfte -aJvrat 
-wuefta -axrfte -aJvrai 



larai 

rifts i 
dtdoi 



Iffra 



rifte 
dido 
deixvo J 



-<jo™ -aftu> 



-fieftov -<rftov -cftrp 
Imperative (626). 

-aftov -aftwv 



-[ieft a -crfte -vro 



-trfte -crftaHjav 



Infinitive (626). 
lara 



Participles (626). 



rifts 
dido 
deixvo 



> 



-a ft at 



lard ^ 

Tlfti ' 

dtdo 
deixvo 



-jievoq -fiivr) -fievov 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 
Indicative (626). 



> 



-JJ.7)V -(TO 

-ro 



641 



-fieftov -aftov -Gft-qv 



-jiefta -<rfte -vro 



lard 
irtfti 
idido 
kdeixvb J 

The other moods of the imperfect are wanting. 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN fit. 



2L 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN MI. 
Middle Voice. 

SECOND AORIST. 
Indicative Mood (626). 



SINGULAR. 

lazd \ 

l$i >- -/JLTjV -(JO 

£36 ) 



-TO 



or) - 



fiat -7] -7jTat 
d -ajfiat -<I) -wzat 




-firjV -o (rfo 641 ) 



-TO 



era 

do 



DUAL. 
-fxed'OV -g$ov -g#7}v 

Subjunctive (627). 
-Wfied-ov -q(7#ov y &c. 
-d)fied-ov -0)<r&0V) &C. 

Optative (628). 

-fisftov -ffd-OV -G$Tp 

Imperative (626). 

-cr&ov -ff&WV 



PLURAL, 



-fie&a -<7#e -vzo 



-Wfiefta -axid-e -wvzai 



-f±e#a -<7#e -vzo 



-G#e -cftwaav 



Infinitive (626). 
azd 

#£ V-ff&at 
36 



Participles (626). 
<Tzd 

#4 y -JULSVOZ -fJ-ivlj -flSVOV 

do 



The present and imperfect passive are like the 
present and imperfect middle. The second aorist 
passive is wanting. 

Note. — For the other tenses of verbs in fit } see 643-650, and. for the 
dialects, 601-604. 



216 OBSERVATIONS OK VERBS IN fit. 

m 
« 

OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN fu. 

Active Voice. 

032. — The personal ending of the third person plural 
is properly v<n, which, combining with the preceding vowel 
according to the rules of euphony (73), becomes a<n, etai^ 

033. — In the optative, ^ is often dropped before the 
personal endings of the plural, making — 

-cufiev 9 -ours, -dlev 5 -e?/xev, -e?re, -slev ; -oT^tev, -orre, -olev \ 
instead of 

-afyfisV) -ai7]T£, -at7]<rav y -efy/Aev, &c. 

034. — Uttjiu has sometimes Igtt) for "crafti in the 
imperative ; and in compounds, era is commonly used 
for arrfti ; thus, avaara^ for dvaffrqftt ; izapdaza^ for izapaa- 
t£#c, &c. 

035. — So also r#fyuj, didajfit^ and 07/^, have sometimes 
Tiftstj dtdoo, ht 9 for rid-en, Stdoftt, l&fk ; but these are prop- 
erly contracted forms of the primitive verb with the 
reduplication, used in the Ionic and Doric dialects ; thus, 
TtMa)^ imperative tiftee, contracted rid-ei. 

030. — As in verbs in w (573), so also in those in fit, 
£\>t<dv is used for irwcrav in the imperative third person 
plural. 

037. — The primitive in w, with the reduplication, is 
sometimes used instead of the form in /*: in the present 
and imperfect ; thus, 

6SS.— PRESENT. 
Tiftiw, -ieiq, -iet, contr. -a>, -e?c, -e?, for r:Vfy/zj, -^c, -^, &c. 
[(TTaaj, -decs y -a££, -a>, -ac, -a, wry/it, -iqq 9 -yGtj &C. 

through all the moods. 



TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE. 217 

689.— IMPERFECT. 

frid-sov^ -eeq 9 -ee, contr. -ouv, -etq^ -e:, for irt&^Vj -^<r, -?y, &e. 

640. — The terminations -aaav^ -zaav^ &c, in the third 
person plural, are frequently shortened by syncope ; as, 
F<rrav, for laraGav ; eri&ev, for £r#te<rav; efiav 9 for eftyeav. 

Middle and Passive. 

641.- — In the second person singular of the imper- 
fect indicative, middle, and passive, a is often re- 
jected (the radical vowel being treated as a mood-vowel), 
and the concurring vowels contracted; thus, for^, for 
laraao ; rt&ou, for Tt#e<ro 9 &c. So in the present in- 
dicative, sometimes ftrrg, for "Gzaaat. Also in the second 
person singular of the optative, <? is rejected, but 
the vowels, being incapable of contraction, remain un- 
changed. 

64:2. — The same contraction takes place in the im- 
perative; but in the second aorist, &i<ro is contracted 
into &ou only in compounds ; as, xapaftou, ono&ou, &c. 



TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMI- 
TIVE. 

64:3. — Verbs in fit have only three tenses of that form ; 
viz., the present, imperfect, and second aorist. 
All the other tenses are formed as in the conjugation in 
to (514), and are correspondingly inflected; as, 

Ti#7}fii y from &ito, has fut. ^rjaoj^ &7J(Top.cu 9 &c. 
dtSa)/ic 9 Soajj d(6(rw 9 dw<ro[iai 9 &C 

teryfti) azdo) 9 <j~ij<jid 9 1 aor. e<Tnq<ra 9 &C. 

10 



218 TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE. 

Exceptions. 

644. — Future*— Some verbs occasionally retain the 
reduplication ; as, dtddxja)^ from dida)p.i ; and verbs from 
derivatives in vb<o and wua> form the future from their 
primitives ; thus, dewo/it, from dscxvow^has the future ost^to, 
from dzUu). 

643.— First Aorist, — 7Y%^, dldtop.^ and %^,have xa 
and xd'irjv instead of aa and <rd/nqv in the first aorist indica- 
tive ; as, 1 aor. £#^xa, i^xdfirjv ; edcoxa^ kdioxdfirjv^ &c. Ill 
these verbs, the other moods of this tense are wanting, 
and the forms e'dwxa, eftyza, are confined to the singular, 
the rest being supplied by the second aorist. 

646. — Perfect and Pluperfect Active. — Verbs 
in fit from dot commonly have ec before xa of the perfect ; 
those from dm have y or a; as, ridy/x^ from #£<», perf. 
z£#eixa\ l'<JT7){U 9 from ardoy^ perf. e&rrjxa^ or e&raxa. In 

these tenses, forn^e aspirates the augment, ixnperf. ?<rnjv 9 
perf. i(7T7)za } but 2 aor. eVr^v, and, except in the singular of 
the indicative, is syncopated / thus, first person plural 
k(jT7jxap.£V) by syncope, eera/iev, &c, infinitive iffTrjzivat, by 
syncope, iarwmt ; participle, as 588, 590. 

Obs.— The perfect active of lazruii has a present signifi- 
cation ; thus, £<jz7]xa y I stand, pluperfect §<mjxeiv 9 I stood. 
In the present, imperfect, future, first aorist active, it 
signifies to place^ to cause to stand. In the passive 
throughout, to be placed. The second aorist middle is not 
in use. 

647. — Passive voice. — The short vowel of the root 
remains short before a consonant in the passive voice ; as, 
dtdwfit, future passive do-$rj(Top.ai, first aorist ido-d-r^^ perfect 
dido-fiac, &c. But et before xa in the perfect active returns 
before fiat in the perfect passive ; as, perfect active ri&et- 
xa, future passive Te-ftujaofiai (58), perfect passive riftst-fiat. 



TABLE OF TENSES OF VERBS IJST fit. 



219 



648. — Tenses wanting. — Verbs in ^ being gen- 
erally from pure roots, want, like other pure verbs, the 
second future passive, the second perfect and pluperfect 
active, and the second aorist passive. 



049.-TABLE EXHIBITING- ALL THE 
TENSES OF VERBS IN ML 



Present. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 
1 Aor. 
i Aor. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 
Fut. perf. 



ACTIVE. 


MEDDLE. 


PASSIVE. 


"(TTTj/lt 


Hazafxai 


Haza/iai 


"(TZTJV 


idzdfnjv 


[(TzdfJLTjV 


(TTrj(T(0 


(TTTJGOflOLt 


GTad-rfGOfLdl 


£(TT7j(7a 


£<TT7]<Tdjl7}V 


iardd'Tjv 


earijv 


iffrdfirju 


=—. 


SGzrjxa or -axa 




iffra/xat 




i<TT7Jxew or elffTijxew 




kazd[r^v 








£az7}t;o[xat 



650.— Verbs in MI to be Conjugated. 



ffPivVUfJLt 

ITZZTjlll 

OVTjflt 

OflVUflt 

oXXo/it 

fTJflt 
xXdfJLl 
pC&VVUflt 



from 



rr 


I send 


crfiia) 


I extinguish 


^euya) 


Ijoin 


TZzda) 


ifly 


6via> 


I help 


S/JLOOJ 


I sicear 


7iAia) 


Ijillj hence nXydcj 


6X(uj 


I destroy 


<pdo) 


I affirm 


xXuo} 


I hear 


fi0Q) 


I strengthen 



220 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 

IN MI. 

051* — The irregtilar and defective verbs in 
fit are usually reckoned nine; viz., sI/m, Jam; el/a, 1 go / 
fyfit, I send / el )iai^ I clothe myself / e\aa^ I did set ; fjiiat, 
I sit / xeTpLcu, I lie down ; (py/it, I say ; and olda, J know. 
The parts in use are as follows : — 



S. 

D. 

P. 



652. — Eifiiy lam. 
Active Voice. 

PRESENT TENSE. 





Indicative. 




S. eifii 


elq or "el 


£<rr( 


D. 


larov 


Igtov 


P. idfiiv 


Subjunctive. 


elai 


s. z> 


h 




D. 


tfrov 


Tjtov 


P. W/ASV 


Optative. 


Sxrt 


S. efyv 


£17}$ 


e?7] 


D. 


£ 7 17]T0U 


eln]T7)V 


P. ecTfjfiev 


efrjre 


£i7]<rav 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participles. 


S(TO £<TT(D 


elvat 


M. wv 


£<TTOV £<JTO)V 


- 


F. ovaa 


ears eazwaav 




F. S» 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



22X 



S. h 

P. TjllZV 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



Indicative. 




T 


71 d T}V 


7}T0V 


r}T7)V 


yre 


tJgclv 



S. rjfirjv 
P. ^et?a 



Middle Voice. 

IMPERFECT TENSE. 
Indicative. 

7] GO 

716&0V 
7}G&£ 



71X0 

iJG&7}V 

7]VTO 



^ FUTURE TENSE. 

Indie, eeotxat) Opt. iffo(firju 7 Inf. e<jaG&at, Part. £<r6fievos 9 regt 



3 / 



653.-THE CHIEF DIALECTS OF eifiu 

Active Voice. 

PRESENT. 



1. 



Sing. elfii l D. kfifii^ 

gPlur. ttxfihj elfieg, 

P. £ ( w£v, eljuev. 

Sing. <5, I. e«, P. ela, 

Plur. <£^£v, D. ufies, 

P. eloyjiieVj elouev. 



elg. 



Indicative. 

2. 

", or el, I. Zeis, P. m, 



had 



£GT£. P. £T£. 

1 

Subjunctive. 
9?, 1. %, P. elyg. 

T]TE. 



3. 

£OT£, D. £^r^, £W. 



» / 

£JC7, 



,ut, D. kvri, 2& % lvri, 
evvri, P. laoy, iacai. 

% I. £??, ££??, TjCl, iTJCl^ 
P. £4^(7£. 

WCT^ I. ecjat. 



' *■' * *~." 



222 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



Sing. eIttv, I. eoi/u. 
Plur. etyfiev, I. eIjllev, 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Optative. 

slqg, I. Eoig. 
U7JTE, I. elre. 

Imperative. 

ego, P. eggo 7 A. lofii. 
ears. 



eItj, 1. lot. 
elqcav, I. A. elev. 



EGTO. 

EGTOGCLV, A. EGTOV, 
P. eOTTGW. 



Infinitive. 

el^ai, I. EfLEVj EiflEV 1 D. IflEVaij yflEV, TJflEg, El/LtEg, JEt. EjLlflEVaij P. EflfJLEV. 

Participle. 



M. aw, I. e6vj M. slg. 



Sing, ^v, I. la, #a, P. I vv, 

slqv, fffVj eov 1 ?pv, 

EGKOV. 

Du. 

Plur. fjfJLEv, D. J/jusg, P. £^£i>. 



Fern, ovca, I. fovea, 
D. euca, koiGa, lacaa, 
i£. £l<ra, faoxz. 

IMPERFECT. 
Indicative. 

fig, I. ££f, ££*f, P. %££, 
hag, ECKsg, JEt. rjGfta, 
ErjG&a. 

yrov, JEt. egtov, P. etov, 

7JGTOV. 

t}te, I. sars. 



Neut. bv, I. £dV, J3. 

£V. 



rj, or ^v, I. D. ye, fig, 

P. E(JKE. 

VTTjV, A. ^JT^V, P. 
EGT7JV. 

rjoav, P. £<rav 7 eggclv, 

EGKOV. 



Plur, 



Sing. EGOfiatj D. egov/ucu, 

EGEVfiatj P. EGGOjLtaC. 
Plur. EGOflE'&a, J&. EGOfCCGd-a. 



Middle Voice. 

IMPERFECT. 

Indicative. 

J $vro, I. taro, eiaro. 

FUTURE. 

Indicative. 
£ <7?7, A. eo^, I. Icreaj, 



EGGECLt, D. £07?, £(7- 
C??, P. EGGy. 
EGEGds. 



EGsraCj by syncope 

EGTCLL, D. EGSlTCU, 
EGGEITCU, V.EGGETat. 
EGOVTCLl, D.EGOVVTdt. 



Infin. EGEG&CU, P. EGGEG&CU. Partitip. EcdfLEVOg, P. EGGOHEVOg. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



223 



654:. — Elfit, I go (root, 5f), 



Active Voice. 









PRESENT. 








SINGULAR. 




DUAL. 




PLURAL. 


Indie. 


elfu elg or el 


elcrt 


Irov LTOV 


ljuev 


Ire laai 


Subj. 


la lyg 


* 


Iijtov Irjrov 


lC)(JiEV 


Itjts loci 


Opt. 


lot/it loig 


lot 


lOLTOV io'lTTJV 


lotfiev 


lotre loiev 


Imper 


. — m 


Iro 


Itov Itov 




Its ltqgclv 


Infin. 


iivaij Part. 


» / 

ICJV 


loved iov, Gen. 

IMPERFECT. 
Indicative. 


lovrog 


hvcrjg, &c. 


Sing. 


yeiv or ya 




yetg or ystc&a 




yet 


Dual. 






yetrov or yrov 




yeirrjv or yrrjv 


Plur. 


yei/uev or y\iev 




yeire or yre 




yeoav^ Ion. ylcav 



Obs. 1. The Attics, and sometimes tiie lonians, regularly 
use the present of elfic, in the indicative, infinitive, and 
participles, in a future sense, " I loill go" 

Obs. 2. In Homer we have also imperfect with simple 
i ; as, fe, rnjv, fytev, tffav. 



655. — v Iyi[ii, to send, from "EH, 



Active Voice. 

PRESENT. 
xnoic. ?7j/jtc njs IrjGi Ustov Istov fe/xev Here 
Subj. tm ifjS Irj ivjzov Itjtov lajfiev lrjre 
Opt. Uvqv fe%, &c, rarely lotp.t 
Imper. hi (Je&i) lira) iszov Utojv hre 



laat or islet 
[(bat 

Kraxjoy 



Infin. livat Participles, lets Ul<ra lb Gen. Hvroq, &c. 



224 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

IMPERFECT. 

Indie, also teou tees fee 
Contr. wov lets Tet 



v terov lirrjv lepiev Here ie<rav 



FUTURE. 
Indie. ?}(T-o) -eig -et -sroy, &c. 

FIRST AORIST. 
Iridic, rjx-a -ac -e -arov, &c. 

SECOND AORIST. 
Indie, (fjxa rjxaq qxe) ejrov elzrp elfiev elre elaav 
Subj. w %<; #, &c. 

Opt. efyv efys e r t7] eHrov elrr}v elfisv elze eleu (rarely 

[efyrjv) 

Imper. — — £g era} £tov s-twv * ire ezaxjav 

Infin. efoat Participles, eis elaa £v Gen. hroq^ &c. 

PERF. elx-a -a^ &c. PLUPERF. eh-ew -et<; 9 &c 

Middle Voice. 

PRESENT. 
Indie. I'e/iai leaat 7erat lifieftov^ &c, 
Sllbj. lajtiat lrj iTJTat l(t>jj.sd<ov, &c. 

Opt. lec'firjv, &c. Imper. heo or wu. Infin. ?e<r$at. 
Part, tifievo^ &c. 

Indicative. 
Imperf. tiftqv ?e<rO) &c. FlTT. fjjofia^ &c. 1 Aor. yxdfirjv, &C. 

SECOND AORIST. 
Indie. el/jLTjv elao elro e'lfLed-ov ewftov ela&rjv el^e^a^ &c. 
Subj. wfiat % jj Ta i> &C. 

Opt. e"pL7Jv eio elro, &c. 
Imper. oo eeftaj, &c. Infin. £<t$cu. Part. Zfievoq -tj -o» 

Perf. Indie. eHjxcu eiaat^ &c. Infin. el<j$at 

Pluperf. Indie, efyrjv d<ro, &c. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 225 

Passive Voice. 
Future. Indie. §&7jgojjlcu. l Aor. Indie. eF&yv. Part, i&eig. 

656. — El^at, I clothe myself. 

Perfect passive and middle of Swupu (root ecu), to put 
clothes on another, to clothe, hence Mid. to clothe one's 
self. 

PRES. MID, and PRES. and PERF. PASS. 
Indie. S. el-fiat, -Gat, -rat, and -gtcu. — 3d PL elvra:. 
Part, etfievog. 

65V. — Elcra, seated. 

This aorist form (Mid. elGd/iTjv, Fut. eiGofiat) belongs 
to the verb K<*>, seat, but may be regarded as coming from 
a root em. 

658. — r R^at, I sit. 

^Hfiat is properly a perfect passive, with a present 
intransitive signification, from eco, to put, to place, or to 
set ; thus, Perf. I have been placed or set, and remain so ; 
i. e., J sit. It wants the subjunctive and optative, except 
in the compound xd^/iac, which has xd^wjiac, xaftoi/iyv, 
&g., and is more common than rjfiac. 



PRESENT. 



-fis&ov -g&ow -ff&oy 
— — -G-&OV -cf&cdv 



Indie. rj-fj.at -aai -Gzai 
Imper. -rj — -go -g&oj 

Inf. fje&ac Part, fjfievos -y -ov 



—— -G$e-G#QMjCLV 



IMPERFECT. 

Indie. %-fJ.rjv -go -gto j -/*e#ov -g$qv -g&tjv J -fie&a -t7#e -vro 
10* 



226 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

Obs. 3. For rjvrai the Ionians use earcu, and the Poets 
elarcu ; and for rjvTo in like manner earo and elaro. So also 
for xd$7]vzcu and xd^vro the Ionic forms are xariarai and 
xariazo (600). 

059. — KeT [icu, Hie. 

Perhaps an irregular perfect form (am laid) from 
x£tt>, *£&>. It has the Ionic forms, xiarac and ixiaro, for 
xetvra: and exewTO (600). 

PRESENT. 

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. 

Indie. xe?-j&cat -(rat -rat \ -fieftov -c&ov -g&ov \ -fie&a -<r&e -vrat 
Subj. 3 S. xirjrat 3 PI. xiojvrat 
Opt. 3 S. xiotro 3 PI. xiotvzo 

Imp. xei — -era -ad-a) | • -<r&ov -aftiov | — -0"#e -aftwaav 

Inf. x£ia#ai 

Part. xsipLsvot; -tj -ov 

IMPERFECT. 
Indie. £xet-fji7)v -co -to | -jie&ov -<j$ov -(T&rjv | -^e#a-<7#e -vro 

FUTURE. 
Indie, xeia-ofiat -tj -era*, &c, regular. 



660. — <E>J7^ (<£a), / #j^?m 

SINGULAR, DUAL. PLURAL. 

Imp. ep-yv-Tjq, or 7?<7#a, -7] 



<pai±£v (pari (pact 



<pazo\> tparov 

Subj. ?>cD, Opt. yafyv, Imper. <pa#i, Inf. <pdvai, Part. ?>ac, 
Fut. <prj<J(D, Aor. e<pr}<ra. 



The Inf. ^avaf is familiarly used as a sort of absolute 
past, (pdvai, he said. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 227 

With this verb is connected in use the word rjt±i, say 
(Lat. aid), used in 1 S. Pres. ^fii, I say, and in the familiar 
Attic dialogue, 37 v tfiyh, said I, % Skoq, said he. 



661. — 015a, Ihnow. 
Active Voice. 

PRESENT. 

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. 



Ind. olda ol<j&a* olds (y) 
Subj.e^w eiSfjq sidy, &c. 
Opt. eldsirjv sldsi-qs sidstrj, &C. 

- l'(T#l CCTTU) 



?<JTOV H<JTOV 



ttTTOV IffTWV 



c<Tfiev i<rre "eclat 



"are larwaav 



Inf. eldivat Part. eidd>s -via -6$ 

IMPERFECT. 
Sing, fjdscv fjdstq (igdew&a, Att. ydrjG&a) ydst, Att. Jfy 

Dual. fjdetrov 7}3etT7]v 

Plur. 4 ^ V ^erre (or 0<rre) 1 , t x 

( 7j<j[1SV ) { (QYJjffaV) 

Future, etaofiai (rarely sldijaw), I shall k?iow. 
Verbal adj. neuter leriov. 
The aorists and perfect from yiyvwexw. 

Obs. 4. 018a is strictly a second perfect from eldw, 
I see ; perfect, I have seen, hence, I know. In this sense 
it is used as a present only, and its pluperfect as an im- 
perfect, as above. For fa/iev, the lonians have id/iev ; and for 
eldivat, the Epic writers have cS/xevai, and *d/iev. 



* Wag, with the paragogic #a, oldac&a, by syncope olcr&a. Old Attic 
form olo&ac. v Igtov 7 &c., for oid-rov ; Zen9?, for old-^ (o2<7i9y, I c&i), &c. 



228 



DEPONENT VERBS. 



DEPONENT VERBS. 

662. — Deponent Vebbs are those which, under 
a middle or passive form have either an active 
or a middle signification. 

663. — The perfect of deponent verbs has some- 
times also a passive sense ; as, slpyacrac, he has wrought 
and it has been vwought. 

664. — Some of these verbs have also a passive form of 
the first future and first aorist, always used in a passive 
sense. 

665.— The ietises of deponent verbs are the present, 
imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, and perfect future of the 
passive form ; the future and first aorist of the middle 
form ; and the first future and first aorist in the passive 
form and with a passive sense. A few have a second 
aorist middle. They are usually conjugated by giving 
the present, future middle, and perfect passive; thus, 
di^ofiac, di^ojiau, dideyfiac. 



666.— Synopsis of Deponent Verbs* 



Pres. 
Imp. 
Perf. 

Piup. 
Flit. M. 
1 Aor. M. 
1 Put. P. 
1 Aor. P. 
Perf. Fut. 



INDICATIVE. 

dex-o/LLCU 
edex-Sftqv 
dedey-fiai 
ededey-fijjv 

ede^-djUTjv 
dex^o-ofiai 

koex^-W 
dedig-ojLLai 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

&kx-u\i>a>t 

Sedsy-fievog o> 

wanting 

wanting 
dex&-ti 
wanting 



OPTATIVE. 


IMPER. 


INFIN. 


-OiflTjV 


-OV 


-eoftai 


-flEVOg elijv 


-GO 


-often 


-oi/LLTjV 


wanting 


-EG$ai 


-ai/njv 


-at 


-acd-cii 


-OiflTJV 


wanting 


-Evrd-at 


-etrjv 


-rjTt 


-fjvat 


-OiliTjV 


wanting 


-£(j$ai 



PART. 

-6/ievog 

-fihog 

-o/xevog 

-dfievog 

-ofievog 

-etc 

-dfievog 



Note. — In this table, the imperative and infinitive of the perfect are 
given in their unchanged forms. Euphonic laws will change dtdey-cro 
and dedey-a&ai into didego and dedix&at (72). 



DESIDERATIVE VERB& 229 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

667. — Many verbs are occasionally taken imper- 
sonally ; as, dpiax^ it pleases; dpxel, it suffices; 
aufi<pip£>, it is profitable^ &c. 

The following are those which are chiefly taken imper- 
sonally : — 

668* — npiicet, it is becoming ; e-^oere, it was becoming ; 
izpir.£iv, to be becoming ; rd npiitov, that which is becom- 
ing j pi. rd Tzpixovza, the things which are becoming, 

660* — pikei) it concerns / e'ueAe, fielrjaety ptefiikqxe^ and 

fJ.ijJ.Tj As. 

670. — doxeT, it appears, it is resolved upon * iooxet 

(from doxiui) ; edo^s (from doxaj) ; rd doxovvra. 

Hem. — The personal use of this verb is far more 
common than the corresponding appears in English. 

671. — fee, it is necessary; eoec y defoei, dew, rd diov 9 

rd diovra. 

672. — zpri, it behooves ; typf/v, XPV ff£C 9 ZPW a h an ^ ZPWi 
rd zpiuwy contracted for xpiaov. Subj. xp%. 



DESIBERATIVE, FREQUENTATIVE, AND 

INCEPTIVE VERBS. 

673. — Desiderative Verbs are those which denote 
a desire or intention of doing. They are commonly 
formed by adding aziu) to the root of the primitive ; as, 

EOOT. 

yeMo), I laugh y ysXa- ysXacretaj, J desire to laugh. 

xoXetiiu)) I make tear ; 7:oXsp.e- icoXepaiffeia*^ I desire war. 

Another form of desideratives is that in dco or idw, prop- 
erly from substantives ; as, from #avaro<r, death ; ttawarda), 
I long for death ; oTpazr^o^^ a general; crparrj-fLduj, I 



230 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

wish to be a general. Also from verbs, by first forming 
substantives from them ; as, 

(hvel<j$at, to buy ; (d>vr]T7jq) wvTjTtda), I wish to buy. 
xkaia>) I weep y (xXauatq) xkauaido), lam disposed to iceep. 

674. — Frequentatives signify repeated action. 
These commonly end in £>; as, fiinrdZew (from pinrew), 
to throw from one place to another, Mid. to throw one^s 
self this way and that, to be restless ; <rrsvdZeiv (from 
erivetv)', to sigh much and deeply ; so, from ahew, to 
ask, ahi£ew 9 to beg/ 2p7tetv 9 to creep, ipxufetv, to creep 
slotvly. 

07S*—Ificepiive8 express the beginning or con- 
tinned increase of an action. These commonly end in 
(7X(u ; as, yevetdo-xw, to begin to have a beard; yftdcrxa), to 
be growing to manhood (the same as yeveid^bi and 7jl3dw) ; 
in part transitive / as, /j.s3d<jxio, to intoxicate, from fieSuw, 
I am intoxicated. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

G7&* — Many Greek verbs display a variety of forms, and an appar- 
ent irregularity in the formation of different tenses. This arises partly 
from the adoption of new forms of the present and imperfect, which 
sometimes accompany, but more commonly have superseded the primitive 
forms, from which, however, other tenses still remain; partly from 
adopting tenses from different roots, and thus forming a new whole out 
of fragments of several verbs. Thus several verbs, strictly speaking 
defective, blending their tenses for a common signification, make what we 
call an irregular 'verb. Thus, 1 opw, I see; oipo/iac (reg. from bir, ottt), shall 
see; aor. eldbv (root 16), I saw. Avo, go under, has present, dvvo, Svjuc, 
dvoKo, but several of the tenses are formed regularly from dba • as, fibcro, 
edvoa ; while 2 aor. edw comes from dvfii (without mood- vowel). Hclgx^, 
suffer, has from this form imoerf. eiraaxov • from obs. nado, 2 aor. 
lira-Sav, and from obs. Ttev&Q, perf. Kkirov&a, and fut. ireioopaL. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



231 



In most irregular verbs, the irregularity is caused 
by the adoption of a new present and imperfect, formed 
by certain changes on the root of- the verb in these tenses, 
while the other tenses continue to be formed regularly 
from the primitive root or theme. Thus, from AH'BQ* is 
formed the new present Xafifidvto^ imperfect iXd/xfiavov 9 
while the future Xyj<po[mi^ and all the tenses following it, 
are formed regularly from the root AHB. 

In this way new presents are formed from old 
voots as follows : 

677. — By the addition of certain letters to the root f 
thus, 



THEME. 


ROOT. 


LET. ADD. 


1 OOXO) 


dox 


e 


2 t(oj 


Tt 


V 


3 o.yoj 


d r 


vu 


4 £0) 


i 


wo 


5 kldoj 


iXa 


uv 


6 yrjpdoj 


r r jP a 


ex 



makes 



NEW PRES. 

dox£-oj 
rh-oj 
dyvb-to 
ivvu-ta 

kXaov-oj 
yripdax-o} 



FTJT. 

co ~ 



OJ 



tigoj 

vs. 

a^oj 

SGOJ 

iXdao) 
yr^pdaoi 



678. — Of roots that end with a vowel, some drop it 
before the added letters ; some change o into co 3 e into iy, 
and others change e or o into i ; thus, 





THEME. 


BOOT. 


E. CHANGED. 


LET. ADD. NE"W PEES. 


TUT. 


1 


dfiaprioj 


d ;iap 7 e 


dfiapv 


a\> 


dfiaprdv-a) 


dfj.aprrJGGfj.ai 


2 


Ipidico 


£pcds 


Ipid 


aw 


ipioab-o} 


ZptdyJGco 


O 


%6oj 


Zo 


Coi 


vvu 


^OJVVU-OJ 


Z&GOJ 


4 


dAdioj 


dXds 


aLot] 


GX 


dXdyJGx-co 


aXdyJGU) 


5 


eupiaj 


evps 


eupr, 


GX 


ebpiGx-oj 


evprJGoj 


6 


'J AG 'Q 


dXo 


dXc 


GX 


dXtGX-OJ 


dXoJGOJ 


7 


filOil) 


fito 


fi'.OJ 


GX 


/jCOJGX-OJ 


(3t(OGO) 



* Primitive themes, now obsolete, are printed in capitals. 

10* 



232 IRREGULAR ASTD DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

679. — In roots that end with a palatal or a lin- 
gual mute, the euphonic changes are made as before 
explained ; practically p , we might say that ca^ ?, &c, are 
added, and the last radical dropped ; thus, 



f THEME. 


ROOT. 


B.CHANGED. 


NEW PEES. 


FTJT. 


1 Tzpdya) 

2 ifidda) 


it pay 
tfiad 


up ay i 
Ifiadc 


TtpaGG-Q) 
IfldGG-Q) 


Ttpd^o) 
[fidffco 


3 xpdyu) 

4 (ppddco 


xpay 
<ppad 


xpay i 
(ppadt 


xpa^'O) 
(ppdZ-o) 


xpd%a> 
(ppdaio 



680. — Some form a new present from the short 
root changed before the added letters by inserting a 
nasal v (or p) ; thus, 





THEME. 


ROOT. 


E.CHANGED. 


LET. ADD. NEW PEES. 


FUT. 


1 


Xrj#a) 


XaS 


Xavd- 


ay Xavd-dv-to 


XtJ(T(0 


2 


Xfj^co 


kafi 


Xa t uft 


av Xap.fi dv-oj 


Xf](popat 



081. — Others with various irregularities ; as, 

ROOT. 

ftiXu) SeX y &eXe 9 Fut. #sXtj<to) 

kyetpo iystp by Syncope 2 Aor. TJypdpL-qv 

682. — By Mednplication, viz., of the initial syl- 
lable ; of the initial consonant with t ; and of : commonly 
called the improper reduplication ; as, 

THEME. NEW PRES. 

diio by Red. of initial cons, with i dldrjpc 
7zX(a) il " -Ki[mXr)fit 

(jrdw by improper Red. format 

683. — By Metathesis, or transposition of letters, 
which, however, rarely occurs; as, 

THEME. ROOT. TUT. 2 AOR. 

dipxuj depx by Metathesis dpex dip^a) edpaxov 



IRREGULAR AKD DEFECTIVE VERBS. 233 

684.— By ApTiceresis, or cutting off the initial 
letters; as, 

Id-iXoj by Aphseresis becomes ftilo) 

083 . — In several, two or more of these modes of varia- 
tion combine to form the new present ; thus, 

By 682 and 678, yvoaj becomes ytyvmdxm^ fut. yvwcrofiat. 
By 682 and 677, dpdm becomes didpdaxu)^ fut. Spaec*. 
So Stoax becomes didaxaxaj^ didd(Txaj. 
fiiifo) (,asv) becomes fu-fiivafj fitfivm^ fut. fteviw 9 fievco, 
rex, r:-r£x, TcrixcD^ titxcd^ tc/.toj^ fut. ri^o/iai, perf. riroxa. 
ixco (fx) becomes Ix-dvio, and irreg. ixviopai, fut. r izo/iat. 
e^u) and Gyjw<i fut. e£ ^ and g%t}gw. 



6*C— ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREG- 
ULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

EXPLANATION. 

In the following table, the words in capitals are the roots from which 
certain tenses are formed, but which are themselves either obsolete, or 
are merely assumed, in order to derive from them by analogy the forms 
in use. 

s. s. means same signification. 

The capital B. after a tense indicates that the verb is conjugated 
regularly from the tense after which it is placed. 

Jl 

'Ada, to injure (R. aa.) ; pres. pass, karat, 1 a. act., aaoa, contr., aaa, 1 a. 

pass. hacd-rjv, mid. aaadfirp. Horn. 
'Aya/iat, to admire; a middle form as from ayrffii, Th. ay do (R. ay a)* 

pr. and imp. like lorajiai ; aya^o/nai, s. s. — fut. ay&oo* 

fiat, E. 
'Ayvi>«, aywfii, to break; from ayo (R. <zy); f. a£a>, &c, R la. ea£a, 2 a. 

p. eayrpt, 2 perf. eaya, with a passive signification. It 

commonly takes the syllabic augment, probably owing to 



234 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

its having anciently had the digamma as the initial letter; 

thus, pres. f-aycd, 1 a. iPaga, and then eat- a] &c. 
"Ayu, to lead (R. ay) ; f. d^w, &c. R. It has a reduphcation in the 2 a. 

ijyayov, perf. fjxa, an( * with the reduplication, ayrjoxa 

(poetic ayvOj ayivcJ). 1 a. ^fa, d£ae, at-curd-ai. 
*A(56>. See dvdavo. 

'Aeipu, epic and poetic lengthened for afyw. Regular. 
'Ae^w. See av^dvQ, 
"ArjjjL^ to blow (fr. d«, R. a); retains v throughout; as, aijvai, pass, aqjuac' 

except the participle deig, aevrog : mid. arjro, dfyuevog. 
Alpecjj to take (1 R. alpe 1 2 k\ from r 'EA£2); f. aiprjocd, &c., 1 aor. pass. 

ype&qv. R. Attic fut. iho), 2 aor. el/W, mid. eUAjitjv, 

Alexandrian form for ellofirp (533). Sometimes with 

an Attic reduplication in the perfect; as, apaiprjKa^ 

apaiprjfica. 
Alpco, to raise (R. dp, from *AP£2) ; f. apti, p. ^o/ca, 1 a. ypa, &c, R. 
Aicd-avoficu, to perceive (alad-, aicr&s) ; f. m. alc&foojuai, &c, R., from 

AI29E"0MAI (618), 2 aor. ycy&o^v. 
'Anax'^o), to trouble (cinaxe and ax, ax); f. atcaxyvo), &c, R. 2 a. with 

redup. Tjnaxov ; pres. mid. axo\iai ; perf. pass. aizf]x e f Jia h to 

be afflicted, to. grieve, 
'ATidaivo, tr. to make to grow (R. a,18av) ; f. ahdava, &c, R. imp. TjXdavov 

from v AAAO. 
'A/ld^cr/ccj, intr. ft? grow (R. dAJe) ; f. akd7]ou, &c, R. from 'AAAE'Q. 
'ATise'ivo, akkoiiai, to shun (R. akev, from 'AAEY'ft) ; 1 a. ffkEvaa, 1 a. m. 

7]7ievd[ir]v and TjXea/xTjv, by elision of c for rjTiEvodfiTiv. ' 
'ATieijcj, to avert (R. dAe^s and alen) ; f. afa^ou), &c, from 'AAEEE'Q ; 1 

aor. m. aheijafiijv, &c, from 'AAEK'Q. 2 a. poet. $AaA/eov, 

by redupl. and syncope for r/lenov. 
'Altvdiu, tr. to ro$ (R. afavde, and d/U, from 'AAFfi) ; f. aliau, &c, R. 1 

a. p. part. alLvdrj&sig ; p. p. part. a?avdj?juevov } . mid. sense, 

to wander, to roam. 
'AXiokij, to take (R. dXo) ; f. dA^crw, &c, R. from 'AAO'ft, 2 aor. ealuv, or 

7/W, as from "AAflMI. This verb has a passive signifi- 
cation in the aorists and perfect active. 
f AltTaiv^ to offend, to sin (1 R. oIlte, 2 d?ur) ; f. dXir^au, &c, R. 2 a. 

TjXlTOV. 

"AhTiOjLLai, to leap (R. a% from "AA£2) ; f. alovfiai, 2 a. rjMfirjv, R. 
A/lw/cw, dfo/a/cdvw, fo avoid (R. dAw) ; fut. d/lt^w, &c, R. from 'AAT'KQ, 
s. s. as d/lew. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 235 

'Atyalvp {afyavQ, a/jpaicS), to gain (d?jpe, dA0) ; fut d?^GQ ) &c, R. from 

'AA^E'fl. 2 a. iifyov. 
'AjuapravG), to err (d/uapre, djuapr) j f. ayLaprfjGo, &c, R. 2 a. tffiaprov, from 

'AMAPTO. 
'AfipMoKu, to miscarry (R. d/z/?2o); fut. d/z/S/UJaw, &a, R., from d/*- 

fi/uOG). 

'Afinexu, and a/inioxveofiai. See £^w. 

'A/zTT/la/cfcr/cw, to mfes, to err (d/z7r/la/c£, d/zTrAa/c); f. d / a7r/la/c^<7G> 7 &c., R. 2 a. 3 

'A/ufaiwviLLi. See ewv/ii. 

AvaycyvQGKO), See ycyvoctcG). 

'AvaXictcG), to expend. See d?aoKo. 

'Avdavo, to please (dde, dd) ; fut. dc^cw, &a, R. from ddew, 2 a. eadov for 
^ov, 2 perf. ed&z, with the syllabic augment. 

'Avoryvva), dvoiyvv[iL, dvoiyo {avd and olyd), to open (R. oty); f. dvoitja), 
p. d^£6j^a, &c., R., often with both temporal and syl- 
labic augment; as, imp. aveuyov, 2 perf. dviuya, am 
open, &c. 

'Avuyo), to order (R. dvuy and dvoye) • f. dvugG), &c., R. or, dvcdyfjco, &c, 
R. from dvoyeo ; hence, pres. imperative, dv6);r#£, di^tfw, 
&c, by syncope for avoyq&i) dvoyeroj &c., as if from 
'AM2THMI, 2 perf. ijvioya. 

'Airavpacj, to take away (from awro and *AYP£2, R. ai>p); imperf. R. 
airrjvpaov, contr. dmjvpuVj 1 aor. dixrjvpa^ m. dnrjvpdfjLTjv^ 
from aTzavpu. The 1 aor. part, drcovpac, and dirovpdjuEvog. 

'ATrex&dvo/uat,. See kx^dvouac. 

■'Air6%?\,vfu, See o/J.vfu. 

'ApapicKo, from V AP£2, to ,/ztf, or ac^zp^ (R. d/>) ; fut. dp<y and dpco (581), 
p. ^p/ca, &c, R. 2 perf. ^papa and dpr/pa, with the Attic 
reduplication from rjpa. 

'ApecKG), to please (R. dpe)\ fut. apsco, rjpeKa 1 &c, R. from dpew. 

At^w, and avgdvco, tr. to increase (R. au£e) ; fut. avtjfoo, &c, R. from 
AYSE'Q; likewise, defw, deffaw, &c, from 'AEEE'Q. 
Mid. intr. to increase. 

'Ax&o/iai, to be indignant (R. d^tfe) ; fut, axdycofiai, or -eco/uat, &c., R. 
from dx&eofiat. 

'Ao. This verb has four significations in its different parts; viz., 1. 
d&>, to blow; imp. dov, commonly a??{u. — 2. dw, to sleep; 
1 aor. dcxa, and deca. — 3. dw, to satisfy ; f. dew, 1 aor. dca, 
pres. pass, dro^ and darai, inf. act. a/uevai. Horn, contr. for 
dejuevat, for common form dew. — 4. clq 1 to injure; see ddw. 



236 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



B. 

Baivo, p&aKG), Pip&o, to go (R, pa); fut. Pfoojuai, p. piquet, &c, R. from 
BA'fl; 2 aor. tptjv, from BHMI; imperat. Py&i, in com- 
pounds shortened; as, narapa. The future /?#<r«, and first 
aorist active kprjoa, are causatives. 

Bd/Ma>, to throw (R. /?aA and pale) ; fut. /fa/L6 (Poet. paXkijotS), ptpfyica, 
syncopated as from /Miw; so also iph/v, Zphriro, pirjG- 
&cu, for hpakrrv, kpakrrro, PePaXyo&ai, &c. Epic perf. pass. 
pepdty/iat, as if from BOAE'Q. 

Bacrd^ to carry (R. fiacrad, ffaGray, 45 7); f. paGT&GQ, 1 a. p. e/foff- 
Tax&'tfv* 

B^dw, fo Zwra (R. /^o); fut. pitdGu, &c; 2 aor. hpiuw, from pio/uc. 

B/laordvw, fo owd {pXacre ; piaar) ; £ pXaorqaco, as if from BAASTE'Q, 
2 a. stpiaoTov. 

BAwcr/co), fo #0 (R. ^o/l, as if from MO'AQ) ; 2a. ijuohov, f. m. /LLohovftai, 
perf. ftejLtpicoKa (52, 3d) for /z^/z/lw/ca, as if from ///Idw (by 
metath. 52, 8th, for fidlcS), whence /3/ldw and PXogko. 

Bodw, fe cry ow£ (R. /?oa) ; f. porjcu, &c, R. The Ionics contract or} into 
w, making p^GOjaai for poyGo/uac; 1 a. ePvoa for kpdijcra. 

1 a. p. inserts c, kp6c-$r/v. 

BSokg), tr. to feed (/3ocr/c, poaae); f. Pogktjgu, &c, R. from Pociteco. 
BovAojuaij to will (1 R. /fovAe, 2 /3<wA); f. Povlrjoofiai, &c, R. from 

BOYAE'Q ; 1 a. p. kpovh'id-rjv, and with double augment 

7]Pov7if]$r]v ; hence also 2 perf. pepovla. 
Bpwff/cw, Pipp&GKG), to eat (R. /3po); fut. Pp&gco, &c, R. from j^pdw; 

2 aor, £/5/>wv (later epic), 

r. 

Tapeo, to marry (R. ya^s, and ya/w) ; fut. ya{i?/GG), and ya/^w, yafib, f. m. 
yajLCEGo/Liai,, &c, R. 1 aor. kya/Liqoa, N. T. ; and £y^«, as if 

| from rA'Mfl. 

Tfvro, in Homer, fte fooft ; probably -ZEol. for elero ; y being put for /-, 
and v for A, as in the Dor. rjv&e for f/We; thus, hilero 
would become yevero, and by syncope yevro. — Also yevro 
2 aor. mid. of yiyvofiat by procope and syncope for 
kyevero. 
Tff&itt, to rejoice (R. yr/$e, yy&) ; f. yq&yoQ, 2 perf. ykytfta, having the 
signification of the present. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 237 

T^pdciicj, to grow old (R. yr,pa, and yr/p) ; f. yqpdGu, &c., R. from y^pdu- 

1 aor. eyqpa, aor. inf. yqpavcu. 
Tiyvouai, yivo/iai, to become (yeve, yev); fut. yevr/GOjuai, &c, 2 perf. yeyova. 

N. B. Allied to this verb is 
Teivo/uat, to be born (R. yew); used in the present; the first aorist 

kyetvdiirjv is used actively, to beget, to bear; hence, ol 

yeLvdjisvot, the parents ; rj yeiva/Ltev7j, the mother. 
Tiyvc)GKG) f yivLGao, to know (R. yvo); fut. yvuGo/uai, p. eyvcona, 1 fut. p. 

yvcdG$r]c>o[iai, p. p. eyvcoGjuai, R. from TNO'ft ; 2 aor. eyvuv^ 

from yvcj/Lic, sub. 7^£>, opt. yvoiijv, imper. yvu&i, inf. yvuvaij 

part, ywi'f. 

A. 

Aa/w, fc> Zeam (dae, da) ; fut. Saf/Go, &c, R. from AAE'£2, by epenthesis 
from (Jaw; whence p. SeSaa (584-586), 2 aor. p. eSdijv, from 
c^aw comes ddovcw, and, perhaps, by reduphcation, d^dda/cw, 

Aa/w, to divide, to feast, to entertain (R. Sac) ; f. SalGQ, more frequently 

&z<K<;, p. SeSatca, &c, R. as from AA'Z£2. 
Aalo), burn, set on fire (Sat, 6a) ; second perfect SeSrja, am on fire, regular 

through all its moods. 
Adicpo), to bite (Stjk, dan)', fut. dqj-ofiai, &c, R. from AIFKS2; 2 aor. 

eSanov. 
Aap&dvo), to sleep (R. Saptie, 6ap&) ; fut. Sap-d-fao/iai, &c, R. from 

AAPGE'Q ; 2- aor. eSapftov, poetic e&pa&ov. 
AeiSto, to fear (SecS, SiS, St); fut. SetGo, SeSottca; also from ATQ, 2 aor. 

eStov, 2 perf. de^a (poetice SeiSta), pi. SeSiafjLev, by syncope 

SeStjuev, &c, and imper. SeStd-t, with a present sense, to 

/ear; the middle SeScGGOfiat, has an active signification, 

u to frighten." 
AeacvvG), deiKvv/ui, to show (R. &£k); f. Seigo, &c, R. as from AEFKQ; 

Ionic AE'KO, hence Sega), eSega, SeSey/iat, &c. 
Aeofiai, to need (R. See, from AEE'OMAI); fut. SerjGQjiai, &c, R. In the 

active voice it is used impersonally; as, Set, defoei, &c. 

See Impersonal Verbs, 66T-6 T2. 
Aeo, to bind (R. Se) ; f. Syau, &c, R., 3 fut. pass. SeSr/GOfiat, seldom Se&v- 

GO/LLai. 

AiSaGKo, to teach (R. StSax, and StSaGne); f. StSd^cj (and dtSaGKTjau), 

SeSiSaxa, &c, R. 685. 
AlSpclgkg), to escape (R. dpa) ; fut. dpdffa), &c. (R. from dpdw, a regular 

verb in use); 2 aor. fdpav, dc, d, &c. Subj. dp<5, fff, or, 



238 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

&c, Opt. dpairjv, Imp. dpa&i, Inf. dpdvai, pt. dpae. 3ST. B. 

This verb is used in composition only. 
Aoneo, to think (R. Soke, and dote) ; f. dogo, &c, R. from AO'KQ ; also fut. 

doKfoco, poetic. 
Avvapai, I can (R. dwa) • like loTafiai, f. dwrjcofiai, &c. ; 1 aor. pass. 

hdwacyS-rjv and eSwyd-^v, 
Avu, 6vvG) t tr. to inclose, intr. to go into (R. 6v) ; fut. (Ji'cw, didvaa, &c, R. ; 

2 aor. edw, from ATMI. 

'•"'-' "'I. 

'TfyeipQ) tr. fo wa&e (ey^p, eysp); R. Mid. intr. to awake; 2 a. rjypofiriv, by 
syncope for yyepdfiqv, 2 p. a, kypyyopa, reduplication 
anomalous. 

"E&j. See Eoti-io. 

'Etfe/ta), #£/Ig>, J w&ft (R. ede^e, and tfevle); fut. k&elyao), and tfe/lr/cw, 
qd-eTirjua, R. 

"E#w, J ema wow£; only with Epic writers; 2 perf. etcjtfa, Ionic 
EQ&a, in the same signification. Plup. ela&eiv, I was 
ivont. 

EIAty to see {eld, 15) ; an old verb, which, in the active voice, has only 
the 2 aor. eldov and ISov, used as the aorist of opdeo, to see 
— a verb which has only the present Spdco, the imperfect 
tipaov, Ionic &puv, Attic eopov, and the perfect top ana, 
perf pass, iopdfiac ; the other parts being made up from 
GTTTOfiai, and elSo, as here. In the middle and passive, 
elSo has the present eldo/uat, the imperfect elddfirp), 1 aor. 
ELGdfMTjv (keKjdfiTjv), like the Latin videri, meaning to be 
seen, to seem, to appear, to resemble. The 2 aor. mid. in 
the imperative Idov, Ideotie, is used as an interjection, see, 
lo, behold! 

Of this verb, the second perfect olda, strictly, i" have 
seen, perceived, is used only as a present, meaning / know, 
having the pluperfect ydeiv, as an imperfect, I knew, and 
the future middle elaofiac, rarely eldyGo, I shall know. 
The aorists and perf. are supplied from yr/vcjanc). — For 
the parts of olda, see 661. 

EIK12, / resemble, I seem (R. eln, IK) ; is used only in the 2 perf. eoina 
(Ion. olna), employed as a present, / am like, I seem, I 
resemble. Inf. konikvat, part, ekwf, -via, -6g. Hence the 
adverb eindrug. From this verb comes sIoko) and Iokcj, to 
compare. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 239 

Ellu and elllw, to roll up, press together, more commonly elMo or eltea 

(R. ell, ellz, or etle) • fut. -foo, &c, 1 aor. inf. float, eelccu, 

part, elcag, perf. pass, eel/aai, 1 aor. p. kdlrjv, inf. dlyvai, 

or aATjfisvcu, part. aAeiC, all of which have sometimes the 

spiritus asper, and sometimes the spiritus lenis. 
J&fil, I am (R. e), from *E£2 ; fut. mid. hoo^ai^ imperfect yv. See 652. 

But 
El,ui, I go, comes from *!&; f. m. elaopai, p. ela, Attice rjla, imperf. yeiv f 

Ion. rfia, na. See 654. 
EIIIO, or EIIQ, to say ; used only in the aorists ; 1 aor. enra, 2 eittov, 

1 aor. mid. el7rd/i7jv. The initial el- is retained through 

all the moods. Compounds used by the poets are hena), 

heaTTG), evicTcco. The other parts are supplied from epo> t 

which see. 
Wipycd, to shut out (R. dp-}) ; f. elpfa, &c, R. perf. pass. 3 pL eepxarai, 

Epic for elpy/xevoi elai, 600. But elpyvviiL, f. elpgo, means 

to shut in. 
'Elavvu, to drive (R. £/m); fut. e/MaG), p. elfjam, &c, R. from eldo, also 

in use. The Attic future is k/^o, elgc, ela, &e., for eldaco, 

eldaeic, &c. 
"E?mco, and elavQ y to draw (R. kin and e?,nv) • f. &'Af« and klukac), 1 aor. 

cZAfa, &c., R. 
'Evo-d-u, to lie upon, to be close to (R. hod) ; perf. hrjvoda ; used chiefly in 

compounds ; as, Trap-evJjvo&ev, dv-r/vod-sv, Sec. 
"Evvv/m, to clothe (R. e) ; fut. ecu • p. pass, el/iai, and also eaiiai, from 

"E£2; dfityievvvfiL has Attice dfKpio) for dii^teou j djucptdfa 

and hfjujtisfyj are rare forms of the same word. 
"Ettcj. See eZ7r«. 
'E7TW, to &e actively employed (1 R. ctt, 2 cttt) ; 2 aor. ^<T7rov and ecizdfiTiv, 

as if from 2IIE'£2. Mid. eirofiai, to follow, fut. eipojuai. See 

££w ; to be found chiefly in compounds. 
'EPrft, and £pf w. See fie fa. See also in elpyu. 
'Epidaivo), to contend (R. epid); fut. epidfoo, &&, as from 'EPXAE'G, 

hence £p^ w , s. s. ; fut. epiao), &c, regular. 
'Epoucu. See Ipw. 

'Eppo>, to 0o away (R. eppe) ; f. eppfoa), &a. R. from 'EPPE'G. 
'Epv&aivo, to make red (R. epvde, and epevi^) ; fut. kpv&fou, &C. (R. from 

'EPYGE'Q), and also epevaa, as if from 'EPEY'Ga 
'Epxojmi, to come (R. fAei>i9, £/ta#) ; fut. klevcofiai, 2 perf. elylvda, from 

'EAEY'912; whence also 2 aor. act. fjldov, by syncope 



240 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

for V H AT80N. For r/Uov, kUsJv, the Doric writers have 
?,v$ov, kv&slv: In some tenses el/ii is more in use than 

epXOfiai. , , 

EPG by metathesis fa and by epenth. hptu ; also elpu, by ep. upea, 
from one or other of which the tenses in use are regularly 
formed (1 E. kp, fc and kpe, 2 kp); thus from epu, 1 aor. 
m. tp&pw, from />£«, fut. M™, aild * aor « P- W^> and 
kpfr&nv; from £pk>, fut. kpkoQ, p. eZp^ P- P ass - el Wf«u, 
fut. Ms, 2 a. m. vpd^v ; and probably from eipea, comes 
the fut. ELpijaofiaL. 
n&pofiai, in the sense of to ash, occurs chiefly as an aorist to kpvrau, scil. 

Vp6fi^ t subj. £p6>^, imp. hpov, also f. kpfaojicu. 
'EffMw, to ea*; used in the pres. and imp. for M«. See kSu. 
EW^ to tfa* (R. ***); fut. rfd^, &c., R. from EYAE'fl, augments 
the initial vowel, thus, *&*»; so in compounds, wafyw- 
(W, &c. 
Eipfcja*, ft> Jfo* (R. cApe, rip); f. ehpfao, &c, B. from EYPE'Q, by 
epenth. from ET'PQ; whence a form of the 1 aor. m. 
evpdiirjv. This verb has e before -tf^cw and -^V ; as, 
£vpe$7]V (533). 
'B^dw/«« and aTre^o/^, I am hated (R. W; fut. I^o^cm, perf. 

p. vxpypu* R - from ex & £°i juu i from **^ P oetic ' and used 

only in the present. 
'Ere, to have (1 R. ft, and ^ 2 ^); fut. If« (with the aspirate), or 

ff^o-o), p. laxn^h &c -> E - from 2XE '^' alS0 ^^ 2 a ° r ' 
eoxov, subj. <7*g>, opt. a^ofyv, imp. oxk, inf. ^ Tnia 
verb has another form of the present and imperfect, lax* 
and loxov, in the sense of to hold, which has the future 
oxfau, &c. ; so also ox&a, ia X e^ov. In the compounds 
observe the following varieties ; viz., ave X * (for which 
also avaax'edu) in the middle has a double augment in the 
imperf. and second aorist, r>«pm (fi>*txfil*P>'. afinkxu, 
to inclose, has f. %>££«, 2 aor. ypircaxov ; mid. a/xrixopM 
or aiiiria^ofiai, to wear; fut. a/i^o/mi, 2 aor. ^iaxpim» 5 
vTrcaxvsofiac, to promise, fut. virooxfooucu, &c, R. 

*Ei/>6), to coofc (R. eV £ ) 5 fut - *#"■>, &c -> Re S- from ' E * E ' Q - 
'EG, to place (R. *) ; Defective, 1 a. eloa, f. m. elaofiat, 1 a. m. eM/^. 
The derivatives from this root are— 1. vfuu, I sit (perf. for 
elfiat), 658; 2. efyfiai, to set down (whence I?« and imM?^ 
R.); 3. £wup, to cfo&e; and 4. ??/«, to serctf, faw, elm, R. 
655. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 241 



Z. 

Zdw, to live (R. fa) ; £ m. ^yoofiat ; 2 aor. e£^, as if from ZHMI. For 
the contractions of this verb, see 559, Obs. 2. To supply 
the defective parts of this verb, tenses are borrowed 
from fiiou. 

Zevyvvo and ^evyvvfu, to join (1 R. &vy, 2 f vy) ; f. Zevt-u, &c, R. from 
ZETTQ, 2 a. p. Hirynv. 

Zcjwvo, ^6vvvfic } to gird (R. £o); f. fuou, &c, R. from Cow, perf. pass. 

H. 

'Hdw, fo sweeten, to please (R. r/d) ; f. rjacj, &c, R. s. s. as dvdavcj, which 

see. 
w Rfiaij to sit; see "EG, and 658. 
'H/z/, by aphaeresis for <f>r/pi } I say; likewise tjv, rj, for e^tjv, k$r). See 

660. 

e. 

0£/U>. See k&£?M, 

G^0w, to &e amazed (root #a<£, and #770); used only in the 2 aor. 
eracpov, and 2 perf. re-t^rra, in which the second aspirate 
is changed instead of the first, contrary to 58. 

Brp/ava), to sharpen (R. ti-ip/) ; £ ^7f w > &c., R. from #^yw, s. s. 

©^yydvw, to touch (R. #*y); f. #££w, &c., R. from Myw; 2 aor. e&iyov, 

QvrjGKio, to die (root #^a and #av) ; f. m. &avoi)fiai ; p. Te&vqica, 
and by syncope, re&vaa, whence the common forms, rctf- 
va^, rei^vao-^v, re&vavai, &c. (584-586) ; from GA'NG 
comes f. m. davovimt, and 2 aor. a. i&avov. From the p. 
a. T£-&v7]K.a, comes a new present rexhqKw, f. redvygo. 
Parts also occur as if from a form in /Wi ; thus, ri&va&i, 
Te&vairjv, as if from Ti&vq/u. 

Qopvvcj, Mpvvfii, d-pucKo, to leap, or spring (R. $op, from 00'PG) , f. m. 
dopov/iai, Ion. tiopeofiat, 2 aor. edopov. 



I. 

lAPY'NG, *dpty^, from Wp{;w, Reg. tr. to set, or j?foce (R. idpv and idpw) ; 
£ Idpvoo, &c, R. 1 aor. p. idpvvftrjv. 
11 



242 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

*I£dvG), ifa, to set (R. 16 1 l(,a) ; fut. l^foo, &e., R. from l^aa) ; and leu, 

&c, R. from i£g). In like manner Ka$i£avo, m-d-ifa, &c. 

See "Efi. 
*I?7^, to send (R. e) ; f. yco), p. ei«a, 1 aor. qua, mid. ie fiat, from "EG. 655. 
'I/cdwj, iKveotzai, to come (R. k) j from 2/cw, s. s. R., whence f. m. Igofiai, 

perf. pass, l/^az, 2 aor. itco/uqv. 
'llaoKouai, to propitiate (R. Ua) j f. DwLOOfiat, ikao"&nv y R. from tAdw j 

whence Vkdofiat, Ifaf&ij in Homer. 
"iTrra/uac. See ireTOfiai. 
'loriniy to know; m. foa^, used by Doric writers. See s16g>. 

"Ia^w. See l^w. 



K. 

Ka&i£ojucu, to sit (Kara and e^ofiai, R. e(5); fut. mfiedovficu, 1 aor. p. 

Kei/iai. See 659. 

Kelioficu, to order (R. /ce/le); f. KElrjaopat, &c, R. from Keleofiat. 

'Kepawvu, Kspawvjui, to mix (R. /c^oa); fut. KEpaoo, &a, Reg., from nspaij. 

Sometimes KEnpdna, KEKpa.uai, by syncope for KEHEpana, 

KEKspa/uai, and Ion. KEnprjuat. 'EnEpd^v, KEpa&foo/Ltai, and 

knepaa'&Tiv, KEpao&?]co[iat. Hence, also, tupvao, from which 

KLpvTjjuc, s. s. imper. /api^ for tdpva&t,. 
KySo), tr. to mafte anxious {kt}6e, /c^d); f. nndrjao, 2 p. neiirjda, with a pres-* 

ent intransitive sense, &> 5e anxious, K^Sdjuac, irreg. perf 

future K£K,a&]GO(iai. 
Kepdaivo), to make gain (R. KEpSav, and KEpda) ; f. Kcpdavu and KEpdyoo ; 

perf. KEKepdjjKa, or -a/ca. 
K^dvw, to overtake (klx, Ki>x e )i f. klxv™, &c, R. from /c^ w J 2 aor. 

ekcxov, and from KI'XHMI, enixyv. 
KixpW 1 , to lend (R. ^pa) ; fut. XPV™, &c, R. from ^P^- 
K/w, to ^o ; not used in pres. indie, but in the other moods and imperf. 

ind., and is accented like the second aorist. 
KMfa, to cry aloud {nXayy, /c/lay); f. uTidy^u, &c, R. from K?Ayyw y 2 perf. 

part. KEKATiycdc, as if from /cA^yw, 2 a. Etilayov. 
K/lvw, to fear (R. avW); Reg. except the imperative pres. idJvd-i, as if, 

from KATMI, as well as k2,ve, reg. 
ILopEwvG), Kopswvfu, to satisfy (R. Kope)' f. KopEoto, EKopEca, &c, R., from 

KOpEO* p. p. KEKOpEGfiai, EK.0p£O$7]V. KopECJ, Teg., to SWt&p, 

is a different verb. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 243 

Kpd£w, to cry (R. ttpay)] f. Kpat-o), &c, R. except the imperative perfect 

KEKpaxfti, 2 a. EKpayov. 
KpejLLawvG), Kpejuavvv/LLi, and tipTJiivrjfii, to hang (R. Kpsfia); f. KpejiaGu, &c, 

R. from KPEMA'Q. Attic f. /cpe/zu, 6f, S, &c, 516. Perf. 

p. Kpe/iafiac without the augment. 
KrecvcOj to kill (/crew, ktv)- fut. ktevcj, &c, R.; 2 aor. ektclvov, and ^vctt/v 

from KTHMI. 
Kt>Aa>do, to roll (R. /ct»/U); fut. kv?Jou } &c., R. from tcv/ao, s. s. 
Kwew, ft? #&s (R. awe, and k^) ; fut. Kwyao, &c, R. ; also kwgj, &c., R. 

from kvg). 



A. 

Acy^avw, to receive by lot fiax, ^vx)] £ ^#£w, &c, R. from AH'Xft. 2 

aor. e/la^ov, perf. Xs/^yxa. 584-586. 
Aafip&VG), to take (Aa/3, ^v?)\ f ni- Mi JO f ial , P- fc'tA^a, 2 aor. £?m[3ov, &c, 

R. from AH'Bft. Ionic perf. AeAd/3/?/ca. Also of the same 

signification — 
Aa£o/uai } Tid^vfiaij dep. Ionic and Doric forms for lap flaw. 
Aav&avu), to be hid (a«i9-, /,##) ; f. /uyow, &c, R. from Pl?/i}g> ; £?r i?lgv$ dvo» 

[Mat (mid.), to forget; f. ?4<yo{j,at. 
Aovo, to wash (R. /toi>), in the Attic dialect generally omits by syncope 

the short vowel after ov; thus, eAav, e1ov{iev, /.ov/nac, 

Aovoftai, &c, for e/iove, e7„ovoiaei>, "faovofiai, ?uOi>£G&ai, &c. 
Aoveg), in some of it3 tenses occurs in Homer. 
Ad>, to will ; found only in the sing. A&, A?)f, a??, plur. /muec, ?mvti 7 Doric 

as if from AA'8, contracted like fdw, 559, Obs. 2. 



ML 

Mav#dv6>, to learn (/^a#, fia&e) ; fut. fia&T/GOfiai, p. /ze/zdi^/ca, &c, R. from 

MAGE'fl ; 2 aor. Efia&ov. 
M&xoftai, to fight {]i>a<X £ -> P ia x\ fut. fiaxv<yofiai and /LcaxeGOfiai, &c, R. from 

MAXE'OMAI. 
Mdw, an old form from which arise the three following defective verbs ; 

viz., 

1. Perf. fiEfiaa, to strive; with a present signification. 

2. Pres. m. fidofiac, contr. ju,<bju,ai, to desire, to seek. 

3. Fut. and 1 aor. m. jLcacrofiai, k[xacdfi7jv also from fiaiofiai, 

to seek. 



24-1 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

"M.ed-vGKcj, to intoxicate (R. fied-v) ; f. fied-bco, &c., from jlle&vo), s. s. 
MeAu, to care for Qie\ fishe); f. jLLEAyaco, from MEAE'Q, 2 aor. e/ieliov, 

perf. fiejiqla. In the active voice mostly impersonal, ^eA«, 

e/ieAe, &c. 669. 
Me/l/lw, to be about to be (R. jlleaae) ; f. jLLEAAqoo), &c, as from [ie7,aeg>. 
Mqtcdofiai, to bleat (j^clk, (itjk)\ f. firjudaofiac; 2 aor. ejuatcov, 2 perf. fiijuqua, 

part. JLlEjU71KG)C. 

Mtyvva, fiiyvvfii, filcryo, to mix (R. ^y) ; f. //££«, &c, from n'tyo, 2 aor. 

£/z^ from MITHMI. 
Miuvfono, to remind (R. fiva) ; fut. fivrjoo), &c., R. from ^i>d<y. 
MopywG), fidpyvvjui^ to wipe off (R. popy) ; f. ftop^o, &c, from MOTTO. 
Mvnaofiai, to bellow ; R. Doric forms, 2 a. e/livkov, 2 p. /ze/zu/ca, as if from 

MY'Kft. 

N. 

Na/d), intrans. to efo#e$ (R. va) ; f. vdco, &c, R. from vdo, trans, to cause 

to dwell. 
"Ni^o, to wash (R. vnr) ; f. vlxjjo, &c, from vittto, s. s. 
Nofw, to think; reg. is contracted and accented by the Ionics like (3odcj ; 

thus, f. voxjOj 1 a. kvcdoa 1 evevoto, &c. 



0. 

"Of 6), to sme# (R. 6d) ; f. boo, also oCecrw and b^ao, p. cj^m, &c, R. from 
'OZE'Q, 2 perf. oJa, with the Attic reduplication bdoda, 
with a present sense. 

02/wg), olyvvjui, to open (R. oq/) ; f. ol£ 6), &c, R. from otyw. See avoiyo. 

016a. See eMw, and 661. 

Oidaivo, olddvo, ol6lgko, to swell (R. olde)* f. o*c^<7g), &c, R. from oISeg), 
Th. s.s. 

Olouai, and o!/*(w, to #mw& (R. ol); f. olqoofiat, &c, as from oleofiai- 
imperf. oofirjv; 6<ta, with the diphthong resolved, is re- 
tained in some dialects. 

Oixouai, am gone (R. oi%)- imperf. &x eT0 < was gone, or went; f. o\xV GOm 
uat, p. idxW aL i R- as fro m OI'XE'OMAI. 

'OXiO'&aivG), bAta-d-dvo, to glide, slip (pAurft, oAlg^e); f. oTilo&tjgcd, &c, R. 
from oAlg'&eg), s. s. ; 2 aor. cj/tacr#oK 

'OTiXvfiiy bAAvfit, to destroy (o\ oae); f. oaegd, &c, R. from 'OAE'ft; Att. 
fut. a. b?.(b, m. bAov/iai, 2 aor. liAOfxrjv, perf. oAwAa. Other 
forms are oAAcj, oXeko, oaegko. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 245 

'Opwpi, bpvvo, to swear (1 R. bpo, bp, from *OM£2); f. bpoGu, &c. R. 

from 'OMO'8, with reduplication in the perfect, bpupoica ; 

f. m. bpovpat, from v OM£2. 
'OpLOpyvvU) bpopyvvpi, to wipe off (R. bpopy) • f. bpopZu, &c. R. s. s. as 

/uopyvvtj, which see. 
"Ovyfii, bvivTjfiL, to help (R. ova); f. ovtjgu, &c. R. from 'ONA'Q. 2 a. 

i)V7]pT]V. 

'Oppaivo, to rush (R. bppa) ; f. bpprjGo, &c. R. from opuaQ, s. s. 
'Opvvo } bpvvpi, to excite (R. 6/>); f. bpao (582), from *OP£2; f. 6p<y, from 

opw, 2 perf. bpopa ; hence a new present, opcro, s. s., and 

also bp6pu. 
*Oa<ppaivopai t to smell (R. oGcppa, bocppav) ; fut. oGtypavovpat, R. and bafypr}- 

Gopai, &c. R. from 'OH^PE'OMAI, 2 aor. iiG^poprjv j bocppa- 

opac late. 
Ovrdo, ovt&Zg)) OY'THMI, to 7wY, to wound (R. oi>ra) ; fut. obraocj arid 

ovttjgo, &c. R. from ovTao, infin. obrapevai, Horn, for 



ovravai. 



'Ctyf^ta), 5<fr/U), bfoiGtcavo, to owe; viz., money, punishment, i. e., to £e 
guilty (1 R. o^elae and 6</>A, 60e/l) ; f. b^etXyGG) and bcpAyGG), 
&c. R. from oqelaeo) and b(p?Io ; 2 aor. gj</>£/W, used only 
in the expression of a wish ; thus, «#' cj(pe?.ov } that I, 
d$ J Gxpelec, that thou, &c. 

'O^Xic/cdvw, to forfeit (1 R. 6^A, opAe) ; f. o^atjgco, p. cj^/bjvca, 2 aor. cj^/W. 



n. 

Ilatw, to stfnfte (R. 7ra^ and 7ra^) ; f. iraiGcj and 7racyGo ; the remaining 

tenses are from the root 7ra^. 
ndo-^6), to sw^er (1 R. 7ra#, Tre^tf); fut. m. TreiGopac (T3); 2 per£ 

ire7rov&a ; both from IIE'NGft ; 2 aor. eiradov. 
Uariopai, to taste, to eat (R. ttg, from IIA'fi); 1 aor. EnaGdprjv, p. p. 

ireiraGpai.- 
TLeggcj, to digest (R. 7T£7r); f. KEipo, &c. R. from tteitto, s. s. 
UerawvG), Trerawvpi, to expand (R. Trera) ; f. 7rerdcr6), R. from 7rer<26}, exc. 

p. p. TzeTrrapaL, which is from the syncopated form ttt&g). 

Other forms are 7rcTvdo and izirvrjfu^ s. s. 
UeTopai, KETapai, Tzerdopat, to fly (R. tteto,) ; f. izerrjGopa^ &c. R. from 

irerdopai ; 2 aor. ettttjv, from "nrTTjpi ; also p. p. 7rE7r6r^pac y 

from Trordopai ; by syncope ettetoptjv becomes ETtTdprjv, and 

bo of other tenses. 



246 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

Tl£(pvov. See <f>evo. 

TLrrywfjLi) izeyvvu, to fasten {pay, nyy) ; f. ttt/^cj, &c. R. from IIHTft ; 

2 perf. 7T€7T7jya, 2 a. pass, kizayqv. 
ILilvao, ^vtj/lli, to approach; s. s. as 7reld^a>, from which the other 

tenses are taken. 
TLt/nrXdvo and m/iirhj/it, to fill (R. II AA, whence Trifin'faiiii)] f. tzXtjgo, &c. 

R. from IIAA'Q = ttTit/'&o). "When, in composition, jll comes 

before the initial it in this word, the strengthening fi of 

irifi7rfa?[ii is omitted ; as, e/llttItt^/lli ; so also in 
HifiirpyfiL, to burn (R. rrpa) ; f. irprjoG), &c. R. from IIPA'ft = 7rpy-&G>. 
TLivo), to drink (tcl, wo), p. ninona, mid. neTzofiai, from IIO'G; 2 aor. 

etzlov, from nla), Th. ; imperat. commonly Trl-d-t, sometimes 

Trie ; fat. wio/iai, like eSo/uat, shall eat; Tuovjuai is also found. 

From this theme also comes 
TLnricrKC), to cause to drink (R. tti) ; f. ttigo), .&c. R. from ttIo. 
YlnrpdoKG), to sell (R. ?rpa, from IIPA'ft). The forms in use are WEwpdna, 

izeirpaticLL, ETrpd^rjv, 7rs7rpdaoftai, The future and aorist 

active are wanting. 
VLiirru, (Attic and poetic TriTvo,)to fall (I R. wet and wto); f. wEcovfJLat, 

1 a. eireaa (rare), from the ancient IIE'TQ; p. wEWTutia, 

from IITO'ft; 2 aor. ekeoov (for ettetov). 
II/la£6), to lead^astray (wlayy, wlay); f. irldyt-G), &c. R. from wldyyu. 
UXyaaOj to strike (1 R. wTijjy, irhay); f. ttItj^o, &c. R. exc. 2 aor. p. 

ETz/Jjyijv ; compounds regular throughout. 
IIPI'AMAI, to buy ; of which there is in use only 2 aor. Ewpidjuyv, as an 

aorist to LvEOjuai. 
Uw&dvofzai, to learn by inquiry (wEvd; wv-d-) • f. TCEvoofiai, &c. 2 aor. m. 

ETTv&ofiLTpj, perf. pass. w£7rvG/j,ai. 



P. 

'Pe^o, Epda, "EPrQ, to do (1 R. pey, fp/, £pc?) ; fut. pigo and fpfs), &c. R. 

2 perf. Eopya. 
'TeOj to flow (R. pev and pvs) ; f. psvao and pvyacdj p. Eppvqua, &c. R. 

from pi>£6>, 2 aor. pass. tppvTjv. 
'Vrjyvvfii, prjyvvo), tr. to &rea& (pT?/, pay) ; f. p^gj, &c. R. from pTjaaay (i. e. 

THTQ), s. s. 2 perf. ippoya, with intrans. signification, 

/am broken. 2 a. pass, kppdyrjv. 
'Vcjwv/zi, puwvo), to strengthen (R. po)-, f, paxrw, &c. R. from TO 'ft. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 247 



2/?£wi>6), cfiewvui, to extinguish (R. ff/3e); f. g^ego, &c. R. from cr/?eo; 

also p. sofam, egjSeg fiat, 2 a. Eofirjv, intr. to go out; from 

2BHML 
Zebu, to move, impel; reg. except that, like verbs beginning with p t 

it commonly doubles g after the augment, and, in the 1 

aor., omits cr, the tense-sign; thus, 1 aor. icaeva, mid. 

kooEva[ir]v, perf. pass. eggv/llcu (235, Obs). 
SnedavvvG), Gtcedavvvjui, gkiSv&g), gklSvtjiil, to scatter (R. cueda) ; fut. GKeda- 

<76), Attic G/cedu, &c. R. from cr/ceJdw; p. p. eGKedaGuat. 
2k£?,?m 7 to dry up (R. gke>, and a/c/la) ; f. gkeXu, p. eaic/jjKa, 1 aor. egk^Tui, 

2 aor. EOK/jrjv. 
Xfidcjj Gfiqg, &c. (251, 05s. 2), to w£pe (R. <r/za and GfiTjx)] f. g/j-t/go, <fcc. 

1 aor. p. ko(i7]x&'rn ; < t from glljjx^ s. s. 
IlTrevdo, to ma&e a libation (R. rxTreW) ; f. gtteigg), &c. R. (^3). 
2,TopswvG), GTopEwvut, to spread (R. Grope) ; f. GTopEGo, &c. R. from 

2TOPE'£2; also, 
J.rpowi'o, GrpidwvfiL, to spread (R. GTpo); f. G-puGo, &e. R. from 2TPO'£2, 

by metathesis and syncope from 2T0PE'G. 
2;rs/y. See £;£&>. 
2<0£6;, fa ^ave (R. c"«, <X6)d); f. cwo-w, &c. R. exc. 1 aor. pass. EGcd&rjv, 

instead of eg^g^tjv and EGaudrpj, from the older form 

00,60. 

T. 

TaXdcj, to fear (R. r/xi) ; f. tItjgg, &c, reg. from the syncopated form 

t?Ao, s. s. ; 2 aor. ErArp, from r/.y/ni. 
Te/jLVo, to cut (rE/Uy r/aa, and TfJ-T/)', fat. re/^GJ, reg. also f. t/ll7?go and 

Tfiij^G), from r/zdw and TfiT/yo' 2 aor. sra/xov and erenow, 

p. TETfllJKa. 

TspGOfiai, intr. to dry; 2 aor. inf. pass. repijvai and repGyfisvai, as if from 
Het/iov and etet/lmv, a defective 2 aorist used in Homer, to mee^ w#ft, to 
T//CTG), to 6ear (re/c) ; f . re^ta, &c. R. from TE'KQ ; 2 aor. ere/cov, 2 perf. 

T£70/Ca. 

Ttvo, riwvo, rivwfjU) to expiate (R. r/) ; f. t/ctcj, &c. R. from riG>. 
HirpaQ, ri-paivG), rirpTjiit, to bore (R. '/>«); f. rpyGo, &c. R. from 



248 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

TirpwcTco), to wound (R. rpo) ; f. rp6ca), &c, R. from rpdcj. 

T/)£^a), to run (I R. &pex and fya/*); Spajuovjaai, p. deSpdfirjm (549, ifoc.), 

2 aor. sdpapLov, poet, tipEtjofiai, i&peija. 
Tpvxu, to consume (R. rpvxo) ; 1 aorl ETpvx^aa, &c. 
Tvy^dw, to happen, to obtain (rvx, tevx)', fut. TEv^o/uai, 2 aor. etvxov, p. 

TETvxyna, late TETEvy/uai, etevx^ttv. — jtfoto. This verb must 

be carefully distinguished from the regular kindred verb 

tevxu, to prepare; fut. T£i>£w, &c, R. 



Y. 

'TTriaxvEOjua^ to promise (from Wo and e^); f. viroaxv^ofiat, &c. Se e ^ w * 



4>. 
Qayoftcu. Hellenistic future like Edojuai and irio/iat ; 2 aor. fyayov. See 

$acncG). See ^u*. 

4>£pw, to M (1 R. 0ev, <£av); 2 aor. izktyvov and sirstyvov; part. 7te<}>vg)v, 

accented on the penult, p. p. irEtyafiai, 3 f. p. TTEtyfoo/uat. 

Hence (pdvog, from root 0ov. 
$£/>6>, to 5ear; used in the pres. and imperf. (R. ol, eve*, and kvEyn\ 

f. oi(7o> (from OFS2), p. evjyvo^a; 1 f. pass. o\o-&rjoo[iaL\ 1 

aor. act. yvsyKa, for yvsyga, from 'ENETKQ, Attice com- 
monly yvEina, &c. ; 2 aor. qveyicov, from the same. 
$??/«, to sai/ (R. 0a); f. 0#<t<j; 2 aor. £0#v. See 660. 
$&avw, to come before, to anticipate (R. <p&a) ; f. (pd-acco or (fr&yGG), &c, R. 

from ^GA'ft, 2 aor. tyftrjv, from (p&qjui. 
Q&Ivq, to corrupt, to fall (R. 0#*)j £ $&' L ™, &c, R. from </>#/g>, s. s. ; other 

forms are fy&io&G), (pd-tvEu, and (pd-ivv&o, used in the pres. 

and imperf. 
Qpayvvc), (pp&yvvfu, to enclose (R. <ppay) ; f. (ppd^o, &c. R. from $PAT£2, 

same as fypaooid, s. s. 
<J>i>C w , to ^e«, to put to flight (R. ^uy); f. Qvt-o, &c, R. Other kindred 

forms are (f>vya) and (pEvyu, R. and it has the derivatives 

(j)v£ao) and (pv^fii. 
$>vptj, to mix, to knead (R. tyv p and 0i>pa) ; f. (pvpdaa), Ion. <pvpy<jG) • old fut. 

(pvpao)* 1 a. £(pvpoa; p. p. TTE^vp/iai and irEtybpa/Liai. 
$vw, to 6e<70£ (R. 0v); f. ^txrw, 1 aor. e^vcra. But the perf. irtyvna, and 2" 

aor. e0w, have a passive or intransitive signification, to &e 

begotten, to be, to become. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 249 



X. 

Xd£w, x av0 *<* VG) , t° recede, to stand open, to contain (R. x a &) ; fat. x^™, 
&c. R. from XA'Afl (s. s. with KA'Zft, whence nenac/wi. 
or Kenadjuai); 2 aor. txaSov anc * K&icadov, 2 perf. /ce^ada; 
derivatives and varieties of forms are numerous. 

Xaivu, x&gku, ^ac/cd^ to gape or yawn (R. x aLV ) i £ ;t av "» &c. R- from 
Xaivo), a derivative from XA'ft ; from which also kcl^co and 
^d^w; which see above. 

Xaipo, to rejoice (x aL P, later x ai P e i X a P) J £ X aL PV atd , &c, R. ; 2 a. p. 
kx&pyv, perf. mx^PW ai an d ^X a Pl iat - 

Xavdavo, to grasp (R. ^avd, #ev<J, *ad); £ m - X £ ' LGO l iaL (?3); 2 aor. 
ixadoVj 2 perf. Kexavda. 

Xac/co). See x a ' LV0) . 

Xf w, to _pow 0^£ (R. ^e^) ; f. x £ l' GQ i &c., R. 1 aor. e^et'cra and e^ea (by 
elision for fijewra); hence imperative ^eov, x e ^ T ^ &c, 
infinitive ;^£a* ; also f. ;t^ 7 ^eif, #£*, mid. x £0 P aL ' 

Xpau. This verb has five different forms, with as many different signi- 
fications ; root of all, xP a - 

1. xp&u, to give an oracular response ; regular. 

2. tuxpy/u, to lend; like tanya. 

3. xpVi it & necessary ; partly like verbs in pi (see Impers. 

Verbs, 667-672). 

4. xP ao P aL , to use; in the contracted tenses takes tj for a (559, 

Obs. 2). 

5. arroxpv, it suffices ; pi. a^oxpuGiv, inf. cnroxpyv, &c. 
Xpovvvo), xp&vvvpi, to color (R. XP )] £ XP&oVj &c. H. p. pass. «e- 

Xowvo, pw//<, to feap, to dam (R. #o) ; f. ^oktcj, &c. R. from ^dw, 
s. s. perf. pass. Kex^opai. 

a 

•Qtfew, to pwsft (R. wi9- and 6>#e), has the syllabic augment throughout ; 
thus, imp. kud-ow, f. waw and L^tjgq] 1 f. p. QG'&yGopat, 

11* 



250 THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS. 

INDECLINABLE WORDS OR PARTI- 
CLES. 

687. — The Indeclinable parts of speech, sometimes 
denominated Particles, are those which suffer no change 
of form by inflection. They are the Adverb (which in- 
cludes the Interjection}, the Preposition, and the Con- 
junction. 

THE ADVERB. 

688. — An Adverb is a word joined to a 
verb, an adjective, or another adverb, to modify 
it, or to denote some circumstance respecting it. 

Adverbs may be considered in respect of Signification, 
Derivation, and Comparison. 

THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS. 

680. — In respect of signification, adverbs may be 
ranged in Greek as they are in Latin and other languages, 
under the following heads : — 

690. — Adverbs of Place ; comprehending those 
which signify, 

1st. Rest in a place. — These generally end in &t, <n, ou, 

7j, oi, x 00 ) X r i\ as 5 <t-YP°$ l i ^ n the field. 

2d. Motion from a place. — These generally end in &sv 
or $e; as, dyp6$ev,fro?n the field. 

3d. Motion to a place. — These generally end in de, <rz, 
Ce ; as, dypovde, to the field. (709.) 

All the above three classes are relics of ancient forms 
of case-endings. 

4th. Motion through or by a place. — These are gener- 
ally feminine adjectives in the dative singular, having 6d<p 
understood ; as, aMy, by another way. 



THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS. 



251 



691. — Adverbs of Time ; as, vw> 9 now ; rare, then ; 
rroW, at o?ie time. 

692. — Adverbs of Quantity ; noaov, how much ; 
tzoXu, much ; dkiyov, a little, &g. 

693. — Adverbs of Quality ; these end in </^; 
oorajq, thus / sometimes in a and # (which are properly 
datives of the first declension) ; also in tj, i, et, dov, o-qv, an, 
and ?. 

694. — Adverbs of Wanner (viz., of action or 
condition) ; including those which express exhortation, 
affirmation, negation, granting, forbidding, interrogation, 
doubt, &c. 

693 . — Adverbs of Relation / or such as express 
circumstances of comparison, resemblance, order, assem- 
blage, separation, &c. 

696. — Adverbs of Exclamation; in other lan- 
guages usually denominated Interjections. (See 697, 
Obs. 2.) 

69 7. — Observations. 

Obs. 1. Some adverbs have such an affinity, that, be- 
ginning with a vowel, they are relatives ; with tz, inter- 
rogatives; with r, demonstratives, or responsives, as 
follows : 



BEL ATI VE. 



t „ ( which way. 

( by what means. 
ore, ottSte, Tjvina, when. 

hftev, oTrd&eVj whence, 
ov, or ode, where, 
bcov, how much, 
olov, of what sort, 
ocatag, liow often. 



INTEBEOGATIVE. 

which vjay f 
by what means? 
ttotc, TiTjviaa^ when? 



*ft j 



iTodev, whence f 
7ro£>, or TZO-&L, where f 
tzogov, how much ? 
ttoJov, what sort off 
Troadfug , hoio often ? 



DEMONSTBATIVE. 

ryde or j this way, or 
ravrri, ( by this means. 
t6te, TTjviKa, T7jviKavra 1 

then, 
rod-ev, thence, 
rd&i, there. 
t6gov, so much. 
toIov, of such a sort. 
tocclklc, so often. 



252 FORMATION OF ADVERBS, 

Obs. 2. Under adverbs in Greek are classed those par- 
ticles of exclamation" which express some sudden emotion 
of the mind, and are, in the grammars of most other 
languages, denominated Interjections. The most common 
of these are the following, which express 

Rejoicing ; as, :ot>, 16. Condemning ; as, a>, <peo. 

Grieving ; as, lob^ w, <pea> Admiring ; as, w, ftaj3cu\ 
Laughing y as, a, a. izaizai. 

Bewailing; as, a?, o?, l<6 9 Deriding * as, lob, w y o. 

droroJ. Calling / as, <I>. 

Wishing / as, el, el&e. Enjoining silence; as, ij y rj. 

Rejecting ; as, a^ays. Threatening * as, o*W. 

Praising / as, ela, eS^e. Maging y as, e&o?. 



THE FORMATION AND DERIVATION 

OF ADVERBS. 

698. — A few adverbs in Greek are primitives / as, 

v£v, now * zap-ai, on the ground ; /#^<r, yesterday. 

But the greater part are derivatives, and are of two 
classes. 

699. — The first class of derivatives consists of 
such words as are not strictly speaking adverbs, but are so 
denominated from being sometimes used in an adverbial 
sense, either by virtue of their signification, or by ellipsis 
for an adverbial phrase ; of these the following are exam- 
ples: — 

700. — The accusative of neuter adjectives ; as, npcbrov, 
first ; to npaJTov, za npaJTa, at the first / rd [xdktaTa, chief - 
ly ; 6£0, sharply. 

701. — The oblique cases of nouns and pronouns ; as, 

Gen. o/£ol>, together ; from (fy^c, united. 

ovda/ioU) nowhere ; from ouda t u6<; y no one. 



FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 253 

Dat. xvxXu), around (i. e., in a circle) ; from xuxXo^^ a 
circle. 
rd%ei, swiftly, with siciftness ; from ~a/o<r, swift- 
ness. 
Ace. &px r j v and d.pydq (sup. xaza),from the beginning, 
hence, in negative clauses, not at all / from 
«/o^7, beginning, 
daajv, as, like / from £6^, manner. 
702. — Verbs are sometimes used as adverbs ; thus, 
The imperative ; as, ayt, i&e, Ids, &c. 
The second aorist active ; as, oyeAov, a>e~Aov j from 
6<peiXo). 

The present optative of elfi£\ viz^ ehv, so be it, very 
well. 

Obs. 1. To these may be added — : 

1st. Nouns compounded with prepositions ; as, £x-oSd», 
out of the ivay. 

2d. Prepositions united together ; as, r.apix, aside from. 

3d. Prepositions joined with adverbs ; as, k'-zt-a, then, 
afterward. 

703. — The second class of derivatives consists 
of such words as have undergone a change of form, and 
are used only in an adverbial sense. These are so numer- 
ous and varied in form and derivation, that a perfect 
classification cannot be given. The following, as most 
important, may be noticed ; viz., 

704:. — Adverbs in coq express a circumstance of 
quality or manner, and are for the most part formed from 
adjectives by changing oq of the nominative or genitive 
into cos; as, (puwz, from <piXo<z; <jco<fp6vwq, from ewepcuv, 

gen. <J(l><fpovoq. 

705. — Adverbs in t, or ec, express a circumstance of 
manner, and are generally formed from nouns; as, avatfisi, 
without bloodshed ; abzo^tpi, with one's own hand. 



254 FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 

706. — Adverbs in re and ret are formed from the 
verbal adjectives in roq and rioq ; thus, dvojxadri, by name / 
fotdpiori, without sweating. So also those in Stjv (the 
characteristic of the verb being changed, when necessary, 
according to the laws of euphony, 56) ; thus, from ftaroq 
is formed /Sactyv, by steps (from fidw) ; from GoXXrjKToq^ 
<rulA7jj3d7]v, collectively ; from xpoirrdq^ xpuftdyv, secretly, &c. 
Sometimes the termination ddyv is added; as, (rnopadyv, 
scattered. 

707 . — Adverbs in ten come from verbs in c'£>, derived 
from nouns signifying a nation, party, or class, and signify 
after the manner, language, &c., of such a nation, &c. ; 
as, 'EXXyvtart, after the manner of the Greeks / avSpanodtazt, 
after the manner of a slave. 

708. — Adverbs in dov and ydov are for the most part 
derived from nouns, and relate chiefly to external form 
and character; as, dyeXrjdov, in herds ; ^orpodov, in clusters, 
as grapes. 

Note. — If derived from verbal adjectives, they agree in signification 
with those in 6tjv • as, avacpavdov, openly. 

709. — Adverbs denoting certain relations of place are 
formed by the addition of certain syllables to the words 
from which they are derived ; viz., In a place is denoted 
by the terminations St, at, ou, rj, oc, %ou, and -pi \ f r <>ni a 
place, by #ev or &e ; and to a place, by de, as, and fe. 

710. — JExc. — Adverbs of place, derived from preposi- 
tions, express the relations of in a place and to a place by 
the termination w ; thus, 

IN A PLACE. TO A PLACE. FROM A PLACE. 

avw, above, avw, upwards. avwftev, from above (from 

xdriOy below, xdrw, downwards. xdrw$£v,from below (from 

xard). 



INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES. 255 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

711. — Adverbs derived from adjectives compared by 
repoq and raroc, are compared by changing oq of these 
terminations into coq ; as, 

Go<pa>$ Go<pw:£puj$ Gocftjrdrws, from Go<po~. 

712. — Adverbs derived from adjectives, compared by 
(a)v and Hjroq, commonly take the neuter singular of the 
comparative and the neuter plural of the superlative for 
their comparative and superlative ; thus, 

alaypaiq ai<j%iov atayiGTa, from alaypoq. 

Note 1. This mode of comparison is also used, though more rarely, for 
those derived from adjectives compared by repog and rarog ; as, 

Godcjg Goo6repov Godorara 

Note 2. The accusative neuter of adjectives, both singular and plural, 
is sometimes used adverbially in all the degrees. To the superlative 
degree the article is frequently prefixed ; as, rb tt/^Igtov (sup. Kara). 

713. — Adverbs in w, formed from prepositions, are 
compared by adding zipm and rdraj ; as, «>o», dvcor(pu)^ 
d^wrdraj. So also prepositions in the sense of adverbs ; as, 

d~6 f d~u)T(puj. 

Note. — Some other adverbs imitate this mode of comparison; as, 
hp/vq, bp/vrkpu, eyyvraro] yet as often otherwise; thus, comparative 
kyyvrepov, and tyytw, superlative eyyiara. 



INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTI- 
CLES. 

714:. — Certain pavticles, never used by themselves, 
but prefixed to words by composition, affect the significa- 
tion of the words with which they are compounded, as 
follows : — 



256 PREPOSITIONS. 

715. — The particle a (which becomes av before a 
vowel) has three different significations : 

1st. It marks privation (from aveu, without) ; as, 
avodpoq^ without icater. 

2d. It denotes increase (this rare and doubtful) ; 
as, a^okoq^ much wooded. 

3d. It denotes tmion (answering to ap.a, together) ; 
as, aXo%o<;, a consort. 

710. — "Apt, £'/>£, /2oS, /?/??, dd, £«, Aa, l( 9 and sometimes 
vrj and vi 9 increase the signification; as, S^og, manifest y 
apidrjkoi;, very manifest, &c. 

7 J 7. — My and vi generally express privation or 
negation j as, vrjmoq, an infant, from v^' and e^o; (encq), 
speak/ but 

JSfcc. — Nyj in some special instances seems intensive ; 
as, vTJzurog, that flows in afidl stream^ from wj and^^. 

7iS. — ^£s has the meaning of difficult, bad, hard; 

as, duGfievtjq, malevolent / <5oGTo%iu>, I am unhappy. 

Note. — The opposite of dvg is ev (which is often used separately). It 
signifies well, happily, easily; as, evfjLevrjg, benevolent; evrvxelv, to be 
fortunate. 

THE PREPOSITIONS. 

719. — A Peeposition is a word winch shows 
the relation between a noun or pronoun follow- 
ing it, and some other word in the sentence. 

720. — The primary use of prepositions seems to 
have been to indicate the relations of one thing to another 
in respect of place. From this, by a natural and easy 
analogy, they are used to express similar relations in 
respect of time. 



PEEPOSITIONS. 257 

721. — From their primary use in expressing relations 
of place and time, they are used by analogy to express 
various other relations among objects, in all of which the 
primary use of the word may easily be traced. 

722. — All prepositions ending with a vowel, except 
&/jL<pt\ nepi y and npo, reject the final vowel when compounded 
with, or standing before, a word beginning with a vowel ; 
atxipi generally retains i, but there are many exceptions. 
It is always rejected before the augment e. Upo before e 
sometimes combines with it by contraction ; thus, npd 
epyoo becomes npoupyou. (485, Obs. 1.) 

723. — There are eighteen prepositions, prop- 
erly so called, in the Greek language ; of these 

Four govern the Genitive only, viz., 9 Avrc\ dno, £x or 
££, npd. 

Two govern the Dative only, "Ev, gov. 

Two govern the Accusative only, Elq or £<r, and avd. 

Four govern the Genitive and Accusative, Aid, xard, 
fierd, DTzip. 

Six govern the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, y A/j^{, 
nepi, hti, napd, npoq, and uno. 

724:. — Prepositions vary in meaning according to the 
case which they govern. With the Genitive, they 
have the idea of origin, separation, and possession / with 
the Dative, that of association ; with the Accusative, 
that of motion and tendency toward ; as, nap t[±ou,from 
me ; nap Itxoi, with me / nap" £p.£, toward me. 

725. — All the prepositions are regularly oxytone 
(except eiq, h, and &, proclitic) ; as, bnkp toutwv ; but 
become paroxytone — i. e., draw back their accent — if they 
follow the word which they govern ; as, rourwv unep. 



258 PREPOSITIONS. 



LIST OF PREPOSITIONS ACCORDING 
TO THEIR CASES. ' 

7£tf.— Prepositions with the Genitive. 
'Avriy aizdy lx or £?, and npo. 

Primary signification; over against, opposite, in front of. Hence (over 
against in exchange or barter), instead of for ; as, 6 C,(hv avrl rov reOvrjud- 
toc, the living instead of the dead, avrl tovtuv, for these things. 

In composition ; equality, substitution, &c. 

728.— 'Air6. 

Removal or distance from, away from; as, a7T7/X&ov cltto rye irSleag, 
they went away from the city. Hence, source ; as, evils spring arrb rov 
ttoaejuov, from war; cltto 66 j3ov, from fear. 

In composition ; departure, removal, &c. 

729.— 'E/c or If. 

Out from, out of; as, en ttjc irdleuc, out of the city. Hence, in conse- 
quence of (as growing out of); en tovtcov, in consequence of these things, and 
after (out of in time). 

In composition: out of; hence, removal, selection, completion (a thing 
carried clear out). 

730.—Ilp6. 

Before, in front of 

Before in place ; as, Tvpb rye rroTieoc, before the city. 

Before in time; as, wpb rrjc fyiepac, before the day. 

Before in rank; as, npb e/uov, before, above me. 

Before tor protection; as, rrpb rf/c Trarpidoc, for one's country. 

In composition . priority, forth, forward. 



PREPOSITIONS. 259 

731.— Prepositions with the Dative. 

'iiV, GOV. 

732.—'^. 

In; (in a multitude) among; as, kv tQ irorafi^ in the river ; kv rovrcp 
t$ xpovu, in this time. 

In morally or potentially ; as, ravrd kcruv kv fjfjuv, these things are in 
us ; i. e., dependent on us, or in our power. 

In, the sphere of; as, I exchange this in that, within the sphere of that; 
hence, rendered for; as, a7C/<A$-ao$ai ryv a/^&eiav kv ipevdst, to exchange 
truth for (the exchange lying within the sphere of) falsehood. 

Similarly in composition. 

733. — 2w, Attic avv. 

With (implying association and accompaniment)-, as, ovv rC) Trarpi, 
along with my father ; ovv role deolg, with {the aid of) the gods. 

In composition: with, together; as, ovvepxovra^ they come together, 
or, come with (some one, rm); ovfifiaAXeL, it casts together with, con- 
tributes. 

734.— Prepositions with the Accusative. 

'Ava (in prose), eec, u>q. 

735. — 'Ava, up. 

'Ava poov, up a stream. Up along, hence over; as, ava tt)v yfjv, over y 
throughout the land; ava izavra rbv xpovov^ over, throughout the whole 
time. 

In Epic poetry with the dative, on ; as, ava. GurjirTpid, on a sceptre. 

In composition* up, hack; as, avaospeiv.to bear back, refer ; avafiMwetVj 
to look up, and to recover sight; hvaXveiv, to loose back, unloose, resolve. 

736.— Me. 

Into (sv-c, euphonic change, sic). 

Of place; as, elg 'Ira/Aav, into Italy. 

Of time ; as, elc ea, into, until morning. 

Of tendency ; as, elc ravra, into (so as to produce) these things ; and 

Of purpose ; as, elc ravra ) into, for these things. 

In composition : into. 

737.- -'Of. 
To, only with persons ; as, uc kfie, to me. 



260 PKEPOSITIOISTS. 



738.— Prepositions with the Genitive and 

Accusative. 

Aid^ Kara, p.erd^ dnip. 

739.— Am. 

Primary signification : through (implying separation, di, dis-, Svo). 

74:0. — With Genitive : through. 

Of place; as, Sid rrjc donidoc, through the shield. 

Of time ; as, Sid ttjc vvaroc, through the night. 

Of means; as, Sid rov ayyekov, through, by means of, the messenger. 

Idiomatically, Sid (f)6/3o)v, through = in the midst of fears. 

7£1. — "With Accusative: through (poetic); as, Sid S6fiara, through 
the dwellings , chiefly, on account of; as, did ravra, on account of these 
things. 

In composition: through, completeness; and through, separation; 
hence, pre-eminence. 

74t2.- -Kara. 

Down (opposite of dvd, up). 

743. — With Genitive : down from (chiefly poet.), Kara r&v Tirrpov, 
down from the rocks ; down in respect to, x^ uv vSup Kara x £L P° c i t° pour 
water down in respect to = upon the hand; hence, morally, down in re- 
spect to, against; as, ?ieyeiv Kara rivoc, to speak against any one. 

744. — With Accusative: at, over against, according to (the most 
general relation); as, Kara yrjv nal -ftakaaaav, by land and sea; Kara ravra, 
according to these things; Kara rovg vdjiovg, according to the laws; tear* 
knelvov rov xpovov, at that time. 

In composition: down; as, Karapaiveiv, to go denvn. Often simply 
intensive; as, Karanaietv, to burn up. 

745.— Merd. 

In the midst of {jieoog), among, in connection with. 

740. — With Genitive: among ; as, /nerd venp&v, among the dead. In 
connection with (more common); as, fief kuov, in connection with me. 

747 . — With Accusative : into the midst of (poet.); as, fierd Sai/uovag, 
into the midst of the divinities. More commonly, after, next to ; as, fiera 
ravra, after these things (in time) ; fierd rovrovg, next to these (in place), 
or next after, in rank or order. 

74S. — In the poets, fierd takes the dative; as, per' dvSpdoi, among 
men. 



PREPOSITIONS. 261 

In composition : among, sharing, imparting, and often change ; as, fiera- 
Pa?JiD, fierotnelv, to dwell among, or, to change one's residence. 

Over, above. 

750. — With Genitive: over, of rest in place; as, vizep rye ndleuc, 
over or above the city. Over for protection, on behalf of (most com- 
mon) ; as, vwep rfjq irarpidog, on behalf of my country. Hence, more gen- 
eral, in relation to; as, Myo> virep tovto/v^ I speak on behalf of, or in rela- 
tion to these things. 

751. — "With Accusative : over, beyond, of motion; as, virep ryv ftalao- 
cav, over, beyond the sea. Hence, morally ; as, virep tivvayuv, beyond my 
ability. 

So in composition : excess, beyond; as, virep /3aivecv, overpass. 



752.— Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, 

and Accusative. 

*Afi<pt^ irri) izapd^ izepi^ izpo^^ v~6 t 

753. — 'A//p£ (amb. afz^co, both). 

On both sides of, about. 

754. — With Genitive : about, concerning (nearly as nepi) ; as, heyo 
aucf>l rovrov, I speak about this. 

755. — With Dative (poet, and Ionic): about, concerning, on account 
of; as, afMj)! (popu, on account of fear. 

756. — With Accusative : about, of place, time, employment, &c. ; as, 
CLfufi ra bpv, about the mountains ; afitpl rovrov rbv xptivov, about this time ; 
afjupit tcl lepd (employed) about the sacred rites. 

In composition: about, around. 

757. — tfhd, upon. 

758. — With Genitive: upon, of place, with rest; as, nelrac eirl rye 
Tpairk^nc, it lies on the table. Of time (figuratively) ; as, eft yftov, upon 
us = in our time ; eirl rrjc aXn-d-eiag, on the (basis of) truth. 

759. — With Dative: upon; as, eirl rff yff, on the earth. Close upon; 
as, eirl r<3 irora/Ltti, on, close by the river. Dependent or conditioned upon; 
as, eirl rale diad-ynatc, on condition of the covenants; kfti rti ade/jpti, de- 
pendent on his brother. 

7SO. — With Accusative: upon, with motion; as, ireaelv eirl ryv yrjv^ 
to fall upon the earth. Upon = against, to come ; as, eirl rovg izo'ke[ilovg 1 
upon, against the enemy ; enl itoTlv, to a great distance. 

In composition: upon, toivard, after, &c. 



262 PREPOSITIONS. 



701. — Uapd, beside. 

702. — With Genitive : from the side of, from (as source) ; as, eWelv 
irapa PacriXeog, to come from the king. Hence, as vtzo, for agent ; as, 
knpax&y irap' k/uov, it was done by me. 

703. — With Dative: by the side of beside, with; as, irapa ru Trarpi, 
by or with my father, at his side, or, where he lives. 

With, morally ; as, ravrd hart aaha irap y y/uv, this is honorable with us, 
or in our opinion. ' 

704:, — With Accusative: to or toward the side of; as, Trape?^slv 
irapa tov Tiaov, to come forward to the people. Then, aside from ; as, napa 
tov vdfiov, aside from, in violation of law ; rrapd <]>v<jiv, contrary to nature. 

In composition : beside, along, beyond, in violation of, &c. 

765* — Tie pi, around. 

70S* — With Genitive: about, concerning; as, ?^yo) irepl gov, I speak 
concerning you. In Homer, above. 

707* — With Dative: round about, close around; as, ^uvq irepl tg) cro>- 
fiari, a girdle around the body. 

70S* — With Accusative : about, around (more loosely); as, irepl to, 
6pn, about the mountains ; izepl ravra, about, in reference to these things. 

In composition : around, over (excellency). 

709* — Tlpog (irpo-c). 

In front of, looking toward. 

770* — Genitive: in front of; as, Kelaftai irpbc Qpdn7)c, to lie over 
against, fronting Thrace; irpbc fteuv, on the part of the gods, looking to- 
ward the gods (in swearing) ; irpbc tov irarpoc, on the part of the father. 

771* — With Dative: close upon, then at; as, irpbc Ba(3v?icjvi., at 
Babylon. Hence, in addition to ; as, irpbc tovtoic, in addition to these. 

77#« — With Accusative: to, toward, against; as, epxovTat irpbg yitac, 
they came to us; irpbc. poppav, toward the north. In respect to; as, ra 
irpbg apETTjv, the things pertaining to virtue. 

In composition : to, toward, against, &c. 

773.— T™, under. 

Under (opposite of vire p, over). 

774. — With Genitive: of place, under; as, virb tt}c yfjg, under the 
earth. Generally with the agent with passive verbs ; as, airenTadq virb 
t(iov, he was slain by me. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 263 

775. — "With Dative: close under, at the foot of; as, vtto tg3 teixel, 
under, at the foot of the wall; vrcb rti ovpavC), under the heaven, 

770, — "With Accusative : motion under ; as, to run, vtto rrjv rparre^av, 
under the table. So, toward under ; as, vtto to dpog, toward under, near 
the foot of the mountain. Hence, vrrb vvfcra, toward night. 

In composition : under, secretly, slightly, gradually. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

777 . — The preposition, as its name imports, usually stands before 
the word which it governs. "When it comes after it, as it sometimes 
does, this is indicated by the change of the accent from the last syllable 
to the first. 

77 S. — In composition, with a word beginning with a vowel, and 
generally when standing before such a word, the final vowel of the 
preposition is dropped, and, if the next preceding letter be a consonant, 
it is subject to the changes required by the laws of euphony; thus, arrb 
iavrov must be written aft eavrov. Repl, however, never drops its final 
vowel, and e/c never changes its final letter except before a vowel, when 
it is changed into eg. 

7'7^» — The preposition alone, with the accent thrown back to the 
first syllable, is sometimes used for certain compounds, of which it forms 
a part ; thus, evi is used for evean, it is possible ; rzkpL, for Trepieon, it is 
superfluous ; ava t for avacTTJ-d-t, arise ; Trapa, for Trdpeart, he is present 



THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

780. — A Conjunction is a word wliicli con- 
nects words or sentences. 

781* — Conjunctions, according to their different mean- 
ings, are divided into different classes, of which the fol- 
lowing may be noticed ; viz. : — 

782. — Connective : as, xa( 9 rf, and; in poetry, $di % 
idi y 7jfi.ii>, and / d£, and, 

783. — Disjunctive: as,^', ^Vo<; in poetry, ^ ; and 
sometimes ijyouV) 7)7:00, or, 

784. — Concessive : as, xfo, even if; xair^p, el xat, 
although. 



264: CONJUKCTIONS. 

785. — Adversative : as, &AM, M 9 ardp^ but ; y(, at 
least ; p.h, indeed \ to be sure / tiivro^ yet, &c. 

786* — Catisal, assigning a reason for something said 
or the purpose of an act ; as, yap, for ; ore (in poetry, 
ouvexa), because; fva, onajq, 6<ppa (poet.), in order that; 
&<;, as (or that) ; on, that ; axrrs, so as', or so that (marking 
result, not purpose) ; e*nep 9 precisely if = provided that; 
in el, since, after, that. 

787* — Conclusive > or such as are used in drawing a 
conclusion, or inference from something previously said ; 
as, apa, so then / ouv, then, now; Sc6, dio7zep, wherefore; 
Srj, now, you see ; roivuv, \>b or vbv, therefore ; rotyapouv 
(emphatic), therefore / ooxouv, not then ; obxouv, therefore. 

788. — Conditional ; as, el, kdv (ijv, av), in poetry, al, 
afxe, if; e'lnep, precisely if, provided that. 

Adverbial and Conjunctive Particles. 

The following remarks on the signification and 
use of certain adverbial and conjunctive parti- 
cles, will be useful for reference. For more ample infor- 
mation on this subject, the student is referred to works 
on the Greek particles, to the best lexicons, and his own 
careful observation. 

789.— A AAA'. 

790* — 'A/Ma is adversative, and commonly answers to the English 
but. It is sometimes used elliptically, to indicate confidence or readiness, 
and may be rendered '"well, then? therefore. Thus, claTC ev io&i, ore e^el 
rovd-' ovtoc, Well then, know that this will be so = ovk oKvyao, clTJa! &c, 
/ will not be unwilling, but, on the contrary, knoio that this will be so. 

70 1* — 'A/Ma yap. Thus combined, yap introduces a reason for the 
opposition expressed by alia ; as, alia yap Kpiovra Ievgod, navou rove 
TzapEGTuTaq ?^6yovc, But / will stop the present discourse, for / see Creon 
coming. Sometimes, however, the reference is more latent, and a clause 
is to be supplied from what precedes ; thus, Plato, alia yap ev gSov 
61k7/v duaofiEv, where there must be supplied from the preceding sentence, 



CONJUNCTIONS. 265 

ova aCy/uoL airaXka!;0[iEv, But wc shall not escape unpunished, for we shall 
render satisfaction in Hades. Sometimes the reference is to a succeeding 
clause, and sometimes to some general remark which the connection 
and sense of the passage will readily suggest, such as, But this is not 
surprising, for; But this is not impossible, for, &c. 

792, — 'AAAd ye restricts with emphasis that which is general to 
something more special ; as, a/JJ ova av aypoittog ye, oio/uai, Zoidopr/aeiav, 
But at least they would not, I think, revile us in a rude manner. 

793, — 'A/U' ovv ye. When these particles are combined, they usu- 
ally intimate that along with the opposition expressed by d/lAd, a conse- 
quence of what has preceded is also expressed ; thus, alTJ ovv tovtqv 
ye rbv xpovov tjttov aqdyg eoo/zai. Yet I shall FOR THIS REASON now AT 
least be less disagreeable. 

794:, — 'Alia joined with ohSe strengthens the negative; as, oaX 
ovds neipacofiai, Nay, I will not even try." In such sentences, oh p.6vov oh 
may be supplied, equivalent to, i" will not only not do it, but i" tviU not 
even try. 

795* — 'A/2d receives vivacity from rol-, as, aA/J tjSv rot, $v avlbg 
trapy, Why, it is a pleasant thing, you see, if, &c. 

fQQ—»AN (Poet. KE or KEN). 

797 • — *Av may be called a modal adverb. It can scarcely be sepa- 
rately defined, but gives conditionally to a verb ; thus, edom, I gave ; 
eScjua av, I should have given ; ?ieiipaifj.i,, let me leave ; ?£iipai{u av, I might 
leave. It is united with several particles (coalescing with them where 
the form of the word admits of it ; as, ore av, brav\ relative pronouns, 
and adverbs, in connection with the subjunctive mood ; thus, el /xiirei, 
if Tie leaves; eav (si, av) Astiry, if he leo/ce; ore izoleI, when he does; brav 
ftoiri, when Tie may do; bg ?isyei, he vSho speoJks; bg av %etj% whoever may 
ha,ve spoken. So irpiv, izplv av ; bizov, bizov av ; eTrecSy, itrsidav (iTTsidi} 
av), and many others, all used with the subjunctive mood. 

798, — "With relative pronouns and adverbs, the av give3 the force 
of the Latin cunque ; as, bg av, whoever ; b-nrov av, wherever. 

799, — This modal adverb av must be carefully distinguished from 
the compound particle av, if, similar in form, but made up of el, if, and 
the modal adverb ; thus, el av becomes eav, r/v, or av, all three being 
varieties of the same form. This compound particle is made up of the 
modal adverb and el, means if, is confined to the subjunctive mood, and 
regularly begins a clause ; the modal adverb av is simple, is used with the 
past tenses of the indicative, and with all the other moods (except the 
imperative, with which it is found only by a violent ellipsis), and never 
12 



266 CONJUNCTIONS. 

begins a clause; thus, eyevsro av, he would have become; av (or eav, or 
rjv) yevvrat, if he shall have become. 

800, — The modal adverb av is used with the optative as above ; as, 
yevoiro, may he become; y evoi.ro av, he may, might, would, wiU become, 
often used as qualified form of a decided statement. 

801, — With the infinitive and participles it gives a contingent 
signification, which may be often resolved by changing the verb or par- 
ticiple into the optative with av ; as, olovrat, avajLidxead-at av, they think 
thai they could retrieve themselves ; rdXka oiotvcj, tt6aX av ex^v elnelv, I 
omit the rest, though I have much to say. 

802, — "Av is frequently repeated, either on account of its standing 
at a great distance from the verb, or to bring out, in different parts of 

the sentence, the idea of conditionality suggested by it ; arac av 

— Xeyoiya av, stationing myself / would say. 

80S, — It is sometimes used, to intimate that the verb in the preced- 
ing clause is to be repeated ; as, el dq rw cofcorepoc tiaijjv elvai, tovtg) av 
(sc. (pair/v elvai oofyurepoc), If now I should affirm that I were wiser in any 
thing, it would be in this. 

804.— APA— "APA. 

80S, — "Apa, denoting inference or conclusion, always stands after 
some word in its clause; its proper signification is "of course," "in the 
nature of things" and is commonly rendered therefore, consequently ; it is 
used m the successive steps of a train of reasoning; as, " If there are 
altars there are also gods;" gXKcl ju^v elac /Sojuoi- elclv apa ml fteoi, But 
there certainly are altars ; there are then also gods. It is used in making 
a transition to what follows in the order of time or events, or in the 
progress of thought. With el or edv it expresses conjecture; as, el apa 
dbvavrai,, ^/"indeed (i. e., in the course of things) they can. Sometimes it 
serves for an emphatic asseveration as if founded on an inference. 

806. — The adverb apa is different from this, though originally iden- 
tical with it, and thus asking a question as based on the attendant or 
preceding circumstances. It is merely an interrogative particle, like the 
Latin num or utrum, and commences the clause; as, apa Kardch/Aov o 
pouAouat Aeyeiv, Is, then, what I wish to say evident ? When a negative 
answ er is expected, it has generally the particle fiy annexed. The Latin 
nonne is expressed by dp* cv, and sometimes by apa alone. 

807.—rA'P. 

808, — Tap, for, always follows other words, like the Latin enim, 
which it resembles in signification, and for which at the beginning of a 



CONJUNCTIONS. 267 

sentence kcu yap, like the Latin etenim, is often used. It assigns a rea- 
son for what is said. Yery often, however, it supposes an ellipsis ; as, 

Yes. No, no wonder, I believe, I cannot, &c.; as, for example, in the 
answer so common in Plato, ean yap ovro), Yes, or certainly, foe so it is. 
Thus, Homer, Od. 10, 501, T i2 Kipic?], rig yap Tavrrjv bdbv yye/uovevGEL, 

Circe (I cannot go thither), for ivho will guide me on this way f From 
this interrogative use it came sometimes to be used merely to strengthen 
a question, like the Latin nam in quisnam. 

809. — In such expressions as nal yap, alia yap, the former particle 
indicates the omission of something of which yap assigns a cause ; thus, 
Kal yap, strictly translated, means and (no wonder) for ; and (it is natu- 
ral) for, and the like. For the rendering of alia yap, see alia, T91. 
The force of yap may frequently be well given in English by well or 
why; i. e., these particles indicate the same ellipsis in English as is 
indicated in Greek by yap. 

810.— TE\ 

Te (enclitic) is a particle of limitation, and signifies at least, certainly, 
particularly, and is used to single out and emphasize an individual object 
among a number ; as, el fiy blov, juepog ys, if not the whole, AT least a 
part; eycjye, I indeed, I at least. In many combinations, it can hardly 
be better rendered into English than by a sharp intonation. 



811.— AE. 

The particle Si, but, and, is continuative, with a very slight, often im- 
perceptible, disjunctive force. It hence may be rendered by either and 
or but, and it very often makes but a slight difference which. Transla- 
tors often render it but where and would be much better. It never need 
be, and never should be rendered by any thing else than one of these, 
and it should never be omitted (except when it stands by special idiom 
pleonastically in the apodosis of a sentence). At the beginning of a sen- 
tence following the article, it introduces a change of the subject ; thus, 
elet-e 6e, and he said, viz., the one before spoken of; but, 6 6s elege, but 
he, the other, said. 

812.— AE. 

Afy from f/dy, now, at the moment, already, signifies now, at once, then 
passes over into an adverb of spirit and emphasis ; as, rovro 6rj, this now, 
this you see ; StjIov 6%, it is clear now, it is clear indeed, and thus not 



268 CONJUNCTIONS. 

unfrequently heightens strong affirmations. Uov softens it so that drj ttov 
is surely I suppose. Aij, ftfjv, and ye differ somewhat, thus : Ay is a par- 
ticle of vivacity and emphasis; as, rovro 6y, this now, this surely ; /n.yv y 
assuredly, moreover, affirms - emphatically as something additional; ye, 
at least, relaxes as to the rest, but affirms that this at least is so. 

Some of the uses of drj are : Xeye 6i], speak now ; ra rcola drj ravra, what 
sort of things, I pray, are these ? ri drjTcore, why in the world ? tide dy 
ctcoKojiev, thus now let us consider. 

813.— KAF and TE'. 

Kai and re have the same significations in reference to each other as 
the Latin et and que. Both connect single ideas, and the entire parts of 
a sentence. "With the older poets, re is more common than in the Attic 
prose writers, and it is commonly put not merely once Between the con- 
nected parts, but joined to each of them ; as, irarrip avdp&v re dew re, 
the father of both gods and men. In Attic usage, re — Kai, both — and, are 
habitually used, but the more important idea generally introduced by 
Kai. Te — Kai link the two parts of a sentence more closely than the sim- 
ple Kai. Kai — Kai, both — and, connect ideas strictly co-ordinate, without 
gradation ; aXAuc re Kai especially, i. e., both in other respects and. 

81&— MA' and Nff. 

Md and vy are particles of obtestation, and always govern the accu- 
sative of the object; vij is always affirmative; fid, when alone, is nega- 
tive, but is nevertheless attached both to affirmative and negative 
obtestations ; as, val fia Aia, and ov fta Aia. 



815.— MEN. 

Kev, to be sure, indeed, it is true, is a concessive particle, granting indeed 
something, but with a reservation which is usually introduced by a clause 
with Se- as, oofybg juev, Kanbc de, wise, it is true — wise, I grant, but wicked. 
Hence fiev always implies another sentence or clause with tie. Not un- 
frequently, however, the antithesis is readily supplied by the mind, and 
the answering clause is not expressed. Sometimes another particle, as 
bXka, takes the place of Si; and in wptirov fiev, in the first place, eireira, 
in the second place, the de is regularly omitted. Sometimes the two 
clauses introduced by fiev and de are so slightly antithetical that fiev has 
not sufficient force to justify translation. Its presence may bo merely 



COKJUNCTIONS. 269 

indicated by the intonation, and, when not rendered in words, it should 
be always so indicated. The observing of its presence and exact force 
is matter of great consequence to the Greek student. 



816.— Or N and OrKOYN. 



S17» — OvVj then, therefore, is used, 1. In drawing an ultimate con- 
clusion in the view of all that has been said before; in this it differs 
from apa, which is used in successive steps in the process of reasoning. 
2. It commences a chapter or paragraph, with some reference to what 
has preceded. 3. It continues or resumes a subject, after a digression. 
4. It introduces a transition to some new subject; and lastly, it has an 
affirmative force, particularly in replies ; as, yiyverai, ovv ovtcoc, it is cer- 
tainly so ; hence the compounds. 

81 8. — Ovkovv and fiov, for jay ovv. The. former, originally a negative 
inference — as, u not then " (accented ovkow) — often loses its negative 
character, and denotes "therefore;" jlluv is used interrogatively, It is 
not then, is itf 



j ) 



819— nEP. 

Hep (enclitic) is the exact antithesis of ye, giving emphasis by exten- 
sion {Trepi, round about) while ye emphasizes by restriction; as, tovto ye, 
this at least, however the rest ; rovrd izep, precisely this (the whole of it). 
Thus it is always emphatic ; as, si, if; el ye, if at least ; eitrep, precisely 
if, provided that So bg av, whoever; bairsp, precisely ivho ; aaiirep, even 
precisely, even though; y-xep elxev, just as (in precisely what way) he was. 



820— nor. 

821. — TLov, where? an interrogative particle of place. Uov, enclitic. 

As an enclitic, it signifies somewhere ; as, narouiel ttov, he dweUs some- 

; where. It is thus united with other adverbs of place ; as, aXXo&i 

ttov, somewhere else (elsewhere somevjhere) ; e/ceZ 6e ttov, out somewhere 

there. 

822. — Hence it passes over into a general term of uncertainty and 
doubt = probably, perhaps, I suppose; as, olod-a ttov teal avrog, you know, 
I presume, also yourself. So tovto ttov, this perhaps; 6fj ttov, surely, per- 
haps. The phrase common in the tragedians, ov 6rj ttov = not, you see, 
perhaps ; surely, not, I suppose. Like the other particles, nob is never 
redundant. 



270 conjunctions. 



7702; how. 

823. — n«c, circumflexes is interrogative ; as, nog Svvarai eivai, how 
can it be f Followed by yap, used elliptically (see yap), it constitutes an 
emphatic negative; as, nog yap; for how? = it cannot be; nog yap 
notrjao, why, how shall I do it f = I will not do it ; nog ciono, how may 
I be silent? (1084, 3) == I cannot be silent. 

Hog, enclitic, somehow, in some way ; as, aklog nog, in some other way ; 
ode nog, somehow thics. 

824:. — "Onog, relative adverb (69*7), how, in what way. 

1. Nearly = og, as; ovrog bnog coi <f>i?&v ear at, thus as shall be agree- 
able to thee. 

2. Like quomodo, ovdelg oldev bnog ansdavsv, none knows how he died. 
So, idiomatically, ovk eg6 j bnog, there is not, = how, in what way, =z it is 
not possible that ; as, ovk hod'' bnog Mgo, it is not possible that I shall speak, 

3. = "iva, in order that; as, bnog ne/aipri, in order that he may send, 

C QZ, as. 

825. — f &g is extensively and very variously employed : 

1. Simply and properly, how, in what way, as; as, og dovlog, as a 
slave. 

2. == on, that; as, My el og ravra, he says that these things, &c. 

3. = brt, enei, since, because ; og ravra ley el, as or since he says this. 

4. = Iva, bnog, denoting purpose, in order that; og Se^o/llev, in order 
that we may show. 

5. Nearly = ocrs, marking result — so as, so that; as, svpog og dvo rpirj- 
pEag nleeiv ojllov, in breadth so as that two triremes could sail (lit., so as two 
triremes to sail) abreast. 

6. = Latin quam in exclamations ; as, og ce /LcaKapi^ojuev, how happy 
we deem you ! So with expels, how ought he, = utinam, would that! as, 
6g oxpslov tiavslv, would that I had died ! 

T. Like our as, Latin ut, often = when; og rjldev, as or when he came. 

8. With numerals, about ; as, og rpia rj rerrapa, about three or four. 

9. "With accent (chiefly Epic) == ovrog, thus ; as, og einov, thus saying. 

10. "With participles in the genitive or accusative absolute, it assigns 
the ground of an action as given by another (1112, Obs. 2); 6g rovrov 
ovrog kxovrov, on the ground that this is so (lit., as these things being so). 

11. Used idiomatically and elliptically; as, 

(a.) With superlative adjectives or adverbs; as, og or on rdxtora, as 
quickly as possible ; og nlelora, &c. 

(5.) So with the positive ; as, og alrjdog, in very truth. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 271 

(c.) "With infinitive, &g elr.elv, as to speak, = tig eirog el~elv, so to speak, 
as one might say ; 6g eluaoai, as one might conjecture. 

(d.) TVith clauses ; as, ojg to rro/.v, far the most part; ug rrpbg to tieyedog 
Tfjg TroAeog, considering the size of the, city. 

826. — Two or more particles coming together are not to be con- 
founded, and rendered collectively, but each to have its separate force. 
The particles have mostly the same meaning when united as when sep- 
arate. Thus, in si [iev ovv, if to he sure now, the iiev and ovv do not 
modify each other; el fiev, if to he sure, is the same as if ovv were absent, 
the ft£v pointing forward ; el ovv, if then, is the same as if \izv were 
absent, the ovv pointing back. Sometimes, indeed, owing to difference 
of idiom, we can scarcely render all the particles which stand together, 
the Greek employing ellipses which the English does not Thus, in 
a) J. a yap, a/ j A ordinarily refers to a suppressed idea, of which yap assigns 
the reason. In ov /ar/v d/./A, nevertheless, we are to supply with ov firp 
some idea readily suggested by the context, of which the counter idea 
is introduced by a/. /A. 

827* — The following are familiar combinations: 

Ki~ep, edvTrep, precisely if, just if, emphatic (differing as el and edv). 

Wtye, edir/e, if that is to say, if at least, restrictive. 

EI na'i, if also, if even, = although. 

Kal el, even if, even though. 

Eire — elre, both if— and if, = whether — or (the former the literal ren- 
dering, the latter idiomatic). 

OvTe — ovTe, both not — and not, = neither — r nor (no preceding negative 
being implied). 

Ovde — ovde, and not — and not, = nor — nor, implying a preceding 
negative ; where this is wanting, the ovde = not even ; as nal, when 
not preceded by the clause which it naturally supposes, is = also, even. 

Myre — ur/re, fiijde — injde, differ from the above simply as [irj from or, 
i. e., as the subjective and conditional from the objective and positive. 

Bern. — The particles are never to be regarded as mere expletives. 
They always modify either the logical import or the rhetorical coloring 
of the sentence. Their force is sometimes so slight that it may be diffi- 
cult to render, and even exactly to determine it. But a careful study of 
the best grammars and lexicons, and especially close observation in 
reading, will soon bring the practised student to a perception of their 
delicacy and power, and make him feel that their absence, where it 
would not seriously obscure the meaning, would detract from the grace 
and vivacity of a sentence. An exact knowledge of the particles is one 
of the highest, as well as most indispensable marks of Greek scholarship. 



272 SYNTAX. 



PART THIRD- 
SYNTAX 



828* — Syntax is that part of grammar which, 
treats of the proper arrangement and connection 
of words in a sentence. 

829* — A Sentence is such an assemblage of words 
as makes complete sense ; as, Man is mortal. 

830*— A Phrase is two or more words rightly put 
together, but not making complete sense ; as, In truth, in 
a word. 

831* — Sentences are of two kinds, Simple and Com- 
pound, 

832*— A Simple sentence contains only a single 
affirmation ; as, Life is short. 

833 '* — A Compotmd sentence contains two or more 
simple sentences connected together; as, Life, which is 
short, should be well employed. 

834:* — Every simple sentence consists of two parts, the 
subject and the predicate. 

835* — The subject is that of which something is 
affirmed. It is either in the nominative case before a finite 
verb, or in the nominative or accusative before the infini- 
tive. 

836. — The predicate is that which is affirmed of the 
subject. It consists of two parts, the attribute and copula. 
A verb which includes both is called an attributive verb; 



GENEKAL PRINCIPLES. 273 

as, "John reads" A verb which only connects the attri- 
bute expressed by another word, with the subject, is 
called a copulative verb ; as, " John is reading." 

837. — Both subject and predicate maybe attended by 
other words called adjuncts, which serve to restrict or 

! modify their meaning ; as, "Too eager a pursuit of wealth 

'often ends in poverty a?id misery" 

838. — When a compound sentence is so framed that 
the meaning is suspended till the whole is finished, it is 
called & period. 



GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SYNTAX. 

839. — In every sentence there must be a verb and a 
nominative or subject, expressed or understood. 

840. — Every article, adjective, adjective pronoun, or 
participle, must have a substantive, expressed or under- 
stood, with which it agrees. 

84:1. — Every relative must have an antecedent, or word 
to which it refers, and with which it agrees. 

842. — Every subject nominative has its own verb, 
expressed or understood. 

843. — Every verb (except in the infinitive and partici- 
ples) has its own subject or nominative, expressed or 
understood. 

844. — Every oblique case is governed by some word, 
expressed or understood, in the sentence of which it forms 
. a part ; or it is used, without government, to express 
certain circumstances ; as follows : — 

845. — The genitive is governed by a noun, a verb, a 
preposition, or an adverb / or it is placed as the case 
absolute with the participle. 

846. — The dative is governed by adjectives, verbs, 

and prepositions. It also expresses the cause, manner, or 

instrument. 

12* 



274 SUBSTANTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. 

84:7* — The accusative is governed by a transitive 
active verb ox preposition. 

848. — The vocative either stands alone, or is gov- 
erned by an interjection. 

849,— The infinitive mood is governed by a verb, 
an adjective, or adverbial particle. 



PABTS OF SYNTAX. 

850. — The parts of Syntax are commonly 
reckoned two, Concord and Government. 

851. — -Concord is the agreement of one word 
with another in gender, number ', case, or person. 

852. — Government is that power which one 
word has in determining the mood, tense, or case 
of another word. 

Concord. 

Concord is fourfold, viz. :— 
853.— Of a substantive with a substantive. 
85 4.— Of an adjective with a substantive. 
855. — Of a relative with its antecedent. 
856. — Of a verb with its nominative, or 
subject. 



A SUBSTANTIVE WITH A SUBSTAN- 
TIVE. 

857.- — Rule I. Substantives denoting the 
same person or thing agree in case / as, 



SUBSTANTaVS with substantive. 275 

JJabkoq a-6(j~ok)q, Paul^ an apostle. 

liDxpazr^ 6 <fiX6Go<poq^ Socrates, the philosopher. 
di& xptrf n To God, the judge. 

Note. — Substantives thus used are said to be in apposition. The 
second substantive is added to express some attribute, description, or 
appellative belonging to the first, and must always be in the same mem- 
ber of the sentence ; i. e., they must be both in the subject, or both in 
the predicate. A substantive predicated of another, though denoting 
the same thing, is not in apposition with it. See 436. 

Obs. 1. One of the substantives is sometimes under- 
stood; as, 'Ao-Tudy7]q 6 Kua~dpou (sup. uloq)^ Astyages, the 
sox of Cyaxares. 

Obs. 2. The possessive pronoun in any case being 
equivalent in signification to the genitive of the substantive 
pronoun from which it is derived, requires a substantive 
in apposition "with it to be put in the genitive ; as, Aaiip 
ifidg 7j v x u v d> - 1 d o q , He was the broiher-in-laio of 

ME, A SHAMELESS WOMAN. See 900. 

Obs. 3. On the same principle, possessive adjec- 
tives formed from proper names, being equivalent to the 
genitive of their primitives, have sometimes, by special 
idiom, a noun in apposition in the genitive ; as, Ns <j t o p (y 

Tzapd wqi HuArjzvioq /? a a l / % o q , Near the s/lip.OF K"eS- 
toe, the kixg bom at Pylos ; 'Aftyv aX o q <fc, n 6 X e w q 
rijq fjLeYtGTqq, Being a citizen of Athens, a very large city. 
See 901. 

Obs. 4. Sometimes the latter of two substantives sig- 
nifying the same thing, is put in the genitive ; as, Ilofaq 
'A&yvajy (for 'A&yvat), The city of Athens. 



273 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTAN- 
TIVE. 

858.— Rctle II. An adjective agrees with, its 
substantive in gender, number, and case ; as 7 

Xprjfjrd^ dvyp, a good man. 

xakij yovij 3 a beautiful woman. 

ayaftbv xprjp.a, a good thing. 

Note, — This Rule applies to the article, adjective, adjective pronouns, 
and participles. 

Obs. 1. Other words are sometimes used as adjectives, 
and consequently fall under this rule ; viz. : — 

1st. A substantive which limits the signification of a 
more general term ; as, 'E?ddg <pa)V7j, the Greek language. 

2d. A.d>vevbs placed between the article audits sub- 
stantive ; as, 6 fiera^b tot.o^ the intervening space / ol rare 
avdpez, the men of that time. 

Obs. 2. The place of the adjective is sometimes supplied 
by a substantive with a preposition; as, ydavij fisrd dofys 
(for k'vdoSoc), exalted pleasure. Sometimes, by a substan- 
tive governing the other in the genitive ; as, fidftoq yr t <;, 
depth of earth, i. e., deep earth ; % -epio-azta r7 t q ydpizos, 
abundance of grace, i. e., abundant grace. For the ad- 
verbial adjective, see 1060. 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONCORD OF 

THE ADJECTIVE. 

8 SO. — Two or more substantives singular, unless taken 
separately, have an adjective pl-iival* If all the substan- 
tives be of the same gender, the adjective will be of that 
gender. If of different genders, the adjective takes the 



CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 277 

masculine rather than the feminine, and the feminine 
rather than the neuter. But if the substantives signify 
things without life, the adjective is commonly put in the 
neuter gender. Not unfrequently, however, the adjective 
agrees with one of the substantives and is understood with 
the rest; as, alsl yap roc k'ptq Te <p iXt] , TroAe/^otre, pd%at- 
re, for always unto thee contention is delightful, and 
ware and battles. 

860. — When the substantive to which the adjective 
belongs may be easily supplied, it is frequently omitted, 
and the adjective, assuming its gender, number, and case, 
is used as a substantive; as, 6 'Ad-r^dios, the Athenian ; 
ol dixatot, the righteous* 

861. — Adjectives in cxog are used in the neuter 
gender with the article, and without a substantive in 
two different senses. 1. In the singular they are generally 
collective, i. e., they express a whole ; as, to [izmxov, the 
cavalry ; to tcoXctcxow, the citizens. 2. In the plural they 
signify any circumstance which can be determined by the 
context; as, to\ Tpcui'xd, the Trojan war/ rd t E\\rpixd, 
the Grecian history. 

862. — The adjective, when used as a predicate, 
without a substantive, is often put in the neuter gender, 
XpTjfia^ Tzpayiia^ Z<hov^ &c, being understood ; as, ^ izaTp\q 
<p IXt clt ov (soil, xprjfia) pporo~iq, their country is (a thing) 

VERY DEAR to mortals ; %aXe7:dv to noieiv, to do is HARD. 

863. — Two adjectives are frequently tiniied, one of 
which, by expressing negatively the sense of the other 
renders it more emphatic ; as, yva)-d x oux dyvatrd p.ot 9 lit- 
erally, things known and not unknown (i. e., things well 
known) to me. 

864. — Adjectives are very often put in the neuter 
singular or plural, with or without an article, for 
adverbs; as, TzpwTov, first ; izpwTov ph, in the first place y to 
TTpwrov, at first ; ra pAhaTa, chiefly ; xpoyaTa, secretly, &c. 



278 CONCOPJ) OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

865. — In any gender or number, adjectives are some- 
tunes used in the sense of adverbs, to express a circum- 
■ stance of time, place, order, manner ; as, eizeeov ayy-qGrH- 
voi, they fell NEAR EACH OTHEE ; dfixero deuzepaloz 
— Tpiratoq^ he came on the second — thied day (1060, 
Obs. 2). So in Latin, qui creatur annum. Cass. 

A 

Exceptions. 

866. — An adjective is often put in a different gen- 
der, or number from the substantive with which it is 
connected, tacitly referring to its meaning rather than to 
its form, or to some other word synonymous with it, or 
implied in it ; as, 

xoptov zaXXi<7T7]j a most beautiful girl. 

O) dya&k ipoyrq^ brave SOul. 

XrjGT'npiov Tiup lizKpipovraq^ a band of robbers bringing fire. 

867 • — A collective noun in the singular may have 
an adjective in the plural, and in the gender of the individ- 
uals which form the collection; as, pouXr} yGu%iav ~et%ev 
— obx dyvooovreq^ the COUNCIL kept quiet — not BEING 

IGNOEANT. 

So in Latin, maxima pars — in fiunien acti sunt. Lat. 
Gr., 679. 

868. — In the dual number, the Attic writers some- 
times join a masculine adjective with a feminine noun ; as, 
zobraj to) Tj/iipa^ these two days. 

869. — An adjective masculine, in the superlative 
degree, is sometimes joined to a feminine noun, to increase 
the force of the superlative ; as, xopai iieXdvraroi^ 
veey black pupils. Also, a masculine adjective is so used 
with reference to a feminine noun, when the plural is used 
for the singular, and when a chorus of women speak cf 
themselves ; thus, Medea says of herself, xat yap ij d i x -q - 



CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 279 

fiiv o i anyriftotied^a^ xptiaaovuiv v c x co /j. e v o i , though IN- 
JURED I will be silent, yielding to superior powers. 

Note.— This is a familiar usage with the Attic tragedians, both in the 
choruses and the dialogue. They often use a masculine plural when the 
actual reference is to a feminine singular* 

870. — An adjective in the masculine gender may be 
joined with a noun denoting & female, if the attention is 
drawn to the idea of a person, without regard to the sex. 

871. — A substantive dual may have an adjective 
plural, and, vice versa, a substantive plural, when two is 
denoted, may have an adjective dual; as, <pilac zept 
yelpe ftdlwfiev, let us throw about [one another) loving 
hands ==. let us embrace ; duo %d<r par a £%ofiivw a?.- 
XyjXiov, two successive chasms / lit., two chasms adjolntng 
each other. 

872. — The adjectives Ixaazoc, alloc, in the singular, 
are put with nouns in the plural, to intimate that the 
objects expressed by them are spoken of individually and 
distributively; as, 

o7 de ex a<rr o c 18£%ovto dixa, these each received ten. 
Tjpwratv dk alloc allo 9 am? they as7ced,so?£R one 

thing andscniE another. 

So in Latin, Quisque pro se queruntur. Liv. Lat. Gr., 
281. 

873. — Plural adjectives sometimes (as a more 
emphatic construction) agree with their substantives in 
gender and number, and govern them in the genitive 
case ; as, 

ol Tzalatdl Twv tzoititwv, the ancient poets. 

So also among the Attic writers in the singular ; as, 
Scarp {{3 cm tov tzoIIov too % p 6 v o 6>, spending THE 
larger part of the time. 



280 COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 

874. — Instead of agreeing with its substantive, the 
adjective (especially an adjective of quantity) is sometimes 
put in the neuter gender 9 and the substantive follow- 
ing it in the genitive (986) ; as, elq zoaouzov zoXfirjq (for 
ro(?auT7]v ToApirjv), to such a pitch of boldness. The abstract 
noun is sometimes used instead of the adjective ; as, fidd-os 
T^c, depth of earth, instead of fta&ela yrj, deep earth (858, 
Obs. 2). 

87 S* — Proper names in the singular are some- 
times accompanied by the adjectives -xp&zoq^ naq, and others 
in the neuter plural, as predicates or in apposition ; as, Adf±- 

Tzwv, Aiytvyziwv rd tt p u> z a , Lampon, the CHIEF of the 
JEginetCB I Tzdvza Si] vjv toZgi BafioXiDviotai Z d> it o p o <r, 

Zopyrtts was indeed every thing to the Babylonians / 
kxelvoq rjv ndvza abzotg, HE was every thing to them. 

876* — Demonstrative pronouns in the neuter 
singular may refer to nouns of any gender which do not 
express a person ; and in the neuter plural, to persons 
as well as things, and to the singular as well as to the 

plural ; as, 7tep) dv d p iaq , &7:\ izoaip «v adz ov (dvdpiaq) 

digato (jzipea&at, concerning manly fortitude, for how 
much would you consent to be deprived of it ? zolq els 
z adz a &a[iapzd\>oo<n, to those who offend against these, 

Scil. zooq izaidaq xa\ zdq yovalxaq, wives and children. 

So also with the adjectives ttMov, TzXelw, fieiov, &c. ; 

as, initial pikv a£-et ob fieTov dt<jp.opia)v, he will bring 
not less than twenty thousand horse ; lit. he will bring 
horsemen not fewer than twenty thousand. 

COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 

877* — The comparative is used when two objects or 
classes of objects are compared ; the superlative, when 
more than two are compared. 

878. — The positive is sometimes used in a comparative 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 281 

sense, and is followed by the infinitive} as, dXiyot 

ffOfi^aXeXv^ (too) few to fight, 

879, — When one quality is compared with 

another in the same subject, the adjectives expressing 
these qualities are both put in the comparative degree, 
connected by y ; as, 7cXou<nd>Tepo<; r t (jocpwrepoq^ more rich 
than wise. So in Latin, decentior quam sublimior fuit. 
Tacit. Lat. Gr., 903. 

880. — The comparative is sometimes made by joining 
fidXXov with the positive ; and, for the sake of emphasis^ 
sometimes with the comparative, making a double 
comparative } as, pdXXov dXptwrepog, more happy. 

881* — The superlative is often used to express a very 
high degree of a quality in an object, but without 
comparing it with any other; as, d^p q>tXori[i6taroq^ a 
most ambitious man; izpayfia ev^Mffrarov^ a very foolish 
thing (312). 

882* — The superlative is often strengthened in signifi- 
cation by adding certain adverbial tvords and 

particles } such as noXXw^ fiaxpw, -olu, [loHg-cl, TtXeterov^ 
oya (poet.), wc, oizwq^ ort 7 r h &c. ; as, itoXXw dff&evg&T&rov, 
much the weakest} o% apasroq^ eminently the best; wq 
rdyictra^ as quickly as possible } ore izXeigtov zp6vov J as 
long time as possible. Also by the numeral elq ; as, eTq 
avrjp fiiXrt(TToq 9 a man of cdl others the best. 

For the construction of the comparative and super- 
lative degrees, as it respects government, see 997 and 998, 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

883. — Special Rule. Adjective pronouns 
agree with their substantives in gender, number, 
and case. 



282 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 



The Intensive, avfog. 

For the import and use of the Intensive pronotm 
abroc;, see 341-345. In construction it is often similar to 
the demonstratives, 888. 

884. — When used as & personal pronoun, abroq 
takes the gender and number of the noun for which it 
stands, and the case which the noun would have in its place. 
Sometimes, however, like the adjective (866), it takes the 
gender and number of a synonymous substantive, or of 
one that expresses the meaning of that for which it stands ; 
as, fj.a$7]Tei)(raT£ izdvra rd e$VT] fianri^ovTeq abrobq^ u dis- 
ciple all the nations, baptizing them" where abrobq is put 
for dv^p6izoo<;^ which expresses the meaning of e#v^. 

Note. — This observation applies to all adjective pronouns used with- 
out, and instead of, the substantives, to which they refer. 

Demonstratives. 

88S. — The Demonstratives are used without a 
substantive, only when they refer to a noun, or pronoun, 
or substantive clause in the proposition going before, or 
in that coming immediately after. 

886. — "When tivo persons or tilings are spoken 
of, obrog, thiS) refers ordinarily to the latter ; Zxelvoq, that, 
to the former. In the same manner are sometimes used 6 
liiv^ 3g jiiv, referring to the former, and 6 S£, oq S£, referring 
to the latter ; sometimes vice versa. 

887. — The demonstratives obroq and ode are generally 
distinguished thus : ovroq refers to what immediately pre- 
cedes, ode to what immediately follows ; as, rabra dxobaaq^ 
on hearing these things ; e'Xeye rdde, he said the following 
things. 

888. — The demonstrative words are frequently used in 
a kind of apposition wi&h a noun, or pronoun, or part 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 28 



o 



of a sentence in the same proposition. This is done, 1. For 
the sake of emphasis, or, at the beginning of a sentence, to 
call the attention more particularly to what is to be said ; 
as, t{ d 3 £ x el v a <pw[iev, rdq Tzeixretq ts xai lpa)T7]<Tei<;, and 
what shall we say of these things, question and interro- 
gation ? Long. t{ tlot £<?~h a b r 6 , ij apery ; what in the 
world is it, to wit, virtue ? In such cases the pronoun is* 
commonly in the neuter gender. 2. If the parts of a sen- 
tence immediately related are separated by intervening 
clauses, the pronoun, being introduced in the last part, in 
apposition with the distant word in the frst, brings them 
as it were together; as, aXXa tieoug ye robs de\ ovraq xai 
..... r o or o o q <po^ov[ievoi firjre aaefteq p^dev izoiyjarjre, 
"but gods certainly (yi), those toho always exist, who are 
eternal, and whose power and inspection extend over all 
things, and who preserve the harmony and order of the 
universe free from decay or defect, the greatness and 
beauty of which is inexplicable—^arai^ these, do noth- 
ing either impious, &c. 

889. — When that with which the demonstrative stands 
in apposition is a sentence, or part of a sentence, it is put 
in the neuter gender > and is often connected with it by 

on or wq ", as, aXX' olde r out o , on, raura /xiv kanv aizavTa ra 
%iupia a&Xa too ~o?J/j.od xetfieva h ll(<jo), but he hnows THIS, 
that all these places are prizes of the war lying beticeen the 
combatants. 

The sentence is sometimes so arranged that the clause 
with on stands first ; as, on d J el%e 7zrepd^ toDt' "tdfiev, 
but that he had %oings, this we know. 

890. — Oorog, with xai before it, is used in the latter clause 
of a sentence in an adverbial or eonjtinctive sense y 
to call the attention more particularly to the circumstance 
which it introduces, and may be rendered " and that" 
" and truly" "indeed" "although" &c, as the sense may 
require \ as, ooroc yap llowoi y Iwvo)v obx ayoocn ^Aizaxobpia, 



284 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

xa\ our 01 xard (povoo rtva <rx7j<piv, for these alone of the 
Ionians do not celebrate the Apatouria^ a:nd that under 
a certain pretext of a murder ; lit., and these {do so) under 

pretext, &C. TovaLxaq xa\ r a o r "q <; vexpaq, e? Ttq Xiyet 

Toovofia, Tzicpptx^ if any one mentions the name of a 
woman, although (i. e., and that woman being) dead, 
he shudders. 

But when the pronoun is less definite, referring 
to no particular substantive in the preceding clause, but to 
some idea contained in it, it is put in the neuter plural, 
and may be rendered, as before, and that too, or " especial- 
ly" a although" &C. ; as, 2b Si p.oc doxeJq ou izpoai^v^ rov 
vovv TouTocg y xa\ zaora <ro<pbs ^>v, but you seem to me 
not to give your attention to these things, and that too = 
although being wise. Expressions of this kind are doubt- 
less elliptical, noieTq or some such word being understood, 
which, indeed, is sometimes expressed ; thus, in Dem. pro 
Phor., after reproaching Apollodorus with his dissolute 
conduct, he adds, xa\ t glut a yovdlxa e%w tz o c e X c , 
and these thikgs you do, having a icife ; which, with- 
out motels, might be rendered " and that though having a 
wife." Often, indeed, the phrase xal raura, and that too y 
is used without any strict syntactical relation with the 
preceding. 

891. — The demonstrative pronoun is, by a 
peculiar and rare idiom, sometimes joined with adverbs 
of time and place, to define these circumstances with 
greater emphasis or precision ; as, t& vov rdde, just noio ; 
tout £xe~t, at that very time. 

892. — The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes used 
instead of the personed pronouns £/"> an( l <™> an( l, 
in speaking, when thus used, were probably accompanied 
with action, so as clearly to point out the person intended ; 
as, Ootos, tc Xiyet^ Ho^ you ! what are you saying ? Outos, 
and far more frequently 8de 9 has often nearly an adverbial 



ABJECTIVE PBONOUNS. 285 

force like our here ; as, ovr<>~ npoaip^srat^ here lie is coming 
up ; y>- i ux7r n here is the shore. So 8de is very often 
used for the first person; as, We 6 m^p, this litre man, 
viz., I ; r{c; roude z avdpds aUh.wTznoq^who is more wretched 
than this man, i.e., myself? The expression ouzo- eipt is 
equivalent to the Latin en adsum, Lo ! here am I. 

- ^ 

The Indefinite rig. 

893.— The indefinite ric (367), added to a substan- 
tive, answers to the English words a certain one, anyone^ 

&c. ; as, asrjo t:-, a certain man, any man, some man. 
Sometimes it is put for an indefinite plural; as, r/fioq Tt$ 
tHin.oGv.zv, a certain fish = here and there a fish, was leap- 
ing, &c. So with urrri- ; za-v; Sorts xaTs/.rj(s^r n here and 
there one teas caught. Sometimes it is used distributive- 
ly ; as, xat t\$ olzfyv ava-Aa<jd<7fto)^ and let every oxe 
build his own house. 

894. — With adjectives of quality, quantity, and 
magnitude, especially when they stand without a sub- 
stantive expressed, or in the predicate, it serves to temper 
the expression by asserting the existence of the quality in a 
less positive and unlimited manner, such as may be ex- 
pressed by the English words somewhat, in some degree^ 
rather; as, <ptX6<ro<p6<; r.'c, a sort of philosopher ; yJJi'.ox 
rc7, a sort of stupid felloio ; du<Tpar6z res, somewhat diffi- 
cult to be passed ; doatia^fj- reg, rather hard to learn. 
"With numerals it means nearly, about, &c. ; as, dixa riv£g 9 
about ten. So also with adverbs; as, aytoov, nearly; 
cyjdo*; rt^ pretty nearly ; ~olb, much; izoXo n, co?isidera- 
bly ; ovd£», nothing y ovdiv re 3 scarcely any thing. 

893. — It sometimes has the sense of eminence, 
importance} as, eu/jrat ziq ehou, he boasts himself 
to be somebody = some great one; doze? elvai r:z, he is 
accounted to be a person of importance. 



286 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

896. — It is still more frequently used in the neuter 
geildd* with a sort of qualifying force, chiefly with nega- 
tive sentences, intensifying the meaning ; as, ooze zt fidvzts 
£d>V) neither being as to any thing = at all, a prophet. It 
is in the accusative, as if with xazd understood, as to any 
thing , in any respect. 

The Interrogative rig. 

897 • — The interrogative rfc 5 T/,is used in asking a 
direct question; as, riq iitotq&e\ who did it ? Though 
sometimes used in the indirect interrogation, o<rzt<; is more 
common ; as, ftau fiasco ziq (or more frequently 8<jztq) Sttoi- 
7](re^ I wonder who did it. Sometimes it is accompanied 
by the article 6 rfc, who ? zb re, what ? "Oaziq is always 
used interrogatively when a person to whom an interro- 
gation is put, repeats it before answering it ; as, ou 8 el 

zc<; dvdpwv ; ocztq el[x iyw ; Meztov, JBllt who are you ? 

who am If Meton. 

898. — In the predicate, r«, with l<szi following it, is 
sometimes accompanied by the subject of iart in the 
plural; as, daufid^aj ri nor iazi zauza^ I wonder WH AT 
IN THE WOKLD THESE THINGS are. 

899. — The interrogative ri often stands, like the 
indefinite r\ in an independent accusative as if 
with zazd, in the sense of in what ? as to xohat ? &c. ; as, 
ri GOipb'z cov ; in what being wise ? ol ri IxtGzijfioveq, those 
who are conversant with what ? 

So also for dtd rt; why? on what account? Ti di\ bid 
what ? but tohy ? and again / is often thus used in famil- 
iar, rapid dialogue. 

Possessive Pronouns. 

900. — The possessive pronoun is in signification 
equivalent to the genitive of the pronoun from which it is 



ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 287 

derived, and while, like the adjective, it agrees with its 
substantive in gender, number, and case, yet other words 
are often constructed with it as the genitive of the per- 
sonal pronoun. Hence the following modes of expression, 
to gov [xovou dtopTjfia^ equivalent to to goo [±6v o u , &c., 

the gift OF THEE ALONE. 'Apvufisvo^ Tza.Tp6$ tb fihya y.Xios 

rjd' i/idv abzou, where i/i6> agrees with xUoz in the accusa- 
tive, yet folio wed by clotou, as if Ifxoo auTou, of me myself 
united with izaTpoq. So also xvcTepov Xiyoz auTtov^ our own 
bed / to\ 6/iiTspa aurtov, your oion property y Try G<fe-£pav 
aurcjv (scil. yd>pav)^ their own country. 

The same construction is common in Latin : as, u mea 
ipsius culpaP " Cum meet nemo scripta legat, vulgo 
recitare timentis" u Beneficio meo et pqpuli Romani" 
Lat. Gr., 8280. 

OOlc — The same observation extends to possessive 
adjectives / as, el di fie Set yuvaixe tag Tt aperTJq 
o g a i \>uv ev yjjpzia eGovrat^ fivyjG&qvat, A.nd if I may make 
mention at all of the virtue of those women, who are 
now to live in widowlcood, where oGac refers back to the 
idea of yo^aXxtq contained in ywaueia^. 

902* — The possessive pronouns are employed only for 
emphasis / in other cases, the personal pronouns are 
used in their stead ; as, 6 xarrjo ^oo^ u my father ;" 6 IpM 
TtaTrjp^ "my father;" rrar^ ^5v 3 our father / 6 ^ixiTpoq 
TzaTrjP) oar own father. 

903. — The possessive pronoun has not unfrequently an 
objective sense ; thus, 6 goc ~6#os may be not only " thy 
regret," but "regret for thee;" to. £a& vouftsTTJ/jLara, "my 
chidings," in the sense of " the chidings which I receive" 
as well as " the chidings Avhich I give." This use of the 
possessive corresponds to the passive sense of the genitive 
(983, Obs. 2). 

904. — The possessive pronoun is sometimes put in the 
neuter {fender ivith the article, for the personal; 



t ! 



288 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 

as, to btj.i-epov, for vtielq ; Ta/id, for £ya> ; to ijiou, for ifxi. 
Also without the article after a preposition ; as, £v ^/xe- 
Tipou for h fjtimv (scil. dcb/ia-ty, in our house. 

% 

I 
CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 

905. — Special Kxjle. The article agrees 
with its substantive in gender, number, and 

case. 



>(>. — Exc. 1. Xt& gender.— The masculine article is 
often put with a feminine noun in the dual number (868) ; 
as, to) yovaixi, the two women. 

907. — Exc. 2. In number, — The article may be put 
in the plural, when it refers to two or more nouns in the 
singular (859) ; as, a[ *A&7}vair) ts xat "Hpy, both Minerva 
and Juno. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

903. — Nouns used indefinitely are commonly with- 
out the article. In general, the article is prefixed to all 
nouns not used indefinitely. Nouns are made definite by a 
limiting word, phrase, or clause ; by previous mention, by 
general notoriety or distinction, by peculiarity of state or 
relation, or by emphasis or contrast. 

909. — The article is prefixed to nouns when they 
designate a class or species / as, 6 avd> p cd-6 q £<jti 
ih-t]Toq, man is mortal. 

910. — It is prefixed to abstract nouns generally, 
though not invariably ; as, r) dpenj £<ttl xal-q, virtue is 
beautiful: especially if personified; as, ^ Kaxla,y r ice / and 
always if conceived definitely ; as, y dlrfizia^ the truth. 
But also in general; as, ^ dArjfteta, truth, i. e., the thing 
which we call truth. So 6 xoXe/jLoq, tear / y elpyvy, peace ; 
6 xivdovoq^ danger. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 289 

Oil,— "When one noun is predicated of another, the 
subject of the proposition takes the article, and the pred- 
icate omits it ; as, axxbq lyivefP 5? xo p-q, the maiden 
became a wine-shin ; vb^ tyivero -/j rjtj.ipa, the day became 
night, 

912. — Th^definiteness denoted by the article is often 
that of general notoriety 9 or recognized distinction; 
as, 6. 7:ot7}T7j<; 9 the poet (scil. Homer) ; 6 fiaGtXeuq, the king, 
viz., of Persia. But often in words of frequent recurrence, 
as, in writing of Persian affairs, paatXeuq^ the clearness 
of the connection enabled them to omit the article, and 
ftavtAsuq, king, stands often for 6 (ja<jdebq % So to aytov 
Tzveofia, and ayiov izveup.a ; 6 Xptaroq, and. Apujzoq. 

913. — Proper names, when first mentioned, are 
without the article ; on renewed mention, they gen- 
erally have it. But the article is never prefixed to a 
proper name followed by an appellative with the article ; 
as, Kopoq 6 fiaddsuq, Cyras the king. 

914. — The article is generally placed before appel- 
latives, and all words and phrases which are placed 
after a substantive for the purpose of definition or de- 
scription ; such as a substantive in apposition, an adjective, 
a participle, an adverb, a preposition with its case ; as, 
ZajxpdzTjq 6 (pO.oGocpoq, Socrates, the philosopher ; ol \>6p.oi ol 
apyaioi, the ancient laws, &c. 

9 IS. — Before a participle, the article is to be trans- 
lated as the relative, and the participle as the indicative 
mood of its own tense ; as, eidtv ol I iy ovr eq, there are 
(those) WHO SAY. 

Note, — Nothing is more common than for students to render the 
Greek article and participle by foe saying (6 ?ih/uv), him saying (rbv 
Xb/ovra), of him or the one saying (rod Ah/ovroc;), under the impression 
that they are thus rendering literally. This barbarism should be tho- 
roughly broken up ; and it would be desirable, therefore, for the pupil 

uniformly to render, and for the teacher to insist on his rendering, the 
13 



290 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 

article and participle freely and idiomatically as above ; thus, 6 ?ih/ov 1 
he who says, the man who says ; 6 ravra /^j-ac, the man who said this ; 
ol ravra /.egovrec, they who will say these things, &c. 

916* — A participle between the article and its noun, 
is to be regarded as an adjective, and rendered accord- 
ingly ; as, ol b~dpyj;vT£q vopot^ the existing laws. So also, 
other words and phrases between the article and its noun, 
like an adjective, qualify the noun, and frequently have a 
participle understood; as, i) icp&z Takdraq pdyji, scil. yevo- 
AtcVTy, the battle against the Gauls. 

917. — An adve7*b with the article prefixed is used 
sometimes as a noun, sometimes as an adjective; as, ol 
izikaz, those near, i. e., the neighbors ; i] &>u> -okiq, the 
upper city (858, Qfyfe 1). 

918*— Adjectives, participles, adverbs, ad- 
verbial particles and phrases, used in the sense 
of nouns, have the article prefixed; as, ol ftvyroc, mortals / 
ol xokaxsuovTsc, flatterers ; yj avptov (scil. r^aipa), the mor- 
row; to ri, the substance (the what) ; rd -our;, the quality 
(the of vj hat sort) ; rd tvgov, the quantity ; rd a>q, the man- 
ner in which, &c. 

919. — The article without a substantive, 

before ap<pi or xspt with their case, denotes something 
peculiar to, or distinguishing the person, place, or thing 
expressed by the noun ; as, ol xep\ ftypav, those devoted to 
the chase, i. e., u hunters /" rd izep\ AdfKpaxov, the affair at 
Lampsacus ; rd d/i<p), nokefiov, what belongs to war / some- 
times it is a mere circumlocution for the noun itself; as, 
rd 7tep\ T7jv d/iaprtav, for rj dfiapzia. 

920. — 01 Tzept, and ol d t a<p{, with a proper name, 
have the following peculiarities of meaning; viz., 1. Tlie 
person himself ; as, ol dp.ipX Uplarwv xdi IIdv&oov 9 Priam 
and Panthous. 2. The followers of the person nam.ed / 
as, ol Tcsp), 'Apztda/jLov, the companions of Archidamus. 
3. The person named, and his comajmions and fol- 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 291 

lowers; as, ol diiwt U^iaiaTpaTov, JPisistratus aud his 
troops. 

921.— The neuter article in any case prefixed to 
the infinitive mood (323), gives it the sense and 
construction of the Latin gerund, or a verbal noun ; as, 
roT> (fiXo<70(pe!v to ZrjTtV^ inquiring is the business of 
philosophy ; to zaXajq Xiyetv, the speaking well. 

022. — In the neuter gender, and in any case which 
the construction requires, the article is placed, 1. Before 
entire propositions or quotations in a sentence, construed 
as nouns ; as, v Etl de tootojv TpiTTj diawopa^ to, wq ezatrra 
toutwv fitfLTj&aiTo ay res, A.nd still further there is in these a 
third difference, viz., the manner in which one should 
imitate each of these objects / £x de toutojv opftais av eyot t& 
u epyov d' oudsv ovetdoq" and according to these views, the 
sentiment " and no labor is dishonor" woidd be correct. 
2. Before single words quoted or designated in a sentence; 
as, to <5' 6 fisT £ Ztwj eiKta, T7jv tzoXiv Xiyco, and when I 
say you, I mean the state ; to Xiym^ the word Xiya>. But 
in nouns, the article is commonly in the gender of the 
noun; as, to ovojia 6 "A'idr^, the name Hades. 

923. — The article is often prefixed to possessive, 
demonstrative, distributive > and other pro- 
nouns, for the sake of emphasis or precise definition ; 
thus, i/ioq oloq^ is a so?i of mine ; 6 e/io^ ulo^ is, definitely, 
my son. The following change of signification effected 
"by the article may be noticed:— 

aXXot others, ol uXXoi the others, the rest. 

aXXy other, y aXX-q c E?Jd$ the rest of Greece. 

noXXot many, ol xoXXot the many, the multitude. 

TzXsiow: more, ol izkeiooz the most. 

au~6s himself, 6 avToq the same. 

TzdvTzq all, ol r.avTzq [after numerals) in all. 

oXiyot few, ol SXiyoi the few, the Oligarchs. 



292 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 

024.- — A Hiatal- with ohzoq or ixehoc regularly takes 
the article, but never immediately before the pronoun. The 
pronoun must either precede both the article and noun — 
as, ohroq 6 dvyjp — or follow them both — as, 6 d^p ouT<>q y 
this man. 

025. — The article is frequently used alone, having its 
substantive timlerstood. This is the case when the 
substantive to which the article refers, being apparent from 
the connection or sense of the passage, can be easily 
supplied. The neater article is often thus used with 
the genitive of another noun, zprjua, 7:pdy/ia, &c, being 
understood: 1. In the singular, to intimate what a 
person has done, is wont to do, or has befallen him ; as, 
y.airot 8oxa) p.oi to too ^Ifiuxeiou "ltcttou 7Z£7:ovft£vai, and I seem, 

you see (t<^)> to have experienced the thing of the horse , 
i. e., to be similarly affected with, &c. 2. In the plural, 
to denote every thing that concerns, arises from, or belongs 
to, that which the substantive expresses ; as, rd <pdwv 8* 
oudivj but the aid of friends is nothing ; 8eT <p£pew r d 
twv tieeuv, toe must bear the visitations of the gods. In 
the singular or plural, it is often merely a peri- 
phrasis for the substantive; as, to or rd r£<r Spy^q, 
for ij opyrj ; and an adjective, &c, put with such a peri- 
phrasis takes the gender and number of the substantive, 
and the case of ^the article; as, rd tw» dtaxdvwv — xqiou- 
ifievot, the messengers — considering (lit., making to them- 
selves). 

926. — The article, combined with fiiv and 8i, has 
entirely the force of a pronoun, and is used in a 
distributive sense — the article with p.h standing in 
the first member of the sentence, and with Si in the parts 
that follow ; as, r o v /jl e v hi'ia, t bv 8" ou, this one he 
honored, and that one not ; ot /iev ixofieupv s ol 8" £xivov 9 
o I 8" tyujuLvdZovTo, some (literally, these indeed) icere play- 
ing at dice, others (and those) icere drinking, and others 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 29 



9 



were exercising themselves. This is a relic of the usage 
in which the article 6 was a demonstrative pronoun ; as, 
6 v-ivy this one indeed * 6 84, and that one. Sometimes 
with prepositions the i±h and 84 precede ; as, h fih rolq, for 

iv ro"iq fiiv, 

I 927 '. — In the earlier epic of Homer, the article com- 
^monly appears as a demonstrative, sometimes as a relative 
pronoun. So also, more or less, in Ionic prose. 



THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

928. — Rule III. The relative agrees with, 
its antecedent in gender, number, and person ; 
as, 

i) yovrj 7) v eldo/iev, the WOMAN whom vie saw. 
6 & v i) p d<: TjXftsv, the max who came. 

rd yp-qixaz a a el/e, the THIXGS WHICH he had. 

929. — The antecedent is the substantive, or some- 
thing equivalent to a substantive (956, Hem.), in a pre- 
ceding clause to which the relative refers. Frequently, 
however, as in Latin, the relative with its clause is placed 
before the antecedent and its clause. 

930. — Strictly speaking, the relative does not agree 
with the antecedent, but with the same word expressed 
or understood after the relative, and with which, like the 
adjective, it agrees in gender, number, and case, as well as 
^person; thus, 6 Itzkosov (ftnrov) elyjv, the horse which {horse) 
' he had. Hence, in connecting the antecedent and relative 
clauses, the following variety of usage occurs ; viz., 

1st. The ivord to which the relative refers is 
commonly expressed in the antecedent clause, and not 
with the relative ; as, oozoq l&rtv 6 dvij p 8 v e7cte<r, this is 
the max whom you saw. 



294 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

2d. It is often not expressed in the antecedent clause, 
and expressed with the relative ; as, ourog iffrtv 3 v sides 
av d p a. 

Sd. Sometimes, for greater precision and empha- 
sis, it is expressed in both; as, ourog larv; 6 dvijp 
ov sides avdpa. 

4th. When the reference is of a general nature, 
and there is no danger of obscurity, the word to which the 
relative refers is understood in both clauses ; as, b\ i}4eXev 
exrave, ov y&eAev eauyaev, ivhom he would he slew, whom he 
would he saved. All this variety is common in Latin as 
well as in Greek. (Lat. Gr., 685.) 

931. — The antecedent is sometimes implied in a pre- 
ceding word; as, olzia ij vp.eripa oH ye yp^a^e, &c, 
your house who, that is to say (yd) use, &c, of referring to 
the personal pronoun implied in 5/xerdpa (900). 

932. — When the relative comes after two words of 
different persons, its verb agrees with the first or second 
person rather than the third; as, el/ii d" iycb fiaedebg 
o g TCfiw [iat. 

933. — When the relative is placed between two sub- 
stantives of different genders, it sometimes agrees in 
gender with the latter ; as, to aarpov rj v 3yofidZou<rtv Aly a, 
the constellation which they call the Goat. 

934:. — Exc. — The relative sometimes takes the gender 
and number, not of the antecedent noun, but of some 
one synonymous with it, or implied in it ; as, 

1st. •d-avovrwv t £ xv a) v o u g "ASpacrrog yyaye, the CHIL- 
DREN having died, whom Adrastus led. In this sentence, 
oug refers to the gender implied in the neuter rdxvwv. 

2d. Tzdvrcjv d \> d> p (I) tz a) v 6 g zl aeo avn £^##, of all ?ne?l, 
whosoever may come == every man who shall come against 
you ; where 6'c, referring to a plural antecedent, takes the 
persons of the plural individually. 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 295 

3d. Oxep dizaffTj^ 'El X a 3 o q wv Tzaripaq exrstve, on be- 
half of all Greece, whose fathers she slew ; where wv 
refers to the meaning of z EXMdoq, i. e., the men of Greece. 

4th. (hjcraoponocdq avr^p ooq dij xai iizatvei to 7T/^#oc, A 
man increasing in wealthy whom you know (drj) even the 
multitude applaud. Here the plural relative generalizes 
the person spoken of into a class. 

935. — Instead of oe, the eompotind pronoun 

$<rrcq is used as a relative after naq, obdetq, or any word 
in the singular expressing an indefinite number, and oam 
after the same words in the plural ; as, naq forts, every 
one who ; ndvreq ogoc, all who / and if the indefinite is 
not expressed in the antecedent clause, it will often be 
better to express it in the translation ; as, raq -Sketq 8<rai, 
all the cities vshich. Sometimes it is used simply for oq. 

936. — If no nominative come between the rela- 
tive and the verb, the relative will be the nominative to 
the verb. 

If a nominative come between the relative and the 
verb, the relative will be of that case which the verb or 
noun following, or the preposition going before, usually 
governs. But, 

Attraction of the Relative. 

937. — JSxc. I. The relative is often attracted 
into the case of its antecedent ; as, 

Examples. 1. <rbv tatq vao<r\v a"iq (for aq) el^e, with 
the SHIPS WHICH he had. 2. fierae/ira) z7 t q yd ovijq f ( q 

(for y>) k'dwxa Dpuv, let him share the pleasure which I 

gave you. 3. fiepLV^fiivoq u> v e'-paqe (for ztov Ttpayftdratu a 
enpaq£ y 930-4th), being mindful o^what he did. 4. ano- 

Xatno d) y eyu) a^a^v, I enjoy WHAT GOODS I have 
(930-2d). 



296 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

Note 1. This usage of attraction originates partly in euphony, but still 
more in a desire to give unity to expression, and to indicate the close 
relation of thought by a like relation of form. It belongs to the same 
general principle by which the Greeks drew the antecedent and relative 
clauses entirely into one by omitting the relative ; as, ravra leyeic al^drj, 
you say these things true, for these things which you say are true (ravra 
a, 'kkyzir akrfofi eonv). See also below, 948. 

Note 2. This construction is sometimes, though very seldom, imitated 
in Latin ; as, Girciter sexcentas ejus generis cttjus supra demonstravimus^ 
naves invenit. Cms, See Lat Gr., 704. 

938. — Exc. II. The antecedent is sometimes 
attracted into the case of the relative*; as, 

"A XX o o 6° oo ze u olda zeu av xXozd z£u%sa duo), and I 
know not any other person whose renowned armor I could 
put on ; aXXou zso (for zw6<;) attracted by the relative zeo 
(for rod, 262, used for o5, 360), from the accusative 
into the ffCltitive / TzoXeojv xou zotzojv wv -rjjiiv tzozs xbptoi 
<pabea#ai ~potei±hooq, to be found surrendering cities and 
places of which toe were once masters. 

On this principle are to be construed such sentences as 
the following: obdiva xiydovov frvriv* ob% VTzifietvav, 
for obde\q r;v xbdovoq ovztva, there was 710 DANGER WHICH 
they did not undergo / ob d £v a ecpacrav o v'r ty* ob daxpu- 
ovza cnzo6zp£cp£G$ai, for obde\<; v t v ovxiv eyao-av ob daxpuovza, 

&c., there was no one who, they said, did not turn 

away weeping ; zivaq zobaS' opaj ^ivooq, for zivzq eifrh oozot 

ol Zhoi ou<; opaj, who are these strangers whom I see? 
939. — The relative pltiral, and in all its cases, 

. with tart before it, is used for evwt, -at, -a, some ; as, xa\ 

etTTiv oj (i. e., eviot) £zuy%avov Siopdxtov, and SOME hit 
breastplates; and zcbv noXztov eeziv w v (i. e., bnoyj)^from 
some cities. 

In this construction iazi is found with oaztq, both singu- 
lar and plural; as, earn #<rn<r, some one; eaztv ofatve^ 
some. 



RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. 297 

04:0. — There are many constructions analogous to the 
above with relative pronouns, adverbs, &c. ; as, 

ecTTiv o-oo touto ^7:otTj(Taq^ is there tchere you did this = did 
you anywhere do this ? f&Ttv ore raura Uyzt, there is ichen 
he says this == he sometimes says this. 



THE RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS, 
olog, ocrog, r^uxog, &c. 

041. — The relative adjectives oios, ovo^, tjXUoc, 
like the relative pronoun, always refer to a kindred word 
before them, expressed or understood, implying a com- 
parison of equality similar to talis qualis, tardus 
quantus, in Latin (Lat. Gr., 706) ; as, 

roToq or rotooroq — oloq, such — OS. 

t6<to<z or TOGouToq — offo^ so much, or many — as. 
TqXixoq — TjUxoq, ofsuch an age or size — as. 

042. — The antecedent and relative adjectives 

both refer to the same substantive, with which they 
agree in gender and number, while each takes the case 
required by the construction of the clause in which it 
stands; thus, Deji. Olynth. L, "As for the rest, he 
said they were thieves and flatterers, and r o to or ooq 
d.vd-pd)~ooq olouq fied-oad-ivTaz opyslad-at rotauza o\a lyh 
vuv 6xvu) 6voiid<rai) such mex as, ichen intoxicated, to dance 
such dances as I now hesitate to name. 

043. — The antecedent word is commonly un- 
derstood, and the relative is translated with some 
variety according to the connection in which it stands. 
The most of the cases in which, e. g., otoq is used for 
ToiouToq olozi may be reduced to three y viz., 1st, when it 
stands before a substantive ; 2d, before an adjective y 3d, 
before a verb. 

044. — First. Hefore a substantive, oh? ele- 

13* 



298 BELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. 

gantly takes the case in which its antecedent roiobroq 
would be, if expressed, and changes the substantive before 
which it stands into the same case by attraction ; thus, 
obx e<TTtv a v d p\ ol a) 2 oj x p dr e t (peudsad'OU^ to lie is not 
befitting such a man as Socrates is, for obx e<rnv dvdpl 

Towurip o\o<; Zcuxpd-7]<; k'(TTt (/>ebds<r#at. Again, yapi^opevov 

ol <p <j o\ dvd p i , gratifying such a man as thou art, 

for du dpi rotobrm^dloq ab (ei). 

In some instances the noun after oloz is not attracted 
into the same case with it; as, r&v (tocoutojv) oltovizep 
avr b q ovrwv^ they being precisely such as he. 

When the substantive to which oloq refers is ob- 
vious from the connection, it is frequently omitted, 
as in the preceding example. 

945, — Sometimes oioq stands elliptieally by a strong 

attraction; as, kfiaxapi^ov r^v p^ripa oloiv zixvcov ixbpr^e^ 
they congratulated the mother as to xohat sort of children 
she had obtained == that she had obtained such children. 
They bewailed the young man, ola spy a dpd<raq ola Xayydvet 
xaxd, what sort of deeds having done, what sort of evils he 
meets with == " that after having done such deeds, he meets 
with such disasters." 

946* — The construction is the same when oloq, or the 
substantive to which it belongs, is in the nomina- 
tive, or is governed by a XJVeposition ; as, aAy&is 
ayovraq nivftoq oloq abzobq 6 d-bvvoq di£(puyev, being truly 

grieved what sort of — that such a thunny fish escaped 
them, Lucian; IhziZovreq izdyyu aTzoXietr^at lq ola- x ax a $jxov 9 
expecting utterly to perish into what sort of calamities they 
were come — since they were come into such calamities. 

So in Thucydides : xa\ pdvy (scil. 'A&yvatant r.ohq) oore T<p 
7ZoXzfAtu) lizzlftovzL dyavdxTrjGW £X ei i ^<p oltov xaxoTta&sT, and 
we are now the only state which neither excites indigna- 
tion in an invading enemy, that they suffer by persons of 
such a character (lit. by what sort of persons they suffer). 



RELATED ADJECTIVE Vv r ORDS. 299 

111 constructions of this kind the idea will be readily 
perceived by considering oloq as put for on or d>z rucouroz. 
See numerous examples in L. Bos. Ellipses Gr., 271 ; 
Vigerus, ch. 3, §§ 8, 9. 

947. — Second. Before an adjective, it is em- 
ployed with a similar ellipsis; as, el pjev yap ra; avijp h 
abrolz eartv o\oq e[i7zeipoq 7toX£p.oo^for if indeed any one 
among them is, oio/; e/j-etpo--, such as is skilful (for ofog 
Igtiv ep-eipoq) ; or it might be resolved with the infini- 
tive ; as, olnq apiGToq^ the best, for tocoutoc; ulo^ elvai api(Tro<; y 

such as to be the best, &c. 

948. — 0\oq is frequently, however, joined with an 
adjective in the form of an exclamation or inter- 
rogation, apparently without reference to the usual 
antecedent; as, oloq (xiyaq, dloq yaleizoz, how great! how 

difficult! Thus Lysias, olix; p.iyaq xai detvog xbduvoz TJyco- 
\>(<jd-7}^ how great and terrible a danger was risked (scil. for 
the liberty of Greece} ! The construction here is in all 
cases elliptical, and is part of a full exclamatory construc- 
tion; as, TOLooroq xfaduvoc; oloq outoc, such a danger as this! 

949. — Third. Joined with the verb elfit, expressed 
or understood, and followed by an infinitive, it sig- 
nifies, " I am of such a kind as, or such as /" and, accord- 
ing to the connection in which it stands, may mean, a I 
am able," " I am wont" u I am ready, or willing" — 
roiovToq being always understood as an antecedent ; thus, 
ob yap 7}v oXoq a~b izavxbq zepdavat (i. e., rotouroq olog). 
Ton he was T£OT (such) as to make gain from every 
thing ; i. e., he was not willing (or inclined) to do every 
thing for the sake of gain. 

950. — The forms o\6q el[u, and otter el/it, are thus 
distinguished: oloq eifit, Tarn such as/ olov iazv^it is such 
as; ol6(Tre el/My I am able/ otfvre £&?&, it is possible. 
Thus, oloq ri el/jit =. duva/icu ; olovre lariv = dovarov iiTTtv. 

951. — Sometimes the verb elfiiis also omitted / as, 



300 CONSTRUCTION OF NOMINATIVE CASS. 

7] el duvatro axooetv £z too fiij oloors (cTvcu), or whether 
he could hear from not being able to hear formerly. 
052. — In the same manner roloq or vtnouros stands 
related to oloq following it, expressed or understood ; as, 

obx av 6j±tlrj<jaii±i to coot a) (scil. oloq ooToq £<7t:), I looulcl 

have no intercourse with such a man (scil. as he is). 

053. — The neuters olov and ola, either alone or com- 
bined with various particles, and used in a conjunctive or 
adverbial sense, have many similar elliptical uses. 
These may be ascertained from the lexicons. 

054:. — Note. — The observations which, have been made on the con- 
struction of the related adjectives rolog or roaovrog — o\og 1 are applicable, 
generally, to roaog or rooovrog — bcog ; observing that the former relates 
to the quality of objects, the latter to their number or quantity. The 
same also may be said of TrjXmog — ijXuwg, of such an age or size. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE NOMINATIVE 

CASE. 

055. — The nominative ease is used — 

1st. To express the subject of a proposition. 

2d. In apposition with another substantive in the 
nominative (857), or predicated of it (963, Obs. 6). 

3d. In exclamations / as, a> ducrdkaiva ly6 ! 
wretched me ! 

4th (rarely and anomalously), absolutely., or without 
dependence on any word in the sentence (1112, Obs. 4) ; 
as, tzoXXtj yap ij gt paTia ouaa, ob izdcrrjq e<7Tai -oXeioq bizo- 
disaaftai (aoTTJv), for the AEMY BEIISTG NUMEROUS, it Will 

not be hi the poicer of the whole state to accommodate 
them. Or without a particle, introducing an affirmation ; 

as, 6 Mu)u<T7}<; oux qtda/xev zi yiyovtv aurtD, THIS MOSES, we 

know not what has become of him. 



VEEB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 801 



A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 

956. — Rule IV, A verb agrees with its 
nominative in number and person ; as, 

iycb Ypd<pio^ Iicrite. 

vjieis roTzrere^ ye Strike, 

raj oyftaXiio} XdintsTov, his eyes shine. 

Rem. — The subject of a finite verb, if a noun or pronoun, or adjective 
used as a noun, is put in the nominative. The subject may also be an 
infinitive mood (1088), or part of a sentence; and to all these this rule 
applies. 

• 

Obs, 1. The nominative of the first and of the 
second person is generally omitted, being obvious from 
the termination of the verb ; also of the third person, when 
it may be readily supplied from the context ; as, Myooaiv, 
they say. They are used, therefore, chiefly when emphatic/ 
as, iya) Xiyw, I say, 

Obs. 2, The subject is also omitted, when the verb 
expresses an action usually performed by that subject ; 
as, 6a)-L%z^ the trumpeter sounds / ixi/jpo^e, the herald 
proclaimed ; or when it expresses an operation of nature ; 
as, oec > it rains / fipovra, it thunders, 

Obs, 3. Impersonal verbs are usually considered 
as without a nominative ; still they will generally be found 
to bear a relation to some circumstance, sentence, clause 
of a sentence, or infinitive mood, similar to that of a verb 
to its nominative ; as, e^eari pot aiztivai, it is lawful for me 
to depart^ i. e., to depart is lawful for me ; xP 7 ! Ge ~ in ~~ v -><> it 
behooves you to do it, i. e., to do it behooves you* Lat. 
Gr., 307. 

Note. — On the other hand, while the subject or nominative is expressed, 
the verb, especially the present tense of et/i/, is often omitted ; as, "'ETaItjv 
kydo, I (am) a Greek 



02 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 



SPECIAL RULES AND OBSERVATIONS. 

Agreement in Number. 

957. — Rule 1. A neuter plural commonly 
has a verb in tlie singular ; as, 

Za>a rptyet, animals run. 

v A<jrpa aviyqvav a 7)i±~iv rdq wpaq rr^q voxrbq £fiy>av{£et 9 

they (the Gods) caused stars to avvear, which show to us 
the hours of the night. 

Note. — This is on the same principle with the defective declension of 
neuter nouns ; they are not considered as, strictly speaking, entitled 
either to inflection or to syntactical construction. 

Obs. 1. This construction is more common with the 
Attic than with the Ionic and Doric writers. But with 
all there are many excejttlOJls, especially when the 
neuter plural signifies persons or animals / as, roadd* 
ei%7) larpdreoov^ so many nations ivere engaged in the 
expedition. Homer joins a singular and a plural verb 
with the same nominative. Odyss., n. 43. 

Obs. 2. We have already noticed special idioms in 
which a singular verb is followed by a plural nominative ; 

as, obx £<rz\v otrcvsq a~i%ovTai, THERE ARE NOjSTE %oho 

abstain. 

058.- — Rule 2. Two or more substantives 
singular, taken together, have a verb in the 
plural ; taken separately, the verb must be in 
the singular; as, 

Together, aldibq ds xal cpofioq eiMpuroi eitrcv avd-pmizm^ but 
shame and fear are natural to man. 

Separately, <rtn yap edtoxe vUtjv Zsbs xai ^AnoXXwv^for to 

thee Jupiter and Apollo gave the victory. 









VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 303 

Obs. 3. This rule is liable to many exceptions / for 
frequently the verb agrees with but one of the two 
nowns 9 commonly the one next it. Also, if of similar 
signification, they are in construction considered as one, 
and the verb follows in the singular; as, Sol tf £-\ roXiidzu} 
xapdirj xai #0/16$, but to thee let heart and soul dare. 

Obs. 4. A substantive in the singular, connected 
with other words as the subject of a verb, conveying the 
idea of plurality 9 may have the verb in the plural ; as, 

*P£a 7zapaXaj3ou<ja xai robq Kopufiavraq TZspnzoXoTxnv^ Rhea, 
having taken with her also the Corybantes, wanders about. 
So in Latin ; as, Juba cum Labieno capti in potestatem 
Ccesaris ve?iissent. Lat. Gr. 3 845. 

959. — Rule 3. A noun of multitude express- 
ing many as one whole lias a verb in the singu- 

iar i as. 

eZero Aa6<; 9 the people sat down, 

960. — But when it expresses many as indi- 
viduals, the verb must be plural ; as, 

ijpwTTj^ay abrov to Tckrfioq^ the multitude ashed him. 

■ 

Obs. 5. To both parts of this rule there are also excep- 
tions, and in some cases it seems indifferent whether the 
verb be in the singular or plural ; sometimes both 
are joined with the same nominative; as, i^em labq^ 

iprjTU&rjCFav dk xaftidpaq, the people SAT DOWN and KEPT 
THEIR SEATS. 

961.— Rule 4. A dual nominative may have 
a plural verb ; as, 

afKpw i'Ae^ov, both spake ; and a plural nominative, limited 
to two, may have a verb in the dual. 



304 VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 

Agreement in Person. 

962. — Rule 5. When two or more nomina- 
tives are of different persons, the verb takes the 
first person rather than the second, and the 
second rather than the third; as, eyo xai ov 
eiitofiev, you and I spoke. 

To this rule there are exceptions. 

The Nominative after the Verb. 
963. — Rule 6. Any verb may have the 
same case after it as before it when both words 
refer to the same thing ; as, 

up.et^ iffrk to <pcbq rod x6<T[iou, Ye are the light of the 
toorld. 

Rem. — The nominative before is the subject, the nominative after, the 
predicate — the verb is the copula, and is either a substantive or intransi- 
tive verb, or a passive verb of naming — from its use called copulative, 

Obs. 6. This rule applies to the infinitive, whatever 
be the case of its subject; also to participles (1095, 
Obs. 5, 1102.) 

Obs. 7. When the predicate is an adjective or a parti- 
ciple, without a substantive, it agrees with the subject 
before the verb, by Rule IL, except as noticed, 862. 

Obs. 8. In this construction, the verb usually agrees 
with the subject f sometimes, however, it agrees with the 
predicate ; as, TJaav de azddtot oxtoj to ixerai^atov auricov, and 
the space between them was eight stadia. So also when the 
copula is a participle ; as, he usually let go, robs 

fiiyiGza l^rjiiaprrjxoraq — fieyt&rqv ds uZaav (for ovraq;} fiXd- 

ftrj v Tzokeajq, those who had committed the greatest offences, 
and were the greatest injury to the state. 



GOVERNMENT, 305 



GOVERNMENT. 

964:* — Government is the power which one word 
has over another depending upon it, requiring it to be put 
in a certain case, mood, or tense. 

The Government of Cases. 

965. — The construction of the oblique cases depends 
in general upon the following principles ; viz., 

966. — The Genitive expresses the idea of origi- 
nating, proceeding from, and hence belonging to/ thus 
expressed in English by from, of, in respect to, &c. 

967. — The Dative expresses association or connec- 
tion with, that for which a thing is done (remote object), 
and that with which it is done (instrument, manner, &c). 

968. — The Accusative expresses the immediate 
object on which the action or influence of a transitive 
active verb terminates ; or of motion or tendency to, ex- 
pressed by a preposition. It is thus the proper case of 
motion and tendency toward. 

969. — The action of a verb may be considered in 
reference either, 1. To its immediate object, i. e., to 
that on which its action is immediately exerted, and which 
is always governed in the accusative ; as, oto6>a> ItiaoTov, 
to give myself / or, 2. To a remote object, i. e., to one 
not acted upon directly by the verb, but indirectly, and 
put in the case which expresses the nature of the relation ; 
in the case of transitive active verbs, in connection wdth an 
accusative of the direct object, in intransitive verbs, with- 
out it ; as, a-aXXdzTstv rcvd vogoo, to free one from disease / 
dtdovat ijuLaordv rJj izoIbi, to give myself to the state ; <p£idz<r- 
ftai za>v £p{(po)v,to spare the kids; fiorfieiv rg -rzarpidi, to aid 
(i. e., to render assistance to) my country. 



306 THE GENITIVE. 



I 



THE GENITIVE. 

97 0* — The genitive in Greek has the force of the 
Latin genitive, and part of the uses of the Latin ablative. 
Its primary and leading idea is that of separation or 
abstraction, going forth from, origin, cause. So that the 
meanings from, Otlt of> of, are implied in the case 
itself. 

The numerous and diversified uses of this case are reduced by Mat- 
thiae to the following heads : — 

97 !• — In Greek, words of all kinds maybe followed by other w^ords 
in the genitive, when the latter class limits, and shows in what respect 
the meaning of the former is to be taken. "Words so used may usually 
be rendered by such phrases as "with respect to," "in respect off thus, 

972, — With verbs; as, 6g ttoScjv elxov, as fast as they could run, 
lit. as they had themselves with respect to their feet ; na/Mg hx eLV 
fie ting, to have one's self well with respect to intoxication; c~§o)jxo- 
-&ac khTridoc, to be deceived WITH respect TO hope; nartaya tt)c ke- 
<j>a?i?]g, I am broken with respect to my head, i. e., I have broken my 
head. 

973, — With adjectives: ovyyvuficju tcjv av&porrivo)v d/uapTyjud- 
r«v, forgiving with respect to, i. e., indulgent toward, human errors; 
kyyvg rye iroXecjg, near with respect to the city, i. e., near to the 
city; yfj 7r?iela Katctiv, a land full op (i. e., with respect to) evils ; 
jj,eI£g)v Trarpdc, greater than (i. e., with respect to) his father. 

97^» — With all words which represent a situation or operation of 
the mind, which is directed to an object, but without affecting it ; such 
as verbs signifying to remember, to forget, to neglect, &c. : and adjectives 
signifying experienced, ignorant, desirous, &c. 

97 S. — With all words which indicate fulness, defect, emptiness, and 
the like. Under this head fall adjectives signifying full, rich, empty, 
deprived of, &c, and adverbs denoting abundance, want, sufficiency, &c. 

970. — To this principle must be referred the construction of the 
genitive with the comparative degree (998), with words denoting superior- 
ity, inferiority, comparison in value, and difference; as, d^/.og tovtov, worthy 
of this, I g., equal in value with respect to this ; tovtov dcdtyopog, dif- 
ferent from (in respect to) this. 

977 • — "When that with respect to which a thing is done may also be 



THE GENITIVE. 307 

considered the cause of its being done, the word expressing it is often 
put in the genitive, and may be rendered "on account of;" as, f&ovelv 
tivl goo lac, to envy one ox account of wisdom. Hence it is used with 
verbs signifying to accuse, or criminate, to pray, to begin, &c. ; and also, 
without another word, in exclamations. 

978. — The genitive in Greek is used to express the relation of a 
whole to its parts; i. e., it is put pariiiively. Hence it is put with verbs 
of all kinds, even with those that govern the accusative, when the action 
does not refer to the whole, but to a part; as, farrqaut Kpetiv, to roast ' 
SOME OF the flesh; h/u olSa tg)v kutiv yXiKiarav, IJcnow some OF 
those of my age. Hence, also, it is put with verbs which signify to 
share, to participate, &c. 

On this principle is founded the construction of the genitive of the 
part affected, after verbs signifying to take, to seize, to touch, &c. Hence, 
also, it is put with the superlative degree, to express the class of which 
that one, or those marked by the superlative, form a part. 

979. — The genitive is used to mark origin, or cause; and hence, the 
person or thing to which any thing belongs, whether as property, quality, 
habit, duty, &c. Hence, verbs which denote perceptions of sense, as 
hearing, tasting, touching, and mental acts and states, resulting from an 
external object, as admiring, caring far, desiring, &c, take the genitive 
of the object heard, admired, &c, concerned as their cause or source. 
Hence, also, the common rules, that " verbs denoting possession, property, 
or duty, &c, govern the genitive ;" that " the material of which any thing 
is made is put in the genitive ;" and that " one substantive governs 
another in the genitive.'''' 

980. — The genitive is also governed by certain prepositions, and by 
verbs compounded with prepositions ; that is to say, when the prepo- 
sitions may be separated from the verb and placed before the genitive 
without altering the sense. 

981.— The genitive is used to determine place and time in answer 
to the question "where?" "when?" &c. Hence the adverbs ov, ttov, 
ottov, where, which are, in fact, old genitives, and refer to part of place 
or time in general. 

To the general principles contained in these five heads, may be re- 
ferred all the cases which occur under all the following rules for the 
genitive. 



308 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 



THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUB- 
STANTIVES. 

982. — -Rule V. One substantive governs an- 
other in the genitive, when the latter substantive 
limits the signification of the former ; as, 

6 fte&v 7taT7jp y the father of gods. 

ava% &vdpa)v 9 king of men. 

983. — This rule is founded on the general principle mentioned (971 
and 979). In the examples above, the general term narr/p is restricted 
by the word d-ecbv governed by it. It is not any father, nor the father 
of men, but of gods ; so aval;, not any king, but the king of men. 

When a noun is restricted by another of the same signification, it is 
put in the same case by Rule I. (857). 

Obs. 1. The fioim governing the genitive is frequently 
understood (857, Obs. 1) ; viz., 1. After the article such 

"Words as oloq^ prJTYjp, d^oydnqp^ &c. ; as, Mdriddrjq 6 Ki[±a)vos 

(sup. ol6g) y Miltiades, the son of Cimon; rd tT^ ^x r i^ 
(sup. dcjprjfxara), the gifts of fortune. 2. Olxoq or dwpa 
after a preposition ; as, ^ narpoq (sup. daj/ia) y to the house 
of her father / elqaSou {d6p.ov) 9 into Hades / £v adoo (d6pw) y 
in Hades. 3. After the verbs efy«, ybvop.ai, V7zdp%u) 9 &c 
See 999 and 979. 

Obs. 2. When the noun in the genitive signifies a per- 
son, it may often be taken either in an active or in a 
passive sense; thus, ^ yvuxnt; rod deou, the knowledge 
of God. In this sentence, God may be either the subject 
or the object of the knowledge spoken of, i. e., the phrase 
may denote our knowledge of God, or his knowledge of 
us; n6&os otouj generally (not the regret of a sow,. viz., 
which he has, but) regret for a son; dvdpdz eupiveta rotoode y 
good will towards such a man. Lat. Gr., 334. 



GENITIVE GOVEHXED BY SUBSTANTIVES. S09 

984:* — This passive sense of the genitive is more 
common when the governing noun is derived from a verb 
which usually governs the dative, and when the one 
substantive is in one sense the cause, and in another the 
object, of that which is expressed by the other substantive ; 
as, vznripwv dajpyjriaza y offerings (not of but) to the 
dead; eoyi-Lara ITaAXddoc, prayers to Pallas ; rj ra>v 

IIXaTat(<t>v l-KTrpareia, the march AGAINST THE PlA- 

T^AIS'S. 

985. — Nouns thus derived, however, are more fre- 
quently followed by the dative; as, ^ Mouciwv doetq 
avftpwTzoiGt^ the gift of the Muses to men; sometimes 
by the preposition els with the accusative; as, #£<5v els 

avd-pd>~ou<; doGtq, 1011. 

Obs. 3. Substantives derived from verbs which govern 
the genitive, are often followed by a genitive governed 
by the force of the primitive contained in the deriva- 
tive ; thus, IXszbftzpoc, tzSvoo (988), free from labor ; hence, 
Ikeoftepia novou, freedom from labor y xpareTv ^&>va>v(l00'7) 
to be superior to pleasures ; kyxpazeia Tjdovwv, mastery over, 
or moderation in pleasures ; dxpareca ijdovwy, impotence in 
respect of = want of moderation in pleasures * iraxoupr^a 
rrjs ytovoq^ protection against the snow. 

Obs. 4. Sometimes the genitive follows the substan- 
tive, when it would more naturally take a preposition f 
even then, however, it is not necessary to understand a 
preposition. Thus, with nouns expressing the material 
of which a thing is made, or the author or source from 
which it proceeds (1047, Obs. 3) ; as, trriipavos dv^ifiafv^a 
crown of flowers (more commonly, <jr((pavo<; ££ dv&t/j>a)v) ; 
%aXxov ayaX/ia, a helmet of brass ; rJv&oq datfiovcw, grief sent 
from the gods ; "Hpaq dkarelat, wanderings caused by Juno. 

Obs. 5. A noun in the genitive, after another of the 
same kind, denotes the extreme either of pre-emineiice 



310 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 

or inferiority / as, fio^de? ftaeuicvv, to the Icing of 
kings / douXos dobkwv^ a slave of slaves. 

Obs. 6. A number of substantives followed by 
the genitive of a noun, or by a possessive adjective 
formed from it, are by the poets often put, by a kind of 
circumlocution, for the notin itself. The chief of 
these are /?«*, ?c, pivoq y stre?igth / xT t p^ the heart; ydfio^, 
fear; xeTpas, ziXo~, rzXzu~r h the end; dipac, a body ; 

xdpa, xdprjvov, xecpaky^ the head y &G. \ as, /Sea Kdczopoq^ 
for Kdarajp) Castor • /96? ^HpaxX-qzL-t), for t Hpax?,9]c, Hercules ; 
ziXoq Savdzou, for #gcvocto£, death ; ^ Ioxdazt]Z xdpa^ for ^loxdcrzrj. 
Obs. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two differ- 
ent genitives in different relations; as, brciduve zwu 

'Icuvojv z-qv ftfspovtr/V zoo izpoq Aapelov izoXipou^ he as- 
sumed the leading of the Ionians in the war against 

Darius; z&v oixetwv xpoTzyXaxiGets zoo yrjpcoq^ insults 
OF REIATIONS TO OLD AGE; Eevoy&vzoc; ^AvdfiaGiq Kbpoo, 

Xenophorfs Expedition of Gyrus. 

Obs. 8. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded 
by a neuter article, for the noun itself; as, zd Z7jq rby-q^^ 

for i) rb%7], fortune / rd zww papftdpeov (for ol fidpftapoi) 

aiziazd lazty the barbarians are not to be trusted (lit. the 
things appertaining to the barbarians are unreliable). 

986 • — Rule VI. An adjective or article in 
the neuter gender, without a substantive, governs 
the genitive ; as, 

to noXXdv r?~> (TzpaztJjs, the greatest part of the army. 
zd zijS To^ys, the things of fortune. 

Obs. 9. The adjective in the neuter gender is either 
itself considered as a substantive (874), or as having a 
substantive understood, which is properly the 
governing word. 



GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 311 

987. — Rul^ VII. A substantive added to 
another, to express a quality or circumstance 
belonging to it, is put in the genitive ; as ? 

avijp fisydlys aper^s, a man of great virtue. 

Obs. 10. The substantive in the genitive has commonly 
an adjective with it, as in the example above, but not 
always; as, itoXsfioq ou% okXwv alia Sa7:dv7j<;, a war, 

NOT OF WEAPONS, but OF MONEY. But, 

Obs. 11. A substantive limiting, an adjective of 
quality is generally put in the a^Susative, either with 

or without xara; as, a>ijp a-ouddiaq rbv zpoizov, a man 
of ingenuous disposition. 

THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY 

ADJECTIVES. 

988. — Rule VIII. Verbal adjectives, and 
such as signify an affection or operation of the 
mind, govern the genitive ; as, 

av&pwiziDv drjXrjjjLajv, hurtful to men. 

eti-sipoq fwuGizq<z 9 skilled in music. 

Rem. — The principle on which this rule is founded is contained in 
971-973. 

989. — Under this rule are comprehended, 

990. — Adjectives denoting action or capacity, 

which are derived from verbs, or corresponding to them, 
especially those in roc, tzoc, and -qptoq. 

991. — Many adjectives compounded with a priva- 
tive (715, 1st) ; as, aftiaroq xai dvTJxooq andvrwv, without 
seeing or hearing any thing (lit., unseeing and unhearing 
as to all things). 



812 GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 



2. — Participles used in an adjective sense, espe- 
cially among the poets; as, .itepuyfiiws a£Ma>v, having 
escaped from troubles; oitavcw etdws, skilled in augury. 

Note. — These, however, are often followed by the accusative; as, 
£ idug ad-efiicTLci, skilled in wickedness. 

993. — Adjectives expressing a state or operation 

of mind; as, desire, aversion, care, knowledge, igno- 
rance, memory, for getfulness, profusion, parsimony, and 
the like. 

994. — Adjectives derived from, or of a similar signifi- 
cation with verbs which govern the genitive ; as, 
inUoupiK <pd%ouq, (txotoo, x. r. A., serviceable against cold, 
darkness, &c. 

995. — Rule IX. Adjectives signifying plenty 
or want j &c, govern the genitive (975) ; as, 

[±£<rrds ftopbfiou, full of confusion. 

eprjfioq dvdpajv, destitute of men. 

996. — Under this rule are comprehended, 

1st. Adjectives of fulness, plenty, and want; 
value, dignity, tvorth, and the contrary. 

2d. Adjectives expressive of power, eminence, 
superiority, and their opposites ; also, of partici- 
pation, diversity, separation, peculiarity, 
or property, and the like. 

3d. Adjectives followed by the genitive of the 
cause $ as, ad-fooq rijq Tuxrjs, miserable in respect of for- 
tune (miserable from fortune). 

Note. — Adjectives of plenty and want sometimes govern the dative ; 
as, afyveibg iiifkot^ abounding in apples. 

997. — Rule X. Partitives, and word^ placed 
partitively, comparatives, superlatives, interrogctr 



I 



GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 318 

tives, indefinites, and some numerals, govern the 
genitive plural; as, 

1. ~<hv avftpw-wv ol p.ev aowoi, ol S y ou, of men SOME 

are tcise, and others not. 

2. ol Tzakauxi twv 7conjrwv^ the ancient poets, 

3. Iv rajv tcXoimu, one of the ships. 

4. xpwTos 'A&yjvaiwv, the first of the Athenians. 

5. 6 vewrepoq rah ddekvwv, the younger of the brothers. 

6. e^taroq fiacrugwv, most hateful of kings. 
' Rem. — For the principle of this rule, see 978. 

Obs. 1. All words are denominated par titives which 
express apart of any number or class of objects, the whole 
being expressed by the noun following it in the genitive. 

Obs. 2. The genitive after the partitive is some- 
times governed by the preposition & or if, as, e£ <*--a- 
co)v i] xaXkferq, the most beautiful of all : and sometimes, 
instead of the genitive, there is found a preposition with 
another case ; as, zaXXitrnq ev ralg yovat^t^ fairest among 
women / so in Latin, justissimus in Teucris. Lat. Gr., 775. 

Obs. 3. Instead of the genitive, the ease of the par- 
titive is sometimes used; as, rob~ <p(Xou<; rob<: fiev 
■jbcizretve, of his feiends, some indeed he slew, &c. 

Obs. 4. The partitives Hs and els are sometimes 

Omitted} as, (pipco aoi GToXrjv rtbv zaXXtffTjkfv (sc. /*:'«>), 
I bring you a very excellent robe (lit., one of the most 
beautiful) ; yfteXe tojv /i$v«>Twv elvai (sc. etc), he wished to 
be one of those tcho remained. This latter, however, 
resolves itself into the general use of the genitive : " he 
wished to be of those " = to belong to those who, &c. So 
bgti tq)v alcryptiv, it is of the base things, emphatic for 

alaypov Igtiv. 

Obs. 5. Partitives agree in gender with the substan- 
tives which follow in the genitive. When two sub- 
stantives follow in the genitive, the partitives, &c, 
14 



814- GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 

commonly agree with the former, but sometimes with the 
latter. 

Obs. 6. Collective nouns are governed by partitives 
in the genitive singular. 

Obs. 7. Adjective^ in the positive form? but conveying 
a superlative sense? on the principle of this rule govern 
the genitive plural / as, e^o^oq -dvrwv, the most excel- 
lent of all * dla Ozdujv^ goddess of goddesses (i. e., supreme 
goddess) ; dla yuvatxwv, most excellent of women, deu/jwyte 
avdp&v, Good sir. Also nouns compounded with a in a 
privative sense ; as, ayolxoq aG~id<Dv^ unarmed with brazen 
shields. 

Obs. 8. On a similar principle an adjective in the gen- 
itive pllival sometimes accompanies substantives of all 
kinds, in order to mart the class to which the person or 
thing mentioned belongs; as, rpo%o~ tu>v xspa/j.acxwv, a 
wheel of the class of the earthed, i. e., an earthen 
io heel ; ~£Xexoq tgjv vauTzrjycxaJv^ an axe of those be- 
loxgi^g to ship-bulldeks, i. e., a ship-builder ! s axe. 

098. — Rule XL The comparative degree, 
without a conjunction, governs the genitive; as, 

rXuxtajv fxiXtroq^ sweeter than honey. 

xpeiGGwv olxrtp/j.00 <p#6vo<;^ envy is stronger than pity. 

Rem. — This, from its condensed and elliptical character, is a favorite 
construction with the Greeks. Hence, they not only employ it where 
it is strictly appropriate — as, Gcxjxjrepog e/mw, wiser than I — but also 
where the logical construction would demand ?; with the nominative or 
accusative — as, (j)i-Ao cs fiak7.ov tovtov, for fiaX/iov ?} tovtovc, I love thee 
more than (I love) these ; or, ftaXkov rj ovtol, more than these love thee. Yet 
after the comparative degree the genitive is sometimes governed by a 
preposition; as, o\av ?/ rvpavvlc rrpb kAevftepiric yv acnaoTorepov, 
to whom tyranny was more agreeable than liberty. 

Obs. 9. The conjunction *?, than^ after the com- 
parative is often followed by the same case that 

preceiJeS it$ as, hi avdpaq ~oAu afJLSivvva<; y Zxoftaq^ 



GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 315 

against men much braver them the Scythians / otherwise 
regularly by the nominative, ei<ii being understood ; as, 
rolg vewripocg r) lyd), to those younger than I am. 

Obs. 10. After the comparative, r) is sometimes fol- 
lowed by an infinitive with or without o>s or cbaze ; as, 
xaxa /j.£l^cu rj ware wmxXakiv, evils too great to excite my 
tears {greater than so as to weep over) ; voerjfia jiel^ov r) 
fipetv, affliction too great to bear. 

Obs. 11. The comparative tvithout rj (than) is 
followed by the genitive according to the rule ; as, <pwvj} 
yXoxepcoripa f±eXtz7jpou, a voice sweeter than honey-comb. 

Obs. 12. The genitives zouzou and o5, governed by a 
comparative, are often followed by an explanation 

with rj ; as, obx £(7zi roods izaxn. xdXXcow yipa^, rj -azpoq lad-Xoo 

xayaftoo necpuxivat, there is no greater honor to children 
than this (viz., than), to be born from a brave and vir- 
tuous father. 

Obs. 13. The infinitive mood being, with the article, 
used constantly as a noun? is of course subject to the 

above rule; as, zo (poXd^at zd dyaftd zoo xrrj (Taenia t 

yaXe-wrepov i<jzi, to preserve one^s advantages is more 

DIFFICULT THAN TO ACQUIRE THEM. 

Obs. 14. Words which imply a comparison? gov- 
ern the genitive on the same principle ; these are, 
1st. Such words as express difference? &&^epi<jG6q,deb- 

zepoq^ uffzepoq'^ also, didepopoq, irepoq, aXXoq, dXXoloq^dXXoTpioc. 

2d. Multiplicative numbers; as, dixXdawq, zpcxXd- 
Gtoq] as, diTzXdaiov del dx.obziv zoo Xiyetv^ one should 

hear twice as much as he speaks. 

Obs. 15. The superlative is sometimes used poet- 
ically for the comparative? and is then subject to 
the same rules; as (with the conjunction), Xwazov r) zd 
$X(ypaq nedtov, better than the plain of Phlegra ; (without 
the conjunction) <ts?o <? oozes dvr)p /xaxdpzazoz^ but no man, 
is happier than you. 



oiO GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 



THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

999. — Rule XII. The person or tiling to 
which, any thing belongs, is put in the genitive 
after sl^il, yiyvofiai, V7iap%cd' y as, 

e&rt rod j3a<rdia)q, it belongs to the king. 
elvat iauTou, to be his ovm master (to belong to himself). 
too xaXa>q TtoXepelv to £&iXetv £<ttc 9 alacrity is necessary to 
fighting well / i. e., belongs to it. 

Bern. — For the principle of this rule, see 979. Consistently with this, 
in constructions of this kind, a substantive may be considered as un- 
derstood, which is the governing word. Lat. Gr., 780. 

Obs. 1. Tet here also we have the genitive governed 
directly by a preposition expressed, indicating that 
from, whicJi the quality, &c, proceeds ; as, ob* 

egti -pbq TioXeajT^ it is not on the part of appertaining 
to the state = it is not proper for the state. On this 
principle are to be explained such sentences as the follow- 
ing : obx ayajiai tooto avdpbq apiGTioq, I do not approve 

this in a pkence {in respect of a prince) ; tooto Ixaivw 
'AyrjGiXdou, I commend this in (respect of) Agesilaus; 
tooto fxi[x<povrat fidXiGTa y ll&v ^ this they blame 'chiefly in us. 

1000. — Rule XIII. Verbs expressing the 
operation of the senses, govern the genitive ; as, 

■/.Xod-i fj.eu, hear me. 

pyj poo Sktoo, do not be touching (or clasping) me. 

Exc. l. Verbs of seeing govern the accusative ; 
as, Ozbv 8<povTai 9 they toill see God. 

Exc. 2. This rule is subject also to other exceptions. 
Verbs of smelling ', tasting, hungering 9 &c, gen- 



GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 317 

erally take the genitive, but very rarely the accusative. 
Verbs of hearing take regularly the accttsative of 
the object (the thing heard), and the genitive of the 
cause or source / as, dxouw xrp <pa>vyjv, I hear the voice; but 
dxouw rod Xiyovroq, I hear (from) the man who speaks. 
There is sometimes an apparent exception to this rule ; as, 
uxouio T7j<: (fwvrjq, I hear (of) the voice, hear indistinctly 
(the genitive being taken partitively). Or the voice may 
be contemplated as the source instead of .object, and thus 
put in the genitive. 

Obs. 2. The principle on which verbs under this rule, 
and some of those that follow, govern the genitive 9 is, 
that the word in the genitive, following the verb, expresses 
that which is viewed as the origin or cause of the 
sensation or act expressed by the verb (979). 

Bern. — With verbs governing the genitive (as with verbs governing 
the dative, and indeed the accusative) the preposition is sometimes sub- 
joined to give more fulness to the expression. Erom this, however, it 
does not follow that when the preposition is wanting, it is to be understood 
in the construction. The relation is properly expressed by the case, and 
the preposition comes in to express it with greater definiteness. 

1001. — Rule XIV. Verbs signifying an 
operation of the mind, govern the genitive ; as, 

-&aufj.dZcu (jod, J admire you. 

dpisXeTq rcov <piXwv, you neglect your friends. 

Hem. — Verbs which come under this rule govern the 
genitive on the principles stated (974, 979). Examples 
occur also in Latin (see Lat. Gr., 783). It applies gener- 
ally to verbs which signify, 

1. To pity, to spare, to care for, or neglect / as, Iritpe- 
XelffS-ai, <ppovri%etv, dXeyi^etv, d/iekeTv, oliywpew. 

2. To remember or forget / as, pydcd-ai, [lvrifiovtbeiv, 
lavMve<j#at,- &c, with their compounds. But these fre- 
quently govern the accusative. 



318 GENITIVE GOVERNED EY VERBS. 

3. To consider, to reflect, to perceive, or understand ; 
these also govern the accusative. 

4. To admire, to aim at, to desire or to loathe, to 
revere or to despise. 

Obs. 3. Many of these verbs used transitively (i. e., 
signifying to ccitise the operation of mind they express), 
take, of course, along with the genitive of the object, 
the accusative of the person ; as, &xip.w}&h § Tzarpoz, 
he pat him in mind of his father / eyeuadq /is eudat/iovtaz, 
you caused me to taste of happiness. Verbs thus used 
are sometimes denominated causative or incentive verbs, 
and hence the 

1002. — Rule. Causative verbs govern the 
accusative of tlie person with the genitive (or 
other appropriate case) of the thing. 

1003. — Rule XV. Transitive verbs proper 
govern the genitive when they refer to a part 
only, and not to the tvliole of the object; as, 

BTzts rod vdaroq, he drank of the icater. 

Bern. — This construction resolves itself into the general partitive idea 
of the genitive. Thus, trivet vdup would mean, he drinks water as a bev- 
erage, he is a water-drinker ; trivet rob vdarog, he is drinking some water, 
or, he drinks of the water. So etyaye tov upearog, he ate (a part) of the 
flesh , , efyaye to npfag, he ate the flesh, or, he was a flesh-eater. 

1004. — To this rule belong more especially such verbs 

as signify, 

1. To share, participate, or impart, which, with the 
genitive of the thing, frequently govern the dative 
of the 2>CVSOn to whom it is imparted; as, i±eTadidu)[±i tw 
adelcpa) tujv yprjfidTojv, I share the property with my brother* 

2. To receive, obtain, or enjoy ; as, rifir^ eXaye, he 
gained honor ; £dv Xdj3oj t u£v o-yoXr^q, if we get [some) leisure. 

3. Verbs signifying to take, to seize, and their con- 



GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 319 

traries, to touch, or to carry, especially in the middle voice, 
with the accusative of the tvhole, govern the genitive 
of the p>art affected; as, ildftoyro ryjq Zibvyq rd> y 0p6v- 
tt)v, they seized Orontes by the girdle. 

Exc. — Some Verbs, Such as Xa[±fidvo[±ai, pLsriyco, xkqpovo- 

fiiaj, Xayydvoj, ruyydyaj, sometimes govern the accusative 
of the thing ; zXypovo^iw, with the accusative of the 
thing, governs also the genitive of the person from 

whom it is received, as, exXr^povofirjae too narpos rd XT7J- 
fiara, he inherited his p>ossessions from his father y some- 
times it governs the genitive of both. 

1005. — Rule XVI. Verbs of plenty or want, 
filling or depriving, separation or distance, gov- 
ern the genitive (975) ; as, 

eu^opsl yprjiidrcDv^ he abounds in riches. 

ypuaoo vrj7]<Td<j$uj vr t a, let him fill his ship with gold. 

delation xpr/fidrajv, to be in icant of money. 

1006* — Under this rule there may be comprehended 
verbs which express the general idea of separation, 
or which signify, 

1. To beg or entreat ; as, 3£o/ia{ goo, I beg of you. 

2. To bereave or deprive j as, Grep(a), d-oGrepiaj. 

3. To deliver, loose, or set free; as, IXzotiepdu)^ Xua), 
AizaXXdaaoj, 

4. To escape ; as, Ixyebyco, dXuGxco. 

5. To keep off, to hinder or prevent, to desist ; as, 

xioXooj, eprjTsuct), eya) (scil. zv>d rv>oq)^ efpyo/ia'., &G. 

6. To differ from, to be distant, to abstain ; as, Sciyaj, 

CLTziyw, dcaXXdrzco, Sta<fgpw y drciyo/iac. But some verbs of 
differing govern also the dative^, as, dta<pipaj Got, I differ 
with you y dtayipopai Got, I am at variance with you. 

7. To separate, repel, or drive away ; as, ywplZa), dtopi^aj, 

d/iovco, dyeipaj, Suvxw, &c. 



320 GENITIVE GOVEKtfED BY YEEBS. 

8. To make way for or retire from, to resign ; as, elxui^ 

VTZoyajpico, b-dyu), <Tuy%topia). 

9. To err, to cause to err / as, vTuo-Xavdo/icu, dnoruf^dvofiac^ 
dp.aprdva), TzXavdcu. 

10. To cease, to cause to cease ; as, r.auo), Tzabopac, X.rjyaj, 
&c. 

11. To deceive, frustrate, or disappoint; as, ipebdofiat^ 

iz-alio, GtpdXXopai, &c. 

Obs. 5. Many of these are transitive, and, with the 
f/enitive of the remote object, govern the accusa- 
tive of the direct object ; thus, under ISTo. 3, <jk rood' 
iXso^spaj <pov oo, I clear you of this murder; dwatpe'Kj&ai, 
to deprive, sometimes governs the accusative and genitive, 
but more commonly tVv r o accusatives ; as, dcpeXi^ac rv>d ri. 

Obs, 6. The genitive after these verbs, whether transi- 
tive or intransitive, is sometimes governed by a prepo- 
sition intervening, which gives emphasis to the expres- 
sion ; as, IXeu-d-epaxjaz ryv 'EXXdda d-d Mtjoluv, having 
liberated Greece from the Medes (1000, Hem.), 

1007. — Rule XVII. Verbs of ruling, presi- 
ding over, excelling r , and the contrary, govern the 
genitive (976) ; as, 

tzoXXwv h%wv ap%etv, to ride over many nations. 
twv 7zpay/idrajw ixcGTarelv, to have the superintendence of 
affairs. 

1008* — The verbs which come under this rule are 
those which signify, 

1. To ride / as, «7?/o>, xpalva), de<T7z6Z(i), duvacrrebct), kzjuo- 
cia^u), abd-evriaj, xaraxupcebw. 

2. To reign ; as, rupawebaj, fiatnXzbu), dvdaaw. 

3. To lead I as, yyiopat, -/jytpoveboj, arparriy£w % 

4. To preside over / as, knidzaria). 



GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 821 

5. To survive, or to be over ; as, -KspUtfit. 

6. To surpass, or excel ; as, TpajTsuco, b-zpfiabuj^ nepifi&X- 
Xco, dtawipaj, Tzeptytyvofiat. 

7. To begin, i. e., to be first, to lead the way ; as, o-p%o- 
fxai 5 SO apyu), i)-dp%(D, xardpyco, 

\ 8. The contrary are such as signify to be ruled, led y 
presided over, &c. ; to obey, to be inferior to, to be over- 
come. 

Obs. 7. Some verbs govern the genitive by the force of 
a itouit implied in them ; thus, Topavvevetv is equivalent 
to rbpawoq elvai ; hence, irupdwevs Kopiv$ou 3 he was king 
of Corinth, is equivalent to rupavyoq %v Kopb&ou. 

Obs. 8. Several verbs belonging to these classes some- 
times govern the dative ; as, dvdacu), (Trjfiaba), xpariw, f/yi- 
ofiai, rjyejioveuco, apyco\ and sometimes the accusative. 

1009. — Rule XVIII. Verbs of buying, sell- 
ing, estimating, and the like, govern the genitive 
of the price (1053) ; as, 

w^rjtjdfirjv touto izivre' d payjj.wv ^ I bought this for FIVE 
DRACHMAE. 

rd>v TlOvwv ~u)Xov(JLv tj/mv ~dv~a Tdyatta ol #sot,the gods 

sell all good things to as for labor. 

d^ioorat dcTzXyjs rifjLTjq, he is thought w orthy of double 
honor. 

Bern. — This genitive, like the others, depends on the general genitive 
meaning of belonging to, in respect of; as, I bought it in respect of, for five 
drachms. The more full construction is with avrl, over against, equiva- 
lent to, for. The price is sometimes put in the dative with eiri, upon, 
conditioned upon; as, e~l iroAAtJ, conditioned upon much — at a great cost; 
and sometimes in the accusative with Tcpog, toward the front of standing 
related to ; hence, = a match for, equivalent to. 

N". B. — For the construction of the geflitive with the 
acctisative, see 1026-1029; also, for the genitive 



822 CONSTRUCTION" OF DATIVE. 

governed by adverbs, see 1055-1063 ; by preposi- 
tiofis? 1071-1076; and as used to express certain circum- 
stances, 1041-1045, and from 1049 to 1054. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE DATIVE. 

1010. — The dative has, in general, two significa- 
tions : — 

1. It is properly the case of association and accompaniment; as, 6/u- 
2,0) aoi, I associate with thee : and hence is used with prepositions of that 
general import; as, ev, in; avv, in conjunction with; irapa, beside, with; 
Trpbg r£>, close upon, in addition to ; sttl tgj, close upon ; vtto t&, close under, 
&c. ; also to express that in connection with which we do any thing, 
regarded as instrument, cause, manner, &c. In these uses it corresponds 
nearly to the Latin ablative. 

2. It is used to express the remote object to which a quality or action, 
or any state or condition of things tends, or to which it refers. This 
tendency is usually expressed in English by the words to or for. As 
thus used, it corresponds to the dative in Latin, and is subject to nearly 
the same rules. 

Rem. — To this general character of the dative may be referred an 
occasional Greek usage which introduces the dative of the person to whom 
the statement may be interesting, entirely independently of the syntacti- 
cal construction. In such cases, the dative, though redundant in respect 
of construction, is not so in effect, as it imparts a touch of feeling and sen- 
timent easily felt, but not so easy to express in a translation. Thus, 
7) [ii]TY]p ha as icoisiv b, n av fiovXy, lv' avry /uaK&piog r)g (Plut. Lys.), thy 
mother permits thee to do whatever thou pleasest, in order that tlwu may est 
be happy (for her). The avry has reference to the feelings of the mother. 
The datives fioi and aoi are very often used in this way. Thus, Oedip. 
Tyr., 2, rlvag Trod-' kdpac rdade juoi tfodgrre; where //o/intimates the king's 
mournful interest in the scene before him. In Xen. Cyr., Cyrus, ad- 
dressing his mother, says, olfiai cot ekeivovc — vacyaEtv, &c, I think (for 
you) that I shall easily surpass these; where aoi intimates the delightful 
interest an affectionate mother might be supposed to feel in the event 
anticipated. So in Latin, Quo tantum Mini dexter abis. Yirg., ^Eneid 
V., 1G2. Lat. Gr., 814, 838. 



DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 323 

THE DATIVE AFTER SUBSTANTIVES. 

1011. — Rule XIX. Substantives derived 
from verbs which govern the dative sometimes 
govern the dative also ; as, 

i] too $eou docis 6/jl~iv, the gift of God to you. 

i] h raj -oXi[±u) ro~iq (pilots fiorjftsia, the assistance of (i. e., 
rendered to) friends in war. 

iq avrtXoyiav rolq %u[itidyots, for the contradiction of your 
allies : — 

Because didajjxt^ fto-qMoj^ and avTiXiyu), govern the dative. 

Obs. 1. The dative often follows a substantive in 
the sense of the genitive ; as, TiXXaj ol voider the 
children to {of) Tellus. See 1016, Obs. 1. 

Obs. 2. The dative sometimes depends on an adjec- 
tive and substantive joined together, but chiefly on 
account of the adjective; as, xXewbv SdXog narpi^ illustrious 
offspring to the father. 

Obs. 3. The dative sometimes follows a substan- 
tive? not as implying possession, but adequation or de- 
sign ; as, %sp(jh r.ovoq, labor for hands ; i. e., adapted for, 
designed for, suited to. 



THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJEC- - 

TIVES. 

1012. — Rule XX. Adjectives signifying 
profit or disprofit, likeness or unlikeness, govern 
the dative ; as, 

w<p£Xt[±oq rfj TidXet^ profitable to the state. / 

otioioq to) 7zarpc\ like his father. 



824: DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 

101.3. — The dative after such adjectives, expresses the 
object to whicJl the quality expressed by the adjective 
refers ; and hence, .all adjectives in which such a reference 
is involved, are followed by the dative of the object to 
which they relate. In this class, besides those mentioned 
in the rule, may be reckoned, 

1st. Adjectives signifying usefulness, friendli- 
ness, equality, suitableness, resemblance, 
ease, fitness, agreement, and the like, with their 
contraries. Hence, 6 abroq, the same, and sometimes el<r, 
one, and rotouroq, such, are followed by the dative ; as, 

to. aura (raura) ndayjo cot, I suffer THE SAME THINGS 

with you (so sometimes in Latin, Invitum qui ser- 
ved, idem facit occidenti — Hor., He who preserves a 
man against his will, acts the same part with the man 

WHO KILLS HIM) ; rrjq al)T7~j<; ayvoiaq bTzebftuvoq el roT<; alkoiq, 

you are responsible for the same ignorance ivith the rest ; 
8s lp.o\ ixtaq tyivero £z fir^zipoq, who loas bom OF THE 
SAME (OF ONE) MOTHER WITH ME. 

Exc. — Adjectives signifying likeness, equality, &c., are sometimes (by a 
rare and harsh idiom) followed by the object of comparison, not in the 
dative, but in the same case with the adjective, and connected with it by 
the conjunction Kdi\ as, ovrdg ye 6 ?i6yoc e/uoiye donei av b/xoiog elvai 
nal izpdrepog (instead of elvai r& irporepiS), this argument would seem 
to me at least to be like the former. [Let the pupil here observe that 
av qualifies not donel, but elvai, lit. seems to would oe.~\ So also the nom- 
inative is used after the adverbs o/iolog, lacog, Kara ravrd-, as, ovx ofioioc 
izenoirjuaoi nal "Ofirjpoc, they have not done like Homer; Kara ravrd 
ovrog ?/xW e Ka l Kid- a pa, this man sounded just as A harp. These con- 
structions are to be resolved thus: ovrog ye 6 16yog nal repdrepog doicel, 
&c. ; ovrog Kal iw&apa i]XV ae ^ &C. 

2d. Adjectives compounded with guv, Sjaou, and /j.erd, 
signifying with ; as, o~uvTpo<poz, 6/wpo^ fierairioq rot, &c. ; 
— yet sometimes these govern the genitive. 

3d. Some adjectives derived from verbs which 



DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 325 

govern the dative, govern the dative also; as, 6\x6Xou~ 

"d-oq, dxoXou^rcxoq^ diddoyoq. f 

Obs. 1. There are many adjectives which govern either 
the genitive or dative ; as, o/iotoq, like ; t<ro~, equal; 
SiKDvo'ioq^ of the same name; 6pL07zdrpios, of the same 
father ; ofiofXTjrpwq^ of the same mother ; abvrpocpos^ edu- 
cated together; GuvyjVyq, familiar ; laofipoizoq^ equipoised^ 
of equal weight ; xo w 6 c, common ; nXouatoq, d<pvei6q^ rich ; 
evTzopoq^ abundant ; Ivdeyjt;, needy ; evo^o^, b-odtxor;^ liable 
to; v-ebftuvoq, exposed, obnoxious ; olxelog, familiar ; wvtoq^ 
to be sold ; SouXoq, a slave ; kXeud-spoq^free ; as, ojiotos too 

7zarp6q^ or rip 7zarpt\ like his father / ofjLWvutios rod izarpoq^ or 

rw Tzarpt, of the same name with his father. 

Obs. 2. It has been observed (435, Obs. 1), that the 
verbal adjectives in to<; and zioq have a passive signi- 
fication corresponding nearly to the Latin verbals in bills 
and dus. Their construction, when thus used, is also 
similar ; and hence the following 

1014. — Special Rule I. Verbals in tog and 
reog, signifying passively, govern the dative of 
the doer ; as, 

touto ob firjrov Icri pot, this is not to be spolcen by me. 
i) x6 Xtz wcpeXyria aoi lazi, the city ought to be benefited 
by thee. 

Bern. — The dative, however, m this construction, when it is general 
in its nature, is commonly omitted ; as, TLfiTjrea korlv ?) apery, virtue 
must be honored (viz., r][uv, by us). 

Obs. 3. Verbals in r^c, not signifying passively, 

•govern the case of their otvn verbs ; as, el r<p i/ia) 

ray do} fietj-roq elfit^ if I must blame my husband. Soph. 

Trach. ; dipaoardq zyzovs^ not touching the sword. 435, 

Obs. 1. 



326 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

1015. — Special Rule II. The neuter verbal 
in reovj in tlie sense of the Latin gerund, with 
the dative of the doer, governs also the case of 
the verb from which it is derived ; as, 

raura navra not-qriov fioi, ALL THESE THINGS must I 

do. 

rolg jll£v 6~dp%ouGi vdfioiq xprjGzlov, zauvobz Se elxfj 
fiij dergov, we should use the existing laws, and not rashly 
enact new ones. 

Tojv TzpayijAnov 6jj.w bizoXr^riov, you must lay hold of 
your affairs. 

Obs. 4. The doer is sometimes put in the accusa- 
tive 9 in which case the necessity involved in the verbs! 
is much weaker than in the ordinary construction ; as, ob 
douleutiov robs vouv eyovra^ roTq xaxcbq <ppovob<Ji^ the 

intelligent ought not to be in servitude to the unwise; 
^Tztaxeizriov rd fikv abrov, rd 3k yovalxa (for clotm, yuvacxcY 
some things are to be looked to by him, others by his wife. 
Both are united by Plato, Rep. 5, obxouv xat ij/iw v$ugt(ov — 



THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

1016. — Rule XXL The verbs a>', ylyvo- 
pai, and vrt&px^? signifying to he, or to belong to, 
are followed by the dative of the possessor ; as, 

ecrrt fioi ypyjiiara^ possessions are (belong) to me, i. e., I 
have 2iossessions. 

TiXXo) izaifizq r}<yav xahn xdyaftot^ good children were to 
Tellies, i. e., Tellus had good children. 



DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 327 

Obs. 1. On the principle of this rule may be explained 
the numerous instances, both in Greek and Latin, in which 
the dative signifying possession is used with another 
substantive apparently for the genitive* Thus, Tikkto 
ol xaide': is equivalent to TiXXoo ol izdideq, the children of 
Tellus ; but the principle of construction is different. In 
the latter expression, the genitive is immediately governed 
by the other substantive, on the principle of proceeding 
from and belonging to. In the former, the dative is not 
governed by the substantive, but depends on the substan- 
tive-verb, expressed or understood; as, TUaw ol {pvrtq) 
-ndidez, the children who icere to Tellus, To this class be- 
long such expressions as oWe d£ of, his two eyes ; Suydr^p 
t( ol, and her daughter y tw 'Avdpatjioyt 6 rdwoq, the sepul- 
chre of Andrcemon, &c. Lat. Gr., 871. 

Bern. 1. This construction "with the dative is so nearly synonymous 
with the more common one with the genitive, that they were often 
indifferently used, and a sentence beginning with the one construction 
may end with the other; thus, y jiiv tie KarekAAaSij (pl?u)v yrop deiaav- 
ruv ty&oyyov re fiapvv, literally, the heart to us dreading- his growling 
voice was broken down, dsioavrcjv referring to yulv as if it were rjfiiJv. In 
the following sentence-the order is reversed: rfjg cP avrov ?jvto fyfAov 
fjrop Gi]fiara avayvovcn, but her heart was moved when she recognized 
Hie tokens, the dative avayvovc?j referring to rife in the genitive, as if it 
had been ry. 

Bern. 2. In other instances in which the dative follows a noun appar- 
ently for the genitive, the idea of tendency towards or of acquisition or 
addition, expressed in English by the preposition to or for, is generally 
apparent ; as, izarpl Ti/uopbv 66vov, an avenger of your father's murder ; 
strictly an avenger of murder to or for your father. Indeed, with the 
genitive idea of possession easily allies itself that idea of tendency toward, 
passing over to, which is so common with the dative. 

Obs. 2. When of two nouns in the dative, the one 
expresses a part of, or something belonging to, the 
other, the latter may be rendered as the genitive, 

and the construction explained as in Obs. 1 (1016) ; yet 



328 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

strictly speaking they are, perhaps, in apposition — the one 
term being added to limit or define more precisely the more 
general idea contained in the other ; thus, in the sentence, 
oux Ayafiifivovt fjvdave ^u/iw^ihe dative ^Ayajii t avovc may be 
considered as regularly governed by fydave (1020), and 
ftuiiQ) added in apposition, more particularly defining the 
part affected; as, it did not please Agamemnon ; viz., his 
mind (his feelings). This construction is imitated in 
Latin (Lat. Gr., 785). So also xog/iov ov ayiv anzaeev Zebz 
yivet, an ornament which Jupiter gave to them, viz., 
their race; iiaprupiei Si fioi ttj yvcbpLjj, (the oracle) 
bears witness for me, i. e., for my opinion. 

1017* — In the following sentence, instead of the sec- 
ond dative, we have the accusative with xard; viz., 

jjde di fxot xard ti-u/idv dpiaz-q (paivero fioukrj, but this 

counsel seemed best to me in my mind ; i. e., this counsel 
pleased me most. 

Rem. 3. With this construction accords a like use of the accusative ; 
as, ri 6e oe Qpevac ikcto nevd-og- but what grief has invaded YOUR 
mind? Where, instead of regarding oe as accusative for genitive 
gov, or (ppevac as governed by icard understood, it is better to consider 
g£ as the general direct object, and <ppevag as in apposition, defining 
more precisely the part affected, as in the above examples ; thus, " what 
grief has come upon you, viz., your mind." So in other instances ; as, 

Tpcbac 6e rpdfioc vnyTivd-e yvla enaorov, but upon the Trojans came 
trembling, every one in their limbs. 

rbv ye ?a7r' bare a &vfiog ayyvcop, the noble soul left him; viz., his 
BODY. 

eptvebv rdfive viovc bpKTjKag, he cut the wild fig tree, its young 
BOUGHS. 

These constructions are mainly poetical, though they are not without 
their analogies in Attic prose. 

Obs. 3. The dative of some participles and adjec- 
tives is joined with the dative after the third person of 
ei/ii or ytyvojjiai, for the verb itself; these are such as fiouXofxe- 
voq^ f/dojievoqj d^fto/ieyo^, 7:poo'de^6fx£vo<; y axwv 9 aG/j.evo<; y &C. ; as, 



DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 329 

e" ant pooXojihu) i(7Tt\ for el PooX-q^ if you are willing ; cook 
abzil) axovrt r^^ nor was he unwilling ; ydofLivotatv ypXv ol 
loyai yeyova(j^ ice have been pleased with your discourse. 
This construction has been imitated in Latin ; thus, Tacit. 
Agr. 18, quibus bellum volentibus crat, ' 4 who were in- 
clined for war." So Sallust, Jug. 100, uii militibus labos 
volentibus esset, " that the labor might be agreeable to the 
soldiers." See Lat. Gr., 823. 

Obs. 4. Somewhat similar to this is the construction of 
the dative with the participle or adjective, ex- 
pressive of some feeling or emotion, after verbs signifying 
to come; as, ae/iivy 6° i/xo\ ^A#£, and he came to me de- 
lighted (scil. with his coming), i. e., I was delighted that 
he came / noftouvrt Tzpoocpd^q^ thou shoicedst thyself to me 
longing for it, i. e., I longed that thou shouldst appear. 

Obs. 5. To this rule belong such phrases as re i[xo\ 
xai <joi\ what have I to do with thee? (literally, what 
common thing is there to me and thee ?) tI izliov lariy 
llioi, what more is there to me f — ichat advantage have If 

1018. — Rule XXII. Many verbs may gov- 
ern the dative of the object to which their action 
is directed ; as, 

£d%ovto tfeoTs, they p>rayed to the gods. 

dvapXiiteiv nvi (more commonly, ~p6q wa), to look up to 
any one. 

*A&Tjv% %e~ipaq avic^ov^ they lifted up their hands to Mi- 
nerva. 

Rem. 4. This rule may be considered as general, applying to all cases 
in which a verb expressing action is followed by the dative, the action 
not being exerted upon, but simply directed to the object expressed in 
the dative. Hence, if the verb is transitive, it will govern also its im- 
mediate object in the accusative (1030) ; if intransitive, it will be fol- 
lowed by the dative only. More particularly to this rule belong 

1019. — I. Verbs expressing action, compounded with 



I? 



330 DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

int, izpoq, els, for!, &c. These prepositions serve to mark 
more precisely the direction of the action, or state of 
action, to an object ; as, TtpoceXfteTv rtvt r to come to one. 

Obs. 6. These verbs sometimes govern the accusative, 
by the force of the preposition with which they are 
compounded ; as iTteGrpdreuGs nohv, he waged roar against 
the city, 1077. 

Obs. 7. Hence the dative in this construction generally 
is equivalent to the preposition, efe, ^poq, £ir( 9 &c, with 
the accusative ; as, npo<T7jX^£v kp.oi or Tzpoar^s npoq £p.£. 
Further, to this rule belong — ■ 

1020. — II. Verbs which signify — 

1. To profit or hurt; to please or displease; to rever- 
ence or to yield * — to shoio ; to seem ; to appear. 

2. To favor or assist, and the contrary; to pray to, or 
entreat. 

3. To command, exhort, or address; to obey or dis- 
obey ; to serve or resist. 

4. To fit or accommodate j to use and resemble. 

5. To give to, or to trust / to approach, to 7neet, or to 
follow. 

6. To reproach with, to censure, to reprimand or rebuke, 
to be angry with. 

JEJxc. dia) or Sio/iac, Task, governs the genitive; licao- ' 
jiai and Xcraveua), always the accusative. 

Obs. 8. Many of these verbs sometimes govern the 
dative, and sometimes the accusative, according as 
their action is viewed by the writer as directed to, or 
exerted upon, the object.* In the former case they are 
viewed as intransitive verbs ; in the latter, as transitive. 

1021. — Rule XXIII. Verbs implying con- 
nection or companionslii]), govern tlie dative; 

as, 

6fidsJv tm 9 to associate with any one. 



DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS. 331 

1022. — In this construction, the dative Is considered 
as corresponding to the ablative in Latin (1010, 1). To 
this rule belong — 

1. Verbs compounded with gov, 6/jlou, /lerd (with) ; as, 
coZfp rtvt, to live with any one. 

2. Verbs after which aov, 6i±od, fierd, may be supplied 
consistently with the sense, such as those which signify — ' 

(1.) To follow (with\ to converse, to mix, to be recon- 
ciled, to dwell (with). 

(2.) To contend, or strive with, or against, &g. 

Obs. 9. Verbs signifying "to contend," &c, in one 

point of view may come under the principle referred to 

1818, Hem. 4, and hence are sometimes followed by an 

accusative with xpoc;; but then they signify more 

properly " to attack." 

Obs. 10. With the verb pfyvofu, to mix, we have, instead 
of the dative of the object associated with, the genitive 
dependent on another noun; as, Mala Aioq h (pilo-TjTi 

fjuyelea, Maia BEING EMBRACED BY JuPITER. 

Note. — To the principle of this rule may be referred the construction 
of the dative, expressing repetition or succession ; as, ftvelJia -dvellri, storm 
upon storm; aJOiov J' av aA?.(j KpoalSocc, and you might see one upon 
another (aXXcp, under the influence of Trpog, in addition to, close upon), 
scil. rushing to the regions of Pluto. 

For the dative, construed with the passive voice, see 
1037. 



THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPER- 
SONAL VERBS. 

1023. — Eule XXIV. Impersonal verbs gov- 
ern the dative ; as, 

£$e<rr{ p.ot, it is permitted to me. 

k'do^ev adrtb, it seemed best to him (i. e., he determined). 



832 DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERES. 

Obs. 1. Special Rule. Asl. eXkstTtsi, hiatyzpst, 
hereon, (lehet, iv^e^era^ and 7tpoayjxsi y with their 
compounds, govern the dative of a person with 
the genitive of a thing ; as, 

$. del noXXcbv aoi^ you have need of much. 
• pAretrri pot tovtoo^ I have a share in this. 

re dk izpoGijxei £[±o\ Kop'.vftiwv 5 but what are the Corin- 
thians to me? 

For the principle of this rule, as it respects the genitive, 
see 1004, 1. 

Rem. 1. The dative of the person is frequently omitted. 

Rem. 2. The nominative, agreeing with the impersonal, is frequently 
used instead of the genitive* as, diafyepei rl cot tovto, or toutov^ liow 
does this concern you t 

Exc. I. Ael and %pri may also take the accu- 
sative of the person with the genitive of the 

thing; as, 

.»" _ 

ou yap aa>v fie del &e&-i(rpLdTwV) for I do not loant your 
oracles. 

audi rcee %pi} raurrjq aypoabviqc;^ nor have you need at all 
(rr, as to any thing) of this folly. 

Obs. 2. From analogy, the derivative substantives 
%pe6, zpziw, xpzia^ are sometimes construed with the 
accusative and genitive ; as, hp.k dk %pea) ylyverat 
auT9]q, J have need of it ; ri$ xpeia a kiiod\ ichat need have 
you of me? 

Mcc. II. %p>7, 7tp£7teij and del, it behooveth, 
govern the accusative with the infinitive ; as, 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 383 

/pi} {ytiac) 7tot7J<ra<r&at ttjv elprjvrjV, ice ought to make 

peace. 

<jo(pa)T(pouq yap 3sJ jSporwv elvdt ftsooc^for it is necessary 
that the gods should be wiser than mortals. 

Obs. 3. The dative is used in certain phrases in which 
it appears to depend on an impersonal or some other 
Verb understood; viz., 

1st. After w~ to show that a proposition is affirmed, not 
as generally true, but only with respect to a certain per- 
son; as, 

paxpav toq yipovri TrpoiHTrdXrjs 6d6y 9 you have travelled 
a long icay for an old man; scil., as is the case for an 
old man. 

Inebtep el yevvaloq wq idovrt, since thou art noble IN 

appearance, lit., as to one seeing you. 
2d. To express the opinion or judgment of a 

person with or without wq; as, g iycb Tt/juqva ro~i<; <ppovou- 
aiv e3, I did honor to you in the judgment of the 
wise ; i. e., a><r doxet rolq^ &a, as it appears to those who 
are wise. Hence the common phrase, a>s £p.o{, or wq y ip.o{ 
(scil. dozet), according to my judgment. 

For the dative governed by adverbs, see 1058 and 1062. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 

1024. — The accusative in Greek, as in other lan- 
guages, is used to express the immediate object of a 
transitive active verb, that on which its action is exerted, 
and which is affected by it ; as, Xapfidyw rijv av-Lda, I take 
the shield. The relation, however, is variable, and that 
which at one time appears as the remote object, may be 



334 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 

conceived as immediate, &c. Thus, originally, verbs of 
motion took the accusative as the direct or immediate 
object, while subsequently the relation came to be ex- 
pressed by & preposition. 

1025. — Eule XXV. A transitive verb, in 
the active or middle voice, governs the accusa- 
tive; as, 

yvw&t (TsauTov, know thyself. 

ifipitoj^ov T7)v xoXiv, they were plundering the city. 

dyaftov avdpa Ttfiaq, thou honorest a good man. 

Obs. 1. Several verbs in Greek are used in a transi- 
tive sense, and have an accusative as their immediate 
object, which in Latin are considered as intransitive, and 
followed by some other case. They are chiefly the fol- 
lowing; viz., 

1st. neid-u)\ as, Ttei&tw rtvd, to persuade any one. 

2d. ufiptZa)} as, dftptSetv ztvd y to insult any one; some- 
times efe rev a. 

3d. ddcxiw ; as, ddtxelv wa, to injure or do injustice to 
any one. 

4th. Several verbs which signify to assist, to profit, to 
injure / as, axpeXiaj, ovy/ic, ebepyeziio, ftldnrw^ and with these 
verbs the adverbs more, very, are expressed by the accu- 
sative neuter of the adjectives izkeiujv, piyag,\iz., nXiov^ 

piya. 

5th. The verbs d/x£tftorj.ou, d>rajj.£(j3opat, rtfia)p£op.au ; as, 
dp.eip£<J$ai Tcva, to requite any one ; Tip.u>pzia$al riva. 

Note 1. Some of these verbs govern other cases, but then they gen- 
erally convey a different idea; thus, utysleiv riva, to assist any one; 
cxjteheiv rivij to be useful to any one. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 335 

Obs. 2. Many verbs are followed by an accusative, 
not of the object on which the action is exerted, but to 
which it has an immediate reference. Some of 
these verbs are more strictly intransitive, and are 
employed transitively by ah exceptional extension of their 
meaning ; in many cases their seemingly intransitive char- 
acter is the result of difference of idiom and the mode of 
translating into English ; as, Aav#dvetv, to escape the notice 
of/ (pd-dvziv, to get the start of/ Ttpoaxuvew, to pay homage 
to, to worship, &g. They are such as the following; 
viz., 

1st. -poGv.oviu)\ as, TzpoGzuvsw tivol^ to bow the knee to 
any one, to adore. 

2d. dopo'sopio) ; as, dopuvopsTv nva, to be a spearsman to 
any one. So also, 

3d. t-trpo-sustv, to be a tutor or guardian. 

4th. XavMvetv, to escape the notice of or to remain un- 
known to. 

5th. cpMvziv, to come before, prevent, or anticipate. 

6th. l-ilti-iv;, to be wanting to, or to fail. 

7th. a.7:odidpd(7X£iv, to run atcay from. 

8th. a-oridyjad-ai, to ward off ; ouvbvai or 1-iopxzTv zcva, 

to sioear by any one. 

9th. To these may be added intransitive verbs 
expressing some emotion or feeling ; as, to be 

ashamed of, or afraid of, any one / to compassionate any 
one, &c, &c, which are followed by the accusative of the 
object ; thus, aldouvza: robs apyovzac, they respect the rulers ; 
riq wj rdde yyftrJGsisv ; who would rejoice at these things ? 
diyziv ri, to be grieved at any thing / ftafipeTv zt, to take 
courage with respect to any thing. The object of these 
verbs is conceived as immediate, though in English it is 
sometimes difficult to express it. 

Note 2. Instead of the accusative, many of these verbs are often 
followed by a genitice or dative, according to the rules for these cases. 



836 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. . 

Obs. 3. Special Rule. The infinitive mood 
or part of a sentence is often used as the object 
of a transitive verb instead of the accusative ; 

as, 

xzXeua) 7zdvTa$ etc; (piper;, J direct that ALL CONTRIB- 
UTE. 

Sei^droj wg ovx dXyjftq Xiya), let him shoio THAT I DO 
NOT SPEAK THE TRUTH. 

Kote. — The infinitive, with the article, is also used for the genitive and 
dative, and in fact in all the relations of a nou>i; as, dia rov teyeiv, oy 
means of speaking ; via to /.tyet,v, on account of speaking. 

Obs. 4. Iii constructions of this kind, the object of the 
verb is frequently expressed twice* First, in a noun 
or pronoun in the case required by the verb, and 
Secondly, in a dependent clause ; as, d^pd>7roug olda 
ola 7:en6v&a<Ttv b<p epcorog, I know men what things they 
have suffered from love ; "Iwvas ipofilzai ivq iizzafidXlojai, you 
fear the Ionians lest they revolt / ap ip.00 fiifivr)<r&s oTroTa 
e-pa<r<Tov ; do you remember me what sort of things I teas 
doing ? This construction is especially common with the 
demonstrative pronoun in a sort of apposition 
with the clause which is the object of the verb, 888, 889: 
it is also sometimes used in Latin (see Lat. Gr., 722, 
Note) ; but the English idiom requires these and similar 
sentences to be rendered as follows : " I know what tilings 
men have suffered from love" — "You fear that the 
Ionians will revolt" — "Do you remember tohat sort of 
things I was doing ?" 

Obs. 5. The accusative is often governed by a tran- 
sitive verb or participle understood from a previous 
clause; as, 6 $£ rijv Tzopyupiba, but the one v:ho had (sc, 
e/wv, supplied from the preceding) the purple robe. 

Obs. 6. The words Svo/xa 9 utphs, nk^og, eopog, &c, are 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 337 

frequently construed in the accusative of specification 

or limitation ; as, l~7:6dpofj.os Gradiou to -Idzuq^ a race 
coarse the breadth of a stadium, lit., of a stadium as 
to breadth ; IhnapM Kodveq ovo-{ta i a river Cydnus as to 
name. 

Obs. 7. Sometimes, in poetical or highly rhetorical 
discourse, we have a construction like the following: 
ah or h <ffjS deopay.ivat zdde, thee now (" as to thee now," 
hardly however supplying ipajrw, thee now I ask, which 
would be too tame), dost thou affirm that thou hast done 
this? So, fxrjripa di — o.(p ha*, but as to your mother — let 
her go back. So, sometimes, an accusative will be added 
as appositional to a clause rather than to a single word; 
as, 'EAivijv xTcEvfl/jttev, Mevikeco Xoizr^ -r/.pdv^ let us slay Helen, 
a bitter grief (viz., her being slain) to Menelaus. 

Obs. 8. Special Rule. An intransitive verb 
used transitively, governs the accusative ; as, 

Toke[j.elv noAejuoVj to wage war. 

This is. done — 

1st. When the accusative is a substantive of a 
similar signification with the word that governs 
it ; as, C# fitov tjScgtov^ he lives a very agreeable life ; payee- 
&a: tJ-dyyv, to fight a battle. 

Note. — To this principle of construction may be referred such phrases 
as (ppovelv fih/a (scil. ^povy/aa), to be proud; afiavara (ppovei (sc. (ppovq/ia- 
ra\ think as becometh an immortal. 

2d. When in some special cases they take a transitive 

meaning; as, al ic^yai piooai ydla xal fiilt, the fountains 

run milk and honey ; he sweats blood. (So Virgil: ** JSt 

dune quercus sudabunt roscida mella") Btenet nop, he 

looks fire ; fiivea -viovciv, they breathe courage ; aneuaz 

xai <p6\>ov IxTzveT^ he breathes out threatenings and slaughter ; 

yofiov ftXimiv, to look terror. 
15 



338 ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE. 

Obs. 9. Of course, the rule of active verbs governing 
the accusative applies to tenses which, though passive in 
form, have active significations; as, ftpyvtat Grparj)- 
yov, they have chosen a general; rjp^rac izopeiav, they 
have refused a passage. 



VERBS GOVERNING- THE ACCUSATIVE 

AND GENITIVE. 

1026. — Many transitive active verbs, together 
with the accusative of the direct object, govern also 
another word to which the action has an indirect or 
ventOte reference, in the genitive, dative, or accusative, 
as the nature of that reference may require. 

1027. — Rule XXVI. Verbs of accusing, 
condemning, acquitting, and the like, govern the 
accusative of the person with the genitive of the 
crime; as, 

8i6xofiai <T£ SetXtas, J prosecute you for cowardice. 

anoXbco ae r^c ahiaq, I acquit you of blame. 

1028. — The genitive after verbs of accusing some- 
times takes a preposition , which gives more fulness 
to the expression ; as, 

iypdil'aro (/zs) toutcvv abrujv evexa, he indicted me on 
account of these very things. 

diwxuj <?s Ttep) ftavdrou, I prosecute thee for a capital 
crime. 

Obs. 1. Verbs of accusing, &c, are such as iniSec/ic, 

Ypa<pop.ai, dtwxoj, ki:atTtdo[xai, assail, indict ^ ptrosecute, 
criminate / <peuyw, to defend, be defendant in a suit (lit., 
flee, opposite of dcwxaj, yjursue) ; alpio>, to carry one's 



ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. 339 

suit; dXiGzo/iat, to be convicted / dtxdZw^ to judge; 

kay%dva), to commence a suit ; liztXai±fidvoi±ai and dvrtXap.- 
fidvo/j.at, to blame, &G. \ dizoXuto^ dcpirjiu^ dno(prj<pi^o[xat^ &c, 
to acquit. 

Obs. 2. Verbs of this class compounded with xazd take 
the person in the genitive 9 and the crime or 
punishment in the accusative ; as, xarrjyopooai goo 
crdavj, they charge sedition against you. Sometimes the 
crime or punishment is also in the genitive ; as, xaraycy- 
vdxjxu) goo ftavdzoo or -d-dvarow : ypd(pop.a\ gs Tzapavo/jLcuv, I 
indict you for an unconstitutional decree. 

Obs. 3. Verbs of accusing sometimes govern the 
dative / as, iyxolti goi npodoGiav, I accuse thee of trea- 
son. 

1029.—Rtjlv XXVII Verbs of hearing, 
inquiring, learning, &c, govern the genitive of 
the person (from whom you hear, &c.) with the 
accusative of the thing ; as, 

tjxoogz zoo dyyiXoo radra y he heard these things from the 
messenger. 

TzuvftavsG&at ri tjvoc, to learn some thing from some one. 



VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE 

AND DATIVE. 

1030. — A transitive active verb governs the 
accusative and dative when, together with the imme- 
diate object of the action, it is followed by the person 
or thing in relation to which it was exerted. The 
more common constructions of this kind are compre- 
hended under the following rule ; viz., 

1031.— Rule XXVIII. Verbs of comparing^ 



340 ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. 

giving, declaring, promising, and taking away, 
govern the accusative and dative ; as, 

oTZKjy^oofiai am Sixa rdXav-a, I jyromise you ten talents, 
koiydv atjjjvai rolq aXloiq, to avert the plague from others. 

Obs. l. Verbs of promising, declaring, and the 
like, take not unfrequently along with the dative of the 
person the infinitive, or an entire clause ; as, 

*AX£zavdpoq a-iarziXe roTq ° EXXr^at -d-edv abrov (p7]<p i<ra<j- 
#«!, Alexander sent a message to the Greeks to tote 

HIM A GOD. 

elr.i fioc r( abrw %pyj<T7)i tell me "what you will, do 

WITH HIM. 

Obs. 2. Instead of the dative of the person, the 
accusative with npoq is often used ; as, Xiyw bpuv or -pdq 
op.dc;, I say to you or before you. 

Obs. 3. In these constructions, whether in Greek or Latin, the verb 
and its accusative express together what is done to the remote object in the 
dative. Thus, in narras fabulam surdo, the words narras fabulam 
express together what is done (surdo) to the deaf man. With verbs 
of taking away, the English idiom requires the rendering from with the 
dative; as, eripuit mihi gladium, "he snatched the sword from me." 
Hence, some have in Latin assumed in such cases a participle, as existen- 
tem, and in Greek an ablative (from) — both unnecessarily. It is simply 
a difference of idiom, the English representing a taking from some- 
thing, the Greek and Latin, with equal propriety and elegance, a taking 
in respect to something. Thus, eripuit gladium expresses what is done 
(mihi) to me. So also Terence: Sent animam extinguerem ; — adoles- 
CENTi oculos eriperem, "to the old man, I would extinguish the breath ; 
— TO the young man, I would put out the eyes." In Greek, Osjuiotc 
SenTo denac, TO Themis he received the cup ; i. e., receiving the cup was 
what he did to Tliemis ; Anglice, he received the cup from Themis. [See 
Hunter's Notes on Liv., B. L, chap. L, line 2. JEnese Antenorique, &c] 

Obs. 4. Verbs of sharing govern the genitive and 
dative when their direct object is in the genitive, accord- 
ing to Rule XV. ; as, peradidiopi <rot rajy ypypd-wv, I share 
the property with you. 



VERBS GOVERNING- TWO ACCUSATIVES. 34} 



VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSA- 
TIVES. 

1032. — Some verbs are followed by the accusative 
gnot only of the immediate, but also of the remote 
c object; hence, 

1033. — Rule XXIX. Verbs of asking and 
teaching / clothing, concealing, depriving "• speak- 
ing or doing well or ill to, and some others, 
govern two accusatives, the one of a person, the 
other of a thing ; as, 

Oyftatous xpTj/Aara ■fiTyvav, they ashed money of the The- 
bans. 

didd(Txou<rc robs n aid as ffaxppoGbvqv, they teach the boys 
sobriety. 

rt 7:oirj<ja) ab-bv ; what shall I do to him? 

Obs. 1. The immediate object of verbs which sig- 
nify " to do" or " to speak" is the actiofl done or the 
tvovd spoken; the remote object is the person or thing 
to which it is done or spoken ; thus, 

noieTv ayaftd (scil. epya) rem, to do good to any one. 
Xiyetv xaxd (sc. en-q) rtva, to speak reproachfully to any 
one. 



1034. — For these adjectives the adverbs eo and 

xazajq are frequently substituted; thus, xaxwq no tew r^va, 
to do evil to any one ; eo Xiyetv zvA, to speak well to one, 
to speak him fair. Sometimes these words are in compo- 
sition with the verb , J as, ebXoyelv, xaxoXoyeiv^ ebepyeretv^ 
xaxoopysw — and the pevsofi? as the direct object, is gov- 



342 VERBS GOVERNING- TWO ACCUSATIVES. 

erned by the compound transitive verb ; as, xaxoupyeiv 
riva, to maltreat a person. So in English, to maltreat, to 
eulogize a person. 

1035. — On the same principle several verbs, such as 
Xotdopoofiat, Xu/natvo/icu, &c, which are usually followed by 
a dative, frequently take an accusative ; as, '8hp> rryj 
tzoXiv Xoi±a(v£<jd-cU) to injure the ichole city. 

Obs. 2. When a verb admits of either of the words 
that follow it, as its immediate object, they are both 
put in the accusative ; thus, ivdueiv rod %tTwva, to clothe 
a person with a tunic, and to put a tunic on a person. 

Obs. 3. A .transitive verb, besides the natural accu- 
sative, may be followed by that of a noun of similar 
Signification with itself; as, ov Zebq <p(Xei iravrotrjv 
KpiXorrjza^ whom Jupiter loves with great ajfectioyi / hixyce 

tobq fiapfidpouq TTjV h 3fapa$aJvt p.dyr}v, he conquered the 

barbarians in the battle of Marathon / wpxyaav Tcdvras 
robs (TTpaTubrag robs [xeyiarooq opxouq, they BOUND all the 

soldiers with the greatest oaths. 

Obs. 4. IIoieTG&ai, with a noun derived from a tran- 
sitive verb, is used as equivalent to that verb, and will 
take an additional accusative ; thus, -otele&ai Tijy tiddrj- 
atv for fiavd-dvetVy b-ofiv-qGiv izotelad-ai for oizdfiviqGxu) • tzoizIg- 
$at T7]\> apizayyjv for dpizd^zw ; as, axeoy] xat dvdpdnoda dpizayrjv 
TTOLTjGd/jLsvoq, plundering the furniture and slaves ; sc, 
making plunder of &c. 

Obs. 5. Verbs which signify to call, or name, choose, 
reckon, make, constitute, &c, besides the accusative of the 
object, take also that of the name, office, charac- 
ter, &C, ascribed to it; as, (TTparyydv abrbv d-gdetzsv, 
he appointed him general. In this construction the verb 
elvat is sometimes interposed ; as, noim aurov dooXov^ or ehat 
SimAov, I make him, or make him to be, a slave, 1006, 
Obs. 3, 2d. 

Obs, 6. The accusative neuter of pronouns and 



VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 343 

adjectives is often admitted in this construction, the pro- 
noun taking the place of the noun which expresses the 
abstract idea of the verb ; as, zoozo fie ijdizyffe, he 
injured me (in) this, he did me this wrong = ydixy&4 ps 
rauTTjv ttjv ddcxtay. It is a different construction where zt\ 
what, is joined to the verb as an accusative of limitation ; 
as, ri xpai/icu abruj^ in what may I use it? 

Obs. 7. Instead of the second accusative we some- 
times have (chiefly in the poets) the genitive or dative; 
as,7ro>Ma xaxd avftpmizoiGi Iwpye^ he had done many evils to 
men, and conversely a double accusative sometimes takes 
the place of an accusative with a genitive or dative ; as, 
dnoezepeVj zcva zwv yprjpdztov, or zd xprjpaza, to deprive one 
of his goods. 

Obs. 8. A still harsher construction, and one most natu- 
rally taking a preposition, is made by the accusa- 
tive with verbs like npoxakia), dvayxd^u), dxoxpbo/ia!, and 
verbs which signify to divide, as, dtatpico, dd^co, &c. ; as, 
'poxolzlaftal zwa <j7zovddq y to invite a person to a treaty ; 
Kupoq to crzpdzeupa xarivetpe dcudexa pipy], Cyrus divided 
the army (into) twelve parts. 

Note, — With verbs of dividing, the whole which is divided is some- 
times put in the genitive, and the word pspog, polpa, &c, referred to the 
verb ; a3, dcddena Hepaov §v)ju Siypyvrai, the tribes of the Persians have 
been divided as twelve, for, the Persians have been divided into twelve tribes; 
polpac dcel?,ev £% nal liz-nkuv nai ott/utgjv, literally, he divided the parts of 
cavalry and infantry into six, i. e., he divided the cavalry and infantry into 
six parts. This construction is imitated in Latin, Cic. de Orat. Deinde 
eorum generum quasi quondam membra dispertiat, for ea genera quasi in 
quaidam membra, &c. 



344 CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. 



CONSTRUCTION OF CASES WITH THE 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

1036. — The passive voice is usually followed by a 
genitive of the doer, governed by the prepositions foro, 
ix, xapdj Tzpoc, and consequently the government of the 
case falls under the rules for prepositions / as, pi} n*& 
otto rod xaxou, be not overcome by evil. Sometimes, though 
rarely, the preposition is the dative / as, vnd <jarpd-ai<; 
Swcx£~L(T#ai, to be governed by viceroys; which may how- 
ever be explained, "to be administered under satraps" = 
the way in which it is administered is under satraps. The 
dative, however, without a preposition, is common in 
certain cases ; hence the following rule; viz., 

1037. — Rule XXX. Passive verbs in the 
perfect tense are regularly constructed with the 
dative of the doer / as, 

raura i/io} -iizpaxrat, these tilings have been done by me. 
7te7rocrjra{ poi^ it has been done by me. 

Note.- — This construction, though mainly confined to the perfect pas- 
sive, is sometimes found with other tenses ; as, STrpdrrero avrolg, it was 
being done by them ; epptd-y role dpxaioic, it was said (according to somo 
scholars) by the ancients, more probably, however, to the ancients. Tho 
common construction with these tenses of the passive is the genitive 
with v7to, then irapd or np6e, rarely (poelice and Ionice) hi-. The verbal 
adjectives in roc and reoc 1 having a passive signification, govern the 
dative of the doer. (1014, Rem.) 

1038 — Eule XXXI. When a verb in the 
active voice governs two cases, an immediate and 






CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH PASSIVE VOICE. 345 

remote case, in the passive it retains the latter 
case ! as. 

xarrjyopou/iac xloTcijq^ I am accused of theft, 
£36&7) /mot r.aaa i^ooaia, all authority icas given to me* 
fioofftxijv otto Adp>-pou izatdso&sfey being taught music by 
Lamprus. 

Obs. 1. Any passive verb may be followed by an accu- 
sative of similar signification with itself, on the 
principle laid down (1035, Obs. 3) ; as, to-tstgi -Xr.ydq 
izoXXdc, he is struck (with) many bloics. 

Obs. 2. If the latter case is the dative of a person, 
the passive may retain the former case, the latter becom- 
ing the subject of the verb. Thus, the same idea may be 
expressed in three different ways ; viz., 

1st. With the active voice; as, 6 drjpuoq 'bclareuffk 
Auxovpyu) Try r?7<r noXewq £~t/jJXscav y the people intrusted the 
care of the state to JLycurgus. 

2d. By the passive voice with the latter case ; as, 
Aoxobpyw k-iGTeufyr} b~b too drj/xoo y T7 t q izoXeajq iTzcriiXsca^ 
the care of the state was intrusted to JLycurgus. 

3d. By the passive voice with thefor?ner case, accord- 
ing to the Obs.; as, Aoxoopyoq Try/ Tr t q rcoXewq £-LfjLtA£iav 

vtzo too drj/ioo i-tffTebtirj, JLycurgus teas intrusted toith the 
care of the state by the people. 

The following are examples of this construction : ol 
l-iTZTpap.i±hoi Try <poXo.xry, those who had been intrusted 
with the watch; for olq y tpoXaxi} l-tTi-paxTo : Try; ff ix 
%£ipajv ap7rd£ojjLai 9 but she is torn from my hands ; for y tf 
ix ysipwv dpTzd^STac. 

1039. — Hence, also, such phrases as the following: 
Al&io-eq -apdaXiaq IvypLfiivot, the Ethiopians girded toith 
panthers' shins ; Xei~~i diXrou syyzypa/i/iivryj Sovftrj/jiaTa, he 
leaves a tablet inscribed with writings ; which in the 

15* 



846 CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 

active voice would have been, ivdwrsw Al&tQxe&t xapda- 
Xiaq — lyypdwevj guv&7J/iaTa diXraj. This construction is 

very rarely imitated in Latin; e. g., inscripti nomina 
regum flores, " flowers inscribed with the nanies of 
kings." Lat. Gr., £25. 

Note. — This construction, used in Latin only as a G-rsecism, is common 
in English with such verbs as to ask, teach, offer, promise, pay, tell, allow, 
deny, and the like ; as, He allowed me great liberty ; passively, great lib- 
erty was' allowed me, or, I was allowed great liberty. So, "They were 
offered (to) me," or, "I was offered them." See Analytical and Practi- 
cal English Grammar, 812, 813; Crombie's Etymology, p. 2*70. 

Obs. 3. On the same principle, the part affected 
(1004, 3) is often put in the accusative after the passive 
voice ; thus, instead of to t pad /id poo imdelzat, my wound 
is bound %ip, we have liziSou/iai to t pad pa, I am bound 
up as to my woujsd ; llpo/j.7}&£u~ ixetpero rd yj7z ap, literally, 
Prometheus was being devoured (torn, gnawed) as to his 
liver; i. e., his liver was devoured. See also 1044, II. 

Obs. 4. The middle voice takes, of course, the 
accusative with all those verbs in which the middle 
voice acts, not directly upon the agent (as, T.abw, I cause 
to cease / -abopat, I cease), but indirectly on the agent, 
and directly on another object; as, Tzapecxeoaa pivot izdvra 
exAeov, having provided for themselves every thing r , they 
sailed; as also do strictly deponent verbs (passive form 
and active signification) ; as, jjpvyvTat xopeiav^ they have 
refused a passage (1025, Obs. 9). 



CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 

104:0. — Words and phrases are often thrown in be- 
tween the parts of a sentence in an adverbial manner, 
to express some circumstance connected with the 
idea of the simple sentence, and which do not depend for 



REMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN". 347 

their case on any word in the sentence to which they 
belong, but stand as 2/* with a preposition f in reality, 
however; their construction being dependent simply on the 
meaning of the case itself; as, 

l^eXauvei crad- fxobq duo eiq 'Itjcrouz, xai hntwd-a efietvsv 

i)[i£paq rpelc, he marches out two days' journey to 
Issus, and remained there three days. 

fieydXrj <7~oodf{ izdvra i-pd-rero, every thing was done 

WITH GREAT HASTE. 

Here the two accusative clauses, trzad-iiobq duo and 
■fjLtipaq T/>c7<r, depend on that meaning of the accusative 
which, from the idea of motion toward, passes naturally 
over into that of continuance? whether in time or 
space / as," 'during, along three days' marches," "during, 
along three days :" and the dative clause, fj.eyd.X7j cnoudrj, 
with great zeal or haste, depends on the general meaning 
of the dative. 

Under the general name of civciimstances may be in- 
eluded words which indicate, 1. The source or origin, 1041 ; 
2. A particular qualification or direction of a general ex- 
pression, 1042-1045 ; 3. Cause, manner, or instrument, 
1046; 4. Place, 1047, 1048; 5. Time, 1049; 6. Measure, 
1050-1052; 7. Price, 1053; 8. Exclamation, 1054. 



THE REMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN. 

1041o — Rule XXXII. The cause, source, or 
origin, and the part affected, are put in the gen- 
itive / as ? 

ftaxdptoq r§c t^c, happy as to (in respect of, from) his 

fortune. 



348 CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION*. 

(ptXeX abrov rrj^ apsr/js^ he loves him on account of his 
virtue. 

Xbxov xparelv q)tu)v^ to take a wolf by the ears. 

Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive, the accusative is often 
used, expressing the same general idea under a different 
specific relation \ as /xaxdpux; rr^ rbyjiv^ happy in respect to 
(strictly, toward, looking totoard) his fortune. 

Obs. 2. The causal genitive differs from the cau~ 
sal dative in that the genitive expresses the remote or 
moving cause — the dative, the immediate or instrumental 
cause. 

Obs. 3. The material of which a thing is made is 
expressed in the genitive ; as, o-^diat. dccpftspajv, rafts 
made of skins. See 985, Obs. 4. 

Note.: — Some grammarians regard this genitive of material as depending 
on ek or airo understood, urging in proof the fact that the preposition is 
sometimes expressed. But, as we have before observed, the preposition 
when added simply gives fulness and precision to a relation which is 
somewhat more vaguely expressed by the case alone. The preposition 
is especially frequent with the passive participle ; as, edpa ££ ada/uavrog 
izenoiTjfLevTj^ a seat made of adamant. Sometimes the dative is used for 
the genitive, the material of which any thing is made being considered 
as that with which it is made; as, at [iev yap aepdeaat rerevxara^ at 6 
hletyavTL, for some are made o/horn - , others o/ivoey. 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. 

IL04:2* — A particular qualification of a general ex- 
pression, made in English by the phrase " in respect of" 
"with regard to" is expressed by the genitive and 
dative ; or, more briefly, as follows: 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION* 349 

1043. — Rule XXXXXI. Respect wherein is 
expressed in the genitive or accusative, and, in a 
certain modified sense, in the dative. 

I. In the Genitive ; as, 

iyyuraza abrd) etfit yivooq, I am very near him in respect 
of kin. 

daabq dkvdpcuv, thick with trees. 

-)j)aioi dXZrjXuj^ near (in respect of) each other. 

1044. — The genitive is used : 

1. After £/e^ in the sense of to be [se habere), with such 

adverbs as eo, a>r, o-cuq, iz&q, ooTwq, xakcbq, &C. ; as, Tzacdataq 
ootids £%£t, he is so in respect of learning ; xaX&q e^etv 
fiiftrjs, to be pretty drunk ; so ;^w; as, TiXXoq too fiioo eo 
fjxwv, Tellus being well advanced in {respect of) life. 

2. After other verbs ; as, t-eiyead-ai apyoq, to be in haste 
with respect to the battle. 

3. After adjectives ; as, aicaiq dppivwv -atowv, childless 
with respect to sons ; i. e., without male offspring. 

4. With adverbs ; as, ~p6aai dpeT/jq dvijxsiv, to carry it 
far with respect to virtue. 

5. With substantives ; as, dyyeXca Tijq X loo, the tidings 
concerning Chios. 

6. With entire propositions ; as, el r.aTpbq >ipei rev wpav 
too xaXwq 7zpd<jGetv doxslv, if he possesses any care of 
his father, in respect of his appearing to prosper. 

II. In the Accusative. 

Hespect ivherein is also put often in the accu- 
sative when the idea expressed by a verb or adjective is 
to be more accurately determined by an additional circum- 
stance ; as, tov SdxTuXov dlya), I am pained in my fin- 



350 CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION, 

ger ; yepeiiov ob di[±aq^ obdk vpiva<z, inferior not in 
form nor mind; Tzodaq (hxbq ^ Ay iXXebq^ Achilles sioift OP 

FOOT. 

Note 1. This is the construction so often imitated by the Latin poets ; 
thus, Os humerosque deo similis. Lat. Gr., 891). 

Note 2. Not unfrequently this limiting or specifying accusative passes 
over into the character of an adverb ; as, apxfoi °^ ^ e beginning, at the 
outset; hence, with negative expressions, not at all; as, apxyv ova edec 
TcoiTjcat,, at the beginning he ought not = he ought not at all, &c. So Ta%oc y 
as to quickness, quickly ; teIoc, finally ; ryv irpuTijv, at first, &c. So also 
such expressions as to evavriov, on the contrary; to Xeydfievov, according 
to the proverb, (lit. that which is saitf. 

III. In the Dative. 

1043. — This case is used in a sense somewhat 
different from the above, yet still expressing 
that for or with respect to which a thing is 
affirmed to he or take place. This usage, in 
Greek, may be illustrated by the following 
examples : — - 



m 



1. ci-iog l]v davdrou rrj 7z6Xet^ he was worthy of death % 
icith respect to the state. 

2. xa\ Si] [izd-isv yaXzTzolo %6Xow Tr)Xs/idya>, and now they 

laid aside their grievous anger against (with respect to) 

TELEMACHUS; SO, lywye X{(T<ro{uu ^AytXXrj'i fieftifiev yoXov, I 

pray him to lay aside his anger against Achilles. 

3. to f±h efw#£y aTcro/iiva) <ra>{±a ovx ayav Sepjuov jyv, the 

surface of the body was not very hot when one touched 
it (lit, to one touching it). 

4. 'E7zidatjy6<; b<jti tzoXcz & de^ta £:<j7rXio\>Tt Tov^Iowtov xoX- 
ttov, Mpidamnus is a city oji the right hand to one who 
sails into the Ionian gulf 

5. SuwSexdTV] ol r}<br, xzcf.tivG), the twelfth mom since he 
lay (to him lying). 



CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT. 351 

6. HpaxXi't fiev dij oaa abrin Atyuirrtot (pact elvat erea £$ 
"A/jlohtw, To Hercules, indeed, novo (with respect to Her- 
cules) the Egyptians themselves declare how many years 
there are until Amasis = the Egyptians themselves tell 
how many years passed from Hercules (or since the 
death of Hercules) to Amasis. 

7. opyj}<jdusvoi &£o~L<rt, dancing in honor o/the gods. 

Hem. — Respect wherein is also sometimes expressed in the dative in 
nearly precisely the same sense as the genitive ; as, iroac raxvc, swift of 
foot. 



THE CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRU- 
MENT. 

1046. — -Rule XXXIV. The cause, manner, 
and instrument are often put in the dative ; as ? 

<p6j3a) exparrov, I did it from fear. 

iyiuero r<I)ds to) rpoTta), it happened in this manner. 



TzaraGGZLv pdfiouj^ to strike with a sta 



,-fjf 

'a/ ' 



Obs. 1. The cause may be considered as internal or 
external. The internal cause represents the act as 
proceeding from some particular state or disposition 
of the subject, and, answering to the question from what f 
whence? may be rendered from, by/ as, ebvoia y auow, 
I speak from good-will. The external cause 9 point- 
ing to something without the agent, maybe rendered 
for, by, at, icith, &c. ; as, ypyjiiao-w bcmpopjevo^ elated ivith, 

or by riches , d-aotidZio ttj d~oxAst6~£i fioo rcbv tzoXojv, I am 
astonished at the shutting %ip of my gates ; T£X{ia{pe<r#a: 
rots wjioloyr^iivoiq, to prove by the things which have been 
granted. 

Obs. 2. In this construction the dative expresses the 






352 CAUSE, MANNEK, AND INSTRUMENT. 

nearer or immediate cause, the more remote 

being usually expressed by the genitive, or by did with 

the accusative (1041, Obs. 1); as, d<r&£V£ta <rw/idrwv 
dtd tt]v (jirddetav biz^dypoov^ they gave way, from the 
weakness of their bodies on account of the want of food. 

Obs. 3. The above rule is liable to many limitations. 
As just observed, the cause is often expressed by the 
genitive (often the genitive with hexa^ on account of) 
or by dcd with the accusative. The manner is 
often expressed by the accusative / thus, toutov rdv 
rponov, in this manner, is quite as common as toutoj r5 
rpoTta). The instrument alone is regularly and syste- 
matically put in the dative ; as, djroxre'oac eyx et * to slay 
with a spear. 

Obs. 4. To the category of manner or instru- 
ment may be assigned the dative with verbs of 'pun- 
ishment / as, ^rjfiwov zvm davdra), <poyfj, &C, to pun- 
ish any one with death, with banishment, &c. 

Obs. 5. The dative of the instrument may, in 
very rare cases, he a person / as, rolq izapoTxrtv iret- 
%iZzv, he teas building the wall by means of those who 
were present. It is more easily put with substan- 
tives which contain the force of the verb from which 
they spring; as, zw tjgzk; r<p ad) p. an, motions (inade) with 

the body. 

\ 

Note. — Hence the construction of xPV a ^ aL with the dative, that which 

we use being considered as an instrument ; as, rice izore rekfirjpioLS £XPV m 

cavro, what proofs I pray did, they employ t 

Obs. 6. The Greeks often idiomatically employ h with 
the dative where our idiom rejects it, h being = in the 
sphere of / as, to corrupt truth h tw (pebdei, in falsehood, 
in the sphere of falsehood = with, or by falsehood; so 
ofxdaat h oupavw, to swear by (£v, i?ij in the sphere of that 
xoithin which the oath lies) heaven. 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. 353 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. 

104:7. — The circumstances of place respect 
motion to, or from, or through a place, and motion or 
rest in a place * in all of which the Greek writers gener- 
ally use a proper name with a preposition \: thus, £z 
"Aftr^wv, from Athens; eig Bpirawiav, into Britain; h 
IJu/.oj, in JPylos ; dcd rrjq Tzoleaj^^ through the city. But, 

1048. — Rule XXXV. The place where, 
without a preposition, is expressed in the dative, 
rarely in the genitive / as, 

v Apyeoc, at Argos. Mapaftcuvc, at Marathon. 

Obs. 1. The construction with the genitive is chiefly 
poetical: as, fiietv ieeftiota, to run in (respect of) the 
plain. So a place originally regularly expressed by the 
accusative without a preposition, in Horner takes or 
rejects the preposition indifferently, and in later Attic 
Greek regularly takes it. In Homer, 'sfi%eefta» i% zkiajfy» 9 
the two come to the tent. Attic, epyojiat -pdg zr { v ~61vj % 

Obs. 2. The genitive after efe or h, in, into, is gov- 
erned by a substantive understood: as, efe adoo 
(sc. d 6 !±(»), into Hades / h "Apysoq (sc. -jzolet), in Argos. 
(983, Obs. 1.) With adoo this is a familiar ellipsis. 

Obs. 3. The terminations $t and en, added to a noun, 
denote at a place * as, dypofti, in the country / Orjfbjei^ at 
Thebes / — ds and <jz, to a place ; as, ^Ad-r^aade, to Athens ; 
zXifftyvde^ to the tent ; — &ev and $s, from a place ; as, 
zAt<Tirj&ev dvetXero iyx ^^ ^ e took a spear from the text, 
703. 



354 CIRCUMSTANCES OF TIME. 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF TIME. 

1049. — Rule XXXVI. Time when is put in 

the dative ; time how long, in the accusative ; 

thus, 

when ; as, fjiiipa TpiT7), on the third day. 
how long ; as, rpeXq oXooq prjvaq 7zap£p.ew£v^ he remained 
three whole months. 

Obs. 1. When the reference is to & fixed time at which 
a thing took place, the dative is used as in the rule ; but 
if the idea of duration is additionally implied, it is put 
in the accusative / as, rdq r^iipaq km rdq vuzraq, by day 
and by night = during days and during nights. 

Obs. 2. Time regarded as a period cut off from, or 
belonging to, a longer time, is put in the genitive : 
as, ob% icopaxa abrov tzoXXgjv evtaurcuv, I have not seen him 
from, in respect of = toithin many years / e?av duow ^ 
rptcov ijtispibv a<pixla$ai elq ^EIItjg-ovtov, it being possible 
within two or three days to come into the Hellespont. 

Thus time strictly regarded as continued (just as 
continued space) is put in the accusative : as, noXXaq 
ijt±£paq, during many days. Time, regarded as a point 
(time in which, or at which), is put regularly in the da- 
tive ; as, on this day. 

Time, expressed as an extended period in which 
something takes place, usually takes the dative with h ; 
as, h h.eivaiq raiq ijpApaiq, in those days y l\> toutoj rw ypovy, 
in this time. 

Time, regarded as a date from which, or as a section 

of time viewed in reference to a longer period, takes the 

-genitive (sometimes with l* or ef) ; y/iepajv rptcov^vntlmi 

(in respect of) three days ; ix izoXXoo %p6vou, out offrom % 

since a long time. 



r> *- p* 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 600 

A diderent construction from either is time as dative 
of menus / as, itoXkdiq ijpApaiq vGTzpov^ many days after , 
strictly, afterward by many days ; noklu) nXelov, much 
more, lit., more by much. 



CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 

The circumstances of Wfieasuve respect magnitude, 
distance, and the measure of excess ; as follows : 

1050.— Rule XXXVII. The measure of 
magnitude is put in the genitive ; as, 

avdpiaq ducodsxa -rjyiajv, a Statue of twelve CUEITS. 

IOoI.—Rtjljz XXXVIII. The measure of 
distance is put in the accusative, sometimes in 

the dative ; as, 

"*E<ptGoz aiziyet rptwv 7/juLspwv 6oov y or 6ow, Ephesus is 
distant three days' journey. 

-evrexaiSexa 7zyjyetq Vipcbftrj to uowp^ the water rose fifteen 
CUBITS. 

Obs. The idea may be conceived as that of continued 
space (accusative, 6o6v, along, or duri?ig a way or jour- 
ney), or as that by v:hich the distance is produced (dative 
6du>, by way, or journey). It may also be put after the 
verb, as noun of apposition. See 963. 

1052.— Rule XXXIX. The measure of^ 
excess is put in the dative after the comparative l 
degree; as, 

hcaurw -KpeafiijTepoq, older by a year* 
Obs. Hence the expressions, ~oXX<p, SXtyw, ft pay el, <fcc., 



356 EXCLAMATION. 

with the comparative. It is, however, sometimes put 
in the accusative / as, r.okb [xeiZwv, much greater ; nokb 
ap.e(vwv, much better. 



CIRCUMSTANCE OF PRICE. 

1053. — Rule XL. The price of a thing is 
put in the genitive / as, 

dbq touto dpa^fiTjq^ give this for a drachma. 

Obs. The price is put sometimes in the genitive, 
with dvzl, instead of, for. An idea closely kindred to that 
of price is often expressed by the dative with im, on 
condition of '/ as, daveiaaad^ai xpTJjiaTa im tzoXXoj t6xo) 9 to 
hire money at (on condition of) large interest ; padu/ieJv 
im ttoMo), to indulge in sloth at great cost. Sometimes 
by 7:p6<;^ bearing relation to, hence equivalent to, with the 

accusative, nt7rpd(Txec 6 xaxbq ~dvra izpoq dpyuptov, the icicked 
man sells every thing for money / #eol izdvra rayaftd -iizpd- 
axovoi npdq novov, the gods sell all good things for labor. 



EXCLAMATION. 

1054. — Rule XLI. Exclamations of praise, . 
indignation, compassion, &c, are put in the 
genitive, sometimes in the accusative / as, 

TTjs dvacdetaq, The impudence ! 

<peo too dvdpoq, Alas for the man! 

o) ly.h decAatov, wretched me ! 

Obs. Sometimes with the genitive, there is an addition 

of the llOmifiative } as, ot/iot rwv £/iwv iycb xaxwv, ah! 

my miseries! 7<y, ouat, of, and &>, govern the dative; as, 
iw fiot, woe is me! 



ADVEKBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 357 



CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 

10-53. — Adverbs are joined to adjectives, verbs, and 
other adverbs, to express some circumstance, qual- 
ity, or manner of their signification. 

1056. — Many adverbs in Greek have the force of 
prepositions in Latin and English. These are often 
joined with substantives, as will appear in the following , 
rules. They are also frequently used in connection with 
the article, as substantives or adjectives ; as, 6 e&u 
avftpwTzoq, the outward man i ol rors avdpeq, the men of 
that time; very rarely without the article; as, &-d rore 
for and rod rore^Jrom that time. 

1057. — Rule XLII. Derivative adverbs 
commonly govern the case of their primitives ; 



a*, 



a^iwq Tjfxwv^ in a manner icorthy of us. 

fidhara tz&vtidv, most of all. 

6[ioiwq Toiq akXotq 9 in a manner similar to the rest, 

-apex v%a, beside the ship. 



ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 

1058. — Adverbs having the force of preposi- 
tions govern the case to whose meaning they have special 
relation. Thus, 6p.ou 9 aria, together with, govern (like £v 
and guv) the dative, the case of association] evexa, on 
account of the genitive, the case of origin, cause, &c. 
Hence the two following rules : 



358 ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 

1059. — Rule XLIII. Some adverbs of time, 
place j and quantity, likewise of number, order, 
and exception, govern the genitive ; as, 

nou yrjq elfii, where {of earth) am I? 

a%pt rrjq (77Jfi£pow r^iiipa'Z, up to this day, 

Obs. 1. To these maybe added adverbs of cause, com- 
parison, distinction, concealment, separation, or exclama- 
tion ; and also nouns used adverbially, as x^P^ 
Sixyv, hd)7zto\>, &c. ; as, dcxyv izora[iwv, in the manner of 
rivers, 

1060. — The adverbs which come under this rule are 
the following: aWu, arep, Sixa, x^P'^i without; dvrtxpu, 
dvrcxpus, djzavTupu, against, opposite / aypt, p-typ^ t°> even 

to ; evexa, evexev, on account of/ zyyvz, TzkqGiov, ayx 1 ) °-GGov, 
near / kxroq^ £'$ui, exroeftev, vnthout ; hroq^ eaco, £?<tw, 
eVro<j-#£v, within ; tzIt)v, -mapexroq, except y fiera^b, among, 
in the midst of ; onio-to, 8m<r&ev 9 behind/ irpoeftev, before; 
nipav, iitixeiva, beyond, &c. 

Exc. 1. ay%i and aXiq sometimes govern the dative. 

Exc. 2. 7tXijv, except, has sometimes elliptically the 
nominative after it; as, nXr}V ol rwv xaidtDV dtddaxakoi, 
EXCEPT THE TEACHERS Of the boys. 

Note. — Adverbs of the final cause are frequently omitted; as, eypaipa 
rovde, I wrote for this reason, as if rovSe evena. So the infinitive of pur- 
j>ose is often used with rov, where we should expect evena rov ; as, rov 
ireipacdfjvai, — h'EKa rov 7reipa(j&yvai. in order to be tried. 

Obs. 2. Adverbs of time, place, &c, are frequently 
changed by the poets into adjectives f as olds navyfii- 
ptot fiokizr) ftsov [Xdaxovro, they propitiated the god with 
song THE whole day, 865. 



ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 359 

106 1. — Certain adverbs are joined sometimes with 
one case, and sometimes with another ; as follows : 

1st. a/±/iiya, dfifLtydyv, lyyb^, kyybfttv, Tzdpeyyoq^ (juveyyuq, 
iSqq, kipe^q^ a%ed6v, Gyedoftev^ abroayedo^ are put with the 
GENITIVE Or DATIVE. 

2d. «V/i, dy%6&t 9 £x7zoda>v y tzXtjgwv^ i7z(izpo<Td-ev^ oftener with 

the GENITIVE. 

3d. avditahv^ efinafav, oftener with the dative. 
4th. e!<rw, /xiaya, izdpex or Tzdpeg, xiptz, with the GENI- 
TIVE Or ACCUSATIVE. 

5th. dsbpo, with the dative or accusative. 
6th. a%pi, «/i°^> M^/^j ft-'XP^y with the genitive, dative, 
or accusative. 

1062. — Rule XLIV. Adverbs of accompa- 
nying govern the dative ; as, 

aria T7j fj/jjpa, at day-break (at the same time with the 
day). 

1063. — Rule XLV. Adverbs of sweating 
govern the accusative ; as,. 

vfj Aia^ by Jupiter ; /id rods axT^rpov, by this sceptre. 

Obs. 3. In sentences of this kind, /id commonly denies, 
unless joined with vaq and vrj affirms unless joined with 
a negative. 

Obs. 4. Adverbs of showing are put with the nom- 
inative; as, Idob 6 av&pwnoq, behold the man/ cde $ 
jjltjttjp /loo xa\ ol ddeX<poi /ioOy behold my mother and my 
brethren. 



860 NEGATIVES. 



NEGATIVES. 

1064. — The Greek language has two simple neg- 
atives, od and prj, which have various compounds, 
conforming to the simple in meaning and construction. 
Between these t two classes of negatives there is a wide 
difference of use, lessening, however, till they sometimes 
are scarcely distinguishable. 

1063. — Ob is a direct and independent negative, 
expressing simply a positive denial; as, mm Iftilio, 
I will not; obx dya&ov ian, it is not good) obdeis naprjv, 
no one was present. 

1066. — Mrj is a dependent negative. It represents 
the negative not as an objective fact., but subjectively, 
as a conception, condition, supposition, &c. ; and hence it 
is used in the manner following ; 

1st. After the conditioned conjunctions, *U £dv, 
rjv, oray, hretMv, i w<r, av, and those which intimate an end, 
design, restdt, as, :W, ^c, ott^c, w<>tz ; as, d py option; 

kiyiD, if J do not speak correctly) d7zedyjprj<j£ ha pi} avay- 
xa<j#f h x. r. A., he (Solon) went abroad that he might not be 
compelled, &c. 

2d. Mrj is always put with the imperative mood, 
with the subjunctive aorists used imperatively, and 
with the optative when it expresses a wash ; as, prj pe 
fiaXXe, or prj pe ftdXyq, do not strike me / prj yivocro, may it 
not be. 

3d. Mrj is used after relatives, and with participles 
when they express a condition or supposition / as, 

ziq dh douvat dbvarat iripa) a prj abruq £%et* but W ho can 
give a thing to another which he has not (= may 
not have) himself? a obx abroq e^er, that which he has 
not himself / 6 prj mereuajv, he ivho does not, may not be- 



NEGATIVES. 361 

lieve (as a supposition) ; 6 <>b -ktt^oidv, he who does not 
believe (as a fact). 

4th. Mr> is used with infinitives 9 whether they are 
dependent upon another verb, or used with the article 
as a verbal UOtin (1087) ; as, aydyxrj tooto fiij -oieTv, it is 
necessary not to do this / rd fxij tzolsTv, the not doing. 

5 th. With verbs which signify to fear, to warn, and the 
like, /J.7J is used, like ne in Latin, where a positive expres- 
sion is used in English; as, didoua prf tc jhr^ai, vereor ne 
quid accidat, I am afraid that something may happen. 
Sometimes the preceding verb is understood ; as, pi} tooto 
a)2co^ epi (scil., didoiza), J fear lest this be otherwise. 

So, also, after verbs which signify to forbid, deny, pre- 
vent, refrain, disbelieve, to be cautious, and the like, it is 
frequently put with the infinitive > where the negative is 
not used in English; as, a-audaj tootov /z^ -apihai, I for- 
bid this man to pass. 

6th. Mrj is often an interrogative particle like 
num in Latin; not, however, merely such, but giving a 
subjective negative force to the question = it is not, is 
it? as, pyJTi ovToq etTTtv 6 Xpi<>T6q^ this is not, perhaps, the 
Christ, is it? Mvj tzoo tl xepatTipoj iz pob jStjc, y on did not, 
perhaps (~oo), proceed somewhat (rt) farther, did you? 
fiij dveXslv /is ah d-iXetq ; thou dost not icish to kill me, dost 
thou ? 

1067 • — A negative placed between the article and its 
noun, converts it into a sort of compound negative 
term ; as, y ou didlo<nq twv y-vopwv, the not destroying 
of the bridges • ij fii] i/i-etpta, the inexperience. 

Rem. — In the same manner it is used with certain verbs, not as a 
negative, but to reverse their meaning; thus, <pn ( ui, I affirm, oh tyrjfii, I 
deny; he), I allow, ova hid, I forbid,; VTnGxvovptiii, I promise, ovx vttkjx- 
vov/iai,, I refuse; thus, ovk tOaaav rovro elvac does not signify, they did 
not say that this was, but, they dexied that this was, or, they said this ivas 
not. 

16 



362 DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 



DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 

1068. — The various adjuncts and qualifica- 
tions of a negative proposition, as ever, anybody , 
anyiohere, in any way, are usually, themselves, also ex- 
pressed negatively (by compounds of the same simple 
negative). Hence the following rules : 

1069. — Rule XLVL Two or more neg;a- 
tives, joined to the same verb, strengthen the 
negation ; as, 

oux £7roi7)<re touto obda/iob obdsfe, no one anywhere did 
this. 

Obs. 1. To the negation of the whole, is joined, in the 
same sentence, the negation of the parts / as, ofi duvarat 
ours Xiyetv outs -otelv, he can neither say nor do. Some- 
thing depends on the position of the words ; as, ob dbvarat 
obdeiq is, 710 One is able, but ob8e\g ob dbwarai is, no one is 
not able = every one is able. 

1070.— Rule XLVIL Two or more nega- 
tives, joined to different verbs, destroy the nega- 
tion, and are equivalent to an affirmative ; as, 

ou duvdtiefta /jj XaXeXv, ice cannot but speak. 

oboziq oertq ob yeXdusTai, there is nobody who will not 
laugh, i. e., " everybody will laugh;" iari being under- 
stood with obdeiq. 

This rule, however, has its limitations. It should be 
remembered that, as a general rule, the Greeks negative 
every separate clatise of a negative proposition ; 
as, obx apvoufmi to iirj Tcoiyjirat, I do not deny the not hav- 



DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 363 

ing done = so as to affirm that I did not do it. This, 
however, might mean the opposite. 

Obs. 2. Indeed, so common is the ellipsis of lazi in 
this expression, that it is lost sight of, and the ante- 
cedent oudstg, which should be its nominative, is often 
attracted into the case of the relative which follows ; 
as, uvdsvi era) oux aplo-zei) there is nobody whom it does 
not please, for obde}^ orw, &c. ; obdiva ovriua ob xazi- 
x/a<7£v, he moved every one to tears, for obdeiq £<ttcv 
dvz'.va^ &c, there is no one whom he did not move to 
tears. 

Obs. 3. Observe also, carefully, the use of the nega- 
tive in such sentences as the following : xai ob raura p.ev 
ypd<pei 6 (PiXi-noq role $ epyotq ob izoiel, and Philip doesnot 
write these things and not perform them ; i. e., think not 
that Philip writes these things and does not execute them / 
where the first ob does not affect the verb ypdcpti^ but the 
two propositions together. It denies an assertion which 
might be thus expressed : ypd<p£i p.ev, ob notel di, he icrites^ 
but does not execute. So, also, ob Si) twv jih yeiporiyvwv 
kari re 7:ipa~ rrfi Ipyaalaq, rod 8* av&pw—ivoo jjtou obx £<ttc, 
" it cannot be that there is some object in the labors of the 
artist, but none in the life of man P 

Note. — In phrases of this &md, the first proposition will be almost 
invariably introduced by yev, and the second is negative. Mark the cel- 
ebrated sentence of Demosthenes : ovk elirov fiev ravra^ ovk eypaiba de, "I 
did not say these things indeed, and not offer a decree, &c. 

Obs. 4. In some phrases ob and prf are united J as, ob 
fi7j and /jltj ob. Ob fiy is a stronger and more emphatic ne- 
gation than o£>, and is used in the same way (elliptical for 
ob <p6fto<; /nj, there is no fear lest, or something like that, 
and then coming to be generally employed for a strong 
negative). Mij ob, in general, is only a stronger expres- 
sion of /nj, and is used in the same manner, subject, how- 
ever, to the following modifications : 







6i PREPOSITIONS. 



1st. In dependent propositions, when the vevh of the 
principal proposition is accompanied by a negation, or 
contains a negative idea, jj.i) ou is used before the infini- 
tive* W belonging to the infinitive proper, and ou simply 
repeating the negative of the preceding verb ; as, ou% 

dloijre ;j.7j ou xarayiXacrroq elvat, he is not able not to be (he 

cannot but be) ridiculous y izefaotiat yap ou togovtov oudkv 
oxtts fxij ou xaXajq ftaveTv, for I shall not suffer any thing 
such as not to die (but that I shall die) nobly. 

2d. Mi) ob, after verbs signifying to fear, to warn, &c, 
as above (1066, 5th), render the sentence negative, which, 
with /i7j alone, would be positive; as, didocxa ixtj ou rt 
yivrjTat, J am afraid lest something may kot happen * 
<po{3ouii.at /IT] ou xaXbv f h vereor ne non honestum sit, I 
fear that this may not be proper. 

3d. In independent propositions with the subjunctive 
mood, /^'joined with ov makes the negative expression 
leSS positive f as, aXXa i±rj oox 7) dcdaxrdv i] dpsrvj, but vir- 
tue may perhaps be a thing not to be taught. The con- 
struction is doubtless elliptical, 6 pa, look, see, or some 
such word being suppressed; as, see lest it be not = look 
whether it be not. 



PREPOSITIONS. 

1071* — Prepositions are used to express the 
relation in which one thing stands to another. For the 
primary and various derived meanings of prepositions in 
different constructions, see 726-779. The cases to which 
they are respectively attached are as follows : 

1072.— Rule XL VIII. 'Avri, ano, ex or !£, 
and 7tp6j govern the genitive only ; as, 

6w$aX[j.b^ fori dcpd-aXtiou, an eye for an eye. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



865 



1073. — Rule XLIX. 3 Ei> and avv govern 
the dative. 

1074.— Rule L. Eig (or l s ), dra, and (Attic) 
o>g govern the accusative. 

Obs. 1. 5 i4va, among the poets, also governs the dative. 

1075. — Rule LI. Ata, mrd, per a, and i>7tep 7 
govern the genitive or accusative. 

Obs. 2. J/sra, among the poets, also governs the datdve 
of a plural noun, or a noun of multitude ; as, fierd rpt~d- 

1076. — Rule LII. 3 A^t, 7tspi, eni, Ttccpd, 
7tpog, and vno, govern the genitive, dative, or 
accusative. 

Note. — For the meaning of the prepositions, as modified by the case 
with which they are joined, see 126-119. 

Obs. 3. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, their 
case being understood. This is the case especially with 
£v in the Ionic and ~p6z in the Attic. Hence, in the Ionic 
writers, they are often put tivice, once adverbially with- 
out a case, and again with a case or in composition with a 
verb ; as, h dk xai h Mitup:, and in Memphis also 

Obs. 4. Prepositions are sometimes separated from, 
their CClSe, as, hydp &k tt { voxzl raurrj avaipotiai. In 
Attic, this takes place, according to the rule, with the 
conjunctions //-tv, di, yap, oov ; as, & fiiv yap eiprjvy ; — ig fikv 

ov> rdq 'Aftrjuag} and with ~p6q with the genitive when 
it signifies per. 

Obs. 5. Prepositions are often put after their case, 
particularly by the Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic 



S6G PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 

poets ; as, ved» a-o xai yliaiawv. In the Attic prose wri- 
ters, it takes place only in nept with the genitive. When 
so placed, the accent is always thrown back to the first 
syllable ; thns, goto, nipt, &c. 

Obs. 6. When a preposition should stand twice with 
two different nouns, it is often put only once by the poets, 
and that with the second noun ; as, y albs yj en) y?j<; x Horn., 
by sea or land. 

Obs. 7. The old habit of regarding nouns as often gov- 
erned by prepositions understood is unphilosoph- 
ical, and fails to recognize the fact that the meaning in 
these instances lies already in the case, though it might 
be more fully brought out by the preposition. The in- 
stances in which we should parse by assuming a preposi- 
tion understood are very rare indeed. 



PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 

1077. — Rule LIIL A preposition in com- 
position sometimes governs the same ease as 
when it stands by itself; as, 

igijkfte TYjq ohiaq, he went out from the house. 

Obs. 1. This is done when the preposition can be 
separated from the verb, and joined with the sub- 
stantive, without altering the sense. 

# 

Obs. 2. In Homer, Herodotus, and other old writers, 
the preposition is frequently found separated by one or 
more words from that with which it may be considered 
in composition; as, ypuv and Xotybv dfwvat (II. 1. 67), for 
rjixiv dnajadvat Xotyov • and fxev (jewvrbv a>Xe<jaq (Herod. 3. 36), 

for (rewords fih axtoXevaq. Hence, when the verb is to be 
repeated several times, after the first time, the preposition 



PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 367 

only is often used ; as, aizolel noXiv, d^o 3k iraripa. Gram- 
marians, however, consider the preposition in such cases 
as used adverbially, and not properly in composition. 
Instances of the proper tmesis are very rare, especially in 
the Attic prose writers. 



368 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



The general import of the voices, moods, and tenses has 
been given (401-427). We give here more fully the use 
of the moods. 

1.07 8 • — The indicative mood represents the action of 
the verb as reality, but under one of the three categories : 
(1.) Of affirmation; as, ypd<pec, he is writing. (2.) Of 
question ; as, ypdcpei ; is he writing ? (3.) Or of condi- 
tion ; as, el, ore ypdcpet, if, when he is writing. The sub- 
junctive and optative represent the action as matter of 
conception and possibility ; as, ha ypdipr^ in order that he 
may write / el ypdcpot, if he should be writing. 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

(1.) The indicative is used not only in direct and 
unconditional statements — as, eypa<pev, he was writing ; 
Tziizrcoxa^ I have fallen — but also in indirect and conditional 
statements (though implying reality) after ore, that; el, 
if; ore, iohen ; inei, when, since ; ewg, while, until ; xpfa, 
before, &c: as, olda ore oorwq e^ei^I know that it is so ; 
ore Tjldev eldov cc&rov, when he came I saw him * ewq epievev, 
s while he was remaining. 

(2.) The Greek indicative is used more freely than the 
Latin, and with much the same latitude as the English. 
It is used — 

(a.) With the relative after negative propositions ; as, 
oddelg ianv oanq touto Tzoiel, there is none who does this 
(Lat. subj., qui faciat). 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 369 

(b.) In indirect questions ; as, Spare rt notodfiew, you see 
what we are doing / kizov pot tzwz aizopiPyzev, tell me how it 
has turned out. 

(c.) In the oratio obliqua, or indirect discourse; as, 
rjyyet/.ev Srt ecpeoyov^ he announced that they were fleeing / 
r}p6[±TiV el T,ap7 { (7av, I asked if they were present. Often the 
particle introduces the form of the oratio recta * as, d-e- 
xpivavro ort ixavot £<rpev, they ansioered (that) we are able; 
ijyyetXev tbq 'EXdreta xareik-qTzzat, he announced that Elated 
was (has been) taken. 

(d.) Often, however, with the past tenses, the optative 
is used in the oratio obliqua, especially if the speaker 
would be understood as merely reporting the words of 

another ; as, Izokpa Xiyetv wq kyaj xaxcuXoxcbq eUt} ttjv TzdXtv, 

he ventured to say that I had hindered the state ; i-udo- 
peda ort to itXoiov atptypivov e*rj, we learned that the ship had 
come. Both words may be found united ; as, eXeyov ort 
Kvpoq pkv ridvrjxev, ^Aptaioq dk izecpeuycbq e*r h they Said that 

Cyrus teas dead, and Ariceus had fled. 

(3.) The imperfect indicative is sometimes used ellipti- 
cally with the modal adverb av (797), to express what 
would occasionally occur ; as, eXeyev «v, he would say (from 
time to time) ; elra -up obx a? rapT ( v, then again, fire would 
(sometimes) not be present. But «v with the indicative 
imperfect has generally a very different sense (as below). 

The Indicative in Hypothetical Propositions. 

1070m — In hypothetical sentences, the indicative is 
thus used : — 

(1.) In propositions assuming the case as real, any 
required tense of the indicative in the condition (or prota- 
sis), and any tense of the indicative or the imperative in 
the conclusion (or apodosis) ; as, el j3a>pot e!<7t, xai dst &sot 
if there are altars, there are also gods ; el dtwxet, xa-zalr^e^ 

16* 



870 INDICATIVE MOOD. 

rat, if he is pursuing (and he is), he will overtake * e* n 
eyeiq 36^, if thou hast any thing, give it. 

Rem. — The reality may be only momentarily assumed — a mere logical 
reality — while the fact is otherwise ; as we may say in English, u If I 
said thai I uttered a falsehood (but I did not). 

(2.) In propositions implying the reverse of the suppo- 
sition, an indicative past tense in both members, with el in 
the condition and av in the conclusion ; if the reference be to 
present, or continued past time, the imperfect ; if to abso- 
lute past time, the aorist ; as, el tout a iwpwv, £daup.a£ov av, 
if I saw this, I should marvel (but I do not) ; el fiij Irda- 
reuev akr)0euo~ei\>, obx av npoileyev, unless he had believed 
(were believing) that he should tell the truth, he would not 
have been wont to foretell ; el idtw^e, xariAafiev av, if he 
had pursued, he would have overtaken. * 

Rem. 1. If the time varies in the two clauses, the tense will vary 
correspondingly ; as, el TzapeaaXsaa larpdv, ovtc av rjodevow, if I had sum- 
moned a physician, I should not (now) he sick. 

Rem. 2. If the clause "I should have done " corresponds to the indica- 
tive "I did" in direct assertion, the aorist {kiro'iTjaa av) is used; if to 
"I have done," the pluperfect (eTreiroL^Keiv av)' as, vfipioev av, he would 
have insulted (but did not) ; v/3pcKei av, he would have insulted (but has 
not). 

Rem. 3. As propositions implying reality admit past tenses equally 
with those implying the reverse, we can, where the past tenses are 
used, distinguish between the two classes of propositions only by the 
presence or absence of av in the conclusion ; as, el ravra elirev, eipev- 
aaro, if he said this, he spoke falsely; el ravra elnev, e^evcaro av, if he 
(had) said this, he would have spoken falsely. 

Rem. 4. The conclusion here is sometimes used alone, without the 
condition; as, efiovlofivv av, I could wish (were it possible); and some- 
times, particularly with ej3ovlop,?/p, tjvxojjl-jjv, with omission of the av. 
as, efiovkoiii-jv, I were ivishing, could wish ; yvxofiqvj I were praying, could 
pray, as well as, / was wishing, I was praying. 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 371 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE 

MOODS. 

1080. — Unlike the indicative, the subjunctive and 
optative moods are used primarily in dependent, and but 
secondarily in independent constructions. We treat the 
former, then, first. They agree in being both properly 
dependent — the subjunctive on the primary tenses of the 
indicative, the optative on the secondary. Hence the 
general rule : — 

1081*— Rule LIV. The subiunctive and 
optative are found properly in dependent clauses, 
the subjunctive in connection with the primary, 
the optative with the secondary tenses of the 
indicative; as, 

Ildpzifii ha idofy I am present that I may see. 

Ilaprjv ha *doi[it y I was present that I might see. 

'A-o-eipti/iat aurou lav duvrjrat, I try him whether he be 
able. 

'A-s-etpwfjLTjv avroo el dvvairo^ I was trying him whether 
he might be able. 

(1.) The subjunctive and optative are used in their 
appropriate senses with the same conditional particles as 
the indicative— -e?, ore, ore, J>c, £^, l~ei^ izpb, &c. ; as, el 
TjXdzv^ if he came y el eXdot^ if he might come ; eav £10%, if 
he (may) come; ore eldov, when JT saio ; ore idotp.t,tchenT 
might see ; orav ?dw^ when I may see ; ewq elpt 3 while I 
am * ewq av w, ichilel may be / sax; el-q^ while I might be. 

Rem. 1. With the subjunctive, these particles commonly take av, 
where possible, uniting with them into one word; as, eav, r/v, av (for 
el av), eirdv, kizetSdv, brav, rrplv av, &c. 

Rem. 2. The optative is often used with the past tenses where the 
present or future is not followed by the subjunctive ; as, 7xyu ore 7 



372 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 

666g bonv, earai, he says that the route is] ivill be ; eIttev on r) 66bg eiy, 
eaocro, lie said that the route was, would be; old a on KEvog egtlv 6 66j3og, 
I know that the fear is groundless ; t/vcoaav on Kevbg eln 6 (poftog, they knew 
that the fear was groundless. 

(2.) The subjunctive and optative are thus also used 
■with relative words {pronouns and adverbs), as oq, Sartq, 
otzou, ore ; as, o<; raura elize^, he who said this ; oartq raura 
ef7roc, whoever might say this (possibility, or repetition) ; 
os av raura £|7ny, whoever may say or have said this ; onou 
?jv, where he was ; oizoo e.07, ivhere he might be ; oxou <2\> ^, 
wherever he may be. 

Rem. — With eav, bg av, &c, tlio aorist subjunctive has nearly the 
force of the perfect future shall, or may have done ; as, eav ravra eIttv, 
if he shall have said this ; kav sWtj, if he may or shall have come. 

(3.) The optative is, however, by no means confined to 
past time, but, as less near to reality than the subjunctive, 
is widely used in the sphere of conception and possibility 
(Eng. might, could, would), and in such cases may take 
or omit av, according as the idea of conditionality is to be 
more or less distinctly brought out ; as, o n xaO" ijXuiav 
sxaarog e^oc, whatever each according to his age might be 
able; r.a>q av ffiodelrjiiev, how can (might, could) wc be 
saved? rar arpareiaq otzoc av rcq etnoi, the expeditions 
ichither soever one might mentio?z ; d-opco 3, re a\> ^prja-ac/ic, 
I am at a loss how I may deal with it. 

In hypothetical propositions, the two moods conform to 
the above principles. The subjunctive is in the main 
restricted to its connection with the primary tenses, and 
is found only in the condition, while the optative has a 
freer use in the sphere of hypothesis and possibility. 

The Subjunctive and Optative in Hypothetical 

Propositions. 

1082. — In hypothetical propositions implying reality, 
whether affirmative or negative, the indicative is used ; 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 873 

in those implying doubt and uncertainty ', the subjunctive 
and optative. 

1. Doubt, in a case of practical interest, looking toward 
a decision: the subjunctive with idv (ijv, a>) in the condi- 
tion, and the present or future indicative or the imperative 
in the conclusion / as, idv re e%iD, dwa-a>, if I have any 
thing, I will give it (and I will see) ; iav IxeX fj, &7cdyyedov 9 
if he be there, report. 

2. Mere uncertainty, pure hypothesis (looking to no 
apparent decision) : the optative with el in the condition, 
and the optative with ay in the conclusion ; as, el eXOocj 
idoc/jit av ab-6v, if he should come, I should see him ; el 
ravra Xiyotq, dp.apra.voiq av, if you should say this, you 
woidd be in error. 

Bern. 1. The regular laws of sequence are often disregarded from 
poetic license, from a change in the speaker's conception, or on rhetor- 
ical grounds ; as, el pyde ravra olda, ^av/ibg av eiijv, If I do not even know 
this, I should be worthless, where exactness would require either el — 
eldeirpj, or <pav?i6g elpi, or eaopai; el ravra piipeig, ratf av Zevg tu:vot 
if you shall throw out these things, perchance Zeus might hear. So (though 
more rarely) el prj evovaev, air6?joiro av (poet.), if she had not observed^ 
he would perish (for dr:(dkzro av, he would have perished, see 1071, 10 72). 

Rem. 2. In all the hypothetical propositions, the condition is frequently 
made out in other ways; as, 6C vpdg avrovg rcdlai av diroAu/.eire, on 
account of yourselves (= if you had been left to yourselves) you would 
long since have been undone ; ev rrj dpirayy ol rcovrjporaroi ^eovenrijaaiev 
av, in the sacking (= if they should plunder) the worst men would get 
the advantage. So often with participles ; as, ddmog eorai ravra ttoiuv, 
lie will be unjust in doing (= if he shall do) this. 

Bern. 3. The entire conditional sentence may be resolved into infini- 
tives and participles ; as, olovrai dvapdxeadai av ovppdxovg TrpocXaSovreg 
(= olovrai on el cvp. rcpoaTidfioiev dvap&xoivro av) they think that by obtain- 
ing allies they might retrieve their defeat. 

Rem. 4. From the above hypothetical sentences, we are carefully to 
distinguish constructions like the following : el rig elg vocov rceaoi, ovdev 
(pdppaKov r}v, if one might (from time to time) fall into disease, there 
was no medicine; a very different sentence from el rig elg voaov rc'eaoi, 
ovoev (j)dppaiiov av elrj, if one should fall into a disease, there would be no 
medicine. 



Q 



74: SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 



Bern. 5. With the condition suppressed, the optative, with av in the 
conclusion, is often used independently for a positive statement, and 
rarely for the imperative (1085, II., c). 



The Subjunctive and Optative in Final Sentences. 

1083* — (1.) In final clauses, with particles denoting 
purpose, the subjunctive and optative are regularly, and 
would in strictness be exclusively, used ; as, ha, oxwq, 
o<ppa, wq, ha /itj, onatqjnj, in order that, in order that not y 
as, Cjy ha ioOiri, he lives that he may eat* eXrj ha ieOtoi, he 
lived that he might eat / wg piy Aa/%, that he may not take ; 
ha pi} X&fioi, that he might not take, 

Bern. 1. By change of conception, or to express more fully continuance, 
the subjunctive is here sometimes employed with the past tenses; as, 
G-od sent his Son, Iva ex^ev, that we may have life ; and also sometimes 
the optative stands after the present, to render the result rather a 
matter of conception, in order that it might he. 

Bern. 2. In case of imagined, but unrealized purpose, dependent on a 
condition not fulfilled, the indicative past with Iva is sometimes used to 
bring out more vividly the actual result in case the condition had been 
fulfilled ; as, Iva^ rjp^aro ttjq 'AATjdeiac, in order that he {might have) begun 
his Truth. 



(2.) Verbs of fearing (omitting the oxwq, or ha) take 
simply fJLij, lest, that, and /^ oo, lest not, that not ; as, Sidot- 
xa jjLTj /is kxcpbyrj, I fear lest it may escape me; idsdocxetu 
p.i] Ixcpbyot. 7 E\> <p6fia) eifii jjltj ou yivr^a, I fear lest it may not 
happen (1066, 4). 

Bern. — M#, biroc, ottoc = fiy, however, often take the indicative future 
to bring the thought nearer to reality; especially oxuc, how, in what 
manner, in order that ; as, cuoTrei brcoq ravra eorai, look to it how, that 
this shall be. In warnings, commands, &c, the principal verb, bpa, see, 
CKonEL, consider, look to it, is often omitted, and brruc begins the sen- 
tence ; as, ottuc fiy oeavrbv olktceIc ttote, look out lest you shall yet (have 
to) expend your wailing s on yourself. So //#, ^ ov with subjunctive. 



SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 375 

The Subjunctive and Optative in Independent 

Clauses. 

1084:, — The subjunctive and optative, properly depend- 
ent moods, are used elliptically in independent clauses. 

I. The subjunctive is thus used : — 

(a.) In commanding, exhorting, in the first person ; as, 
idtpLsVj let us go ; dvayuca, let me read. 

■ (b.) In forbidding, with the aorist ; as, py 6/1607}$, do 
not swear/ /jlt) <po$T)0rfa do not fear. 

(c.) In deliberating ; as, ~oT -pd-cu/iai, whither may, 
shall I turn ? e?-w/±ev r) <jiy&[Lev, shall we speak or be silent? 

II. The optative is thus used : — 

(a.) To express a wish or prayer (whence the name 

optative) ; as, dnoXotro, may he perish/ fir) yhoiro, may it 

not happen ; riaeiay A&vaoi, may the Danai expiate, &c. 

Sometimes with el, eide, el yap, wq, whence it probably 

came by ellipsis ; as, el &-6Xoito, if he should perish (I 

should rejoice) ; hence, el dnoXotro, and finally aizoXoiro. 

Thus always when without av. 

Rem. — So also the indicative past with e\ elOe for an unattainable 
wish ; as, el dwarbv yv 1 if it were but possible ! Sometimes woe/.e, 
ought, or el Sxpefa, cjg cj(pe?»s, with the infinitive ; as, cogels ^yv, 6g cjcpeTis 
£f/v, he ought to be living, hovj ought he to live = would that he were alive ! 

(b.) With aw, to express doubt, conjecture, possibility / as, 
elev av vofistq, they might be (were, perhaps) shepherds. 

(c.) In expressing a definite assertion with politeness 
and modesty; as, touto obx aLuyivocro, this might not (may 
not) happen ; oux av r^ot, he woidd not (•=. will not) come. 
This with the following is properly but the apodosis of a 
proposition with suppressed protasis ; as, oux av 7:0 trj ere tag 
(el izetpd&aio), you could not do it (if you should try). So 
interrogatively ; as, oux wj pLeivetaq, could you not with- 
stand? lOeXijeetev av, would he be willing? 

(d.) As a softened form of the imperative, (rarely) ; 
as, yojpots a\> elao), you might go icithin = go within. 



376 INFINITIVE MOOD. 

THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

1085 '. — The imperative properly expresses command, 
but may be used for exhorting ', entreating, permitting ; 
as, iXOi, come; irco n<;, let some one go* The subject 
pronoun is used only when emphatic. Its use has the 
following peculiarities : — 

1. The second person sometimes stands (spiritedly) for 
the third; as, niXa? res *0c (go, some neighbor), let some 
neighbor go. 

2. The plural sometimes stands for the singular ; as, 
TzpoaiXdere, a> izdi, come, my child. Sometimes, also, the 
singular instead of the plural ; as, slxi pim, a> Zwxparig re 
xat 'iTtnoxpareq. So in the orators, in impassioned address, 
as if individualizing ; as, ^ fiobXeade, eini pot, or do you 
wish, tell me. 

3. In prohibitions (with pyj), the aorist takes the sub- 
junctive ; as, pi] <poftriOrjq, fear not. 

4. The imperative after olaO'' on, 3, &<r, seems used ellip- 
tically, by transposition of the imperative ; as, o1a(f wq 
Tzoitjaov ; hnowest thou how to do ? do, knowest thou how? 
o1g(? oou 8 dpatrov, knowest thou, then, what to do ? 

5. For the imperative we may have the future indica- 
tive ; as, ob <poveb(jeiq, thou shalt not murder ; and idio- 
matically, in constructions like ovxow p idaeiq, icilt thou not 
then leave me alone — leave me alone ; ob atwurjaeiq, ivilt 
thou not be silent ? = be silent. So also the aorist ; thus, 
rt obx aTiexpivaro nz, iohy did not some one answer? '== let 
some one answer. 

THE INFINITIVE MOOD.S 

1086. — The infinitive mood expresses the mean- 
ing of the verb in a general and unlimited man- 
ner, without the distinctions of number or person (410). 
In construction, it may be considered under the four fol- 



INFINITIVE AS A VERBAL NOUN. 877 

lowing divisions: viz., as a verbal noun; without a sub- 
ject^ as the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb or 
adjective ; with a subject y absolutely after certain particles. 



THE INFINITIVE AS A VERBAL NOUN. 

1087. — The infinitive, with the neuter arti- 
cle prefixed, 921, is used as a verbal noun in all the 

cases except the vocative ; and,- as such, is subject to the 
same rules of construction as the noun, being, in the nomi- 
native, the subject of a verb, and governed, in the oblique 
eases, by verbs or prepositions. 

Obs. 1. When thus used (with or without a clause) as 
the subject or object of a verb, it may omit the 

article} as, 7ratfrv rjfuv zdzdavelv oyeilezai, dying is due 

to cdl of us ; but with a preposition, the article is, in 
correct writing, invariably used; as, oca zoo Xiyetv, by 
means of speaking / -pbq zb a-obaveTv, in order to die, or, 
in reference to dying, 

Obs. 2. Not only the simple infinitive, but the 
infinitive with its entire clause, may be regarded as a sub- 
stantive, and have nearly every variety of construction as 
a substantive ; as, Nom., zo zobs d^pw-oo^ apapzdvaw oboh 
{raotiacjTov (Igzi), that men shoidd err is nothing wonder- 
ful ; Gen., vizkp zoo pydiva d-ofoKJaxetv^ in order that no 
One might perish ; Dat., ha ajziazoxyi zip ipe zeztpyjCnlai otzo 
Satpovwv, that they may disbelieve my having been honored 
by the gods / Ace, k'xptva zo pi] ndXiv hh^ep, I determined 
not to come again. 

That is. to say, the infinitive, while used as a noun 
with a preposition, may, at the same time, have a 
subject before it in the accusative, and govern the case 
which it naturally governs, thus having at once the twofold 



878 INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT. 

construction of a verb and a noun ; as, did to £p.& eipyxivat 
zadra y on account of my having said these things. 

Obs. 3. With the article alone, the infinitive is 
generally equivalent to the Latin gerund / as, svexa too 
Xiyetv, causa dicendi ; lv rw ?Jyeiv, dicendo ; 7tpbq to Uyew, 
ad dicendum. 

Obs. 4. Without the article, it may be used like the 
Latin supine; as, 7)X#e ^rjT^ac, venit qucesitum ; ijdb 
dzouetv, suave auditu ; at^iazoq 3<p$7jvau 7 turpissimus visu. 



THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT. 

1088. — Rule LV. One verb, used as the 
subject of another, is put in the infinitive / as, 

(pevyew avTolq dacpakiaTepov Igtlv, to flee is safer for 
them. 

1089. — Rule LVL One verb governs an- 
other as its object, in tlie infinitive ; as, 
rjpsaTo Xiyetv, he began to say. 

Rem. — Both these rules apply to the infinitive with a subject, 
1091-1096. 

1090. — Rule LVII. The infinitive mood is 
governed by adjectives denoting fitness, ability, 
capacity, and the contrary ; as ? 

decvdg Aiyew, powerful in speaking (to speak). 

a^wq ftaupLdaat, worthy to be admired. 

Note. — It is also used after substantives; as, e^ovaiav yevec&ai, power 
to become. 

Obs. 1. The infinitive under these rules stands 
closely connected with its governing verb or adjective as 
its complement. The verbs that govern the infinitive 



INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT. 379 

directly in this way are such as denote desire, ability, 
intention, endeavor, and the like ; as, IMkei ypdyetv, 
he icishes to write ; diofiai god ik&evjt, I beg of you to come. 

Obs. 2. The infinitive following verbs sometimes ex- 
presses design or consequence. This usage, not 
unfrequent in Attic writers — as, zariXuze arparimzaq <poXdT- 
retv to GTpaToxedov, he left soldiers to guard the camp 
(where, perhaps, ware, marking result rather than purpose, 
might be used) — became more frequent in later and less 
elegant Greek, to mark pure purpose ; as, ijX&opLev npoaxv- 
vrjcai, we came to worship = ~pd$ to r.poaxo^aai. 

Obs. 3. After a verb or adjective, the infinitive with 
ohtt£ marks result; as, <piXotii±6tclto<; tjv ohjtz irdvTa dko- 
fielvat, he teas very ambitious, so as to endure all things, 
&c. This construction takes place especially after such 
words as ToaooToq, ToiouToq^ outws, and the like. 

Obs. 4. The infinitive is sometimes constructed quite 
loosely with a verb or adjective, to express the comple- 
ment of their idea ; as, 

d><; Idelv e<paw£To, as he appeared to the sight (lit., as he 
appeared to see •=• when one looked at him). 

fteieiv dvifjLOLGtv dfiolot, like the winds ix running. 

obdk xpoo<pa(v£T tditr&ai, nor did he appear to the 

SIGHT. 

wq ehdaat, h.eV;6z &rw, so far as one might conjecture, 
it is he (lit., as to conjecture, it is he). 

Obs. 5. The infinitive active is used often in Greek in 
the sense of the latter supine, or infinitive passive in 
Latin; as, * 

dvijp patov <pukd<j<jstv, a man more easy to be guarded 
(lit., more easy for one to guard). 
f5ddia TioceJv, things easy to be done. 



880 INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. 



THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. 



1091. — A subordinate or dependent clause, 

containing a verb and its subject, is connected with the 
leading or primary clause in two ways. First, by a 
conjunctive particle, ok, on; &c, with the nomina- 
tive and the finite Verb; as, Kyooatv on 6 iraTpog rid- 
vrjxe. Second, tvithout a conjunction, by the accusa- 
tive (usually) and infinitive ; as, Xiyooat rbv ItaTpov 

re&vTjxivac. 

1092. — Sometimes both modes of expression are uni- 
ted in the same sentence; as, e<rn Xoyoq <b<; Sip^rjq kxo- 
fiiZero iq zy)\> 'Ajrtrjv* TzXwovra 8i jaw avefiov Zrpufiov tyv 
bnolaPsTv. Sometimes a sentence begins with the one 
form and ends with the other ; as, Xiyouct 6* yjpaq^ axbdovov 
piov £a>/i£v ? and they say that we live a life free from dan- 
ger ; as if it had been intended to say, Xiyouat d' ypaq d.xb~ 
duvov filov ZfjV* 

The construction of the subordinate clause connected 
by the first method mentioned above, is subject to the 
rules (956, 963) ; connected by the second, it comes un- 
der the rules that follow. 

1093. — Rule LVIXX. The infinitive mood, 
in a dependent clause, has its subject in the 
accusative; as, 

Tohq fteobq izdvra eldivcu eXeyev, he used to say that the 
gods know all things, 

Exc. — When the subject of the infinitive is the 
same with that of the preceding verb, the pro- 
noun expressing it is omitted, and the adjuncts of the 



INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. 331 

infinitive are attracted into the case of the expressed 
subject ; as, 

£<pTj elvat (TTparrtfbq, he said that he was a general. 

1094. — In this construction, the subject of the in- 
finitive is regularly omitted, but it may take various 
adjuncts, which are, of course, put in the case t>f the 

Subject / as, ecprj abrbq elvat G-parrtfoq, he said that he 
icas himself general. If to this clause be added a subject 
referring to another person, that of course will be in the 
accusative by the general rule ; as, ecprj abrdq elvat arpa- 
rrjybq, oux Ixeivooq, he said that he teas himself general, not 
they. 

If the subject is expressed iu^the nominative, it 
must be united with the principal verb, not with the 
infinitive j as, evyotxat auzoq iyw elvat is not, I pray that 
I myself may be, but, I myself pray that I may be. 

This construction has been imitated in Latin; thus, 
Sensit medios delapsus in hostes. — Virg. Uxor invicti 
Jbvis esse nescis. — Hor. 

Obs. 1. The attraction involved in this rule holds 
not only of the nominative, but also applies to other cases, 
like the following: dio/iat goo elvat xpyvzou, I beg of thee 
to be kind y iTztrdrret r<p ~atd\ i)i:rj-/.6a) elvat, he enjoins on 
the boy to be obedient. 

Obs. 2. Sometimes, however, this construction is disre- 
garded, and the adjective or noun following is put in the 
accusative, as if with the expressed subject of the 
infinitive; as, dio/icu 5p.wv (priwiaaad-at, iv^ufioufiivouc, I beg 
of you to vote, bearing in mind, &c. 

1095. — This construction is of course elliptical; 
but the ellipsis is perfectly natural, and turns upon that 
principle, so prevalent in the Greek language, of making 
unity of expression answer to unity of thought, as in the 



382 INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. 

attraction of the relative to the antecedent, or of the an- 
tecedent to the relative ; as, rcbv dvdpwv wv 6pdq, or wv av- 
Spwv opdq, of what men you see. So in Xiyco elvai, the sub- 
ject being once mentioned, they will not impair the unity 
of the sentence by repeating it. 

Rem. — Constructions of the kind, deofiai vju&v — ev&vfiovfthovCj in 
which the end of a sentence does not grammatically correspond to the 
beginning, are called anacolutha. For slighter cases of anacolutha, see 
1082, 2, Eem. 1. Anacolutha occur when the speaker commences a 
period in the manner required by the preceding discourse, but after- 
wards, especially after a parenthetic clause, passes over into another 
construction. Its causes are various, as, conciseness, perspicuity, smooth- 
ness, emphasis, or conversational ease. 

Obs. 3. With the passive voice, the subject of the 
infinitive is changed into the subject of the preceding verb, 
or it remains unchanged in the accusative, the passive 
verb being used impersonally ; as, 

Xiysrac Kvpoq, \ ■ . ■_- ~ , 

\ yeviffvat Kafxpoaoo. 
Xiyerac Kopov, ) 

Cyrus is said to have been ) ., „, . „ ~ * 
■r/. . 7jl /y c the offspring of Cambyses. 

It is said that Cyrus was ) 

With the passive voice, the accusative subject 

of the finite active verb becomes the nominative 

subject. 

Obs. 4. The same is true of the verb doxe? ; thus, SoxeT 
fiot hcstvov ehat, it seems to me that he is, or, which is 
much more common, doxeT Ixelvor: elvat, he seems to be; 

raurd fiot doxsl av xaXax; e^etv, it seems to me that this 
would be well (so required by English idiom; lit., "this 
seems to me to would be well," the av belonging to %^v, 
and not to doxei). The following unites both construc- 
tions; xai p.i]v rjyyeXrai ye ij ftdftlq Icyupa yzyovlvai xai 
-xokXobs re&vdvat, and indeed it has been announced 
that the battle has been obstinate, and that many are 
dead. In like manner, the adjectives dixaios, d9jXo<; 9 <pave- 



INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 383 

pSq, &c, with the verb dp.(, are used habitually and 
elegantly in the personal construction instead of the 
impersonal / as, dUatoq dfit i:oi£~iv, it is right for me to do 
(lit., I am right to do), instead of dixaiov kazi p.ot 7zot£lv, &c. 
Obs. 5. We have stated (1094) that the adjuncts of 
the infinitive, which has the same subject with the finite 
verb, will take the case of the subject; as, e<prj auras xoteTv, 
he said that he teas himself doing : this, of course, will 
hold of the noun after a copulative verb so situated ; 
as, Nom., £<prj ehai <yrpaT7jy6<;^ he said that he was a gen- 
eral ; Gen., epwxorwv rjdrj /irjxiTi xpeiGGovajv £ y cvac, having 
learned already that they are no longer superior ; Dat, 
l<p Tjp.1v Igt\ to £iziei'A.£<ji el vat, it depends upon our- 
selves TO BE REASONABLE. - 

Obs. 6. Whatever case is required before the in- 
finitive by the preceding rules, it continues the same 
though preceded by ojq or waTe, or a preposition, 
because the preposition afiects not the subject of the 
infinitive, but belongs to the infinitive itself, or to the 
whole clause; thus, p.rjd£\q TrjAtxouToq earco nap 6p.lv dxrre 
Tobs vopLOvq Trap a (3 a q fir) douvat dtxrjv, let NO ONE be SO 

great among you, that, violating the laws, he can go 
unpunished; ij/idpTavov dta to jultj uo<po\ elva't, they 
erred because they were not wise (lit., on account of 
not being wise). 



THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 

1096. — Eule LIX. The infinitive is often 
used after the particles y\ (tha?i), ojg, &g?e, 7tptV; as, 

fisT^w 7} (pipetv, greater than to bear, too great to bear ; 
SO with w<jt£ following, fieTZqv r) w<tt£ <pipetv. 
-ph tout a zibivai, before knowing these things. 
w<tt£, marking result (and o>s) ; as, w<tt£ TabTa y^tcd-at, so 



384 INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 

that these things took place (so as these things to have 
taken place). 

Trph aizod-oyslv to iratdtovy before the child died. 

wq fitxpdv fieydXa} elxdtrat, to compare small ''with great. 

Obs. 1. c £c, with the infinitive, is frequently used 
in a sort of loose construction somewhat like pur as 
far as f thus, w$ lp.k eo /xe l av9jo'^at, as far as I recollect 
distinctly * tbq ye p.ot doxsiv 9 as at least it seems to me ; 
wq snog eiizeTv, so to speak, as one might say ; wg etxdcai, 
as one might conjecture. But a>c is frequently omitted ; 
hence such expressions as, 00 -oXXw Myu eiizeiv, in few 
words / fitxpop delv, to icant Utile, almost ; koXXoo delv, to 
want much, not nearly. 

Obs. 2. The infinitive is often used for the imper- 
ative, with an ellipsis perhaps of some verb; as, 
yatpetv [lerd yatpovTiov, xXatetv fiera xXatovTcov, REJOICE 
with them that rejoice, and weep with the?n that weep. 
Sometimes, also, for the optative, dog, MXa), or eu^o^ac, 
being understood/ as, <b Zed £xyevio-#ai fxot 'Adryvatocx; 

Tt<7a<T#(u, Jupiter, may it be granted to me to punish 
the Athenians: more commonly expressed / as, a> Zed, doq 
/is Ttaaa^.at jiopov rrarpog. 

Obs. 3. The infinitive elvat is sometimes absolute and 
redundant, both with and without the article / viz., 

1st. After adjectives, adverbs, and preposi- 
tions, thus, ixcbv elvat for ixcbv, willing ; as, ixwv av elvat 
touto -otTJGou/it, I 'would icillingly do this. So the phrases, 
to <jufj.7zav elvat, generally / ai y elvat, with respect to you 
at least y to /iev T-rjfxepov elvat, to-day indeed; xoltgl touto 
elvat, with respect to this / to vuv elvat^ now / to Ijt' bteivoiq 
elvat, as far as depends on them. 

2d. Somewhat similarly after verbs of choosing, 
calling, malting, &c. ; as, (rovto-Tijv ovofid^ooo-i ye tov 
avdpa elvat, they call the man a philosopher ; ot de o-u/jl/jm/ov 
fitv elXovTo elvat, but they chose him to be an ally. 



PARTICIPLE. 885 



THE PARTICIPLE (434). 

1097. — Rule LX. Participles, like adjec- 
tives, agree with, their substantives in gender, 
number, and case (858, note). 

1098. — Rule LXI. Participles govern the 
case of their own verbs ; as, 

ol Tzokifiwi to Xoyiov elddres, the enemy knowing the 
oraele. 

toutcjv k.fj.00 deopLivou, J being in want of these things. 

1099. — The Greek language, having a participle 
in every principal tense of every voice, uses it 
much more extensively than the Latin. It is employed 
principally as follows : 

1100. — A participle is used as the complement of 
a verb, as follows : 

1st. Simply to connect an accompanying with the 
main action in the same subject. Thus used, the par- 
ticiple and verb may be rendered as two verbs with a 
conjunction ; as, TzapeX&cov tk; det^droj, let some one come 
forward and show. 

2d. To combine the accompanying with the main ac- 
tion as the cause, manner, or means of accom- 
plishing it; in which use it is equivalent to the ablative 
gerund in Latin, as in the following examples : 

CAUSE; as, ti r.oi^aaq xareyvd)^ ftdvarov ; FOR HAVING 

done what (quid faciendo) vms he coyidemned to die? 

Means; as, euspyerwv adrobq £xrrj(Td/j.rjV <) I gained them 
by kindness {bene faciendo) ; \-qiZ6jxevoi ^axn>, they live 
by plunder (populando). 

Manner; as, (pebywv ix^euyet y he escapes by flight 

(fugiendo) ; roX/iyjear: eiirijk&e, he went in boldly (au- 

dendo). This construction is found also in Latin writers; 

17 



386 PARTICIPLE. 

thus, Soc faciens vivam melius, Hon. bg doing this I 
shall live better ; as if, hoc faciendo, &c. 

Note. — The participle thus used agrees with the agent in any case, 
e. g., in the dative; as, a role av& pconoic edoicav oi tieol {lafiovai 
(hafcplveiv, which the gods put it in ihe power of men to find out by study : 
the accusative; as, a e^earcv aptd-urjaavrac rj [lerpijaavrac rj iOTrjcavrag 
eidevai, which it is in our power to know by counting, or measuring, or 
weighing. 

3d. It may limit a general expression, by intimating the 
action in vespect of which the assertion is made; 

as, ddtxsZre TZoXijULOU apyovrtq, ye do wrong IN BEGINNING 

a war. 

4th. Let the pupil observe that the above varieties of 
renderiug are matters of English idiom, not affecting the 
construction of the Greek participle ;, as, Let ^some one 
coming forward, show. What doing, or {after) doing what 
was he condemned to death? Doing them kindness I 
gained them. ( While) fleeing he escapes. Observe also, 
carefully, the different tenses of the participle ; napeX^cbv, 
on coming forward, simply, corning forward as a fact ; 
Tzapepyotievoq, while coming forward «= being in the act of 
coming forward ; izapzh)\i>$(bq, having come forward. 
Thus, r( Tzotajv xarsyvwd-y], would be, while doing what icas 
he condemned = what was he doing when he was con- 
demned? r( noinJGaq zareyvCD&T}, doing, on doing what, 

&c. m what did he do for which he was condemned? 

Obs. 1. The participle then is used with verbs that sig- 
nify any emotion of the mind, to show the cause 
of the emotion; as, fjdo/xai fiiu a eltridwv, I am rejoiced 
at SEEING TOU ; ouS£7:ot£ (roc /i£TapLeA7J<j£L £0 izo itj aavr c, 
you will never repent of having* done a kindness. 

1101. — The participle, used predicatively , con- 
nects with the action of the verb some relation of time, 
cause, or condition, expressed in English by such 
words as when, w>hile, after that; — because, since, as; 



PARTICIPLE. 387 

—if, although, &c. ; — the relation intended, and of course 
he proper rendering of the participle, being ascertained 
Tom the nature of the sentence, or from the connection ; 
hus, £7Z£<rxe7TT6fjL7}y top iralpov vogoovto.^ I used to visit 
my comrade when, or because, he teas sick ; divdpa fiiv 

VfLy&iyra zayjajq <puezac, trees, THOUGH LOPPED (WHICH 
HAVE BEEN LOPPED, AFTER THEY HAVE BEEN LOPPED, 

— when lopped), quickly grow again. 

A&dpa TfiTjMvra may be either trees which have been 
lopped (attributive participle), or trees when or though 
lopped (predicative participle) ; zd divdpa zd z^Uvza is 
attributive (the trees which have been lopped} ; zd divdpa 
jxTjOivz a is predicative (the trees when or though lopped). 

Obs. 2. The participle with the article constitutes an 
independent subject in Greek, and should be rendered by 
a finite verb with the relative ; as, 6 ipzofteyos, he 
that cometh ; 6 zdbza ei-d)>;, the man that said these 
things; yiypdxrxco rdu ypd^avza ryv £-'.<rzoArjv, I know him 
who wrote (the man icho wrote) the letter ; r.epl zwv <peudo- 
\xiviDv, concerning those icho letter falsehood. 

Note. — The participle so constructed may sometimes be rendered in 
English, by a noun ; as, 6 narrp/opuv, the accuser ; 6 Sicjkqv, the prosecu- 
tor; 6 (pevyav, the defendant (lit, he who is accusing, prosecuting, &c). 
The pupil should early learn to render tin's familiar construction (the 
participle with the article) idiomatically, -and by all means avoid the 
seemingly literal and slavish he doing this, or even the one doing this t for 
he who does this, the man who does this (6 ravra ttomv), and the man who 
did this (6 ravra wotycac). 



The Participle for the Infinitive. 

1102. — The verb in Greek often takes its comple- 
ment with the participle instead of the infinitive^ 
which then takes its case, gender, and number according 
to that of the word with which it agrees. 



OQO 



888 PARTICIPLE. 

1103. — The following classes of verbs take as their 
complement the participle instead of the infiniA 
tive: 1. Verbs of sense ; as, to see, hear, &c. 2. Verbs 
denoting to know, perceive, learn, consider, experience ; to 
appear, show, remember, forget. 3. Verbs signifying to 
overlook, permit, happen / to persevere, bear, endure; to 
be pleased or contented with ; to begin, continue, cease, and 
cause to cease. The participle is then constructed 
like the adjuncts of the infinitive, which it repre- 
sents. 

1104:. — There arise then the following constructions : 

1. If the participle has the same stibject as its 
principal verb, it is attracted back to the case of 
the stibject of the verb ; as, Nominative, ob Kab<jot±ai 
Ypd(pwv, I shall not cease viriting ; olSa d-vrjrbq wv, T/know 
that I am a mortal ; Accusative, liyooGiv ab?d» pJ/ivrjG&cu 
KOLrjaavra, they say that he remembers having done it, or, 
that he did it. 

2. If the subject of the participle and that of its 
leading verb are different, the participle agrees 
with its own subject separately expyressed, whether (1) in 

the ACCUSATIVE — as, aawajq xarip^ad-ov cpdpfxaxa abrov 6jj.lv 
ly^iavra, I plainly perceived that he had poured in poison 
for you— or (2) in the Genitive or Dative — as, Geni- 
tive, rj<jd>6iiTjV abrwv oiopivajv eluac <TO(pwrdra)v, I perceived 
they thought that they were exceedingly wise / Dative, 
obdi7i<)T£ [xereiiikrjdi jjloc <ytyij(TavTt, I never repented of having 
been silent, 

3. If the verb is followed by a reflexive pronoun, 
the participle may agree either with the pronoun or 
the nominative to the verb; as, <jbvoida ipaurip 
d^aprdvwv or d/uLaprdvovrc, I am conscious that I am doing 

wrong l iaurov obde^q opoAoyel xaxoupyoq a>v, or xaxoupyov ovra, 

nobody confesses that he himself is wicked. 
\ 1105* — The participle is used, also, with adjec- 



PARTICIPLE. 389 

■ 

tives signifying clear, manifest; as, dr t Xo<; el coxoyav- 
rwv, it is clear that you are a sycophant. Sometimes ore 
with the indicative is used ; as, hd-qloq a>v ore rjendZero, by 
its being manifest that he loved (1095, Obs. 4). 

Obs. 3. Instead of the participle with these verbs, 
the infinitive may be used, but with a different 
\idea; as, 1. al(j%bvo[xai Koiyjcraz, I am ashamed to have 
done it ; aiayovofiai notr^ai, I am ashamed to do it, and 
therefore will not. 2. 6 yacfiwv yjp^aro yev6/j.evos (verb, the 
whiter commenced taking place), the winter was come 
on, had actually commenced ; 6 %eipLwv rjpyero yiyveaftai, the 
winter was beginning to come on, but had not yet arrived. 
3. Tj'/.oiHTa rod At]iioa^tv6uq Xiyovroq, I heard Demosthenes 
speak ; yxouva rbv ArjiioaMvrj Xiyeiv, I heard that Demosthe- 
nes spoke. 4. £<pai»£To xXatwv, he was evidently weeping ; 
i<paivero xkaiew, he seemed to be weeping. 5. With the 
verbs declare, announce, the participle repre- 
sents the thing announced as a fact, the infinitive, 
as matter of report, but not asserted as a fact. With 
many verbs it is indifferent which construction is used ; 
as, £b}i(pop6v lazt raura -payd-r^ai, or raura ^upapopd £(jrt 

TzpayMvza, it is advantageous that these things toere done. 

Obs. 4t. The future participle is often used with 
verbs to express purpose, design, and may be ren- 
dered "in order to y" as, dtdd^cov wpfirj^ai, I have has- 
tened forward IN" ORDER TO TEACH. 

Obs. 5. In this construction, ok is often interposed before 
the participle ; as, -apsaxeud^ovro cuq izoXefn/jaoxreq, they 
were preparing to make war. 

1106. — Sometimes the present participle is used 
in this way; as, Tzi/iirec p.e wipovra, he sends me to carry 
(lit., he sends me carrying). The futtire participle 
after k'pyojiat is only a circumlocution for the future tense ; 
as, epyofiai (ppdacov, for ippdau), I will speak l epyojia: dno&a* 
voujisvoq, I am about to die. 



390 PARTICIPLE. 

1107* — Joined with Xav&dvw, <p#d\>co^ ruyydva), dtareXiu), 

&c, the participle is used to express the main action 
or state, and is commonly rendered by a finite tense, 
while the verh 9 expressing a subordinate circumstance, 
is often rendered as an adverb / thus, eka&ev 6-ex- 
(pvywv, he escaped unperceived y rbv cpo^ia Xavftdvet ftoo-xtuv^ 
he unconsciously feeds the murderer (lie escapes notice 
feeding, &c.) yecpft-qv d<pe:Xd>^ I took it away just before ; 
eroyev amd)^ he went aioay accidentally ; eroyov Tzapovrzq, 
they were accidentally present, or, chanced to be present / 
ScareXel napcov, he is continually present. 

Note. — The participle &v is sometimes omitted ; as, rvyxavzi koXtj (sc, 
ovoa), she happens to he beautiful. With a negative, tydavo) may be ren- 
dered scarcely, no sooner ; as, ovk fy&rjoav Tzv$6pjevoi, they no sooner 
learned. Sometimes it is followed by the infinitive instead of the parti- 
ciple ; as, Trovnpbg av ty&aoeLE re/ievrTJaac rcpiv, k, t. A., a wicked man would 
sooner die than, &c. 

Obs. 6. In the same sense, these verbs stand sometimes 
in the participle with other finite verbs ; as, d-d retyeot; 
aXro Xa$(6v 7 he sprung unobserved from the vjall (lit., he 
leaped, escaping notice) ; fy-xep royydvajv bnzGydfirjv^ precise- 
ly which I happened to promise. 

1108. — A participle with the verbs efat, ytyvopat, 
xmdpyw, ££«>, and yjixw, is often used periphrastically for its 
verb, and these verbs take the place of auxiliaries; 
thus, T.po^e^rjxoreq 7j<rav for TzposjSeftrjxsto'av, they had gone 
forward ; yj t aaq eyst^ for eyy/ia^ you have married ; #au- 
[idaar; eyco for red-ao/iaxa, I have admired / y.rjpo^aq eya), 
I have proclaimed. Very frequent (especially in the Gos- 
pel of Luke and the Acts) is the imperfect of et/it with 
the participle ; as, dtddextov jyv, he teas teaching. 

Obs. 7. Instead of a simple verb signifying u to go 
away," the verb ol'yo/iai is frequently joined with a parti- 
ciple ; the former expressing the idea of departure, 
the latter that of manner, and both may generally be ren- 



PARTICIPLE. 391 

dered by a simple verb y thus, $%&? a-o~To.tj.zvoq^ he depart- 
ed flying, i. e., he flew away y c^-to ^euywv^ he departed 
fleeing, he escaped; &%ovto aTtaSiovreg, they ran away ; 
or^erai &a»wv, he is dead. Homer uses fiaivta in the same 
manner. 

1109. — In definitions of time 9 the participle often 
takes the (l<lvev})S auzUa, ebftuq^ pLera^u, a/xa ; as, ew#t>c .,_ 
yevofievor^ as soon as he was born; ew%q aTzo^e^xwq^im-'^ 
mediately on having landed ; pera-b dpbaamv, during the 
digging y pera-b deiTzvouvrei:, in the midst of supper ; apa 
nopeuo/iwo:, at the same time that they icere proceeding 
= while they were on the march. 

1110. — Certain participles take with other verbs a sort 
of adverbial use, or at least may often be best rendered 
adverbially in English ; as, apyope^oq elnov, I said in the 
beginning (when commencing) ; rel^urajv, at last , finally ; 
diafaizaiv ypovov, after some time (leaving a time between 
= after an interval of time). <±>ipwv and aywv, with verbs 
vhich signify to give, place, have a poetic usage for pur- 
poses of graphic fulness ; as, <pipu)v dwxe, he gave y — with 
verbs of motion, <p£pwv expresses zeal, quickness, &c. ; with 
their cases, zyw, <p£p(ov, la^&v^ are sometimes nearly equal 
to our with ; as, Ijkftev e/wv ulov, he came with (having) his 
son. 

For the dative of the participle with a personal 
pronoun after the verb lari, see 1017, Obs. 4. 

1111. — c £c with the participle expresses the idea of 
the participle as subjective, i. e., as belonging to the 
persons spoken of; as, ?Jyst wq eidcbq, he speaks as knowing 
= thinking that he knows. So commonly wq with the 
genitive absolute, Xiyet w^ toutwv ourwg £%6vTiav 9 he speaks 
on the ground that, as supposing that, or, as alleging that, 
this is so (kiyet^ toutojv ootcd^ lyovriDv, he speaks, these 
things being so, and because, or although they are so) ; are, 
as, expresses a causal meaning objectively = because that. 



392 THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 



THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 

1112. — Rule LXIL A substantive with a 
participle whose case depends on no other word, 
is put in the genitive absolute ; as, 

Oeod didovroq, obdkw layyst <p$6voq, WHEN God GIVES, 
envy avails nothing. 

Rem. — The genitive is said to be absolute, in this construction, because 
it stands independently in the sentence with which it is connected, and 
might be separated from it without affecting its construction. Of course 
it is in the genitive, because its use falls under some of the special catego- 
ries of the general signification of the genitive, as time, &c. ; as, 

JLvpov /3aGc?i£vovToc, in the reign of Gyrus. 

Qedyvvg o&^trai QecJv tielovruv, Theagnes is safe from the gods will- 
WG IT. 

Obs. 1. The participles of eljut, ytj/yofiai^ and some others, 
are sometimes omitted ; as, Ifiob pdvys, se. ovgtjs, I being 
alone. 

Obs. 2. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence^ 
as if it were a noun, is used absolutely with the parti- 
ciple ; as, izbp izveXv robg ravpojxq jiu&oXoy7]ftivTos, that bulls 
breathe fire, bei?ig related as a story. 

Obs. 3. The nominative and accusative are sometimes 
used absolutely. These instances arise from ellipsis, 
or are cases of anacolouthon. The accusative, how- 
ever, is so frequently found in the absolute use, that it 
may be regarded as normal; as, dvot-avreq rob o-w/iaroq 
izopooq, izdXcv yiverat to izbp, when they have opened the pores 
of the body, there again becomes fire ; raura ysvofxeva, these 
things being done. 

Obs. 4. The participles of impersonal verbs, and 
other verbs used impersonally, are put absolutely in the 
accusative neuter / as, Sfov, it being permitted ; Siov, 



CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 893 

it being necessary ; doxouv^ since it seems proper ; thus, 
dtd ri jiiuec^ i^ov amivat, ichy dost thou remain, it being 
in thy potter to depart? 

Obs. 5. Tlxis participial construction is often preceded 
by the particles «s, ware, are, ola, dr h olov, when a 
reason of something done by another is expressed ; wq 
expresses the reason subjectively, as held or alleged/ by 
the doev / as, l<ji(b-a <!><; -dvrcov eidoTwv, he was silent on 
the ground that all knew — this was the reason existing in 
his mind, or alleged by him, for being not silent ; not the 
reason as given by the speaker : are (oiov, o\a) gives the 
cause objectively (see 



CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

1113. — Conjunctions serve to connect words or 
sentences together ; this connection is of two kinds : 

1114. — (1.) Of the -parts of a sentence which are in 
themselves complete and independent, connected by 
conjunctions simply connective or disjunctive, as 
xai, d£, dXXd, <£jc. (2.) Those which are dependent, con- 
nected by el, &c. For the former, we may give this rule : 

1115. — Rule LXIII. Conjunctions unite 
sentences, and like parts of a sentence ; as, 

7jX{>ov xai eldov, they came and saw. 

rifia rov Tzaripa xai rr y v p^ripa, honor thy father and thy 
m other. 

Obs. 1. Although the moods, tenses, and cases united 
by conjunctions are by no means necessarily the same, yet 
the variation is confined within certain limits. There 
must be a certain correspondence in the parts brought 
together by a conjunction. 

11* 



394 CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

1116 • — For the construction of the conjunctive and 

adverbial particles alia, p.h, yap, &c, see 789, ff. 
That of the conjunctions el, kdv (^'y, av), and of the modal 
adverb «v, has been illustrated, 1070 and 1085, Obs. 7. 
We briefly recapitulate. 

1117* — The leading classes of conditional proposi- 
tions are four: two implying certainty, two implying 
doubt or uncertainty. The two former take the indie- 
ative, the two latter the subjunctive and optative* 
They are thus distinguished : 

1118. — Conditional Propositions. 

1. Implying actuality (affirming that it is). Any 
required Indicative Tense, with el in the protasis. 
Any required Indicative Tense or Imperative in the 
apodosis. 

2. Implying denial (affirming that it is not). A Past 
Indicative Tense, with ei in the protasis. A Past 
Indicative Tense, with & (mod. adv.) in the apodosis. 

Bern. — If the reference is to present or continued past time, the 
imperfect tense ; if to absolute past time, the aorist (rarely the pluper- 
fect), 

3. Implying doubt to be resolved. The Subjunctive 
with k'av (rjv, Sat) in the protasis. The Indicative Pres- 
ent, or Future, or Imperative in the apodosis. 

4. Implying pure uncertainty. The Optative with 
el in the protasis. The Optative with av in the apodosis. 

For illustration, see as above at 1070, 1085, and also at 
1147. 

1110* — Most familiar uses of some of the particles : — 

'Alia, but, however. 

* A pa, so then, soraetim.es/brsooth (scilicet), in irony. 

Kai, and, edso ; re — xai, both — and. 

Tap, for, often used elliptically, when it may best be 
rendered by English well or why (because our language 



ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 395 

often uses these particles for the same kind of ellipsis as the 
Greeks indicate by yap). 

Ai, and, but {continuative, and slightly disjunctive). 

Ar h now, you see, indeed, particle mainly of spirit, 
vivacity, and emphasis. t6ts Srj, then you see ; nou Sr h 
where now ? where, I pray ? 

Ti, at least, in particular ; restrictive and emphatic by 
restriction. 

Mh, concessive, to be sure, it is true, I grant ; never 
emphatic. (Exc. — Standing poetically for /^'v.) 

Myjv, moreover, in truth, surely / always emphatic. 

Elra, sTcetra, then (indeed), in the next place, afterwards. 
Elra is often a particle of toonder and indignant e?notion ; 

as, £/i,3p6';T7)-£ elra vuv Xiyetc ; idiot, THEN, do you NOW tell 

it to us ? 

1120* — The Greeks do not distinguish direct and 
indirect qtiestions, like the Latins, by different 
moods (Lat. Gr., 1182-9). In Greek, the direct ques- 
tion is usually made by the definite interrogative 

P(lVticle8 9 ~&S, -orepoc, -ore, ~oo, ~oT, -rpiza, rfe, &C. ; 
the indirect by ottqjz, 6- orepoc, 6tzqte, otzoo, o-koi, oizrjvUa, 
ocTtq, &c. But here there are many exceptions. 



-US*.— ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 

A sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes complete sense ; 
as, 6 av&poTTog here d-vvrog, man is mortal. 

All sentences are either simple or compound. 

A simple sentence contains only a single affirmation ; as, 6 (3iog kerl 
ppaxvc, life is short. 

A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences con- 
nected together ; as, &e6c kariv be izavra Kvfiepvg. 

1122.— Simple Sentences. 

A simple sentence or proposition consists of two parts — the subject 
and the predicate. 



896 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 

The subject is that of which something is affirmed. 

The predicate is that which is affirmed of the subject 

The subject is commonly a noun or pronoun, but may be any thing, 
however expressed, about which we can speak or think. 

The predicate properly consists of two parts— the attribute affirmed of 
the subj ect, and the copula, by which the affirmation is made ; thus, in 
the sentence, 6 Qe6c kcrtv ayadSc, the subject is 6e6c ; the predicate is 
horiv ayadoc, of which aya&oc is the attribute, and tariv the copula. In 
most cases, the attribute and copula are expressed by one word ; as, 
Ittttoc Tpkx ei i a horse runs. 836. 

The name of a person or thing addressed forms no part of a sentence. 

The predicate may be a noun, a pronoun, an adjective, a preposition 
with its case, an adverb, a participle, an infinitive mood, or clause of a 
sentence, as an attribute, connected with, and affirmed of, the subject 
by a copulative verb (963, Rem.)] or, it may be a verb which includes 
in itself both attribute and copula, and is therefore called an attributive 
verb, 

1123.— The Subject. 

The subject of a proposition is either grammatical or logical 

I. The grammatical subject is the person or thing spoken of, unlimited 
by other words. 

The logical subject is the person or thing spoken of, together with all 
the words or phrases by which it is limited or defined : thus, in the 
sentence, 6 [iklac olvog hart d-peirriK^raroc, the grammatical subject is 
olvoc • the logical, 6 /uelag olvog. Again: — 

II. The subject of a proposition may be either simple or compound. 

A simple subject consists of one subject of thought, either unlimited, 
as the grammatical, or limited, as the logical subject. 

A compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects, to which 
belongs but one predicate ; as, Zottp&TTjc nal 26Xcjv ao^ol yaav. 

1124.— Modifications of the Subject. 

A grammatical subject may be modified, limited, or described in 
various ways; viz., 1. By a noun in apposition. 2. By a noun in the 
genitive or dative. 3. By an adjunct, i. e., a preposition and its case. 
4. By an adjective word, L e., an article, adjective, adjective pronoun, 
or participle. 5. By a relative and its clause. 

Each grammatical subject may have several modifications ; and if it 
has none, the grammatical and logical subject are the same. 



ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 897 



1125.— Modification of Modifying Words. 

Modifying or limiting words may themselves be modified. 

1. A nonn modifying another may itself be modified in all the ways 
in which a noun, as a grammatical subject, is modified. 

2. An adjective qualifying a noun may itself be modified — 1. By an 
adjunct. 2. By a noun. 3. By an infinitive mood or clause of a sen- 
tence. 4 By an adverb. 

3. An adverb may be modified — 1. By another adverb. 2. By a sub- 
stantive in an oblique case. 



1126.— The Predicate. 

I. The predicate, like the subject, is either grammatical or logical. 
The grammatical predicate consists of the attribute and copula, not 

modified by other words. 

The logical predicate is the grammatical, with all the words or phrases 
that modify it ; thus, y {ledy [impa /uavla kcriv : the grammatical predi- 
cate is ,uavla koriv ; the logical, fitapa juavia kariv. 

When the grammatical predicate has no mcKlifying terms, the logical 
and grammatical are the same. 

II. The predicate, like the subject, is either simple or compound. 

A simple predicate affirms but one thing of its subject; as, 6 ftioc 

PpaXVC EGTLV ; ETTE-nVeOV ol CLVEflOL. 

A compound predicate consists of two or more simple predicates 
affirmed of one subject ; as, Kd Sfiog aizkurave rbv dpanovra, ml eonecpe 
rove bddvrag avrov. 



112 7.— Modifications of the Predicate. 

The grammatical predicate may be modified or limited in different 
ways. 

I. When the attribute in the predicate is a noun, it is modified — 1. 
By a noun or pronoun limiting or describing the attribute. 2. By an 
adjective or participle limiting the attribute. 

II. When the grammatical predicate is an attributive verb, it is mod- 
ified — 1. By a noun or pronoun as its object. 2. By an adverb. 3. By 
an adjunct. 4. By an infinitive. 5. By a dependent clause. 

1128, — Nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and other words modifying 



398 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 

the predicate, may themselves be modified, as similar words are when 
modifying the subject. 

Infinitives and participles modifying the predicate, may themselves 
be modified in all respects, as the attributive verb is modified. 

Compound Sentences. 

1129 . — A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sen- 
tences or propositions connected together. The propositions which 
make up a compound sentence are called members, or clauses. 

1130* — The propositions or clauses of a compound sentence are 
either independent or dependent ; in other words, co-ordinate or subor- 
dinate. 

An independent clause is one that makes complete sense by itself. 

A dependent clause is one that makes complete sense only in connec- 
tion with another clause. 

The clause on which another depends is called the leading clause ; 
its subject is the leading ^subject; and its predicate, the leading predi- 
cate. 

1131. — Clauses of the same kind, whether independent or dependent, 
are connected by such conjunctions as nal, re, v t , t/to.', &c. 

1132c — Dependent clauses having finite verbs are connected with 
their leading clauses in three different ways; as, 1. By a relative. 2. 
By a conjunction. 3. By an adverb. 

1133. — A subordinate clause, consisting of an infinitive with its 
subject, is joined to a leading clause without a connecting word. 



Abridged Propositions. 

1134:. — A compound sentence is sometimes converted into a simple 
one, by rejecting the connective, and changing the verb of the depend- 
ent clause into a participle. A simple sentence thus formed is called 
an abridged proposition ; as, SieX-&G)v Se Qpgicqv, tjkev etc Qyflac, and having 
gone through Thrace, he came to Thebes = knetdr) 6e dcy/ide Opgnrjv, 7?k£v elg 
Oyftag. 



EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS. 399 



rr 



1135.— EXAMPLES OF ANALYSIS. 

1. — e (pufioq rod Kupiuo £<tt\v ap'/r\ rrjq cocpiac, the fear of 
the Lord is the beginning of icisdom. 

This is a simple sentence, of which — 

The logical subject is 6 tidfiog rov Kvpiov. 

The logical predicate is egtIv apxv rrjg Godlag. 

The grammatical subject is <po{3og, show n to be definite by the article 6, 

and restricted by rov Kvpiov. 
he grammatical predicate is kariv apxv, of which kariv is the copula, 

and op xv the attribute, restricted by rfjg aocpiag. 



2. r 'Hpax?^s to po-aXov, o ly>6pei, avroq ereftev £x Ne/iia^ 
Hercules himself cut, from the forest of Nemea, the 
club which he was accustomed to carry. 

This is a compound sentence, consisting of one leading, and one de- 
pendent clause, connected by the relative b. 

The leading clause, 6 'RpaK/fjg to p6na?u)v avrog etejuev ek "Nefieagj is a 
simple sentence, of which 

The logical subject is 6 ( B.paK/.?jg avrog. 

The logical predicate is eteuev ek 'Ns/LtEag to poiratov. 

The grammatical subject is 'KpaK/jg, shown to be definite by the article 
6, and rendered emphatic by the intensive pronoun avrog. 

The grammatical predicate is eteuev, modified by its object to po7ra?jov y 
and by the adjunct ek ^s/LtEag. 

The dependent clause is 6 Epopee, of which — 

The logical subject is the pronoun understood, a substitute for 'KpaKAyg. 

The logical predicate is o E^opsc. 

The grammatical subject is the same as the logical. 

The grammatical predicate is ErEfiEv, modified by its object o, standing 
instead of poira/jov, and, being a relative, it is the object of the 
verb, and also connects its clause with the leading clause 
11* 



400 SYNTACTICAL PARSING. 



1I36.-SYNTACTICAL PARSING. 

These two sentences, thus analyzed, may be parsed syntactically in 
the following manner : 

First Example. — c (p6fto<; rod Kopioo Igt\v dp%rj r9jq <?o<pias. 

f O, the, the definite article, in the nominative singular, masculine, agree- 
ing with (p6[3og, and showing it to be definite. Rule, "The 
article agrees," &c. (905), declined thus, 6, y, r6, &c. 

<t>6/3og, fear, is a noun, masculine, second declension, tyofioc;, -on. It is 
found in the nominative singular, the subject of eotiv. " The 
subject of a finite verb is put in the nominative," 956, Rem. 

rov, of the, the definite article, genitive singular, masculine, agreeing 
with Kvplov, and showing it to be definite. Rule, as before, 
905. 

Kvpiov, Lord, is a noun, masculine, second declension, Kvpiog, Kvpiov. 
It is in the genitive singular, governed by 6 (j>6/3og, which it 
limits. Rule V. (982), "One substantive governs another," 
&c. 

iarivj is, is a verb, intransitive, irregular, elpi, eaopac, rjv, root e. It 
is found in the present indicative, third person singular, and 
' agrees with its subject (pofioc.. Rule IV. (956), "A verb 
agrees," &c. 

apxv, ihe beginning, is a noun, feminine, first declension, apxv, rVG, &c. 
It is found in the nominative singular, the predicate after 
eartv, its copula, and is therefore without the article, 911. 
Rule VI. (963), "Any verb," &c. 

rf/Q (not translated), the definite article, in the genitive singular, femi- 
nine, agreeing with ao^iaq, an abstract noun, 910. Rule, 
"The article agrees," &c. (905). 

oo<j>lac, of wisdom, a noun, feminine, first declension, cotyia, ~ag. It is 
found in the genitive singular, governed by apxv, which it 
limits. Rule V. (982), "One substantive governs another," 
&c. 

SECOND Example. — e 'HpaxXrjq to ponalov, 8 £<p6p£t^ aOTos 
£T£/i£w £x Ns/iiaq, — construed thus : c l Hpaxkrjq olutos 

erefiev £x N£fiia^ to ponaXov 8 tyopet. 

'O (not translated), the definite article, in the nominative singular, mas- 



SYNTACTICAL PARSING. 401 

culine, agreeing with 'HpciK/J/c, definite, 908. Rule, " Thfc 
article," &c. (905), declined, 6, ?), to. &c, 256. 

'Hpa/cA7/r, Hercules, contracted for *H.patOIr]c (225), a proper noun, mas- 
culine, third declension, 'Hpa/c/^c, -eoc, contr. -ovc. It is found 
in the nominative singular, the subject of ereuei'. u The sub- 
ject of a finite verb is put in the nominative," 956, Bern. 

avrdc, himself, a definite adjective pronoun, avToc, y, 6, 341. It is found 
in the nominative singular, masculine, and agrees with f H/>a/c- 
/J/c, rendering it emphatic. Rule II., "An adjective agrees," 
&c, 858 and 883. 

Ite/iev, cut, is a verb, transitive, first conjugation, liquid, teuvo, to cut. 
It is found in the second aorist indicative active, third person 
singular, and agrees with 'Hpan/j'/c. Rule IV., " A verb 
agrees," &c. An irregular form for erafie. See the word, 
686. Give the tenses of the different parts. 

£k, from, is a preposition atonic (?£ before a vowel), out of from, and 
governs ^ss/ueac. 

IXejLteac, the forest of Nemea (without the article, being the first mentioned), 
a proper noun, feminine, first declension, 'Se/iea, ac. It is 
found in the genitive singular, governed by £/c Rule XLYIII., 
"'Avr/, cltto, kkj or ef," &c. (1055.) 

t6, the, the definite article, 6, y, to. It is found iti the accusative singu- 
lar, neuter, agrees with p6-a/.ov, and shows it to be definite. 
Rule, "The article agrees," &c. (905.) 

}>6ira/iov, club, is a noun, neuter, third declension, porra/Mv, poTzaAov. It 
is found in the accusative singular, the object of, and governed 
by, ete/llev. Rule XXV., "A transitive verb," &c. (1025). It 
is limited by the relative clause following it. 

5, which, the relative pronoun, eg, y, b. It is found in the accusative 
singular, neuter, agreeing with its antecedent poizaAov. Rule 
III., " The relative agrees," &c. (928). It is governed in the 
accusative by eoopei. Rule XXV., U A transitive verb," &c. 
(1025); it connects its clause with poiza7jn>, and limits it. 

kfpopec, was accustomed to carry (411, Obs. 2), is a verb, transitive, first 
conjugation, pure, oopeo, to carry, kindred to dipo, to bear. 
Root, oope (46*1). It is found in the imperfect indicative active, 
third person singular, contracted for kyopee, and agrees with 
its nominative avToq understood, referring to 'fLpan/tfc. Rule 
IV., " A verb agrees," &c. (956). 



402 PEACTICAL EXERCISES. 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

1137* — 'E7r« de Tjo&hst, Aapelog teal v7r6rrTeve re?^evr^v tov piov, 
kj3ov?i£To to) rralSe dfi^orefzo) rrapslvai, But when Darius was sick, and ivas 
apprehending an end of his life, he wished {was wishing) the two boys to be 
both present. 

'E7re/ ? when, referring to a point or stage in the course of events ; ore, 
at the time when. 

'H.a&£vei, vTTUTTreve, efiovlero, all imperfect, not aorist, expressing a con- 
tinuance of the act or state, not the mere fact absolutely. 

Ae is either but or and, slightly adversative, but not sufficiently so in 
general to make the rendering and inappropriate. 

'H.cr&€vei precedes Aapelog because it is emphatic. Aapelog has oc- 
curred in the preceding sentence; the thought to be added is now that 
which is uppermost in the writer's mind, and the word which expresses 
it takes the first place after the introductory particles ; as if we should 
tender unidiomatically "But when was sick Darius," or, after our homely 
English idiom, "But when he was sick, Darius." So also vttottteve and 
epovfaro stand first in their respective clauses, because the thought 
which they express rose sooner and more prominently in the mind of 
the writer than that of the complementary parts of the clause. 

As a general rule, in Greek the emphatic words of a clause precede 
the unemphatic, except when, for special rhetorical purposes, the em- 
phatic word is thrown over to the end of the clause or sentence. Thus, 
in to) Tralds ajLKporEpo, not, "both his boys to be present," but, "his boys 
both to be present," the idea of ra rcalde is prior to that of afifyoTEpo, 
which comes in as a sort of afterthought, intensifying the idea already 
expressed by the dual noun. So in Dem. de Cor., 'Ercs'ira rj TLeIoitovvi]- 
cog arzaaa dtEicrfjUEi, not, in the next place, all the Peloponnesus was distract- 
ed (as if it were anaaa rj IleA.), but, The Peloponnesus loas all (airaaa, the 
whole of it) distracted. In both these cases the noun stands first, as 
expressing the leading idea. The modifying epithets, ajutioTEpD, airaaa, 
which, grammatically, might equally well have preceded, rhetorically 
properly follow, and should follow in the translation. 

1138, — 01 de ravra anovaavrEg avroi rs fjoav ttoXv Trpo&ofiorEpoL, nal 
rolg aAAoig E^r/yye/ikov. J&arjeoav de Trap' avrov ol te arparrjyoX aa\ t&v 
aKkuv ^Xkrjvuv riveg, a^covvreg eidevai ri otyioiv karat, kav KpaT^aaxJiv y 
And they, on hearing these things (or, this), were both themselves much 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 403 

more zealous, and carried out the news to the rest And there kept coming 
in unto him both the generals, and certain of the rest of the Greeks, request- 
ing to know what (advantage) shall accrue to them if they conquer. 

01 6e, and they. r O 6e, oi 6e, at the beginning of a sentence or clause, 
implies a change of subject, also, with a little emphasis ; ravra 6e clkov- 
aavreg would be, and on hearing these things, they, &c., with no emphasis 
whatever on the they. 

cLKJOvorvTer, while hearing. 

anTjuobreg, having heard. 

anovoavreg, hearing, upon hearing, after hearing, when they heard. 

avroi re, both themselves, is contrasted with nal role; aAMug. 

bXhjoi, others. 

ol a)2x)L, the rest (coiteri). 

ayye?Jveiv, announce. 

aizayye/j£iv, announce back, bring back word, report. 

E^ayye/JiSLv, carry ward out, as from a house or tent. 

7rapayye?i/ieiv, issue orders to. 

e^rjyyeXAjov, imperftct ; they ivent to, were carrying out the nevjs ; the 
act is represented as continuous. So eioyecav, imperfect, were, kept 
entering in for some time. 

Trap' avrov (not irpbg avrov, strictly to him personally, but), to where he 
was (viz., in his tent). Thus, TropevofiaL irpbg rbv it are pa, I go to my 
father (ad patrem) ; izopevouac Trapd rbv rrarepa, I go to my father's (apud 
patrem, chez mon pere). 

a^covvreg, deeming proper, hence, claiming, requesting; present partici- 
ple, not aorist, a^tcjaavreg, because, like the verb elayeoav, it expresses a 
contiuuous series of acts, not a single request. 

1139 • — Ovroy dy r/avx^airepog fiev rjv, ev 6e ralg awovacaig ird/nrav 
kwixapig rjv, Thus, you see (Srj), he was more quiet, to be sure (fJ-ev), but in 
their companies he was exceedingly charming. 

114:0, — 'Idovreg 6e rbv aorepa, hxaprjcav, And on seeing the star, they 
rejoiced.. 

Not, while seeing (opojvreg), nor, having seen (eopanoreg), but, (a), upon 
seeing, or (as in English ver.), (b), when they saw, or, (c), u and they saw the 
star and rejoiced." But while the latter is often a good way to render 
the aorist participle, here (a) or (b) is preferable. Observe that idovreg 
precedes aarepa, as being in this clause the leading idea. In the pre- 
ceding sentence, the stojr is reintroduced as appearing to guide the 
Magi ; here, they saw it. 



404 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

114:1, — At la/nradec f}[iG)v ofievvwrcu. Our lamps are going out, becom* 
ing extinguished, not, gone out, which would require the perfect. So 
Mt. 8, 24, GXJre to rrTiolov naTivTrreadaL vrrb rcdv kvu&tcjv, so that the ship 
was becoming covered (KaXvTrTec&ai), not, was covered (Kahvftrjvai) by the 
waves. 

114:2* — f O de /not to fiev TrpojTov ovd" hirenpivaTO, But he, at the first 
indeed, did not even reply to me. 

Observe that 6 de, but he, and he, is freely used in narrative, com- 
mencing a sentence, but regularly changes the subject from that last pre- 
ceding. If it were aneKpivaTo de, but he answered, the subject would 
naturally (though not necessarily) be the same as in the preceding. 

irpcjTov, first (primum). 

to TzpuTov, at the first (primo). 

TzpuTov [lev, in the first place (first indeed), in a logical enumeration. 

t6 [iev rcpoiTov, at the first indeed, the same as to irp&Tov, except as 
pointing forward by the juev to some contrasted course pursued afterwards. 

ovde, properly and not, nor, regularly follows a preceding negative; 
as, oh tovto ovde enelvo, not this, nor that, just as aai follows a preceding 
affirmation, tqvto nal eneivo, this and that. Regularly, therefore, neither 
ovde nor nai would stand, except in a second clause ; but by an ellipsis 
of the first they may both stand in the sense, the latter (nai) of ev en, 
also, the former (ovde) of not even; thus, "he did not do any thing else, 
nor did he answer;" with ellipsis of the first negative, the second 
stands alone, " he did not even answer." 

1143, — n Hv drj ael nal vvv Itl e% eneivov icar' eviavrbv r<p #e<p Trefnrov- 
civ, Which you see always even now still from that time, year by year, they 
send for the god. 

drj, you see, you know ; aei, always, continually j nal vvv, even now ; Itl 
still; naf eviavrdv, annually, year by year; lit., according to the year. 

1144, — To /y.e/LLvyo'&ai ZonpaTovc, nal avTov "keyovra, nal aXkov clkov- 
ovTa, efiotye ael Travruv ijdiGTov, To call to mind Socrates, both while speak- 
ing myself, and hearing from another, is to me at least always the most 
delightful of all things. 

Observe to juefiv7jo"&at, subject; nai — nai, commonly both — and; avTov, 
emphatic, self; leyovTa, anovovra, complementary participles to nefivrjc- 
&at, expressing the means or manner of the /nejavf/ad-ac. 

1143, — Tig de aXXog irapijv, But who else was present f 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 405 

> 

* A)Jkoc 6e ric rrapyv, But ivas any one else present ? 

"Etvxov 6e rtvsc Tzapayevofievoi (rhetorical inversion for rivet; 6e erv- 
Xov), But who chanced to be present? 

114:6. — 1>x^ ov TL olfiai rovrovc izapayEVEG^at, I think that pretty 
nearly these were present = / think thai these were about all that were 
present. 

gx^ov, ax^ov n, about, pretty nearly, different from b/uyov 6eIv, 
almost, which latter definitely limits the statement, while the former 
simply declines to guarantee it ; ml gx^ov ev alfiarc irdvra Ka&api^erai 
Kara rbv vduov, and pretty much, as one might say (not, as in English ver., 
almost), all things according to the law are cleansed in blood. 

1147* — Et ravra Xeyet, ipevderai, If he says this, he utters a falsehood. 

El ravra \e%ei, xpEVGErai, If he shall say this, he will utter a falsehood. 

El ravra eXe^/ev, EibEvdsro av, If he said (were saying) this, he would be 
uttering falsehood. 

Et ravra e/x^ev, ETpsvGaro av, If he had said this, Tie would have uttered 
falsehood. 

'Edv ravra tet-qg, ipEVGn, If you say this (shall have said this), you will 
utter falsehood. 

El ravra "Kk^at, ipEVGatro av, If he should say this, he would utter false- 
hood. 



406 PROSODY. 



PART FOURTH. 
PROSODY. 



114:8* — Prosody, in its common acceptation, treats 
of the quantity of syllables and the construction of verses; 
in other words, of Quantity and Metre* In the an- 
cient grammarians, izpoawSLa applies to accents. 

QUANTITY. 

114:9* — Quantity means the relative length of time 
taken up in pronouncing a syllable. 

1150. — In respect of quantity 9 every syllable is 
either long or short. A syllable is long either by 
nature or by position. It is long by nature if it has a 
long vowel or diphthong ; as, wde, o£r<5c, <l>uyri ; it is long 
by position if it has a short vowel before two consonants, 
or a double consonant / as, rdrrw^ ££w. A vowel whose 
quantity is not fixed, but which may represent either a 
long or short sound, is called a double-timed or 
doubtful vowel. 

1151. — The quantity of syllables is determined in 
many cases by established laws ; when no such law can be 
discovered, by the authority of the poets. 

1152. — In Greek, the quantity of certain vowels is 
determined as follows : — 

1. The vowels e, o, are naturally short; as, l^jotxlv. 



BGSIMON. 407 

2. The vowels ^, co, are naturally long; as, AtjtQ. 

3. The vowels a, c, w, are doubtful, i. e., they represent 
either the long or the s/ior£ sounds of the vowels a, £, u\ 
thus they stand either for a, r, u, or for a, F, w. 

4. Diphthongs and contracted syllables are long; as, 
hit, 6fhq, contracted da>isJ* 

POSITION. 

Special Rules. 

1133, — Rule I. A syllable with a long vowel or 
diphthong is of course long ; but a syllable with a short 
vowel before two consonants is also long, although the 
vowel itself remains short / as, 

TZokXdc, — ~poid<I ! sV) = cure Zsu<z. 

Hfoc. — A short or doubtful vowel before a mute and a 
liquid, makes the syllable common,!, e., it may be either 
long or short / as, IJdrpbxXoc, or UdrpdxXoc. 

Obs. 1. With, the middle mutes (fi, y, (5) this rule applies only when 
followed by p ; when followed by /,, fi, v, the syllable is regularly long ; 
as, jSt/fto?, rayua, never plp.o^ ray/ua. 

Obs. 2. A short vowel before two liquids makes a long syllable, and 
sometimes before a single liquid, which is then doubled in pronuncia- 
tion, as the liquids easily are ; thus, £?.a3e, pronounced DjxlSe. 

Note 1. A final short vowel in the end of a word, before initial p, is long 
in the dramatic poets ; as, eu£ psw&v = kfieppeirov. 

Note 2. We very rarely find a short syllable before two mute conso- 
nants. 

* In the Prosody the accents are omitted, as they often interfere 
with the mark for the quantity. 



403 PROSODY. 



ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 

1154:. — Rule II. A doubtful vowel before another 
vowel is usually short, unless lengthened by poetic license ; 

as, TZoXvatxoq. 

Exceptions. 

1. a is long in the penult of nouns in acov, aovog ; as, Mcjaw, Mo^ao- 

vog. And sometimes when the genitive ends in ovog ; 
as, TiooEidduv, Hocetdaovog. 
" " feminine proper names in dig) thus, Oak. 

2. i i3 long in the penult of nouns in tov ) lovog, and sometimes lovog; 

as, QploVj Qplovog or Qplovog ; except xitov. 
" " the penult of verbs in to ; as, rlo; but the Attic tragic 

writers have -to. 

3. lis common in tne penult of nouns in ta and ljj ; as, Kakla and na?ua. 

4. v is common in the penult of verbs in vo • as, loxvo) or laxvo. 

1155. — Rule III. Long vowels and diphthongs are, 
in the poets (unless under the rhythmical accent), mostly 
treated as short at the end of words, when the next word 
begins with a vowel; as, 

*A£u) e Xov 6 ds j xev xe^o\Xo<7£Tal 6y xtv i xofiai, 

t 

Obs. 1. A vowel in the end of a word, before a word beginning with 
a vowel, does not suffer elision, as in Latin, unless an apostrophe is 
substi luted (46). 

Obs. 2. Two vowels, forming two syllables, frequently in poetry 
coalesce into one; as, ^pwrtcj, II. d. 15, where eo form a short syllable. 
This frequently takes place, though the vowels be in different words ; 
as, JTovk (Mug, II. e. 349. 



DOUBTFUL VOWELS. 409 



THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FIRST 
AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES. 

1156. — Rule IV. A doubtful vowel before a 
■simple consonant is short; as, xaxos. 

Exceptions. 

1. a is long in nouns in af.i(jv, avu(\ apoy, as, iredoSd/Lcov, dydvo)p 1 

juvGapog. 
" " numerals in oaiog ; as, SiaKomag. 

" " derivatives from verbs in aco pure, and pau ; thus, 

avtdrog, from avtao) ; laoijuoc, from iaojicu ; aarapdrog, 

from Karapaofiaij -&Earyg and #£a#«, from fteaofiai; 

Tcspdai/iog, from izepdco^ Tcpdaig, from (jrurpaonu for) 

'updo). 

2. * is long in the penult cf nouns in m;, £777, ^-n?^ mq thus, ^77, 

' ' A(ppo6lrr} 1 7to7JL7rig, TzoTurtg. 
" " the penult of verbs in */fo, mj ; thus, rpi^a, ttIvo • so 

also klvecj, dlvecj, &c. 

3. v is long in verbals in v/m, v/iog, vrrjp, vrog, vrop ; as, /Uy/a, xv^og, 

pvrcop. 
11 u pronouns ; as, 'v/lleic. 

11 " the penult of verbs in vvu, vpco, vjg), vpu; as, 7rAwG>, 

tcvpo, fipvxo, (pvf.11, ^evyvv/M. 
" " adverbs in vdov'j as, fiorpvdov. 



THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL 

SYLLABLES. 

1157* — Rule V. a, <, 6>, in the end of a word, are 
short ; as, fiouaa^ p.eXi^ yXuxu. 

Exceptions, 

1. A in the end of a v/ord is long, viz,, 

In nouns in ea, 6a, da • as, #ca, Aydd, Map#«; 8XC. cecav&a. 
In the dual number ; as, irpo^rd, uovcd. 
18 



410 PROSODY. 

In polysyllables in aia ; as, ILzhjvaia. 

In polysyllables in eia, derived from verbs in evw, as, dovleia, fiacL- 
fata, from dov7xvid, j3am?uevGk But j3aaiAeid, a queen, has the final a 
short. 

In ia; as, na?ud, except verbals in rpiaj as, ipaXrpid ] and Sid, fita 

TTOTVld. 

In the vocative of nouns in ag of the first declension ; as, Alveid, 
from Alveiag. 

In feminines from adjectives in og-, as, 6/wid, yperepd. 

In nouns in pa not preceded by a diphthong; as, yuepd, xvpd. 
Except aynvpd, ye<pvpd, Kspftvpd, oAvpd, cjKoAoTzevdpd, crtyvpd, ravaypd, and 
compounds of psrpoj; as, yecoperpd. 

In poetic vocatives ; as, UaAAd, for UaAAag . 

2. i fiual is long in the names of letters ; as, ttI. 

3. v final is long in the names of letters; as, pv, vv. 

11 " verbs in xyii ; as, k(pv. 

" .'" pera^v and ypti. 



llSSo — Rule VI. A doubtful vowel in the 
syllable? followed by a simple consonant, is short ; as, 

Exceptions. 

1. av is long in masculines; as, Tirdv; and izdv, when not in compo- 
sition. 
" accusatives when their nominatives are long; as, 

Alvsidv, from Alveiag. 
" adverbs ; as, ayav. 
2 cp in /ca/? and ij>dp is long ; in yap it is either long or short. 

3. af is long in nouns of the first declension; as, Alveiag, povadg. 
in words having avrog in the genitive ; as, rvipdg, rvijjav- 

rog. 
also in ypdg, vpdg, Kpag. 

4. iv is long in nouns in iv which have ivog in the genitive; as, 
p7jyp.iv, priypvivog. 

u in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 

tive ; as, clkt'iv, or aicTig. 
" also in r)///>, t^'v. ' 



u 



a 



u 



it 



DOUBTFUL VOWELS. 411 

5. ig is long in monosyllables; as, ~/Zg\ but tlie indefinite tlq is com- 
mon. 
u " nouns which have two terminations in the nominative ; 



aS, CLKTLC, GK7LV. 



it 



" feminine dissyllables in ig, i<5oc, or t&og ; as, fcvq/ilg, 
Kvqfudog] bpvig, bpvcd-oc] except aomg, kntg, x a P^i 
and a few others. 
" M polysyllables preceded by two short syllables; as, 

6. w is long in nouns which have wog in the genitive ; as, pooavv, 

IMGGWOg. 

w " nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 

tive; as, Qopxvc, or oopavv. 
" " accusatives from vg in the nominative ; as, 6<ppvv, from 

bopvg. 
" in the ultimate of verbs in vfii ; as, e<pijv 1 from <pvuc. 
" in jw, now ; but in jw, enclitic, it is short 

7. i'p in the end of a word is always long; as, juaprvp. 

8. vg is long in monosyllables ; as, five. 

" " nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 

tive; aS, QOOKVC, OOpKW. 

" nominatives which have wrog or og pure in the geni- 
tive ; as, SeiKvvCj dsLavwrog ; bopvg, b(ppvog. 
" in ko^vc, KG)uvtrog' : and 
11 in the last syllables of verbs in vim ; as, £<pvg. 






u 






DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INCRE- 
MENT OF NOUNS. 

1159. — Rule VII. The quantity of the nomina- 
tive remains in the oblique cases ; thus, T^rdv, Tt-dvoz ; 
TcvJifiiq^ zvrjpLidog. 

Exceptions. 

1. vp in the nominative shortens the crement; as, fiaprvp, fiaprvpog. 

2. A vowel long by position, in the nominative, shortens the crement 
in the oblique cases; as, av/,a^ av/.anog. But nouns in a£ after a vowel 
have the crement long; as, veaSj, veaKog. 



412 PROSODY. 

Likewise dcopa^ lepa^ kvoSg^ Kopdag, Tiappa^ ola^ pa£, acp^a^ tievat;, 
with many words in tip, tnog, and tL lyog, or img ; to which add ypwjj, 
yvip, and generally BefSpvg, docdvt;, bprv^ aavdv^. 

3. og pure in the genitive, from a long syllable in the nominative, 
varies the crement; as, dpvg, dpvog, or Spvog. 

4. The dative plural, after a syncope, has the penult short; a3, 
*rarpa(7i, avtipaoi. 



DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INFLEC- 
TION OF VERBS. 

The rules for these have generally been given in the body of the 
work, and need not be repeated here. As a general rule, the doubtful 
vowels, of course, are short, where no special reason exists for being 
long ; as, ervipd, rerixpa. Of course, where Consonants have fallen away 
(as, 7i£?ioiTTaac 1 for XeTionravai j deinvvvai, for 6eiKvwGi) ) they are long. 



Special Rules for Verbs in fit. 

1160. — Rule VIII. The proper reduplication i3 
short, unless made long by position; as, riti-yfii. The 
improper reduplication is common ; as, ^hj/ic or ^^f. 

1161* — Rule IX. «, except before <ra or <n, is every- 
where short; as, ftfra/zsv, fa-rare. 

1162. — Rule X. o is long in polysyllables, only in 
the singular of the indicative active • everywhere else it 
is short; as, dscxvujy.L^ detxvoGt, decxvvra)^ decxvo/itai^ &C. 

» 11G3» — In dissyllables, it is everywhere long; as, dvfii, Svtov, dD- 
fiat, &c. 

DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 

1164. — Rule XI. Derivatives follow the quantity 
of their primitives ; and compounds, that of the simple 
words of which they are composed ; as, 



FEET. 4±3 

Tt/i7j — ari/uog, btiorifiog, Tl/uavup, &c. 

Tidog — AaofiedoVj M.eve%dog 1 &c. 

Avo, Avgg) — Xvoavdpog, ?„v<7iKaKog, &c. 

ota£ } OidKog—-oldnoGTpooog 1 oiaKOVOfiog, &c. 

Trvp — TcvpavoTTjg, irvpoopog, &c. 

pig or piv — pivrfkaTzu, noAAvpivogj &c. 

1165. — Rule XII. a privative before two short syl- 
lables is frequently long from the necessities of the verse ; 

as, axatxaroq. 



1166, — Also cvv in composition is sometimes long; as, gw>lt)[ii. 



FEET. 

A foot, in metre, is composed of two or more syllables strictly regu- 
lated by time, and is either simple or compound. Of the simple feet 
four are of two, and eight are of three syllables. There are sixteen 
compound feet, ^ach of four syllables. These varieties are as follows : — ■ 



-Z1G7.— Simple Feet of two Syllables. 



Pyrrhic 


>*- ' v_^ $eog. 


Spondee 


TV7TTGJ. 


Iambus 


•w — Aeyo. 


Trochee 


— w ocofia. 



1168.— Simple Feet of three Syllables. 



Tribrach 


^ ^ w 


'KoAefiog, 


Molossus 





evx^Aij. 


Dactyl 


v_^ > 


fidpTvpog. 


Anapaest 


>^ W 


fiaclTxvg. 


Bacchius 


N»^ 


eizTJrfjg. 


Antibacchius 


« ' 


deiKvvfu, 


Amphibrach 


vw — W 


Tl&TJpZ. 


Amphimacer 


— w — 


deinvvTV, 



414 PROSODY. 



1169.— Compound Feet of Four Syllables. 

Choriambus — >— ^ — ctipocvvfj a trochee and an iambus. 

Antispast ^ ^ auapTTJfia an iambus and a trochee. 

Ionic a majore — ' ^ KoofifjTopa a spondee and a pyrrhic. 

Ionic a minore ^ ^ — ■ — ttIsovekttjc a pyrrhic and a spondee. 

First Paeon — .w w ^ aorpoT^yoc a trochee and a pyrrhic. 

Second Paeon ^ — ^ w ava^toc an iambus and a pyrrhic. 

Third Paeon w w — w avadfjfia a pyrrhic and a trochee. 

Fourth Paeon — ' w ^. — BZoyevrjc a pyrrbic and an iambus. 

First Epitrite ^ afiaprtilrj an iambus and a spondee. 

Second Epitrite — w avdpb<f>ovTf}q a trochee and a spondee. 

Third Epitrite ^ — evpvad-Evrjc a spondee and an iambus. 

Fourth Epitrite ^ 7uo/3^rfjpa a spondee and a trochee. 

Proceleusmatic w w . w w izb'Xe^ubc two pyrrhics. 

Di spondee cvvdovTievcti two spondees. 

Diiambus ^ — w — emararri^ two iambi. 

Ditrochee — w — w dvGTvxvf^a two trochees. 



OF METRE. 

1170. — Metre, in its general sense, means an arrangement of sylla- 
bles and feet in verse, according to certain rules; and in this sense 
applies not only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or to any 
number of verses. A metre, in a specific sense, means a combination of 
two feet (sometimes called a syzygy), and sometimes one foot only. 

Note. — The distinction between rhythm and metre is not entirely easy 
to state. In general, rhythm refers to movement, or the alternation of 
long and short syllables so as to produce a harmonious succession of 
syllables. Metre refers to the recurring of these rhythms at fixed or 
definite intervals ; so that, given a specific rhythm, we may have a variety 
of metres ; given a specific metre, we may have a variety of rhythms, as 
Iambic, 'Trochaic, Anapaestic, dimeter, trimeter, &c. Metre, however, is 
employed in a general sense to embrace the idea of rhythm. 



DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE. 415 



THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE. 

117 1, — Metre, in the general sense, is divided into nine species: — 

1. Iambic. 4. Dactylic. 7. Ionic a majore. 

2. Trochaic. 5. Choriambic. 8. Ionic a minore. 

3. Anapaestic. 6. Antispastic. 9. Paeonic or Cretic. 

These names are derived from the feet which prevail in them. Each 
species was originally composed of those feet only from which it is 
named; but others, equal, or nearly equal, in time, were afterwards 
admitted under certain restrictions. 

It often happens that two species, totally dissimilar, are united in the 
same verse, which is then termed Asynartetes. When the irregularity 
is great, and it cannot be reduced to any regular form, it is called Poly- 
schematistic or anomalous. 

Note. — The invention or frequent use of any species of metre by a 
particular poet, or its use in some particular civil or religious ceremony, 
3r appropriation to some particular subject or sentiment, has caused 
iertain kinds of verse to receive other names than those specified above. 
Thus,' we have the Asclepiadean, Glyconian, Alcaic, Sapphic, and others ; 
named from the poets Asckpiades, Glycon, Alcams, Sappho, Phalcecus, 
Sotades, Archilochus, Alcman, Pherecrates, Anacreon, Aristophanes, &c. 
So also the Prosodiacus (from TzpSoodoc ), so called from being used in 
the approach to the altars on solemn festivals ; and the Parcemiac, a 
kind of verse much used in proverbs (Trapoiulai). 

1172, — In the iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, a metre con- 
sists of two feet ; in the others, of one only. 

117 S* — A verse is further characterized by the number of metres 
(in the specific meaning of the term) which it contains, as follows : — 

A verse containing one Metre is called Afonometer. 

two Metres Dimeter. 

three Metres Trimeter. 

four Metres Tetrameter. 

five Metres Pentameter. 

six Metres Hexameter. 

seven Metres Heptameter. 



416 PROSODY. 

1174:* — A verse may be complete, having precisely the number of 
metres which the canon requires ; or it may be deficient in the last 
metre; or it may be redundant To express this, it is characterized as 
1. Acatalectio, when complete. 

f Catalectic, if wanting one syllable. 

( Brachycatalectic, if wanting two syllables or one whole foot. 
3. Hypercatalectic, redundant by one or two syllables ; thus, 
. xv ^ e ^ v dpcLMwrac &c. ^Esch. Lept. Theb. 

is denominated "trochaic dimeter catalectic;" the first term refer- 
ring to the species, the second to the number of metres, and the third to 
the deficient ending. 

Note. — The two last terms, viz., that designating the number of 
metres, and that which refers to the ending, are sometimes reduced to 
one ; thus, when a verse of a given species consists of a foot and a half 
it is called triemimer; of two feet and a half, Penthemimer; of three 
and a half, Hephthemimer (five half feet, seven half feet) ; and when it 
consists of one metre and a half, it is called Hemiholius. 

1175* — The respective situation of each foot in a verse is called ita 
place (sedes). 

The rules or canons of the different kinds of metre are briefly as 
follows :-— 

IAMBIC METRE. Scheme, 1193. 

1170, — A pure iambic verse consists only of iambuses. 

A mixed iambic verse admits in the first, third, and fifth place, an 
iambus or a spondee. 

In the second, fourth, and sixth, an iambus only. 

Variation 1. The spondee may be resolved into a dactyL 

Variation 2. The iambus in any place (except the last) may be resolved 
into a tribrach. An anapaest may be substituted for an iambus, in comic 
poetry, nearly at pleasure; in serious verse, only in the first foot, except 
in the case of proper names. 

Observe, however, 1st. That a dactyl should be avoided in the fifth 
place ; and, 2d. That resolved feet should not too often concur. 

Of this verse there are all varieties of length, monometers, dimeters, 
trimeters (called also senarian, each line having six feet), and tetrameters. 

The rhythmic accent is on the second syllable of the foot, except in the 
anapoist, which is accented on the last. In the iambic trimeter, the first 
foot of each dipody or measure has the ictus or heavier accentuation. 



DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE. 417 



TROCHAIC METRE. Scheme, 1 1 94. 

1177 • — A pure trochaic verse consists of trochees only. 

A mixed trochaic verse admits in the odd places a trochee only ; in the 
even places, a trochee or a spondee. 

The trochee may, in any place, be resolved into a tribrach, and the 
spondee into an anapaest 

A dactyl occurs only in the place of a proper name. 

Trochaic verses are mostly catalectic. A system of them generally 
consists of catalectic tetrameters; sometimes of dimeters, catalectic and 
acatalectic intermixed. 

In tetrameters, the second metre should always end a word. 



ANAP^STIC METRE. Scheme, 1195. 

117 8* — An anapaestic verse, without any restriction of places, adrnit3 
either an anapcest, spondee, or dactyl 

Exc. 1. The dimeter catalectic, called paraemiac (closing an anapaestic 
system), requires an anapaest in the last place but one ; and is incorrect 
when a spondee is found there. 

Exc. 2. In some instances, the proper foot is resolved into the proce- 
leusmatic. 

Anapaestic verses are sometimes intermixed with other species, but 
are oftener in a detached system by themselves. 

1179, — A system is chiefly composed of dimeters under the fol- 
lowing circumstances : — 

1. When each foot, or at least each metre (syzygy), ends a word. 

2. When the last verse but one of the system is monometer acata- 
lectic, and the last, dimeter catalectic, with an anapaest in the second 
metre. 

In a system, it is to be observed, that the last syllable of each verse is 
not common (as in other species), but has its quantity subject to the 
Same restrictions as if the foot to which it beloDgs occurred in any 
other place of the verse. 

1180, — A system, therefore, of anapaestic verses is constructed of 
a number of dimeters (rarely admitting a monometer) terminating in a 
paramiac, and is scanned as die continuous verse or line. 
18* 



418 PROSODY. 

11 SI. — To this metre belong the Aristophanic, being catalectic 
tetrameters ; and the proceleusmatic, consisting of feet isochronal to an 
anapaest, and, for the most part, ending with it. 



DACTYLIC METRE. Scheme, 1196. 

1182* — A dactylic verse is composed solely of dactyls and spon- 
dees. In this species, one foot constitutes a metre. 

The common heroic is hexameter acaialectic, having a dactyl in the fifth 
place, and a spondee in the sixth. 

Sometimes, in slow and solemn movement, a spondee takes the place 
of the dactyl in the fifth foot ; whence such lines are called, spondaic. 

1183. — The elegiac pentameter is so* named from a false division 
into five feet. It consists in fact of two catalectic dipodies, i. e., of two 
parts, each consisting of two dactylic feet and a catalectic syllable. In 
the first tripody, spondees may be substituted for the dactyls ; but not in 
the last, where the flow of the verse must not be retarded by the slower 
spondaic movement. 

1184:. — Though a heroic verse is confined to a smaller number of 
admissible feet than an iambic verse, several licenses are allowed which 
are not used in the latter. 

The most considerable of these are: — 

1. The lengthening of a short final syllable in certain cases, viz., at 
the csesural pause, and where its emphasis is increased by its begin- 
ning a foot. 

2. The hiatus, or the concurrence of two vowels, in contiguous words. 
1183. — That irregular sort of dactylics which Hephsestion calls 

JEolics, admits, in the first metre, any foot of two syllables; the rest 
must be all dactyls, except where the verse is catalectic, a,nd then the 
catalectic part must be part of a dactyl. 

1180. — A second sort of dactylics, called ordinarily Logaozdics, re- 
quire a trochaic syzygy at the end, all the other feet being dactyls. 

The loga&dic is so called from its easy, half prosaic, half poetic move- 
ment Q6yo<;, speech, &(fy, song). 



OESUBAL PAUSE. 419 



CHORIAMBIC METRE. Scheme, 1197. 

1187* — The construction of an ordinary ehoriambic verse is very 
simple. Each metre, except the last, is a choriambus, and the last may 
be an iambic syzygy, entire or catalectic. 

1188. — The iambic syzygy (two iambic feet) is sometimes found at 
the beginning, and, in long verses, in other places; but this happens 
less frequently. 

1189. — If any other foot of four syllables is joined with a choriam- 
bus, the verse is then more properly called epichor iambic. Of this there 
is a very great variety, and they sometimes end with an amphibrach, 
sometimes with a bacchius. 

[For the other more difficult metres, as well as for the details regard- 
ing these, the student is referred to special works on Greek prosody and 
metre. They can scarcely be treated advantageously in a strictly ele v 
mentary grammar.] 



THE C^ESURAL, PAUSE. 

1190. — In connection with the rhythmical arrangement of the 
verse, a degree of variety and harmony is produced by so dividing or 
cutting the verse that the end of a foot or measure shall not coincide with 
the end of a word, but the word shall be divided between different feet 
or measures. There are thus three ccesuras {cuttings, dividings) : — 

1. The caesura of the foot, as, vlktj | oac k&e \ Tlei. 

2. The caesura of the rhythm, dividing the arsis and thesis as above, 
cac eue. 

3. The caesura of the verse, commonly known as the cozsural pause, and 
dividing the verse into one or more parts, for ease and euphony in read- 
ing. The place of this caesura is naturally determined by the length of 
the verse, although this law of euphony is by no means always ob- 
served. 

1191. — Heroic verses and trimeter iambics are esteemed most har- 
monious when the pause falls upon the first syllable of the third foot. 
. This is the penthemimeral caesura. When it falls upon the first sylla- 
ble of the fourth, it is called the hephthemimeral. In iambic and tro- 
chaic tetrameters, its place is at the end of the second metre. These rules 
are more observed by the Roman than by the Greek poets. In anapaes- 



420 



PROSODY. 



tic verse, and pseonic, no place is assigned to the pause ; because, since 
the metres (if rightly constructed) end with a word, the effect of a pause 
will be produced at the end of each metre. The same may be observed 
of the Ionic a minore. 



METRICAL TABLES. 

1102* — The following tables exhibit a scheme of the different feet 
allowed m each kind of metre, and the place which they occupy. In 
the tables the following abbreviations occur - viz., A. C, for Acatalectic; 
C, for Catalectic; B. C, for Brachycataledic : H. C, for Hyper catalectic; 
and P. N., for Proper Name. ( .) In Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapais- 
tic verse, each metre consists of two feet, and is followed by a double 
line. 



1193.— Iambic Metre. 



1. Monometer Base. 



2. Dimeter Acatalectic. 



I ■ ■■ J ■ _ »■ ■ I ,| M ■ , 

1. 2. 

^w» v_x s— > 

>■>> — 1 



1. 


■ 

2. 


8. 


4. 


( 1 1 ( ( 
((1(1 
1 ( ( 


<—/ — 


) ) 1 
1)1)) 
) ) 1 1 ) 


N—^ — 



3. Trimeter Acatalectic. 



1. 


2. 


3. 


4. 


5. 


6. 


•^0f — 


w — 


<w* — 


%^/ _ 


<~~y — 


- 


^--' -^ 




«*_• N_X 




"~~ — - 


■ 


___— _— — __ __ 






^ 9 





P.N 



1194.— Trochaic Metre. 

Explanation of the Scheme. 

In this verse, each metre is alike. If from the trimeter scheme 
exhibited below, the first and the second metre be taken- away, the 
remainder will be a scheme of the Monometer, which is always hyper- 



METRICAL TABLES. 



421 



catalectic or acatalectic. If the first be taken away, the remainder will 
be a scheme of the dimeter; and if a metre be prefixed, it will be a 
scheme of the tetrameter, which is always catalectic. 



Trimeter Acatalectic. 



1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 

v_^ y^y — \^y v^* — n_ / v„/ __ 



P.N. 



.2195.— Anapaestic Metre. 

Explanation of the Scheme. 

This scheme is dimeter. The removal of the first metre leaves it 
Monometer (which is called an anapaestic base) ; by prefixing one metre, 
it becomes trimeter; and by prefixing two, it becomes tetrameter, 
which is always catalectic. A catalectic dimeter is also called Parcemiac. 



1. Dimeter Acatalectic. 



2. Parcemaic or Pirn. Cat 



1. 


2. 


3. 


4. 




1. 


2. 


3. 


4. 


>— ' v^ 


V_ «• v^ 


**~* *w — 


N-^ >»• — 




V^ V«rf» 


>— ' V^ — 


— s»/ >W 


— — «>«• >— • 


— v-x «^ 


>_^ x— / 






















119G.— Dactylic Metre. 

1. Dimeter. 2. Trimeter. 



A. C. 
H.C. 



1. 2. 

— V— X ^^ — S^ V-' 

v*/ s_^ \^f v_/ 

__ •_• v»^ 

t _ 



Adonic. 



i: 


2. 


3. 


— 




_r-[ 


— 





~~l 



A. C. 
H.C. 



422 



PROSODY. 



3. Tetrameter. 



1. 2. 3. 4 



^SOLIC. 



4. Pentameter. 



1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 

>»• N_^ — ^^ »— ' Q — ^* v»/ — Q 

EFT 

w > S-> W Q WW Q 

-- J 



A.C. 



iEoLic. 



5. Hexameter. 



1. 2. 3. . 4. 5. 6. 

— ^^ 

***s 'w' W W 

Q >-• s_^ V_X v-^ O 



pure. 
I impure. 
Heroic. 



Elegiac. 



Logacedics. 

called also Choriambic Dimeter Catalectic. 
Alcaic (the most common). 

i Logaasdics only. 



ACCENTS. 



423 



1197*— Choriambic Metre. 



Trimeter. 



if. I. 



II. 



III. 



Cat. 

pure acatalectic seldom occurs; 
impure do., in which also other 
feet are intermixed, as the 
Paeons and Epitrites. 



Monometer is the same as Dactylic Dimeter. Dimeter removes the 
first metre. Tetrameter prefixes a metre, and is always catalectic. 



ACCENTS. 

1198* — In the modulation of speech, one syllable in every word 
must be distinguished by a tone or elevation of the voice. On this syl- 
lable the accent is marked, in the Greek language. The elevation of 
voice does not lengthen the time of the syllable ; so that accent and 
quantity are considered by the best critics as perfectly distinct, but by 
no means inconsistent with each other. The accents now scarcely 
guide our pronunciation, at least only as fixing the accented syllable ; yet 
they are useful in many ways, among others as distinguishing between 
words spelled alike, but differing in signification, of which Scapula gives 
a list of more than four hundred. Besides this, the accents are a part 
of the Greek language, and no Greek scholarship can be complete with- 
out a knowledge of them. They show us how various was the pro- 
nunciation of the Greek, both in respect to the syllable accented, and 
the quality of the accent. In many instances they determine the quan- 
tity of the vowel. 

Words, according to their accent, are oxytone, paroxytone, proparoxy- 
tone, perispomena, and properispomena. All but the first and fourth are 
barytone. All syllables not marked with an accent are supposed to be 
barytone ; the grave accent (fiapvc rovoc) is never written, except when 
it stands for a depressed oxytone (170-175). 



424 PROSODY. 



PLACE OF THE ACCENT IN THE 

NOMINATIVE. 

1199. — No rule can be given for ascertaining the 
place of the accent in the nominative of nouns and adjec- 
tives; it is to be learned mainly from practice and the 
lexicon. The following observations, however, may be of 
use: — 

124)0. — The article, pronouns, and prepositions have 
their accent given in the grammar. The dissyllabic 
prepositions, we may add, are all regularly oxytone / 
paroxytone only by exceptional position. 

1201. — Verbs throw back the accent as far as possi- 
ble, except el fit and <prj[±i. They are called, in respect to 
accent, recessive ; for exceptions, see 437, ff. 

1202. — The following classes of words are mainly 
oxytone; viz., 

1. All monosyllables which are not contracted; as, %dp, bg. When 
they have suffered contraction, they take the circumflex; as, yfj 
(yea), (pox; (<paog). So also al, vvv, ovv, vg^ dpvg, jivg, vavg, ovg, Tralg, 
irvp, most or all of which are contractions. 2. All nouns in evg ; 
as, fiaGikzvQ. 3. All verbals in r-qp ; as, x a P aKT VP» 4. Yerbals in 
TT/g; as, /uad-qr^g; but those from verbs in fit, on the penult; as, 
-&ET7)g. 5. Yerbals in \iri and /nog (from the perfect passive) ; as, 
ypa/i/iy, (HrciGfiog. 6. Yerbals in rog, from the third singular perfect 
passive; as, 7rotyTog- except some Compounds; as, aizodeiKrog. 1. 
Yerbals in tj and a from the second perfect active ; as, cro/l^, dia- 
tyopa. 8. Diminutives, patronymics, and other derivative nouns in 
ig; as, Kepa/iig, j3aoiAtg. 9. Compounds of itoiecd^ d/6), (pepa), ovpog^ 
epyov'j as, TratSayoydg, dicupopa, nvTiovpog, bjufipifioepydg (but napd 
and TTEpi throw back the accent; as, irepiepyog). 10. Adjectives in 
iK not contracted; as, akri'&rjg. 11. Compound adjectives in rjg ; as, 
£v(f>vj/g' except compounds of rj&og and apKeo; as, Kcucofy&qg, irodap- 
K7]g. 12. Adjectives in vg, eia, i>; as, rjdvg, ydela, rjdv. 13. Adjec 
tives in pog • as, aloxp^g. 14. Adjectives in iicog, from verbals in 
rog^ as, TrotyriK6g 1 from Koirrrdg. 15. The adverbial terminations i 
and 66v; as, a$eei } dfio&vjuaddv. 



ACCENTS. 425 



Accent on the Penult. 
1.203. — The following are mainly paroxytone ; viz., 

1. Diminutives in lonog, i/iog, iov' as, veaviGKog, Traidi(jK7/, vavrLAog y 
fiioplov. 2. Nouns in etov, denoting a place; as, Avuelov, &c. 
3. Nouns in wq • as, diKcaoavvri. 4. Nouns in la, if derived from, 
adjectives in of; as, <piAia. If derived from substantives, the 
accent varies ; as, GTparta, from orparog. 5. Nouns in eia, derived 
from verbs in evu] as, (iaoLAeia, from fiaotAevG). 6. Almost all 
nouns denoting national relation; as, 'Vufialog. 7. Yerbals in 
Tup; as, pyrcop, nrf/rop. 8. Adjectives in etg 1 saaa, ev- as, xapieig. 
9. Adjectives in odqg- ?ud-66yg. 10. Yerbal adjectives ineoc; as, 
ypa7r~Eog. 11. Comparatives in tov ; as, peAriov. 12. Adverbs of 
quantity in a/cic; as, rpia&Kig, KoKkatag. 13. Adverbs in d^v; as, 
cvAAqj36?/v. 

Composition. 

1204=0 — Compound words in many instances, especially 
in adverbs, retain the accent on the syllable where it stood 
in the simple; as, avr6<pi y obpavod-ev. In the following 
cases, however, the accent is drawn back to the antepe- 
nult; viz., 

1. Words compounded of particles, a, eu, dus, dt, 6p.o, 
aprt, dvrCy Kepi, Tzapd^ v~6^ &G. ; as, oltzlgtik; from Tztazoq^ 
di(pu%o<; from (po%7J. 

2. Words compounded of two adjectives / as <pd6<jo<poq : 
of two substantives ; as, vauxArjpos : of adjectives and sub- 
stantives; as, (pdoGTOpyoq. 

GENERAL RULES. 

1205. — If the final syllable is long, the accent, if on 
the penult, must be acute, and the word is paroxytone ; 
as, avftpdinoUy [xoixjo. (dual), runrct), TU7iri<T&a). 



426 PROSODY, 

Obs. The Attic terminations ecov and eo*r, in the second 
and third declensions, and the Ionic ea) in the first, are 
considered as forming virtually but one syllable ; as, &va>- 

1206* — If the Jinal syllable be short, then 

1. Apenidt, if long and accented, must be circumjlexed / 
if short and accented, must be acuted. That is, with a 
short ultimate, an accented long penult makes the word a 
proper ispomeno?i : an accented short penult makes it a 
par oxy tone ; as, toiztz^ x et P e * 

2. With a short ultimate the accent may be on the ante- 
penult ; the accent is then always acute, and the word is 
proparoxytone ; as, avftpiDizoq. 

Obs. The diphthongs ot and at final, and syllables long 
by position only, are considered short in accentuation / 
thus, aokd^, aoXdxoq. 

SPECIAL RULES. 

In the Declension of Nouns. 

1207. — The first declension is, in the genitive plural, 
almost always perispomenon ; thus, fiooawv, from i±oo<7a. 

Exc. The feminine of barytone adjectives in oq ; as, 
aria from aywq (not aytat) ; f^wv from f^vo^ ; and the 
nouns zpTJGTwv^ %lobvwv^ Zttjgiojv (not %p7]<jTa>v^ &c). 

1208. — Oxttones of the first and second declensions 
are, in the genitive and dative of all the numbers, peris- 

POME1STA ; thus, Tcpirj, TtpLYJq, Ttfxf n rtfialv J rtfiwv • xakoq y xaXou • 
makolv, xaXwv^ xaXoTq. 

1209. — In the third declension, an oxy tone in the 
nominative becomes regularly, in the oblique tenses, a 
paroxytone or a properispomenon / as, narijp, naripoq, 

(TlOTTjp, (JWT^poq^ (TWTTJpWV, 



ACCENTS. 427 

Exc. 1. The final syllable of vocatives in eo and oc 
change the acute into the circumflex ; as, PeurtAeus, fiaai- 
Xeu ; xkcod-d), xXod-oi. 

Exc. 2. 3IrJTTjf) and S-oyd-z^p^ though barytones, become 
paroxytones in the genitive ; as, pqripoz. 

Exc. 3. Monosyllables transfer the accent in the geni- 
tive and dative of all the numbers to the ultimate, whi 
becomes oxyione ; as, pqv6c 9 v-ipl^ pa^i\ or perispomenoi 
as, jnjvoTy, fiTjvwv. But rfe and participles follow the g€ 
eral rule, retaining the accent on the same syllable as 
the nominative ; as, tcvoq, -frivroc, odgi ; also, £d<W, duwo 

#(I)u)v, xpdrwVj Tzaidwv, Tpcocuv, ovztov, <p<bra)v (of light. 
Tzavrtiiv Tzaai. 

Also syncopated nouns and yovr h except the dative 

plural; as, Tzarpoq, r.azpmv, 7carpd<n' yuvatxag. 

Also, a short vowel of the genitive from a lon^ vowel 
in the nominative, throws back the accent in the voca- 
tive 5 thus, d^rjp, Avipoq, avep ; evdaifiwv^ eboaifiovoq, eooat- 
fiov. Except when the penult is long not by position ; as, 
JUa^doVj 2ap~ijdov n 

For the accentuation of verbs, see 963, 977. 



IN CONSTRUCTION. 

1210. — Words accented on the last syllable, when 
this is lost by apostrophe, throw the accent back; as, 
detvd — dew em\. 

Exc. 1. ^Alld and the prepositions are excepted, which 
lose their accent. 

Exc. 2. Prepositions placed after their cases (dvd and 
dtd excepted), throw back the accent; thus, izepl — foxfe 
nipt. 



428 PROSODY. 



PROCLITICS OR ATONICS. 

1211, — The following ten words, when written by themselves w 
before another word, have no accent, but seem to rest upon and form, as 
it were, part of the word following ; viz., the articles 6, rj, ol, al ; the 
prepositions ev, elg (eg), e/e, e£; the conjunctions ei y wc; and the negative 
adverb ov (ovk, oi>x). 

But these words have the accent when it is thrown back upon them 
from an enclitic following; as, dye; in the end of a sentence; as, nug 
yap oi>, why not t after the word on which they rest ; as, &ebg fog, like a 
god ; KdKCiv eg, in consequence of evils. Also the article, used as a per- 
sonal pronoun, often has the accent ; as, b yap fads. 






ENGLISH INDEX. 



The numbers refer to paragraphs. In the abbreviations, w. = with; ff., following 
section or sections ; ind. = indicative ; part = participle ; prop. = proposition. 



Abridged propositions, 1134. 

-Absolute, gen., 1112 ; nom. and ace, do., 
obs. 3. 

Abstract nouns, 88. 

Acatalectic verse, 1174. 

Accents, 23 ff. ; 1 decl., 10S ff. ; 2 deel., 
131 ff. ; 3 decl., 146 ff. ; interr. pron., 
363 ; verb, 436 ff. ; in compounds, 1204 ; 
genl. rules, 1205; special rules for nouns, 
120T ff. ; in constr., 1210. 

Accompaniment, dat. w. verbs, 1010, 1 ; 
expressed by parti cip., 1100, 2. 

Accusative, 95 ; 3 decl., 164 ff. ; import., 
963 ; synt. w. adj. of quality, 98T, obs. 
11 ; w. verbal adj., 1015, obs. 4; for dat., 
1017 ; w. impers. verbs, 1023, exc. 1, ff. ; 
immed. obj. of trans, verb, 1024, 1025; 
of v. seemingly intrans., do., obs. 2; 
trans, v. understood, do., obs. 5; of 
specification, do., obs. 6; in poetic style, 
do., obs. 7 ; w. intrans. v., do., obs. 8 ; w. 
gen. after trans, v., 1026 ; w. v. of accus- 
ing, &c, 1027 ; w. v. of hearing, &c, 
1029 ; ace. and dat., 1030 ; v. of compar- 
ing, &c, 1031 ; w. 7rp6? for dat, 1031, 
obs. 2; 2 ace, 1032 ff. ; w. v. of asking, 
&c, 1033; of similar signif., 1035, obs. 
3; w. n. equiv. to v., do., obs. 4; v. of 
calling, &c, do., obs. 5; ace. neut of 
abstract idea, do., obs. 6; w. pass, v., 
1038, obs. 1 ; of part affected, 1039, obs. 
3; w. mid. voice, do., obs. 4; of limit- 
ing idea, 1041, obs. 1 ; 1044. II. ; of man- 
ner, 1046, obs. 3 ; of time — how long, 
1049; distance, 1051 ; adv. of swearing, 
1063; absol. w. part, 1112, obs. 4. 

Action, of a verb, 969. 

Active voice, 402; tenses in, 412; perf. 
fut., 424 ; personal endings. 511 ff. ; ta- 
ble of, 513 ff. 

Acute accent, 23, 27 ; recap, rules, 1198 ff. 

Address, voc, 95-5th. 



Adjectives, 263 ff. ; endings, 267 ; regular, 
declined, 269 ff. ; irregular, 294 ; in 
agreement, 858, 859 ff. ; as subst, 860 ; 
as collective, 861 ; as pred., 862 ; accu- 
mulated for emphasis, 863; as adv., 
864; w. collect nouns, 867; masc. for 
fern., 869-70 ; w. gen., 873-4 ; neut. adj. 
w. gen., 986; verb. adj. w. gen., 98S ff. ; 
compound with a priv., 991 ; of plenty, 
&c, 995 ff. ; of fitness, &e, with infin., 
1090. 

Adjective pron., 883. 

Adjuncts of infin., 1094 ; of part, 1103. 

Adverbs. 638 ff. ; of place, 690 ; of time, 
691; of quant, 692; of qual., 693; of 
manner, 694; of relation, 695; of ex- 
clam., 69Q; correlatives, 697; include 
interjections, 697, obs. 2 ; formation, 698 
ff.; derivative, 700 ff., 1057; compari- 
son, 711 ff. ; synt : for adj., 85S, obs. 1 ; 
w. dem. pron., 891 ; w. art, 917 ; constr., 
1055 ff. ; as prep., 1058; of time, &c, 
1059 ; w. various cases, 1061 ; of ac- 
comp., 1062 ; of swearing. 1063 ; of time, 
w. diff. moods, 1083 ; with part, 1109. 

Adverbial particles inseparable, 714; and 
conjunctive, 7B9 ff. 

Adversative conjunctions, 785. 

JEolic dialect, 4A ; imperf. and aor., 575, 
44 ff. ; aor. opt., 572 ; digamma, 44 ff., 
158. 

Agent, or doer, w. passive verbs, 1036 ; w. 
perf. pass., 1037. 

Alphabet, Greek, 2. 

Alphabetical list of irreg. verbs, 6S6. 

Anacoluthon, 1112, obs. 3. 

Analysis of sentences, 1121 ; examples 
of, 1135. 

Antecedent, with rel., 930 ; implied, 931 ; 
understood, 943 ff. ; a subs., 944 ff. ; be- 
fore an adjective, 947 ff. ; before a verb, 
949 ff. 



430 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



Aorist, 417, 426? for pluperf., &c, 417, 
rem. ; for universal pres., id., obs. 5 ; 
iEol. aor., 575 ; with cond. prop. subj. 
used imper. with neg., 1066, 2d. 

Aorist, first, 417 ; tense sign, 503 ff. ; 
mood vow. and ending, 517 ff. ; fut. in 
mute verbs, 537; liquid verbs, 548; opt. 
act., uEolic, 572. 

Aorist, second, 417 ; in mute verbs, 543 ; 
reduplicated in Horn., 489, obs. 2. 

Aphceresis, 52, 684. 

Apocope, 52. 

Apodosis, 1118. 

Apostrophe, 46. 

Apposition, 857 ; dem. pron., 1025, obs. 4. 

Article, in crasis, 49; declined, 256; 
prepos., 261 ; w. avros, 344 ; synt., 905 
ff.; w. class, 909; w. abstract n., 910; 
w. subj., 911; omitted, 912; w. apella- 
tives, 914; converts words and clauses 
into nouns, 918; w. infin., 921; w. 
clauses, 922; w. pron., 923-4; w. subst. 
understood, 925; in correl. w. /uteV and 
fie, 926 ; in Horn., 927. 

Aspirate, see Hough Breathing,42, 57 ff. 

Association, dat, 1010. 

Asynartete, 1171. 

Attic dialect, 136, 137, 138, 185, &c, im- 
per., 573. 

Attraction, w. infin., 1094, obs. 1; w. 
part., 1104. 

Augment, 473 ff.; syllabic, 478, 481 ff.; 
temp., 4S0; rules for, 477 ff. ; of com- 
pounds, 485 ff. ; verbs in /tu, 613. 

Auxiliary 'verbs, 428 ff. 

Barytone, 26, 1198, 168. 
Breathings, 42 ff. ; rough, 42. 
Br achy catalectic foot, 1174. 

Ccesural pause, 1190 ff. 

Cardinal numbers, 297, 299 ff. 

Cases, 94 ; Greek cases, 95 ; decl., 101. 

Catalectic verse, 1174. 

Cause, 979; remote, 1041 ; manner, &c, 
1046. 

Choriambus, 1169; choriambic metres, 
1187. 

Circumflex, 23, 26, 1206. 

Circumstantial Construction, 1040 ; ori- 
gin, 1041 ; limitation, 1042 ; cause, &c, 
1046; place, 1048; time, 1049; measure, 
1050 ; price, 1053. 

Collective nouns, 88 ; w. adj., 867. 

Common noun, 87; gender, 92; 2 dec, 
130 ; adj., 212. 

Comparative adj., 312; synt, 877 ff. ; w. 
gen., 998 ; w. rj, than, 998, obs. 10 ; im- 
plied do., obs. 14; superl. for comp. adj. 
do., obs. 15, 

Compar. of adj., 311 ff. ; irreg., 321 ; de- 
fect., 322 ff. ; of adv., 711 ff. 

Completed action, 418 ff. 

Compound ad]., 272; v. au^rn., 4S5 ff. ; 
sen., 833, 1129 ff. ; quantity, 1164. 

Concessive /u.eV, 815. 

Concord, 851, 853 ff. 



Conclusion = apodosis in cond. prop., 
1079, 10S3, 1117, 1118. 

Conditional conjunctions, 788 ; prop. w. 
neg., 1066; w. ind., 1079; w. subj. and 
opt, 1083, obs. 7, 1117,1118. 

Conjugations, 400, 445 ff. ; in ju, 605 ff. 

Conjunctions, 7S0 ff. ; their classes, 782 
ff. ; their use, 1114 ; in cond. sentences, 
1115; various particles, 804 ff.,1119; in 
depen. prop., 1082; w. part, 1112, obs. 
5 ; procl., 41. 

Consonants, 13 ff. ; division, 14 ff. ; eu- 
phonic changes, 55 ff. ; transposition, 
74. 

Continued action, 414, 415 ; part, 1100, 4. 

Contraction, 32, 122 ff. ; 1 decl., 126 ff. ; 
2 decl., 139 ff. ; 3 decl, 194 ff. 

Contract verbs, 555 ff. ; concurrence of 
vowels, 556 ff. ; Dor. and Ion. forms, 
560 ; Horn, form, do., obs. 4 ; table, 569. 

Copula, 1122. - 

Correlative pron., 370 ff. ; adv., 697. 

Coronis, 48, 49. 

Crasis, 33, 47. 

Dactyl, 1168; Dactylic verse, 1182 ff. 

Dative, 94, 3 ; ending sine., 105 accented, 
111, 133 ; 3 decl. plur., 177 ff. ; synt, 
1010 ff. ; dat. moraUs, 1010, rem. w. 
subjt derived from verbs, 1011;' for 
gen., do., obs. 1 ; w. adj. of profit, &c, 
1012 ; dat. or gen. after adj., 1013, obs. 1 ; 
w. verbals in to?, 1014 ; w. verbals in 
Te'ov, 1015; w. verbs of belonging to, 
1016 ; for gen., 1016, obs. 1 ; double dat, 
do., obs. 2 ; idiomatically w. part, 1017, 
obs. 3 ; w. part, or adj. after v. of com- 
ing, do., obs. 4; dat. of direction, 1018; 
w. v. compounded with prep., 1019; w. 
v. of companionship, 1021 ; w. impers. 
verbs, 1023 ; w. ace. after verbs, 1030 ; 
w. verbs of comparing, &c, 1031; of 
respect wherein, 1044, III. ; of cause, 
manner, &c, 1046 ; of time when, 1049 ; 
excess, 1052; w. adv. of accompan., 1062. 

Declensions, 96 ; origin, 100 ; number of, 
101 ; gen. rules, 103 ff. ; 1 decl., 107 ff. ; 
2 decl., 130 ff. ; 3 decl., 144 ff. ; irreg. 
decl., 228 ff. ; defect, decl., 243 ff. 

Defective nouns, 243 ff., 248; compar., 
322 ; verbs, 388, 676. 

Degrees of comp., 311 ff. 

Demonstrative pron., 354 ff. ; made em- 
phat, 356; synt, 885; apposition, 888 ; 
in neut, 876, 889 ; used adverbially, 890; 
for pers. pron., 892 ; in appos. w. clause, 
1025, obs. 4. 

Dependent clauses, 1082 ff., 1132. 

Deponent verbs, 387, 662 ff. 

Derivative. 79; adj., 272; adv., 699 ff. 

Desiderative verbs, 673. 

Dialects,\ decl., 121 ; 2 decl., 136 ff.; of 
art, 262 ; of compar., 330 ff. ; of pron., 
372 ; of verbs, 601 ff. 

Diastole, 50. 

Dig am/ma, 44, 45, 158. 

Diminutives, 253. 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



431 



Diphthongs, 6; pronun., 12; place of ac- 
cent, 25; quantity, 1155. 

Direct question, 1120. 

Disjunctive conjunctions, 7S3. 

Distributives, 310. 

Double negatives, 1068 ff. ; vr. same verb, 
1069 ; w. different verbs, 1070 ; w. infin., 
1070, 1st; w. v. to fear, &c, do., 2d; in 
independent prop., do., 3d. 

Doric forms in contr. v., 560. 

Double consonants, 18, 19, 20 ; double ob- 
ject, 1002, 1026, 1030, &c. 

Dual, 93, 106 subst. w. adj. plur.. 871 ; 
nom. vr. plur. v., 961. 

Elegiac pentameter, 11S3. 

ElUpsis, 807; of kariv, 1070, obs. 2; w. 

part, after infin., 1095 ; in infin. for im- 

per., 1096, obs. 2. 
Emphasis, in enclitics, 40 ; in adj., 873 ; 

in pers. pron., 956, obs. 1 ; of position, 

1137. 
Enclitics, 34 if. 
Epenthesis, 52, 3d. 
Etymology, 77 ff. 
Euphony. 54, 55. 
Exclamations in gen., 1054. 
Exercises, practical, 1137, ff. 

Fearing, w. neg.. 1066, 5th. 

Feet in verse, 1167 ff. 

Feminine nouns, vr. masc. adj., 868, 870 ; 
patronym., 251. 

Future tense in Greek, 416 ; in verbs in 
/uu, 644; w. subj.. 10S3. 

Future perf., as continued, 421 ; as denot- 
ing haste, 422 ; form, 424. 

Gender, 92; of 1 dec, 107; 3 dec, 189 ff.; 
of adj. in agreement, 859 ; determined 
by meaning, 866; of dual adj., 863; 
masc for fern., 869. 

Genitive, 95, 2 ; accented, 109, 111, 133 ; 3 
decl., 160 ff. ; adj. and part, 164; gov't, 
845; of appos., 857, obs. 4; meaning, 
966; various uses, 970 ff. ; w. verbs, 
972 ; w. adj., 973 ; used partitively, 978 ; 
denoting origin, 979; w. subst., 9S2; 
governing noun understood, 983, obs. 1 ; 
taken act. or pass., do., obs. 2, of ma- 
terial or source, 985, obs. 4 ; double gen., 
do., obs. 7 ; w. neut. art., do., obs. 8; vr. 
neut. adj. or art., 9S6; of quality or cir- 
cum., 987; w. verbal adj., 9SS ff. ; vr. 
adj. of plenty or want, 995; w, parti- 
tives, &c, 997; gen. pi., denoting class, 
997, obs. 8 ; after coinp. deg., 993 ; of 
belonging to, 999; w. verbs of sense, 
1000; vr. verbs of operations of mind, 
1001 ; vr. causative verbs. 1002 ; gen. of 
a part., 1003, 4 ; of plenty or want. 1005, 
6; gen. of separating w. verbs, 1006 ; vr. 
verbs of ruling, 1007; of buying, 1009; 
vr. impers. verbs, 1023, exc II. j of ac- 
cus. w. prep., 1023; pers. in gen., do., 
obs. 2; of hearing, 1029, of sharing, 
1081, obs. 4; of cause, 1041, 1046, obs. 8; 



of material, do., obs. 3; of respect 
wherein, 1042; of place, 1048, obs. 2; of 
magnitude, 1050; of price, 1053; of ex- 
clamations, 1054; w. adv., 1059. 

Gentile nouns, 252. 

Grave accent, 28, 28, 1193 ff. 

Hemiholius, 1174, note. 
Hephthemimer, 1174, note. 
Hexameter, 1173 ; dactylic or heroic, 1182. 
Hiatus prevented, 55. 
Hypercatalectic verse, 1174. 
Hypothetical prop., 1079, 1081, 1117 ff. 

Iambus, 1167; iambic metre, 1176. 

Imperative, 409; accented, 437, 438; end- 
ings, 511, 512, 6; act. Attic, 573; verbs 
in pi, 622, 634; with neg. fx-q, 1066, 2d; 
synt,, 1085 ; 2 pers. for 3d, do., 1 ; plur. 
for sing., do., 2 ; in neg. commands, do., 
3 ; in ellipsis, do., 4; for fat, do., 5. 

Imperfect, 415; meaning, 425; augment, 
475, 477 ; formation, 471, 529 ; verbs in /u.t, 
618 ff., 640; pass., 641; dialectical or 
iterative form, 575. 

Impersonal verbs, 667, ff. ; as subj., 956, 
obs. 3 ; gov. dative, 1023 ; part, absol., 
1112, obs. 5. 

Improper diphthongs. 6, 8. 

Inceptive verbs, 393, 675. 

Indeclinable nouns, 241 ff. ; neut., 159. 

Indefinite pron., 367 ff. ; synt, 893, 4 ; w. 
adj. of quality, &c, 894 ; of eminence, 
895; inneuC'896. 

Independent ace, 899 ; prop., 1073, 1085 ; 
clause, 1130. 

Indicative, 407 ; inflexion, 511, 513 ; v'bs 
in /at, 619 ; synt, 1073 ff. ; in indirect 
and cond. statements, 1078, 1 ; w. rel. 
after neg. prop., 2, (a) ; in indirect ques- 
tions, do., (b) ; in orat obliq., do., (c) ; 
w. mod. adv., 1078, (3) ; in hypothetic, 
prop., 1079 ff., 1118; in orat. recta, 1078 
(c). 

Indirect questions, 1120, see 364, 6 ; w. 
indie, 1078, (b). 

Infinitive mood, 410 ; as verbal noun, 410, 
obs. 3 ; w. v. of promising, &c, 1031, 
obs. 1 ; in v. in /uu, 623, 642 ; for accus. 
after trans, verbs, 1025, obs. 3 ; w. ju.^, 
1066, 4th ; construction of, 1086 ff. ; as 
verbal noun, 1037 ; w. clause, do., obs. 
2; = to Lat ger., do., obs. 3; = to Lat. 
sup., do., obs. 4; as subj. of verb, 1088; 
<rov. by v., 10S9 ; after adj. of fitness, 
&c, 1090 ; of design, 1090, obs. 2 ; of re- 
sult vr. aicrre, do., obs. 3 ; of respect to, 
do., obs. 4 ; as sup., do., obs. 5; vr. subj., 
1091 ff. ; union of inf. and ind. construe, 
1092; w. ace subj., 1093; vr. subj. same 
as v. preceding, 1094; vr. pass, verbs, 
1095, obs. 3 ; vr. Sokci, do., obs. 4 ; w. 
adjuncts, do., obs. 5; w. wore or prep., 
do., obs. 6; absol., 1096; loosely w. a>s, 
do., obs. 1 ; for imper., da, obs. 2 ; re- 
dundant, do., obs. 3 ; in place of part, 
1105, obs. 3. 

Inflexion endings^ 502 ff. 



482 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



Instrument by dat, 1046 ; as pers., do., 

obs. 5. 
Intensive pron., 341 ff. ; synt., SS4. 
Interjections, 84, obs. 2. 
Interrogative pron., 362 ff. ; synt., S97 ; 

in pred., S9S; independ.acc, 899; direct 

and indirect, 1120. 
Interrogative neg. adv., 1066, 6tli. 
Intransitive verbs, 376 If., 404, obs. 2 ; for 

trans., 1025, obs. 1, ff., do., obs. 8. 
Ionic dialect, in 3 decl., 1S5 ff. ; in part., 

589; 2 pers. sing, pass., 591; in perf. 

pass., 600. 
Iota subscript, 8. 
Irregular nouns, 228, ff. ; verbs, 676 ff. ; 

formation of new pres., 677 ff. ; alpha- 
betical list, 6S6. 

Koppa, 308. 

Labial mutes, 16; w. <r, 18 ; changed by 

euphony, 56 ff., 61, 64, 455, 537, 539, 554, 

600, obs. 3. 
Lengthening vowels, 154, 156, 162; in 

aug., 480, 496, 504, 505; in pure verbs, 

530 ff. ; in liqu. v., 546, 548. 
Letters, 1, 2. „ 
Lingua Is, 16, 19 ; euphonic changes, 63, 

66, 69, 73. 
Liquids, 17 ; assimilated, 70 ; in 3 decl., 

154; liq. verbs, 545 ff., 554; perf. pass., 

597. 
Logamdic verse, 1186. 
Long vowels, 3 ; 1 decL, 112 ; rules for, 

1150, 1153. 

Manner, adv., 694 ; by dat., 1046 ; by ace, 

do., obs. 3. 
Mascuolne gend., 92, 107, 130, 190 ; dual, 

868 ; masc. adj. super., 869 ; adj. n. fern., 

870. 
Material in gen., 9S5, obs. 4, 1041, obs. 3. 
Measure of magnit., 1050 ; distance, 1051 ; 

excess, 1052. 
Metathesis, 52, 53, 683. 
Metre, nature, 1170 ; kinds, 1171 ; names, 

do., note ; descriptions of, 1176 ff. 
Middle voice, 403, 514 ; classes, 404, obs., 

tables of, w. mood- vowel and term com- 
bined, 519. 
Mid. tenses used act., 404, obs. 4 ; form, 

do., obs. 5 ; formed from act., 427. 
Moods, 396, 405 ff. ; in verbs in pi, 61S ff. ; 

synt., 1078 ft: 
Mood-vowels, 508, 509 ; separate and com- 
bined, act. voice, 513; mid. and pass., 

514, 522. 
Monometer, 1173. 
Monosyllabic nouns, accent, 148; voc, 

171. 
Motion expressed by adv., 690, 2, 3, 4; 

prep., 724. 
Multiple numbers, 310. 
Mutes, 14 ff. ; euphonic changes, 56 ff. 
Mute verbs, 537 ; format, of tens., 538 ff. ; 

perf. pass., 594 ff. 

Negatives, 1064 ff. ; independ. neg., 1065 ; 



depend., 1066; w. apxyv, 701; double, 
1069 ; two neg. united, 1070, obs. 4 ; be- 
fore infin., 1070, 1st ; neg. prop. w. in- 
die., 1078, (a) ; commands, 1035, 3. 

Neuter, 92; nouns partiallv decl., 104, 
159 ; 2 decl., 130 ; 3 decl.," 192 ; pi. w. 
sing, verbs, 957. 

Nominative, 95 ; 3 decl., 153 ff. ; of in- 
tens. pron., 842; constr., 955; w. verb, 
956; omitted, do., obs. 1, 2 ; of diff. 
pers., 962; after verb, 963; absol., 1112, 
obs. 3. 

Notation oj numbers, 305 ff. 

Nouns, 85 ff. ; proper, 86; common, 87, 
8S. 

Numbers, 93 ; of verbs, 398. 

Numerals, 296 ff. ; adv., 810. 

Object illustrated by cases, 95; remote 
obj., 967, 969, 1010, 2 ; immediate, 968, 
969, 1026. 

Oblique cases, 95, obs. 4; increase in 3 
decl., 144; accent, 147; formation of, 
160 ff. ; of avT6<s, 343. 

Optative mood, 408; mood-vowels of, 
509, do., exc. 4 ; Attic dual, 571 ; act. in 
verbs in fxt,, 621, 633; pass., 628; ex- 
pressing wish w. neg., 1066, 2d ; in orat. 
obliq. w. past tense, 1078, (d) ; synt of, 
1080 ff. ; in hypothetical prop., 1032, 
1117, 1113; with cond. part., 1081, (1); in 
final sentences, 1084 ff. ; in independ. 
prop., 1034; for wish or prayer, 1084, 

. II., (a) ; expressing doubt, &c, 1084, 
II., (b) ; for politeness, do., (c); for im- 
per. do., (d). 

Ordinal numbers, 29S, 304. 

Orthography, 1 ff. 

Oxytone, 26 ; classes of words, 1202. 

Palatals, 16 ; enphon. changes, 56 ff., 62, 
65 ; in verbs, 537, 539, 544, 2 ; perf. pass., 
595. 

Paragoge, 52; paragogic epic endings, 
187, 183. 

Paro2miac, 1171, note ; 1178, exc. 1. 

Paroxytone, 25, 26 ; classes of, 1203. 

Participle like adj., 266; syncopated, 
53S; Ionic forms, 539; in verbs in /utt, 
624; w. art., 915; as adj., 916; as adj. 
governs gen., 992; used conditionally 
w. neg., 1066, 3d ; agreement and gov- 
ernment, 1098 ; uses of part., 1099, 1100 ; 
tenses discriminated, 1100, 4th ; as pred- 
icate, 1101; w. art., 915, 1101, obs. 2;' 
for infin., 1103 ff. ; w. one subj., 1104,1; 
w. expressed subj., 1104, 2; w. adj., 
1105; distinguished from inf., do., obs. 
3; w. \av9dvui, 1107 ; periphrastic, 1108 ; 
w. oixo/JLat, do., obs. 7 ; in definition of 
time, 1109; used adverbially, 1110 ; w. 
to?, 1111; used absolutely with gen., 
1112; nom. and ace. absol., do., obs. 3; 
of impers. verbs, do., obs. 4; w. cos, &c, 
do., obs. 5. 

Particles, 6S7 ; inseparable adverb, part, 
714 ff. ; meaning, 724, 789 ff., 1119. 

Partitives, w. gen. pi., 997 ; w. prep., do. 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



433 



obs. 2; vernier, do., obs. 5; w. collect, 
nouns, do., obs. 6. 

Passive voice, 404; inflexion, 514 ; end- 
ings, 519 ff. ; in /nt, 64T ; synt., 1036 ff. ; 
w. prep., 1036; perf. pass., 1037 ; ofv'bs 
governing two eases, 1033; w. accus. of 
similar signif., do., obs. 1. 

Past tensm, 423, 425; w. augm., 474, 4T5 
ff. ; w. hypothetical prop, implying de- 
nial, 1079, 2, 1113; past and pres. time 
in hypothetical prop., 1079, 2, 111S. 

Patronymics, 250, 251. 

Pause, cmsural, 1190 ff. 

Pentameter, elegiac, 11S3. 

Penthemimer, 1174, note; caesura, 1191. 

Perfect tense, 418, see perf., 404, obs. 6 ; 
double form, 418; as remaining, 418, 
obs. 8 ; formation, 539, 549 ; pass., 593 ff. ; 
perf. mid., 404, obs. 4 ; Ion. and Dor. 
forms, 600; in verbs in /u.t, 646; of de- 
pon. verbs, 663. 

Periphrastic future, 424. 

Perispomenon, 26. 

Person, 90 ff. ; of verbs, 399 ; synt, 962 ff. 

Personal pron., 334 ff. ; omitted as subj. 
of verb, 956, obs. 1. 

Personal endings, 510, 511; modified, 
512 ff. ; mid. and pass., 514 ff. 

Place, adv. of, 690; circumstances of, 
1047. 

Pluperfect, 419 ; augmented, 475, 477, 
479 ; aug. w. Attic red., 499 ; follows 
perf., 529, (4) ; formation, 539 ; pass., 
593; relation to perf., 419, obs. 9; in 
hypothetical prop., 1079, rem. 2, 1118. 

Plural, 93 ; neut. nouns, 104; dat. 3 decl., 
177 ; 3 pi. perf., 59S ; neut. w. singular 
verb, 957 ; adj. w. subs, dual, 871. " 

Poly sch ema tistic, 1171. 

Position, rules for quantity, 1153. 

Positive, 312 ; w. snp. sense, 997, obs. 7. 

Possessive pron., 338 ff. ; equiv. to gen., 
857, obs. 2 ; constr., 900 ; for emphasis, 
902; as obj., 903; for pers. pron., 904. 

Prozpositiv'e article, 261. 

Predicate, 836; part, as pred., 1101, 1122, 
1126 ; modifications, 1127. 

Prepositions, 719; primary use, 720; 
signif., 724; accent, 725; list of prep., 
726 ff. ; synt, 1071 ff. ; used as adv., 
1076, obs. 3; sep. from case, do., obs. 4; 
after case, do., obs. 5; in comp., 1077; 
tmesis, do., obs. 2. 

Present tense, 414 ; continued, 414 ; sig- 
nif., 423 ; ind. pass, modified, 591 ; new 
pres., 6S0. 

Primary tenses, 426. 

Proceleusmatic, 1169. 

Proclitics, 41. 

Pronoun, 332 ff . ; division, 333; synt, 
853 ff J 

Pronunciation. 10 ff. 

Proparoxijtone, 26, 29, 1200. 

Proper names, w. art., 913. 

Properispoyiienon, 26, 29, 1206. 

Proportionals, 310. 

Prosthesis, 52. 

Prosody, 1148 ff. 

19 



Punctuation,, 52. 

Pure vowels, 9 ; verbs, 530. 

Quality, adv. of, 693 ; gen.- of quality, 9S7. 

Quantity, 3, 4; 1 decl., 112; compensa- 
tion, 162; rules for, 1149 ff, 1152; in 
position. 1153; vow. before another, 
1154 ; doubtf. vow. in first and mid. 
syl.,1156; in final syl., 1157; increment 
of nouns, 1159 ; in verbal inflexions, 
1160; in deriv. and comp., 1164; adv. 
of, 692. 

Recessive accent in verbs, 436. 

Peciprocal pronoun, 351, 353. 

Reduplication, 473, 477, 492, 493 ff. ; At- 
tic, 49S; in compounds, 500; in all 
moods, 501 ; in verbs in /it, 607, 612 ; 
improper red., 603; wanting in verbs in 
vjou, 609. 

Reflexive pronoun, 346 ff. 

Relative p>ronoun, 358 ff. ; synt, 928 ; 
adj., 941 ff. ; in neg., expressing condi- 
tion, 1066, 3d. 

Respect to, 971 ff., 1045. 

Responsive pronoun, 364 ff. 

Result, 1090. obs. 3. 

Rhythm, 1170, note; species, 1171 ff. ; 
names, 1173. 

Root, 93; in 1 decl., 107; in 2 decl., 130; 
in 3 decl., 145, 153 ff. ; of verbs, 454 ; un- 
changed, 451, (1); strengthening lab. 
root, 453 ; pal. root, 459 ; ling. roo~t, 460 ; 
liq., 461 ; other r., 462 ff. ; reduplicated, 
464 ; stren^. w, vow., 465 ; rule for find- 
ing, 466, ft 469 ; threefold form, 46S ff. ; 
primary and secondary, 469; changes 
in, 471; of v. in /u.t, 611. 

Rough breathing, 53, 59, obs. 3, 4. 

Sampi, 308. 

Secondary tenses, 425; roots or stems, 

467, 470, (b). 
Semi-vowels, 17. 
Secrecy, 432. 

Sentence, simple, 1122 ; compound, 1129 ff. 
Separation, w. gen., J 006. 
Sharing, w. gem, 1004. 
Short vowels, 3. 5 ; rules 1 decl., 112 ; 

rules for, 1153 ff. 
Singular, 93, 103 ; adj. in agr't, 859 ; adj. 

neut, 861 ; for adv., 864 ; verb and 

nom., 957 ; for plur. imp., 1085, 2. 
Smooth breathing, 42, 43. , 
Source, w. gen., 1000, obs. 2, 1011. 
Spondee. 1167. 

Stem or Root, 454. See Root. 
Subject, S35 ; as nom., 955; omitted. 956, 

obs. 2; impers. v. as subj., do., obs. 3; 

two or more, 953 ; collect subj., 959 ; 

inf. Wi subj., 109L 
Subjunctive, 403; in verbs in juu. 620; 

synt., 10SC ; w. primary tens.. 1051; w. 

cond. particles. 1051, (1); with relative 

words, 1031, (2); w. ecu/, <fcc. do., rem. ; 

in hypothetic prop., 1082; doubt, 1082, 

1; in final clauses, 1033. (1); w. past 

tens., 1033, rem. 1 ; w. fut indie, 1083, 



434 



ENGLISH INDEX. 



(2), rem. ; in independ. clauses, 1034 ff. ; 

to command, do., (a) ; forbid, (b) ; de- 
liberate, (c); in hypothetic, prop., HIT, 

1118. 
Substantia en as 'numerals, 310; in agr't, 

857; latter subs, understood, 857, obs. 

1; for adj., 858, obs. 1 ; w. prep., obs. 2. 
Superlative, 312 ; of eminence, 312, 881 ; 

strengthened, 882 ; w. gen. pi., 997. 
Supposition as fact, 1079, 1; implying 

denial, 1079, 2, HIS ; as doubtful, 1083 ff., 

1117-8. 
Swearing, adv. w. accus., 1063. 
Syllabic augment, 475, 481 ff. 
Syllables, 21 ; successive, 58, 59. 
Syncope, 52. 
Syntax, 828 ff. 
System of tenses, 506, 527 ff. ; anapaestic, 

1179. 
Syzygy, 1170, 1188. 

Temporal augment, 477, 4S0. 

Tenses, 397, 411; names, 412; double 
forms, 413 ; classified, 425 ff. ; in pairs, 
426, 427 ; tense-root, 469 ; formation in 
mute verbs, 537 ff. ; in pure verbs, 530 
ff. ; in liquid verbs, 545 ff. ; in verbs in 
/txt, 618 ff. ; of deponent verbs, 665 ; aor. 
subj. as imperf., 10S5. 

Tense signs, 503 ff., 506. 

Tense endings, 514. 

Termination, 80, 99 ; 1 decl., 107 ; 2 decl., 
130 ; 3 decl., 144 ; adj., 267 ; and mood- 
vowels combined, act. voice, 523 ; mid., 
524; pass., 525. 

Tetrameter, 1173. 

Time, as basis of tenses, 423 ff. ; adv. of, 
691; when, 1049; how long, 1049; sec- 
tion of, do., obs. 2 ; in which, do., obs. 
2; w. part., 1109. 



Tmesis, 52. 

Transitive verbs, 374-5, 379, 381 ; synt., 
1006, obs. 5; govern ace, 1025; for in- 
trans, do. obs. 8 ; take double obj., 1026 if 

Tribrach, 1163. 

Triemimer. 1174, note. 

Trimeter, 1173. 

Trochee, 1167 ; Trochaic metre, 1177. 

Ultimate, penult., antepen., 26. 

Yau. See digamma, 45. 

Verbals, 435; elements of, 472; synt., 
1014, 1015. 

Verbs, 373 ff. ; analysis of, 443 ff. ; various 
classes of, 384 ff., 673-74 ; irreg. and de- 
fective, 686; classes w. ref. to stem., 
526. 

Verbs in /at, 605 ; redup., 607 ff. ; No. of 
tens., 610, 643 ; inflexion, 614 ff. ; forma- 
tion of moods and tens, in pass., 625 if. ; 
form in w used for, 637-8; with double 
neg., 1069 ; synt, 1078 ff. See Transi- 
tive^ Intransitive, Pure, Impersonal, 
&c. 

Verse, 1170 ff . ; its metres, 1173; com- 
pleteness, 1174. 

Vocative, 95; like nom., 103; 1 decl., 117, 
118; of n. in avg, &c, 149 ; 3 decl., 169 
ff. ; in part, in ok, 285 ; synt., 848. 

Voices, 401; act, 402; mid., 403; pass., 
404; terminations act, 523; mid. and 
pass., 524, 525; obs. on, 570; pass., 1036. 

Voicels, 3 ff. ; pronun., 10 ff. ; accented, 
32; vow. decl., 100. quantity, 112, 1149 
ff. ; contracted, 195 ff., 556. 

Wishing, opt, 1084, II., (a)\ ind., do., 
rem. 



GREEK INDEX. 



a, vow., 2; quant., 3 
ff. ; in subst., 102 ; 
in neut. plur., 104; 
1 decl. nom. end., 
107 ; quant., 112 ; 
decl., 114, 115; voc. 
sing., 118; in con- 
tract, 126 ff.; 140; 
3 decl. ace. sing., 
165; adj. fern., 270; 
as numeral, 306 ; 
temp, augm., 430 ; 
in mood vow.. 509 
exc 2 ; short bv exc. 
w ] rre verbs, 531, 
(1); cxcb.W. e,543 ; 
in contr. verbs, 557; 
in Dor. dial., 560. 

c, improp. diphth., 8. 

a, in comp., 715. 

a a, adv. of laughter, 
697. 

ayatiog, compar., 321 ; 
aya&t; w. fern, for 
maso, 866 ; gen. of 
attr., 937. 

aye, as adv., 702. 

ayeipo, w. Att. red., 
498, 

ayf/paog, 137. 

aye/.rjdov, adv., 708. 

ayKvpa, quant., 112, 

ayvv/xi, ayvvo, augm., 
481 ; red., 497. ' 

aypodi, -dev, adv. of 
place. 690. 



aypovSe, adv. of mot., 

690, 3. 
ayvceag, ace. pi., 218, 

exc. 
ayxi, adv. with gen., 

1060; w. dat., do. 

exc, 1, 1061. 
ayxo&t, w. gen., 1061, 

2d. 
ayov, part, pleon., 1110. 
adaupvc, par., 293. 
adduavrog (t£), gen. of 

mat., 1041, note. 
ade/.otdeog, 142. 
adcKsu, with ace, 1025, 

3, obs.l; 1035, obs. 6. 
adrjcog, decl., 272. 
a Jo?-, ellipt. gen., 1048, 

obs. 2 ; tfJ??, 8. n. 2. 
'AdpTjGrivTj, patron., 

251. 
dddvarog, par., 272. 
ddearog, w. gen., 991. 
'Adrjvaa, contr., 128. 
'Adfjvai, plur., 244. 
'Ad-yvalog (6), as subst., 

860. 
a&poog, decl., 271. 
Aidg, voc, 175. 
"Aidrj = gd7?, 3, n. 2. 
aidovuai, 1025, obs. 2, 

9th. 
cdd6g , from stem, 1 dQ ; 

obliqu. cases, 161; 

ace, 166; voc, 173; 

dials., 186 ; without 

plur., 243. 



aiveo, 531, (5), 532, 
exc 

alpeo), aug.,496; quant., 

531, (5), 532, exc 
aipeofiat, w. ace, 1025, 

obs. 9. 
aloxpog^ compar., 318; 

gen. pi. emph., 997, 

obs. 4. 
aioxvvojLiai, tv. part. 

and infin., 1105, obs. 

3. 
aireo), augm., 483 ; w. 

two ace, 1033. 
ansoiiaL, 531 (2). 
aurjKoa, perf. red., 499. 
(mut], for ayu-v, 66, obs. 

7. 
anovu), Att. red., 499 ; 

ins. (7 in pass., 533 ; 

fut. mid., 404, obs. 4; 

w. ace or gen., 1000, 

exc. 2; w. gen. and 

ace, 1029 ; w. part. 

and infin., 1105, obs. 

3. 
aKovGTog, -eog, 435. 
atiparua, with gen., 

985, obs. 3. 
a/c^p, 294, exc. 1 ; dat. 

w. koriv, 1017, obs. 

3. 
ahdrjGfcu, new pres. 

irreg. v., 678. 
aAecoap, irreg. n., 240. 
aAeityG), Att. red., 499. 
ateijj 531, 2. 



-JO 



GREEK INDEX. 



aAr/deia, quant, 112, 

(&); w. art., 910. 
a/iytfk, 159, 1G1. 
aArj-Sjjq, par., 291 ; 

afafor}, attract., 937, 

note 1. 
d?ug, w. dat, 1060, exc. 

1. 
d/iioKcj, new pres. irreg. 

v., 678; augm., 481; 

pass. w. ace. and 

geu., 1028, obs. 1. 
aAg, form., 154, exc; 

no plur., 243. 
qfanj, irreg., 237. 
aA/A, a/Jid ydp y 790, 

aAAa ye, 792. 
aAAyAotv, decl., 353, 

1043. 
aAAodanog, 340, obs. 
aAAolog, w. gen., 998, 

obs. 14, 1st. 
d?iAog, decl., 345 ; indef., 

367; w. gen., 998, 

obs. 14, 1st ; dat. of 

repet, 1022, note. 
hlAorptog, w. gen., 998, 

obs. 14, 1st. 
a/2. 7 ov 6e, 794. 
aAA' ovv ye, 793. 
aXvcKG), w. gen., 1006, 

4. 
dltya, in decl. noun, 242. 
a/i(j)iTa, 244. 
d f ua, with dat., 1062 ; 

with part, 1109. 
daaprdvio, form., 462, 

678; w. gen., 1006,9. 
dueivuv, 321. 
d/ue/Ju, w. gen. 1001. 
diieifiofia;., w. ace, 1025, 

obs. 1, 5th. 
d/uor, deci. for qfierepoc, 

372, obs. 2. 
dfiTrexoucu, augm., 487. 
diiinya, w. gen. or dat., 

1061, 1st. 
ajjvvo), w. gen., 1006, 7. 
afi^ij prep.., 753, 1076. 
dfxpLfiipjjicag, 418, obs.7. 
&/z0w, pron., 300, obs. 

2; w. plur. v., 961. 



av, strengthening ad- 
dition to root, 462. 

av, modal adv., 797 ff. ; 
w. imperf. ind., 1078, 
(3); in cond. prep., 
1079, (2); 1082, 2, 
1118 ; in indep. 
claus., 1084, (/>)ff.; w. 
opt. for imper., 1084, 

av (for edv), conjunc, 

799; w. subj., 1082, 

1, 1118. 
av = a av, 49. 
dvd, prep., 735, 1074. 
dvafiaGLr, w. double 

gen., 985, obs. 7. 
ava(3?ie7rG),w. dat., 1018. 
dvaXtoKo), augm., 484. 
avajuvaadai, mid., 404, 

5. 
avag, nom., 153 ; gen., 

160; par., 181. 
avareAAo), trans, and 

intr., 381. 
dvdiraAiv, adv. w. dat., 

1061, 3. 
dvdcGG), w. gen., 1008. 
dvddvo), w. syll. augm., 

481 ; w. double dat., 

1016, obs. 2. 
dvdpdrroSov, irreg. dat. 

plur., 23*7 ; -diori, 

adv., 707. ( 
avev, w. gen/, 1060. 
avexofzat, augm., 487. 
dvrjKooc, w. gen., 991. 
dvrjp, euphon. gen., 74 

accent, 147, exc. 1 

voc. sing., 169, 170 

dat. pi., 179; par., 

183. 
dvrjp, eras., 49. 
av&8juo)v, gen. of mat., 

985, obs. 4. 
avi6po)TL, adv. in r/, 706. 
avoiyw, doub. aug., 4S2, 

497. 
dvopd-oo, augm., 487. 
dvoxXoo, augm., 487. 
dvrajuel/3ojiiai,lQ25, obs. 

1, 5. 



dvrl, prep., 727, 1072; 

price, 1053. 
dvrifSoAeu, augm., 489. 
avrinpv, adv. w. gen., 

1060. 
dvuG), short fut, 531 (4); 

pass, tens., 532. 
avu, compar., 326; adv. 

of place, 710 ; dvu- 

dev, 710. 
dvcoyeuv, Att. 2 decl. 

par., 138. 
agios, w. gen., 976 ; 

w. inf., 1090. 
diraye, adv. of rejec- 
tion, 697, obs. 2. 
d^aX?id(j(70), w. gen., 

1006, 3. 
d-xavTLKpv, adv. w. gen., 

1060. 
aTre(p^idov, aspir. exc, 

59^ exc. 3. 
direx^, aTraxofiai, with 

gen., 1006, 6. 
airAoi], contr., 128. 
d-nAovg, comp. 313. 
airo, prep., 728, 1072; 

aizo, after case, 1076, 

obs. 5. 
aTrodeiKw/ui, w. doub. 

ace, 1035, obs. 5. 
drrodidpacKG), 1025, obs. 

2 1. 
' ' AnoAAcov, w. short voc, 

170. 
aKOjbidxojuaL, w. ace, 

1025, obs. 2, 8. 
anocTspto, w. gen., 

1006, 2 ; w. 2 cas., 

1035, obs. 7. 
airorvy xdvo), -ofiai, with 

gen., 1006, 9. 
aTTTo^evG), dat. of loose 

relation, 1045. 
apa, 787, 805. 
apa, 806. 
apyvpeog, decl., 271, 

exc. 
apeliov, 321. 
dpEGKEt, impers. v., 667. 
dpeCKi*, 463. 
ap£Tijg ) gen. of cause, 



GREEK INDEX. 



437 



1041 ; gen. after adv., 

1044, 4. 
'Aprjg, irreg. decl., 236 ; 

aprioc, gen. in respect 
m e>/,1044, 2. 
dpi, epi, intens. partic, 

716. 
dpKeo, short fut., 531, 
« (2) ; dptcel, impers., 
% 667. 
{ap/LLo^G), 460. 
dpveoiiai, dep. w. ace., 

1039, obs. 4. 
dpvvfiai, 609, obs. 3. 
apocD, short fut., 531, 

aprrd^u, 460. 
apiza^ compar., 330. 
dpp-rrv, 287. 
"Apreuig, voc., 172. 
dprw, short fut., 531, 

apxfjv, apxdc, adv. ace, 

701, 1044, note 2. 
<W W , w. gen., 1008, 1 ; 

apxojuai, do., 6. 
aciLkvu, r\, scil., e^km, 

1017, obs. 4. 
deca, and clgocl, dial., 

372, obs. 2. 
•arai, -aro, 3 pi. Ion. for 

-V7a^, --^70, 600. 
CH7TV, 162. 

a7ep, w. gen., 1060. 

'Artf/c, 59, obs. 6. 

'ArpeldTjg, par., 120. 

Grrc, (177a, dial., 372, 
obs. 2. 

d7i;^cj, augm., 491. 

avaivG), augm., 483, 
exc. 

avd-evreo, with gen., 
I 1008, 1. 
* av~dvo>, augm., 483. 

avTLKa, w. part., 1109. 

awrdc, intens. pron., 
341; uses, 342 ff. ; 
compar., 324: par., 
345 ; avrov refer, to 
fern., 876 ; avroic 
referring to £#W7, 
884; nom. by attrac, 



1094; ethical dat., 

1010, rem. 
avrov =z eavrov, 350. 
avroxeipr, adv. in i, 

705. 
aoap, compar., 326. 
doaipoviiai, w. two acc, 

1006, obs. 5. 
do&ovoe, compar., 330. 
doveioc, w. gen. or dat., 

' 1013, obs. 1. 
aopuv, com., 316. ^ 
dovri, accent, 109, exc. 
axa/.noc, w. gen., 997, 

obs. 7. 
aXPi, a XP L ^ w. gen., 

1059, 1060; w. dif. 

cases. 1061, 6. 
d^avGrog, w.gen., 1014, 

obs. 3. 

3, mute, 14 ; w. a 
forming ip, 20, 61 ; 
euphon. changes, 56, 
57 ; num., 306. 

papai, adv. admir., 697, 
obs. 2. 

j3dd7?v. adv. in Srjv, 706. 

pad kg, dial., 185 ; corn- 
par., 319. 

palvo, 400, obs. ; irreg. 
v. perf., 585 ; part. 
pepuc, 288; 2 aor., 
610, obs. 4. 

Bd/c^oc, 59, obs. 6. 

pd/j.u, liqu. v., 461, 
467 ; perf., 549, (2), 
550 ; fut., 583. 

Pdrcrtj, 458, 471. 

3aGi/.eia, 112, (b). 

paGi/,evg, from dig., 158; 
acc, 166 ; voc, 169; 
dial., 185 : dat. plur., 
178; par.,' 218; corn- 
par.. 322 : for 6 paG., 
912,' 

paGi/.evaj. w. gen., 1008, 
2. 

pkpaa pepr/na, fr. palvo), 
585 ; pepaug, fiefa 
kwc, part., 588. 

pe/.riuv, par., 223. 



fir} pa, par., 152. 

Ptjggd, 459. 

^/a, w. gen., poet, 98 o s 

obs. 6. 
/?£/&>, Att. fut. of /3z/3d- 

C<j, 541, 576. 
jSioGKOj, pres. from /S^dw, 

678. 
; 3/.d7T7w, mid., 403 ; 

form., 458 ; w. acc, 

1025, obs. 1, 4. 
3/.aGT&vu, red., 495. 
pAhrUj red., 495 ; trans., 

1025, obs. 8, 2. 
fMrpug t gen. ? 160; acc, 

166; voc, 169. 
3ov/J/ : collect, n., 867. 
3oi/,ouai, augm., 478 ; 

imperf. ind. without 

dv, 1079, rem. 4. 

3oV/J3[l£VU, dat.W. EGTLVj 

1017, obs. 3. 
povg, fr. dig., 158; acc, 

166; dat. pi., 178; 

par., 184; contr., 

222. 
ppadig, compar., 319. 
3paxei, dat. of excess, 

1052. 
3povrd, w. subj. omit., 

95 6, 'obs. 2. 

yd/,a, irreg. n., 240. 
yafiiu, fut., 531, (5). 
yaiiku, perf., 418, ob3. 
7; fut., &c, 531, 

(5). 
yap, 808-9, 1076, obs. 

4, 1119. 
/dp, conj., 80S-9, 1076, 

obs. 4; 1119. 
yaGTTjp, decl., 163 ; dat. 

pi., 179. 
ye, 810. 
yea yfj, 127 ; without 

pi., 243. 
yeAaGelo), desider. v., 

673. 
ye/Au, w. short fut., 

531 (1): pass, tens., 

532 ; Dor., 580. 
ye/Mc, 138, obs. ; irreg. 

n., 237. 



438 



GREEK INDEX. 



yivog, dat., 1016, obs. 

2; gen., 1043. 
yevELacKG), incept, v., 

675. 
yspaiog, compar., 330. 
yepov, cjg yepovn, 1023, 

obs. 3. 
yevo, ins. a, 533, (6). 
yrfokofiai) w. ace, 1025, 

obs. 2, 9. 
yrjpaGKG), fr. yypao), 67^7. 
yiyvojuai, red., 464 ; w. 

part, 1108. 
ytyvojGKD, 400, obs. ; 

red., 463; perf, 495; 

pass, tens., 533. 
yXvtcvg, decl., 2*77, 3; 

compar., 319. 
yXvtyo, perf., 495. 
yvG)cdii7] ) dat., 1016, obs. 

2. 
ydvv, irreg. n., 239, 240. 
ypaizrog, verb, adj., 435. 
ypado, act. and mid., 

404, obs. 3, 3 ; perf. 

fut., 421 ; ypatyo/iai, 

w. gen., 1028, obs. 2. 
ypavg, fr. dig., 158. 
yw7/, voc, 172; irreg., 

233 ; nom., 240. 

da, in tens., 716. 

darjp, accent in voc, 
147, exc. 1. 

daifiwv, par., 183 ; gen. 
pi. of source, 985, 
obs. 4. 

danpv, datepvov, irreg. 
n., 235. 

danTv/iog, acc. in re- 
spect to, 1044, II. 

da/idco, short fut., 531, 

daKdvrjg, gen. of cir- 

cum., 987, obs. 10. 
da'g, accent, 148, exc. 3. 
d'e, con}., 811, 1119. 
de, paragog., 188, 1048, 

obs. 3. 
del, impers. v., 671 ; w. 

2 c'as., 1023, obs. 1 ; 

do., exc. 1. 



SeiKW/LUj 609, obs. 3 ; 
630. 

dsttcvvg, par., 283. 
deiva, indef. pron., 367 ; 

decl., 369. 
dsivog, w. inf., 1090. 
de"keap, irreg. n., 240. 
delfyig and -<piv, 154, 

exc. 
de/uag, w. circuml. gen., 

985, obs. 6 ; limit. 

acc, 1044, II. 
devdpov, irreg. decl., 

237; gen. pi., 1043; 

devdpa,w. part., 1101. 
deo/uai, w. gen., 1006, 

1020 ; w. inf., 1090, 

obs. 1. 
deov, to, impers., 671; 

absol, 1112, obs. 4. 
deovra, hog, &c, 303, 

obs. 4. 
depnu, 683. 
dea/uog, irreg. decl., 

230. 
(teffirdfa, w. gen., 1008, 

1. 
devpo, w. dat. or acc, 

1061. 
devrepdloq, adj. for adv., 

304, obs. 2 ; 865. 
devrepog^ ord. num., 

304; w. gen., 998, 

obs. 14, 1. 
deXO/LLcu, par., 666. 
deco, 531, (5); deov, 

contr., 559, obs. 1. 
fy, 812, 1119. 
67]?J]ll(ov, w. gen., 988. 
dialog el, 1105. 
dqloG), contr. par., 569. 
did, prep., 739 ff. ; w. 

acc. of cause, 1046, 

obs. 3; 1075. 
dla, poet. w. gen., 997, 

obs. 7. 
diatTatd, augm., 488, 

rem. - 
(hanoveo, augm., 488, 

rem. 
SiaXeyofiat, 404, obs. 3, 

4. 



diahnrcbv xp^ vov i 1110. 
StaX?iaTTG> f w. gen. t 

1006, 6. 
diaXvojuai, mid., 404, 

obs. 3, 4. 
ScareXeo), w. part., 1107. 
diacpepei, impers. v., 

1023, obs. 1. 
dtcKpepo, w. gen. or dat., 

1006, 6. 
did^opog, w. gen., 976, 

998, obs. 14. 
didaGKG), w. two acc, 

1033. 
didrjjAt, red. from fieo, 

682. 
dedovg, form., 155 ; par., 

282. 
(hdp&GKC), 463. 
didcojLu, 464; par., 630; 

1 aor., 645 ; pass. 

tens., 647. 
Siexco, w. gen., 1006, 6, 
ditcd^tj, w. acc. and 

gen., 1028, obs. 1. 
dkepog, 310, obs. 
6'lktjv, adv. acc, 701. 
dwpi^o), w. gen., 1006, 

n. / 

dnrXdoiog, w. gen., 998, 

obs. 14, 2. 
diirhoog , mult, num., 

310. 
dlnovg, 164; acc, 167; 

neut., 289. 
dig, num. adv., 310. 
dety-d-epejv, gen. of mat., 

1041, obs. 3. 
dtypog, irreg. n., 229. 
dix a , distrib., 310; w. 

gen., 1060. 
dci^do, contr. irreg., 

559, obs. 2. 
dtcjKG), w. gen., 1006, 7; 

1027; w. prep., 1028; 

do., obs. 1. 
SjLLug, accent, 148, exc. 

3. 
Soke!) impers. v., 670; 

w. dat., 1023 ; con- 

str., 1095, obs. 4. 
do/ceo, 465 ; tens., 470, 



GREEK INDEX. 



439 



677; fut., 583; So- 

kovv, absol. part., 

1112, obs. 4. 
dopv, par., 182; irreg. 

nom., 239, 240. 
dov?,evT€ov, verbal con- 

sIt., 1015, obs. 4. 
dovlog, w. gen. or dat, 

1013, obs. 1. 
dov^ form., 155 ; ac- 
cent, 148, exc. 3. 
dpaoov, imper., 1085, 4. 
dpax/J-uv, gen. of price, 

1009. 
dvag, subst. num., 310. 
dvvajua^ irreg. augm., 

478, rem. ; depon., 

610, obs. 5. 
tiwaorEvo, w. gen., 

1008. 
dbg, 718, 490. 
SvGapeario, augm., 490. 
dvarvx^f augm., 490, 

718. 
<%o, num., 300, obs. 2. 
d{'«, num., 300. 
Svg), perf. pass., 532. 
Jo), apoc. for dcb/ia } 52, 

6; 242. 

e, vow., 3, 5; contr., 
200; as num., 306 ; 
strength, vow., 465 
ff. ; sylL augm., 477, 
478; for temp, augm., 
481; for red., 494; 
mood vow., 508, 509. 

£, ace. pron., 334, 340. 

hdy % conj, 799; in de- 
pend, claus., 1081, 
rem. 1 ; expressing 
doubt, 1082, 1. 

Zap, contr., 224. 

eavroi), par., 347. 

kao), augm., 482 ; long 
in fut., 530, rem. 1. 

efiav, for e/37]Gav, 640. 

£/3tiv, 400, obs. 

kyyvtiev, adv., 1061. 

tyyvg, adv. compar., 
326; w. gen., 973; 



1061, 1. 



kyeipo, perf., 499 ; 2 

aor., 681. 
ey/caAecj, w. ace. and 

dat., 1028, obs. 3. 
h/Kparda, w. gen., 985, 

obs. 3. 
iyvcoaa, perf. of yiyvco- 

CTco, 495. 
eyvov, 400, obs. 
kypyyopa, perf. of eyel- 

pa), 499. 
kyxetpeu, augm., 489. 
eyu, w. num., 304, obs. 

3 ; par., 334 ; dial., 

372; after compar., 

998, obs. 9. 
sdoKa, 1 aor. of didujui, 

645. 
e&£?m, 684. 
£&7?Ka, 1 aor. of Tf&ijfi^ 

645. 
£iK£g>, augm., 482. 
d, w. fi% 1066 ; w. ind., 

1078, (1); in hyp. 

prop., 1079, (1); do., 

(2); w. opt., 1081, 

(1); w. hyp. prop., 

1082, 2 ; of wishing, 

697, obs. 2; 1084, II, 

rem. 
eia, adv. of parising, 
t 697, obs. 2. 
el6ap ) irreg. n., 240. 
elStj, 418, obs. 8. 
ei66c, part, from oMa, 

661 ; w. gen., 992 ; 

w. ace, do., note. 
elev, as adv., 702. 
elev av y 1084, II., (b). 
el&e, adv. wishing, 697, 

obs. 2 ; w. opt, 1084, 
^ II., (a). 
el/ca, augm., 482. 
eiKafa, augm., 484. 
eiKac, num. subst., 

3io. 

eIkg), w. gen., 1006, 8. 
elA^a, perf., 495, rem. 
eiTiTjxa, perf., 495, rem. 
flAov, 2 aor. of alpeo^ 

482. 
elficu, par., 656. 



eifiaprai, perf. from pei- 

pofiai, 495, rem. 
elfii, w. part, periphr., 

430, 1108; w. part., 

433 ; accent. 444 ; 

par., 652; dial., 653; 

w. gen., 999 ; elalv } 

w. two subst. sing., 
^ 958. 

elpi, par., 654. 1 

et7rf, imper. accented, \ 

438; forplur., 1085, ( 

2. 
elrrov, 1 pi., subj. del., 

1084, (c). 
eipTjKa, perf, 495, rem. 
eipyojuai, w. gen., 1006, 

5. 
eig, prep., 736, 1074; w. 

ydov, 983, obs. 1 ; w. 

ace. for dat., 985. 
els, num., 309 ; par., 

299 = superL, 882. 
elffa, augm., 482 ; par., 

657. ' 
elaofiai, fut. of olda, §61. 
eiou, w. gen., 1060; w. 

gen. or ace, 1061, 

4. 
sk or ££, prep., 729, 

1072; w. pass., 1037, 

note. 
EKCLGTGg, distrib. pron., 

872. 
knelvog, dem. pron., 345, 

354'; in contrast, 

886, 888. 
£Kf]pvt;£, w. subj. omit., 

956, obs. 2. ' 
kKKATjcia^o^ augm., 489. 
ekttoSgjv, w. gen., 1061, 

2. 
i/crdf, w. gen., 1060; 

£KTOC"&£V, do. 

EK(p£vyo), w. gen., 1006, 

4. 
£K&v, 294, exc. 1; w. 

elvat, 1096, obs. 3, 1. 
eIcllov, defect n., 243. 
eTwlvvcj, Att. red., 499; 

fut short, 531, (1); 

perf. pass., 532, exc; 



19 



440 



GREEK INDEX. 



strength, pres., 677; 

Att. fat, 57V. 
ehaxiGTog, compar., 3 2 8. 
kAaxvc, compar., 320, 

note, 321. 
£%aa, 531, 1; 677. 

eleyx^i perf. pass., 

tkiihzyfiai, 540, note. 
kAEog, irreg. decl., 236. 
cAsvdepog, w. gen., 985; 

obs. 3 ; w. gen. or 

dat., 1013, obs. 1. 
eAev&epdcj, w. gen., 

1006, 3. 
ehfaaica, perf. of k?iav- 

vg), 499. 
kM<i<jo, augm., 482. 
fA^f, 2 aor. imper. ac- 
cent, 438. 
fvkcj, augm., 482. 
'WOi&s, as adj., 858, 1. 
eAAeltte^ impers. with 

gen. and dat., 1023, 

obs. 1. 
'WCkrrvioTi, adv., 101. 
EAfiivq, 11, obs. 8. 
ejuavrov } 347 ff. 
^ujSejSAf/o&co, contin. 

perf., 409. obs. 2; 

418, obs. 7. 
kjU£(^ short, in fat., 531, 

(2); Att. red., 498. 
£ju€G)vtov, Ion., 352. 
kfifievo, augm., 485, 

obs. 2 ; red., 500. 
kfidg, poss. pron., 340; 

k/nov avTov, 900 ; 

emph., 902 ; to e/liov 

= £jtL£, and Tafia = 

£?m, 904. 
IfnrcLkiv, w. dat., 1061, 

3. 
kvavTtoopai, augm., 489. 
£v, in comp,, 71, obs. 8 ; 

prep., 732 ; idiom., 

1046, obs. 6; r.,1073; 

used adv., 1076, obs. 

3 ; tmesis, do., obs. 

4. 
kvSex^ai, impers. v. w. 

gen. and dat, 1023, 

obs. 1. 



evcVveiVj w. two ace, 

1035, obs. 2. 
£V£Ka, w. gen., 1046, 

obs. 3, 1060; evekev, 

w. gen., 1060. 

kvTJlljlEVOl, fr. EVCLTTTO), 

poss. w. ace, 1039. 
Ev-fravra, 53, obs. 
kvdviJLovpevovq. ace. for 

gen., 1094, obs. 2. 
kviavTti, dat. of excess, 

1052. 
evvv/Lu, strength., irreg. 

v., 677. 
kvoxos, w. gen. or dat., 

1013, obs. 1. 
svTog, 69 ; with gen., 

1060. 
-ivvcjV) end. for ETiooav, 

636. 
htjTTtov, w. gen., 1059, 

obs. 1. 
E^eoTiv, impers. v., 956, 

obs. 3 ; with dat., 

1023. 
EgkpXQjJ-af, prep. in 

comp., 1077. 
£%VU w. gen. or dat., 

1061. 
e^6v J ace. absol., 1112, 

obs. 4. 
ki-ovoiafa, with gen., 

1008, 1. 
k^oxog, w. gen., 997, 

obs. 7. 
£^o 1 compar., 326 ; w. 

art , 1056 ; w. gen., 

1060. 
£Oina, plnp. augm., 482. 
EoAira, plup. augm., 

482. 
kopya, plup. augm., 482. 
koq, rj, ov, dial., 372, 

obs. 2. 
£0pTaC,G) 1 augm., 482. 
£7raLTiciop,aL, w. ace. and 

gen., 1028, obs. 1. 
£?*-££, w. ind., 1078, (1); 

w. subj. and opt., 

1081, (1). 
kirEidav, w. fir}, 1066, 1 ; 

w. subj,, 1081, rem. 1. 



kiTEKElva, w. gen., 1060. 
ette^ei/ui, w. ace. and 

gen., 1028, obs. 1. 
kirij prep., 757 ff. ; dat 

of price, 1053,' obs. : 

r., 1076. 
kTudkcj, pass. w. acc, 

1039, obs. 3. 
emeaciai, dat of attrac, 

1095, obs. 5. 
£7tiK.QvpT]{ia, with gen., 

985, obs. 3. 
kncKovpoq, w. gen., 994. 
kiuAapBavopai, w. acc. 

and gen., 1028, obs. 

1. 
kTuAELTTo, 1025, obs. 2, 

6. 
kntpEAovpai, with gen., 

1001, 1. 
kiTLopiiktj, w. acc, 1025, 

obs. 2, 8. 
kiriirpoo$£v, with gen., 

1061, 2. 
kTTKjKETrrkoVj w. gen. or 

dat., 1015, obs. 4. 
karcAkovTi, dative of 

loose relation, 1045, 

4. 
kiriGTaTEG), with gen., 

1008, 4. 
kTurp£TZ£Tat, pass, with 

acc, 1038, obs. 2, 3. 
kiTOjuat., augm., 482. 
£7vpa3ov y 2 aor., TTEpfico, 

52, 8 ; 74. 
kpya(,opai, augm., 482; 

perf, 497. 
kperfioCj irreg. n., 229. 
kp?]T£VG), w. gen., 1006, 

5. 
ipi, intens. part., 716. 
kpec, acc, 168. 
'EpfiEac^ r/c, contr. n., 

127.' ■ 
"Ep^o), kpTrv^G), augm., 

482. 
ippiQa, perf. of ptnTo, 

444. 
kpTTv^G), frequent, 674. 
kppojukvQc^ compar., 

325. 



GREEK INDEX. 



441 



IpXOfiat (ppaoov, 1106. 
kpurvAog, dim., 253. 
-ec, changed into og. in 

3 decl. neut., 159^ 
kadio, w. gen., 1003; 

w. ace, do. 
Ecrra/uev, by syncope, 

646. 
iareug, Ion. part., 589. 
fori, w. gen., 999 ; w. 

dat, 1016. 
sorcvol, ear iv bang, 939 ; 

ear iv bnov, 940 ; eariv 

ore, do. 
Eoriato, augm., 482. 
iorug, part. perf./crr?//^, 

588. 
ego, compar., 326; w. 

gen., 1060. 
krepog, indef. pron., 

299, obs. 1, 367 ; w. 

gen., 998, obs. 14, 1. 
hrrjoicLL, accent, 109, 

exc. 
£Vj in augm., 490; 

meaning, 118; ev 

Ah/eiv, 1034; ev ex £l , 
^ 1044. 
evye, adv. of praise, 

? 697, obs. 2. 
evyevTjg, ace, 166 ? rem. 
evdotu/uec), augm., 490. 
evep-yereo } aug., 490 ; 

w. acc, 1025, obs. 1, 

4. 
evr/-&ec>rarov, intens. su- 

t perl., 881. 
Ev&vg, with particip., 

f 1109. 
Evvoia, dat. of cause, 

1046, obs, 1. 
svpi, imper. 2 aor., ac- 
cent, 438. 
evvo/ci, quan., 112 (b). 
evvoik, compar., 313. 
evoI, adv., 697, obs. 2. 
Evopaeu, augm., 490. 
evnarptg, fr. stem, 164. 
ebwopog, \v. gen. or dat., 
^ 1013, obs. 1. 
evpecj, root of evpioKu, 

531, (5), 469. 

]9* 



ehpiGKG), threefold form, 

469 ff.; augm. 484; 

formation, 678. 
evpog, acc. of specif., 

1025, obs. 6. 
evpvg, compar., 315. 
evoefiijg, compar., 315. 
evxaptg, par., 292. 
evxo/Liai, w. dat., 1018. 
ecpe^fjg, w. gen. or dat., 

1061. 
efyrjva, 1 aor. act., 548. 
e<pv<pr), 5, exc. 1. 
ex&iGTog, tv. gen., 997, 

6. 
ex&pog, compar., 318. 
exofievu, dual w. neut. 

pi., 871. 
expfjv, impers., 672. 
ex^, for ex^, 59, obs. 

3 ; augm., 482 ; w. 

gen., 1006, 5. 
eipevoju.cn, perf., 494. 
eo, root of "ltjiil, 608. 
£cog, w. ind., 1078, 1 

with subj. and opt., 

1081 (1). 

/-, 44, 45, 158. 

s, origin, 18* resolved, 

20; verbal charac, 

460. 
£d, intens. part., 716. 
£dw, contr. v., irreg. 

contr., 559, obs. 2. 
Zeo, short flit., 531,(2). 
Cvyog, irreg. n., 229. 
£&>, frequent, term.. 674. 
C,o)a, neut. pi. with v. 

sing., 957. 
^dyvvv/ii, -via, new 

pres., 678. 

7], vow. quan., 3 : end. 
of 1 decl., 107; of 
3 decl., 248; temp, 
augm., 480 ; subj. 
mood vow., 509. 

t), conj., than ; w. corn- 
par., 879, 998, obs. 
9; w. inf., 1096. 



7;, article, fern., r) avpiov, 

scil. rjfiepa, 918. 
TjjlaoKG), incept, v., 675. 
Tjyefiovevu, with gen., 

1008, 3. 
r)yeofiai, w. gen., 1008, 

3. 
Tjyefiovir], w. doub. gen., 

985 ; obs. 7. 
rjck, 892. 
r/dofievtj, scil. EjLiotj 

idiom., 1017, obs. 3. 
rjdvg, par., 277. 
7jK.rjK.6ecv, plup. aKOvco, 

499. 
rft&ev, w. inf., 1087, 

obs. 4. 
rjAiKLurcjv, gen. part., 

978. 
rjALKog, correlative, 370, 

941. 
T]j±ai, par., 658. 
V/uap, irreg. n., 240. 
rjuedarcog, gent. poss. 

pron., 340. 
fjfiepa, acc. of cont. 

time, 1049, obs. 2 ; 

dat. of means, do.; 

gen. date from, do. 
rjiierepog, deriv., 340 ; 

emphat., 902. 
r)ui, half, 304, obs. 1. 
I rjuLralavrov, 304, obs. 

1. 
I rjv, conj.=£d^, 799; w. 

liV, 1066. 
I t)v, imperf. of eliii, 652. 
| tjvlkcl, adv., 697. 
j rjirap, par., 182; acc. 

of limit, 1039, obs. 3. 
; t ~RpaK?ier}g, f/g, contr. 

par., 225; dat, 1046, 

6. 
Vpog, form., 156, 161 ; 

acc. 166 rem; decl. 

2 15-, obs. 2. 
f/ Hpar, gen. of cause, 

985, obs. 4. 
rjvxoiirjv, augm., 484 ; 

imperf. without av, 

1079, rem. 4. 
r/x&, contr. par., 214. 



442 



GREKK INDEX. 



Qd?i?jc, irreg. decl., 236. 
-d-avarciG), desider. v., 

673. 
ddvarog, gen. w. rkTuog, 

985, obs. 6; dat. of 

instr., 1046, obs. 4. 
ddrspov, irreg. crasis, 

57, 3. 
-&av/ua£(D, w. gen., 1001. 
tiacptieig, 1 aor. part. 

pass., 59, exc. 3. 
•&k[iig, irreg. n., 239. 
dev, adv. ending, 188, 

1048, obs. 3. ' 
-&Eog, com par. as adj., 

322. 
devfiog, irreg. n., 229. 
$eu, short fut., 53 1,(6). 
QyjSrioi, 121. 
t^7P, par., 151. 
&i, adv. ending of place, 

188, 1048, obs. 3. 
-&Mo, short fut., 531, 

. (I) - 

VV7JCK.G), intr. v., 404, 
obs. 2 ; trans., 467. 

fioijuaTiov, irreg. contr., 
57, 3. 

dpdcrQv, amplif., 254. 

dpavu, 533, (&). 

dpi^ par., 180. 

■dvydrr/p, decl., 163. 

-&ve?i?i7i, dat. of repetit., 
1022, note. 

Qu/udg, 117, obs. 1. 

#^f, accent, 148, exc. 3. 

i, as vow., 3, 5 ; forms 
diphth., 7 ; end. 3 
decl., 192 ; contr., 
199, 205; length- 
ened in temp, augm., 
480; in comp. adj., 
320, note; in verb, 
roots, 459 - if. ; in 
red., 464 ; w. pron. 
emph., 356. 

I. num., 309. 

ids, imper., 2 aor., 438 ; 
as adv., 1063, obs. 4. 

'idecdai, for tiers 18 ., 
1090, obs. 4. 



Idusvai, 661, obs. 4. 
IdovTij w. <5f, 1023, 

obs. 3. 
Idob, adv. w. nom., 

1063, obs. 4. 
lei, imp. for lefti, 635. 
tyfii, par., 655. 
'Irjoovg, 240. 
id-i, ide, as adv., 702. 
luavog, compar., 314. 
Iketevcd, augm., 480. 
kero, 2 ace, 1017, 

rem. 3. 
ifiaoou, 679. 
Iva, conj., 786; w. fir}, 

1066, 1; in depen. 

claus., 1081; in final 

claus.. 1084; w.ind., 

1084, rem. 2. 
loi>, io), adv., 697, obs. 

2. 
ia/iev, Ion. io/uev, 661, 

obs. 4. 
l-ktukov (ro\ collect., 

861. 
lirirdTijc, dial., 121. 
Ig, 45; w. part, gen., 

985, obs. 6. 
lojiev, Ion. idfiev, 661, 

obs. 4. 
iooppoirog, w. gen. or 

dat., 1013, obs. 1. 
ioog, w. gen. or dat., 

1013, obs. 1. 
lorrj, imper., 634. 
loTrjfii, pres. from ordw, 

682; par., 630. 
Igto), imper., 641. 
loxvpoc, comp., 314. 
ix&vc, contr. par., 222. 
-iti, Attic fut, 541, 578. 
iop-sv, subj. exhort., 

1084, (a). 
'Igjvov, w. doub. gen., 

985, obs. 7. 

k, mute, 14 fif. ; before 
c, 62 ; before //, 65. 

/ca, perf. act end., 539 : 
do., rem. 2 flf., 549. 

KCL-d-Evdo), doub. augm., 
486. 



Ka&TjjLtat, augm., 486. 
icad-i^G)) augm., 486. 
aai, 813; /c. ot'ro^, 890; 

k. ravra, 890; w. 

dv, /cdv, 784. 
ica'nrep, 784. 
/eawj, 531, (7). 
/cd/c, 47. 

KaKOAoy£G),w. ace, 1034. 
Katiovovg, compar., 313. 
tcanog, compar., 321. 
tcatctig Troceiv, 1034. 
/ca/lew, quant, fut, 531, 

(5); perf. pass., 418, 

obs. 8 ; 584. 
KaXkicsTog, 997, obs. 2, 

obs. 4. 
KaXXiuv, compared, 328. 
nalog, compar., 318. 
KaXcyg ex £LV i w. gen., 

972. 
K&JLLVG), irreg. perf., 549, 

,(2). 
k&jlhttg), fr. stem, 458. 

/cdv (/cai dv), 784. 

/cdpa, w. gen. periphras., 

985, obs. 6. 
/cdp?7, irreg. n., 248. 
ndpi]ap 1 irreg., 240. 
ndprjvov, irreg. n., 248. 
/card, prep., 742, 1075. 
Karafiavd-dvo, w. parti- 

cip., 1104, 2. 
naTrjyopeo, augm., 489 ; 

w. gen., 1028, obs. 2 

ff. ; 6 Karrjyopidv, 

1101, obs. 2, n. 
KarciKvpcevG), w. gen., 

1008. 
nardpx^ w. gen., 1008, 

7. 
Karsaya, w. gen., 972. 
KaT&aveiVj synt, 1087, 

obs. 1. 
/cdrw, adv. of place, 

710; compar., 326. 

KdTCJ&EV, 710. 

Kelfiatj par., 659. 
Kenfeia&ai, perf. pass., 

418, obs. 7. 
KEKTTjiuaL (fcrao/Liai), 418, 

obs. 8. 



GREEK INDEX. 



443 



KEK-ijfiriv, opt. perf., 

599. 
Ke/iev&og, irreg. n., 

231. 
KE/.EVG), perf. pass., 533, 

54^ rem. ; constr., 

1025, obs. 3. 
keagu, 582. 

keq&agjv, amplif., 88, 4. 
nepdog, compar., 323. 
WP, w. periphr. gen., 

985, obs. 6. 
nrjpv$ag e^g), 1108. 
/af, voc, 171. 
K/,d£w, form. fr. stem, 

460. 
kZcu'w, 531, (7); partic. 

after tiaivu, 1105, 3. 
k/Ag), 531, (1). 
kXeig), 533, (&). 
KAETzrrjg, compar., 323. 
K?„7}povou£G), w. ace. and 

gen., 1004, exc. 
K/uvu, form., 553. 
kalgltjv, ace. of place, 

1048, obs. 1. 
nva'iG), perf. pass., 533. 
kolvoc, w. gen. or dat., 

1013, obs. 1. 
ko/mvg) } pass, forms, 

533, (6). 
noiii^u), Att. fut., 541, 

576. 
Kopa^ par., 180. 
Kopvf, acc, 168; par., 

181. 
Kpa^Li, irreg. v., 679. 
Kpaivu, w. gen., 1008, 

1. 
ttpag, accent, 148. 
tcpa-EG), w. gen., dat., or 

acc, 1008, obs. 8. 
fcpsag, par., 216. 
KpeiGGuv, compar., 321. 
Kpzioaovuv, gen. of at- 

trac, 1095, obs. 5. 
Kpivu, form., 553. 
Kpovicjv, or KpovidTjg, 

patron., 250. 
Kpovoj, pass, tens., 533, 

(&)• 

KpvfidrjVi adv., 706. 



Krdofiac, 418, (obs. 8); 
perf., 494; subj. and 
opt. perf., 599. 

kte'ivg), form., 539, (4), 
553. 

ureig, 154, exc. 

n'vdog, compar., 328. 

KvtcAog, irreg. n. 230. 

kvk/m, adv., 701. 

KtvUtt, 533. 

/ci>on>, decl., 160; corn- 
par., 323. 

kcjavu, quant, pass.. 
530. 

A, liqu. cons., 17 ; in 
3 decl., 144; verbs, 
545. 

Ad, 'intens. part, 716. 

Aaac, acc, 166: 

?ji{3£, 2 aor. imper. ac- 
cent, 438. 

z&yog, 136 ; Att., ?iay6g, 
136; par., 138. 

/AiyxavG), formed, 462 ; 
irreg. red., 495, rem. ; 
w. acc, 1004, exc. 

?„al/.atb, par., 180. 

?A/.og, compar., 330. 

/MjLijS&vG), form., 462, 
680; sec root, 467; 
threefold stem, 469 
ff. ; red., 495, rem. ; 
mid. w. gen., 1004, 
exc. 

/Jiurrag, 153; gen., 160; 
voc, 172; par., 181. 

?*avd-avo 1 form., 462, 
680 ; sec. stem, 467, 
470 ; denoting secre- 
cy, 432 ; w. acc, 
1025, obs, 2, 4; w. 
particip., 1107 ; mid. 
w. gen., 1001, 2. 

Aaog, 137 ; Att., As6g, 
dc collect, n,, 959. 

/Apvyg, par., 180. 

"h&ya, perf. in eornp., 
495, rem. ; 539, (4). 

to /.syouEvov, 104, 4, 
note 2 ; /.syovGiv, w. 
indef. subj., 956, obs. 



1 ; 1 aor. pass, partic, 
164 ; AEAEypat, in- 
flect., 595 ; Ab/Euv, 
w. doub. acc, 1033, 
obs. 1 ; ev teyELv, 
1034. 

asittg), perf., 539, 542 ; 
synops., 544; 1 aor. 
pass., 153; perf. fut., 
421. 

\EK-og, verb, adj., 435. 

Aei^ins. g in pass., 533. 

azgtv, voc, 175 ; par., 
181. 

Zyya, w. gen., 1006, 
10. 

lijGTT/piov, abstr. for 
concrete, 866. 

ArjTulag and Aqrcjig, 
patron., 251. 

At, intens., 716. 

/U/LLf/V, voc, 170. 

?ag, irreg. n., 246. 
/uGGOfiaij w. acc, 1020, 

exc. 
AiravEVG), w. acc, 1020, 

exc. 
AoyorroiEQ, augm., 491. 
Aoyog, par., 134. 
Aoifiopovpai, w. dat. or 

acc, 1035. 
?,ovo, mid., 404, obs. 

3, 1. 
Xvpaivopai, w. acc or 

dat,, 1035. 
Av7r?p>, appos. acc, 

1025, obs. 7. 
Avx^og, irreg. n., 230. 
2,vUj tenses, 503 flf. ; 

quant, inpass.tenses, 

532, exc, w. gen., 

1006, 3. 

AG) = &£?M, 321. 

aghuv, comp., 328. 
?uG>GTog, superl. for corn- 
par., 998, obs. 15. 

p, liqu. cons., 17 ; w. 

mutes, 64 ff. 
pa, adv. of swearing^ 

814, 1063. 
paKapj compar., 313. 



441 



GREEK INDEX. 



ftaiipSg, compar., 318 ; 

fuaKpti, w. superl., 

882. 
liaka, 712. 
[lakiGra, adv. superl., 

712; ra pal., 700; 

strength., 882. 
pav&avu, form., 462 ; 

sec. tenses, 467, 469, 

471. 
jLtdprvp and paprvpog, 

irreg. n., 235. 
ju&GGov, Dor. for fid^ov, 

331. 
fi&xofAcu, w. kind, noun, 

1025, obs. 8. 
lieyalrjTup, decl., 287. 
ph/ag, par., 294; corn- 
par., 321. 
ps^g, w. exew, 972. 
/LLedixjKG), incept, v., 

675. 
fieiCov, 321; w. gen., 

973 ; dial., 331. 
pEtpopai, perf. irreg. 

red., 495, rem. 
jueiov, compar., 328; 

jueiov w. iwKEaq, 876. 
[telag, form., 154, exc. ; 

par., 274; compar., 

315; [leXavTaTOL, w. 

fern., 869. 
fieXei, w. dat. and gen., 

1023, obs. 1. 
piTu, gen., 160. 
fiehiToeig, contr. par., 

226. ; 
/ie?i?M. augm.,478, rem. 
{lev, 815. 
pkvog, w. ep. gen., 985, 

obs. 6. 
pivu, liqu. v. fut., 547 ; 

1 aor., 548 ; perf., 

549, (3). 
/LL£(j(pa, w. gen. or ace, 

1061, 4. 
juETa, prep., 745, 1075; 

compound, w. adj., 

1013, 2d. 
HETadLdoiM, w. gen. and 

dat., 1004, 1. 
psragv, 858, obs. 1, 2d; 



w. gen., 1060; w. 
part., 1109. 
[ieteoti, w. dat. and 
gen., 1023, obs. 1. 



JUETEXO), w. 



gen. 



and 



ace, 1004, exc. 
fiETpov, par., 135 ; ps- 
Tpo), 118, obs. 2. 

V&XPh ^XP L S, w. gen., 
&c, 1060, 1061, 6. 

py, neg., 1064 ff . ; w. 
cond. conj., 1066, 1; 
w. imper. and subj. 
aor. and opt., do., 2 ; 
\v. rel. and particip., 
do., 3; w. inf., do., 4; 
w. verbs of fearing, 
do., 5 ; as interrog. 
part., do., 6 ; w. ind. 
fut., 1083, (2), rem.; 
w. subj. and opt. in 
final clause, 1083, 
(2) ; w. subj. aor., 
1084(5); 1085, 3. 

prj yhoiTo, 1084, II., (c). 

pydsig, 299, 367. 

pfjvig, 220, note. 

prjvio, qnant, 530. 

pr/rr/p, decl., 163; voc, 
169 ; indep. ace, 
1025, obs. 7. 

fi7]Ti£T?]g, dial., 121. 

pyrtg, decl., 363. 

fiiaivo, liqu. v. perf., 
549, (1). 

piicpog, compar., 321 ; 

/LiiKpov 6eIv, 1096, obs. 1. 

//^•yjycr/cw, form., 463 ; 
perf. and aor. pass., 
534 ; subj. perf. pass., 
599; w. gen., 1001, 
2; with par tic, 1104, 
1. 

pipvo, irreg. red., 464. 

[iiv, end, 35 ; ace. 
pron., 337, 372, obs. 
1. 

Mo>£jf, gen. and ace, 
138, obs. 

pv?/pov£vu, w. gen., 
1001, 2. 

po/ibvco, perf, 549, (1). 



* 



povag, num. subst., 310. 
/LiovoKEpug, 310, obs. 
poi\ x poi, fie, enclit., 

335. 
povca, form., 98 ; par., 

116; dial., 121. 
poX^dg, irreg. n., 229. 
pvo, quant, in fut., 531, 

(4)- 
M.uoijg and MocEvg, ir- 
reg. n., 235. 



v, liqu. cons., 17 ; be- 
fore the mutes, 67 
ff.; end. 3 decl, 144; 
end. ace sing., 167, 
168 ; in verb, stems, 
462 ; before /c, 549. 

vac, infin. end., 443, 
511. 

vavg, from dig., 45 ; 
ace, 166 ; voc, 171 ; 
dat. pi, 178; dial., 
185 ; vrjeg, w. nu- 
mer., 303, obs. 3, 4. 

vegjc, Att. for vaog, 
138. 

vf/zw, perf, 549, (3), 
550; par., 554. 

v£u, pure v. fut., 531, 
(6). 

vE&TEpog, w. gen., 997, 
5. 

vrj, neg. particip., 717 ; 
w. ace, 1063. 

N^i'w/, patr., 251. 

viVj enclit., 35 ; for ace, 
337, 372, obs. 1. 

vouevCj par., 184. 

vvt-, ace pi. durat., 
1049, obs. 1. 

rw, dual., 336. 

vutrEpog, 340. 

vtirog, irreg. n.. 229. 



f, doub. cons., 18, 20; 

3 decl. nom. end., 

102, 144. 
i-vv, Att. for ovv, prep., 

733. 
£«, Dor. end. for co, 

5b0. 



GREEK INDEX. 



445 



o, vow. quant., 3 ; in 2 
decl., 130; contr., 
196 ff. ; in augm., 
480 ; mood vow., 
509. 

6, art., 256; dial., 262 
synt., 905 ff. ; w 
particip., 915, 916 
w. adv., 917 ; w 
prep., 919, 920 
neut. art. w. inf. 
921; w. clauses, 922 
ellipt, 925 ; w. \ikv 
and\df, 926; 6 616- 
kuv, 1101, obs. 2, 
note; ol aTCXot, tto?.- 
fa>i, bliyot, &c, 923. 

by6oog, decl., 271. 

b6e, 259, 354; synt., 
887; = here, 892; 
= tyw, 892. 

661, 356. 

666c, 233 ; 666v, ace. of 
dist., 1051, obs. 

b6ovg, 153; voc, 175; 
par., 181. 

o;«, Att. red., 498. 

bfev, adv., 697, obs. 1. 

ulj oljioi, adv. bewail- 
ing, 697, obs. 2. 

oi, opt. mood-vow., 509. 

ola, ellipt., 945. 

olaKL^cj, augm., 483, 
exc. 

ol6a, par., 661 ; w. 
part, 1104; olcW ug, 
^ 1085, 4. 

olnelog, w. gen. or dat., 
t 1013, obs. 1. 

oineo, aug., 483. 

olnriiia, amplif., 254. 

olnog, underst. after 
^ prep., 983, obs. 1. 

oiKovpecj, augm., 483, 
exc. 

oifcrpog, com par., 318. 

olvi^o), augm., 483, exc. 

olov, adv., 697, obs. 1. 

o\og, correl., 370 ; svnt, 
941 K; exclam.,94S; 
w. elfzi, 949. 

o\6g re, olov re, 950. 



olg, aco, 166, 220, 

note. 
olod-a, 661 ; olo& ore, 

ojc, b, w. imper., 1085, 

4. 
olarpdo), augm., 483, 

exc. 
oixo/Liai, w. part., 1108, 

.obs. 7. 
bXiyog, pi. w. art., 923 ; 

6/Uyw, dat. of excess, 

1052. 
bliyopeo, w. gen., 1001, 

1. 
oWvpu, fut., 531, (2). 
oAoog, decl., 271; diaL, 

121. 
6 /iev, bg juev, 886, 

926. 
bfivv/jLL, 1025, obs. 2, 8. 
o^oirdrpiog, w. gen. or 

dat., 1013, obs. 1. 
b/ioLoc, w. gen. or dat., 

1012, 1013, obs. 
bfiopog, decl., 272. 
6/uov, compar., 1013, 

obs. 1. 
bvap, irreg. n., 246. 
bveiap, irreg. n., 240. 
bveipara, irreg. n., 

244. 
ovt/jlll, w. acc, 1025, 

obs. 1, 4. 
bvo/na, acc. of specif.. 

1025, obs. 6. 
b^vc, accent, 23 ; decl., 

277, 3. 
birr], resp., 366, 697. 
oiiTpanog, resp., 366. 
oTTiad-sv, w. gen., 1060. 
oniou, compar., 326; w. 

gen., 1060. 
oirotiev, 697. 
bnoi av, w. opt., 1081, 

, (3). 

orrolog, resp., 366. 

oTvoaog, 366. 

brrore, 697. 

oTibrepog, 366. 

bnov, 366 ; w. subj. and 

opt., 1081, (2). 
OKog, 366, 824; w. exec, 



1044; w. fir), 1066; 

w, ind. fut., 1083, 

rem. 
opdu, augm., 482 ; in 

perf., 497. 
bpyl^u-o/LLai, 404, note. 
opuG), w. 2 acc, 1035, 

obs. 3. 
opudo, trans., &c, 381. 
bpvid-o&rjpag, 59, exc. 1. 
opvoGo, form., 459; Att. 

red., 498. 
bg, poss. pr., 340. 
bg, rel. pr., 345, 359 ; w. 

1 pers., 932; attr., 

937 ; w. subj. and 

opt, 1081, (2). 
baog, correl. pr., 370, 

941; boov, adv., 697. 
baaog, irreg. n., 236. 
bareov, contr., 142. 
bong, 364, 361; indir. 

inter., 897 ; w. subj. 

and opt, 1081, (2). 
brav, 796; w. (i% 1066, 

1; w.subj., 1081,(1). 
are, w. ind., 1078, (1); 

w. opt, 1081, (1). ' 
or;, 1078,(1); 1081,(1); 

w. super., 882. 
or eg, brov, &c., for bong, 

365, 372, obs. 2. 
ov, or, e, pr., 334; end., 

35; dial., 372; reflex., 

337. 
ov, adv. place, 697. 
ov, ovk, neg., 55 ; synt, 

1064; w. fut. ind., 
) 1088, 5. 
ov6auov, adv., 701. 
ov6dg, 299 ; w. doub. 

neg., 1069; ov6ev n, 

894. 
ov&ap, irreg. n., 240. 
ovk, for 6 en, 49. 
ovkow and ovkovv, 787, 

818. 
ovv, 817. 

obpecj, augm., 481. 
ovg, accent, 148 ; exc. 

3 ; nom. 240. 
ovrd^G), augm., 484. 



446 



GREEK INDEX. 



ovrig, 363, 367. 

ovrog, dem. pr., 354, 5 ; 
contr., 886 ff.; ex- 
clam., 892. 

ovto and ovrog, 55 ; w. 
gen. after exec, 1044. 

bcpehog, irreg., 245. 

o<pig, ace, 166; voc, 
169; dial., 185. 

cxppa, 1084. 

6;ra, part.w. super., 882. 

oxog, irreg. n., 236. 

7T, mute cons., 14 ; 
euphon. chang., 55 ff. 

ncuav, gen., 160. 

iraidiov, dim., 253. 

7ra^, accent, 148, exc. 
3 ; Traiduv, gen. in 
resp. of, 1044, 3. 

ttgllg), pass. ins. a, 533. 

7raXa«fo compar., 330. 

Uavadyvaia, irreg., 244. 

TcavJifiepLOL, adv. f. adj., 

1060, obs. 2. • 
irapd, prep., 761 ff. ; w. 

pass, v., 1036, 1037, 

note; 1076. 
irapavo/iEG), augm., 489. 
Trapavo/iov, gen., w. 

ypdepouat, 1028, obs. 

2. 
trapeyyvg, w. gen. or 

dat., 1061, 1. 
ndpEK, w. gen. or ace, 

1061, 4. 
irapeKTog, w. gen., 1060. 
Trapoivecj, augm., 489. 
nag, accent, 148, exc. 

3.; decl., 280; w. 

bang, &c, 935; w. 

art., 923. 
7ra<rj6j, 463. 
Tzarrjp, 163 ; voc, 170 ; 

dat. pi., 179; par., 

183. 
irarpaAoiag, gen., 117, 

obs. 1. 
ttcivcj, -o/uai, pass, ins., a 

534, w. gen., 1006, 

10; w. ace, 1039, 

obs. 4. 



tte'c&q, -ofiai, 404, note ; 

synop., 544, (3) ; 

perf. pass., 596; w. 

ace, 1025, obs. 1, 1; 

2 perf., 542. 
iretd-G), ace sing., 166, 

exc. ; voc, 173, 

174. 
iruvdu, irreg. contr., 

559, obs. 2. 
■Tcelpag, w. periphr. gen., 

985, obs. 6. 
ttejuttg), perf. pass., 540, 

note 2. 
ninuv, compar., 316, 

exc. 

TTfp, 819. 

nkpav, compar., 326 ; 

w. gen., 1060. 
Trepao), fut., 531, (1). 
7T£p/, prep., 765 ff., 

1076; ol iTEpi, 919, 

20. 
7T£pif3d?2o), w. gen., 

1008, 6. 
Trepiyiyvojuat, w. gen., 

1008, 6. 
Trepieifii, w. gen., 1008, 

5. 
7T£/o^, w. gen. or ace, 

1061, 4. 
7repi7rl7T7r y augm., 500. 
iTEpippoog, 60. 
TTEpcooog, w. gen., 998 ; 

obs. 4, 1. 
Trf^acr/za^infl.^SS, rem. 
TTEfvy/LLEvog, as adj., 

992. 
n^Ae/J^, patron., 250. 
rtrfkinog, inter, pr., 366; 

indei., 369, obs. 1. 
TTTjvina, 697, obs. 1. 
7ryxvg, gen., 162; ace 

pi. of dist., 1051; eov, 

gen. of magn., 1050. 
TzifiTrTcrjfi^ length, pres., 

682. 
ttlvco, w. gen., 1003 ; w. 

ace, 1003, rem. 
irlcov, compar., 316. 
TUGTEVG), constr., 1038, 

obs. 2, 1 ff. 



izAavdo, w. gen., 1006, 

9. 
-nldaiog, propor., 310. 
jrMrog, specif, ace, 

984. 
irlElog, w. gen., 973. 
ttXeko), sjnops., 544, 

(2). 

TrTiEovEKTTjg, . compar., 

329. 
ttaecj, fut., 531, (6); 

535, rem., pass. ins. 

c, 533 ; inflect., 556, 

obs. 1. 
TrArjtiog, ace of specif., 

1025, obs. 6. 
nlr]K,Tiig, compar., 323. 
izlfjv, w. gen., 1060; 

do., exc. 2. 
nArjaiov, w. gen., 1060; 

w. gen. or dat., 1061, 

izAobcLog, w. gen. or 
dat., 1013, obs. 1. 

ttavvo, perf., &c, 553, 

ttvel), fut., &e, 531, 6; 
pass, tens., 534; fut., 
535, rem. ; used 
trans., 1025, obs. 8,2. 

Trodarrog, 340, obs. 

TTO^EG), fut., &e, 531, 
(5); part., 1017, obs. 4. 

TTOIECD, 7T£7rpaKTaL y W. 

dat., 1037; partie, 

434; w. 2 ace, 1033. 
tcoltjteov, constr., 1015. 
TroiTuyg, 255; gen. pi., 

120, obs. 
TTolog, interr. pr., 366; 

indef., 369 ; ttoIov, 

697, obs. 1. 
7ro?»£{i7/(j£iG) : desider., 

673. 
7roAig, gen., 162 ; par., 

184, 219; w. mase 

art., 233 ; gen. pi. 

of attr., 938. 
'Kokirrjg, 1 decl., 120, 2. 
TioTiLTLiiov (to), as. coll., 

861. 
noAvg, decl., 294, exc. 

2 ; compar., 321. 



GREEK IXDEX. 



447 



TTo/.i, tto/./.u, tv. superl.. 

882 ; iroAv n, 894; 

W. art.. 923 ; rro/./.ov 

Seiv, 1096, obs. 1. 
TToviu, quant, of tens., 

531, (5). 
HooEiduv, apoc, 52, 6; 

voc, 170. 
TcoTToi, exclam., 245. 
iroppu, compar., 326. 
77opnc, contr. n. par., 

220. 
77op6vpea, contr., 128. 
rro^ inter., 366. 
77 oglc, 220, note. 
77ogoc, inter., 369; ogov, 

adv., 697. 
770-s, inter., 697; t7ote, 

indef., 35. 
770T£poc, inter., 366. 
rroTTjg, compar., 323. 
77ov, inter.. 366, 821; 

ttol; indef., 820 : tv. 

gen., 1059. 
770VC, 153, rem.; comps., 

289; dat. pi., 178 : 

voc. 170; par., 183; 

limit, ace. 1044, II. 
77 padGcj, form.. 579; 

perf., 539 (4); ire- 

?rptt)Y«M,w.dat,103 l L 
77pG)Tov, adv., 700. 
77p£77e.i, impers.. 668 ; 

constr., 1023, exc. II. 
Trplv, w. ind., 1078, (1); 

w. inf., 1096. 
77pio), ins. c, in pass., 

533. 
77 po, prep., 730; corn- 
par., 827. 
77 poc, prep., 769 ff. ; w. 

pers., 1036, 7, nore: 

1076; adv., 1076, 

obs. 3. 
77 pocriKEi, constr., 1023. 
77p6od£i>, w. gen., 1060. 
TTpooKWEu, tv. ace, 1025, 

obs. 2, 1. 
TTpoipyov, 47. 
77 put, compar., 327. 
77porEiG), tv. gen., 1008, 

5. 

19* 



77p(L>7oc, superl., 327 ; tv. 
gen., 997, 4: irpcmpr^ 
1044, II., n. 2 ; Trp&- 
rov pkv, 864 ; rd 
77 pebra, 875. 

Trra/w, fr. in perf. pass., 
533; w. gen., 1006, 

JLJ_. 

77TVU, quant.. 531, (4). 
77v&£G&ai, 59, exc. 3. 
-w&avo/Liai, tv. gen. and 

ace., 1029. 
Trvp, irreg. n., 243. 
77GJ/.GJ, 118, obs. 2. 
77cjc, inter., 366: w. gen. 

after e^ei, 1044. tv. 

civ, 1082, (3). 

p, liqu. cons.. 17 ; ini- 
tial, 43, 2, 60; rejects 
red., 494. 

padioc, par., 270: corn- 
par., 320; tv. inf.. 
1090, obs. 5. 

pEco, fut., &c, 531, (6); 
trans., 1025, obs. 8, 2. 

pyrov, w. dat. 

plyoc, compar., 322. 

pi77~a^u, frequent., 674. 

PL77TEU, 465. 

pl77TLd, 465 : rej. red., 
494. 

c, cons., 17; euphon. 
changes, 72 ff.; in- 
sert, in perf. pass., 
532 ff. ; dropt, 535. 

uaXwi&ii tv omit subj., 
955, obs. 2. 

oap.771, 308. 

la-ow. 59. obs. 6. 

cavrov. contr., 350 

ce and 6e, to a place, 
1048, obs. 3. 

ch/E eIvcu, 1096, obs. 
3, 1. 

-crf.cj, desider. end., 673. 

OEiio, ins. c" in perf. 
pass., 533. 

(JE/.ar, 159, 161. 

gevo, perf. pass., 532, 
exc. 



cecjvtov, 352. 
c7-qw, quant., 531, (1). 
oyg, accent, 148, exc. 3. 
GLVdni, gen., 162. 
clroc, irreg. n., 230. 
ckotoc, irreg. n., 236. 
OKup, irreg. n., 240. 
Gfiaw, contr., 559, obs. 

2. 
cuiKpog, 52, 1. 
col, eth. dat., 1010, rem. 
goc,, 340 ; object., 903. 
goooc, compar., 314; tv. 

inf., 1095. obs. 6. 
GoduTEpoc, after ?/, 879. 
I.77ap77?, irreg. n., 252. 
G77CIU, quant., 531, (1). 
G77£tpu, form, tens., 551. 
GTzovdaioc, compar., 330. 
G77ovdf), adv., 1040. 
GTadiov, irreg. n., 232. 
ora&fide, irreg., 230 ; 

ace. of dist., 1040. 
G7kap, irreg., 240. 
GTE/./.u-ouai, 404, obs. 

5; 469; rej. red'., 494; 

tens., 551 ff. 
gtevclZu, frequent., 674. 
GTEodvr/, irreg., 235. 
Grr/.ua, as num., 308. 
Grparr/yko), w. gem, 

1008, 3. 
Gir/x^pEto,^. gen., 1006, 

8. 
GvpSd/./.opai, 404, obs. 

4. 
GvuoEpEL, impers., 667. 
gvv, Siv, prep., 733. 
GWEyyic, tv. gen. or 

dat., 1061, 1. 
owfy&jjCj TV. gen. or dat., 

1013,' obs. 1. 
Gvvoida, tv. dat., 1104, 3. 
Gcpd/./.o), tv. gen, 972; 

' 1006, 11. 
gqe, acc, 372, obs. 1. 

GOETEpOC, 340. 

gooc, 340; do., obs. 2. 

GQUiTEpOC, 340. 

cr^dcj, quant., 531, (1). 
c-^eddi', -o&Ev, w. gen. or 
dat., 1061, 1. 



448 



GREEK INDEX. 



IcoKparw, irreg., 237. 
ciorrjp, voc, 147, exc. 

1; 170. 
Gu&pov, par., 290. 

r, mute cons., 14, 18; 

euphon. chang., 57 

ff.; final, 155 ff., 159. 
rd?Mg, 154, exc; 277. 
rdTCka, eras., 33. 
rdv, a) rdv, irreg., 245. 
rdpixog, irreg., 236. 
rdprapog, irreg., 229. 
t&gog), 459, 528. 
rdx£i, adv., 701 ; rdxog, 

1044, II., note 2. 
raxvg, compar., 319, 

320, note. 

T£$V£G)g for TE^VT/KUg, 

588. 
TE^dcparai, 59, obs. 2. 
telvcd, 461, 546 ff. ; perf., 

549, (1); 553. 
rdxog, stem, 159, 161. 
teaeo, quant, fut., 531, 

2; Att. fut., 577; ins. 

g in pass., 532. 
teaao, 546. - 
-T£oc, verb. adj. end., 

435, obs. 2 ; constr., 

1037, note. 
r£og, decl. for cog, 372, 

obs. 2. 
rkprjv, compar., 1 64, 

316. 
rtpag, par., 182. 
TETpdnovq, 310, obs. 
riracpa, 59, obs. 2. 
TETviparai, 600, obs. 3. 
TErvificyg, form., 156 ; 

par., 284. 
teuv, dial, for riven;, 372, 

obs. 2. 
ryde, 697, obs. 1. 
riqkiKog, correl., 370. 
ttjalkogSe, emphat. dem. , 

371. 
ttjAlkovtoc, 355, 371. 
riyptg, 220, note; irreg., 

239. 
tUtd, irreg. red., 464; 

perf., 542. 



rifiao, 536, (2), 569. 
Tifiystg, contr., 226. 
rivo, strength, pres., 

677. 
rig, interr., 363 ; ri 

iroccbv, -7jGag, 1100,4; 

W, w. ind. in quest., 

1078, (b). 
77f, indef., 367-8; encl., 

35 ; w. imper., 1085. 
rl, qual., 894. 
rirpao), irreg., red., 464; 

fut., 530, rem. 2. 
rio), perf. pass., 539. 
Tidypi, 464, 607 ff . ; 

par., 630 ff. ; imper., 

635, 641-2; 1 aor., 

645. 
T/ido, inf., 587. 
to, re, 50. 
to, w. inf., 1087, obs. 

2. 
Tolov, adv., 697, obs. 1. 
TocouTog, dem., 355, 

obs. 371. 
rocyapovv, couj., 787. 
Toioq, 370; constr., 941; 

tol6g6e, 371. 
TOGog, 370; constr., 

941; togov, adv., 697. 
TOGovTog 1 355, 371. 
tov, rio, &c, for rivog, 

372, obs. 2. 
tovti, 356. 

Tpav iiar lag, 294, obs. 2. 
Tp&x?jM)g, irreg., 229. 
rpeZf, par., 301. 
rpETTD, 537-8, 543, 166, 

rem. ; par., 212. 
rp€(pu), 59, 4 ; perf., 

513 ; perf. pass., do. 
Tpex^), fut., 59, obs. 4. 
rpfw, quant, in fut., 

531, (2). 
rpipu, 118, obs. 2. 
Tpii]p7]g, 156, 161. 
Tplrrovg, 310, obs. 
TpcTciioc, 304, obs. 2, 

865/ 
Tpoirig, 220, note. 
TpGJf, accent, 148, exc. 

3. 



rvy^dvw, form, tens., 
467 ; w. gen. or ace, 
1004, exc: ; w. part., 
1107. 

tvittg), 543; perf. pass., 
594, 598. 

rvipag, 153 ; par., 280. 

rv(j)'&7tTi 1 59, obs. 5. 

tC), rea), dial, for rm, 
372, obs. 2. 

% vow., 3, 4 ; init., 43, 

2 ; end. 3 decl., 144, 

162 ; neut., 192 ; 

init. augm., 480, 484. 
ippi^G), w. acc, 1025, 

obs, 1. 
v/3piGT?/g, 294, obs. 2; 

compar., 329. 
vd(jp, par., 182; irreg. 

nom., 240. 
vel, om. subj., 956, obs. 

2. 
v/uEdairog, 340, obs. 
vjUETEpog, 340 ; to v/i, 

for i^eZf, 904. 
vfidg, dial, for ly^r., 372, 

obs. 2. 
-ww, end., 553. 
virdyu), w. gen., 1006, 8. 
virap, irreg. u., 245. 
vnapx^w. gen., 1008,7. 
i'TTEp, prep.. 749 ff. ; 

compar., 327. 
v7r£pj3aivL), w. gen., 

1008, 6. 
vTTEV'&vvog, w. gen. or 

dat., 1013, obs. 1. 
virodiKog, w. gen. or 

dat., 1013, obs. 1. 
vtto?.7]tcteov, constr., 

1015. f 
vTroTrAavdojuat, w. gen., 

1006, 9. 
vrcoxupEu, w. gen., 

1006, 8. 
VG/Ltivy, irreg., 237. 
vGTEpog, 998, obs. 4, 1. 
v(patvo), augm., 480. 
vipi, compar., 326. 
v^pog, acc. of specif., 

1025, obs. 6. 



GKEEK INDEX. 



449 



(pcuvo, liqu.v. form., 40 1, 

546, 547 ff. ; perf., 

549, (I), examp.,553; 

raid., 381; w. parti- 

cip., 1 105, obs. 3. 
oavepor. par., 270. 
os'So/ica, w. gen., 969. 
oc'pw, partic, 1110. 
ijtev, adv., 697, obs. 2. 
<j)evyo, perf. and aor., 

542 ; w. gen. or ace, 

1028, obs. 1. 
(pVp-K accent, 444; par., 

660. 
tydavc), w. ace, 1025, 

obs. 2, 5; w. parti- 

cip., 1107, 431. 
(pdeipG), form., 461, 552. 
(p&oveo, 977. 
0*, end., 187. 
(pL/xu, contr. v. tens., 

506; par., 569 ; w. 

kind, ace, 1035, obs. 

3. 
(jyi/^reog, 435. 
oi/aa, par., 116, 2; 

dial., 124. 
0&oc, compar., 330 ; 
^'/lac, w. neut. pi., 

811. 
(pi/Mvc, acc. for gen., 

997, obs. 3. 
tyi?-aTov, neut. adj. as 

pred., 862. 
o/c'i/;, par., 180. 
0O/36W, tenses, 530. 
<j>6 t 3o(;, w. circuml. gen., 

985, obs. 6; dat. of 

cause, 1046. 
(fjoivitisog, decl. 271, exc. 
ipopiti] quant, 531, (5). 
(popuvg, form., 154, 

exc. 
<bpa£,u, form., 460, 679; 

imper., 422. 



opeap, irreg., 240. 
opovTiCo, w. gen., 1001. 

,}> 

ovAa^j voc, 172. 

pupao, fut., &e, 530, 

rem. 1. 
(pup, compar., 323. 
<pck, accent, 148, exc. 3. 
cptig, accent, 148, exc. 3. 

X, mute cons., 18; 

eupb. chang., 55 ff. 
Xa'ipu, form, tens., 467 ; 

inf. for imper., 1096, 

obs. 2. 
Xa/Ao^ snort fut., 531, 

(i). 

XaAe-ndv, pred., 862. 
Xapletg, 164; voe, 175; 

par., 275; compar., 

316, exc. 
Xapig, ace, 168; x&P™, 

as prep., 1059, obs. 1. 
Xapov, irreg., 239. 
XSLfJi&v, par., 183. 
Xeip, 233; dat, 1011, 

obs. 3. 
Xsipojv, x e P £ ^ CJV j com- 
' par., 328. 
X£co, fut., 531, (6), 535, 

rem. ; perf. pass., 

532, exc. 
Xoei'C, contr. par., 218. 
Xpaouat, fut, 530, rem. 

2; aor. pass., 534; 

mode of contr., 556, 

obs. 2. 

Xpz'ta, XP £f \ w - acc - an d 

gen., 1023, exc. obs. 2. 
XPV, impers., 672 ; 

constr., 956, obs. 3 ; 

w. acc. and gen., 

1023, exc. I. 
XPVGTov, gen. of attr., 

1094, obs. 1, 4. 



Xpovc, irreg., 239. 
Xpvcea, 121, 127. 
Xpvoeoc, decl. 271, exe 
XP&C, irreg., 239. 
Xupku, red, 493. 
XtJpi^co, w. gen., 1006, 

X^pk, w. gen., 1060. 

ip, doub. cons., 18 ; re- 
solved, 20. 

ipai'G), perf. pass. ins. c, 
533. 

ipau, 533, (&). 

ipevdr/g, compar., 330. 

ijjevdo/xaij reg. red., 
494. 

«, vow., 3, 5 ; 3 decl. 
end., 214; Att. gen., 
162; end. of reg. 
verbs, 448 ; augm., 
480,483; subj.mood, 
vow., 509. 

ud-eu, augm., 481. 

cjveo/iai, augm., 481. 

cjvtjti&g), desider., 673. 

uvioq, w. gen. or dat, 
1013, obs. 1. 

-wf, Attend., 138, 162; 
3 decl. nom., 156; -&%, 
perf. act. partic, 
513. 

ug, adv., 825; Lq euo', 
w. inf., 1090, obs. 4; 
w. dat, 1023, obs. 3, 
1, 2; w. particip., 
1111, 1112, obs. 5. 

cjg rr irpog, 737. 

hare, after compar., 
998, obs. 10: w. py, 
1066; w. inf., 1090, 
obs. 3. 

cxpeAov, 825, 6; 1084, 
rem. 



* 



SHELDON & COMPANY'S 

tJoqI an& Collegiate Cret-§Goka. 



•+ ♦ »■ 



#£ would call the Especial attention of Teachers, 
and of all who are interested in the subject of 
Education, to the following valuable list of School 
CBooks : 

BULLIONS' SERIES OF GRAMMARS, Etc. 

A Common School Grammar. 

Being an Introduction to the Analytical and Practical 
English Grammar, $0 50 

This work for beginners has the same Rules, Defini- 
tions, etc., as the 

Analytical and Practical English Grammar* 

A complete work for Academies and higher classes in 
Schools, containing a complete and concise system of 
Analysis, etc., 1 Op 

Progressive Exercises in Analysis and Parsing. 

Adapted to both Grammars, 25 

Latin Lessons 9 with Exercises in Parsing. . . 1 00 

Prepared by George Spencer, A.M., as Introd. to 
Bullions' 

Principles of Latin Grammar. New Edition. $1 50. 

Bullions & Morris's Latin Lessons. 

For beginners, with simple lessons to be learned each 
day, and Vocabulary, etc., . . . ,. 1 00 

Bullions dfr Morris's New Latin Grammar. . • 1 50 



2 SHELDON & COMPACTS COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. 



•a^^F 



Latin Header. 

With Introduction on Latin Idioms, and Improved 
Vocabulary, etc, $1 50 

Exercises in Latin Composition. 

Adapted to the Latin Grammar, I 50 

Key to Do. 

Separate, for Teachers only, • . 60 

Ccesar's Commentaries. 

With Notes, Vocabulary, and Lexicon, 1 50 

Salltist. 

With Notes and References, 1 50 

Cicero 9 s Orations. 

With Notes and References to Andrews' and Stoddard's, 
as well as to Bullions' Grammar, , . .....'.. 1 50 

Latin-English Dictionary. 

With Synonyms. 1014 pages, 4 50 

First Lessons in Greek. 

Introduction to the Grammar, . . 1 0(J 

Principles of Crreek Grammar. New Edition, , . 1 75 

Bullions and Kendrick's New Greek Grammar^ 2 00 

Crreek Header. 

With Introduction on Greek Idioms, Impr. Lex., etc., . . 2 25 

Cooper's Virgil. 

With valuable English Notes, . 2 50 

Jjong's Classical Atlas. 

Containing Fifty-two Colored Maps and Plans, and 
forming the most complete Atlas of the Ancient World 
ever published. 1 vol., 4to, 4 50 

JZaird's Classical Manual. 1 vol., 16mo, 90 

KaltschmidV s English-Latin and Latin-English 

Dictionary. For Schools. 900 pages, 16mo, . . . 2 50 



SHELDON & COMPANY'S COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. 



"Bullions' Analytical and English Grammar Las been in constant use for several 
years in this and the other Public Schools of the city. It stands the test of usa 
The more one sees of it the better it is liked. I consider it a successful vork ; and 
I know that this opinion is shared by other masters in and out of the public service." 
-~James A. Page, Matter of Dicight School. 

M We heartily concur in the above." — S. W. Mason, Master of Eliot School. 

D. C. Brown, Master of Bowdoin School. 
Joshua Bates, Master of Brimmer School. 

"We have used Bullions' Analytical English Grammars in our Public Schools 
nearly two^ars with success. We find them an improvement on those previously 
in use. Bullions' small Grammar is a fit introduction to the large one."-* J. D. E. 
Jones, Supt. of Schools, Worcester, Mass. 

"I have used Bullions 1 Analytical English Grammar some two and a half years, 
and am ready to give it my approval. I have not failed to pronounce it the bes> 
text-book on Grammar whenever I have had opportunity to do so. I now have a 
class of ninety in it, and it bears the drill of the school-room." — Rev. J. W. Gard- 
ner, Principal of New London (JV. R.) Institute. 



BEOCKLESBY'S ASTKONOMIES. 

Urocklesby's Common School Astronomy. 

12mo. m pages, fO^G 

This book is a compend of 

JBrocklesby's Elements of Astronomy. 

By John Brocklesby, Trinity College, Hartford, Conn. 
12mo. Fully illustrated. 321 pages, 1 75 

In this admirable treatise the author has aimed to preserve the 
great principles and facts of the science in their integrity, and so to 
arrange, explain, and illustrate them that they may be clear and 
intelligible to the student. 

"We take great pleasure in calling the attention of teachers and students to this 
truly excellent book. Both the plan and execution of the whole are equally admir- 
able. It is not a milk-and-water compilation, without principles and without 
demonstration. It contains the elements of the science in their proper integrity and 
proportions. Its author is a learned man and a practical instructor, as the author 
of every school-book should be. The style is a model for a text-book, combining in 
thigh degree, perspicuity, precision, and vivacity. In a word, it is the very best 
•lementary work on Astronomy with which we are acquainted." — Connecticut 
Common School Journal. 

"This is a compact treatise of 820 pages, containing the elements and most of the 
Important facts of the science clearly presented and systematically arranged. It is 
very finely illustrated. It is worthy of a careful examination by all who with te 
secure the best text-books." — Ohio Journal of Education. 



SHELDON & COMPANY'S COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. 



KEETEL'S FRENCH METHOD. 

A New Method of Learning the French Language* 

By Jean Gust a ye Keetels, Professor of French and 
German in the Brooklyn Polytechnic Institute. 12mo., . $1 75 

A Key to the New Method in French. 

By J. G. Keetels. 1 vol. 12mo, 60 

u I have examined Keetels 1 New Method of Learning the French Language, and 
find it admirably adapted for conveying a thorough knowledge of th^french lan- 
guage. It is an easy and sure method of both writing and speaking i^rench with 
accuracy and elegance."— Daniel Lynch, 3. J , Director of Studies in Goncaga 
College, Washington. 

"The ' New Method of Learning the French Language,* by Professor Keetels, 
appears to be exceedingly well adapted as an introduction into the study of French. 
It is emphatically a practical book, and bears the mark that it has resulted from the 
author's own experience in teaching. I shall take pleasure in soon giving it the test 
of a trial in my own Institute." — Oswald Seidensticker, Principal of the Commer- 
cial and Classical Institute, Philadelphia. 

" I have examined several books designed for pupils studying the French language, 
and among them Keetels' 'New Method of the French.' The last work I consider 
superior to any other which I have examined, and shall use it in my classes as the 
best text-book upon the subject." — S. A. Farsand, Trenton, N. J. 

PEISSNEE'S GERMAN GRAMMAR. 

A Comparative Fnglish- German Grammar. 

Based on the affinity of the two languages. By Prof. 

Elias Peissneh, late of the University of Munich, and 

of Union College, Schenectady. New edition. 316 pp., . $1 75 

** Pro! Peissner's German G-rammar has been, from its first publication, and is 
now, used as a text-book in this College, and has by the teachers here, as in many 
other Institutions, been esteemed a superior work for the end to be subserved by it, 
in attaining a knowledge of the elements of the German language. I cordially rec- 
ommend it to the attention and use of such American Academies and Colleges as are 
designed to give instruction in the German language."— L. P. Hickok, President 
Union College, iv~. F. 

COMSTOCK'S SERIES. 

System of Natural Fhilosophy. 

Re-written and enlarged, including latest discoveries. 
Fully illustrated, %\ 75 

Elements of Chemistry. 

Re-written 1861, and adapted to the present state of the 
Science, 1 75 



SHELDON & COiIPA^n r, 3 COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS 5 



OLNEY'S GEOGEAPHT. 

Olney-s Geography and Atlas. 

Revised and improved, by the addition on the Maps of 
the latest information and discoveries. New Plates and 
Woodcuts. Atlas, 28 Maps. Geography, 18mo, 304 pages, §2 40 

These favorite text-books, of which more than a million have been.- 
sold, are kept up to the times by the publishers, who add the latest' 
geographical information on the large and beautiful Maps and in the 
Text-Books, so as to make them worthy of the claim that they are 
the best works for the study of Geography now published 

PALMEE'S BOOK-KEEPING. 

Palmer's Practical Boofc-JLeeping. 

By Joseph H. Palmek, A.M., Instructor in New York 
Free Academy, 12mo. 167 pages, ........ $1 00 

JBlanTcs to Do* (2 numbers, Journal and Ledger), each , 6 50 

Key to Bo. . , 10 

This work is adopted by the Boards of Education of the cities of 
New York and Brooklyn, where it is generally used in schools and 
recommended by teachers. It is also recommended by accountants 
of prominent commercial firms, and the Press. 

Wliately's Elements of Logic. 

By Richard Whately, D.D., Archbishop of Dublin. 

New revised edition, with the Author's last Additions. 

Large 12mo. 484 pages, . $1 75 

" This work (Elements of Logic) has long been our text-book here. The style in 
which you have published this new edition of so valuable a work, leaves nothing to 
be desired in regard of elegance and convenience. 1 ' — Prof. Dttxn, BraicnUniversity* 

" Its merits are now too widely known to require an enumeration of them. The 
present American edition of it is conformed to the ninth English edition, which was 
revised by the author, and which contains several improvements on the formel 
issues.'"— North American fievieio, 

Wliately's Elements of Rhetoric. 

Comprising an Analysis of the Laws of Moral Evidence 
and of Persuasion, with Rules for Argumentative Com- 
position and Elocution. New edition, revised by the 
Author. Large 12mo. 546 pages, , . , $1 73 






JUN 



G SHELDON cfe COMPANY'S COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. 

"The Elements of Rhetoric has become so much a standard work that it might 
geem superfluous to speak of it. In short, we should not dream of teaching a Col- 
lege class from any other book on Rhetoric. Communion with Whately's mind 
would improve any mind on earth." — Presbyterian Quarterly Review. 

The above are tlie editions formerly published by James Munroe 
& Co., Boston, and the best in the market. They are used in ah the 
principal Colleges and Academies in the United States. 

Fitch's Mapping Plates. (In one volume, quarto.) 

Designed for Learners in Geography ; being a collection 
of Plates prepared for Delineating Maps of the World, 
and Counties forming its principal subdivisions, viz., 1. 
The World. 2. United States. 3. North America. 4 
South America. 5. A State. 6. Mexico and Guatemala. 
7. Great Britain and Ireland. 8. Europe. 9. Southern 
Europe. 10. Germany. 11. Africa. 12. Asia. 13. At- 
lantic Ocean. 14. Pacific Ocean. By Geo. W. Fitch, . $0 CO 

NORMAL MATHEMATICAL SERIES. 

Stoddard's Juvenile Mental Arithmetic. 

By John F. Stoddard, A.M. For Primary Schools. 72 pp., $0 25 

Stoddard's American Intellectual Arithmetic. 

By the same. An extended work, designed for Common 
Schools, Seminaries, and Academies. 172 pages, , . . 50 

Stoddard's Mudiments of Arithmetic. 

This work presents, in proper order, such parts of 
Arithmetic as are most useful in ordinary business com- 
putations, 192 pages, .... - 50 

Stoddard's New Practical Arithmetic. 

Embracing methods and forms of modern business, with 
Analyses and many varied Examples. 192 pages, ... 1 00 
Key to Stoddard's New Practical Arithmetic. 90 
Methods of Teaching and Key to Intellec. Arith. 50 

Schuyler's Higher Arithmetic. 

A new and original work for Colleges, Seminaries, 
Academies, and High Schools. By A. Schuyler, of Ohio, 1 25 
Stoddard & Henkle's Elementary Algebra. 

For the use of Common Schools and Academies. By 
John F. Stoddard, A.M., and Prof. W. B. Henkle, of 
Ohio South-western Normal School, ..*..•<»» 

"n 1 1 3 t. 

• I M Lb 

\j j Jvl 




Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



I 






■ 




■ 
1 1 - rclfis 









V 




■ 

■ ■ 

■ 



■ I 




■ ■ 

■ ' 



